Spec 2

SECTION 23 0529
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following hangers and supports for HVAC system:
1. Steel pipe hangers and supports.
2. Trapeze pipe hangers.
3. Metal framing systems.
4. Thermal-hanger shield inserts.
5. Fastener systems.
6. Pipe stands.
7. Equipment supports.
B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural-steel shapes and plates
for trapeze hangers for pipe and equipment supports.
2. Division 23 Section " Expansion Fittings and Loops for HVAC Piping" for pipe
guides and anchors.
3. Division 23 Section " Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and
Equipment" for vibration isolation devices.
4. Division 23 Section(s) Metal Duct for duct hangers and supports.
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society for The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.
B. Terminology: As defined in MSS SP-90, "Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe Hangers

and Supports."
1.03 REFERENCES
A. MSS-SP-69-Manufacturer’s Standardization Society Standard on Supports and

hangers
B. ASHRAE Handbook- HVAC Systems and Equipment
C. The ASHRAE Practical Guide to Seismic Restraint
D. SMACNA Seismic Restraint Manual
E. NFPA 13
KEO/21-7387-0004 23 0529 / 1 Hangers and Supports for Piping and Equipment

Reem Hills Development
Twin Villas & Townhouses, Abu Dhabi
1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. DELEGATED DESIGN RESPONSIBILITY: Notwithstanding the drawings and other

information provided to the Contractor, the Contractor shall be fully responsible for the
design, calculation, detailing of the works described herein, including (without
limitation) the comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional
engineer, and shall provide a complete, and secure installation, which shall meet the
specified performance and design requirements indicated and which shall be fit for
their intended purpose. The Contractor indemnifies the Employer and Design
Consultant from any and all claims, costs and expenses arising from any loss or
damage in connection with any error in or failure of the Contractor’s designed portion
of the Works.
B. Design supports for multiple pipes, including pipe stands, capable of supporting
combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.
C. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of

supported equipment and connected systems and components.
D. Design seismic-restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment and obtain
approval from authorities having jurisdiction.
1.05 SEISMIC RESTRAINT REQUIREMENTS
A. The need for a seismic restraint system shall be determined by establishing the
Seismic Design Category of the project based on the provisions of IBC 2009. This
shall be done by considering the Occupancy Category and Site Class of the project
along with the Component Importance Factor of individual elements of the HVAC
piping systems.
B. Provide a seismic bracing system to restrain piping from excessive motion when
subjected to horizontal seismic forces, to prevent damage to adjacent equipment and
building structure. Bracing shall permit thermal expansion of pipe and ensure that
vibration isolators are not short-circuited.
C. Design of the seismic bracing system shall be provided by the manufacturer based on
as-built drawings and approved by the Engineer.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. Detailed clause-wise compliance statement.
B. Compliance statement must include response to all the points under Quality
Assurance.
C. Product technical literature for each type of hanger / support and seismic restraint.
D. Shop drawings for multiple piping supports and trapeze hangers. Include design
calculations and indicate size and characteristics of components and fabrication
details.
E. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and operators.

F. Product Data: For the following:
1. Steel pipe hangers and supports.
2. Thermal-hanger shield inserts.
3. Powder-actuated fastener systems.
G. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Show

fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the following:
1. Trapeze pipe hangers. Include Product Data for components.
2. Metal framing systems. Include Product Data for components.
3. Pipe stands. Include Product Data for components.
1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Pipe hangers and supports shall be in accordance with MSS SP58 (Pipe Hangers and
Supports – Materials, Design and Manufacture).
B. All manufactured hangers and supports shall be fully electrogalvanised post

manufacture, according to ASTM B633 SC3.
C. For installations where the hangers and supports are expected to be exposed to harsh
corrosive conditions, such as areas with high relative humidity or high salt content in
the air, these shall be hot dip galvanized, according to ASTM A123.
D. Design and preparation of Shop Drawings and calculations for each multiple pipe
support, trapeze and pipe anchor shall be done by a qualified engineer.
E. Detailed seismic force calculations shall be provided to support the recommended

design of the seismic bracing system.
F. All gasket used as separation between pipe and hangers shall be manufactured from
EPDM only. Third party test certificates shall be furnished to establish the grade of
elastomer.
G. Each hanger and support shall have the manufacturer’s name, part number and
country of manufacture engraved on it.
H. All hangers and supports shall be manufactured at an ISO 9001, ISO 14001 and ISO
18001 certified facility. Manufacturer’s ISO certificates, clearly stating Pipe Supports
within the scope of registration, shall be furnished.
I. Country of Origin certificate shall accompany supplies, indicating the actual place of
manufacture of goods.
J. Pipe hangers and supports for all piping services shall be from the same manufacturer.
K. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural

Welding Code--Steel.", AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel.",
AWS D1.4, "Structural Welding Code--Reinforcing Steel." ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code: Section IX.
L. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."

2. AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code--Aluminum."
3. AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel."
4. AWS D1.4, "Structural Welding Code--Reinforcing Steel."
5. ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX.
M. Except as otherwise indicated, provide factory-fabricated hangers and supports.
N. Specified field fabricated items shall be made from quality structural steel. All holes
required shall be drilled and not gas cut. Give two (2) coats of primer and one coat of
zinc rich paint prior to installation.
O. Cutting, welding or any such operation, which damages the finish, is not permitted on
galvanized or other factory finished surfaces.
P. All duct and pipe supports should be fabricated from hot dipped galvanized angles and
channels. The welding joints and the cut ends should be protected with zinc rich paint
before installed.
1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products to site, store and protect under provisions of Division1 General
requirements..
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
2.02 Subject to compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, products to
be provided shall be from the manufacturer having minimum five (5) years of
experience in the same product and approved by the Engineer.
A. Hangers for all services shall provide means of vertical pipe level adjustment after
installation.
B. Where axial pipe expansion or contraction is indicated on account of thermal changes

in the fluid medium, roller-based hangers and supports or Teflon based slide
assemblies shall be provided for the entire pipe length. Chilled water or hot water pipe
runs of over 20m without changes in direction shall always be supported on roller
based or sliding supports.
C. Heavy-duty steel trapezes to support multiple pipes shall be designed for the
combined weight of pipe, water and adjacent fittings, and field fabricated from ASTM
A36 structural steel channel.
D. Hangers and supports shall be fully electrogalvanised post manufacture as standard,

according to ASTM B633 SC3. For severely corrosive conditions, as determined by
the Engineer, provide hot dip galvanized finish according to ASTM A123.
E. Hangers and supports shall be made from mild steel as standard. For severely
corrosive conditions, as determined by the Engineer, provide stainless steel (304 / 316
as required).
F. Dielectric Protection – Steel pipe hangers and supports shall be furnished with fitted
EPDM gasketing when installed with any type of non-ferrous pipe. EPDM gasket with
Class 1 fire rating classification shall be provided where fire resistant lining is deemed
necessary by the project designer.
G. For insulated piping, rubber support inserts shall be provided at all pipe support
locations to prevent crushing of insulation. Rubber support inserts with Class 0 fire
rating classification shall be provided where fire resistant rubber support inserts are
deemed necessary by the project designer.
H. Hangers shall closely fit the outer diameter of plain or insulated pipe. Oversized
hangers shall not be accepted.
I. Anchors shall be provided as required, in order to localize pipe expansion, resist

internal pressure thrust and prevent undue strain on piping connections. Anchor
design shall not create a thermal or acoustic continuity from the pipe to the building
structure.
J. Hangers and supports shall be selected and installed to ensure thermal pipe
movement is axially guided into expansion devices and build up of pipe stress is
minimised.
K. Riser piping support system design shall ensure pipe is adequately anchored to resist
imposed loads and thrust. Risers shall be guided to prevent buckling, while permitting
axial pipe movement. Support system shall isolate the pipe thermally and acoustically
from building structure. Anchors and guides specially designed for riser piping shall be
installed.
L. Piping shall be braced to resist seismic forces as per the ‘Seismic Restraint
Requirements’ section.
M. Vibration isolators shall be provided at first five pipe hanger and support locations
adjacent to isolated rotating mechanical equipment, to minimise transmission of noise
and vibration to the building structure.
N. The selected manufacturer shall submit specific technical recommendations with

regard to the following key aspects of the overall pipe support system:
1. Riser piping support system.
2. Seismic restraint system.
2.03 STEEL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components. Refer

to Part 3 "Hanger and Support Applications" Article for where to use specific hanger
and support types.
B. Galvanized, Metallic Coatings: Pre-galvanized or hot dipped.
C. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner.
D. Ferrous piping up to 150 mm (6 inch) nom. Dia.: Adjustable galvanized steel clevis
completes with galvanized steel pipe covering shield for insulated piping.

E. Ferrous piping over 150 mm (6 inch) nom. Dia.: Adjustable, cast iron pipe roll with
steel axle, sockets, lock nuts etc. Pipe covering protection saddle shall be used for
insulated piping.
F. Multiple hangers: Steel channels / angles, suspended or attached to framework. Pipe

hanger / supports shall be as specified before (make appropriate selection), for piping
placed above the cross member, the use of U-bolts (Ref.: Elcen no. 68L) or approved
equal is permitted.
2.04 HORIZONTAL HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Provide adjustable clevis hangers (MSS Type 1) for all individually suspended piping
where provision for thermal expansion and contraction is not required.
B. Clevis hangers shall have a solid steel bolt with threaded end as the cross rod. Cross
rod made from threaded rod or fully threaded bolt will not be accepted.
C. For insulated pipe where effective outer diameter does not correspond to a standard
pipe size, intermediate sizes of clevis hangers shall be provided to ensure a close fit.
Oversized hangers will not be accepted.
D. Clevis hangers used with any type of non-ferrous piping shall be additionally fitted with
EPDM gasket lining to prevent direct contact between dissimilar materials.
E. Provide U-Strap clamps (MSS Type 26) or U-Bolts (MSS Type 24), as directed by the
Engineer, for fixing pipe to channel where multiple pipes are supported on a trapeze
and provision for thermal expansion and contraction is not required.
F. U-Strap clamps shall have slotted mounting holes to facilitate alignment with holes
drilled in channel.
G. U-Bolts shall be supplied with two nuts. U-Bolts made from threaded rod shall not be
accepted.
H. For installation with non-ferrous pipe, U-Strap clamps shall be fitted with EPDM gasket
lining and U-Bolts shall be fitted with a full EPDM sleeve. Additionally, a rubber strip
shall be provided between the pipe and channel.
I. Provide roller supports or Teflon based slide assemblies - for all chilled or hot water
piping straight runs over 20m without changes in direction and for any other situation
where pipe requires to be allowed to move axially to prevent build up of stress.
1. The type of support provided shall be one of the following, as directed by the
Engineer : Pipe roller set (MSS Type 41)
2. Roller stand / roller chair (MSS Type 44)
3. Adjustable roller hanger (MSS Type 43)
4. Adjustable roller stand (MSS Type 46)
5. Clamp shoe slide assembly (MSS Type 35)
J. Complete roller supports, including the rolls, shall have a full steel construction.
K. Roller bolts shall be solid steel with threaded end. Use of threaded rod or fully threaded
bolt through the roll will not be accepted.

L. Where pipe mounted on roller supports requires to be laterally restrained, as
determined by the Engineer, provide roller supports fitted with restraining straps to
prevent transverse pipe movement.
M. For trapeze mounted parallel pipes, the roller supports or slide assemblies shall be
mounted on the channel.
N. For non-ferrous pipe where provision is required for thermal expansion and
contraction, clamp shoe slide assemblies with fitted EPDM gasket lining shall be
provided.
O. For individually supported pipe above 80mm running close to the floor, where provision
for thermal expansion and contraction is not required, provide adjustable pipe
stanchion saddles (MSS Type 38) with vertical leveling arrangement and U-Bolt for
securing the pipe. The saddle shall be mounted on a floor stanchion comprising steel
base flange and welded pipe upright column.
P. For pipe 80mm or smaller, running close to the floor, provide a structural steel base
and fix pipe to channel using U-Strap clamps or U-Bolts, as directed by the Engineer.
2.05 FLOOR SUPPORTS
A. Ferrous piping up to 150 mm (6 inch) nom. dia.: Adjustable pipe stanchion saddle
support complete with U-bolt, stand pipe with adjuster and floor flange, use galvanized
steel pipe covering shield for insulated piping.
B. Ferrous piping over 150 mm (6 inch) ND: Cast iron pipe roll with base and stand. RCC
/ structural steel pedestals shall be provided, as appropriate, to locate the base. Pipe
covering protection saddle shall be used for insulated piping.
2.06 VERTICAL PIPING SUPPORTS
A. The overall support system for all riser piping shall be implemented based on
manufacturer recommendations, which shall ensure riser piping is appropriately
anchored, guided and stabilized and expansion devices are permitted to function
properly.
B. Chilled water, hot water and condenser water riser piping above 100mm size shall be
installed with engineered all-directional acoustic pipe riser anchors and acoustic pipe
riser guides.
C. Acoustic anchors shall be capable of resisting all imposed loads and thrust acting at
the anchor location. They shall have a telescoping design incorporating a substantial
fabric reinforced neoprene element, to reduce structural transmission of noise from
piping and prevent formation of a thermal bridge at anchor location.
D. The anchors shall have a minimum seismic rating of 1g in all three axes. These shall
be attached to the pipe (one pair at each anchorage location) by means of an extended
double-bolt riser clamp, specifically designed for installation of acoustic anchors.

E. Acoustic guides shall direct pipe movement axially into installed expansion devices (to
ensure they function properly) and prevent lateral buckling or radial motion of riser
pipe.
F. They shall have a telescoping design incorporating a substantial fabric reinforced

neoprene element, to reduce structural transmission of noise from piping and prevent
formation of a thermal bridge at guide location.
G. The guides shall have a minimum seismic rating of 1g in the horizontal plane.These
shall be attached to the pipe (one pair at each guide location) by means of an extended
double-bolt riser clamp, specifically designed for installation of acoustic guides.
H. Riser clamps (MSS Type 8) shall be provided at each floor to support steel riser pipe
which has not been installed with engineered acoustic riser anchors and guides.
I. For steel riser piping installed with acoustic anchors and guides, riser clamps shall be
provided for stabilization of pipe at all floors where riser guides are not present.
J. For insulated pipe where effective outer diameter does not correspond to a standard
pipe size, intermediate sizes of riser clamps shall be provided to ensure a close fit.
Oversized clamps will not be accepted.
K. Ferrous piping up to 150 mm (6 inch) nom. dia.: Galvanized steel riser clamps or offset
pipe clamp, use solid wood inserts (Ref. by: Elcen no. 216) for insulated piping. As
manufactured by: Elcen no. 39 and or 44 or approved equal.
L. Ferrous piping over 150 mm (6 inch) ND: Gusset plates with integral bearing plates
(minimum thickness equal to that of the pipe) welded to pipe and resting on cross
channels over heavy-duty vibration isolation pads (50 durometer). Cross channels
shall be offset to accommodate the piping insulation and the vapor barrier sealed
around the gusset plate with mastic sealant. `Z' cleats shall be welded on the cross
channels at the ends of the bearing plates to restrict movement.
2.07 RUBBER SUPPORT INSERTS (SHIELDS AND SADDLES)
A. Provide rubber support inserts made from moulded hard rubber at all hanger and
support locations of insulated pipework, to transmit pipe load without crushing the
insulation.
1. The rubber density shall not be less than 1000 kg/m3 and shall not exceed 1200
kg/m3.
2. The thickness of the inserts shall be same as the insulation, and vapour barrier
shall be continuous across the outside of the inserts.
3. Rubber support inserts shall be manufactured with sufficient width, material
control and moulding quality to bear imposed pipe loads.
4. Usage of steel inserts within the rubber will not be permitted under any
circumstance.
5. Rubber support inserts with Class 0 fire rating classification shall be provided
where fire resistant rubber support inserts are deemed necessary by the project
designer.
B. Standard width of the inserts shall be as per the following schedule:

1. Pipe Size Width
2. up to 2” 25mm
3. 2½” to 5” 38mm
4. 6” to 14” 50mm
5. 16” to 18” 75mm
6. 20” and above 100mm
C. At locations where, insulated pipe is installed on rollers, provide insulation protection

shields outside the vapour barrier (MSS Type 40) between the rubber support inserts
and roller.
1. The shields shall have flared ends to prevent cutting into the insulation and shall
cover the lower 1800 of the pipes.
2. The length of the shields shall be as per manufacturer’s standard lengths,
unless directed otherwise by the Engineer.
D. Pipe covering protection saddles (MSS Type 39) may be installed at support locations
of ferrous hot water piping, instead of rubber support inserts.
E. If pipe covering protection saddles are installed with insulated non-ferrous or chilled
water pipe, the surfaces in contact with the pipe shall be fitted with high compressive
strength fabric reinforced neoprene sleeves - to avoid forming a thermal bridge (in
case of steel chilled water pipe) and contact between dissimilar metals (in case of non-
ferrous pipe).
2.08 SEISMIC BRACING
A. The selection, positioning and installation of seismic bracing shall be based on the
recommendations of the manufacturer, as approved by the Engineer.
B. Seismic restraint shall be provided by cable sway bracing kits, each comprising a pair
of complete assemblies with multi-strand stainless steel cable, fixing brackets,
stainless steel thimbles and wire clips.
2.09 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Powder-Actuated Drive-Pin Fasteners: Powder-actuated-type, drive-pin attachments

with pull-out and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building
materials where used.
B. Mechanical-Anchor Fasteners: Insert-type attachments with pull-out and shear

capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.
C. Structural Steel: steel plates, shapes, and bars, black and galvanized.
D. Grout: factory-mixed and -packaged, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry, hydraulic-

cement grout.
1. Characteristics: Post hardening and volume adjusting; recommended for both
interior and exterior applications.
2. Properties: Non-staining, non-corrosive, and nongaseous.
3. Design Mix: 34.5-MPa, 28-day compressive strength.
2.010 PIPE ANCHORS

A. Horizontal ferrous piping (non-insulated): Galvanized steel anchor chair and U-bolt
attached to structural steel framework.
B. Horizontal ferrous piping (insulated): Steel plate (minimum thickness as that of the
pipe and length equal to the diameter) welded to pipe, projecting beyond the insulation;
attached to structural steel framing by bolting or welding. Seal the vapor barrier around
the plate with mastic sealants.
C. Vertical ferrous piping (non-insulated): Steel hold down anchor clamp and base plate
attached to RCC / structural steel supports. Back weld clamp to pipe after installation.
D. Vertical ferrous piping (insulated): Same as the support of vertical insulated ferrous
piping over 150 mm (6 inches) nom. dia.; excluding the vibration isolation pad. Bolt
down / weld the bearing plate to the cross channel.
2.011 HANGERS ROD ATTACHMENTS
A. Turnbuckles: Provide for adjusting the heights, where required.
B. Ball hangers: Provide for allowing angular movement of the hanger rod, where
required.
C. Threaded rod couplers: Provide for joining two lengths of threaded hanger rods, where
required. Install back nuts on both sides of the coupler.
2.012 BUILDING ATTACHMENTS
A. Concrete inserts: Provide malleable iron or galvanized steel concrete inserts complete
with adjustable insert nut, suitable for hanger rods of size 22 mm (7/8 inch) diameter
and under. Provide galvanized steel continuous concrete insert at Contractor's option.
B. Self-drilling type concrete inserts: Provide galvanized steel self drilling expansion type
concrete inserts for hanger rods up to 12 mm (1/2 inch) dia., at Contractor's option.
C. Support rails (cast-in type): Electro zinced steel sections with anchor lugs and filler
strip complete with hammer head nut or extension pieces.
D. Support rails (surface mounted type): Electro zinced steel sections with anchor lugs
and filler strip complete with hammer head nut or extension pieces. The rail shall be
single or double as appropriate.
2.013 HANGER RODS
A. Galvanized steel hanger rods: continuous threaded.
2.014 FLASHING
A. Metal flashing: 0.5-mm (26 gauge) thick galvanized steel.
B. Lead flashing: 24.5 kg/sq.M (5 lb/sq.ft.) sheet lead for waterproofing; 5 kg/sq.M (1
lb/sq.ft.) sheet lead for soundproofing.

C. Flexible flashing: 1.25-mm (47 mil) thick sheet compatible with roof and wall
waterproofing.
D. Caps: Galvanized steel, 0.8 mm (22 gauge) minimum; 1.5 mm (16 gauge) at fire
resistant elements.
2.015 SLEEVES
A. Sleeves for pipes through fire rated and fire resistive floors and walls: Schedule 40
galvanized steel pipe sleeve; pack with 96 kg/cu.M (6 lbs/cu.ft.) density fiberglass and
caulk both ends with approved fire rated sealant. (UL listed)
B. Sleeves for pipes passing through non-fire rated beams, walls, footings and dry floors:
Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe sleeve; pack with 96 kg/cu.M (6 lbs/cu.ft.) density
fiberglass and caulk both ends with approved type sealant (UL listed). For vertical
piping, extend sleeve 50 mm (2 inch) above the finish floor level.
C. Sleeves for ferrous pipes passing through external retaining walls: Cast iron or ductile
iron with integral puddle; pack with 96 kg/cu.M (6 lbs/cu.ft.) density fiberglass; caulk
internal side with approved sealant (UL listed); caulk external side with hemp yarn and
lead.
D. Sleeves for cast iron drain, waste and vent piping through wet floors: Provide PVC
pipe sleeve or wooden box to form the opening; remove this sleeve or box after curing
of the concrete. After completion of cast iron pipe installation, fill the opening with non-
shrinkable grout; trowel both sides of slab, smooth and level.
E. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: 0.0239-inch (0.6mm) minimum thickness; round tube closed

with welded longitudinal joint.
F. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule-40, galvanized, plain ends.
G. Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated “wall pipe” equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with
plain ends and integral water stop, unless otherwise indicated.
H. Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange.
Include clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing.
I. Under deck Clamp: Clamping ring with set screws.
J. Molded PVC: Permanent, with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.
K. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.
L. Molded PE: Reusable, PE, tapered-cup shaped and smooth-outer surface with nailing
flange for attaching to wooden forms.
2.016 ESCUTCHEONS
A. Provide set screw type escutcheons, size sufficient to completely cover exposed
penetrations. Prime coat finish where adjoining surface is to be field painted; baked
enamel white finish where adjoining surface is fiberboard. Chrome finish where
adjoining surface is tiled with ceramic, marble, etc.
2.017 FINISH
A. All hangers support inserts, shields and saddles shall have galvanized finish.
2.018 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS
A. Description: MSS SP-69, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly

made from structural-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and
U-bolts.
2.019 FASTENER SYSTEMS
A. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened Portland

cement concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported
loads and building materials where used.
B. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type zinc-coated stainless steel, for

use in hardened Portland cement concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities
appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.
2.020 PIPE STAND FABRICATION
A. Pipe Stands, General: Shop or field-fabricated assemblies made of manufactured

corrosion-resistant components to support roof-mounted piping.
B. Compact Pipe Stand: One-piece plastic unit with integral-rod-roller, pipe clamps, or
V-shaped cradle to support pipe, for roof installation without membrane penetration.
C. Low-Type, Single-Pipe Stand: One-piece stainless-steel base unit with plastic roller,
for roof installation without membrane penetration.
D. High-Type, Single-Pipe Stand: Assembly of base, vertical and horizontal members,

and pipe support, for roof installation without membrane penetration.
1. Base: Plastic/Stainless steel.
2. Vertical Members: Two or more stainless-steel, continuous-thread rods.
3. Horizontal Member: stainless-steel rod with plastic or stainless-steel, roller-
type pipe support.
E. High-Type, Multiple-Pipe Stand: Assembly of bases, vertical and horizontal members,

and pipe supports, for roof installation without membrane penetration.
1. Bases: One or more plastic/Stainless steel
2. Vertical Members: Two or more protective-coated-steel channels.
3. Horizontal Member: Protective-coated-steel channel.
4. Pipe Supports: Galvanized-steel, clevis-type pipe hangers.
F. Curb-Mounting-Type Pipe Stands: Shop- or field-fabricated pipe support made from

structural-steel shape, continuous-thread rods, and rollers for mounting on permanent
stationary roof curb.
2.021 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS

A. Equipment supports in this Article require calculation and detail of each unit.
B. Description: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from

structural-steel shapes.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of
piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate
action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.
B. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts,
washers, and other accessories.
C. Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and stresses from
movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.
D. Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so maximum pipe
deflections allowed by ASME B31.9, “Building Services Piping”, is not exceeded.
E. Field fabricate heavy-duty steel trapezes from ASTM A36 steel shapes, welded
according to AWS D-1.1.
F. Install powder-actuated drive-pin fasteners in concrete after concrete is placed and

completely cured. Use operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool
manufacturer. Install fasteners according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's
operating manual.
G. Install mechanical-anchor fasteners in concrete after concrete is placed and

completely cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions.
H. Do not hang piping from other piping.
I. Field fabricated anchors shall be entirely separate from pipe hangers and shall be of
heavy welded steel construction. The design shall ensure a thermal and acoustic
break is provided between the pipe and building structure. Anchor loads, locations,
method of fixing and design details shall be certified by a structural engineer and
submitted for review prior to commencement of works.
J. Do not use branch connections as anchorage points.
K. Install seismic cable bracing at an angle of 450 +/- 150 to the ceiling slab. The
installation shall permit thermal expansion and contraction of the pipe and not impede
the functioning of vibration isolators if present.
L. Provide washers and lock nuts to threaded hanger rods.
3.02 SPACING OF HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Maximum spacing of piping hangers and supports shall be as per the schedules that
follow, subject to the following:
1. Actual spans used shall be such that a minimum safety factor of 25% is retained
towards the manufacturer’s declared hanger load carrying capacity.
2. Where multiple pipes of different sizes are supported on trapeze hangers or
channel supports, the spacing shall be as per the smallest pipe size.
3. Provide a hanger or support within 300mm of horizontal elbows and tees.
4. Install additional hangers at concentrated loads including valves, flanges,
strainers, expansion joints and other pipeline ancillaries.
5. Install hangers in header piping at the location of all suction and discharge drop
risers to pumps, chillers, heat exchangers, cooling towers etc.
Steel Piping:
Pipe Size Maximum Horizontal

Support Spacing
up to 32mm 2.0m
40mm 2.4m
50mm 2.7m
65mm 3.0m
80mm 3.3m
100mm 4.0m
125mm 4.0m
150mm 4.0m
200mm 4.5m
250mm 5.0m
300mm 5.0m
350mm 5.5m
400mm 5.5m
450mm 6.0m
500mm 6.0m
600mm 6.0m
750mm 6.0m
Support vertical steel pipe at least at every floor. See also section 2.3.
Copper Piping:
Pipe Size Maximum Horizontal Maximum Vertical

Support Spacing Support Spacing
up to 22mm 1.5m 2.0m
28 to 35mm 1.8m 2.4m
42 to 67mm 2.4m 3.0m
76 to 108mm 3.0m each floor
over 108mm 3.6m each floor
3.03 HANGER AND SUPPORT APPLICATIONS

A. Specific hanger and support requirements are specified in Sections specifying piping
systems and equipment.
B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not
specified in piping system Sections.
C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized, metallic coatings for piping and equipment
that will not have field-applied finish.
D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments

are in direct contact with copper tubing.
E. Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching.
F. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as

specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:
1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of
noninsulated or insulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30 (DN 15 to
DN 750).
2. Yoke-Type Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 2): For suspension of 120 to 450 deg F
(49 to 232 deg C) pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 16 (DN 100 to DN 400), requiring up to
4 inches (100 mm) of insulation.
3. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel, Double-Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For
suspension of pipes, NPS 3/4 to NPS 24 (DN 20 to DN 600), requiring clamp
flexibility and up to 4 inches (100 mm) of insulation.
4. Steel Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 4): For suspension of cold and hot pipes,
NPS 1/2 to NPS 24 (DN 15 to DN 600), if little or no insulation is required.
5. Pipe Hangers (MSS Type 5): For suspension of pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 4
(DN 15 to DN 100), to allow off-center closure for hanger installation before pipe
erection.
6. Adjustable, Swivel Split- or Solid-Ring Hangers (MSS Type 6): For suspension
of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/4 to NPS 8 (DN 20 to DN 200).
7. Adjustable, Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of
noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 8 (DN 15 to DN 200).
8. Adjustable Band Hangers (MSS Type 9): For suspension of noninsulated
stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 8 (DN 15 to DN 200).
9. Adjustable, Swivel-Ring Band Hangers (MSS Type 10): For suspension of
noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 2 (DN 15 to DN 50).
10. Split Pipe-Ring with or without Turnbuckle-Adjustment Hangers (MSS
Type 11): For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/8 to NPS 8
(DN 10 to DN 200).
11. Extension Hinged or 2-Bolt Split Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 12): For suspension
of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/8 to NPS 3 (DN 10 to DN 80).
12. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30
(DN 15 to DN 750).
13. Clips (MSS Type 26): For support of insulated pipes not subject to expansion
or contraction.
14. Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 36
(DN 100 to DN 900), with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor
flange.
15. Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37): For support of pipes, NPS 4 to
NPS 36 (DN 100 to DN 900), with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-
iron floor flange and with U-bolt to retain pipe.

16. Adjustable, Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 38): For stanchion-type support
for pipes, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 36 (DN 65 to DN 900), if vertical adjustment is
required, with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange.
17. Single Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes, NPS 1 to NPS 30
(DN 25 to DN 750), from 2 rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion
and contraction might occur.
18. Adjustable Roller Hangers (MSS Type 43): For suspension of pipes, NPS 2-
1/2 to NPS 20 (DN 65 to DN 500), from single rod if horizontal movement
caused by expansion and contraction might occur.
19. Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to NPS 42
(DN 50 to DN 1050), if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and
contraction might occur but vertical adjustment is not necessary.
20. Pipe Roll and Plate Units (MSS Type 45): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to
NPS 24 (DN 50 to DN 600), if small horizontal movement caused by expansion
and contraction might occur and vertical adjustment is not necessary.
21. Adjustable Pipe Roll and Base Units (MSS Type 46): For support of pipes,
NPS 2 to NPS 30 (DN 50 to DN 750), if vertical and lateral adjustment during
installation might be required in addition to expansion and contraction.
G. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping

system Sections, install the following types:
1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers,
NPS 3/4 to NPS 20 (DN 20 to DN 500).
2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers,
NPS 3/4 to NPS 20 (DN 20 to DN 500), if longer ends are required for riser
clamps.
H. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in

piping system Sections, install the following types:
1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches (150 mm) for
heavy loads.
2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F (49 to 232 deg C) piping
installations.
3. Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type 11, split pipe
rings.
4. Malleable-Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various
types of building attachments.
5. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 120 to 450 deg F (49 to 232
deg C) piping installations.
I. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping

1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to
suspend pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.
2. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-
joist construction to attach to top flange of structural shape.
3. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange
of beams, channels, or angles.
4. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange
of beams.
5. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams
if loads are considerable and rod sizes are large.
6. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes.
7. Top-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 25): For top of beams if hanger rod is required
tangent to flange edge.
8. Side-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 27): For bottom of steel I-beams.
9. Steel-Beam Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 28): For attaching to bottom of
steel I-beams for heavy loads.
10. Linked-Steel Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 29): For attaching to bottom of
steel I-beams for heavy loads, with link extensions.
11. Malleable Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30): For attaching
to structural steel.
12. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below, or for suspending
from above by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads:
a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb (340 kg).
b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb (680 kg).
c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb (1360 kg).
13. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams.
14. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is
required.
15. Horizontal Travelers (MSS Type 58): For supporting piping systems subject to
linear horizontal movement where headroom is limited.
J. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping
1. Steel Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids
with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.
2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by
manufacturer to prevent crushing insulation.
3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe.
K. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in
piping system Sections, install the following types:
1. Restraint-Control Devices (MSS Type 47): Where indicated to control piping
movement.
2. Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not
exceed 1-1/4 inches (32 mm).
3. Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41 roll
hanger with springs.
4. Spring Sway Braces (MSS Type 50): To retard sway, shock, vibration, or
thermal expansion in piping systems.
5. Variable-Spring Hangers (MSS Type 51): Preset to indicated load and limit
variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping
system from hanger.
6. Variable-Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load and
limit variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of
piping system from base support.
7. Variable-Spring Trapeze Hangers (MSS Type 53): Preset to indicated load and
limit variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of
piping system from trapeze support.
8. Constant Supports: For critical piping stress and if necessary to avoid transfer
of stress from one support to another support, critical terminal, or connected
equipment. Include auxiliary stops for erection, hydrostatic test, and load-
adjustment capability. These supports include the following types:
a. Horizontal (MSS Type 54): Mounted horizontally.

b. Vertical (MSS Type 55): Mounted vertically.
c. Trapeze (MSS Type 56): Two vertical-type supports and one trapeze
member.
L. Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe hanger selections and applications that are
not specified in piping system Sections.
M. Comply with MFMA-102 for metal framing system selections and applications that are
not specified in piping system Sections.
N. Use powder-actuated fasteners or mechanical-expansion anchors instead of building

attachments where required in concrete construction.
3.04 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Steel Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install
hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping
from building structure.
B. Trapeze Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Arrange
for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping and support together on field-
fabricated trapeze pipe hangers.
1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe
size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified
above for individual pipe hangers.
2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel shapes selected for loads being
supported. Weld steel according to AWS D1.1.
C. Metal Framing System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping and
support together on field-assembled metal framing systems.
D. Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated

piping.
E. Fastener System Installation:

1. Install powder-actuated fasteners for use in lightweight concrete or concrete
slabs less than 4 inches (100 mm) thick in concrete after concrete is placed and
completely cured. Use operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool
manufacturer. Install fasteners according to powder-actuated tool
manufacturer's operating manual.
2. Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and
completely cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
F. Pipe Stand Installation:

1. Pipe Stand Types except Curb-Mounting Type: Assemble components and
mount on smooth roof surface. Do not penetrate roof membrane.
2. Curb-Mounting-Type Pipe Stands: Assemble components or fabricate pipe
stand and mount on permanent, stationary roof curb. Refer to Division 07
Section "Roof Accessories" for curbs.
G. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts,
washers, and other accessories.
H. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes.
I. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of
piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate
action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.
J. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.
K. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install
additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers,
NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete
inserts before concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars
through openings at top of inserts.
L. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so piping live and dead loads and
stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.
M. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so
maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.1 (for power piping) and
ASME B31.9 (for building services piping) are not exceeded.
N. Insulated Piping: Comply with the following:

1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.
a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project
through insulation.
b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger
shield insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.
c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits according to ASME B31.1 for power
piping and ASME B31.9 for building services piping.
2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor
barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining
insulation.
a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel
weight-distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 (DN 100) and larger if pipe is
installed on rollers.
3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier.
Shields shall span an arc of 180 degrees.
a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel
weight-distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 (DN 100) and larger if pipe is
installed on rollers.
4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:
a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2 (DN 8 to DN 90): 12 inches (305 mm) long and
0.048 inch (1.22 mm) thick.
b. NPS 4 (DN 100): 12 inches (305 mm) long and 0.06 inch (1.52 mm)
thick.
c. NPS 5 and NPS 6 (DN 125 and DN 150): 18 inches (457 mm) long and
d. NPS 8 to NPS 14 (DN 200 to DN 350): 24 inches (610 mm) long and
e. NPS 16 to NPS 24 (DN 400 to DN 600): 24 inches (610 mm) long and
5. Pipes NPS 8 (DN 200) and Larger: Include wood inserts.
6. Insert Material: Length at least as long as protective shield.

7. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping
insulation.
3.05 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to

support equipment above floor.
B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make smooth bearing
surface.
C. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports.
3.06 METAL FABRICATIONS
A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and
equipment supports.
B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that
cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.
C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 procedures for shielded metal arc welding,
appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work, and
with the following:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and
corrosion resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and
contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.
3.07 ADJUSTING
A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and

to achieve indicated slope of pipe.
B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches (40
mm).
3.08 PAINTING
A. Touch Up: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas
immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for
shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted
surfaces.
1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils
(0.05 mm).
B. Touch Up: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and
abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal are specified in Division 09
painting Sections. Section "High-Performance Coatings."
C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply
galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.
3.09 INSERTS
A. Provide inserts to Division 03 section for placement in concrete formwork.
B. Provide inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of
reinforced concrete beams.
C. Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe over
150 mm (6 inch) nom. dia.
D. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, provide inserts to be flush with slab soffit.
E. Where expansion type anchors are used, select type and quality to suit the concrete
into which it is to be installed.
3.010 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS (GENERAL)
A. Provide hanger or support assembly to take up the filled weight of piping for half spans
on either side plus 100 kgs, with minimum overall factor of safety of two.
B. Install hangers to provide minimum 12-mm (1/2-inch) space between finished covering
and adjacent work.
C. Place a hanger within 300-mm (12 inch) of each horizontal elbow.
D. Use hangers with 38 mm (1 1/2 inch) minimum vertical adjustment.
E. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide
multiple or trapeze hangers.
F. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping.
G. Anchor piping at either side of flexible connections (at the system side only on
connections to equipment).
H. No support, hanger or anchor shall be attached to the building structural elements

whereby their installation, weight or expansion stress will result in damage to the
structure.
I. Piping buried in raft slabs or trenches shall be supported as detailed on the Contract
drawings. The support shall be capable of holding the pipe in position against buoyant
forces exerted during pouring of concrete.
J. Provide fender washers and lock nuts to threaded hanger rods.
K. Provide amply sized structural steel sections for multiple trapeze hangers, anchor
braces, supporting frames etc. Submit calculations where asked for.
L. Where special slab construction (like Omni slab) is used, install support rails anchored
to concrete portions for installing hangers.

M. Do not weld supporting framework to building structural elements, reinforcement bars
etc. under any circumstances.
N. Provide riser clamps at mid span for vertical piping up to and including 25 mm (1 inch)
nom. dia.
O. Support fire protection piping independently of other piping.
3.011 SLEEVES, PUDDLE FLANGES ETC.
A. Set sleeves in position in form work. Provide reinforcing around sleeves.
B. Where sleeves in concrete structural elements are omitted due to error, core the
required openings only after obtaining written permission of the Engineer. Provide
sleeves with puddle flanges resting on the concrete surface, and non-shrink grout to
fix the sleeve in position. Cutting of hole by chiseling is not permitted.
C. Project all sleeves in wet areas by at least 50 mm (2 inch) above the finish floor level.
D. Erect sleeves, puddle flanges etc. in the formwork, perpendicular to the wall face and
rigidly to resist displacement during pouring of concrete.
E. Ensure verticality of flange faces and alignment of bolt holes with connected
equipment (valves etc.).
F. Seal the openings around, so as to avoid leakage (and resultant honeycombing) and
undesirable formation of concrete.
G. Check alignment immediately after pouring of concrete. Make adjustment where

required.
H. Size sleeves large enough to allow for movement of pipe due to expansion or
contraction. Provide for continuous insulation wrapping.
3.012 FLASHING AND SEALING
A. Pipes passing through external retaining walls: Clamp a layer of waterproofing

membrane to the pipe and flash the wall waterproofing membrane over.
B. Piping and ducting passing through weather or water proofed walls, floors, and roofs:
Provide flexible flashing and metal counter flashing as appropriate.
C. Sound control: Provide acoustical lead flashing around ducts and pipes, penetrating
equipment rooms, installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions for sound
control.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 23 0548
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:

1. Isolation pads.
2. Isolation mounts.
3. Restrained elastomeric isolation mounts.
4. Freestanding and restrained spring isolators.
5. Housed spring mounts.
6. Elastomeric hangers.
7. Spring hangers.
8. Spring hangers with vertical-limit stops.
9. Pipe riser resilient supports.
10. Resilient pipe guides.
11. Freestanding and restrained air-mounting system.
12. Restrained vibration isolation roof-curb rails.
13. Seismic snubbers.
14. Restraining braces and cables.
15. Steel and inertia, vibration isolation equipment bases.
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. IBC: International Building Code.
B. UBC: Uniform Building Code.
C. ICC-ES: ICC-Evaluation Service.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. ASHRAE HAND BOOK, HVAC Applications.
B. ASHRAE A Practical Guide to Seismic Restraints
C. Local Seismic Design Code (if available)
A. Wind-Restraint Loading:
KEO/21-7387-0004 23 0548 / 1 Vibration And Seismic Controls For Hvac Piping And Equipment
1. Basic Wind Speed: 100MPH
2. Building Classification Category: II
3. Minimum 10 lb/sq. ft. (48.8 kg/sq. m) multiplied by the maximum area of the
HVAC component projected on a vertical plane that is normal to the wind
direction, and 45 degrees either side of normal.
B. Seismic-Restraint Loading:
Site Class as Defined in the IBC: (Shall be defined from soil report; Project Specific.
Refer to Structural Drawings.
C. Seismic-Restraint Loading:
1. Site Classification based on UBC 1997 Seismic Zone 2A for buildings G+4 up to
9; Seismic Zone 2B for buildings 10 storeys and higher.
D. Final Seismic restraint loading shall be confirmed by the contractor based on AHJ.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Include rated load, rated deflection, and overload capacity for each vibration
isolation device.
2. Illustrate and indicate style, material, strength, fastening provision, and finish for
each type and size of seismic-restraint component used.
a. Tabulate types and sizes of seismic restraints, complete with report
numbers and rated strength in tension and shear as evaluated by an
evaluation service member of ICC-ES, an agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.
b. Annotate to indicate application of each product submitted and
compliance with requirements.
c. All restraining devices shall have a preapproval number from OSHPD or
some other recognized government agency showing maximum restraint
ratings.
3. Interlocking Snubbers: Include ratings for horizontal, vertical, and combined
loads.
B. Delegated-Design Submittal: For vibration isolation and seismic-restraint details

indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including
analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for
their preparation, with minimum local experience of 10 years in this field.
1. Design Calculations: Calculate static and dynamic loading due to equipment
weight and operation, seismic and wind forces required to select vibration
isolators, seismic and wind restraints, and for designing vibration isolation bases.
a. Coordinate design calculations with wind load calculations required for
equipment mounted outdoors. Comply with requirements in other
Division 22 Sections for equipment mounted outdoors.
2. Riser Supports: Include riser diagrams and calculations showing anticipated
expansion and contraction at each support point, initial and final loads on
building structure, spring deflection changes, and seismic loads. Include
certification that riser system has been examined for excessive stress and that
none will exist.
3. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail overall dimensions, including anchorages
and attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include auxiliary
motor slides and rails, base weights, equipment static loads, power transmission,
component misalignment, and cantilever loads.
4. Seismic- and Wind-Restraint Details:
a. Design Analysis: To support selection and arrangement of seismic and
wind restraints. Include calculations of combined tensile and shear loads.
b. Details: Indicate fabrication and arrangement. Detail attachments of
restraints to the restrained items and to the structure. Show attachment
locations, methods, and spacings. Identify components, list their
strengths, and indicate directions and values of forces transmitted to the
structure during seismic events. Indicate association with vibration
isolation devices.
c. Coordinate seismic-restraint and vibration isolation details with wind-
restraint details required for equipment mounted outdoors. Comply with
requirements in other Division 22 Sections for equipment mounted
outdoors.
d. Preapproval and Evaluation Documentation: By an evaluation service
member of ICC-ES an agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction, showing maximum ratings of restraint items and the basis for
approval (tests or calculations). All restraining devices shall have a
preapproval number from OSHPD or some other recognized government
agency showing maximum restraint ratings
C. Coordination Drawings: Show coordination of seismic bracing for HVAC piping and
equipment with other systems and equipment in the vicinity, including other supports
and seismic restraints.
D. Welding certificates.
E. Qualification Data: For professional engineer and testing agency.
F. Air-Mounting System Performance Certification: Include natural frequency, load, and

damping test data performed by an independent agency.
G. Field quality-control test reports.
H. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air-mounting systems to include in operation and
maintenance manuals.
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and

capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a nationally recognized testing
laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to
Authorities Having Jurisdiction (AHJ).
B. Comply with seismic-restraint requirements in the IBC unless requirements in this

Section are more stringent.
C. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural

Welding Code - Steel."
D. Seismic-restraint devices shall have horizontal and vertical load testing and analysis and
shall bear anchorage preapproval OPA number from OSHPD, preapproval by ICC-ES,
or preapproval by another agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, showing
maximum seismic-restraint ratings. Ratings based on independent testing are preferred
to ratings based on calculations. If preapproved ratings are not available, submittals
based on independent testing are preferred. Calculations (including combining shear
and tensile loads to support seismic-restraint designs must be signed and sealed by a
qualified professional engineer.
E. The contractor shall be responsible for seismic design for the project requirements of
AHJ.
F. Do not exceed the allowable noise level, 70 dBA measured at a distance of 1200 mm (4
feet) from source, by proper engineering of equipment assemblies.
A. Deliver products to site, store and protect under provisions of Division1 General
requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, products to

be provided shall be from the manufacturer listed in section 23 9000 - Approved
Vendors List (AVL).
2.02 GENERAL
A. All metal parts of vibration isolation units installed out of doors shall be hot dip
galvanised, cadmium plated, or neoprene coated after fabrication. Galvanising shall
meet ASTM salt spray test standards and Federal test standard No. 14.
B. Isolator types are scheduled to establish minimum standards. At the Contractor's option,
labour saving accessories can be an integral part of isolators supplied to provide initial
lift of equipment to operating height, hold piping at fixed elevations during installation
and initial system filling operations, and similar installation advantages. Accessories
must not degrade the vibration isolation system.
C. Static deflection of isolators shall be as shown on the schedule (refer to clause 3.010).
All static deflections stated are the minimum acceptable deflection for the mounts under
actual load. Isolators selected on the basis of rated deflection are not acceptable.
D. The isolation manufacturer shall be responsible for the structural design of steel beam
bases and concrete inertia bases to support mechanical equipment scheduled or
specified to receive a supplementary base. and shall be based on the actual operating
weights of the equipment as per manufacturer’s data.
E. The vibration isolator efficiency shall be minimum 95%

2.03 BASES
A. Type "A" - INTEGRAL BASES: This type is generally applicable for packaged chillers,
pumps, Air Handling Units, Air conditioning Units etc. which are supplied with factory
fabricated rigid base which can be mounted directly on vibration isolators. Equipment
manufacturer's recommendations should be sought for the number, locations and
weight distribution to select and install vibration isolators.
B. Type "B" - STEEL STRUCTURAL BASES: This type is generally subdivided into closed
frame type (Type B1) and rails type (Type B2). These are steel bases fabricated either
as per the approved shop drawing or as per the equipment manufacturer's
recommendation. These are used for equipment not having a rigid base. The type B1
shall be used where the vibration isolators are located within the equipment base and
type B2 shall be used when the vibration isolators are outside the equipment and the
type B2 base acts as a cradle. The minimum depth shall be 4 inches.
C. TYPE "C" CONCRETE INTERTIAL BASES: This type generally consists of structural
steel, fabricated pouring form with reinforcing bars. The concrete shall be poured on
site. The minimum depth shall be 6 inches.
D. TYPE "D" - ROOF CURBS: This type is generally used for Roof top Air Handling Units
with direct cutting through roof slab under the units. These roof curbs shall be supplied
by the unit manufacturer. The manufacturer's recommendations should be sought for
the number, locations and weight distribution to select and install vibration isolators.
E. TYPE "E" - HOUSE KEEPING PADS: These are concrete bases used for all equipment
with or without moving parts and shall be suitable for taking up the static and dynamic
loads (if any). Size base to extend 10 cms beyond equipment base in all directions and
minimum10 cms above finished floor level. Roughen floor slab beneath base for bond
and or provide rebar dowels in floor slab. Locate anchor bolts (welded on to a rebar
framework to maintain spacing) with templates supplied by the equipment manufacturer.
Provide steel angle frame with anchorage lugs at the corners.
F. TYPE "F" - FLOATING CONCRETE BASE: This is similar to Type "E" (Housekeeping
pads) but isolated at the bottom and all the side by either pre-compressed glass fiber
pads or close cell Neoprene Isolation Board. The thickness of isolating pads varies from
25 to 100 mm (1 to 4 inch) depending on the application.
G. TYPE "G" - STRUCTURAL STEEL STANDS: These shall be provided to support

equipment, which are not floor mounted or hung from structure. Construct with structural
steel members and attach to wall or floor as appropriate. Provide factory fabricated
saddles or mounts for equipment as required.
2.04 VIBRATION ISOLATORS
A. TYPE "1" - ISOLATING PADS: This type of vibration isolators shall be generally used
where the vibrating force is transmitted directly to ground or the vibrating force is very
small compared to the absorption capacity of the structural slab at higher levels.
B. TYPE "1A" - NEOPRENE RUBBER PADS: These shall be cross-ribbed, in multiple

layers or of sandwich type to achieve the required deflection. The adhesive used in
fabricating the pads shall be as recommended by the manufacturer. Pads should have a
Maximum Durometer of 40.
C. TYPE "1B" - GLASS FIBER PADS: Not Acceptable.
D. TYPE "1C" - CORK PADS: Not Acceptable.
E. TYPE "2" - MOLDED NEOPRENE RUBBER MOUNTS: These shall be used where a
greater deflection is required than that for pads. The maximum deflection allowable is 12
mm (0.5 inch) on these rubber mounts. The normal shape of mount is conical with a
captive insert for attaching to equipment base.
F. TYPE "3" - FREE STANDING SPRING ISOLATORS: These shall be constructed with
open type stable spring and load plates at top and bottom with an adjustable bolt for
levelling. Neoprene rubber acoustical treatment shall be provided to prevent
transmission of very high frequency vibration and noise. The spring shall be so designed
that the horizontal stiffness is more than 75 % of vertical stiffness. The rated loads and
deflections for these springs shall allow additional 50 % travel to that of the rated
deflection before the springs are compressed solid, to accommodate any errors in actual
load distribution.
G. TYPE "4" - RESTRAINED SPRING ISOLATORS: These are similar to type "3", but with
additional restraints in the vertical direction. These isolators shall have hold down bolts
to limit vertical movement. The restraints should have adequate clearance so that they
are activated only when a temporary restraint is needed.
H. TYPE "5" - HOUSED SPRING ISOLATORS: These isolators are similar to type "4"
except that they consist of two telescoping houses. The contact surfaces of houses are
separated by resilient inserts such as Neoprene Sponge or equivalent material.
I. TYPE "6" - RUBBER HANGERS: These are similar to type "2" except that the conical
rubber mold is housed in a steel casing and have a through hole for the hanger rod. The
assembly should allow for 20 to 35 degrees angular movement for the hanging rod
without metal to metal contact.
J. TYPE "7" - SPRING HANGERS: These are similar to type "3" except that the spring is
mounted in a steel casing and used for suspension only. The assembly shall allow for
20 to 25 degrees angular movement for the hanging rod without metal to metal contact.
K. TYPE "8" - COMBINATION RUBBER & SPRING HANGER: This is a combination of

type "6" and "7" having all the specified characteristics therein.
L. TYPE "9" - THRUST RESTRAINTS: These are similar to type "7", but installed in pairs
to counteract the thrust caused by air pressure.
M. TYPE "10" - AIR SPRINGS: These shall consist of constant dry air supplying equipment
and air bellows. These shall be used where 150 mm (6 inch) or greater deflection is
required and natural frequencies do not exceed 80 Hz.
2.05 VIBRATION ISOLATORS DETAIL
A. Pads: Arranged in single or multiple layers of sufficient stiffness for uniform loading over
pad area, molded with a nonslip pattern and galvanized-steel baseplates, and factory
cut to sizes that match requirements of supported equipment.
1. Resilient Material: Oil- and water-resistant neoprene rubber Two layers of 3/4"
(19mm) thick neoprene pad consisting of 2" (50mm) square waffle modules
separated horizontally by a 16 (1.5mm) gauge galvanized shim. Load distribution
plates shall be used as required.
B. Mounts: Double-deflection type, with molded, oil-resistant rubber, or neoprene isolator

elements with factory-drilled, encapsulated top plate for bolting to equipment and with
baseplate for bolting to structure. Color-code or otherwise identify to indicate capacity
range.
1. Materials: Cast-ductile-iron or welded steel housing containing two separate and
opposing, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene elements that prevent central threaded
element and attachment hardware from contacting the housing during normal
operation.
2. Neoprene: Shock-absorbing materials compounded according to the standard
for bridge-bearing neoprene as defined by AASHTO.
C. Restrained Mounts: All-directional mountings with seismic restraint.

1. Materials: Cast-ductile-iron or welded steel housing containing two separate and
opposing, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene elements that prevent central threaded
element and attachment hardware from contacting the housing during normal
operation.
2. Neoprene: Shock-absorbing materials compounded according to the standard
for bridge-bearing neoprene as defined by AASHTO.
D. Spring Isolators: Freestanding, laterally stable, open-spring isolators.

1. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of
the spring at rated load.
2. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.
3. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness.
4. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without
deformation or failure.
5. Baseplates: Factory drilled for bolting to structure and bonded to 1/4-inch- (6-
mm-) thick, rubber isolator pad attached to baseplate underside. Baseplates
shall limit floor load to 500 psig (3447 kPa).
6. Top Plate and Adjustment Bolt: Threaded top plate with adjustment bolt and cap
screw to fasten and level equipment.
E. Restrained Spring Isolators: Freestanding, steel, open-spring isolators with seismic or

limit-stop restraint.
1. Housing: Steel with resilient vertical-limit stops to prevent spring extension due
to weight being removed; factory-drilled baseplate bonded to 1/4-inch- (6-mm-)
thick, neoprene or rubber isolator pad attached to baseplate underside; and
adjustable equipment mounting and leveling bolt that acts as blocking during
installation.
2. Restraint: Seismic or limit stop as required for equipment and authorities having
jurisdiction.
F. Housed Spring Mounts: Housed spring isolator with integral seismic snubbers.
1. Housing: Ductile-iron or steel housing to provide all-directional seismic restraint.
2. Base: Factory drilled for bolting to structure.
3. Snubbers: Vertically adjustable to allow a maximum of 1/4-inch (6-mm) travel up
or down before contacting a resilient collar.
G. Elastomeric Hangers: Single or double-deflection type, fitted with molded, oil-resistant

elastomeric isolator elements bonded to steel housings with threaded connections for
hanger rods. Color-code or otherwise identify to indicate capacity range.
H. Spring Hangers: Combination coil-spring and elastomeric-insert hanger with spring and
insert in compression.
1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded hanger rods and to allow for
a maximum of 30 degrees of angular hanger-rod misalignment without binding or
reducing isolation efficiency.
6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene. Steel-washer-
reinforced cup to support spring and bushing projecting through bottom of frame.
7. Self-centering hanger rod cap to ensure concentricity between hanger rod and
support spring coil.
I. Spring Hangers with Vertical-Limit Stop: Combination coil-spring and elastomeric-insert

hanger with spring and insert in compression and with a vertical-limit stop.
1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded hanger rods and to allow for
a maximum of 30 degrees of angular hanger-rod misalignment without binding or
reducing isolation efficiency.
6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene.
7. Adjustable Vertical Stop: Steel washer with neoprene washer "up-stop" on lower
threaded rod.
8. Self-centering hanger rod cap to ensure concentricity between hanger rod and
support spring coil.
J. Pipe Riser Resilient Support: All-directional, acoustical pipe anchor consisting of 2 steel
tubes separated by a minimum of 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) thick neoprene. Include steel and
neoprene vertical-limit stops arranged to prevent vertical travel in both directions.
Design support for a maximum load on the isolation material of 500 psig (3.45 MPa) and
for equal resistance in all directions.
K. Resilient Pipe Guides: Telescopic arrangement of 2 steel tubes or post and sleeve
arrangement separated by a minimum of 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) thick neoprene. Where
clearances are not readily visible, a factory-set guide height with a shear pin to allow
vertical motion due to pipe expansion and contraction shall be fitted. Shear pin shall be
removable and reinsertable to allow for selection of pipe movement. Guides shall be
capable of motion to meet location requirements.
2.06 RESILIENT PENETRATION SLEEVE
A. This shall consist of a sleeve 25 mm (1-inch) larger all round than that of the penetrating
element and fabricated out of steel pipe or sheet metal as the condition warrants. The
sleeve length shall be 25 mm (1 inch) extra on both sides of the penetrated construction.
The annular space is filled with resilient material such as Neoprene sponge or type 1B
material and ends sealed with approved sealant compatible with the resilient material.
2.07 FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTIONS
A. Flexible duct connections shall be fabricated from coated fabric (or loaded vinyl as
called for on the drawings). The clear space between connected parts shall be a
minimum of 75-mm (3-inch) and the connection shall have 38-mm (1 1/2-inch) minimum
of slack material.
B. UL Listed fire retardant, Neoprene coated (Silicon rubber for smoke extract duty /
Hypalon for outdoor use), woven, glass-fibre fabric of 750 gm/M2 (30 Oz/yard2) average
weight: tailored to suit requirements.
C. Pressure Rating: 500 Pa (2 inch WG) positive and 375 Pa (1.5 inch WG) negative.
D. Maximum Velocity: 20.3 M / Sec. (4000 fpm).
E. Continuous Temperature Range: -40 C to 93 C (-40 F to 200 F) for normal air
moving equipment and 260 C (500 F) for smoke extraction units.
F. Galvanised steel edging strips, crimped on to the duct fabric shall be provided at the
ends of flexible connections to equipment / metal ducts.
2.08 FLEXIBLE PIPE CONNECTIONS
A. Flexible pipe connections shall be fabricated of multiple plies of nylon cord, fabric, and
neoprene, vulcanised so as to become inseparable and homogeneous. Straight
connections shall be formed in a double sphere shape. Elbow connections shall have a
single sphere shape at the curve of the unit. Flexible connections shall be able to accept
compressive, elongative, transverse, and angular movements.
B. The flexible connections shall be selected and specially fitted, if necessary, to suit the
system temperature, pressure, and fluid type.
C. Use bellow type metal flexible connectors with braided steel wire armour when they are
located in outdoor areas where the type described above will be damaged due to sun
radiation.
D. Connectors for pipe sizes 50 mm (2 inch) nom. dia. or smaller shall have threaded
female union couplings, made up of compatible material like cast iron for steel and
bronze for copper piping, on each end. Larger sizes shall be fitted with metallic flange
couplings.
2.09 AIR-MOUNTING SYSTEMS
A. Air Mounts: Freestanding, single or multiple, compressed-air bellows.

1. Assembly: Upper and lower steel sections connected by a replaceable, flexible,
nylon-reinforced neoprene bellows.
2. Maximum Natural Frequency: 3 Hz.
3. Operating Pressure Range: 25 to 100 psig (172 to 690 kPa).
4. Burst Pressure: At least three times manufacturer's published maximum
operating pressure.
5. Leveling Valves: Minimum of 3 required to maintain leveling within plus or minus
1/8 inch (3 mm).
B. Restrained Air Mounts: Housed compressed-air bellows.

1. Assembly: Upper and lower steel sections connected by a replaceable, flexible,
nylon-reinforced neoprene bellows and spring, with angle-iron frame having
vertical-limit stops and channel-section top with leveling adjustment and
attachment screws.
2. Maximum Natural Frequency: 3 Hz.
3. Operating Pressure Range: 25 to 100 psig (172 to 690 kPa).
4. Burst Pressure: At least three times manufacturer's published maximum
operating pressure.
5. Leveling Valves: Minimum of 3 required to maintain leveling within plus or minus
1/8 inch (3 mm).
2.010 RESTRAINED VIBRATION ISOLATION ROOF-CURB RAILS
A. General Requirements for Restrained Vibration Isolation Roof-Curb Rails: Factory-

assembled, fully enclosed, insulated, air- and watertight curb rail designed to resiliently
support equipment and to withstand seismic and wind forces.
B. Lower Support Assembly: Formed sheet-metal section containing adjustable and

removable steel springs that support upper frame. Upper frame shall provide
continuous support for equipment and shall be captive to resiliently resist seismic and
wind forces. Lower support assembly shall have a means for attaching to building
structure and a wood nailer for attaching roof materials and shall be insulated with a
minimum of 2 inches (50 mm) of rigid, glass-fiber insulation on inside of assembly.
C. Spring Isolators: Adjustable, restrained spring isolators shall be mounted on 1/4-inch-

(6-mm-) thick, elastomeric vibration isolation pads and shall have access ports, for level
adjustment, with removable waterproof covers at all isolator locations. Isolators shall be
located so they are accessible for adjustment at any time during the life of the
installation without interfering with the integrity of the roof.
1. Restrained Spring Isolators: Freestanding, steel, open-spring isolators with
seismic or wind restraint.
a. Housing: Steel with resilient vertical-limit stops and adjustable equipment
mounting and leveling bolt.
b. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed
height of the spring at rated load.
c. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated
load.
d. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness.
e. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed,
without deformation or failure.
2. Pads: Arranged in single or multiple layers of sufficient stiffness for uniform
loading over pad area, molded with a nonslip pattern and galvanized-steel
baseplates, and factory cut to sizes that match requirements of supported
equipment.
a. Resilient Material: Oil- and water-resistant standard neoprene natural
rubber hermetically sealed compressed fiberglass.
D. Snubber Bushings: All-directional, elastomeric snubber bushings at least 1/4 inch (6

mm) thick.
E. Water Seal: Galvanized sheet metal with EPDM seals at corners, attached to upper
support frame, extending down past wood nailer of lower support assembly, and
counterflashed over roof materials.
2.011 VIBRATION ISOLATION EQUIPMENT BASES
A. Steel Base: Factory-fabricated, welded, structural-steel bases and rails.

1. Design Requirements: Lowest possible mounting height with not less than 1-inch
(25-mm) clearance above the floor. Include equipment anchor bolts and auxiliary
motor slide bases or rails.
a. Include supports for suction and discharge elbows for pumps.
2. Structural Steel: Steel shapes, plates, and bars complying with
ASTM A 36/A 36M. Bases shall have shape to accommodate supported
equipment.
3. Support Brackets: Factory-welded steel brackets on frame for outrigger isolation
mountings and to provide for anchor bolts and equipment support.
B. Inertia Base: Factory-fabricated, welded, structural-steel bases and rails ready for
placement of cast-in-place concrete.
1. Design Requirements: Lowest possible mounting height with not less than 1-inch
(25-mm) clearance above the floor. Include equipment anchor bolts and auxiliary
motor slide bases or rails.
a. Include supports for suction and discharge elbows for pumps.
2. Structural Steel: Steel shapes, plates, and bars complying with
ASTM A 36/A 36M. Bases shall have shape to accommodate supported
equipment.
3. Support Brackets: Factory-welded steel brackets on frame for outrigger isolation
mountings and to provide for anchor bolts and equipment support.
4. Fabrication: Fabricate steel templates to hold equipment anchor-bolt sleeves
and anchors in place during placement of concrete. Obtain anchor-bolt
templates from supported equipment manufacturer.
2.012 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICES
A. General Requirements for Restraint Components: Rated strengths, features, and
applications shall be as defined in reports by an evaluation service member of ICC-ES
or an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. All restraining devices shall
have a preapproval number from OSHPD or some other recognized government agency
showing maximum restraint ratings.
1. Structural Safety Factor: Allowable strength in tension, shear, and pullout force
of components shall be at least four times the maximum seismic forces to which
they will be subjected.
B. Snubbers: Factory fabricated using welded structural-steel shapes and plates, anchor
bolts, and replaceable resilient isolation washers and bushings.
1. Anchor bolts for attaching to concrete shall be seismic-rated, drill-in, and stud-
wedge or female-wedge type.
2. Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: Oil- and water-resistant neoprene.
3. Maximum 1/4-inch (6-mm) air gap, and minimum 1/4-inch- (6-mm-) thick resilient
cushion.
C. Channel Support System: MFMA-3, shop- or field-fabricated support assembly made of

slotted steel channels with accessories for attachment to braced component at one end
and to building structure at the other end and other matching components and with
corrosion-resistant coating; and rated in tension, compression, and torsion forces.
D. Restraint Cables: Seismic Cable Restraints shall consist of galvanized steel aircraft
cables sized to resist seismic loads with a minimum safety factor of two and arranged to
provide all-directional restraint. Cables must be pre-stretched to achieve a certified
minimum modulus of elasticity. ASTM A 603 Galvanized ASTM A 492 Stainless Steel
Cable end connections shall be steel assemblies that swivel to final installation angle
and utilize two clamping bolts to provide proper cable engagement. Cables must not be
allowed to bend across sharp edges. Cable assemblies shall have an Anchorage
Preapproval OPA Number from OSHPD in the State of California verifying the maximum
certified load ratings.
E. Hanger Rod Stiffener: Steel tube or steel slotted-support-system sleeve with internally
bolted connections Reinforcing steel angle clamped to hanger rod.
F. Bushings for Floor-Mounted Equipment Anchor Bolts: Neoprene bushings designed for
rigid equipment mountings and matched to type and size of anchor bolts and studs.
G. Bushing Assemblies for Wall-Mounted Equipment Anchorage: Assemblies of neoprene

elements and steel sleeves designed for rigid equipment mountings and matched to
type and size of attachment devices used.
H. Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: One-piece, molded, oil- and water-resistant
neoprene, with a flat washer face.
I. Mechanical Anchor Bolts: Drilled-in and stud-wedge or female-wedge type in zinc-

coated steel for interior applications and stainless steel for exterior applications. Select
anchor bolts with strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488.
Minimum length of eight times diameter.
J. Adhesive Anchor Bolts: Drilled-in and capsule anchor system containing polyvinyl or
urethane methacrylate-based resin and accelerator, or injected polymer or hybrid mortar
adhesive. Provide anchor bolts and hardware with zinc-coated steel for interior
applications and stainless steel for exterior applications. Select anchor bolts with
strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488.
2.013 FACTORY FINISHES
A. Finish: Manufacturer's standard prime-coat finish ready for field painting.
B. Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested

equipment before shipping.
1. Powder coating on springs and housings.
2. All hardware shall be galvanized. Hot-dip galvanize metal components for
exterior use.
3. Baked enamel or powder coat for metal components on isolators for interior use.
4. Color-code or otherwise mark vibration isolation and seismic- and wind-control
devices to indicate capacity range.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation and seismic- and wind-
control devices for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other
conditions affecting performance.
B. Examine roughing-in of reinforcement and cast-in-place anchors to verify actual

locations before installation.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 APPLICATIONS
A. Multiple Pipe Supports: Secure pipes to trapeze member with clamps approved for
application by an evaluation service member of ICC-ES or an agency acceptable to
B. Hanger Rod Stiffeners: Install hanger rod stiffeners where indicated or scheduled on
Drawings to receive them and where required to prevent buckling of hanger rods due to
seismic forces.
C. Strength of Support and Seismic-Restraint Assemblies: Where not indicated, select

sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static and
seismic loads within specified loading limits.
3.03 VIBRATION-CONTROL AND SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICE INSTALLATION
A. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories" for installation of

roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations.
B. Equipment Restraints:
1. Install seismic snubbers on HVAC equipment mounted on vibration isolators.
Locate snubbers as close as possible to vibration isolators and bolt to equipment
base and supporting structure.
2. Install resilient bolt isolation washers on equipment anchor bolts where clearance
between anchor and adjacent surface exceeds 0.125 inch (3.2 mm).
3. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by an evaluation
service member of ICC-ES or an agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction providing required submittals for component.
C. Piping Restraints:
1. Comply with requirements in MSS SP-127.
2. Space lateral supports a maximum of 40 feet (12 m) o.c., and longitudinal
supports a maximum of 80 feet (24 m) o.c.
3. Brace a change of direction longer than 12 feet (3.7 m).
D. Install cables so they do not bend across edges of adjacent equipment or building
structure.
E. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by an evaluation service

member of ICC-ES or an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction providing
required submittals for component.
F. Install bushing assemblies for anchor bolts for floor-mounted equipment, arranged to
provide resilient media between anchor bolt and mounting hole in concrete base.
G. Install bushing assemblies for mounting bolts for wall-mounted equipment, arranged to
provide resilient media where equipment or equipment-mounting channels are attached
to wall.
H. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing to

structure at flanges of beams, at upper truss chords of bar joists, or at concrete
members.
I. Drilled-in Anchors:
1. Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling
holes for anchors. Do not damage existing reinforcing or embedded items during
coring or drilling. Notify the structural engineer if reinforcing steel or other
embedded items are encountered during drilling. Locate and avoid prestressed
tendons, electrical and telecommunications conduit, and gas lines.
2. Do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until concrete, mortar, or grout has
achieved full design strength.
3. Wedge Anchors: Protect threads from damage during anchor installation.
Heavy-duty sleeve anchors shall be installed with sleeve fully engaged in the
structural element to which anchor is to be fastened.
4. Adhesive Anchors: Clean holes to remove loose material and drilling dust prior
to installation of adhesive. Place adhesive in holes proceeding from the bottom
of the hole and progressing toward the surface in such a manner as to avoid
introduction of air pockets in the adhesive.
5. Set anchors to manufacturer's recommended torque, using a torque wrench.
6. Install zinc-coated steel anchors for interior and stainless-steel anchors for
exterior applications.
3.04 ACCOMMODATION OF DIFFERENTIAL SEISMIC MOTION
A. Install flexible connections in piping where they cross seismic joints, where adjacent
sections or branches are supported by different structural elements, and where the
connections terminate with connection to equipment that is anchored to a different
structural element from the one supporting the connections as they approach
equipment. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Hydronic Piping" for
piping flexible connections.
3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B. Perform tests and inspections.
C. Tests and Inspections:

1. Provide evidence of recent calibration of test equipment by a testing agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Schedule test with Owner, through Architect, before connecting anchorage
device to restrained component (unless post connection testing has been
approved), and with at least seven days' notice.
3. Obtain Architect's approval before transmitting test loads to structure. Provide
temporary load-spreading members.
4. Test at least four of each type and size of installed anchors and fasteners
selected by Architect.
5. Test to 90 percent of rated proof load of device.
6. Measure isolator restraint clearance.
7. Measure isolator deflection.
8. Verify snubber minimum clearances.
9. Air-Mounting System Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for
leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.
10. Air-Mounting System Operational Test: Test the compressed-air leveling system.
11. Test and adjust air-mounting system controls and safeties.
12. If a device fails test, modify all installations of same type and retest until
satisfactory results are achieved.
D. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
E. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.06 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust isolators after piping system is at operating weight.
B. Adjust limit stops on restrained spring isolators to mount equipment at normal operating
height. After equipment installation is complete, adjust limit stops so they are out of
contact during normal operation.
C. Adjust air-spring leveling mechanism.
D. Adjust active height of spring isolators.
E. Adjust restraints to permit free movement of equipment within normal mode of
operation.
3.07 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain air-mounting systems. Refer to Division 01
Section "Demonstration and Training."
3.08 APPLICATION
A. General
1. Refer to PART 2 - PRODUCTS of this specification for vibration isolation devices
identified on the schedule or specified herein.
B. Major Equipment
1. Unless otherwise shown or specified, all floor mounted major equipment shall be
set on concrete housekeeping pads as per recommendations of the
manufacturer. See schedule of mounting pads in this section.
2. Types and minimum static deflections of vibration isolation devices for major
equipment items shall be as scheduled on the drawings or specified here under.
3. Flexible duct connections shall be installed at all fan unit intakes, fan unit
discharges, and wherever else shown on the drawings.
4. Flexible pipe connections shall be installed at all pipe connections to vibration
isolated equipment in the positions shown on the drawings.
5. Electrical connections to vibration isolated equipment shall be flexible, as called
for in the electrical portion of the specification.
6. Snubbers or thrust restraints shall be installed on equipment as called for in the
schedule on the drawings or specified here under.
C. Miscellaneous Mechanical Equipment

1. Miscellaneous pieces of mechanical equipment such as domestic hot water
circulation pumps, hot water heat exchangers, storage tanks, and expansion
tanks shall be vibration isolated from the building structure by Type 2 or type 6
isolators unless their position in the piping system requires higher degrees of
isolation as called for under Pipe Isolation.
D. Piping
1. Provide flexible pipe connections in piping connected to vibration isolated
equipment, as called for and shown on drawings.
2. Anchor piping at the system side of the flexible connector.
3. All pipe/conduit penetrations of partitions, floor/ceiling/roof slabs must be sealed
airtight with acoustic sealant or mineral fibre and fire code compound.
E. Duct Work
1. Ducts within the specified limits which penetrate the building construction shall be
isolated from the building by using resilient penetration sleeve / seals.
2. Resilient lateral guides shall be used wherever lateral support of vertical duct
runs is required within the specified limits.
3.09 INSTALLATION OF VIBRATION ISOLATION EQUIPMENT
A. General
1. Locations of all vibration isolation equipment shall be selected for ease of
inspection and adjustment as well as for proper operation.
2. Installation of vibration isolation equipment shall be in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions.
B. Isolation Mounts
1. All vibration isolators shall be aligned squarely above or below mounting points of
the supported equipment.
2. Isolators for equipment with bases shall be located on the sides of the bases,
which are parallel to the equipment shaft unless this is not possible because of
physical constraints.
3. If a housekeeping pad is provided, the isolators shall bear on the housekeeping
pad and the isolator base plate shall rest entirely on the pad.
4. Hanger rods for vibration isolated support shall be connected to structural beams
or joists, not from the floor slab between beams and joists. Provide intermediate
support members as necessary.
5. Vibration isolation hanger elements shall be positioned as high as possible in the
hanger rod assembly, but not in contact with the building structure, and so that
the hanger housing may rotate a full 360 degrees about the rod axis without
contacting any object.
6. Parallel running pipes may be hung together on a trapeze, which is isolated from
the building. Isolator deflections must be the largest determined by the provisions
for pipe isolation. Do not mix isolated and non-isolated pipes on the same
trapeze.
7. No pipes or equipment shall be supported from other pipes or equipment.
8. Resiliently isolated pipes shall not contact the building construction or other
equipment.
9. The installed and operating heights of vibration isolators supporting any
equipment shall be identical. Limit stops shall be out of contact during normal
operation.
10. Adjust all leveling bolts and hanger rod bolts so that the isolated equipment is
level and in proper alignment with connecting ducts or pipes.
C. Bases
1. No equipment unit shall bear directly on vibration isolators unless its own frame
is suitably rigid to span between isolators and such direct support is approved by
the equipment manufacturer. This provision shall apply whether or not a base
frame is called for on the schedule. In the case that a base frame is required for
the unit because of the equipment manufacturer's requirements and is not
specifically called for on the equipment schedule, a base frame recommended by
the equipment manufacturer shall be provided.
2. Unless otherwise indicated, there is to be a minimum operating clearance of 38-
mm (1 1/2 inch) between inertia bases or steel frame bases and the floor
beneath the equipment. Position isolator mounting brackets and adjust isolators
so that the required clearance is maintained. The clearance space shall be
checked by the Contractor to ensure that no construction debris has been left to
short circuit or restrict the proper operation of the vibration isolation system.
D. Flexible Duct Connections
1. Sheet metal ducts or plenum openings shall be squarely aligned with the fan
discharge, fan intake, or adjacent duct section prior to installation of the flexible
connection, so that the clear length is approximately equal all the way around the
perimeter. Flexible duct connections shall not be installed until this provision is
met. The fan unit or adjacent duct section shall be able to move 25 mm (1 inch)
in any direction without causing metal to metal contact or stretching taut the
flexible connection.
E. Flexible Pipe Connections

1. Select flexible connections with axial and transverse movements, more than that
of the connected equipment. Use control cables where there is a chance of
exceeding the allowable axial movement.
2. Provide bronze union ends for flexible connections of 50-mm (2-inch) nom. dia.
and less, when used with copper piping.
F. Thrust Restraints
1. Snubbers shall be adjusted to clear the equipment base and to provide lateral
restraint during on / off cycling, but be out of contact during normal operation of
the equipment.
2. Thrust restraints shall be attached at the center line of thrust and symmetrically
on each of the units. Adjust the restraints to limit equipment movement to the
specified limit.
G. Resilient Penetration Sleeves / Seals

1. Penetration seals shall maintain an air tight seal around the penetrating element
and shall prevent rigid contact between the penetrating element and the building
structure. Fit the sleeve tightly to the building construction and seal airtight on
both sides of the construction penetrated with acoustical sealant.
3.010 SCHEDULE OF MOUNTING FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT
A. Selection of Vibration Isolators should be according to ASHRAE HVAC Applications

Handbook – 2015, Noise & Vibration Control’s Selection Guide for Vibration Isolation
(Table 47)
END OF SECTION
SECTION 23 0553
IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 REFERENCES
A. BS 1710 – Scheme for identification of piping systems.
B. ANSI A 13.1 - Scheme for identification of piping systems.
1.02 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Section Includes:
1. Equipment labels.
2. Warning signs and labels.
3. Pipe labels.
4. Duct labels.
5. Stencils.
6. Valve tags.
7. Warning tags.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Samples: For color, letter style, and graphic representation required for each
identification material and device.
C. Equipment Label Schedule: Include a listing of all equipment to be labeled with the
proposed content for each label.
D. Valve numbering scheme.
E. Valve Schedules: For each piping system to include in maintenance manuals.
1.04 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of

surfaces where devices are to be applied.
B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors.
C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.
KEO/21-7387-0004 23 0553 / 1 Identification For Hvac Piping And Equipment
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS

Vendors List (AVL).
2.02 COLORS
A. Conform to reference standards, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Co-ordinate with all other, similarly identified services and agree on a schedule, which
avoids confusing repetitions.
C. Comply with prevailing governmental regulations, where appropriate, like for fuel / gas
piping.
2.03 LETTERING AND TEXT
A. All the labelling, warning signs etc. shall be in English and Arabic. All numbering shall be
in Indian numerals.
B. Lettering shall not be smaller than 10 mm x 6 mm in size. Use larger size letters as
appropriate.
C. Lettering on plastic and metal plates shall be etched, engraved, embossed or made
otherwise in a permanent manner (stencilling on prepared surfaces excluded).
2.04 SELF ADHESIVE PLASTIC PIPE MARKERS FOR HVAC SERVICES
A. Two ply self adhesive vinyl tapes applied around the pipes with 12-mm overlap. Use 15-
cm wide tapes of colors as schedule below:
1. Refrigerant Liquid Line White.
2. Refrigerant Suction Line Navy Blue.
3. Chilled Water Supply Navy Blue / White / Navy Blue.
4. Chilled Water Return Sky Blue / White / Sky Blue.
5. Condensate Brown / White / Brown.
B. Two ply self adhesive vinyl strip markers of size 5 x 15cm (minimum) with white arrows
on contrasting background shall be provided to indicate direction of flow in pipe.
2.05 STENCILS
A. Use clean cut stencils of appropriate size, for making identification wording . The paint
used shall be semi-gloss enamel.
B. Identification numbering of HVAC equipment shall be stencilled on contrasting

background.

C. Stencils: Prepared with letter sizes according to ASME A13.1 for piping; minimum letter
height of 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) for ducts; and minimum letter height of 3/4 inch (19 mm)
for access panel and door labels, equipment labels, and similar operational instructions.
1. Stencil Material: Aluminum or Brass
2. Stencil Paint: Exterior, gloss, alkyd enamel or acrylic enamel black unless
otherwise indicated. Paint may be in pressurized spray-can form.
3. Identification Paint: Exterior, alkyd enamel or acrylic enamel in colors according
to ASME A13.1 unless otherwise indicated.
2.06 PLASTIC NAME PLATES
A. Three ply, rigid plastic name plates with black engraved lettering on light contrasting
background shall be used for identifying electrical control panels, technical cupboards,
plant rooms, and equipment. Fix these labels by adhesives or by metal screws.
2.07 VALVE IDENTIFICATION TAGS
A. Three ply rigid plastic tags with black engraved lettering on light contrasting background
shall be used for identifying valves. Each tag shall be minimum four (4) cm diameter in
size and shall have a drilled hole for attaching to valves with corrosion resistant metallic
chain.
2.08 WARNING GRIDS FOR BURIED SERVICES (TRACER TAPES)
A. Use colored (as coded) continuously printed vinyl tapes at midway between the surface
and pipe crown. Each grid shall be minimum 15 cm wide. Use metal coated tapes for
non-metallic pipes.
2.09 EQUIPMENT LABELS
A. Metal Labels for Equipment:

1. Material and Thickness: Brass, 0.032-inch (0.8-mm), Stainless steel, 0.025-inch
(0.64-mm) Aluminum, 0.032-inch (0.8-mm) or anodized aluminum, 0.032-inch
(0.8-mm)] minimum thickness and having predrilled or stamped holes for
attachment hardware.
2. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not
less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch (64 by 19 mm).
3. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) for name of units if viewing distance is
less than 24 inches (600 mm), 1/2 inch (13 mm) for viewing distances up to 72
inches (1830 mm), and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing
distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of
principal lettering.
4. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws.
5. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with
substrate.
B. Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number,

drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the
Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified.

C. Equipment Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8-1/2-by-11-
inch (A4) bond paper. Tabulate equipment identification number and identify Drawing
numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the
Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified. Equipment
schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.
2.010 WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS
A. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving,
1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.
B. Letter Color: Black, Blue, Red, White or Yellow.
C. Background Color: Black, Blue, Red, White or Yellow.
D. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F (71 deg C).
E. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than
2-1/2 by 3/4 inch (64 by 19 mm).
F. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) for name of units if viewing distance is less
than 24 inches (600 mm), 1/2 inch (13 mm) for viewing distances up to 72 inches (1830
mm), and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include
secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.
G. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws.
H. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.
I. Label Content: Include caution and warning information, plus emergency notification
instructions.
2.011 PIPE LABELS
A. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with

lettering indicating service, and showing flow direction.
B. Self-Adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adhesive

backing.
C. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or
abbreviations as used on Drawings, pipe size, and an arrow indicating flow direction.
1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to
accommodate both directions, or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate
flow direction.
2. Lettering Size: At least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) high.
2.012 DUCT LABELS
A. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving,
1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.

B. Letter Color: Black, Blue, Red, White or Yellow.
C. Background Color: Black, Blue, Red, White or Yellow.
D. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F (71 deg C).
E. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than
2-1/2 by 3/4 inch (64 by 19 mm).
F. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) for name of units if viewing distance is less
than 24 inches (600 mm), 1/2 inch (13 mm) for viewing distances up to 72 inches (1830
mm), and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include
secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.
G. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws.
H. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.
I. Duct Label Contents: Include identification of duct service using same designations or
abbreviations as used on Drawings, duct size, and an arrow indicating flow direction.
1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with duct system service lettering to
accommodate both directions, or as separate unit on each duct label to indicate
flow direction.
2. Lettering Size: At least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) high.
2.013 VALVE TAGS
A. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) letters for piping system
abbreviation and 1/2-inch (13-mm) numbers.
1. Tag Material: Brass, 0.032-inch (0.8-mm) minimum thickness and having
predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware.
2. Fasteners: Brass wire-link or beaded chain; or S-hook.
B. Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch (A4) bond paper.
Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag),
location of valve (room or space), normal-operating position (open, closed, or
modulating), and variations for identification. Mark valves for emergency shutoff and
similar special uses.
1. Valve-tag schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.
2.014 WARNING TAGS
A. Warning Tags: Preprinted or partially preprinted, accident-prevention tags, of

plasticized card stock with matte finish suitable for writing.
1. Size: 3 by 5-1/4 inches (75 by 133 mm) minimum Approximately 4 by 7 inches
(100 by 178 mm).
2. Fasteners: Brass grommet and wire or Reinforced grommet and wire or string.
3. Nomenclature: Large-size primary caption such as "DANGER," "CAUTION," or
"DO NOT OPERATE."
4. Color: Yellow background with black lettering.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Clean piping and equipment surface of substances that could impair bond of
identification devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible
primers, paints, and encapsulants.
3.02 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION
A. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment.
B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible.
C. All equipment shall be numbered, and these numbers should be included in as built
drawings and manuals.
3.03 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION
A. Piping Color-Coding: Painting of piping is specified in Division 09 Section Interior

Painting or High-Performance Coatings.
B. Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished
spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and
plenums; and exterior exposed locations as follows:
1. Near each valve and control device.
2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal
units. Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch.
3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures.
4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of
concealed piping.
5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.
6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet (15 m) along each run. Reduce intervals
to 25 feet (7.6 m) in areas of congested piping and equipment.
7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced
labels.
C. Pipe Label Color Schedule:

1. Chilled-Water Piping:
a. Background Color: Green.
b. Letter Color: White.
2. Condenser-Water Piping:
a. Background Color: Green.
b. Letter Color: White.
3. Refrigerant Piping:
a. Background Color: Black.
b. Letter Color: Orange.
3.04 DUCT LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Install plastic-laminated or self-adhesive duct labels with permanent adhesive on air
ducts in the following color codes:
1. Green: For cold-air supply ducts with white lettering color
2. Yellow: For hot-air supply ducts with black lettering color.
3. Blue: For exhaust-, outside-, relief-, return-, and mixed-air ducts with white
lettering color.
4. ASME A13.1 Colors and Designs: For hazardous material exhaust.
B. Locate labels near points where ducts enter into concealed spaces and at maximum
intervals of 50 feet (15 m) in each space where ducts are exposed or concealed by
removable ceiling system.
3.05 VALVE-TAG INSTALLATION
A. Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves; valves
within factory-fabricated equipment units; faucets; convenience and lawn-watering hose
connections; and HVAC terminal devices and similar roughing-in connections of end-
use fixtures and units. List tagged valves in a valve schedule.
B. Valve-Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, and color
scheme and with captions similar to those indicated in the following subparagraphs:
1. Valve-Tag Size and Shape:
a. Chilled Water: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm), round or square
b. Condenser Water: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm), round or square.
c. Refrigerant: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm), round or square
d. Hot Water: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm), round or square.
e. Gas: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm), round or square.
2. Valve-Tag Color:
a. Chilled Water: Green.
b. Condenser Water: Green.
c. Refrigerant: Black.
d. Hot Water: Green.
e. Gas: Yellow.
3. Letter Color:
a. Chilled Water: White.
b. Condenser Water: White.
c. Refrigerant: Orange.
d. Hot Water: White.
e. Gas: Black.
3.06 WARNING-TAG INSTALLATION
A. Write required message on, and attach warning tags to, equipment and other items
where required.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 23 0593
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. This Section includes Testing, Adjusting & Balancing (TAB) to produce design
objectives for the following:
1. Air Systems: All Air Systems and associated equipment and apparatus of
mechanical work
a. Constant-volume air systems.
2. Kitchen hood airflow balancing.
3. Space pressurization testing and adjusting.
4. Vibration measuring.
5. Sound level measuring.
6. Indoor-air quality measuring.
7. Verifying that automatic control devices are functioning properly.
8. Reporting results of activities and procedures specified in this Section.
9. Commercial Refrigeration Systems and associated equipment and apparatus of
mechanical work.
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. Adjust: To regulate fluid flow rate and air patterns at the terminal equipment, such as to
reduce fan speed or adjust a damper.
B. Balance: To proportion flows within the distribution system, including sub-mains,

branches, and terminals, according to indicated quantities.
C. Barrier or Boundary: Construction, either vertical or horizontal, such as walls, floors,

and ceilings that are designed and constructed to restrict the movement of airflow,
smoke, odors, and other pollutants.
D. Draft: A current of air, when referring to localized effect caused by one or more factors
of high air velocity, low ambient temperature, or direction of airflow, whereby more heat
is withdrawn from a person's skin than is normally dissipated.
E. NC: Noise criteria.
F. Procedure: An approach to and execution of a sequence of work operations to yield

repeatable results.
G. RC: Room criteria.
KEO/21-7387-0004 23 0593 / 1 Testing, Adjusting And Balancing For Hvac

H. Report Forms: Test data sheets for recording test data in logical order.
I. Smoke-Control System: An engineered system that uses fans to produce airflow and
pressure differences across barriers to limit smoke movement.
J. Smoke-Control Zone: A space within a building that is enclosed by smoke barriers and
is a part of a zoned smoke-control system.
K. Static Head: The pressure due to the weight of the fluid above the point of
measurement. In a closed system, static head is equal on both sides of the pump.
L. Suction Head: The height of fluid surface above the centerline of the pump on the
suction side.
M. System Effect: A phenomenon that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that
cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system.
N. System Effect Factors: Allowances used to calculate a reduction of the performance

ratings of a fan when installed under conditions different from those presented when the
fan was performance tested.
O. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.
P. Terminal: A point where the controlled medium, such as fluid or energy, enters or
leaves the distribution system.
Q. Test: A procedure to determine quantitative performance of systems or equipment.
R. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing (TAB) Firm: The entity responsible for performing and
reporting TAB procedures.
1.03 RELATED SECTIONS:
A. Related work to be coordinated and used in conjunction with this specification includes
but is not restricted to:
1. Section 23 0800 – Commissioning of HVAC
1.04 REFERENCES
A. ASHRAE 111, Practices for Measurement, Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Building
Heating, Ventilation, Air-conditioning, and Refrigeration Systems.
B. NEBB - Procedural Standards for Testing Balancing and Adjusting of Environmental

Systems, 4th Edition.
C. ADC - Test Code for Grilles, Registers, and Diffusers.
D. SMACNA - HVAC Systems Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing
E. AABC: Associated Air Balance Council.
F. BSRlA - Commissioning of VAV systems in Building; Application Guide 1/91;

G. BSRlA - Commissioning Water Systems Application Principles; Application Guide
2189.3
H. BSRlA - Commissioning HVAC Systems Division of Responsibilities; Technical

Memoranda 1188.1
I. BSRlA- Commissioning Management how to achieve a fully functioning building;

application Guide 512002
J. BSRlA- Pre Commissioning of Pipe work Systems, 2nd Edition; Application Guide
112001.1
K. BSRlA- Commissioning of building service installation –a guide for designers,

contractors and facilities managers. Construction Quality Forum (CQF) special report.
L. BSRlA- Achieving minimum outdoor air- commissioning and test procedures; application
Guide 1712000.
M. BSRlA- Guidance to the standard Specification for vibration testing of building services
installations; Facilities Management Specification 7.
N. BSRlA- Commissioning of Pipe work Systems – design considerations; application

Guide 20195.
O. ClBSE - Water Distribution Systems; Commissioning Code W.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: Within 45 days from Contractor's Notice to Proceed (Testing

Adjusting and Balancing), submit 3 copies of evidence that TAB firm and this Project's
TAB team members meet the qualifications specified in "Quality Assurance" Article.
B. Contract Documents Examination Report: Within 45 days from Contractor's Notice to

Proceed (TAB), submit 3 copies of the Contract Documents review report as specified in
Part 3.
C. Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within 60 days from Contractor's Notice to Proceed
(TAB), submit 3 copies of TAB strategies and step-by-step procedures as specified in
Part 3 "Preparation" Article. Include a complete set of report forms intended for use on
this Project.
D. Submit test sheet formats, drawings, schemes etc. for approval prior to commencement
of work
E. Certified TAB Reports: Submit two copies of reports prepared, as specified in this
Section, on approved forms certified by TAB firm.
F. Sample Report Forms: Submit two sets of sample TAB report forms.
G. Include identification and types of instruments used and their most recent calibration
date with submission of final test report

A. TAB Firm Qualifications: Engage an independent, certified TAB firm with at least 8
years of successful testing, adjusting, and balancing experience on projects with testing
and balancing requirements similar to those required for this project
B. Certification requirements: TAB firm to be certified by AABC or NEBB.
C. TAB Conference: Meet with Owner's and Architect's / Engineer’s representatives on

approval of TAB strategies and procedures plan to develop a mutual understanding of
the details. Ensure the participation of TAB team members, equipment manufacturers'
authorized service representatives, HVAC controls installers, and other support
personnel. Provide seven days' advance notice of scheduled meeting time and location.
1. Agenda Items: Include at least the following:
a. Submittal distribution requirements.
b. The Contract Documents examination report.
c. TAB plan.
d. Work schedule and Project-site access requirements.
e. Coordination and cooperation of trades and subcontractors.
f. Coordination of documentation and communication flow.
D. Certification of TAB Reports: Certify TAB field data reports. This certification includes
the following:
1. Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified
TAB reports.
2. Certify that TAB team complied with approved TAB plan and the procedures
specified and referenced in this Specification.
E. TAB Report Forms: Use standard forms from AABC's "National Standards for Testing
and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems."
F. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, and Accuracy: As described in ASHRAE 111, Section 5

“Instrumentation.”
G. Instrumentation Calibration: Calibrate instruments at least every six months or more

frequently if required by instrument manufacturer.
1. Keep an updated record of instrument calibration that indicates date of
calibration and the name of party performing instrument calibration.
1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy the site and existing building during entire
TAB period. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with
Owner's operations.
B. Partial Owner Occupancy: Owner may occupy completed areas of building before
Substantial Completion. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize
conflicts with Owner's operations.
1.08 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate the efforts of factory-authorized service representatives for systems and
equipment, HVAC controls installers, and other mechanics to operate HVAC systems
and equipment to support and assist TAB activities
B. Notice: Provide seven days' advance notice for each test. Include scheduled test dates
and times.
C. Perform TAB after leakage and pressure tests on air and water distribution systems
have been satisfactorily completed.
1.09 WARRANTY
A. National Project Performance Guarantee: Provide a guarantee forms stating that TAB
firm comply and guarantee the following provisions:
1. The certified TAB firm has tested and balanced systems according to the
Contract Documents.
2. Systems are balanced to optimum performance capabilities within design and
installation limits.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERES

Vendors List (AVL).
2.02 TEST INSTRUMENTS
A. Utilize test instruments and equipment for TAB work required, of type, precision, and
capacity as recommended by the AABC.
B. All equipment shall be properly calibrated with certification providing that recent
calibration has taken place.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine installed work and conditions under which testing is to be done to ensure that
work has been completed, cleaned and is operable. Do not proceed with TAB work
until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Tester
B. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to
discover conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and
equipment.
1. Contract Documents are defined in the General and Supplementary Conditions
of Contract.

2. Verify that balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells,
flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers,
are required by the Contract Documents. Verify that quantities and locations of
these balancing devices are accessible and appropriate for effective balancing
and for efficient system and equipment operation.
C. Examine approved submittal data of HVAC systems and equipment.
D. Examine Project Record Documents described in Division 01 Section "Project Record

Documents."
E. Examine design data, including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design

assumptions for environmental conditions and systems' output, and statements of
philosophies and assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls.
F. Examine equipment performance data including fan and pump curves. Relate
performance data to Project conditions and requirements, including system effects that
can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or
part of a system. Calculate system effect factors to reduce performance ratings of
HVAC equipment when installed under conditions different from those presented when
the equipment was performance tested at the factory. To calculate system effects for air
systems, use tables and charts found in AMCA 201, "Fans and Systems," Sections 7
through 10; or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems--Duct Design," Sections 5 and 6.
Compare this data with the design data and installed conditions.
G. Examine system and equipment installations to verify that they are complete and that
testing, cleaning, adjusting, and commissioning specified in individual Sections have
been performed.
H. Examine system and equipment test reports.
I. Examine HVAC system and equipment installations to verify that indicated balancing
devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices,
balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers, are properly installed, and
that their locations are accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for
efficient system and equipment operation.
J. Examine systems for functional deficiencies that cannot be corrected by adjusting and
balancing.
K. Examine HVAC equipment to ensure that clean filters have been installed, bearings are
greased, belts are aligned and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for
operation.
L. Examine terminal units, such as variable-air-volume boxes, to verify that they are
accessible, and their controls are connected and functioning.
M. Examine plenum ceilings used for supply air to verify that they are airtight. Verify that
pipe penetrations and other holes are sealed.
N. Examine strainers for clean screens and proper perforations.

O. Examine control valves for proper installation for their intended function of diverting or
mixing fluid flows.
P. Examine heat-transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight
fins.
Q. Examine system pumps to ensure absence of entrained air in the suction piping.
R. Examine equipment for installation and for properly operating safety interlocks and
controls.
S. Examine automatic temperature system components to verify the following:

1. Dampers, valves, and other controlled devices are operated by the intended
controller.
2. Dampers and valves are in the position indicated by the controller.
3. Integrity of valves and dampers for free and full operation and for tightness of
fully closed and fully open positions. This includes dampers in mixing boxes, and
variable-air-volume terminals.
4. Automatic modulating and shutoff valves, including two-way valves and three-
way mixing and diverting valves, are properly connected.
5. Thermostats and humidistats are located to avoid adverse effects of sunlight,
drafts, and cold walls.
6. Sensors are located to sense only the intended conditions.
7. Sequence of operation for control modes is according to the Contract
Documents.
8. Controller set points are set at indicated values.
9. Interlocked systems are operating.
10. Changeover from heating to cooling mode occurs according to indicated values.
T. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures.

Observe and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set
points if different from indicated values.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Prepare a TAB plan that includes strategies and step-by-step procedures.
B. Provide instruments required for testing, adjusting, and balancing operations. Make
instruments available to Engineers Representative to facilitate spot checks during
testing. Retain possession of instruments and remove at completion of services.
C. Complete system readiness checks and prepare system readiness reports. Verify the
following:
1. Permanent electrical power wiring is complete.
2. Automatic temperature-control systems are operational.
3. Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed.
4. Balance, smoke, and fire dampers are open.
5. Isolating and balancing valves are open and control valves are operational.
6. Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air-pattern adjustments are required
and access to balancing devices is provided.
7. Windows and doors can be closed so indicated conditions for system operations
can be met.
3.03 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING
A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures
contained in ASHRAE 111 and this Section.
B. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the
minimum extent necessary to allow adequate performance of procedures. After testing
and balancing, close probe holes and patch insulation with new materials identical to
those removed. Restore vapor barrier and finish according to insulation Specifications
for this Project. Obtain prior engineer approval for the use of plastic plugs with retainers
may be used to patch drilled holes in ductwork and housings.
C. Mark equipment and balancing device settings with paint or other suitable, permanent
identification material, including damper-control positions, valve position indicators, fan-
speed-control levers, and similar controls and devices, to show final settings.
D. Take and report testing and balancing measurements metric (SI) units.
3.04 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS
A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and
recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet
volumes with required fan volumes.
B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" duct layouts.
C. For variable-air-volume systems, develop a plan to simulate diversity.
D. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct airflow
measurements.
E. Check airflow patterns from the outside-air louvers and dampers and the return- and
exhaust-air dampers, through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers.
F. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters.
G. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection.
H. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path.
I. Check for airflow blockages.
J. Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning.
K. Check for proper sealing of air-handling unit components.
L. Check for proper sealing of air duct system.
3.05 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS
A. Adjust fans to deliver total indicated airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed
listed by fan manufacturer.

1. Measure fan static pressures to determine actual static pressure as follows:
a. Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from the fan as
practicable and upstream from restrictions in ducts such as elbows and
transitions.
b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible
connection.
c. Measure inlet static pressure of single-inlet fans in the inlet duct as near
the fan as possible, upstream from flexible connection and downstream
from duct restrictions.
d. Measure inlet static pressure of double-inlet fans through the wall of the
plenum that houses the fan.
2. Measure static pressure across each component that makes up an air-handling
unit, rooftop unit, and other air-handling and -treating equipment.
a. Simulate dirty filter operation and record the point at which maintenance
personnel must change filters.
3. Measure static pressures entering and leaving other devices such as sound
traps, heat recovery equipment, and air washers, under final balanced
conditions.
4. Compare design data with installed conditions to determine variations in design
static pressures versus actual static pressures. Compare actual system effect
factors with calculated system effect factors to identify where variations occur.
Recommend corrective action to align design and actual conditions.
5. Obtain approval from Architect for adjustment of fan speed higher or lower than
indicated speed. Make required adjustments to pulley sizes, motor sizes, and
electrical connections to accommodate fan-speed changes.
6. Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult
equipment manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers
and measure fan-motor amperage to ensure that no overload will occur.
Measure amperage in full cooling, full heating, economizer, and any other
operating modes to determine the maximum required brake horsepower.
B. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to
indicated airflows within specified tolerances.
1. Measure static pressure at a point downstream from the balancing damper and
adjust volume dampers until the proper static pressure is achieved.
a. Where sufficient space in submain and branch ducts is unavailable for
Pitot-tube traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and
inlets and calculate the total airflow for that zone.
2. Remeasure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted.
Continue to adjust submain and branch ducts to indicated airflows within
specified tolerances.
C. Measure terminal outlets and inlets without making adjustments.

1. Measure terminal outlets using a direct-reading hood or outlet manufacturer's
written instructions and calculating factors.
D. Adjust terminal outlets and inlets for each space to indicated airflows within specified
tolerances of indicated values. Make adjustments using volume dampers rather than
extractors and the dampers at air terminals.
1. Adjust each outlet in same room or space to within specified tolerances of
indicated quantities without generating noise levels above the limitations
prescribed by the Contract Documents.
2. Adjust patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts.
3.06 PROCEDURES FOR MOTORS
A. Motors, 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following
data:
1. Manufacturer, model, and serial numbers.
2. Motor horsepower rating.
3. Motor rpm.
4. Efficiency rating.
5. Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase.
6. Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase.
7. Starter thermal-protection-element rating.
B. Motors Driven by Variable-Frequency Controllers: Test for proper operation at speeds

varying from minimum to maximum. Test the manual bypass for the controller to prove
proper operation. Record observations, including controller manufacturer, model and
serial numbers, and nameplate data.
3.07 PROCEDURES FOR CONDENSING UNITS
A. Verify proper rotation of fans.
B. Measure entering- and leaving-air temperatures.
C. Record compressor data.
3.08 PROCEDURES FOR HEAT-TRANSFER COILS
A. Water Coils: Measure the following data for each coil:

1. Entering- and leaving-water temperature.
2. Water flow rate.
3. Water pressure drop.
4. Dry-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air.
5. Wet-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air for cooling coils.
6. Airflow.
7. Air pressure drop.
B. Electric-Heating Coils: Measure the following data for each coil:

1. Nameplate data.
2. Airflow.
3. Entering- and leaving-air temperature at full load.
4. Voltage and amperage input of each phase at full load and at each incremental
stage.
5. Calculated kilowatt at full load.
6. Fuse or circuit-breaker rating for overload protection.
C. Refrigerant Coils: Measure the following data for each coil:

1. Dry-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air.
2. Wet-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air.

3. Airflow.
4. Air pressure drop.
5. Refrigerant suction pressure and temperature.
3.09 PROCEDURES FOR TEMPERATURE MEASUREMENTS
A. During TAB, report the need for adjustment in temperature regulation within the
automatic temperature-control system.
B. Measure indoor wet- and dry-bulb temperatures every other hour for a period of two
successive eight-hour days, in each separately controlled zone, to prove correctness of
final temperature settings. Measure when the building or zone is occupied.
C. Measure outside-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures.
3.010 PROCEDURES FOR COMMERCIAL KITCHEN HOODS
A. Measure, adjust, and record the airflow of each kitchen hood. For kitchen hoods
designed with integral makeup air, measure and adjust the exhaust and makeup airflow.
Measure airflow by duct Pitot-tube traverse. If a duct Pitot-tube traverse is not possible,
provide an explanation in the report of the reason(s) why and also the reason why the
method used was chosen.
1. Install welded test ports in the sides of the exhaust duct for the duct Pitot-tube
traverse. Install each test port with a threaded cap that is liquid tight.
B. After balancing is complete, do the following:

1. Measure and record the static pressure at the hood exhaust-duct connection.
2. Measure and record the hood face velocity. Make measurements at multiple
points across the face of the hood. Perform measurements at a maximum of 12
inches (300 mm) between points and between any point and the perimeter.
Calculate the average of the measurements recorded. Verify that the hood
average face velocity complies with the Contract Documents and governing
codes.
3. Check the hood for capture and containment of smoke using a smoke emitting
device. Observe the smoke pattern. Make adjustments to room airflow patterns
to achieve optimum results.
C. Visually inspect the hood exhaust duct throughout its entire length in compliance with
authorities having jurisdiction. Begin at the hood connection and end at the point it
discharges outdoors. Report findings.
1. Check duct slopes as required.
2. Verify that duct access is installed as required.
3. Verify that point of termination is as required.
4. Verify that duct air velocity is within the range required.
5. Verify that duct is within a fire-rated enclosure.
D. Report deficiencies.
3.011 PROCEDURES FOR SPACE PRESSURIZATION MEASUREMENTS AND

ADJUSTMENTS

A. Before testing for space pressurization, observe the space to verify the integrity of the
space boundaries. Verify that windows and doors are closed and applicable safing,
gaskets, and sealants are installed. Report deficiencies and postpone testing until after
the reported deficiencies are corrected.
B. Measure, adjust, and record the pressurization of each room, each zone, and each
building by adjusting the supply, return, and exhaust airflows to achieve the indicated
conditions.
C. Measure space pressure differential where pressure is used as the design criteria, and
measure airflow differential where differential airflow is used as the design criteria for
space pressurization.
1. For pressure measurements, measure and record the pressure difference
between the intended spaces at the door with all doors in the space closed.
Record the high-pressure side, low-pressure side, and pressure difference
between each adjacent space.
2. For applications with cascading levels of space pressurization, begin in the most
critical space and work to the least critical space.
3. Test room pressurization first, then zones, and finish with building pressurization.
D. To achieve indicated pressurization, set the supply airflow to the indicated conditions
and adjust the exhaust and return airflow to achieve the indicated pressure or airflow
difference.
E. For spaces with pressurization being monitored and controlled automatically, observe
and adjust the controls to achieve the desired set point.
1. Compare the values of the measurements taken to the measured values of the
control system instruments and report findings.
2. Check the repeatability of the controls by successive tests designed to
temporarily alter the ability to achieve space pressurization. Test over
pressurization and under pressurization, and observe and report on the system's
ability to revert to the set point.
3. For spaces served by variable-air-volume supply and exhaust systems, measure
space pressurization at indicated airflow and minimum airflow conditions.
F. In spaces that employ multiple modes of operation, such as normal mode and
emergency mode or occupied mode and unoccupied mode, measure, adjust, and record
data for each operating mode.
G. Record indicated conditions and corresponding initial and final measurements. Report
deficiencies.
3.012 PROCEDURES FOR VIBRATION MEASUREMENTS
A. Use a vibration meter meeting the following criteria:

1. Solid-state circuitry with a piezoelectric accelerometer.
2. Velocity range of 0.1 to 10 inches per second (2.5 to 254 mm/s).
3. Displacement range of 1 to 100 mils (0.0254 to 2.54 mm).
4. Frequency range of at least 0 to 1000 Hz.
5. Capable of filtering unwanted frequencies.
B. Calibrate the vibration meter before each day of testing.

1. Use a calibrator provided with the vibration meter.
2. Follow vibration meter and calibrator manufacturer's calibration procedures.
C. Perform vibration measurements when other building and outdoor vibration sources are
at a minimum level and will not influence measurements of equipment being tested.
1. Turn off equipment in the building that might interfere with testing.
2. Clear the space of people.
D. Perform vibration measurements after air and water balancing and equipment testing is
complete.
E. Clean equipment surfaces in contact with the vibration transducer.
F. Position the vibration transducer according to manufacturer's written instructions and to

avoid interference with the operation of the equipment being tested.
G. Measure and record vibration on rotating equipment over 3 hp (2.2 kW).
H. Measure and record equipment vibration, bearing vibration, equipment base vibration,
and building structure vibration. Record velocity and displacement readings in the
horizontal, vertical, and axial planes.
1. Pumps:
a. Pump Bearing: Drive end and opposite end.
b. Motor Bearing: Drive end and opposite end.
c. Pump Base: Top and side.
d. Building: Floor.
e. Piping: To and from the pump after flexible connections.
2. Fans and HVAC Equipment with Fans:
a. Fan Bearing: Drive end and opposite end.
c. Equipment Casing: Top and side.
d. Equipment Base: Top and side.
e. Building: Floor.
f. Ductwork: To and from equipment after flexible connections.
g. Piping: To and from equipment after flexible connections.
3. Chillers and HVAC Equipment with Compressors:
a. Compressor Bearing: Drive end and opposite end.
c. Equipment Casing: Top and side.
d. Equipment Base: Top and side.
e. Building: Floor.
f. Piping: To and from equipment after flexible connections.
I. For equipment with vibration isolation, take floor measurements with the vibration
isolation blocked solid to the floor and with the vibration isolation floating. Calculate and
report the differences.
J. Inspect, measure, and record vibration isolation.

1. Verify that vibration isolation is installed in the required locations.
2. Verify that installation is level and plumb.
3. Verify that isolators are properly anchored.

4. For spring isolators, measure the compressed spring height, the spring OD, and
the travel-to-solid distance.
5. Measure the operating clearance between each inertia base and the floor or
concrete base below. Verify that there is unobstructed clearance between the
bottom of the inertia base and the floor.
3.013 PROCEDURES FOR SOUND-LEVEL MEASUREMENTS
A. Perform sound-pressure-level measurements with an octave-band analyzer complying

with ANSI S1.4 for Type 1 sound-level meters and ANSI S1.11 for octave-band filters.
Comply with requirements in ANSI S1.13, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Calibrate sound meters before each day of testing. Use a calibrator provided with the
sound meter complying with ANSI S1.40 and that has NIST certification.
C. Use a microphone that is suitable for the type of sound levels measured. For areas
where air velocities exceed 100 fpm (0.51 m/s), use a windscreen on the microphone.
D. Perform sound-level testing after air and water balancing and equipment testing are
complete.
E. Close windows and doors to the space.
F. Perform measurements when the space is not occupied and when the occupant noise
level from other spaces in the building and outside are at a minimum.
G. Clear the space of temporary sound sources so unrelated disturbances will not be
measured. Position testing personnel during measurements to achieve a direct line-of-
sight between the sound source and the sound-level meter.
H. Take sound measurements at a height approximately 48 inches (1200 mm) above the
floor and at least 36 inches (900 mm) from a wall, column, and other large surface
capable of altering the measurements.
I. Take sound measurements in dBA and in each of the 8 unweighted octave bands in the
frequency range of 63 to 8000 Hz.
J. Take sound measurements with the HVAC systems off to establish the background
sound levels and take sound measurements with the HVAC systems operating.
1. Calculate the difference between measurements. Apply a correction factor
depending on the difference and adjust measurements.
K. Perform sound testing at critical locations on Project for each of the space types; offices,
bedrooms, auditorium, classrooms, conference, spaces with NC 25 or lower,
mechanical rooms, etc. If testing multiple locations for each space type, select at least
one location that is near and at least one location that is remote from the predominant
sound source.
3.014 PROCEDURES FOR INDOOR-AIR QUALITY MEASUREMENTS

A. After air balancing is complete and with HVAC systems operating at indicated
conditions, perform indoor-air quality testing.
B. Observe and record the following conditions for each HVAC system:
1. The distance between the outside-air intake and the closest exhaust fan
discharge, cooling tower, flue termination, or vent termination.
2. Specified filters are installed. Check for leakage around filters.
3. Cooling coil drain pans have a positive slope to drain.
4. Cooling coil condensate drain trap maintains an air seal.
5. Evidence of water damage.
6. Insulation in contact with the supply, return, and outside air is dry and clean.
C. Measure and record indoor conditions served by each HVAC system. Make
measurements at multiple locations served by the system if required to satisfy the
following:
1. Most remote area.
2. One location per floor.
3. One location for every 5000 sq. ft. (500 sq. m).
D. Measure and record the following indoor conditions for each location two times at two-
hour intervals, and in accordance with ASHRAE 113:
1. Temperature.
2. Relative humidity.
3. Air velocity.
4. Concentration of carbon dioxide (ppm).
5. Concentration of carbon monoxide (ppm).
6. Nitrogen oxides (ppm).
7. Formaldehyde (ppm).
3.015 TEMPERATURE-CONTROL VERIFICATION
A. Verify that controllers are calibrated and commissioned.
B. Check transmitter and controller locations and note conditions that would adversely
affect control functions.
C. Record controller settings and note variances between set points and actual
measurements.
D. Check the operation of limiting controllers (i.e., high- and low-temperature controllers).
E. Check free travel and proper operation of control devices such as damper and valve
operators.
F. Check the sequence of operation of control devices. Note air pressures and device
positions and correlate with airflow and water flow measurements. Note the speed of
response to input changes.
G. Check the interaction of electrically operated switch transducers.
H. Check the interaction of interlock and lockout systems.

I. Check main control supply-air pressure and observe compressor and dryer operations.
J. Record voltages of power supply and controller output. Determine whether the system
operates on a grounded or nongrounded power supply.
K. Note operation of electric actuators using spring return for proper fail-safe operations.
3.016 TOLERANCES
A. Set HVAC system airflow and water flow rates within the following tolerances:
1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans: Plus 5 to plus 10
percent.
2. Air Outlets and Inlets: 0 to minus 10 percent.
3. Heating-Water Flow Rate: 0 to minus 10 percent.
4. Cooling-Water Flow Rate: 0 to minus 5 percent.
3.017 REPORTING
A. Initial Construction-Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract Documents as

specified in "Examination" Article, prepare a report on the adequacy of design for
systems' balancing devices. Recommend changes and additions to systems' balancing
devices to facilitate proper performance measuring and balancing. Recommend
changes and additions to HVAC systems and general construction to allow access for
performance measuring and balancing devices.
B. Status Reports: As Work progresses, prepare reports to describe completed

procedures, procedures in progress, and scheduled procedures. Include a list of
deficiencies and problems found in systems being tested and balanced. Prepare a
separate report for each system and each building floor for systems serving multiple
floors.
3.018 FINAL REPORT
A. General: Typewritten, or computer printout in letter-quality font, on standard bond

paper, in three-ring binder, tabulated and divided into sections by tested and balanced
systems.
B. Include a certification sheet in front of binder signed and sealed by the certified testing
and balancing engineer.
1. Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration.
C. Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field report data, include the following:
1. Pump curves.
2. Fan curves.
3. Manufacturers' test data.
4. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers.
5. Other information relative to equipment performance, but do not include Shop
Drawings and Product Data.

D. General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data in
the final report, as applicable:
1. Title page.
2. Name and address of TAB firm.
3. Project name.
4. Project location.
5. Architect's name and address.
6. Engineer's name and address.
7. Contractor's name and address.
8. Report date.
9. Signature of TAB firm who certifies the report.
10. Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the
report. Number each page in the report.
11. Summary of contents including the following:
a. Indicated versus final performance.
b. Notable characteristics of systems.
c. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract
Documents.
12. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment.
13. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer, type size, and fittings.
14. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports varies from
indicated values.
15. Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms including the following:
a. Settings for outside-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers.
b. Conditions of filters.
c. Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions.
d. Face and bypass damper settings at coils.
e. Fan drive settings including settings and percentage of maximum pitch
diameter.
f. Inlet vane settings for variable-air-volume systems.
g. Settings for supply-air, static-pressure controller.
h. Other system operating conditions that affect performance.
E. System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution systems.
Present each system with single-line diagram and include the following:
1. Quantities of outside, supply, return, and exhaust airflows.
2. Water flow rates.
3. Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes.
4. Pipe and valve sizes and locations.
5. Terminal units.
6. Balancing stations.
7. Position of balancing devices.
F. Air-Handling Unit Test Reports: For air-handling units with coils, include the following:
1. Unit Data: Include the following:
a. Unit identification.
b. Location.
c. Make and type.
d. Model number and unit size.
e. Manufacturer's serial number.
f. Unit arrangement and class.
g. Discharge arrangement.
h. Sheave make, size in inches (mm), and bore.
i. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center, and amount of adjustments in
inches (mm).
j. Number of belts, make, and size.
k. Number of filters, type, and size.
2. Motor Data:
a. Make and frame type and size.
b. Horsepower and rpm.
c. Volts, phase, and hertz.
d. Full-load amperage and service factor.
e. Sheave make, size in inches (mm), and bore.
f. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center, and amount of adjustments in
inches (mm).
3. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):
a. Total airflow rate in cfm (L/s).
b. Total system static pressure in inches wg (Pa).
c. Fan rpm.
d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg (Pa).
e. Filter static-pressure differential in inches wg (Pa).
f. Preheat coil static-pressure differential in inches wg (Pa).
g. Cooling coil static-pressure differential in inches wg (Pa).
h. Heating coil static-pressure differential in inches wg (Pa).
i. Outside airflow in cfm (L/s).
j. Return airflow in cfm (L/s).
k. Outside-air damper position.
l. Return-air damper position.
m. Damper position.
G. Apparatus-Coil Test Reports:

1. Coil Data:
a. System identification.
b. Location.
c. Coil type.
d. Number of rows.
e. Fin spacing in fins per inch (mm) o.c.
f. Make and model number.
g. Face area in sq. ft. (sq. m).
h. Tube size in NPS (DN).
i. Tube and fin materials.
j. Circuiting arrangement.
a. Airflow rate in cfm (L/s).
b. Average face velocity in fpm (m/s).
c. Air pressure drop in inches wg (Pa).
d. Outside-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F (deg C).
e. Return-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F (deg C).
f. Entering-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F (deg C).
g. Leaving-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F (deg C).
h. Water flow rate in gpm (L/s).
i. Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig (kPa).
j. Entering-water temperature in deg F (deg C).
k. Leaving-water temperature in deg F (deg C).
l. Refrigerant expansion valve and refrigerant types.
m. Refrigerant suction pressure in psig (kPa).
n. Refrigerant suction temperature in deg F (deg C).
H. Electric-Coil Test Reports: For electric furnaces, duct coils, and electric coils installed in
central-station air-handling units, include the following:
1. Unit Data:
b. Location.
c. Coil identification.
d. Capacity in Btuh (kW).
e. Number of stages.
f. Connected volts, phase, and hertz.
g. Rated amperage.
h. Airflow rate in cfm (L/s).
i. Face area in sq. ft. (sq. m).
j. Minimum face velocity in fpm (m/s).
a. Heat output in Btuh (kW).
b. Airflow rate in cfm (L/s).
c. Air velocity in fpm (m/s).
d. Entering-air temperature in deg F (deg C).
e. Leaving-air temperature in deg F (deg C).
f. Voltage at each connection.
g. Amperage for each phase.
I. Fan Test Reports: For supply, return, and exhaust fans, include the following:
1. Fan Data:
b. Location.
c. Make and type.
d. Model number and size.
e. Manufacturer's serial number.
f. Arrangement and class.
g. Sheave make, size in inches (mm), and bore.
h. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center, and amount of adjustments in
inches (mm).
2. Motor Data:
a. Make and frame type and size.
b. Horsepower and rpm.
c. Volts, phase, and hertz.
d. Full-load amperage and service factor.
e. Sheave make, size in inches (mm), and bore.
f. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center, and amount of adjustments in
inches (mm).
g. Number of belts, make, and size.
a. Total airflow rate in cfm (L/s).
b. Total system static pressure in inches wg (Pa).
c. Fan rpm.
d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg (Pa).
e. Suction static pressure in inches wg (Pa).
J. Round, Flat-Oval, and Rectangular Duct Traverse Reports: Include a diagram with a
grid representing the duct cross-section and record the following:
1. Report Data:
a. System and air-handling unit number.
b. Location and zone.
c. Traverse air temperature in deg F (deg C).
d. Duct static pressure in inches wg (Pa).
e. Duct size in inches (mm).
f. Duct area in sq. ft. (sq. m).
g. Indicated airflow rate in cfm (L/s).
h. Indicated velocity in fpm (m/s).
i. Actual airflow rate in cfm (L/s).
j. Actual average velocity in fpm (m/s).
k. Barometric pressure in psig (Pa).
K. Air-Terminal-Device Reports:
1. Unit Data:
a. System and air-handling unit identification.
c. Test apparatus used.
d. Area served.
e. Air-terminal-device make.
f. Air-terminal-device number from system diagram.
g. Air-terminal-device type and model number.
h. Air-terminal-device size.
i. Air-terminal-device effective area in sq. ft. (sq. m).
b. Air velocity in fpm (m/s).
c. Preliminary airflow rate as needed in cfm (L/s).
d. Preliminary velocity as needed in fpm (m/s).
e. Final airflow rate in cfm (L/s).
f. Final velocity in fpm (m/s).
g. Space temperature in deg F (deg C).
L. System-Coil Reports: For reheat coils and water coils of terminal units, include the
following:
1. Unit Data:
a. System and air-handling unit identification.
c. Room or riser served.
d. Coil make and size.
e. Flowmeter type.
b. Entering-water temperature in deg F (deg C).
c. Leaving-water temperature in deg F (deg C).
d. Water pressure drop in feet of head or psig (kPa).
e. Entering-air temperature in deg F (deg C).
f. Leaving-air temperature in deg F (deg C).

M. Compressor and Condenser Reports: For refrigerant side of unitary systems, stand-
alone refrigerant compressors, air-cooled condensing units, or water-cooled condensing
units, include the following:
1. Unit Data:
a. Unit identification.
b. Location.
c. Unit make and model number.
d. Compressors make.
e. Compressor model and serial numbers.
f. Refrigerant weight in lb (kg).
g. Entering-air, dry-bulb temperature in deg F (deg C).
h. Leaving-air, dry-bulb temperature in deg F (deg C).
i. Condenser entering-water temperature in deg F (deg C).
j. Condenser leaving-water temperature in deg F (deg C).
k. Condenser-water temperature differential in deg F (deg C).
l. Condenser entering-water pressure in feet of head or psig (kPa).
m. Condenser leaving-water pressure in feet of head or psig (kPa).
n. Condenser-water pressure differential in feet of head or psig (kPa).
o. Control settings.
p. Unloader set points.
q. Low-pressure-cutout set point in psig (kPa).
r. High-pressure-cutout set point in psig (kPa).
s. Suction pressure in psig (kPa).
t. Suction temperature in deg F (deg C).
u. Condenser refrigerant pressure in psig (kPa).
v. Condenser refrigerant temperature in deg F (deg C).
w. Oil pressure in psig (kPa).
x. Oil temperature in deg F (deg C).
y. Voltage at each connection.
z. Amperage for each phase.
aa. Kilowatt input.
bb. Crankcase heater kilowatt.
cc. Number of fans.
dd. Condenser fan rpm.
ee. Condenser fan airflow rate in cfm (L/s).
ff. Condenser fan motor make, frame size, rpm, and horsepower.
gg. Condenser fan motor voltage at each connection.
hh. Condenser fan motor amperage for each phase.
N. Vibration Measurement Reports:

1. Date and time of test.
2. Vibration meter manufacturer, model number, and serial number.
3. Equipment designation, location, equipment, speed, motor speed, and motor
horsepower.
4. Diagram of equipment showing the vibration measurement locations.
5. Measurement readings for each measurement location.
6. Calculate isolator efficiency using measurements taken.
7. Description of predominant vibration source.
O. Sound Measurement Reports: Record sound measurements on octave band and dBA
test forms and on an NC or RC chart indicating the decibel level measured in each

frequency band for both "background" and "HVAC system operating" readings. Record
each tested location on a separate NC or RC chart. Record the following on the forms:
1. Date and time of test. Record each tested location on its own NC curve.
2. Sound meter manufacturer, model number, and serial number.
3. Space location within the building including floor level and room number.
4. Diagram or color photograph of the space showing the measurement location.
5. Time weighting of measurements, either fast or slow.
6. Description of the measured sound: steady, transient, or tonal.
7. Description of predominant sound source.
P. Indoor-Air Quality Measurement Reports for Each HVAC System:

1. HVAC system designation.
2. Date and time of test.
3. Outdoor temperature, relative humidity, wind speed, and wind direction at start of
test.
4. Room number or similar description for each location.
5. Measurements at each location.
6. Observed deficiencies.
Q. Instrument Calibration Reports:

1. Report Data:
a. Instrument type and make.
b. Serial number.
c. Application.
d. Dates of use.
e. Dates of calibration.
3.019 INSPECTIONS
A. Initial Inspection:
1. After testing and balancing are complete, operate each system and randomly
check measurements to verify that the system is operating according to the final
test and balance readings documented in the Final Report.
2. Randomly check the following for each system:
a. Measure airflow of at least 10 percent of air outlets.
b. Measure water flow of at least 5 percent of terminals.
c. Measure room temperature at each thermostat/temperature sensor.
Compare the reading to the set point.
d. Measure sound levels at two locations.
e. Measure space pressure of at least 10 percent of locations.
f. Verify that balancing devices are marked with final balance position.
g. Note deviations to the Contract Documents in the Final Report.
B. Final Inspection:
1. After initial inspection is complete request that a final inspection be made. TAB
firm test and balance engineer shall conduct the inspection in the presence of
Owner / engineer.
2. Owner / Engineer can randomly select measurements documented in the final
report to be rechecked. The rechecking shall be limited to either minimum 15
percent of the total measurements recorded, or the extent of measurements that
can be accomplished in a normal 2 business days.

3. If the rechecks yield measurements that differ from the measurements
documented in the final report by more than the tolerances allowed, the
measurements shall be noted as "FAILED."
4. If the number of "FAILED" measurements is greater than 10 percent of the total
measurements checked during the final inspection, the testing and balancing
shall be considered incomplete and shall be rejected.
5. TAB firm shall recheck all measurements and make adjustments. Revise the
final report and balancing device settings to include all changes and resubmit the
final report.
6. Request a second final inspection. If the second final inspection also fails,
Owner shall contract the services of another TAB firm to complete the testing and
balancing in accordance with the Contract Documents and deduct the cost of the
services from the final payment.
3.020 RELIABILITY TESTS
A. After satisfactory completion of total system balancing and commissioning, Contractor

shall conduct system reliability tests for a period of 30 consecutive days; during which all
of the HVAC system shall operate without stoppage, adjustment, repair etc.
B. In the event of any stoppage, adjustment or repair (normal running adjustment

excluded), the test shall be voided and started all over again after completion of
adjustment and / or repair.
C. Reliability test for refrigeration / cooling plant and / or system shall take place between
1st of June and 30th of September and for heating plant and / or system between 16th
of November and 15th of February only.
D. During reliability tests, Contractor shall take spot readings as directed by the owner
representative to confirm that the system balance is maintained. Contractor shall
prepare and fill in log sheets recording test results and submit the same in a suitable
format, at the end of the test.
E. Completion certificates for HVAC system will be issued only after successful completion
of reliability tests.
3.021 ADDITIONAL TESTS
A. Within 90 days of completing TAB, perform additional testing and balancing to verify that
balanced conditions are being maintained throughout and to correct unusual conditions.
B. Seasonal Periods: If initial TAB procedures were not performed during near-peak
summer and winter conditions, perform additional testing, inspecting, and adjusting
during near-peak summer and winter conditions.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 23 0700
HVAC INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 INSULATION GENERAL
A. The whole of the insulation work shall be carried out by an approved specialist insulation
Contractor. All allowances shall be included for arranging a specialist subcontract
accordingly and for informing the specialist Sub-contractor of all conditions relating to
the Contract and for coordinating his works with the remainder of the works.
B. All allowances shall be included for informing the specialist Sub-contractor of all details
of the building structure, program arrangements, and other relevant details at the time of
tender and for all necessary visits to site by the Sub-contractor or his workers.
C. All insulation shall be in accordance with British Standard Specifications (unless

specified elsewhere), A.S.T.M standards and Codes of Practice in all respects.
D. In addition to complying with the relevant standards, all insulating material shall be free
from Asbestos and with low VOC.
E. Insulating materials shall be acceptable only if they are equal to or better than the
grades or classes of fire resistance as follows:
1. B.S. 476, Part 4, (Noncombustible grade.)
2. B.S. 476 Part 5 Class P, (Not easily ignitable.)
3. B.S. 476, Part 6, (Fire Propagation Index a maximum of 12.6.)
4. B.S. 476, Part 7, Class 1, (Surface spread of flame.)
5. B.S. 476 Part 9, (Production of emitted smoke shall not give more than 35%
obscuration of the light beam.)
F. All insulation finishes, and coverings shall be classified as Class 0 surface spread when
tested in accordance with B.S. 476, Part 6 & Part 7.
G. All adhesives, mastics, coatings, sealers and primers shall be classified as Class 1
surface spread when tested in accordance with B.S. 476, part 7, and shall have low
VOC content. They shall not in any way attack the insulation or the surface to which the
insulation is being applied and shall be suitable for the working temperatures.
1. Insulation Materials:
a. Cellular glass/Fibre Glass
b. Flexible elastomeric/Elastomeric rubber
KEO/21-7387-0004 23 0700 / 1 Hvac Insulation

c. Mineral fiber/Mineral wool
d. Polystyrene
e. Physically crosslinked Polyolefin insulation
f. Polyurethane
g. Styrofoam
2. Fire-rated insulation systems.
3. Insulating cements.
4. Adhesives.
5. Mastics.
6. Lagging adhesives.
7. Sealants.
8. Factory-applied jackets.
9. Field-applied jackets.
10. Tapes.
11. Securements.
12. Corner angles.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 22 Section "Plumbing Insulation."
2. Division 23 Section "Metal Ducts" for duct liners.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity,
thickness, and jackets (both factory and field applied, if any).
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Detail application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at hangers for each
type of insulation and hanger.
2. Detail attachment and covering of heat tracing inside insulation.
3. Detail insulation application at pipe expansion joints for each type of insulation.
4. Detail insulation application at elbows, fittings, flanges, valves, and specialties for
each type of insulation.
5. Detail removable insulation at piping specialties, equipment connections, and
access panels.
6. Detail application of field-applied jackets.
7. Detail application at linkages of control devices.
8. Detail field application for each equipment type.
C. Samples: For each type of insulation and jacket indicated. Identify each Sample,
describing product and intended use.
1. Sample Sizes:
a. Submit samples of all types of insulation for approval. Submit pipe
insulation samples 300 mm long x 25 mm inside x 125 mm outside
diameter, and flat samples 300 mm x 300 mm x 25 mm, minimum size.
b. Submit with samples, the full technical brochures.
c. Where the specification calls for additional treatments, such as wrapping
and waterproofing, submit also a completed sample of similar size.
d. All samples after approval are to be retained on site to be a reference for
future work.

D. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.
E. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulation
materials, sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets, with requirements indicated.
Include dates of tests and test methods employed.
F. Field quality-control reports.
A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed three (3)
years minimum experience.
B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Insulation and related materials shall have fire-

test-response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per
ASTM E 84 (UL 723), NFPA 255, FM 4924 approved; by a testing and inspecting
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket
materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate
markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.
1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-
developed index of 50 or less.
2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke-
developed index of 150 or less.
C. Mockups: Before installing insulation, build mockups for each type of insulation and
finish listed below to demonstrate quality of insulation application and finishes. Build
mockups in the location indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. Use
materials indicated for the completed Work.
1. Piping Mockups:
a. One 10-foot (3-m) section of NPS 2 (DN 50) straight pipe.
b. One each of a 90-degree threaded, welded, and flanged elbow.
c. One each of a threaded, welded, and flanged tee fitting.
d. One NPS 2 (DN 50) or smaller valve, and one NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) or
larger valve.
e. Four support hangers including hanger shield and insert.
f. One threaded strainer and one flanged strainer with removable portion of
insulation.
g. One threaded reducer and one welded reducer.
h. One pressure temperature tap.
i. One mechanical coupling.
2. Ductwork Mockups:
a. One 10-foot (3-m) section each of rectangular and round straight duct.
b. One each of a 90-degree mitered round and rectangular elbow, and one
each of a 90-degree radius round and rectangular elbow.
c. One rectangular branch takeoff and one round branch takeoff from a
rectangular duct. One round tee fitting.
d. One rectangular and round transition fitting.
e. Four support hangers for round and rectangular ductwork.

3. For each mockup, fabricate cutaway sections to allow observation of application
details for insulation materials, adhesives, mastics, attachments, and jackets.
4. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard
for judging the completed Work.
5. Demolish and remove mockups when directed.
D. Insulation material shall comply with the following British Standard:

1. BS 476 (Part 4,5, 6, 7,9)
2. BS 874
3. BS2972
4. BS3958 (Part 4,5)
5. BS 5422
6. BS6676 (Part 1)
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with

appropriate ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use
temperature.
B. Protect insulation from moisture and dirt by inside storage and enclosure and polythene
wrapping in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendation.
1.06 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in
Division 23 Section "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment."
B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application,
duct Installer for duct insulation application, and equipment Installer for equipment
insulation application. Before preparing piping and ductwork Shop Drawings, establish
and maintain clearance requirements for installation of insulation and field-applied
jackets and finishes and for space required for maintenance.
1.07 SCHEDULING
A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems. Insulation application

may begin on segments that have satisfactory test results.
1.08 MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Submit maintenance data for each type of mechanical insulation. Include this data,
product data and certifications in the maintenance manual.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS

Vendors List (AVL).
2.02 INSULATION MATERIALS
A. Insulating materials shall have thermal conductivity values not more than those listed as
follows:
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
MATERIAL TYPE THERMAL CONDUCTIVITY.
W/M/DEG.C
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Mineral wool Sectional 0.04
Mineral wool Slabs 0.04
Fibre Glass All 0.034
Closed Cell All 0.035
(elastomeric foam)
Polyurethane Sectional 0.025
Styrofoam Rigid 0.026
Polyolefin All 0.032
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
All conductivity figures are rated at an average temperature of 23 deg C.The closed
cell elastomeric rubber insulation shall have following characteristics in addition to
clause above:
1. Water vapour permeability 0.09 ugm/Nh, BS 4370/2 (= 7000 to DIN 52615)
(OR) < 0.05 Perm-inch
2. Density 50 ±10 kg / m3 or 2.54Lb / ft3 to 3.75Lb / ft3
3. Closed cell content > 90%.
4. Corrosion risk assessment Din 1988 / 7 Certified.
5. Noise reduction Din 4109 up to 32 dB (A).
6. Thermal conductivity of 0.035 w/mk at 23°C mean temperature to BS
874 PART 2 – 86 (DIN 52613, 52612) or ASTM C518
B. Material shall be FM 4924 or UL 723 approved and carry a stamp on the facing.
C. The insulation thickness for pipes and ducts shall be verified by the specialist supplier/
manufacturer to confirm no condensation.
D. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.
E. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride
content of less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.
F. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable
according to ASTM C 795.
G. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the
manufacturing process.
H. Calcium Silicate:

1. Preformed Pipe Sections: Flat-, curved-, and grooved-block sections of
noncombustible, inorganic, hydrous calcium silicate with a non-asbestos fibrous
reinforcement. Comply with ASTM C 533, Type I.
2. Flat-, curved-, and grooved-block sections of noncombustible, inorganic, hydrous
calcium silicate with a non-asbestos fibrous reinforcement. Comply with
ASTM C 533, Type I.
3. Prefabricated Fitting Covers: Comply with ASTM C 450 and ASTM C 585 for
dimensions used in preforming insulation to cover valves, elbows, tees, and
flanges.
I. Cellular Glass: Inorganic, incombustible, foamed or cellulated glass with annealed,

rigid, hermetically sealed cells. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in
"Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.
1. Block Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type I.
2. Special-Shaped Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type III.
3. Board Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type IV.
4. Preformed Pipe Insulation without Jacket: Comply with ASTM C 552, Type II,
Class 1.
5. Preformed Pipe Insulation with Factory-Applied [ASJ] [ASJ-SSL]: Comply with
ASTM C 552, Type II, Class 2.
6. Factory fabricate shapes according to ASTM C 450 and ASTM C 585.
J. Flexible Elastomeric: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials. Comply with

ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials and Type II for sheet materials.
K. Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting

resin. Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II and ASTM C 1290, Type III with factory-
applied FSK jacket. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-
Applied Jackets" Article.
L. High-Temperature, Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with

a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 553, Type V, without factory-applied jacket.
M. Mineral-Fiber Board Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting

resin. Comply with ASTM C 612, Type IA or Type IB. For duct and plenum
applications, provide insulation with factory-applied FSK jacket. For equipment
applications, provide insulation with factory-applied FSK jacket. Factory-applied jacket
requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.
N. High-Temperature, Mineral-Fiber Board Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with

a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 612, Type III, without factory-applied
jacket.
O. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation:

1. Type I, 850 deg F (454 deg C) Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a
thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A, with factory-
applied ASJ-SSL. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-
2. Type II, 1200 deg F (649 deg C) Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a
thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 547, Type II, Grade A, with factory-
applied ASJ-SSL. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-

P. Mineral-Fiber, Pipe and Tank Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a
thermosetting resin. Semirigid board material with factory-applied FSK jacket complying
with ASTM C 1393, Type II or Type IIIA Category 2, or with properties similar to
ASTM C 612, Type IB. Nominal density is 2.5 lb/cu. ft. (40 kg/cu. m) or more. Thermal
conductivity (k-value) at 100 deg F (55 deg C) is 0.29 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F (0.042
W/m x K) or less. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied
Jackets" Article.
Q. Mineral-Fiber, Pipe Insulation Wicking System: Preformed pipe insulation complying

with ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A, with absorbent cloth factory applied to the entire
inside surface of preformed pipe insulation and extended through the longitudinal joint to
outside surface of insulation under insulation jacket. Factory apply a white, polymer,
vapor-retarder jacket with self-sealing adhesive tape seam and evaporation holes
running continuously along the longitudinal seam, exposing the absorbent cloth.
R. Phenolic:
1. Preformed pipe insulation of rigid, expanded, closed-cell structure. Comply with
ASTM C 1126, Type III, Grade 1.
2. Block insulation of rigid, expanded, closed-cell structure. Comply with
ASTM C 1126, Type II, Grade 1.
3. Factory fabricate shapes according to ASTM C 450 and ASTM C 585.
4. Factory-Applied Jacket: Requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets"
Article.
a. Preformed Pipe Insulation: ASJ.
b. Board for Duct and Plenum Applications: ASJ.
c. Board for Equipment Applications: ASJ.
S. Physically cross-linked polyolefin foam with factory applied reinforced aluminium foil.
Insulation shall have the following specifications:
1. Physically cross-linked, closed cell polyolefin foam with factory applied reinforced
aluminium foil and factory applied acrylic adhesive backing.
2. Exceed the minimum thickness to prevent condensation.
3. Density: 25 kg/m3 (foam core only).
4. Thermal Conductivity (ASTM C518): Maximum 0.032 W/m.°K at mean
temperature 23°C.
5. Water absorption: <0.2 % v/v.
6. Water Vapour permeability (ASTM E96): Maximum 2.3 x 10-15 kg/Pa.s.m,
(µ>80,000).
7. Service Temperature Range: - 80°C ~ +80°C (adhesive backing).
8. Zero mould growth when tested to ASTM G21.
9. Fire Rating:
a. Class 0 to BS476 Parts 6 and 7.
b. Euroclass B-S2,d0 classification according to EN 13501Part 1.
c. Complies with NFPA 90A and B (ASTM E84 25/50 rating).
d. Complies with FM 4924 fire performance criteria and “FM Approved” by
FM Approvals certification body.
10. Smoke Density and Toxicity:
a. Complies with the requirements of International Maritime Organization
Resolution MSC 61(67) Part 2.
b. Dm<200 (ISO 5659 Part 2 gas analysis); combustion gases CO, HCl, HF,
NOx, HBr, HCN and SO2 to be within the maximum allowable

concentrations of International Maritime Organization Resolution MSC
61(67) Part 2.
2.03 FIRE-RATED INSULATION SYSTEMS
A. Fire-Rated Board: Structural-grade, press-molded, xonolite calcium silicate, fireproofing

board suitable for operating temperatures up to 1700 deg F (927 deg C). Comply with
ASTM C 656, Type II, Grade 6. tested and certified to provide a 2-hour fire rating by a
NRTL acceptable to authority having jurisdiction.
B. Fire-Rated Blanket: High-temperature, flexible, blanket insulation with FSK jacket that is
tested and certified to provide a 2-hour fire rating by a NRTL acceptable to authority
having jurisdiction.
2.04 INSULATING CEMENTS
A. Mineral-Fiber Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C 195.
B. Expanded or Exfoliated Vermiculite Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C 196.
C. Mineral-Fiber, Hydraulic-Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: Comply with

ASTM C 449/C 449M.
2.05 ADHESIVES
A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for
bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Calcium Silicate Adhesive: Fibrous, sodium-silicate-based adhesive with a service

temperature range of 50 to 800 deg F (10 to 427 deg C).
C. Cellular-Glass, Phenolic, Polyisocyanurate, and Polystyrene Adhesive: Solvent-based

resin adhesive, with a service temperature range of minus 75 to plus 300 deg F (minus
59 to plus 149 deg C).
D. Flexible Elastomeric Comply with MIL-A-24179A, Type II, Class I.
E. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.
F. Polystyrene Adhesive: Solvent- or water-based, synthetic resin adhesive with a service

temperature range of minus 20 to plus 140 deg F (29 to plus 60 deg C).
G. ASJ Adhesive, and FSK and PVDC Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C,
Class 2, Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints.
H. PVC Jacket Adhesive: Compatible with PVC jacket.
I. Physically crosslinked adhesive: shall be suitable for indoor and outdoor use in high
humidity envinronments and shall meet Class 0 requirements when tested for fire
performance to BS 476 Part 6 and Part 7.

2.06 LAGGING ADHESIVE
A. Adhesive shall be a flexible, fire resistive compound suitable for vapour sealing
insulated ducts and pipes.
B. Adhesive shall be suitable for indoor and outdoor use and in high humidity
environments.
C. Water vapour permeance shall not exceed 0.05 perms at 0.030-inch dry film thickness
when tested in compliance with ASTMF 1249.
D. When tested for surface burning characteristics in compliance with ASTM E84, flame
spread index shall be less than 25 and smoke developed index less than 50.
E. Adhesive shall be UL classified and shall meet or exceed the requirements of NFPA
90A and 90 B 25/50.
2.07 FUNGICIDAL PROTECTIVE COATINGS
A. Fungicidal protective coatings shall be applied over external surfaces of chilled water
pipes and interior and exterior surfaces of ductwork.
B. Coating shall be a polyacrylate copolymer emulsion specially formulated for long term
fungicidal activity with no loss of activity on aging. It shall prevent the spread of molds
and odour causing bacteria on the applied surface.
C. Coating shall meet the requirements of NFPA 90A and 90B.
2.08 MASTICS
A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply
with MIL-C-19565C, Type II.
B. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on below
ambient services.
1. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96, Procedure B, 0.013 perm (0.009 metric
perm) at 43-mil (1.09-mm) dry film thickness.
2. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F (Minus 29 to plus 82
deg C).
3. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 59 percent by volume and 71 percent by weight.
4. Color: White.
C. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Solvent based; suitable for indoor use on below ambient services.
1. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 0.05 perm (0.03 metric perm) at 35-mil
(0.9-mm) dry film thickness.
2. Service Temperature Range: 0 to 180 deg F (Minus 18 to plus 82 deg C).
4. Color: White.
D. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Solvent based; suitable for outdoor use on below ambient
services.

1. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 0.05 perm (0.033 metric perm) at 30-
mil (0.8-mm) dry film thickness.
deg C).
4. Color: White.
E. Breather Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on above ambient
services.
1. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 3 perms (2 metric perms) at 0.0625-
inch (1.6-mm) dry film thickness.
deg C).
3. Solids Content: 63 percent by volume and 73 percent by weight.
4. Color: White.
2.09 SEALANTS
A. Joint Sealants:
1. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
2. Permanently flexible, elastomeric sealant.
deg C).
4. Color: White or gray.
B. FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants:

2. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant.
deg C).
4. Color: Aluminum.
C. ASJ Flashing Sealants, and Vinyl, PVDC, and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants:
2. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant.
deg C).
4. Color: White.
2.010 FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS
A. Insulation system schedules (clause 3.017) indicate factory-applied jackets on various

applications. When factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following:
1. ASJ: White, kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil backing;
complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.
2. ASJ-SSL: ASJ with self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive
covered by a removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.
3. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing;
complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II.
4. FSP Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with polyethylene
backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II.
5. PVDC Jacket for Indoor Applications: 4-mil- (0.10-mm-) thick, white PVDC
biaxially oriented barrier film with a permeance at 0.02 perms (0.013 metric
perms) when tested according to ASTM E 96 and with a flame-spread index of 5
and a smoke-developed index of 20 when tested according to ASTM E 84.
6. PVDC Jacket for Outdoor Applications: 6-mil- (0.15-mm-) thick, white PVDC
biaxially oriented barrier film with a permeance at 0.01 perms (0.007 metric
perms) when tested according to ASTM E 96 and with a flame-spread index of 5
and a smoke-developed index of 25 when tested according to ASTM E 84.
7. PVDC-SSL Jacket: PVDC jacket with a self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-
based adhesive covered by a removable protective strip.
8. Vinyl Jacket: White vinyl with a permeance of 1.3 perms (0.86 metric perms)
when tested according to ASTM E 96, Procedure A, and complying with
NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B.
2.011 FIELD-APPLIED FABRIC-REINFORCING MESH
A. Woven Glass-Fiber Fabric for Pipe Insulation: Approximately 2 oz./sq. yd. (68 g/sq. m)
with a thread count of 10 strands by 10 strands/sq. inch (4 strands by 4 strands/sq. mm)
for covering pipe and pipe fittings.
B. Woven Glass-Fiber Fabric for Duct and Equipment Insulation: Approximately 6 oz./sq.
yd. (203 g/sq. m) with a thread count of 5 strands by 5 strands/sq. inch (2 strands by 2
strands/sq. mm) for covering equipment.
C. Woven Polyester Fabric: Approximately 1 oz./sq. yd. (34 g/sq. m) with a thread count of
10 strands by 10 strands/sq. inch (4 strands by 4 strands/sq. mm), in a Leno weave, for
duct, equipment, and pipe.
2.012 FIELD-APPLIED CLOTHS
A. Woven Glass-Fiber Fabric: Comply with MIL-C-20079H, Type I, plain weave, and
presized a minimum of 8 oz./sq. yd. (271 g/sq. m).
2.013 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS
A. Field-applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C 921, Type I, unless otherwise indicated.
B. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil-face, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing.
C. PVC Jacket: High-impact-resistant, UV-resistant PVC complying with ASTM D 1784,

Class 16354-C; thickness as scheduled; roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and
forming. Thickness is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules.
1. Adhesive: As recommended by jacket material manufacturer.
2. Color: Color-code jackets based on system.
3. Factory-fabricated fitting covers to match jacket if available; otherwise, field
fabricate.
a. Shapes: 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows, tees, valves,
flanges, unions, reducers, end caps, soil-pipe hubs, traps, mechanical
joints, and P-trap and supply covers for lavatories.
4. Factory-fabricated tank heads and tank side panels.

D. Aluminum Jacket:
1. Aluminum Jacket: Comply with ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 3003, 3005,
3105 or 5005, Temper H-14.
a. Sheet and roll stock ready for shop or field sizing.
b. Finish and thickness are indicated in field-applied jacket schedules.
c. Moisture Barrier for Indoor Applications: 3-mil- (0.075-mm-) thick, heat-
bonded polyethylene and kraft paper.
d. Moisture Barrier for Outdoor Applications: 3-mil- (0.075-mm-) thick, heat-
e. Factory-Fabricated Fitting Covers:
1) Same material, finish, and thickness as jacket.
2) Preformed 2-piece or gore, 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-
radius elbows.
3) Tee covers.
4) Flange and union covers.
5) End caps.
6) Beveled collars.
7) Valve covers.
8) Field fabricate fitting covers only if factory-fabricated fitting covers
are not available.
4. Stainless-Steel Jacket: ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M.
a. Sheet and roll stock ready for shop or field sizing.
b. Material, finish, and thickness are indicated in field-applied jacket
schedules.
c. Moisture Barrier for Indoor Applications: 3-mil- (0.075-mm-) thick, heat-
d. Moisture Barrier for Outdoor Applications: 3-mil- (0.075-mm-) thick, heat-
e. Factory-Fabricated Fitting Covers:
1) Same material, finish, and thickness as jacket.
2) Preformed 2-piece or gore, 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-
radius elbows.
3) Tee covers.
4) Flange and union covers.
5) End caps.
6) Beveled collars.
7) Valve covers.
8) Field fabricate fitting covers only if factory-fabricated fitting covers are
not available
E. Underground Direct-Buried Jacket: 125-mil- (3.2-mm-) thick vapor barrier and

waterproofing membrane consisting of a rubberized bituminous resin reinforced with a
woven-glass fiber or polyester scrim and laminated aluminum foil.
2.014 TAPES
A. ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic
adhesive, complying with ASTM C 1136.
1. Width: 3 inches (75 mm).
2. Thickness: 11.5 mils (0.29 mm).
3. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch (1.0 N/mm) in width.

4. Elongation: 2 percent.
5. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch (7.2 N/mm) in width.
6. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape.
B. FSK Tape: Foil-face, vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic
adhesive; complying with ASTM C 1136.
6. FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of FSK tape.
C. Aluminum-Foil Tape: Tape shall use reinforced aluminium foil of minimum 9-micron
thickness and minimum width 50mm to provide vapour ceiling of insulated ducts and
pipes.
D. Vapor-retarder tape with acrylic adhesive.

E. Aluminum-FSK Tapes: Aluminum FSK Tapes to be used with glass wool insulation
having FSK/FRK facing. Plain Aluminum Foil Tape should be used with FSK/FRK faced
glasswool insulation. The adhesive used shall be acrylic adhesive and thickness
excluding substrate shall not be less than 195 micron. Temperature resistance to be
from 30 deg F to 250 deg F and peel adhesion not to be lower than 83 oz/inch width.
Tensile strength not be lower than 22 lbs/inch width and rolling tack to be 7-7/8” or
better with a 7/16” ball. Tapes used should not be lower than 3 inch (72 mm) width.
Confirms BS 476 Part 6, Part 7 with fire propagation Index, I=1.5. Water Vapor
Transmission value 0.304 g/h/m2 as per ASTM E 96 standards. Average Tensile
Strength of 16.17 N/mm2 and Elongation 11.49% as per ASTM D 638:03 standards.
Global Warming Potential value 0 and Ozone Depletion Potential value 5.
F. Alum Glass Cloth Tape: Alum glass Cloth Tape to be used with Glass wool insulation
having a similar facing. Aluminum Foil Thickness to be minimum of 7 micron and Alum-
Glass Cloth backing to be a minimum of 120 micron. Peel Adhesion to be 25 N/25 mm
or better and rolling tack to be 20 cm for a 11 mm ball or better. Service temperature to
be 20 deg C or better. Confirms BS 476 Part 6 and Part 7, Class O. Fungal Resistance
rating of 2 as per ASTM G 21-96. Average Tensile Strength of 47 kgf/25mm width as
per ASTM D 638 standards. Global Warming Potential value 0 and Ozone Depletion
Potential value 5.
2.015 SECUREMENTS
A. Bands:
1. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304 or Type 316;
0.015 inch (0.38 mm) thick, 3/4 inch (19 mm) wide with wing or closed seal.

2. Springs: Twin spring set constructed of stainless steel with ends flat and slotted
to accept metal bands. Spring size determined by manufacturer for application.
B. Insulation Pins and Hangers:

1. Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully annealed
for capacitor-discharge welding, 0.135-inch- (3.5-mm-) diameter shank, length to
suit depth of insulation indicated.
2. Cupped-Head, Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel
pin, fully annealed for capacitor-discharge welding, 0.135-inch- (3.5-mm-)
diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated with integral 1-1/2-
inch (38-mm) galvanized carbon-steel washer.
3. Metal, Adhesively Attached, Perforated-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate
welded to projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness
indicated, securely in position indicated when self-locking washer is in place.
Comply with the following requirements:
a. Baseplate: Perforated, galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch (0.76
mm) thick by 2 inches (50 mm) square.
b. Spindle: Copper- or zinc-coated, low carbon steel, fully annealed, 0.106-
inch- (2.6-mm-) diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation
indicated.
c. Adhesive: Recommended by hanger manufacturer. Product with
demonstrated capability to bond insulation hanger securely to substrates
indicated without damaging insulation, hangers, and substrates.
4. Nonmetal, Adhesively Attached, Perforated-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate
fastened to projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness
indicated, securely in position indicated when self-locking washer is in place.
Comply with the following requirements:
a. Baseplate: Perforated, nylon sheet, 0.030 inch (0.76 mm) thick by 1-1/2
inches (38 mm) in diameter.
b. Spindle: Nylon, 0.106-inch- (2.6-mm-) diameter shank, length to suit
depth of insulation indicated, up to 2-1/2 inches (63 mm).
c. Adhesive: Recommended by hanger manufacturer. Product with
demonstrated capability to bond insulation hanger securely to substrates
indicated without damaging insulation, hangers, and substrates.
5. Self-Sticking-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate welded to projecting spindle
that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in position
indicated when self-locking washer is in place. Comply with the following
requirements:
a. Baseplate: Galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch (0.76 mm) thick by
2 inches (50 mm) square.
b. Spindle: Copper- or zinc-coated, low carbon steel, fully annealed, 0.106-
inch- (2.6-mm-) diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation
indicated.
c. Adhesive-backed base with a peel-off protective cover.
6. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch-
(0.41-mm-) thick, galvanized-steel sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to
hold insulation securely in place but not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) in
diameter.
a. Protect ends with capped self-locking washers incorporating a spring steel
insert to ensure permanent retention of cap in exposed locations.
7. Nonmetal Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from
0.016-inch- (0.41-mm-) thick nylon sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to
hold insulation securely in place but not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) in
diameter.
C. Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) wide,

stainless steel or Monel.
D. Wire: 0.062-inch (1.6-mm) soft-annealed, galvanized steel.
2.016 CORNER ANGLES
A. Stainless-Steel Corner Angles: 0.024 inch (0.61 mm) thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch (25 by
25 mm), stainless steel according to ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304 or
316
2.017 APPLICATION
A. Ductwork Insulation
1. Concealed supply, return, fresh air and extract air ducts- Fibre Glass
a. Unless otherwise indicated insulate all ductwork with 25 mm thick, 24
Kg/M3 density aluminium foil faced fibreglass duct insulation. Fasten the
insulation with adhesive on 200 to 250 mm centres. Butt all joints tightly
and seal all breaks and joints by adhering a 75 mm Aluminium foil vapour
barrier tape or sheet with a fire-retardant adhesive.
b. Insulate flexible connections and connections to diffusers with 25 mm
thick, 24 Kg/M3 density reinforced aluminium foil faced, flame resistant
flexible fiberglass insulation. Overlap onto adjacent insulation and seal
with adhesive duct tape to give good closure.
c. Where ductwork is installed in ceiling voids and masonry shafts, which are
not used as return air plenums insulate with 50mm thick, 48 Kg/M3
density aluminium foil faced rigid fibreglass duct insulation.
d. Finish all duct insulation with a 20x20 (thread/inch) woven glass cloth
cover adhered between two coats of fire resistant fungicidal protective
lagging adhesive.
2. Concealed Supply, Return, Fresh Air and Extract air ducts- Closed Cell
Elastomeric rubber
a. Insulate all GI rectangular supply, return, fresh air and extract air ductwork
within air-conditioned areas with 13mm thick closed cell elastomeric foam
sheets with a density of 50±10kg/m3 .
b. The ductwork within non-air-conditioned areas shall be insulated with 25

mm thick, 50±10kg/m3 density closed cell elastomeric rubber insulation.
c. Insulate flexible connections and connections to diffusers with 25 mm thick,
24 Kg/M3 density reinforced aluminum foil faced, flame resistant flexible
fiberglass insulation. Overlap onto adjacent insulation and seal with
adhesive duct tape to give good closure.
d. Extract duct from commercial kitchen hoods shall be insulated with 50mm
thick, 48 Kg/m3rockwool insulation with aluminium foil finish.
3. Concealed Supply, Return, Fresh Air and Extract air ducts - Physically
crosslinked polyolefin foam:
a. Building Internal Areas

b. Supply, return and extract air ducts for all ductwork shall be insulated with
physically cross-linked polyolefin foam with factory applied reinforced
aluminium foil. Insulation shall have the following specifications:
1) Physically cross-linked, closed cell polyolefin foam with factory
applied reinforced aluminium foil and factory applied acrylic
adhesive backing.
2) Exceed the minimum thickness to prevent condensation.
3) Density: 25 kg/m3 (foam core only).
4) Thermal Conductivity (ASTM C518): Maximum 0.032 W/m.°K at
mean temperature 23°C.
5) Water absorption: <0.2 % v/v.
6) Water Vapour permeability (ASTM E96): Maximum 2.3 x 10-15
kg/Pa.s.m, (µ>80,000).
7) Service Temperature Range: - 80°C ~ +80°C (adhesive backing).
8) Zero mould growth when tested to ASTM G21.
9) Fire Rating:
a) Class 0 to BS476 Parts 6 and 7.
b) Euroclass B-S2,d0 classification according to EN 13501Part
1.
c) Complies with NFPA 90A and B (ASTM E84 25/50 rating).
d) Complies with FM 4924 fire performance criteria and “FM
Approved” by FM Approvals certification body.
10) Smoke Density and Toxicity:
a) Complies with the requirements of International Maritime
Organization Resolution MSC 61(67) Part 2.
b) Dm<200 (ISO 5659 Part 2 gas analysis); combustion gases
CO, HCl, HF, NOx, HBr, HCN and SO2 to be within the
maximum allowable concentrations of International Maritime
11) Schedule of thicknesses (must exceed minimum thickness to
prevent condensation):
a) Conditioned spaces: minimum 12mm.
b) Unconditioned spaces, shafts: minimum 20mm.
c) Plant rooms: minimum 20mm.
12) Refer to manufacturer’s instructions for installing insulation around
ductwork and fittings.
4. Exposed supply return and extract air ducts- Fibre Glass
a. For ducts exposed inside conditioned spaces, insulate as described
above for concealed air ducts using 25mm thick aluminium foil faced
fiberglass boards with density 48 kg/M3.
b. Then apply a 20 x 20 (thread/inch) woven glass cloth cover adhered
between two coats of fire resistant fungicidal protective lagging adhesive.
c. Exposed ductwork within conditioned areas shall be clad with plain
aluminium sheet 0.9mm or thicker.
d. For ducts exposed in non-air-conditioned areas, insulate using the
method described for concealed ducts, but using insulation with a
minimum thickness of 50 mm, 48 Kg/M3 density rigid fiberglass insulation.
Then apply a 20x20 (thread/inch) woven glass cloth cover adhered
between two coats of fire resistant fungicidal protective lagging adhesive.
e. Then cover with plain sheet Aluminium, 0.9 mm or thicker.

f. All ductwork exposed externally to the building, installed on roof and
within plant rooms is to be clad with plain aluminium, 0.9 mm or thicker.
g. Where ducts penetrate the building shell, the duct shall be flashed and
waterproofed before any insulation is applied.
5. Exposed supply, return, fresh air and extract air ducts- Closed Cell Elastomeric
rubber
a. For ductwork exposed in non-air-conditioned areas, insulate using 25 mm
closed cell elastomeric foam sheets .
b. For ductwork exposed directly to sun light, insulate with 32 mm thick,
50±10kg/m3 closed cell elastomeric rubber insulation sheets with UV
resistant cladding.
c. All ductwork in exposed areas (at roof, in car parking areas and
mechanical rooms) shall be clad with aluminium plain sheet of 0.7 mm
thickness. The cladding in mechanical rooms shall be up to 2.5 m from
finish floor level.
d. Where ducts penetrate the building shell, the duct shall be flashed and
waterproofed before any insulation is applied.
6. Exposed supply, return, fresh air and extract ducts- Physically Crosslinked
Polyolefin Foam.
7. Supply, return and extract air ducts for all ductwork shall be insulated with
physically cross-linked polyolefin foam with factory applied reinforced UV and
puncture resistant aluminium foil. Insulation shall have the following
specifications:
a. Physically cross-linked, closed cell polyolefin foam with factory applied
reinforced UV and puncture resistant aluminium foil and factory applied
acrylic adhesive backing.
b. Exceed the minimum thickness to prevent condensation.
c. Density: 25 kg/m3 (foam core only).
d. Thermal Conductivity (ASTM C518): Maximum 0.032 W/m.°K at mean
temperature 23oC.
e. Water absorption: <0.2 % v/v.
f. Water Vapour permeability (ASTM E96): Maximum 4.1 x 10-15 kg/Pa.s.m,
(µ>40,000).
g. UV Resistance (ISO 4892-3): No change in performance or appearance
after 3000 hours QUV exposure.
h. Puncture Resistance (ASTM D4833): > 400 N.
i. Service Temperature Range: - 80°C ~ +80°C (adhesive backing).
j. Zero mould growth when tested to ASTM G21.
k. Fire Rating:
1) Class 0 to BS476 Parts 6 and 7.
2) Complies with NFPA 90A and B (ASTM E84 25/50 rating).
l. Schedule of thicknesses (must exceed minimum thickness to prevent
condensation):
1) Exposed spaces: minimum 25mm.
m. Refer to manufacturer’s instructions for installing insulation around
B. Chilled Water Pipework Insulation -Fibre Glass

1. Chilled water pipes other than preinsulated pipes shall be generally insulated
with rigid sections of aluminium foil faced glass fibre insulation with density of 65
Kg/m3 having a thermal conductivity factor of 0.034 w/m.k at 10 deg. C.

2. Internal chilled water pipes (inside buildings) shall be insulated by 40mm thick
rigid insulation for pipes upto 40mm dia and 50mm for pipe sizes 50mm dia and
above.
3. External chilled water pipes (on roofs and in chiller yard) shall be insulated by
50mm thick rigid insulation for pipe sizes up to 40 mm dia and 75 mm for for
50mm dia and above.
4. For both internal and external pipes the insulation shall be finished with a water
proof 20x20 (thread/inch) woven glass cloth cover painted with two coats of
approved anti fungal lagging adhesive.
5. Where insulated pipework is run on roof, in plant room and chillers yard it shall
be clad using an outer covering of plain aluminium sheet of 0.7mm or thicker.
6. Where exposed, insulated pipework runs through occupied or public areas it shall
be clad using an outer covering of plain aluminium sheet of 0.7 mm or thicker.
C. Chilled Water Pipework insulation- Closed Cell Elastomeric Rubber

1. The following pipes shall be insulated with closed cell elastomeric rubber
insulation with following thickness:
a. Chilled Water Pipes in Conditioned Areas:
1) Insulate with closed cell elastomeric foam sheet with vapour
barrier. Thickness of insulation shall be 19mm with 50±10kg/m3
density for pipes up to 50mm dia.
2) Pipes 65mm dia & bigger., thickness of insulation shall be 25mm.
b. Chilled Water pipes at Roof, Riser shafts and in Plant Room Areas:
1) Insulate with closed cell elastomeric foam rubber sheet. Thickness
of insulation shall be 32mm with 50±10 kg/m3 density for pipes up
to 50mm.
2) Apply 0.7mm aluminium cladding plain sheet on top of insulation.
Roof insulation shall be UV resistant.
3) Pipes 65mm dia and above, thickness of insulation shall be 32mm.
4) Apply 0.7mm aluminium cladding plain sheet on top of insulation.
D. Chilled Water Pipework, Hot, Cold; Refrigerant insulation- Physically crosslinked

polyolefin foam insulation.
1. Building Internal areas
2. Water pipes, other than pre-insulated pipes and hot water pipes embedded in
block walls, shall be insulated with physically cross-linked polyolefin foam with
factory applied reinforced aluminium foil. Insulation shall have the following
specifications:
reinforced aluminium foil.
temperature 23°C.
(µ>80,000).
g. Service Temperature Range: - 80°C ~ +100°C.
h. Zero mould growth when tested to ASTM G21.
i. Fire Rating:
j. Smoke Density and Toxicity:
1) Complies with the requirements of International Maritime
2) Dm<200 (ISO 5659 Part 2 gas analysis); combustion gases CO,
HCl, HF, NOx, HBr, HCN and SO2 to be within the maximum
allowable concentrations of International Maritime Organization
Resolution MSC 61(67) Part 2.
k. Schedule of thicknesses (must exceed minimum thickness to prevent
condensation):
1) Domestic hot water: minimum 20mm.
2) Domestic cold water: minimum 15mm.
3) Chilled water (conditioned spaces): minimum 20mm.
4) Chilled water (unconditioned spaces, shafts, plant rooms):
minimum 25mm.
E. External to the Building, Installed on Roof

1. Water pipes other than pre-insulated pipes shall be insulated with physically
cross-linked polyolefin foam with factory applied reinforced UV and puncture
resistant aluminium foil. Insulation shall have the following specifications:
reinforced UV and puncture resistant aluminium foil.
temperature 23°C.
(µ>40,000).
g. UV Resistance (ISO 4892-3): No change in performance or appearance
after 3000 hours QUV exposure.
h. Puncture Resistance (ASTM D4833): > 400 N.
i. Service Temperature Range: - 80°C ~ +100°C.
j. Zero mould growth when tested to ASTM G21.
k. Fire Rating:
3) Complies with FM 4924 fire performance criteria and “FM
Approved” by FM Approvals certification body.
l. Schedule of thicknesses (must exceed minimum thickness to prevent
condensation):
1) Domestic hot water: minimum 25mm.
2) Domestic cold water: minimum 25mm.
3) Chilled water: minimum 30mm.
m. Refer to manufacturer’s instructions for installing insulation around
pipework and fittings
F. Refrigerant pipework insulation

1. Refrigerant pipework shall be insulated with closed cell synthetic rubber foam
insulation, 19mm thick and finished as described for chilled water pipes.
2. For exposed pipes at roof and in unconditioned areas insulate with 25 mm
thickness UV resistant insulation and apply 0.7mm aluminium cladding plain
sheet.
G. Condensate drain pipework
1. Condensate drain PipeWorks shall be insulated with 13mm thick, 24 kg/M3
density closed cell elastomeric rubber sheet .
2. For exposed pipes at roof and in unconditioned areas insulate with 25 mm
thickness UV resistant insulation and apply 0.7mm aluminium cladding plain
sheet.
H. Diesel Engine Exhaust Pipe

1. Diesel engine exhaust pipe and muffler shall be insulated with 100mm thick
Rockwool insulation.
I. Internal Acoustic Lining

1. Supply, return and extract air ducts for all ductwork shall be insulated with
minimum 15mm thick physically cross-linked partially open-cell polyolefin foam
with factory applied reinforced aluminium foil. Insulation shall have the following
specifications:
a. Physically cross-linked, partially open-cell polyolefin foam with factory
applied reinforced aluminium foil and factory applied acrylic adhesive
backing.
b. Density: 25 kg/m3 (foam core only).
c. Thermal Conductivity (ASTM C518): Maximum 0.035 W/m.°K at mean
temperature 23oC.
d. Service Temperature Range: - 80°C ~ +80°C (adhesive backing).
f. Zero mould growth when tested to ASTM G21.
g. Noise Reduction Coefficient 0.40 (ISO 354).
h. Fire Rating:
2) Complies with AS 4254 Part 2 fire performance requirements.
i. Ensure that the substrate surface is clean, dry and at ambient
temperature prior to installation.
j. Seal all joints with specified reinforced aluminium foil tape.
k. Refer to manufacturer’s instructions for installing insulation around
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and
other conditions affecting performance of insulation application.
1. Verify that systems and equipment to be insulated have been tested and are free
of defects.
2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry.
3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
3.02 PREPARATION

A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials
that will adversely affect insulation application.
B. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in
contact with stainless-steel surfaces, use demineralized water.
C. All material delivered to site shall be new and fully dried out and so maintained
throughout the progress of the works.
D. All insulating materials shall be stored in storage sheds, and in accordance with the
Manufacturer's recommendations.
E. In order to ensure that the insulation applied is in all respects in accordance with the
specification, sections shall, as required by the Consultant, be cut from the finished
insulation.
F. The Contractor is to allow in his price for the removal and replacement of two sections of
each type of insulation.
G. If, however, defects are revealed, further sections shall be cut out for inspection, and all
cutout sections shall be replaced at no cost to the Contract.
H. If further defects are revealed then the Consultant shall have the right, when in his
opinion it is necessary, to issue instructions for any part or the whole of the insulation to
be removed and replaced. The replacement with new insulation shall be to the
satisfaction of the Consultant and the cutting out and replacing shall be at no cost to the
Contract.
I. Particular attention shall be paid to the finished appearance of all thermal insulation
which must present a neat and symmetrical appearance running true in line with pipe
layouts, etc.
J. Any rough, irregular and badly finished surfaces shall be stripped down and re-insulated
to the Consultant's satisfaction.
K. In certain cases, the type of insulation specified will require a painted finish, in addition
to identifying bands and any signs which are to be applied.
L. All systems are to have been tested and approved by the Consultant prior to installation
of insulation.
M. Manufacturer shall have production process control in accordance with ISO 9002 / UNI
EN 29002 or any other equivalent standard.
N. In case of heavy ducts and pipes wherein the supports are fixed directly on ducts / pipes
the supports shall be also insulated with a thermal break / barrier.
O. The insulation thickness for pipes and ducts shall be verified by the specialist supplier/
manufacturer to confirm no condensation and temperature loss.
3.03 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even
surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of equipment, ducts and fittings, and piping
including fittings, valves, and specialties.
B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses
required for each item of equipment, duct system, and pipe system as specified in
insulation system schedules.
C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service.
Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in
either wet or dry state.
D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.
E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.
F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and
specialties.
G. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.
H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints
with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.
I. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.
J. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at
hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.
1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.
2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on
anchor legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to
structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier
mastic.
3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal
insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended
by insulation material manufacturer.
4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install
shields over jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger,
support, and shield.
K. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate

and wet and dry film thicknesses.
L. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:

1. Draw jacket tight and smooth.
2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch- (75-mm-) wide strips, of same material
as insulation jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples
along both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches (100 mm) o.c.
3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm). Install
insulation with longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to
receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at
[2 inches (50 mm)] [4 inches (100 mm)] o.c.
a. For below ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.

4. Cover joints and seams with tape as recommended by insulation material
manufacturer to maintain vapor seal.
5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and
joints and at ends adjacent to duct and pipe flanges and fittings.
M. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its
nominal thickness.
N. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and
cracking due to thermal movement.
O. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged
areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches (100 mm) beyond damaged areas. Adhere,
staple, and seal patches similar to butt joints.
P. For above ambient services, do not install insulation to the following:

1. Vibration-control devices.
2. Testing agency labels and stamps.
3. Nameplates and data plates.
4. Manholes.
5. Handholes.
6. Cleanouts.
3.04 PENETRATIONS
A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roof

penetrations.
1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.
2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof
surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor
insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor
insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant.
3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches (50
mm) below top of roof flashing.
4. Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant.
B. Insulation Installation at Underground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Terminate insulation

flush with sleeve seal. Seal terminations with flashing sealant.
C. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation

continuously through wall penetrations.
1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.
2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall
surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor
insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor
insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant.
3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing
at least 2 inches (50 mm).
4. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant.
D. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire
Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.
E. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation
continuously through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions. Terminate insulation
at fire damper sleeves for fire-rated wall and partition penetrations. Externally insulate
damper sleeves to match adjacent insulation and overlap duct insulation at least 2
inches (50 mm).
1. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" and
fire-resistive joint sealers.
F. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations:

1. Duct: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations that are not fire
rated. For penetrations through fire-rated assemblies, terminate insulation at fire
damper sleeves and externally insulate damper sleeve beyond floor to match
adjacent duct insulation. Overlap damper sleeve and duct insulation at least 2
inches (50 mm).
2. Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations.
3. Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Comply with requirements in
Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."
3.05 EQUIPMENT, TANK, AND VESSEL INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Mineral Fiber, Pipe and Tank Insulation Installation for Tanks and Vessels: Secure
insulation with adhesive and anchor pins and speed washers.
1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per
unit area, for 100 percent coverage of tank and vessel surfaces.
2. Groove and score insulation materials to fit as closely as possible to equipment,
including contours. Bevel insulation edges for cylindrical surfaces for tight joints.
Stagger end joints.
3. Protect exposed corners with secured corner angles.
4. Install adhesively attached or self-sticking insulation hangers and speed washers
on sides of tanks and vessels as follows:
a. Do not weld anchor pins to ASME-labeled pressure vessels.
b. Select insulation hangers and adhesive that are compatible with service
temperature and with substrate.
c. On tanks and vessels, maximum anchor-pin spacing is 3 inches (75 mm)
from insulation end joints, and 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. in both directions.
d. Do not over compress insulation during installation.
e. Cut and miter insulation segments to fit curved sides and domed heads of
tanks and vessels.
f. Impale insulation over anchor pins and attach speed washers.
g. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend
parallel with insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with
tape matching insulation facing.
5. Secure each layer of insulation with stainless-steel or aluminum bands. Select
band material compatible with insulation materials.
6. Where insulation hangers on equipment and vessels are not permitted or
practical and where insulation support rings are not provided, install a girdle
network for securing insulation. Stretch prestressed aircraft cable around the
diameter of vessel and make taut with clamps, turnbuckles, or breather springs.
Place one circumferential girdle around equipment approximately 6 inches (150
mm) from each end. Install wire or cable between two circumferential girdles 12
inches (300 mm) o.c. Install a wire ring around each end and around outer

periphery of center openings, and stretch prestressed aircraft cable radially from
the wire ring to nearest circumferential girdle. Install additional circumferential
girdles along the body of equipment or tank at a minimum spacing of 48 inches
(1200 mm) o.c. Use this network for securing insulation with tie wire or bands.
7. Stagger joints between insulation layers at least 3 inches (75 mm).
8. Install insulation in removable segments on equipment access doors, manholes,
handholes, and other elements that require frequent removal for service and
inspection.
9. Bevel and seal insulation ends around manholes, handholes, ASME stamps, and
nameplates.
10. For equipment with surface temperatures below ambient, apply mastic to open
ends, joints, seams, breaks, and punctures in insulation.
B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation Installation for Tanks and Vessels: Install
insulation over entire surface of tanks and vessels.
1. Apply 100 percent coverage of adhesive to surface with manufacturer's
recommended adhesive.
2. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints.
C. Insulation Installation on Pumps:

1. Fabricate metal boxes lined with insulation. Fit boxes around pumps and
coincide box joints with splits in pump casings. Fabricate joints with outward
bolted flanges. Bolt flanges on 6-inch (150-mm) centers, starting at corners.
Install 3/8-inch- (10-mm-) diameter fasteners with wing nuts. Alternatively,
secure the box sections together using a latching mechanism.
2. Fabricate boxes from galvanized steel, at least 0.040 inch (1.0 mm) thick.
3. For below ambient services, install a vapor barrier at seams, joints, and
penetrations. Seal between flanges with replaceable gasket material to form a
vapor barrier.
3.06 GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more
specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation
articles.
B. Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions:

1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other
specialties with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity, unless otherwise
indicated.
2. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made
from same material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be
butted tightly against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints,
seams, voids, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth,
hard, and uniform contour that is uniform with adjoining pipe insulation.
3. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of
same material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe
insulation to fit. Butt each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie
wire. Bond pieces with adhesive.
4. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of
same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap

adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe
insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to
and including the bonnets, valve stuffing-box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints,
seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement.
5. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of
same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap
adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe
insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and
irregular surfaces with insulating cement. Insulate strainers so strainer basket
flange or plug can be easily removed and replaced without damaging the
insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable insulation cover. For below
ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor barrier.
6. Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe
insulation. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the
thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker.
7. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat
with a mastic. Install vapor-barrier mastic for below ambient services and a
breather mastic for above ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric-
reinforcing mesh. Trowel the mastic to a smooth and well-shaped contour.
8. For services not specified to receive a field-applied jacket except for flexible
elastomeric and polyolefin, install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers,
valves, flanges, and unions. Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC
covers to adjoining insulation facing using PVC tape.
9. Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word
"UNION." Match size and color of pipe labels.
C. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure

temperature taps, test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on
insulated pipes, vessels, and equipment. Shape insulation at these connections by
tapering it to and around the connection with insulating cement and finish with finishing
cement, mastic, and flashing sealant.
D. Install removable insulation covers at locations indicated. Installation shall conform to

the following:
1. Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation of
same thickness as that on adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket as
adjoining pipe insulation.
2. When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend
insulation from flanges or union long at least two times the insulation thickness
over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of flange or union. Secure flange
cover in place with stainless-steel or aluminum bands. Select band material
compatible with insulation and jacket.
3. Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for flanges
except divide the two-part section on the vertical center line of valve body.
4. When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each consisting
of mitered blocks wired to stainless-steel fabric. Secure this wire frame, with its
attached insulation, to flanges with tie wire. Extend insulation at least 2 inches
(50 mm) over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of valve. Fill space between
flange or union cover and pipe insulation with insulating cement. Finish cover
assembly with insulating cement applied in two coats. After first coat is dry,
apply and trowel second coat to a smooth finish.

5. Unless a PVC jacket is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules, finish exposed
surfaces with a metal jacket.
3.07 CALCIUM SILICATE INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Insulation Installation on Boiler Breechings and Ducts:

1. Secure single-layer insulation with stainless-steel bands at 12-inch (300-mm)
intervals and tighten bands without deforming insulation material.
2. Install 2-layer insulation with joints tightly butted and staggered at least 3 inches
(75 mm). Secure inner layer with wire spaced at 12-inch (300-mm) intervals.
Secure outer layer with stainless-steel bands at 12-inch (300-mm) intervals.
3. On exposed applications without metal jacket, finish insulation surface with a
skim coat of mineral-fiber, hydraulic-setting cement. When cement is dry, apply
flood coat of lagging adhesive and press on one layer of glass cloth. Overlap
edges at least 1 inch (25 mm). Apply finish coat of lagging adhesive over glass
cloth. Thin finish coat to achieve smooth, uniform finish.
B. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:

intervals and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials.
(75 mm). Secure inner layer with wire spaced at 12-inch (300-mm) intervals.
Secure outer layer with stainless-steel bands at 12-inch (300-mm) intervals.
3. Apply a skim coat of mineral-fiber, hydraulic-setting cement to insulation surface.
When cement is dry, apply flood coat of lagging adhesive and press on one
layer of glass cloth or tape. Overlap edges at least 1 inch (25 mm). Apply finish
coat of lagging adhesive over glass cloth or tape. Thin finish coat to achieve
smooth, uniform finish.
C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:

1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.
2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus
twice the thickness of pipe insulation.
3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer
circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of block
insulation of same material and thickness as pipe insulation.
4. Finish flange insulation same as pipe insulation.
D. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:

1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe
insulation when available. Secure according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
2. When preformed insulation sections of insulation are not available, install mitered
sections of calcium silicate insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or
bands.
3. Finish fittings insulation same as pipe insulation.
E. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:

1. Install mitered segments of calcium silicate insulation to valve body. Arrange
insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without
disturbing insulation.

2. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
3. Finish valve and specialty insulation same as pipe insulation.
3.08 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to
eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:

1. Install pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.
circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of sheet
insulation of same thickness as pipe insulation.
4. Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended
adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface
being insulated.
C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:

1. Install mitered sections of pipe insulation.
2. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended
adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface
being insulated.
D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:

1. Install preformed valve covers manufactured of same material as pipe insulation
when available.
2. When preformed valve covers are not available, install cut sections of pipe and
sheet insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing
and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation.
4. Secure insulation to valves and specialties and seal seams with manufacturer's
recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of
air to surface being insulated.
3.09 FIBERGLASS / MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:

1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands and
tighten bands without deforming insulation materials.
2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and
protrusions with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant.
3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above ambient surfaces, secure
laps with outward clinched staples at 6 inches (150 mm) o.c.
4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below ambient surfaces, do not
staple longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as
recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier
mastic and flashing sealant.

circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral-fiber blanket
insulation.
4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap
seams at least 1 inch (25 mm), and seal joints with flashing sealant.

insulation when available.
2. When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mitered
sections of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation.
Secure insulation materials with wire or bands.

insulation when available.
2. When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections of pipe
insulation to valve body.
3. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation
without disturbing insulation.
E. Blanket Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and
insulation pins.
unit area, for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.
2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and
transitions.
3. Install either capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers or cupped-head,
capacitor-discharge-weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides
of vertical ducts as follows:
a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches (450 mm) and smaller, place
pins along longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches (75 mm)
maximum from insulation end joints, and 16 inches (400 mm) o.c.
b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches (450 mm), place pins
16 inches (400 mm) o.c. each way, and 3 inches (75 mm) maximum from
insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold insulation tightly against
surface at cross bracing.
c. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and
plenums.
e. Impale insulation over pins and attach speed washers.
f. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend
4. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a
continuous unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams
and end joints with insulation by removing 2 inches (50 mm) from 1 edge and 1
end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2-

inch (13-mm) outward-clinching staples, 1 inch (25 mm) o.c. Install vapor barrier
consisting of factory- or field-applied jacket, adhesive, vapor-barrier mastic, and
sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions.
a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain
vapor-barrier seal.
b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F
(10 deg C) at 18-foot (5.5-m) intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-
barrier mastic applied in a Z-shaped pattern over insulation face, along
butt end of insulation, and over the surface. Cover insulation face and
surface to be insulated a width equal to 2 times the insulation thickness
but not less than 3 inches (75 mm).
5. Overlap unfaced blankets a minimum of 2 inches (50 mm) on longitudinal seams
and end joints. At end joints, secure with steel bands spaced a maximum of 18
inches (450 mm) o.c.
6. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation
section for each surface. Install insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows
with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.
7. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation
surface with 6-inch- (150-mm-) wide strips of same material used to insulate
duct. Secure on alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins
spaced 6 inches (150 mm) o.c.
F. Board Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and
insulation pins.
unit area, for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.
2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and
transitions.
3. Install either capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers or cupped-head,
capacitor-discharge-weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides
of vertical ducts as follows:
a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches (450 mm) and smaller, place
pins along longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches (75 mm)
maximum from insulation end joints, and 16 inches (400 mm) o.c.
b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches (450 mm), space
pins 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. each way, and 3 inches (75 mm) maximum
from insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold insulation tightly
against surface at cross bracing.
c. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and
plenums.
e. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend
4. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a
continuous unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams
and end joints with insulation by removing 2 inches (50 mm) from 1 edge and 1
end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2-
inch (13-mm) outward-clinching staples, 1 inch (25 mm) o.c. Install vapor barrier
consisting of factory- or field-applied jacket, adhesive, vapor-barrier mastic, and
sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions.

a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain
vapor-barrier seal.
b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F
(10 deg C) at 18-foot (5.5-m) intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-
barrier mastic applied in a Z-shaped pattern over insulation face, along
butt end of insulation, and over the surface. Cover insulation face and
surface to be insulated a width equal to 2 times the insulation thickness
but not less than 3 inches (75 mm).
5. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation
section for each surface. Groove and score insulation to fit as closely as
possible to outside and inside radius of elbows. Install insulation on round and
flat-oval duct elbows with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.
6. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation
surface with 6-inch- (150-mm-) wide strips of same material used to insulate
duct. Secure on alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins
spaced 6 inches (150 mm) o.c.
3.010 PHENOLIC INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. General Installation Requirements:

intervals and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials.
(75 mm). Secure inner layer with 0.062-inch (1.6-mm) wire spaced at 12-inch
(300-mm) intervals. Secure outer layer with stainless-steel bands at 12-inch
(300-mm) intervals.
B. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:

1. Secure each layer of insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten bands
without deforming insulation materials.
2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and
protrusions with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant.
3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above ambient services, secure
laps with outward clinched staples at 6 inches (150 mm) o.c.
4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets with vapor retarders on below ambient
services, do not staple longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive
as recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier
mastic and flashing sealant.
C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:

circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of block
insulation of same material and thickness as pipe insulation.
D. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:

1. Install preformed insulation sections of same material as straight segments of
pipe insulation. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:
3.011 POLYSTYRENE INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:

1. Secure each layer of insulation with tape or bands and tighten bands without
deforming insulation materials. Orient longitudinal joints between half sections in
3 and 9 o'clock positions on the pipe.
2. For insulation with factory-applied jackets with vapor barriers, do not staple
longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive or tape as
recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier
mastic.
3. All insulation shall be tightly butted and free of voids and gaps at all joints. Vapor
barrier must be continuous. Before installing jacket material, install vapor-barrier
system.

2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, same
thickness of adjacent pipe insulation, not to exceed 1-1/2-inch (38-mm)
thickness.
circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of polystyrene
block insulation of same thickness as pipe insulation.


1. Install preformed section of polystyrene insulation to valve body.
3.012 FIELD APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION
A. Where glass-cloth jackets are indicated, install directly over bare insulation or insulation
with factory-applied jackets.
1. Draw jacket smooth and tight to surface with 2-inch (50-mm) overlap at seams
and joints.
2. Embed glass cloth between two 0.062-inch- (1.6-mm-) thick coats of lagging
adhesive.
3. Completely encapsulate insulation with coating, leaving no exposed insulation.
B. Where FSK jackets are indicated, install as follows:

1. Draw jacket material smooth and tight.
2. Install lap or joint strips with same material as jacket.
3. Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
4. Install jacket with 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) laps at longitudinal seams and 3-inch- (75-
mm-) wide joint strips at end joints.
5. Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor-retarder jackets and exposed
insulation with vapor-barrier mastic.
C. Where metal jackets are indicated, install with 2-inch (50-mm) overlap at longitudinal
seams and end joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end
joints with weatherproof sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure
jacket with stainless-steel bands 12 inches (300 mm) o.c. and at end joints.
3.013 FIRE RATED INSULATION SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A. Where fire-rated insulation system is indicated, secure system to ducts and duct
hangers and supports to maintain a continuous fire rating.
B. Insulate duct access panels and doors to achieve same fire rating as duct.
C. Install firestopping at penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Fire-stop systems are

specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."
3.014 FINISHES
A. Duct, Equipment, and Pipe Insulation with ASJ, Glass-Cloth, or Other Paintable Jacket
Material: Paint jacket with paint system identified below and as specified in Division 09
painting Sections.
1. Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer that is compatible with jacket
material and finish coat paint. Add fungicidal agent to render fabric mildew proof.
a. Finish Coat Material: Interior, flat, latex-emulsion size.
B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats
of insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating.
C. Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow visual
inspection of the completed Work.
D. Do not field paint aluminum or stainless-steel jackets.
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B. Perform tests and inspections.

1. Inspect ductwork, randomly selected by Architect, by removing field-applied
jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of
inspection shall be limited to one location (or as required by the engineer) for
each duct system defined in the "Duct Insulation Schedule, General" Article.
2. Inspect field-insulated equipment, randomly selected by Architect, by removing
field-applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation.
Extent of inspection shall be limited to one location (or as required by the
engineer) for each type of equipment defined in the "Equipment Insulation
Schedule" Article. For large equipment, remove only a portion adequate to
determine compliance.
3. Inspect pipe, fittings, strainers, and valves, randomly selected by Architect, by
removing field-applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their
installation. Extent of inspection shall be limited to three (or as required by the
engineer) locations of straight pipe, three locations of threaded fittings, three
locations of welded fittings, two locations of threaded strainers, two locations of
welded strainers, three locations of threaded valves, and three locations of
flanged valves for each pipe service defined in the "Piping Insulation Schedule,
General" Article.
D. All insulation applications will be considered defective Work if sample inspection reveals
noncompliance with requirements.
3.016 ALUMINIUM CLADDING
A. Aluminium cladding shall be provided to ducts with neat 90-degree joints and finish.
Material shall be with plain finish.
B. In pipework the longitudinal joints shall be cleated or held in position with stainless steel
bands and clips. Elbows and other fittings shall be made with mitred section and riveted.
All valves strainers, flexible connection etc. shall have easily removable boxes with
stainless steel aluminium toggle clips.
C. In ductwork the joints shall be riveted or banded with stainless steel band and clips to
avoid sagging. Boxes to be made around duct traverse joints.
D. All gaps shall be to a minimum and shall be sealed with silicon mastic suitable for
outdoor.
3.017 EQUIPMENT INSULATION SCHEDULE
A. Insulation materials and thicknesses are identified below. If more than one material is
listed for a type of equipment, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.
B. Insulate indoor and outdoor equipment in paragraphs below that is not factory insulated.
C. Chillers: Insulate cold surfaces on chillers, including, but not limited to, evaporator
bundles, condenser bundles, suction piping, compressor inlets, tube sheets, water
boxes, and nozzles with one of the following:
1. Flexible Elastomeric: 1 inch (25 mm) thick.
2. Mineral-Fiber Board: 1 inch (25 mm) thick and 3-lb/cu. ft. (48-kg/cu. m) nominal
density.
3. Mineral-Fiber Pipe and Tank: 1 inch (25 mm) thick.
D. Heat-exchanger (water-to-water for cooling service) insulation shall be one of the

following:

1. Flexible Elastomeric: 2 inch (50 mm) thick.
density.
E. Chilled-water expansion/compression tank insulation shall be one of the following:

density.
F. Condenser-water expansion/compression tank insulation shall be one of the following:

density.
G. Heating-hot-water expansion/compression tank insulation shall be one of the following:

1. Calcium Silicate: 2 inches (50 mm) thick.
density.
H. Heat-recovery expansion/compression tank insulation shall be one of the following:

density.
I. Chilled-water air-separator insulation shall be one of the following:

density.
J. Thermal storage tank (brine, water, ice) insulation shall be one of the following:
1. Mineral-Fiber Board: 3 inches (75 mm) thick and 3-lb/cu. ft. (48-kg/cu. m)
nominal density.
2. Mineral-Fiber Pipe and Tank: 3 inches (75 mm) thick.
K. Piping system filter-housing insulation shall be one of the following:

1. Mineral-Fiber Board: 2 inches (50 mm) thick and 3-lb/cu. ft. (48-kg/cu. m)
nominal density.
2. Mineral-Fiber Pipe and Tank: 2 inches (50 mm) thick.
3.018 OUTDOOR, UNDERGROUND PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE
A. Loose-fill insulation, for belowground piping, is specified in Division 33 piping distribution

Sections.
B. Chilled Water, All Sizes: Cellular glass, 2 inches (50 mm) thick.
C. Condenser-Water Supply and Return, All Sizes: Cellular glass, 2 inches (50 mm) thick.
D. Heating-Hot-Water Supply and Return, All Sizes, 200 Deg F (93 Deg C) and below:
Cellular glass, 3 inches (75 mm) thick.

E. Heating-Hot-Water Supply and Return, All Sizes, above 200 Deg F (93 Deg C):
2. Cellular Glass: 3 inches (75 mm) thick.
F. Steam and Steam Condensate, All Sizes, 350 Deg F (177 Deg C) and below:
G. Steam and Steam Condensate, All Sizes, above 350 Deg F (177 Deg C):
H. Dual-Service Heating and Cooling, All Sizes, 40 to 200 Deg F (4 to 93 Deg C): Cellular
glass, 3 inches (75 mm) thick.
I. Fuel Oil Piping, All Sizes, Heated: Cellular glass, 2 inches (50 mm) thick.
3.019 INDOOR, FIELD APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE
A. Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory-applied jacket, install
the field-applied jacket over the factory-applied jacket.
B. Ducts and Plenums, Exposed:

1. Woven Glass-Fiber Fabric material (Item 2.10A) with water vapor barrier mastic
plus
2. Aluminum, Smooth: 0.032 inch (0.81 mm) thick finish.
C. Equipment, Exposed, up to 48 Inches (1200 mm) in Diameter or with Flat Surfaces up to

72 Inches (1800 mm):
1. Woven Glass-Fiber Fabric material (Item 2.09B) with vapor barrier mastic plus
2. Painted Aluminum Cladding, Smooth 0.032 inch (0.81 mm) thick finish.
D. Equipment, Exposed, Larger Than 48 Inches (1200 mm) in Diameter or with Flat
Surfaces Larger Than 72 Inches (1800 mm):
2. Painted Aluminum Cladding, Smooth 0.032 inch (0.81 mm) thick finish.
E. Piping, Exposed:
Painted Aluminum Cladding, Smooth 0.032 inch (0.81 mm) thick finish.
3.020 OUTDOOR FIELD APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE
A. Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory-applied jacket, install
the field-applied jacket over the factory-applied jacket.
B. If more than one material is listed, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.
C. Ducts and Plenums, Exposed, up to 48 Inches (1200 mm) in Diameter or with Flat
Surfaces up to 72 Inches (1800 mm):

1. Two Layers of Woven Glass-Fiber Fabric material (Item 2.10A) with water vapor
barrier mastic plus Aluminum Cladding, Smooth: 0.032 inch (0.81 mm) thick
finish.
D. Ducts and Plenums, Exposed, Larger Than 48 Inches (1200 mm) in Diameter or with
Flat Surfaces Larger Than 72 Inches (1800 mm):
1. Two Layers of Woven Glass-Fiber Fabric material (Item 2.10A) with water vapor
barrier mastic plus Aluminum Cladding, Smooth: 0.032 inch (0.81 mm) thick
finish.
E. Equipment, Concealed:
1. Woven Glass-Fiber Fabric material (Item 2.09B) with vapor barrier mastic.
F. Equipment, Exposed, up to 48 Inches (1200 mm) in Diameter or with Flat Surfaces up to

72 Inches (1800 mm):
1. Two Layers of Woven Glass-Fiber Fabric material (Item 2.09B) with vapor barrier
mastic plus Painted Aluminum Cladding, Smooth 0.032 inch (0.81 mm) thick
finish.
G. Equipment, Exposed, Larger Than 48 Inches (1200 mm) in Diameter or with Flat
Surfaces Larger Than 72 Inches (1800 mm):
1. Two Layers of Woven Glass-Fiber Fabric material (Item 2.09B) with vapor barrier
mastic plus Painted Aluminum Cladding, Smooth 0.032 inch (0.81 mm) thick
finish.
H. Piping, Concealed:
1. Woven Glass-Fiber Fabric material (Item 2.09A) with vapor barrier mastic.
I. Piping, Exposed:
Painted Aluminum Cladding, Smooth 0.032 inch (0.81 mm) thick finish.
3.021 UNDERGROUND, FIELD-INSTALLED INSULATION JACKET
A. For underground direct-buried piping applications, install underground direct-buried

jacket over insulation material.
B. The insulation, in sizes indicated shall be applied over clean, dry surfaces. Adjoining
sections of insulation should be butted firmly together with the longitudinal seam of the
jacket located on the bottom half of the pipe.
C. Insulate and finish valves and fittings in the same manner and same thickness as piping
in which such items are installed. Moulded, factory shaped sectional pipe covering,
factory- or job-fabricated may be used subject to satisfactory visual checking by the
Consultant.
D. Direct contact between pipe and hanger shall be avoided. Hangers shall pass outside of
the sheet metal protection saddle, which shall cover a section of high-density insulation,
of sufficient length to support the pipe without crushing the insulation. The vapour barrier
shall be lapped over the saddle and securely cemented to it. Minimum thickness of
metal saddle is 1.5 mm.

E. The insulation shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s printed
instructions.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 23 0800
COMMISSIONING OF HVAC
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. This Section includes requirements for commissioning the HVAC system and its
subsystems and equipment.

1. Division 01 Section "General Commissioning Requirements" for general
requirements for commissioning processes that apply to this Section.
2. Section 23 0593 – Testing, Adjusting & Balancing for HVAC.
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. Architect: Includes Architect identified in the Contract for Construction between Owner
and Contractor, plus consultant/design professionals responsible for design of HVAC,
electrical, communications, controls for HVAC systems, and other related systems.
B. BoD: Basis of Design.
C. BoD-HVAC: HVAC systems basis of design.
D. TAB: Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing.
1.03 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES
A. The following responsibilities are in addition to those specified in Division 01 Section

"General Commissioning Requirements.":
1. Attend procedures meeting for TAB Work.
2. Certify that TAB Work is complete.
3. Attend TAB verification testing.
4. Provide measuring instruments and logging devices to record test data, and data
acquisition equipment to record data for the complete range of testing for the
required test period.
5. Review control designs for compliance with the OPR (Owner’s Project
Requirements) and BoD (Basis of Design), controllability with respect to actual
equipment to be installed, and recommend adjustments to control designs and
sequence of operation descriptions.
6. Review the Contract Documents before developing TAB procedures.
a. Verify the following:
1) Accessibility of equipment and components required for TAB Work.
KEO/21-7387-0004 23 0800 / 1 Commissioning Of Hvac

2) Adequate number and placement of duct balancing dampers to
allow proper balancing while minimizing sound levels in occupied
spaces.
3) Adequate number and placement of balancing valves to allow
proper balancing and recording of water flow.
4) Adequate number and placement of test ports and test
instrumentation to allow reading and compilation of system and
equipment performance data needed to conduct both TAB and
commissioning testing.
5) Air and water flow rates have been specified and compared to
central equipment output capacities.
1.04 COMMISSIONING DOCUMENTATION
A. The following are in addition to documentation specified in Division 01 Section "General

Commissioning Requirements."
B. Test Checklists: Contractor shall develop test checklists for HVAC systems,
subsystems, and equipment, including interfaces and interlocks with other systems.
Contractor shall prepare separate checklists for each mode of operation and provide
space to indicate whether the mode under test responded as required. In addition to the
requirements specified in Division 01 Section "General Commissioning Requirements,"
checklists shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
1. Calibration of sensors and sensor function.
2. Testing conditions under which test was conducted, including (as applicable)
ambient conditions, set points, override conditions, and status and operating
conditions that impact the results of test.
3. Control sequences for HVAC systems.
4. Strength of control signal for each set point at specified conditions.
5. Responses to control signals at specified conditions.
6. Sequence of response(s) to control signals at specified conditions.
7. Electrical demand or power input at specified conditions.
8. Power quality and related measurements.
9. Expected performance of systems, and equipment at each step of test.
10. Narrative description of observed performance of systems, and equipment.
Notation to indicate whether the observed performance at each step meets the
expected results.
11. Interaction of auxiliary equipment.
12. Issues log.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. The following submittals are in addition to those specified in Division 01 Section

"General Commissioning Requirements."
B. Testing Procedures: Contractor shall submit detailed testing plan, procedures, and
checklists for each series of tests. Submittals shall include samples of data reporting
sheets that will be part of the reports.
C. Certificate of Readiness: Contractor shall compile certificates of readiness certifying that

systems, equipment, and associated controls are ready for testing.
D. Certificate of Completion of Installation, Prestart, and Startup: Contractor shall certify
that installation, prestart, and startup activities have been completed. Certification shall
include completed checklists as specified in Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and
Balancing for HVAC."
E. Certified Pipe Cleaning and Flushing Report: Contractor shall certify that pipe cleaning,
flushing, hydrostatic testing, and chemical treating have been completed.
F. Test and Inspection Reports: Contractor shall compile and submit test and inspection
reports and certificates and shall include them in systems manual and commissioning
report.
G. Corrective Action Documents: Contractor shall submit corrective action documents.
H. Certified TAB Reports: Contractor shall submit verified, certified TAB reports.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 TESTING PREPARATION
A. Prerequisites for Testing:

1. Certify that HVAC systems and equipment have been completed, calibrated, and
started; are operating according to the BoD and Contract Documents; and that
Certificates of Readiness are signed and submitted.
2. Certify that HVAC instrumentation and control systems have been completed and
calibrated; are operating according to the BoD and Contract Documents; and that
pretest set points have been recorded.
3. Certify that TAB procedures have been completed, and that TAB reports have
been submitted, discrepancies corrected, and corrective work approved.
4. Test systems performance after approval of test checklists for systems and
equipment.
5. Set systems and equipment into operating mode to be tested (e.g., normal shut
down, normal auto position, normal manual position, unoccupied cycle,
emergency power, and alarm conditions).
6. Verify each operating cycle after it has been running for a specified period and is
operating in a steady-state condition.
7. Inspect and verify the position of each device and interlock identified on
checklists. Sign off each item as acceptable or failed. Repeat this test for each
operating cycle that applies to system being tested.
8. Check safety cutouts, alarms, and interlocks with smoke control and life-safety
systems during each mode of operation.
9. Annotate checklist or data sheet when a deficiency is observed.
10. Verify equipment interface with monitoring and control system and TAB criteria;
include the following:
a. Supply and return flow rates for VAV and constant volume systems in
each operational mode.
b. Operation of terminal units in both heating and cooling cycles.

c. Minimum outdoor-air intake in each operational mode and at minimum
and maximum airflows.
d. Building pressurization.
e. Total exhaust airflow and total outdoor-air intake.
f. Operation of indoor-air-quality monitoring systems.
11. Verify proper responses of monitoring and control system controllers and sensors
to include the following:
a. For each controller or sensor, record the indicated monitoring and control
system reading and the test instrument reading. If initial test indicates
that the test reading is outside of the control range of the installed device,
check calibration of the installed device and adjust as required. Retest
malfunctioning devices and record results on checklist or data sheet.
b. Report deficiencies and prepare an issues log entry.
12. Verify that HVAC equipment field quality-control testing has been completed and
approved. Contractor shall direct, witness, and document field quality-control
tests, inspections, and startup specified in individual Division 23 Sections.
B. Testing Instrumentation: Install measuring instruments and logging devices to record

test data for the required test period. Instrumentation shall monitor and record full range
of operating conditions and shall allow for calculation of total capacity of system for each
mode of operation. For individual room cooling tests, provide temporary heaters to
impose a cooling load indicated in BoD. Operational modes include the following:
1. Occupied and unoccupied.
2. Warm up and cool down.
3. Economizer cycle.
4. Life-safety and safety systems.
5. Fire safety.
6. Temporary upset of system operation.
7. Partial occupancy conditions.
8. Special cycles.
3.02 TAB VERIFICATION
A. TAB Preparation:
1. Contractor shall provide data required for "Pre-Field TAB Engineering Reports"
specified in Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC."
a. Contractor shall use this data to certify that prestart and startup activities
have been completed for systems and equipment installation.
B. Ductwork Air Leakage Testing:

1. Ductwork air leakage testing shall be performed according to Division 23 Section
"Metal Ducts.
2. On approval of preliminary ductwork air leakage testing report, the Contractor
shall coordinate verification testing of ductwork air leakage testing. Verification
testing shall include random retests of portions of duct section tests, reported in
preliminary ductwork air leakage testing report. The Contractor shall perform
tests using the same instrumentation (by model and serial number) as for original
testing.
C. Verification of Final TAB Report:

1. Contractor shall select, at random, 10 percent of report for field verification. The
Contractor shall use the same instruments (by model and serial number) that
were used when original data were collected.
2. Failure of an item is defined as follows:
a. For all readings other than sound, a deviation of more than 10 percent.
1) For sound pressure readings, a deviation of 3 dB. (Note:
Variations in background noise must be considered.)
3. Failure of more than 10 percent of selected items shall result in rejection of final
TAB report.
D. If deficiencies are identified during verification testing, Contractor shall take action to
remedy the deficiency. The Architect / Engineer shall review final tabulated checklists
and data sheets to determine if verification is complete and that system is operating
according to the Contract Documents.
E. The Architect / Engineer shall certify that TAB Work has been successfully completed.
3.03 TESTING
A. Testing to be done in accordance with standards listed in the section.
B. Test systems and intersystem performance after test checklists for systems,
subsystems, and equipment have been approved.
C. Perform tests using design conditions whenever possible.

1. Simulate conditions by imposing an artificial load when it is not practical to test
under design conditions and when written approval for simulated conditions is
received from Architect / Engineer. Before simulating conditions, calibrate testing
instruments. Set and document simulated conditions and methods of simulation.
After tests, return settings to normal operating conditions.
2. Alter set points when simulating conditions is not practical and when written
approval is received from Architect / Engineer.
3. Alter sensor values with a signal generator when design or simulating conditions
and altering set points are not practical. Do not use sensor to act as signal
generator to simulate conditions or override values.
D. Scope of HVAC Contractor Testing:

1. Testing scope shall include entire HVAC installation, from central equipment for
heat generation and refrigeration through distribution systems to each
conditioned space. It shall include measuring capacities and effectiveness of
operational and control functions.
2. Test all operating modes, interlocks, control responses, responses to abnormal
or emergency conditions, and verify proper response of building automation
system controllers and sensors.
E. Detailed Testing Procedures: The Architect / Engineer with HVAC Contractor shall
prepare detailed testing plans, procedures, and checklists for HVAC systems and
equipment.
F. HVAC Instrumentation and Control System Testing:

1. Field testing plans and testing requirements are specified in Division 23 Sections
"Instrumentation and Control for HVAC" and "Sequence of Operation for HVAC
Controls".
G. Pipe cleaning, flushing, hydrostatic tests, and chemical treatment requirements are
specified in Division 23 piping Sections. The Contractor shall prepare pipe system
cleaning, flushing, and hydrostatic testing plan. Plan shall include the following:
1. Sequence of testing and testing procedures for each section of pipe to be tested,
identified by pipe zone or sector identification marker. Markers shall be keyed
Drawings for each pipe sector showing the physical location of each designated
pipe test section. Drawings keyed to pipe zones or sectors shall be formatted to
allow each section of piping to be physically located and identified when referred
to in pipe system cleaning, flushing, hydrostatic testing, and chemical treatment
plan.
2. Description of equipment for flushing operations.
3. Minimum flushing water velocity.
4. Tracking checklist for managing and ensuring that all pipe sections have been
cleaned, flushed, hydrostatically tested, and chemically treated.
H. Refrigeration and Heat-Generation Systems Testing: Contractor shall prepare a testing

plan to verify performance of boilers, chillers, cooling towers, refrigerant compressors
and condensers, heat pumps, and other refrigeration systems. Plan shall include the
following:
1. Sequence of testing and testing procedures for each item of equipment and
section of pipe to be tested, identified by identification marker. Markers shall be
keyed to Drawings showing the physical location of each item of equipment and
pipe test section. Drawings shall be formatted to allow each item of equipment
and section of piping to be physically located and identified when referred to in
the system testing plan.
tested.
I. HVAC Distribution System Testing: Contractor shall prepare a testing plan to verify
performance of air, steam, and hydronic distribution systems; special exhaust; and other
distribution systems. Include HVAC terminal equipment and unitary equipment. Plan
shall include the following:
1. Sequence of testing and testing procedures for each item of equipment and
section of pipe to be tested, identified by identification marker. Markers shall be
keyed to Drawings showing the physical location of each item of equipment and
pipe test section. Drawings shall be formatted to allow each item of equipment
and section of piping to be physically located and identified when referred to in
the system testing plan.
tested.
J. Vibration and Sound Tests: Contractor shall prepare testing plans to verify performance
of vibration isolation and seismic controls.
K. Deferred Testing:
1. If tests cannot be completed because of a deficiency outside the scope of the
HVAC system, the deficiency shall be documented and reported to Architect /

Engineer. Deficiencies shall be resolved and corrected by appropriate parties
and test rescheduled.
2. If the testing plan indicates specific seasonal testing, appropriate initial
performance tests shall be completed and documented and additional tests
scheduled.
L. Testing Reports:
1. Reports shall include measured data, data sheets, and a comprehensive
summary describing the operation of systems at the time of testing.
2. Include data sheets for each controller to verify proper operation of the control
system, the system it serves, the service it provides, and its location. For each
controller, provide space for recording its readout, the reading at the controller's
sensor(s), plus comments. Provide space for testing personnel to sign off on
each data sheet.
3. Prepare a preliminary test report. Deficiencies will be evaluated by Architect /
Engineer to determine corrective action. Deficiencies shall be corrected and test
repeated.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 23 2300
REFRIGERANT PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes refrigerant piping used for air-conditioning applications.
A. Line Test Pressure for Refrigerant R-134a:

1. Suction Lines for Air-Conditioning Applications: 115 psig (793 kPa).
2. Suction Lines for Heat-Pump Applications: 225 psig (1551 kPa).
3. Hot-Gas and Liquid Lines: 225 psig (1551 kPa).
B. Line Test Pressure for Refrigerant R-407C:

C. Line Test Pressure for Refrigerant R-410A:

D. Line Test Pressure for Refrigerant HFO’s:
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this article according to the conditions of the contract.
B. Product Data: For each type of valve and refrigerant piping specialty indicated. Include
pressure drop, based on manufacturer's test data, for the following:
1. Thermostatic expansion valves.
2. Solenoid valves.
3. Hot-gas bypass valves.
4. Filter dryers.
5. Strainers.
6. Pressure-regulating valves.
C. Shop Drawings: Show layout of refrigerant piping and specialties, including pipe, tube,
and fitting sizes, flow capacities, valve arrangements and locations, slopes of horizontal
KEO/21-7387-0004 23 2300 / 1 Refrigerant Piping

runs, oil traps, double risers, wall and floor penetrations, and equipment connection
details. Show interface and spatial relationships between piping and equipment.
1. Refrigerant piping indicated on Drawings is schematic only. Size piping and
design actual piping layout, including oil traps, double risers, specialties, and pipe
and tube sizes to accommodate, as a minimum, equipment provided, elevation
difference between compressor and evaporator, and length of piping to ensure
proper operation and compliance with warranties of connected equipment.
D. Welding certificates.
E. Field quality-control test reports.
F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For refrigerant valves and piping specialties to
include in maintenance manuals.
G. Critical Refrigerant Concentration calculations for all critical spaces required by

ASHRAE Standard 15 and St. 34 for engineers review.
A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
B. Comply with ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for Refrigeration Systems."
C. Comply with ASME B31.5, "Refrigeration Piping and Heat Transfer Components."
D. UL standard : Provide products complying with UL 207, “ Refrigerant-Containing

components and accessories, Non electrical”, or UL 429,”Electrically operated valves” .
E. Listing and Labeling : Provide products specified in this section that are UL Listed and
Labeled.
F. ASHRAE 34 : Safety Standard for Refrigeration Systems and Designation and

Classification of Refrigerants
1.05 PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Store piping in a clean and protected area with end caps in place to ensure that piping
interior and exterior are clean when installed.
1.06 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations.
These items are specified in Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories."
1.07 Definitions
A. NRTL: National Recognized Testing Laboratory.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS:

Vendors List (AVL).
2.02 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS
A. Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type K or L (ASTM B 88M, Type A or B) ASTM B 280,
Type ACR.
B. Wrought-Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22.
C. Wrought-Copper Unions: ASME B16.22.
D. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32. Use 95-5 tin antimony or alloy HB solder to join
copper socket fittings on copper pipe.
E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8.
F. Flexible Connectors:
1. Body: Tin-bronze bellows with woven, flexible, tinned-bronze-wire-reinforced
protective jacket.
2. End Connections: Socket ends.
3. Offset Performance: Capable of minimum 3/4-inch (20-mm) misalignment in
minimum 7-inch- (180-mm-) long assembly.
4. Pressure Rating: Factory test at minimum 500 psig (3450 kPa).
5. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F (121 deg C).
2.03 VALVES AND SPECIALTIES
A. Diaphragm Packless Valves:

1. Body and Bonnet: Forged brass or cast bronze; globe design with straight-
through or angle pattern.
2. Diaphragm: Phosphor bronze and stainless steel with stainless-steel spring.
3. Operator: Rising stem and hand wheel.
4. Seat: Nylon.
5. End Connections: Socket, union, or flanged.
6. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig (3450 kPa).
B. Packed-Angle Valves:
1. Body and Bonnet: Forged brass or cast bronze.
2. Packing: Molded stem, back seating, and replaceable under pressure.
3. Operator: Rising stem.
4. Seat: Nonrotating, self-aligning polytetrafluoroethylene.
5. Seal Cap: Forged-brass or valox hex cap.
6. End Connections: Socket, union, threaded, or flanged.

C. Check Valves:
1. Body: Ductile iron, forged brass, or cast bronze; globe pattern.
2. Bonnet: Bolted ductile iron, forged brass, or cast bronze; or brass hex plug.
3. Piston: Removable polytetrafluoroethylene seat.
4. Closing Spring: Stainless steel.
5. Manual Opening Stem: Seal cap, plated-steel stem, and graphite seal.
6. End Connections: Socket, union, threaded, or flanged.
7. Maximum Opening Pressure: 0.50 psig (3.4 kPa).
D. Service Valves:
1. Body: Forged brass with brass cap including key end to remove core.
2. Core: Removable ball-type check valve with stainless-steel spring.
3. Seat: Polytetrafluoroethylene.
4. End Connections: Copper spring.
E. Solenoid Valves: Comply with ARI 760 and UL 429; listed and labeled by an NRTL.
1. Body and Bonnet: Plated steel.
2. Solenoid Tube, Plunger, Closing Spring, and Seat Orifice: Stainless steel.
4. End Connections: Threaded.
5. Electrical: Molded, watertight coil in NEMA 250 enclosure of type required by
location with 1/2-inch (16-GRC) conduit adapter, and 24/115/208 -V ac coil.
8. Manual operator.
F. Safety Relief Valves: Comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code; listed and
labeled by an NRTL.
1. Body and Bonnet: Ductile iron and steel, with neoprene O-ring seal.
2. Piston, Closing Spring, and Seat Insert: Stainless steel.
3. Seat Disc: Polytetrafluoroethylene.
4. End Connections: Threaded.
G. Thermostatic Expansion Valves: Comply with ARI 750.

1. Body, Bonnet, and Seal Cap: Forged brass or steel.
2. Diaphragm, Piston, Closing Spring, and Seat Insert: Stainless steel.
3. Packing and Gaskets: Non-asbestos.
4. Capillary and Bulb: Copper tubing filled with refrigerant charge.
5. Suction Temperature: 40 deg F (4.4 deg C)
6. Superheat: Adjustable.
7. Reverse-flow option (for heat-pump applications).
8. End Connections: Socket, flare, or threaded union.
9. Working Pressure Rating: 700 psig (4820 kPa) 450 psig (3100 kPa)

H. Hot-Gas Bypass Valves: Comply with UL 429; listed and labeled by an NRTL.
1. Body, Bonnet, and Seal Cap: Ductile iron or steel.
2. Diaphragm, Piston, Closing Spring, and Seat Insert: Stainless steel.
3. Packing and Gaskets: Non-asbestos.
4. Solenoid Tube, Plunger, Closing Spring, and Seat Orifice: Stainless steel.
6. Equalizer: Internal/External.
7. Electrical: Molded, watertight coil in NEMA 250 enclosure of type required by
location with 1/2-inch (16-GRC) conduit adapter, and 24/115/208 -V ac coil.
8. End Connections: Socket.
9. Set Pressure.
10. Throttling Range: Maximum 5 psig (34 kPa).
2.04 REFRIGERANT PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Straight-Type Strainers:
1. Body: Welded steel with corrosion-resistant coating.
2. Screen: 100-mesh stainless steel.
3. End Connections: Socket or flare.
B. Angle-Type Strainers:
1. Body: Forged brass or cast bronze.
2. Drain Plug: Brass hex plug.
3. Screen: 100-mesh monel.
C. Moisture/Liquid Indicators:
1. Body: Forged brass.
2. Window: Replaceable, clear, fused glass window with indicating element
protected by filter screen.
3. Indicator: Color coded to show moisture content in ppm.
4. Minimum Moisture Indicator Sensitivity: Indicate moisture above 60 ppm.
D. Replaceable-Core Filter Dryers: Comply with ARI 730.

1. Body and Cover: Painted-steel shell with ductile-iron cover, stainless-steel
screws, and neoprene gaskets.
2. Filter Cartridge: Pleated media with integral end rings, stainless steel support,
ARI 730 rated for capacity.
3. Filter Dryer Cartridge: Pleated media with solid core sieve with activated alumina,
ARI 730 rated for capacity.
4. Wax removal cartridge: Pleated media with solid core sieve with activated
charcoal and desiccant with integral gaskets.

5. Filter Media: 10 micron, pleated with integral end rings; stainless-steel support.
6. Desiccant Media: Activated alumina/charcoal.
7. Designed for reverse flow (for heat-pump applications).
9. Access Ports: NPS 1/4 (DN 8) connections at entering and leaving sides for
pressure differential measurement.
10. Maximum Pressure Loss: 2 psig (14 kPa)
11. Rated Flow tons (kW).
E. Permanent Filter Dryers: Comply with ARI 730.

1. Body and Cover: Painted-steel shell.
2. Filter Media: 10 micron, pleated with integral end rings; stainless-steel support.
3. Desiccant Media: Activated alumina/charcoal.
4. Designed for reverse flow (for heat-pump applications).
6. Access Ports: NPS 1/4 (DN 8) connections at entering and leaving sides for
pressure differential measurement.
7. Maximum Pressure Loss: 2 psig (14 kPa)
8. Rated Flow: tons (kW).
F. Mufflers:
G. Receivers: Comply with ARI 495.

1. Comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code; listed and labeled by an
NRTL.
2. Comply with UL 207; listed and labeled by an NRTL.
4. Tappings: Inlet, outlet, liquid level indicator, and safety relief valve.
5. End Connections: Socket or threaded.
H. Liquid Accumulators: Comply with ARI 495.

2. End Connections: Socket or threaded.
I. Flexible Connectors: 3450 kPa operating pressure; seamless tin-bronze or stainless-

steel core, high tensile bronze braid covering, solder end connections and synthetic
covering; dehydrated, pressure tested minimum 180mm long.
J. Insulation: Insulate refrigerant suction pipe with 25 mm pre-formed glass fibre sectional
insulation; `ksi' value of 0.0315 / 0035 at 25 / 50 C (`K' value of 0.22 / 0.24 at 77 °F /

122 F), non-combustible; density 96 kg/M3 (6 lbs/ft3), complete with factory applied
Kraft reinforced aluminium foil vapour barrier, with self-sealing adhesive joints.
Refrigerant suction and liquid pipes shall be wrapped together with heavy duty PVC
tape
2.05 REFRIGERANTS
A. Subject to compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, products to be

provided shall be from the manufacturer approved by the Engineer.
B. ASHRAE 34, R-134a: Tetrafluoroethane.
C. ASHRAE 34,R-407C:Difluoromethane/Pentafluoroethane/1,1,1,2-Tetrafluoroethane.
D. ASHRAE 34, R-410A: Pentafluorothane/Difluoromethane.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine roughing-in for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and
other conditions affecting performance of refrigerant piping. Do not proceed with
installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Install refrigerant piping according to ASHRAE 15.
B. All refrigerant pipes shall be installed to allow access for maintenance.
C. Basic piping installation requirements are specified in Division 15 Section "Basic

Mechanical Materials and Methods.
D. Install piping in short and direct arrangement with minimum number of joints, elbows
and fittings.
E. Arrange piping to allow normal inspection and service of compressor and other
equipment. Install valves and specialties in accessible locations to allow for service and
inspection.
F. Install piping with adequate clearance between pipe and adjacent wall and hangers, or
between pipes for insulation installation. Use sleeves through floors, walls, or ceilings,
sized to permit installation of full-thickness insulation.
G. Insulate suction lines and liquid lines together.

1. Do not install insulation until system testing has been complete and all leaks
have been eliminated.
H. Install branch lines to parallel compressors of equal length, and pipe and identically and
symmetrically.

I. Install copper tubing in rigid or flexible conduit in locations where copper tubing will be
exposed to mechanically injury.
J. Slope refrigerant piping as follows:

1. Install horizontal hot-gas discharge piping with a uniform slope of 0.4 percent
downward away from compressor.
2. Install horizontal suction lines with a uniform slope of 0.4 percent downward to
compressor.
3. Install traps and double risers where indicated and when required to entrain oil in
vertical runs.
4. Liquid lines may be installed level.
K. Use fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
L. Install exposed piping at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are not
permitted, unless expressly indicated.
M. Reduce pipe size using eccentric reducer fittings installed with level side down.
N. Install unions to allow removal of solenoid valves, pressure-regulating valves, expansion

valves, and at connections to compressors and evaporators.
O. Install flexible connectors at the inlet and discharge connection, at right angles to axial
movement of compressor, parallel to crankshaft.
P. Install replaceable-core filter-dryers, with isolation valves and valve bypass.
Q. Install refrigerant valves according to manufacturer's written instructions.
R. When brazing, remove solenoid-valve coils; remove sight glasses; and remove stems,
seats, and packing of valves, and accessible internal parts of refrigerant specialties. Do
not apply heat near bulb of expansion valve.
S. Electrical wiring for solenoid valves is specified in Division 16 Sections. Co-ordinate

electrical requirements and connections.
T. Mount expansion valves close to evaporator.
U. Install pressure relief valves as required by ASHRAE 15.
V. Charge and purge systems, after testing, and dispose of refrigerant following ASHRAE
15 procedures.
W. Charge system as follows:

1. Install filter-dryer core after leak test, but before evacuation.
2. Evacuate refrigerant system with vacuum pump, until temperature of 1.7 deg C is
indicated on vacuum for minimum of 5 hours.
3. Maintain vacuum for a minimum of 5 hours.
4. Break vacuum with refrigerant gas and charge of 14 kPa.
3.03 VALVE AND SPECIALTY APPLICATIONS

A. Install diaphragm pack less packed-angle valves in suction and discharge lines of
compressor.
B. Install service valves for gage taps at inlet and outlet of hot-gas bypass valves and
strainers if they are not an integral part of valves and strainers.
C. Install a check valve at the compressor discharge and a liquid accumulator at the
compressor suction connection.
D. Except as otherwise indicated, install diaphragm packless packed-angle valves on inlet

and outlet side of filter dryers.
E. Install a full-sized, three-valve bypass around filter dryers.
F. Install solenoid valves upstream from each expansion valve and hot-gas bypass valve.
Install solenoid valves in horizontal lines with coil at top.
G. Install thermostatic expansion valves as close as possible to distributors on evaporators.

1. Install valve so diaphragm case is warmer than bulb.
2. Secure bulb to clean, straight, horizontal section of suction line using two bulb
straps. Do not mount bulb in a trap or at bottom of the line.
3. If external equalizer lines are required, make connection where it will reflect
suction-line pressure at bulb location.
H. Install safety relief valves where required by ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
Pipe safety-relief-valve discharge line to outside according to ASHRAE 15.
I. Install moisture/liquid indicators in liquid line at the inlet of the thermostatic expansion
valve or at the inlet of the evaporator coil capillary tube.
J. Install strainers upstream from and adjacent to the following unless they are furnished
as an integral assembly for device being protected:
1. Solenoid valves.
2. Thermostatic expansion valves.
3. Hot-gas bypass valves.
4. Compressor.
K. Install filter dryers in liquid line between compressor and thermostatic expansion
valve, and in the suction line at the compressor.
L. Install receivers sized to accommodate pump-down charge.
M. Install flexible connectors at compressors.
3.04 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs.
B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before
assembly.
C. Fill pipe and fittings with an inert gas (nitrogen or carbon dioxide), during brazing or
welding, to prevent scale formation.
D. Soldered Joints: Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube
Handbook."
E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," Chapter "Pipe
and Tube."
1. Use Type BcuP, copper-phosphorus alloy for joining copper socket fittings with
copper pipe.
2. Use Type BAg, cadmium-free silver alloy for joining copper with bronze or steel.
F. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12/D10.12M.
G. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service
application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt
threads.
3.05 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Hanger, support, and anchor products are specified in Division 23 Section "Hangers and
Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment."
B. Install the following pipe attachments:

1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal runs less than 20 feet (6
m) long.
2. Roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal runs 20 feet (6 m) or
longer.
3. Pipe Roller: MSS SP-58, Type 44 for multiple horizontal piping 20 feet (6 m) or
longer, supported on a trapeze.
4. Spring hangers to support vertical runs.
5. Copper-clad hangers and supports for hangers and supports in direct contact
with copper pipe.
C. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod
sizes:
1. NPS 1/2 (DN 15): Maximum span, 60 inches (1500 mm); minimum rod size, 1/4
inch (6.4 mm).
2. NPS 5/8 (DN 18): Maximum span, 60 inches (1500 mm); minimum rod size, 1/4
inch (6.4 mm).
3. NPS 1 (DN 25): Maximum span, 72 inches (1800 mm); minimum rod size, 1/4
inch (6.4 mm).
4. NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32): Maximum span, 96 inches (2400 mm); minimum rod size,
3/8 inch (9.5 mm).
3/8 inch (9.5 mm).
6. NPS 2 (DN 50): Maximum span, 96 inches (2400 mm); minimum rod size, 3/8
inch (9.5 mm).
3/8 inch (9.5 mm).
8. NPS 3 (DN 80): Maximum span, 10 feet (3 m); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (9.5
mm).
9. NPS 4 (DN 100): Maximum span, 12 feet (3.7 m); minimum rod size, 1/2 inch
(13 mm).

D. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod
sizes:
1. NPS 2 (DN 50): Maximum span, 10 feet (3 m); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (9.5
mm).
2. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65): Maximum span, 11 feet (3.4 m); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch
(9.5 mm).
3. NPS 3 (DN 80): Maximum span, 12 feet (3.7 m); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (9.5
mm).
4. NPS 4 (DN 100): Maximum span, 14 feet (4.3 m); minimum rod size, 1/2 inch
(13 mm).
E. Support multifloor vertical runs at least at each floor.
A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
B. Tests and Inspections:

1. Comply with ASME B31.5, Chapter VI.
2. Test refrigerant piping, specialties, and receivers. Isolate compressor,
condenser, evaporator, and safety devices from test pressure if they are not
rated above the test pressure.
3. Test high- and low-pressure side piping of each system separately at not less
than the pressures indicated in Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article.
a. Pressure test with nitrogen to 1380 kPa. Perform final tests at 186-kPa
vacuum and 1380 kPa using halide torch or electronic leak detector.
b. System shall maintain test pressure at the manifold gage throughout
duration of test.
c. Test joints and fittings with electronic leak detector or by brushing a small
amount of soap and glycerin solution over joints.
d. Remake leaking joints using new materials, and retest until satisfactory
results are achieved.
3.07 SYSTEM CHARGING
A. Charge system using the following procedures:

1. Install core in filter dryers after leak test but before evacuation.
2. Evacuate entire refrigerant system with a vacuum pump to 500 micrometers
(67 Pa). If vacuum holds for 12 hours, system is ready for charging.
3. Break vacuum with refrigerant gas, allowing pressure to build up to 2 psig (14
kPa).
4. Charge system with a new filter-dryer core in charging line.
3.08 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust thermostatic expansion valve to obtain proper evaporator superheat.
B. Adjust high- and low-pressure switch settings to avoid short cycling in response to
fluctuating suction pressure.

C. Adjust set-point temperature of air-conditioning or chilled-water controllers to the system
design temperature.
D. Perform the following adjustments before operating the refrigeration system, according
to manufacturer's written instructions:
1. Open shutoff valves in condenser water circuit.
2. Verify that compressor oil level is correct.
3. Open compressor suction and discharge valves.
4. Open refrigerant valves except bypass valves that are used for other purposes.
5. Check open compressor-motor alignment and verify lubrication for motors and
bearings.
E. Replace core of replaceable filter dryer after system has been adjusted and after design
flow rates and pressures are established.
3.09 CLEANING
A. Before installation of copper tubing other than Type ACR, clean tubing and fittings with
trichlorethylene.
3.010 COMMISSIONING
A. Charge system using the following procedures.

1. Install core in filter dyer after leak test, but before evacuation.
2. Evacuate refrigerant system with vacuum pump until temperature of 1.67 deg C
is indicated on vacuum dehydration indicator.
3. During evacuation, apply heat to pockets, elbows, and low spots in piping.
4. Maintain vacuum on system for minimum of 5 hours after closing valve between
vacuum pump and system.
5. Break vacuum with refrigerant gas, allowing pressure to build up to 14 kPa.
6. Complete charging of system, using new filter-dryer core in charging line. Provide
7. Full-operating charge.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 23 3113
METAL & NON-METALLIC DUCTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. This Section includes metal ducts for supply, return, outside, and exhaust air-
distribution systems in pressure classes from minus 500 to plus 2500Pa. Metal ducts
include the following:
1. Rectangular ducts and fittings.
2. Single-wall, round, and flat-oval spiral-seam ducts and formed fittings.
3. Double-wall, round, and flat-oval spiral-seam ducts and formed fittings.
4. Duct liner.
5. Fire Rated Ductwork.
6. Pre-insulated Ducts

1. Section 233713 "Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles" for factory- and field-
fabricated casings for mechanical equipment.
2. Section 230700 "Mechanical Insulation" for duct insulation.
3. Section 233300 "Duct Accessories" for dampers, sound-control devices, duct-
mounting access doors and panels, turning vanes, and flexible ducts.
4. Section 233600 "Air Terminals Units" for constant-volume and variable-air-
volume control boxes and reheat boxes.
5. Section 230900 “HVAC Instrumentation and Controls" for automatic volume-
control dampers and operators.
6. Section 230593 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing” for adjusting and balancing
of air-distribution systems.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. ASHRAE - Handbook of Fundamentals; Chapter on Duct Design.
B. ASHRAE - Handbook of Equipment; Chapter on Duct Construction.
C. ASTM A 90 - Weight of Coating on Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Iron or Steel Articles.
D. ASTM A 525 - General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by

the Hot-Dip Process.
E. ASTM A 527 - Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by Hot-Dip Process, Lock

Forming Quality.
F. NFPA 90 A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.
KEO/21-7387-0000 23 3113 / 1 Metal Ducts & Non-Metallic Ducts

Reem East Hills Villas
Abu Dhabi
G. NFPA 90 B - Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems.
H. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible, Latest Edition.
I. SMACNA - HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual, First Edition, 1985.
J. ASTM A 167 - Stainless and Heat Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet and
Strip.
K. UL 181 - Factory-Made Air Ducts and Connectors.
L. DW172: Specification for Kitchen Ventilation Systems
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: CAD / Revit based on the project requirements-generated and drawn
to scale not greater than 1:100. Show fabrication and installation details for metal
ducts.
1. Fabrication, assembly, and installation, including plans, elevations, sections,
components, and attachments to other work.
2. Duct layout indicating sizes and pressure classes.
3. Elevations of top and bottom of ducts.
4. Dimensions of main duct runs from building grid lines.
5. Fittings.
6. Reinforcement and spacing.
7. Seam and joint construction.
8. Penetrations through fire-rated and other partitions.
9. Equipment installation based on equipment being used on Project.
10. Duct accessories, including access doors and panels.
11. Hangers and supports, including methods for duct and building attachment,
vibration isolation, and seismic restraints.
B. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following
items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the
items involved:
1. Ceiling suspension assembly members.
2. Other systems installed in same space as ducts.
3. Ceiling- and wall-mounting access doors and panels required to provide access
to dampers and other operating devices.
4. Ceiling-mounting items, including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers,
sprinklers, access panels, and special moldings.
C. Welding certificates.
D. Field quality-control test reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with
performance requirements.
E. Record Drawings: Indicate actual routing, fitting details, reinforcements, supports, and
installed accessories and devices.

Abu Dhabi
A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural
Welding Code--Steel," for hangers and supports, AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding
Code--Aluminum," for aluminum supporting members and AWS D9.1, "Sheet Metal
Welding Code," for duct joint and seam welding.
B. NFPA Compliance:
1. NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems”, unless
otherwise indicated.
2. NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems”,
unless otherwise indicated.
C. Comply with NFPA 96, "Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial Cooking
Operations," Ch. 3, "Duct System," for range hood ducts, unless otherwise indicated.
D. IMC Compliance: Comply with Section 6, Duct Systems of International Mechanical

Code (IMC).
E. Mockups( as required by the Architect / Engineer) :-

1. Before installing duct systems, build mockups representing pressure classes
higher than 500Pa. Build mockups to comply with the following requirements,
using materials indicated for the completed Work, and include each of the
following features and fittings:
a. Five transverse joints.
b. One access door(s).
c. Two typical branch connections, each with at least one elbow.
d. Two typical flexible duct or flexible connector connections for each duct
and apparatus.
e. Perform tests specified in Part 3 "Field Quality Control" Article. Modify
mockup construction and perform additional tests as required to achieve
specified minimum acceptable results.
2. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at
time of Initial Acceptance.
F. Unless accepted otherwise by the Engineer, use manufactures and installers that
employ a Quality Management System complying with the program described in ISO
9001-2000, or similar system.
1. DW144 : Specification for Sheet metal ductwork.
2. DW171 : Standard for Kitchen Sheet Metal Ductwork.
3. SMACNA : Sheet Metal and Air conditioning Contractor’s National
Association.
- HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible.
- HVAC Systems Testing, Adjusting & Balancing Standards
1.05 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace

components of units that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty
period.
1. Warranty Period: From the date certified for the owner’s “Taking-Over” of the
works.

Abu Dhabi
A. Deliver sealant and firestopping materials to site in original unopened containers or

bundles with labels indicating manufacturer, product name and designation, color,
expiration period for use, pot life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multi-
component materials.
B. Store and handle sealant and firestopping materials according to manufacturer's

written recommendations.
C. Deliver products to site under provisions of Section 230500.
D. Store and protect products under provisions of Section 230500.
E. Prevent end damage and prevent dirt and moisture from entering ducts and fittings.
F. Where possible store ductwork inside and protect from weather. Where necessary to
store outdoors, store above grade and enclose with waterproof wrapping.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS

be provided shall be from the manufacturer listed in - Approved Vendors List (AVL).
2.02 SHEET METAL MATERIALS
A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for
acceptable materials, material thickness, and duct construction methods, unless
otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller
marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections.
B. Galvanized Sheet Steel:

1. Lock-forming quality; complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M and having Z275
coating designation; ducts shall have mill-phosphatized finish for surfaces
exposed to view.
2. ASTM A527 galvanized steel sheet, lock-forming quality, having zinc-coating
designation of G90 in conformance with ASTM A525. Mill phosphatized for
exposed locations
C. Stainless Steel:
1. ASTM A 480/A 480M, Type 316, and having a No. 2D finish for concealed
ducts, and for exposed ducts No. 4 finish for surfaces of ducts exposed to view.
2. ASTM A167 stainless steel sheets; Type 304, sheet metal gauge and
construction shall conform to recommendations in SMACNA duct construction
standards, metal and flexible, latest edition.
D. Flexible Ducts
1. UL 181, Class 1, aluminum-polyester composite film with latex adhesive,
supported by helical wound spring steel wire; fiberglass insulation; aluminized

Abu Dhabi
vapor barrier film and PVC jacket, K value of 0.23 maximum @ 75 F mean
temperature.
2. Pressure Rating: 2,500 Pa (10-inch WG) positive.
3. Maximum Velocity: 25 M / Sec. (4,900 fpm)
4. Temperature Range: - 30 C to 140 C (-22 F to 284 F).
E. Fasteners: Rivets, bolts, or sheet metal screws.
F. Sealant: Non-hardening, water resistant, fire resistive, compatible with mating

materials; liquid used alone or with tape, or heavy mastic.
G. Hanger Rod: Galvanized; continuously threaded.
2.03 DUCT LINER
Supply, return and extract air ducts for all ductwork shall be insulated with physically cross-
linked partially open-cell polyolefin foam with factory applied reinforced aluminium foil
and adhesive backing. Insulation shall have the following specifications:
A. Density: 25 kg/m3 (foam core only).
B. Thermal Conductivity (ASTM C518): Maximum 0.035 W/m.°K at mean temperature
23oC.
C. Water absorption: <0.3 % v/v.
D. Service Temperature Range: - 80°C ~ +80°C (adhesive backing).
E. No mould growth when tested to ASTM C1338.
F. Minimum Noise Reduction Coefficient 0.50 and above (ISO 354).
G. Length of the acoustic liner should depend on the NC value required for each room.
If an NC35 shall be achieved for each room, the manufacturer or acoustic
consultant should provide complete calculations showing how many meters of liner
is required to achieve an NC 35.
H. Fire Rating:
i. Class 0 to BS476 Parts 6 and 7.
ii. Complies with NFPA 90A and B (ASTM E84 25/50 rating).
iii. UL181.11
2.04 SEALANT MATERIALS
A. Joint and Seam Sealants, General: The term "sealant" is not limited to materials of
adhesive or mastic nature but includes tapes and combinations of open-weave fabric
strips and mastics.
B. Solvent-Based Joint and Seam Sealant: One-part, nonsag, solvent-release-curing,

polymerized butyl sealant formulated with a minimum of 75 percent solids.
C. Flanged Joint Mastic: One-part, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric joint sealant

complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use O.
D. Flange Gaskets: Butyl rubber or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene plasticizer.
2.05 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

Abu Dhabi
A. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-
steel fasteners appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being
attached.
1. Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate
concretes or for slabs more than 100mm thick.
2. Exception: Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-
aggregate concretes or for slabs less than 100mm thick.
B. Hanger Materials: Galvanized sheet steel or threaded steel rod.

1. Hangers Installed in Corrosive Atmospheres: Electrogalvanized, all-thread
rods or galvanized rods with threads painted with zinc-chromate primer after
installation.
2. Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards--Metal and Flexible" for steel sheet width and thickness and for steel
rod diameters. Where duct sizes exceed these guidelines, the spacing and rod
size shall not exceed the recommended maximum load rating for the proposed
rod size.
3. Galvanized-steel straps attached to aluminum ducts shall have contact
surfaces painted with zinc-chromate primer.
C. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws;
compatible with duct materials.
D. Trapeze and Riser Supports: Steel shapes complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M.
1. Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized-steel shapes and plates.
2. Supports for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless-steel support materials.
3. Supports for Aluminum Ducts: Aluminum support materials unless materials
are electrolytically separated from ducts.
2.06 RECTANGULAR DUCT FABRICATION
A. Fabricate ducts, elbows, transitions, offsets, branch connections, and other

construction according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and
Flexible" and complying with requirements for metal thickness, reinforcing types and
intervals, tie-rod applications, and joint types and intervals. Where duct sizes exceed
those listed in the referenced standards, the duct manufacturer shall determine the
proper material thickness and reinforcement requirements in accordance with
SMACNA’s Chapter 7, Functional Criteria, "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--
Metal and Flexible."
1. Lengths: Fabricate rectangular ducts in lengths appropriate to reinforcement
and rigidity class required for pressure class.
2. Deflection: Duct systems shall not exceed deflection limits according to
SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible."
B. Transverse Joints: CGF-1 integral flanges to ensure low leakage.
C. Formed-On Flanges: CGF-1 integral flanges to ensure low leakage.
1. Duct Size: Maximum 750mm wide and up to 500Pa pressure class.

2. Longitudinal Seams: Pittsburgh lock sealed with noncuring polymer sealant.

Abu Dhabi
D. Cross Breaking or Cross Beading: Cross break or cross bead duct sides 480mm and
larger and 0.9mm thick or less, with more than 0.93 sq. m of nonbraced panel area
unless ducts are lined.
E. Rectangular Ducts Gages

1. Maximum Width
a. In Inches (mm) Gage
b. Up to 18 (450) 24
c. 19 to 42 (475 to 1050) 22
d. 43 to 54 (1075 to 1350) 20
e. 55 to 72 (1375 to 1800) 18
f. 73 and Over (1825) 18
2.07 APPLICATION OF LINER IN RECTANGULAR DUCTS
A. Adhere a single layer of indicated thickness of duct liner with at least 90 percent
adhesive coverage at liner contact surface area. Attaining indicated thickness with
multiple layers of duct liner is prohibited.
B. Apply adhesive to transverse edges of liner facing upstream that do not receive metal
nosing.
C. Butt transverse joints without gaps and coat joint with adhesive.
D. Fold and compress liner in corners of rectangular ducts or cut and fit to ensure butted-
edge overlapping.
E. Do not apply liner in rectangular ducts with longitudinal joints, except at corners of
ducts, unless duct size and standard liner product dimensions make longitudinal joints
necessary.
F. Apply adhesive coating on longitudinal seams in ducts with air velocity of 12.7 m/s.
G. Secure liner with mechanical fasteners 100mm from corners and at intervals not
exceeding 300mm transversely; at 75mm from transverse joints and at intervals not
exceeding 450mm longitudinally.
H. Secure transversely oriented liner edges facing the airstream with metal nosings that
have either channel or "Z" profiles or are integrally formed from duct wall. Fabricate
edge facings at the following locations:
1. Fan discharges.
2. Intervals of lined duct preceding unlined duct.
3. Upstream edges of transverse joints in ducts where air velocities are greater
than 2500 fpm (12.7 m/s) or where indicated.
I. Terminate inner ducts with buildouts attached to fire-damper sleeves, dampers,

turning vane assemblies, or other devices. Fabricated buildouts (metal hat sections)
or other buildout means are optional; when used, secure buildouts to duct walls with
bolts, screws, rivets, or welds.
2.08 ROUND DUCT AND FITTING FABRICATION

Abu Dhabi
A. Fabricate supply ducts of galvanized steel, with spiral lockseam, according to
SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible." Duct sizes not
available in spiral lockseam shall be longitudinal, continuous butt weld or continuous
seam weld in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards Type
RL-4. Where duct sizes exceed those listed in the referenced standards, the duct
manufacturer shall determine the proper material thickness and reinforcement
requirements in accordance with SMACNA’s Chapter 7, Functional Criteria, "HVAC
Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible."
B. Diameter as applied to flat-oval ducts in this Article is the diameter of a round duct with
a circumference equal to the perimeter of a given size of flat-oval duct.
C. Round, Longitudinal- and Spiral Lock-Seam Ducts: Fabricate supply ducts of

galvanized steel according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal
and Flexible."
D. Duct Joints:
1. Ducts up to 500mm in Diameter: Interior, center-beaded slip coupling, sealed
before and after fastening, attached with sheet metal screws.
2. Ducts 535 to 1830mm in Diameter: Three-piece, gasketed, flanged joint
consisting of two internal flanges with sealant and one external closure band
with gasket.
3. Ducts Larger than 1830mm in Diameter: Companion angle flanged joints per
SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-
2.
4. Round Ducts: Prefabricated connection system consisting of double-lipped,
EPDM rubber gasket. Manufacture ducts according to connection system
manufacturer's tolerances.
E. 90-Degree Tees and Laterals and Conical Tees: Fabricate to comply with SMACNA's
"HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible," with metal thickness
specified for longitudinal-seam straight ducts.
F. Diverging-Flow Fittings: Fabricate with reduced entrance to branch taps and with no
excess material projecting from fitting onto branch tap entrance.
G. Fabricate elbows using die-formed, gored, pleated, or mitered construction. Unless

elbow construction type is indicated, fabricate elbows as follows:
1. Mitered-Elbow Radius and Number of Pieces: Welded construction complying
with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible,"
2. SMACNA requires that metal thickness of fittings be equal to or greater than
that of ducts.
3. Round Mitered Elbows: Welded construction with the following metal thickness
for pressure classes from minus 500 to plus 500Pa:
a. Ducts 75 to 915mm in Diameter: 0.85mm.
b. Ducts 940 to 1270mm in Diameter: 1.0mm.
c. Ducts 1320 to 1525mm in Diameter: 1.3mm.
d. Ducts 1575 to 2130mm in Diameter: 1.6mm.
4. Round Mitered Elbows: Welded construction with the following metal thickness
for pressure classes from 500 to 2500Pa:
a. Ducts 75 to 660mm in Diameter: 0.85mm.

Abu Dhabi
b. Ducts 685 to 1270mm in Diameter: 1.0mm.
c. Ducts 1320 to 1525mm in Diameter: 1.3mm.
d. Ducts 1575 to 2130mm in Diameter: 1.6mm.
5. 90-Degree, 2-Piece, Mitered Elbows: Use only for supply systems or for
material-handling Class A or B exhaust systems and only where space
restrictions do not permit using radius elbows. Fabricate with single-thickness
turning vanes.
6. Round Elbows 200mm and less in Diameter: Fabricate die-formed elbows for
45- and 90-degree elbows and pleated elbows for 30, 45, 60, and 90 degrees
only. Fabricate nonstandard bend-angle configurations or nonstandard
diameter elbows with gored construction.
7. Round Elbows 225 through 355mm in Diameter: Fabricate gored or pleated
elbows for 30, 45, 60, and 90 degrees unless space restrictions require mitered
elbows. Fabricate nonstandard bend-angle configurations or nonstandard
diameter elbows with gored construction.
8. Round Elbows Larger than 355mm in Diameter and All Flat-Oval Elbows:
Fabricate gored elbows unless space restrictions require mitered elbows.
9. Die-Formed Elbows for Sizes through 200mm in Diameter and All Pressures
1.0mm thick with 2-piece welded construction.
10. Round Gored-Elbow Metal Thickness: Same as non-elbow fittings specified
above.
11. Pleated Elbows for Sizes through 355mm in Diameter and Pressures through
2500Pa: 0.55mm.
2.09 FIRE RATED DUCTWORK:
A. Fire rated ductwork Shall be applicable for Smoke extract system, Car park ventilation
system, kitchen extract system, corridor pressurization system and all emergency
ventilation system.
B. Fire rated ductwork shall be NON-coated galvanized steel with CGF-1 integral flanges
to ensure low leakage.
C. Fire rated ductwork shall provide at least 2 Hrs. fire rating as per BS 476 Part 24 and
BS 5588 Part 9 standard.
D. Fire rated ductwork shall be tested, assessed and certified by independent

laboratories and approved by ADCD.
E. The system shall be assessed by another independent certifying authority such as

LPCB or certifier or similar auditor to ensure the standards and norms are being
adhered in fire and safety products supply and installation.
F. Non-coated fire rated duct system shall be Civil Defense approved and third-party
approval certificate is suitable for applications where fire rated ductwork is required as
per BS476: Part 24 and ISO6944.
G. Non-coated fire rated ductwork is acceptable equal for use in applications of fire rated
ductwork where specifications may refer to any coated duct systems without any
prejudice so as long as performance criteria such as fire resistance required rating is
met.

Abu Dhabi
H. The Fire Rated ductwork shall be tested for both Type A (Fire Outside) and Type B
(Fire Inside and Outside) as per BS 476; Part 24:1987 (ISO 6944:1985) to meet design
guidelines in accordance to BS 5588: Part 9:1989, Method 3, for both horizontal and
vertical ductwork test.
I. The Fire Rated Ductwork should be

constructed in accordance with the
Manufacturer Guide to provide:
1. Stability (min 120– max
240) minutes
2. Integrity (min 120– max
240) minutes
3. Insulation (min 120) minutes
4. when tested to the
requirements of BS 476:
Part 24 by approved
laboratory at temperature of
1049°C for 2 hours ( ISO
834 : 1975 (E) Fire
Resistance Test Standard
Time – Temperature Curve
), with valid civil defense
certification mentioning Certificate No & testing reference confirmation.
J. The ductwork should be capable of providing Type A (fire outside) or Duct B (fire
inside) fire containment and, under normal non-fire operating conditions, should
conform to the pressure classification of the current HVCA DW/144 Specification for
Sheet Metal Ductwork.
K. Static pressure limits:
Pressure level Range

Pressure/Velocit
Class Positive Negative
y
Pressure Pressure
Down to - 500
Low Class A Up to + 500 Pa Pa
Up to + 1000 Down to - 750
Medium Class B Pa Pa
Up to + 2000 Down to - 750
High Class C Pa Pa
NOTE that these classifications are to DW /144 requirements
1. It is mandatory that the manufacturer/installer is working to a Quality

Assurance System based upon the ISO 9001 series.
2. The fire rated ductwork shall be tested for both Uninsulated and Insulated ducts
with proper certification.
3. The fire rated ductwork should meet SMACNA, DW-144, NFPA requirements.
4. The fire rated ductwork system shall have valid certification from approved
laboratory and the same should be reflected on the Civil defense certificate with
certificate number.

Abu Dhabi
5. The complete fire rated duct system including supports, hangers, joints,
gaskets, sealants, volume control dampers, fire rated sound attenuators should
be tested as a complete system and approved by Civil defense.
6. Fire rated ductwork shall be constructed and protected to ensure that the
stability, integrity and insulation (if required) of the ductwork system is
maintained for the required duration. Supports and fixings
7. shall be of sufficient strength and arranged to ensure that the ductwork is
maintained in position throughout the period.
8. All accessories like control dampers, sound attenuators, etc should be certified
for fire rating
9. Where the duct passes through compartment walls the space between the duct
and the wall shall be reinforced and packed with proprietary fire stopping
material to maintain the stability and integrity of the system for the required
period and shall match the integrity of the compartment wall.
10. The Kitchen ductwork system shall be fabricated with stainless steel as per
NFPA 96. The joints shall be fully welded. Insulation for Kitchen ducts shall be
tested and approved. The Kitchen ducts shall be tested as per BS-476 Part 24
for stability, Integrity and Insulation criteria and have valid civil defense
approval. Insulation thickness should be Rockwool - 110 mm thick with 160
Kg/m3 density
11. All installation and design of fire rated ductwork shall be in accordance with
“ASFP - Fire rated and smoke outlet and industry guide to design and
installation”
12. The contractor shall follow manufacturers installation guidelines for supports,
hangers, sealants, gaskets, clamps as approved by civil defense certificate.
The duct shall be installed by civil defense approved contractor only, supplier
shall provide supply certificate for delivered material if installation is done as
per guidelines.
13. The fire rated duct manufacturer shall provide previous 10 years track record
at least for 10 projects to assure manufacturers credibility and manufacturing
capabilities.
14. The construction schedule of the Fire Rated Ductwork shall be followed as per
manufacturers approved test report and test conducted during testing.
L. In addition to above the fire rated ducts should meet requirements as mentioned
below.
1. Fire rated Ductwork for Smoke Control Systems (both exhaust and make-up air
ducts) shall be of at least 2-hour fire resistance rated.
2. Where a duct passes through other fire compartments of higher rating, the duct
shall be constructed to have the same rating of that compartment. The rating
shall apply to fire exposure from both interior and exterior of the duct or
structure.
3. Such fire rating of smoke control system ducts shall be evaluated and approved
for fire rating as well as for Stability, Integrity and Insulation Criteria for fire
rating.
4. The complete duct system including supports, hangers, joints, gaskets, sealant
etc. shall be in compliance with the approved test standards and fire rating
criteria.
5. Ducts for Smoke control systems (Type A, Rated for both fire outside and Type
B, fire outside and inside, 1 hour and 2 hour fire rated, tested and approved for
fire rating, stability, integrity and non-combustible insulation as per BS 476, Part
24 or EN-1366 with E60 classification as per EN 13501.

Abu Dhabi
2.010 PRE-INSULATED DUCTWORK:
A. Non-metal Ductwork fabricated from closed-cell Phenolic panels needs to be UL

Listed as a Class 1 Air Duct as per UL 181 (Factory Made Air Ducts & Air
Connectors).
B. Certification of the Manufacturer of the UL 181 Duct Panel & Panels should indicate
the Date of Manufacture, Batch Number, UL Certification and Country of Origin. All
tradenames should be owned by Manufacturer
C. A maximum flame spread index of 25 without evidence of continued progressive

combustion and a maximum smoke developed index of 50 when tested in
accordance with ASTM E 84.
D. Insulation should be manufactured with a blowing agent that has zero Ozone
Depletion Potential (ODP) and Low Global Warming Potential (GWP<5) and shall be
CFC / HCFC Free.
E. Thermal Resistance for 20mm Phenolic Duct Panel = 0.61 (m2K/W) for conditioned
areas and 30mm for unconditioned areas = 0.91 (m2K/W)
F. Thermal Conductivity at 0.021-0.036 W/m.K and Nominal Density of Insulation 55 –

60 kg/m3
G. For external applications the duct panel should be 30mm with an additional pre-clad
760micron facer for added protection.
H. Both Aluminum facers must be autohesively bonded to the insulation core during
manufacture and no secondary adhesive process will be accepted due to risk of
delamination over time.
I. Aluminium facer to be auto-adhesively be bonded to panel and no additional glue to

be used to adhere face to phenolic panel.
J. Non-metal Ductwork and plenums shall be fabricated according to the SMACNA

Phenolic Duct Construction Standards.
K. VCD’s are made from a high performance rigid, thermoset phenolic insulation core,
faced on both sides with an aluminum foil. The insulation panels are fixed together
with a aluminum profile to form ductwork sections. The blades are made of aluminum
aero foil, which provides airflow.
L. The non-metal ductwork shall be thermoset phenolic, physiologically and chemically

inert and insoluble, vermin proof, fungus proof, anti-bacterial and non-metabolizable.
M. 10 year warranty of the panel and ductwork only from the Manufacturer and
Fabricator warranties will not be permitted.
N. Fabricators must be authorized and trained by Manufacturer and ducts must be

fabricated by CNC Machine.
O. Phenolic Duct Panel Manufacturers need to visit the installation site on a regular
basis to inspect duct installation workmanship and issue a sign-off.

Abu Dhabi
P. Not to be used for Fire rated ducts and Kitchen Extract ventilation system.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 DUCT APPLICATIONS
A. Construct and install each duct system for the specific duct pressure classification,
duct seal class and duct leakage class indicated in the Duct System Schedule article
of this section.
B. All ducts shall be galvanized steel except as follows:

1. Where indicated stainless steel.
2. Range Hood Exhaust Ducts (if applicable): Comply with NFPA 96 and IMC
a. Concealed: Carbon-steel sheet.
b. Exposed: Not less than 1.3 mm type 304, stainless steel with finish to
match kitchen equipment and range hood.
c. Weld and flange seams and joints with liquid and grease-tight continuous
external weld.
3. Dishwasher Hood Exhaust Ducts (if applicable):
a. Type 304, stainless steel with finish to match kitchen equipment and
range hood. Weld and flange seams and joints.
b. Aluminum, with seams and laps arranged on top of duct.
3.02 DUCT INSTALLATION
A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings, and accessories. Not all
required fittings or offsets are shown, the Contractor shall coordinate the installation
with other trades and provide all necessary offsets and fittings.
B. Construct and install ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction

Standards--Metal and Flexible," and IMC, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Install round and flat-oval ducts in lengths not less than 3.7m unless interrupted by
fittings.
D. Install ducts with fewest possible joints.
E. Install fabricated fittings for changes in directions, size, and shape and for connections.
F. Install couplings tight to duct wall surface with a minimum of projections into duct.
Secure couplings with sheet metal screws. Install screws at intervals of 300mm, with
a minimum of 3 screws in each coupling.
G. Install ducts, unless otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally and parallel and
perpendicular to building lines; avoid diagonal runs.
H. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and
permanent enclosure elements of building. Ductwork located in high bay spaces,
where the floor-to-floor clearance is in excess of 5.5 meters, shall be installed no
higher than 600 mm above finished ceiling.

Abu Dhabi
I. Install ducts with a clearance of 25mm, plus allowance for insulation thickness.
J. Conceal ducts from view in finished spaces. Do not encase horizontal runs in solid
partitions unless specifically indicated.
K. Coordinate layout with suspended ceiling, fire- and smoke-control dampers, lighting
layouts, and similar finished work.
L. Seal all joints and seams. Apply sealant to male end connectors before insertion, and
afterward to cover entire joint and sheet metal screws.
M. Electrical Equipment Spaces: Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults
and electrical equipment spaces and enclosures.
N. Non-Fire-Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions

and exterior walls and are exposed to view, conceal spaces between construction
openings and ducts or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same metal
thickness as ducts. Overlap openings on 4 sides by at least 38mm.
O. Fire-Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and
exterior walls, install appropriately rated fire dampers, sleeves, and firestopping
sealant. Fire and smoke dampers are specified in Section 23 "Duct Accessories."
Firestopping materials and installation methods are specified in Section 23 "Through-
Penetration Firestop Systems."
P. Install ducts with hangers and braces designed to withstand, without damage to
equipment, seismic force required by applicable building codes. Refer to SMACNA's
"Seismic Restraint Manual: Guidelines for Mechanical Systems."
Q. Protect duct interiors from the elements and foreign materials until building is
enclosed. Follow SMACNA's "Duct Cleanliness for New Construction."
R. Paint visible interiors of metal ducts, that do not have duct liner, for 600mm upstream
of registers and grilles. Apply one coat of flat, black, latex finish coat over a compatible
galvanized-steel primer. Paint materials and application requirements are specified in
Division 9 painting Sections.
S. Supply air ductwork exposed to view in occupied spaces, and where indicated, shall
be of double wall construction.
T. Supply and return air ductwork, outside the building shall be single wall, insulated, and
finished with a weatherproof aluminum jacket. Refer to Section 23 “Mechanical
Insulation” for additional requirements.
3.03 DUCT LINER APPLICATIONS
A. Duct liner application is allowed immediately upstream and downstream of air handling
equipment and up to 3m downstream of air terminal units, unless accepted by
Engineer.
3.04 SEAM AND JOINT SEALING

Abu Dhabi
A. Seal duct seams and joints according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards--Metal and Flexible" for duct pressure class indicated.
B. Seal ducts before external insulation is applied.
3.05 HANGING AND SUPPORTING
A. Install rigid round, rectangular, and flat-oval metal duct with support systems indicated
in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible."
B. Support horizontal ducts within 600mm of each elbow and within 1200mm of each
branch intersection.
C. Support vertical ducts at maximum intervals of 5m and at each floor.
D. Install upper attachments to structures with an allowable load not exceeding one-fourth
of failure (proof-test) load.
E. Install concrete inserts before placing concrete.
F. Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely

cured.
1. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate
concretes or for slabs less than 100mm thick.
3.06 CONNECTIONS
A. Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors according to Section 23 "Duct

Accessories."
B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for
branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections, unless specifically indicated
otherwise.
A. Perform the following field tests and inspections according to SMACNA's "HVAC Air
Duct Leakage Test Manual" and prepare test reports:
1. Disassemble, reassemble, and seal segments of systems to accommodate
leakage testing and for compliance with test requirements.
2. Test installed ductwork having a SMACNA Duct Construction Class of 1000 Pa
(4 inches water column) or above. The ductwork to be tested shall be randomly
selected by the EMPLOYER.
3. Follow the procedures outlined in SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test
Manual, latest edition.
4. Testing apparatus and procedures shall be reviewed and accepted by the
Employer before the start of tests. Tests shall be carried out in the presence of
the Employer who shall verify the test results. Contact the Employer to
coordinate the time of testing.
5. The leakage amount shall not exceed the SMACNA leakage class indicated in
the Duct System Schedule.

Abu Dhabi
6. Remake leaking joints and retest until leakage is equal to or less than maximum
allowable.
7. Submit a test report for Employer review. The test report shall be in accordance
with the reporting requirements in the SMACNA Air Duct Leakage Test Manual.
3.08 DUCT SYSTEM SCHEDULE
A. Supply Air Systems - Variable Air Volume

1. From the fan and air-handling unit discharge to the variable air volume unit inlet:
a. SMACNA seal class: A
b. SMACNA duct construction class: 1000 Pa.
c. Minimum leakage class: 3
2. From the variable air volume unit discharge to the air outlet neck:
a. SMACNA duct construction class: 500 Pa.
b. Minimum SMACNA seal class: A
c. SMACNA leakage class: 12
B. Supply Air Systems - Constant Volume:

1. Rectangular duct:
2. Round duct:
C. Return Air and Transfer Air Systems

a. SMACNA duct construction class: Plus or minus 500 Pa.
b. Minimum SMACNA seal class: B.
c. SMACNA leakage class: 12.
2. Round duct:
b. Minimum SMACNA seal class: B.
D. Outside Air Systems

b. Minimum SMACNA seal class: A.
2. Round duct:
E. Exhaust Air Systems

1. Toilet:

Abu Dhabi
2. Kitchen:
b. Minimum SMACNA seal class: Welded.
F. Special Exhaust Air System

1. SMACNA duct construction class: Plus or minus + 1500 Pa.
3.09 DUCTWORK APPLICATION SCHEDULE

___________________________________________________________
AIR SYSTEM MATERIAL
(FOR PRESSURE CLASS CLASSIFICATION REFER TO SMACNA DUCT
CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS)
___________________________________________________________
1. Supply return and exhaust Galvanised Steel

air ducts
(Risers, Plant Room ductwork,
Exposed ductwork and Large size ductwork)
2. Low Pressure ductwork for Galvanised steel / Pre-insulated Duct
Fan coil units (Section 23 0700)
3. Fresh air ducts Galvanised steel
4. Kitchen hood and Laundry extract duct Stainless Steel
(SS304)
5. Ducts conveying humid or Stainless Steel
corrosive air (SS304)
6. Laboratory exhaust Stainless Steel
(SS304)
7. Carpark Ventilation (Supply and Exhaust) Galvanized Steel Fire Rated
Ductworks
8. Smoke Extract and Fresh air make up Duct Galvanized Steel Fire Rated
9. Stairwell Pressurization Duct Galvanized Steel Fire Rated
10. Kitchen Extract Duct Stainless Steel Fire Rated
(SS304)
Note:
1. All exposed to view ducts with insulation (if any) shall be covered with
aluminium jacketing minimum 0.7mm thick.
2. Kitchen hood ductwork shall be sloped back to the hood, with welded drip
proof seams. Flanged and gasketed joints are not allowed.
3. Kitchen and laundry extract ductwork shall be provided with clean outs and
access doors. These shall be located at base of vertical risers, at every
change in direction, and at sprinkler heads. Maximum spacing of 6m (20ft) in
horizontal; maximum spacing of every third floor of vertical risers.
3.010 CLEANING NEW SYSTEMS
A. Mark position of dampers and air-directional mechanical devices before cleaning and
perform cleaning before air balancing.

Abu Dhabi
B. Use service openings, as required, for physical and mechanical entry and for
inspection.
1. Create other openings to comply with duct standards.
2. Disconnect flexible ducts as needed for cleaning and inspection.
3. Remove and reinstall ceiling sections to gain access during the cleaning
process.
C. Vent vacuuming system to the outside. Include filtration to contain debris removed
from HVAC systems, and locate exhaust down wind and away from air intakes and
other points of entry into building.
D. Clean the following metal duct systems by removing surface contaminants and
deposits:
1. Air outlets and inlets (registers, grilles, and diffusers).
2. Supply, return, and exhaust fans including fan housings, plenums (except
ceiling supply and return plenums), scrolls, blades or vanes, shafts, baffles,
dampers, and drive assemblies.
3. Air-handling unit internal surfaces and components including mixing box, coil
section, air wash systems, spray eliminators, condensate drain pans,
humidifiers and dehumidifiers, filters and filter sections, and condensate
collectors and drains.
4. Coils and related components.
5. Return-air ducts, dampers, and actuators except in ceiling plenums and
mechanical equipment rooms.
6. Supply-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes.
E. Mechanical Cleaning Methodology:

1. Clean metal duct systems using mechanical cleaning methods that extract
contaminants from within duct systems and remove contaminants from building.
2. Use vacuum-collection devices that are operated continuously during cleaning.
Connect vacuum device to downstream end of duct sections so areas being
cleaned are under negative pressure.
3. Use mechanical agitation to dislodge debris adhered to interior duct surfaces
without damaging integrity of metal ducts, duct liner, or duct accessories.
4. Clean fibrous-glass duct liner with HEPA vacuuming equipment; do not permit
duct liner to get wet.
5. Clean coils and coil drain pans according to NADCA 1992. Keep drain pan
operational. Rinse coils with clean water to remove latent residues and
cleaning materials; comb and straighten fins.
F. Cleanliness Verification:
1. Visually inspect metal ducts for contaminants.
2. Where contaminants are discovered, re-clean and reinspect ducts.
3.
END OF SECTION

Abu Dhabi
SECTION 23 3300
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY

1. Backdraft dampers.
2. Volume dampers.
3. Motorized control dampers.
4. Fire dampers.
5. Ceiling fire dampers.
6. Smoke dampers.
7. Combination fire and smoke dampers.
8. Duct silencers.
9. Turning vanes.
10. Duct - Mounting Access Doors.
11. Flexible connectors.
12. Flexible ducts.
13. Duct accessory hardware.

1. Division 23 Section "Instrumentation and Control for HVAC" for electric and
pneumatic damper actuators.
2. Division 28 Section "Fire Detection and Alarm" for duct-mounting fire and smoke
detectors.
3. Division 23 Section “Metal Ducts” , “ Pre Insulated Ducts” & “Non – Metal Ducts”
1.02 SUBMITTALS

1. Backdraft dampers.
2. Volume dampers.
3. Motorized control dampers.
4. Fire dampers.
5. Ceiling fire dampers.
6. Smoke dampers.
7. Combination fire and smoke dampers.
8. Duct silencers.
9. Turning vanes.
10. Duct-mounted access doors.
11. Flexible connectors.
12. Flexible ducts.
KEO/21-7387-0004 23 3300 / 1 Air Duct Accessories

B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads,
required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of
each field connection.
1. Special fittings.
2. Manual-volume damper installations.
3. Motorized-control damper installations.
4. Fire-damper, smoke-damper, and combination fire- and smoke-damper
installations, including sleeves and duct-mounting access doors.
5. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.
C. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale and coordinating

penetrations and ceiling-mounting items. Show ceiling-mounting access panels and
access doors required for access to duct accessories.
A. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," and
NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."
B. Comply with “ASHRAE” & “SMACNA”
C. Comply with “DW 144”
1.04 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Requirements of the General Conditions of Contract and Section 23 0100 shall be

referred to and complied with in all respects, without prejudice to this clause.
B. Following spare parts shall be furnished, properly packed and labelled with equipment
no. / location.
1. Two (2) nos. of fusible links of Fire dampers of each type and size used in the
project.
2. Four (4) sets of Motor with damper blades and actuators for each type and size
of Smoke control dampers used in the Project.
3. Four (4) sets of Motors with damper blades and actuators for each type and size
of Motorized volume control dampers used in the project.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS

Vendors List (AVL).
B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for
acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods, unless

C. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Lock-forming quality; complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M and
having G60, Z180, G90 or Z275 coating designation; ducts shall have mill-phosphatized
finish for surfaces exposed to view.
D. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 480/A 480M.
E. Aluminum Sheets: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), alloy 3003, temper H14; with mill
finish for concealed ducts and standard, 1-side bright finish for exposed ducts.
F. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), alloy 6063, temper T6.
G. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on

galvanized sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless-steel
ducts.
H. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch (6-mm) minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches
(900 mm) or less; 3/8-inch (10-mm) minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches
(900 mm).
2.02 BACKDRAFT DAMPERS
A. Description: Multiple-blade, parallel action gravity balanced, with center-pivoted blades

of maximum 6-inch (150-mm) width, with sealed edges, assembled in rattle-free manner
with 90-degree stop, steel ball bearings, and axles; adjustment device to permit setting
for varying differential static pressure.
B. Frame: 0.052-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick, galvanized sheet steel or 0.063-inch- (1.6-mm-)

thick extruded aluminum, with welded corners and mounting flange.
C. Blades: 0.050-inch- (1.2-mm-) thick aluminum sheet.
D. Blade Seals: Neoprene.
E. Blade Axles: Nonferrous or Galvanized steel.
F. Tie Bars and Brackets: Aluminum or Galvanized steel.
G. Return Spring: Adjustable tension.
2.03 VOLUME DAMPERS
A. General Description: Factory fabricated, with required hardware and accessories.

Stiffen damper blades for stability. Include locking device to hold single-blade dampers
in a fixed position without vibration. Close duct penetrations for damper components to
seal duct consistent with pressure class.
1. Pressure Classes of 3-Inch wg (750 Pa) or Higher: End bearings or other seals
for ducts with axles full length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of
operating shaft.
B. Standard Volume Dampers: Multiple- or single-blade, parallel- or opposed-blade design

as indicated, standard leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream, and suitable for
horizontal or vertical applications.

1. Steel Frames: Hat-shaped, galvanized or stainless sheet steel channels,
minimum of 0.064 inch (1.62 mm) thick, with mitered and welded corners; frames
with flanges where indicated for attaching to walls and flangeless frames where
indicated for installing in ducts.
2. Roll-Formed Steel Blades: 0.064-inch- (1.62-mm-) thick, galvanized or stainless
sheet steel.
3. Aluminum Frames: Hat-shaped, 0.10-inch- (2.5-mm-) thick, aluminum sheet
channels; frames with flanges where indicated for attaching to walls; and
flangeless frames where indicated for installing in ducts.
4. Roll-Formed Aluminum Blades: 0.10-inch- (2.5-mm-) thick aluminum sheet.
5. Extruded-Aluminum Blades: 0.050-inch- (1.2-mm-) thick extruded aluminum.
6. Blade Axles: Galvanized or steel Stainless steel.
7. Bearings: Oil-impregnated bronze or Stainless-steel sleeve.
8. Tie Bars and Brackets: Aluminum.
9. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.
C. Low-Leakage Volume Dampers: Multiple- or single-blade, parallel- or opposed-blade

design as indicated, low-leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream, and suitable for
horizontal or vertical applications.
1. Steel Frames: Hat, U or Angle-shaped, galvanized sheet steel channels,
minimum of 0.064 inch (1.62 mm) thick, with mitered and welded corners; frames
with flanges where indicated for attaching to walls and flangeless frames where
indicated for installing in ducts.
2. Roll-Formed Steel Blades: 0.064-inch- (1.62-mm-) thick, galvanized sheet steel.
3. Aluminum Frames: Hat, U or Angle-shaped, 0.10-inch- (2.5-mm-) thick,
aluminum sheet channels; frames with flanges where indicated for attaching to
walls and flangeless frames where indicated for installing in ducts.
4. Roll-Formed Aluminum Blades: 0.10-inch- (2.5-mm-) thick aluminum sheet.
5. Extruded-Aluminum Blades: 0.050-inch- (1.2-mm-) thick extruded aluminum.
6. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel.
7. Bearings: Oil-impregnated bronze or Stainless-steel sleeve thrust or ball.
8. Blade Seals: Felt or Neoprene.
9. Jamb Seals: Cambered stainless steel or aluminum.
10. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel or Aluminum.
D. Jackshaft: 1-inch- (25-mm-) diameter, galvanized-steel pipe rotating within pipe-bearing

assembly mounted on supports at each mullion and at each end of multiple-damper
assemblies.
1. Length and Number of Mountings: Appropriate to connect linkage of each
damper in multiple-damper assembly.
E. Damper Hardware: Zinc-plated, die-cast core with dial and handle made of 3/32-inch-
(2.4-mm-) thick zinc-plated steel, and a 3/4-inch (19-mm) hexagon locking nut. Include
center hole to suit damper operating-rod size. Include elevated platform for insulated
duct mounting.
2.04 MOTORIZED CONTROL DAMPERS
A. General Description: AMCA-rated, parallel or opposed-blade design; minimum of

0.1084-inch- (2.8-mm-) thick, galvanized-steel frames with holes for duct mounting;

minimum of 0.0635-inch- (1.61-mm-) thick, galvanized-steel damper blades with
maximum blade width of 8 inches (203 mm).
1. Secure blades to 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) diameter, zinc-plated axles using zinc-
plated hardware, with nylon blade bearings, blade-linkage hardware of zinc-
plated steel and brass, ends sealed against spring-stainless-steel blade
bearings, and thrust bearings at each end of every blade.
2. Operating Temperature Range: From minus 40 to plus 200 deg F (minus 40 to
plus 93 deg C).
3. Provide opposed-blade design with inflatable seal blade edging, or replaceable
rubber seals, rated for leakage at less than 10 cfm per sq. ft. (51 L/s per sq. m) of
damper area, at differential pressure of 4-inch wg (995 Pa) when damper is being
held by torque of 50 in. x lbf (5.6 N x m); when tested according to AMCA 500D.
2.05 FIRE DAMPERS
A. Fire dampers shall be labeled according to UL 555.
B. Fire Rating: 1-1/2 or 3 hours.
C. Frame: Curtain type with blades inside airstream, Curtain type with blades outside
airstream and Multiple-blade type; fabricated with roll-formed, 0.034-inch- (0.85-mm-)
thick galvanized steel; with mitered and interlocking corners.
D. Mounting Sleeve: Factory- or field-installed, galvanized sheet steel.

1. Minimum Thickness: 0.052 or 0.138 inch (1.3 or 3.5 mm) thick as indicated and
of length to suit application.
2. Exceptions: Omit sleeve where damper frame width permits direct attachment of
perimeter mounting angles on each side of wall or floor, and thickness of damper
frame complies with sleeve requirements.
E. Mounting Orientation: Vertical or horizontal as indicated.
F. Blades: Roll-formed, interlocking, 0.034-inch- (0.85-mm-) thick, galvanized sheet steel.

In place of interlocking blades, use full-length, 0.034-inch- (0.85-mm-) thick, galvanized-
steel blade connectors.
G. Horizontal Dampers: Include blade lock and stainless-steel closure spring.
H. Fusible Links: Replaceable, 165 deg F (74 deg C) 212 deg F (100 deg C) rated.
2.06 SMOKE and COMBINATION FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPERS
A. General Description: Labeled according to UL 555S. Combination fire and smoke

dampers shall be labeled according to UL 555 for 1-1/2-hour rating.
B. Fusible Links: Replaceable, 165 deg F (74 deg C) rated.
C. Frame and Blades: 0.064-inch- (1.62-mm-) thick, galvanized sheet steel.
D. Mounting Sleeve: Factory-installed, 0.052-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick, galvanized sheet steel;

length to suit wall or floor application.

E. Damper Motors:
1. Motor shall be mounted outside air stream. Motor shall be capable to open/close
damper in response to remote signal from controller.
2. Spring-Return Motors: Equip with an integral spiral-spring mechanism where
indicated. Enclose entire spring mechanism in a removable housing designed for
service or adjustments. Size for running torque rating of 150 in. x lbf (17 N x m)
and breakaway torque rating of 150 in. x lbf (17 N x m).
3. Outdoor Motors and Motors in Outside-Air Intakes: Equip with O-ring gaskets
designed to make motors weatherproof. Equip motors with internal heaters to
permit normal operation at minus 40 deg F (minus 40 deg C).
4. Nonspring-Return Motors: For dampers larger than 25 sq. ft. (2.3 sq. m), size
motor for running torque rating of 150 in. x lbf (17 N x m) and breakaway torque
rating of 300 in. x lbf (34 N x m).
2.07 DUCT SILENCERS
A. General Description: Factory-fabricated and -tested, round or rectangular silencers with

performance characteristics and physical requirements as indicated.
B. Fire Performance: Adhesives, sealants, packing materials, and accessory materials

shall have fire ratings not exceeding 25 for flame-spread index and 50 for smoke-
developed index when tested according to ASTM E 84.
C. Rectangular Units: Fabricate casings with a minimum of 0.034-inch- (0.85-mm-) thick,

solid galvanized sheet metal for outer casing and 0.022-inch- (0.55-mm-) thick,
ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) perforated galvanized sheet metal for inner casing.
D. Round Units:
1. Outer Casings:
a. ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) galvanized sheet steel.
b. Up to 24 Inches (600 mm) in Diameter: 0.034 inch (0.85 mm) thick.
c. 26 through 40 Inches (660 through 1000 mm) in Diameter: 0.040 inch
(1.0 mm) thick.
d. 42 through 52 Inches (1060 through 1300 mm) in Diameter: 0.052 inch
(1.3 mm) thick.
e. 54 through 60 Inches (1370 through 1500 mm) in Diameter: 0.064 inch
(1.62 mm) thick.
f. Casings fabricated of spiral lock-seam duct may be one size thinner than
that indicated.
2. Interior Casing, Partitions, and Baffles:
a. ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) galvanized sheet steel.
b. At least 0.034 inch (0.85 mm) thick and designed for minimum
aerodynamic losses.
E. Sheet Metal Perforations: 1/8-inch (3-mm) diameter for inner casing and baffle sheet
metal.
F. Fill Material: Inert and vermin-proof fibrous material, packed under not less than 5
percent compression.
1. Erosion Barrier: Polymer bag enclosing fill and heat-sealed before assembly.

G. Fabricate silencers to form rigid units that will not pulsate, vibrate, rattle, or otherwise
react to system pressure variations.
1. Do not use nuts, bolts, or sheet metal screws for unit assemblies.
2. Lock form and seal or continuously weld joints.
3. Suspended Units: Factory-installed suspension hooks or lugs attached to frame
in quantities and spaced to prevent deflection or distortion.
4. Reinforcement: Cross or trapeze angles for rigid suspension.
H. Source Quality Control:

1. Acoustic Performance: Test according to ASTM E 477.
2. Record acoustic ratings, including dynamic insertion loss and self-noise power
levels with an airflow of at least 2000-fpm (10-m/s) face velocity.
3. Leak Test: Test units for airtightness at 200 percent of associated fan static
pressure or 6-inch wg (1500-Pa) static pressure, whichever is greater.
2.08 TURNING VANES
A. Fabricate to comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and

Flexible" for vanes and vane runners. Vane runners shall automatically align vanes.
B. Manufactured Turning Vanes: Fabricate 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) wide, vane, curved

blades of galvanized sheet steel set 3/4 inch (19 mm) o.c.; support with bars
perpendicular to blades set 2 inches (50 mm) o.c.; and set into vane runners suitable for
duct mounting.
C. Acoustic Turning Vanes: Fabricate airfoil-shaped aluminum extrusions with perforated

faces and fibrous-glass fill.
2.09 DUCT-MOUNTED ACCESS DOORS
A. General Description: Fabricate doors airtight and suitable for duct pressure class.
B. Door: Double wall, duct mounting, and rectangular; fabricated of galvanized sheet metal
with insulation fill and thickness as indicated for duct pressure class.. Include 1-by-1-
inch (25-by-25-mm) butt or piano hinge and cam latches.
1. Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, with bend-over tabs and foam gaskets.
2. Provide number of hinges and locks as follows:
a. Less Than 12 Inches (300 mm) Square: Secure with two sash locks.
b. Up to 18 Inches (450 mm) Square: Two hinges and two sash locks.
c. Up to 24 by 48 Inches (600 by 1200 mm): Three hinges and two
compression latches with outside and inside handles.
d. Sizes 24 by 48 Inches (600 by 1200 mm) and Larger: One additional
hinge.
C. Door: Double wall, duct mounting, and round; fabricated of galvanized sheet metal with
insulation fill and 1-inch (25-mm) thickness. Include cam latches.
1. Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, with spin-in notched frame.
D. Pressure Relief Access Door: wall and duct mounting; fabricated of galvanized sheet
metal with insulation fill and thickness as indicated for duct pressure class. Include
latches, and retaining chain.

1. Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, with bend-over tabs and foam gaskets.
E. Seal around frame attachment to duct and door to frame with neoprene or foam rubber.
F. Insulation: 1-inch- (25-mm-) thick, fibrous-glass or polystyrene-foam board.
2.010 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS
A. General Description: Flame-retardant or noncombustible fabrics, coatings, and

adhesives complying with UL 181, Class 1.
B. Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip 5-3/4 inches (146 mm)
wide attached to two strips of 2-3/4-inch- (70-mm-) wide, 0.028-inch- (0.7-mm-) thick,
galvanized sheet steel or 0.032-inch- (0.8-mm-) thick aluminum sheets. Select metal
compatible with ducts.
C. Indoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with neoprene.
1. Minimum Weight: 26 oz./sq. yd. (880 g/sq. m).
2. Tensile Strength: 480 lbf/inch (84 N/mm) in the warp and 360 lbf/inch (63 N/mm)
in the filling.
3. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 93 deg C).
D. Outdoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with
weatherproof, synthetic rubber resistant to UV rays and ozone.
in the filling.
E. High-Temperature System, Flexible Connectors: Glass fabric coated with silicone

rubber.
in the filling.
F. High-Corrosive-Environment System, Flexible Connectors: Glass fabric with chemical-

resistant coating.
in the filling.
2.011 FLEXIBLE DUCTS
A. Noninsulated-Duct Connectors: UL 181, Class 1, 2-ply vinyl film supported by helically

wound, spring-steel wire.
1. Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg (2500 Pa) positive and 1.0-inch wg (250 Pa)
negative.
2. Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm (20.3 m/s).
3. Temperature Range: Minus 10 to plus 160 deg F (Minus 23 to plus 71 deg C).

B. Noninsulated-Duct Connectors: UL 181, Class 1, black polymer film supported by
helically wound, spring-steel wire.
1. Pressure Rating:4-inch wg (1000 Pa) positive and 0.5-inch wg (125 Pa) negative.
C. Noninsulated-Duct Connectors: UL 181, Class 1, multiple layers of aluminum laminate

supported by helically wound, spring-steel wire.
1. Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg (2500 Pa) positive and 1.0-inch wg250 Pa
negative.
D. Noninsulated-Duct Connectors: UL 181, Class 1, aluminum laminate and polyester film

with latex adhesive supported by helically wound, spring-steel wire.
1. Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg (2500 Pa) positive and 1.0-inch wg250 Pa
negative.
E. Noninsulated-Duct Connectors: UL 181, Class 0, interlocking spiral of aluminum foil.

1. Pressure Rating: 8-inch wg (2280 Pa) positive or negative.
F. Insulated-Duct Connectors: UL 181, Class 1, 2-ply vinyl film supported by helically

wound, spring-steel wire; fibrous-glass insulation; polyethylene or aluminized vapor
barrier film.
negative.
G. Insulated-Duct Connectors: UL 181, Class 1, black polymer film supported by helically

wound, spring-steel wire; fibrous-glass insulation; polyethylene or aluminized vapor
barrier film.
negative.
H. Insulated-Duct Connectors: UL 181, Class 1, multiple layers of aluminum laminate

supported by helically wound, spring-steel wire; fibrous-glass insulation; polyethylene or
aluminized vapor barrier film.
negative.
I. Insulated-Duct Connectors: UL 181, Class 1, aluminum laminate and polyester film with
latex adhesive supported by helically wound, spring-steel wire; fibrous-glass insulation;
polyethylene or aluminized vapor barrier film.

negative.
J. Insulated-Duct Connectors: UL 181, Class 0, interlocking spiral of aluminum foil;

fibrous-glass insulation; polyethylene or aluminized vapor barrier film.
1. Pressure Rating: 8-inch wg (2280 Pa) positive or negative.
K. Flexible Duct Clamps: Stainless-steel band with cadmium-plated hex screw to tighten
band with a worm-gear action, in sizes 3 through 18 inches (75 to 450 mm) to suit duct
size.
2.012 DUCT ACCESSORY HARDWARE
A. Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw
cap and gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments and of
length to suit duct insulation thickness.
B. Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and resistant to
gasoline and grease.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION
A. Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and in NAIMA AH116,
"Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards," for fibrous-glass ducts.
B. Provide duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized-steel

accessories in galvanized-steel and fibrous-glass ducts, stainless-steel accessories in
stainless-steel ducts, and aluminum accessories in aluminum ducts.
C. Install backdraft dampers on exhaust fans or exhaust ducts nearest to outside and
where indicated.
D. Install volume dampers in ducts with liner; avoid damage to and erosion of duct liner.
E. Provide balancing dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where
branches lead from larger ducts as required for air balancing. Install at a minimum of
two duct widths from branch takeoff.
F. Provide test holes at fan inlets and outlets and elsewhere as indicated.
G. Install fire and smoke dampers, with fusible links, according to manufacturer's UL-
approved written instructions.

H. Install duct silencers independent of ducts with flexible duct connectors, lagged with
loaded vinyl sheet on inlets and outlets.
I. Install duct access doors to allow for inspecting, adjusting, and maintaining accessories
and terminal units as follows:
1. On both sides of duct coils.
2. Downstream from volume dampers, turning vanes, and equipment.
3. Adjacent to fire or smoke dampers, providing access to reset or reinstall fusible
links.
4. To interior of ducts for cleaning; before and after each change in direction, at
maximum 50-foot (15-m) spacing.
5. On sides of ducts where adequate clearance is available.
J. Install the following sizes for duct-mounting, rectangular access doors:

1. One-Hand or Inspection Access: 8 by 5 inches (200 by 125 mm).
2. Two-Hand Access: 12 by 6 inches (300 by 150 mm).
3. Head and Hand Access: 18 by 10 inches (460 by 250 mm).
4. Head and Shoulders Access: 21 by 14 inches (530 by 355 mm).
5. Body Access: 25 by 14 inches (635 by 355 mm).
6. Body Plus Ladder Access: 25 by 17 inches (635 by 430 mm).
K. Install the following sizes for duct-mounting, round access doors:

1. One-Hand or Inspection Access: 8 inches (200 mm) in diameter.
2. Two-Hand Access: 10 inches (250 mm) in diameter.
3. Head and Hand Access: 12 inches (300 mm) in diameter.
4. Head and Shoulders Access: 18 inches (460 mm) in diameter.
5. Body Access: 24 inches (600 mm) in diameter.
L. Install the following sizes for duct-mounting, pressure relief access doors:
1. One-Hand or Inspection Access: 7 inches (175 mm) in diameter.
2. Two-Hand Access: 10 inches (250 mm) in diameter.
3. Head and Hand Access: 13 inches (330 mm) in diameter.
4. Head and Shoulders Access: 19 inches (480 mm) in diameter.
M. Label access doors according to Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and
Equipment."
N. Install flexible connectors immediately adjacent to equipment in ducts associated with

fans and motorized equipment supported by vibration isolators.
O. For fans developing static pressures of 5-inch wg (1250 Pa) and higher, cover flexible
connectors with loaded vinyl sheet held in place with metal straps.
P. Connect terminal units to supply ducts directly or with maximum 12-inch (300-mm)
lengths of flexible duct. Do not use flexible ducts to change directions.
Q. Connect diffusers or light troffer boots to low pressure ducts directly or with maximum
60-inch (1500-mm) lengths of flexible duct clamped or strapped in place.
R. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with liquid adhesive plus tape or adhesive plus
sheet metal screws.
S. Install duct test holes where indicated and required for testing and balancing purposes.

3.02 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust duct accessories for proper settings.
B. Adjust fire and smoke dampers for proper action.
C. Final positioning of manual-volume dampers is specified in Division 23 Section "Testing,

Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC."
END OF SECTION

SECTION 23 3413
AXIAL HVAC FANS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1. Mixed-flow fans
2. Axial fans
3. Inline bifurcated exhaust fans
1.02 RELATED SECTION: Related work to be coordinated and used in conjunction with this
specification includes but is not restricted to:
A. Section 23 0548 – Vibration and Seismic Control. Of HVAC Piping and Equipment.
B. Section 23 3113 – Metal Ducts
C. Section 23 0513 – Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment’s.
D. Section 26 0519 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. AMCA 99 - Standards Handbook
B. AMCA 210 - Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating Purposes
C. AMCA 300 - Test Code Sound Rating Air Moving Devices.
D. AMCA 301 - Method of Calculating Fan Sound Rating from Laboratory Test
E. AMCA 303 – Application of Sound Power Level Ratings for Fans
F. ANSI/AFBMA 9 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings.
G. ANSI/AFBMA 11 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings.
H. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standard, Metal and Flexible.
A. Project Altitude: Base fan performance ratings on actual Project site elevations above
sea level.
KEO/21-7387-0004 23 3413 / 1 Axial Hvac Fans
B. Operating Limits: Classify according to AMCA 99.
C. Performance Ratings: Conform to AMCA 210.
D. Sound Ratings: AMCA 301, tested to AMCA 300.
E. Fabrication Conform to AMCA 99.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, furnished specialties, and accessories for each
type of product indicated and include the following:
1. Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions indicated.
2. Certified fan sound-power ratings.
3. Motor ratings and electrical characteristics, plus motor and electrical accessories.
4. Material thickness and finishes, including color charts.
5. Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators.
6. Fan speed controllers.
2. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and
seismic restraints and for designing vibration isolation bases.
3. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication, including anchorages and
attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include auxiliary motor
slides and rails, and base weights.
C. Coordination Drawings: Show fan room layout and relationships between components
and adjacent structural and mechanical elements. Show support locations, type of
support, and weight on each support. Indicate and certify field measurements.
D. Field quality-control test reports.
E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For axial fans to include in emergency, operation,
and maintenance manuals.
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in

NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,
and marked for intended use.
B. AMCA Compliance: Products shall comply with performance requirements and shall be
licensed to use the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.
C. NEMA Compliance: Motors and electrical accessories shall comply with NEMA
standards.

A. Deliver fans as factory-assembled units, to the extent allowable by shipping limitations,
with protective crating and covering.
B. Disassemble and reassemble units, as required for moving to final locations, according
to manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Lift and support units with manufacturer's designated lifting or supporting points.
1.08 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of structural-steel support members.
B. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases.
Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in section 23.
C. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These
items are specified in Section 23 "Roof Accessories."
A. Requirements of Section 23 0100 and the General Conditions of Contract shall be

no. / location.
1. Two (2) sets of matched fan belts for each type and size of belt-driven fan used.
2. Two (2) sets of Bearings for each type and size of fans used.
3. One electrical motor each for each type and size of Fans used.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS

Vendors List (AVL).
2.02 GENERAL
A. Fans shall be capable of accommodating static pressure variations of plus or minus 10

percent.
B. Base performance on sea level conditions.
C. Statically and dynamically balance fans to eliminate vibration or noise transmission to

occupied areas.
D. Fans for outdoor installation shall be weather protected and provided with anticorrosion
paint.

E. Fans used for kitchen exhaust shall be inline bifurcated type complete with grease trap
and drain connection. Motor and / or drive shall be outside of the air stream. Fan shall
be rated for higher temperature as appropriate
F. Static - pressures given in the equipment Schedules are only for guidance. The
Contractor should submit static pressure calculations for all fans for approval before
ordering the equipment’s. The Contractor should give the required fan and motor h.p.
without additional cost. The contractor may propose lower motor hp as per the
calculations and as approved.
G. Contractor shall select fans for low noise application and shall provide all necessary
measures such as provision of sound attenuators, Acoustic enclosures, acoustic lining
to limit sound to acceptable noise levels as indicated in Section 23 0100. Contractor
shall submit noise calculations for the selected fan and attenuators/and or acoustic
enclosures for the approval prior to ordering the equipment.
2.03 MIXED-FLOW FANS
A. Description: Fan wheel and housing, straightening vane section, factory-mounted motor
with belt drive, and accessories.
B. Housings: Steel or Galvanized steel.

1. Inlet and Outlet Connections: Outer mounting frame and companion flanges.
2. Guide Vane Section: Integral guide vanes downstream from fan wheel designed
to straighten airflow.
3. Mixed-Flow Outlet Connection: One or Two flanged discharge(s) perpendicular
to fan inlet.
C. Wheel Assemblies: Cast aluminum with airfoil-shaped blades mounted on cast-iron

wheel plate keyed to shaft with solid-steel key.
D. Drives: Factory mounted, with final alignment and belt adjustment made after
installation.
1. Service Factor Based on Fan Motor Size: 1.2
2. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel designed to operate at no more
than 70 percent of first critical speed at top of fan's speed range.
3. Fan Pulleys: Cast iron with split, tapered bushing; dynamically balanced at
factory.
4. Motor Pulleys: Adjustable pitch for use with motors through 5 hp; fixed pitch for
use with larger motors. Select pulley so pitch adjustment is at the middle of
adjustment range at fan design conditions.
5. Belts: Oil resistant, nonsparking, and nonstatic; matched sets for multiple belt
drives.
6. Motor Mount: Adjustable base.
7. Shaft Bearings: Radial, self-aligning ball or roller bearings.
E. Accessories:
1. Mounting Clips: Horizontal ceiling or Vertical mounting clips welded to fan
housing, of same material as housing.
2. Inlet and Outlet Screens: Wire-mesh screen on fans not connected to ductwork
of same material as housing.

3. Backdraft Dampers: Butterfly style, for mounting with flexible connection to the
discharge of fan or direct mounted to the discharge diffuser section of same
material as housing.
4. Motor Cover: Cover with side vents to dissipate motor heat, of same material as
housing.
5. Inlet Bell: Curved inlet for when fan is not attached to duct, of same material as
housing.
6. Inlet Cones: Round-to-round transition of same material as housing.
7. Outlet Cones: Round-to-round transition of same material as housing.
8. Stack Cap: Vertical discharge assembly with backdraft dampers, of same
material as housing.
F. Motors: Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Common Motor

Requirements for HVAC Equipment."
1. Enclosure Type: Totally enclosed, fan cooled.
2. Direct-Driven Units: Encase motor in housing outside of airstream, factory wired
to disconnect switch located on outside of fan housing.
G. Factory Finishes:
1. Sheet Metal Parts: Prime coat before final assembly.
2. Exterior Surfaces: Baked-enamel finish coat after assembly.
3. Coatings: Epoxy or Synthetic resin or Color-match enamel or Hot-dip galvanized
Powder-baked enamel.
H. Capacities and Characteristics: (See Equipment Schedule on plan)

1. Vibration Isolators: Spring isolators Restrained spring isolators or having a static
deflection of 1 inch (25 mm).
2.04 AXIAL FANS
A. Axial fans shall be provided for as per equipment schedules.
B. Axial Fan:
1. Ratings: Provide fan performance based on tests conducted in accordance with
AMCA Bulletin 210. Fans shall bear the AMCA Seal. Select fans to be non-
overloading with CFM vs. pressure curve that will ensure quiet, stable operation
under all conditions.
2. Casings: The fan casing shall completely cover the motor and impeller assembly
in the case of Long Case fans or the impeller in the case of Short Case fans.
The casing shall be manufactured from mild steel to BS1449: Part 1: 1972 Grade
HR14 complete with flanges. The flanges shall be integral with the casing, pre-
drilled and radiused. Long Case fans shall be complete with a pre-wired
externally mounted terminal box and a sight port closed with a rubber moulding
for normal temperature applications. The fan casing shall be hot dipped
galvanised to BS729: 1971 at a rate of 0.46 kgs of zinc per square metre up to
and including 710 mm diameter and 0.61 kgs of zinc square metre above 750
mm diameter. Casings and flanges shall be of a 2.5 mm thickness up to and
including 560 mm diameter, 3 mm up to and including 1000 mm and 4, 5 or 6
mm for larger diameters. Fans shall be provided with attachable mounting feet
suitable for horizontal or vertical mounting and matching flanges. Mounting feet

shall be manufactured from 3, 5 or 6mm mild steel plate as appropriate and be
hot dip galvanized after manufacture.
3. Impellers: Provide cast aluminium impellers, non-sparking airfoil design, and
keyed and secured to the shaft with split taper-lock bushings. All units with
variable air volume application shall be provided with factory built variable
frequency drives (refer to equipment schedule). Factory spin test impeller at
150% of maximum rated speed. Pre-balance impellers by the moment
comparator method and dynamically balance assembled unit.
4. Cones: Provide each fan with inlet and discharge cones. Provide the discharge
cone with vanes space and contoured for maximum efficiency.
5. Motors:
a. For fans with motors inside casing, extend motor electrical leads outside
fan housing with liquid tight flexible conduit and terminate in outside
junction box.
b. Provide fans with motors outside casing with a V-belt drive of ample
capacity. Provide adjustable ratio type sheaves sized to give the required
fan speed with motor sheave at about the middle of its range of
adjustment. Provide at least two (2) belts; and drive capable of carrying
the entire load with an additional 50% safety factor. Provide belt guards
with opening for RPM readings for all sheaves and belts. Submit drive
data for approval. Fan fans with motors 50 HP and over supply fixed
ration sheaves in lieu of the variable type.
6. For fans used for smoke ventilation, prove direct driven fans designed to
withstand hot smoke temperature up to 300C for 1 hour. Where direct driven
fans are indicated for smoke duty provide motor having class H insulation.
These motors shall be provided with variable frequency drives as per equipment
schedules.
7. Accessories:
a. Provide additional adjustable or fixed sheaves, at no additional cost, if
required for balancing.
b. Provide all motors with a means of external lubrication, such that the fans
do not require disassembly for lubrication.
c. Provide belt drive fans with drive and belt guards.
8. Comply with Local Civil Defense and NFPA regulations.
9. Provide one spare motor for each motor size and provide one belt/ bearing for
each fan.
2.05 IN-LINE BIFURCATED EXHAUST FANS
A. Duct mounted Inline exhaust fan unit suitable for Kitchen exhaust, Class "F" motor, with
class F temperature rise. Motor shall be isolated from main air stream by a tunnel which
extends to the side of the main fan casing only.
B. Unit case is manufactured in aluminium alloy and is of square section, predrilled for
installation into compatible ducting, Non rusting fastenings are used throughout. A
removable panel shall be provided for quick and easy access for commissioning,
cleaning, inspection and maintenance purposes. The casing shall have an enlarged
bore located around the motor to permit adequate cross sectional area for air to flow
around the motor tunnel

C. Impeller is single inlet high performance axial flow type, dynamically balanced after
assembly and shall be direct driven or belt driven.
D. Provide polyester or equivalent anti corrosion protection cover for impeller, housing, and
all components.
E. The motor shall be cooled by ambient air drawn into the tunnel which extends to the
side of the casing and is suitable for continuous operation at high ambient temperature
of 50 °C.
2.06 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Sound-Power Level Ratings: Comply with AMCA 301, "Methods for Calculating Fan
Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data." Factory test fans according to AMCA 300,
"Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans." Label fans with the AMCA-
Certified Ratings Seal.
B. Fan Performance Ratings: Establish flow rate, pressure, power, air density, speed of
rotation, and efficiency by factory tests and ratings according to AMCA 210, "Laboratory
Methods of Testing Fans for Rating."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Do not operate fans for any purpose until ductwork is clean, filters are in place, bearings
lubricated, and fan has been test run under observation.
B. Install fans with vibration isolation mountings as specified in section 23 0548.
C. Install flexible connections specified in Section 23 3300 between fan inlet and discharge
ductwork. Ensure metal bands of connectors are parallel with minimum on inch (25mm)
flex between ductwork and fan while running. Flexible connections shall not be used for
fans used for smoke exhaust applications.
D. Provide fixed sheaves required for final air balance.
E. Provide safety screen where inlet or outlet is exposed.
F. Pipe scroll drains to nearest floor drain.
G. Provide back draft dampers on discharge of exhaust fans and as indicated.
H. For all fans (normal/smoke vent fans) provide fan starter switch in the space served by
the fan and location of starter switch to be as indicated on shop drawing or as approved.
Make necessary interconnections with light switch
I. Install axial fans level and plumb.
J. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.

K. Label fans according to requirements specified in Division 23 Section "Identification for
HVAC Piping and Equipment."
3.02 CONNECTIONS
A. Duct installation and connection requirements are specified in other Division 23

Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make
final duct connections with flexible connectors. Flexible connectors are specified in
Section 26 "Air Duct Accessories."
B. Ground equipment according to Section 26 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical

Systems."
C. Connect wiring according to Section 26 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and

Cables."
D. Install line-sized piping from scroll drain connection, with trap with seal equal to 1.5
times specified static pressure, to nearest floor drain
E. Install ducts adjacent to fans to allow service and maintenance.
A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed.
2. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that
connections to ducts and electrical components are complete. Verify that proper
thermal-overload protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnect
switches.
3. Verify that cleaning and adjusting are complete.
4. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and verify
fan wheel free rotation and smooth bearing operation. Reconnect fan drive
system, align and adjust belts, and install belt guards.
5. Adjust belt tension.
6. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.
7. Verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts.
8. Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers in
connected ductwork systems are in fully open position.
9. Disable automatic temperature-control operators, energize motor and confirm
proper motor rotation and unit operation, adjust fan to indicated rpm, and
measure and record motor voltage and amperage.
10. Shut unit down and reconnect automatic temperature-control operators.
11. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
B. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls
and equipment.
3.04 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.

B. Adjust belt tension.
C. Lubricate bearings.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 23 3416
CENTRIFUGAL HVAC FANS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1. Airfoil centrifugal fans.
2. Backward-inclined centrifugal fans.
3. Forward-curved centrifugal fans.
1.02 RELATED SECTION: Related work to be coordinated and used in conjunction with this
A. Section 23 0548 – Vibration and Seismic Control. Of HVAC Piping and Equipment.
B. Section 23 3113 – Metal Ducts
C. Section 23 0513 – Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment.
D. Section 26 0519 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. AMCA 99 - Standards Handbook
B. AMCA 210 - Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating Purposes
C. AMCA 300 - Test Code Sound Rating Air Moving Devices.
D. AMCA 301 - Method of Calculating Fan Sound Rating from Laboratory Test
E. AMCA 303 – Application of Sound Power Level Ratings for Fans
F. ANSI/AFBMA 9 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings.
G. ANSI/AFBMA 11 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings.
H. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standard, Metal and Flexible.
KEO/21-7387-0004 23 3416 / 1 Centrifugal Hvac Fans

A. Project Altitude: Base fan performance ratings on actual Project site elevations above
sea level.
B. Operating Limits: Classify according to AMCA 99.
C. Performance Ratings: Conform to AMCA 210.
D. Sound Ratings: AMCA 301, tested to AMCA 300
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, furnished specialties, and accessories for each
type of product indicated and include the following:
1. Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions indicated.
2. Certified fan sound-power ratings.
3. Motor ratings and electrical characteristics, plus motor and electrical accessories.
4. Material thickness and finishes, including color charts.
3. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication, including anchorages and
C. Coordination Drawings: Show fan room layout and relationships between components
and adjacent structural and mechanical elements. Show support locations, type of
support, and weight on each support. Indicate and certify field measurements.
E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For centrifugal fans to include in emergency,

operation, and maintenance manuals.

B. AMCA Compliance: Products shall comply with performance requirements and shall be
licensed to use the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.
C. NEMA Compliance: Motors and electrical accessories shall comply with NEMA 1.

A. Deliver fans as factory-assembled units, to the extent allowable by shipping limitations,
with protective crating and covering.
B. Disassemble and reassemble units, as required for moving to the final location,
according to manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Lift and support units with manufacturer's designated lifting or supporting points.
1.08 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of structural-steel support members.
C. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations.
A. Requirements of Section 23 0100 and the General Conditions of Contract shall be

no. / location.
1. Two (2) sets of matched fan belts for each type and size of belt-driven fan used.
2. Two (2) sets of Bearings for each type and size of fans used.
3. One electrical motor each for each type and size of Fans used.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS

Vendors List (AVL).
2.02 AIRFOIL CENTRIFUGAL FANS
A. Description: Factory-fabricated, -assembled, -tested, and -finished, belt-driven

centrifugal fans consisting of housing, wheel, fan shaft, bearings, motor and disconnect
switch, drive assembly, and support structure.
B. Housings: Formed panels to make curved-scroll housings with shaped cutoff, with
doors or panels to allow access to internal parts and components.
1. Panel Bracing: Steel angle- or channel-iron member supports for mounting and
supporting fan scroll, wheel, motor, and accessories.
2. Horizontally split, bolted-flange housing.
3. Spun inlet cone with flange.
4. Outlet flange.

C. Airfoil Wheels: Single-width-single-inlet and double-width-double-inlet construction with
curved inlet flange; heavy backplate; hollow die-formed, airfoil-shaped blades
continuously welded at tip flange and backplate; and cast-iron or cast-steel hub riveted
to backplate and fastened to shaft with set screws; and special coating.
D. Shafts: Statically and dynamically balanced and selected for continuous operation at
maximum rated fan speed and motor horsepower, with final alignment and belt
adjustment made after installation.
1. Turned, ground, and polished hot-rolled steel with keyway. Ship with protective
coating of lubricating oil.
2. Designed to operate at no more than 70 percent of first critical speed at top of
fan's speed range.
E. Prelubricated and Sealed Shaft Bearings: Self-aligning, pillow-block-type ball bearings.
F. Grease-Lubricated Shaft Bearings: Self-aligning, pillow-block-type, tapered roller

bearings with double-locking collars and two-piece, cast-iron housing.
G. Belt Drives: Factory mounted, with final alignment and belt adjustment made after
installation.
1. Service Factor Based on Fan Motor Size: 1.5
2. Fan Pulleys: Cast iron or cast steel with split, tapered bushing; dynamically
balanced at factory.
3. Motor Pulleys: Adjustable pitch for use with motors through 5 hp ; fixed pitch for
drives.
5. Belt Guards: Fabricate to comply with OSHA and SMACNA requirements of
diamond-mesh wire screen welded to steel angle frame or equivalent, prime
coated. Secure to fan or fan supports without short circuiting vibration isolation.
Include provisions for adjustment of belt tension, lubrication, and use of
tachometer with guard in place.
6. Motor Mount: Adjustable for belt tensioning.
H. Accessories:
1. Scroll Access Doors: Shaped to conform to scroll, with quick-opening latches
and gaskets.
2. Cleanout Door: Quick-opening, latch-type gasketed door allowing access to fan
scroll, of same material as housing.
3. Scroll Drain Connection: NPS 1 (DN 25) steel pipe coupling welded to low point
of fan scroll.
4. Companion Flanges: Rolled flanges for duct connections of same material as
housing.
5. Variable Inlet Vanes: With blades supported at both ends with two permanently
lubricated bearings of same material as housing. Variable mechanism
terminating in single control lever with control shaft for double-width fans.
6. Discharge Dampers: Assembly with parallel or opposed blades constructed of
two plates formed around and to shaft, channel frame, and sealed ball bearings;
with blades linked outside of airstream to single control lever of same material as
housing.
7. Inlet Screens: Grid screen of same material as housing.

8. Shaft Cooler: Metal disk between bearings and fan wheel, designed to dissipate
heat from shaft.
9. Spark-Resistant Construction: AMCA 99.
10. Shaft Seals: Airtight seals installed around shaft on drive side of single-width
fans.
11. Weather Cover: Enameled-steel sheet with ventilation slots, bolted to housing.
I. Motors: Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Common Motor

J. Capacities and Characteristics: See Equipment Schedule on plan.
2.03 BACKWARD-INCLINED CENTRIFUGAL FANS

B. Housings: Formed panels to make curved-scroll housings with shaped cutoff; with
4. Outlet flange.
C. Backward-Inclined Wheels: Single-width-single-inlet and double-width-double-inlet

construction with curved inlet flange, backplate, backward-inclined blades welded or
riveted to flange and backplate; cast-iron or cast-steel hub riveted to backplate and
fastened to shaft with set screws.
D. Shafts: Statically and dynamically balanced and selected for continuous operation at
maximum rated fan speed and motor horsepower, with final alignment and belt
adjustment made after installation.
1. Turned, ground, and polished hot-rolled steel with keyway. Ship with a protective
fan's speed range.
E. Prelubricated and Sealed Shaft Bearings: Self-aligning, pillow-block-type ball bearings.

1. Ball-Bearing Rating Life: ABMA 9, Ll0 at 120,000 hours.
2. Roller-Bearing Rating Life: ABMA 11, Ll0 at 120,000 hours.
F. Grease-Lubricated Shaft Bearings: Self-aligning, pillow-block-type, tapered roller

G. Belt Drives: Factory mounted, with final alignment and belt adjustment made after
installation.
1. Service Factor Based on Fan Motor Size: 1.5.

drives.
H. Accessories:
and gaskets.
2. Cleanout Door: Quick-opening, latch-type gasketed door allowing access to fan
scroll, of same material as housing.
of fan scroll.
housing.
6. Discharge Dampers: Assembly with parallel or opposed blades constructed of
two plates formed around and to shaft, channel frame, and sealed ball bearings;
with blades linked outside of airstream to single control lever of same material as
housing.
heat from shaft.
fans.
I. Motors: Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Common Motor

J. Capacities And Characteristics: See Equipment Schedule on Plan.
2.04 FORWARD-CURVED CENTRIFUGAL FANS


B. Housings: Formed panels to make curved-scroll housings with shaped cutoff; with
4. Outlet flange.
C. Forward-Curved Wheels: Black-enameled or galvanized steel construction with inlet

flange, backplate, shallow blades with inlet and tip curved forward in direction of airflow,
mechanically secured to flange and backplate; cast-steel hub swaged to backplate and
fastened to shaft with set screws.
1. Shafts: Statically and dynamically balanced and selected for continuous
operation at maximum rated fan speed and motor horsepower, with final
alignment and belt adjustment made after installation.
2. Turned, ground, and polished hot-rolled steel with keyway. Ship with protective
fan's speed range.
D. Prelubricated and Sealed Shaft Bearings: Self-aligning, pillow-block-type ball bearings.

E. Grease-Lubricated Shaft Bearings: Self-aligning, pillow-block-type, tapered roller

F. Belt Drives: Factory mounted, with final alignment and belt adjustment made after
installation.
1. Service Factor Based on Fan Motor Size: 1.5.
drives.
G. Accessories:
and gaskets.
2. Cleanout Door: Bolted Quick-opening, latch-type gasketed door allowing access
to fan scroll, of same material as housing.

of fan scroll.
housing.
6. Discharge Dampers: Assembly with parallel opposed blades constructed of two
plates formed around and to shaft, channel frame, and sealed ball bearings; with
blades linked outside of airstream to single control lever of same material as
housing.
heat from shaft.
fans.
H. Motors: Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Common Motor

I. Capacities and Characteristics: See Equipment Schedule on Plan.
A. Sound-Power Level Ratings: Comply with AMCA 301, "Methods for Calculating Fan
Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data." Factory test fans according to AMCA 300,
"Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans." Label fans with the AMCA-
Certified Ratings Seal.
B. Fan Performance Ratings: Establish flow rate, pressure, power, air density, speed of
rotation, and efficiency by factory tests and ratings according to AMCA 210, "Laboratory
Methods of Testing Fans for Rating."
2.06 GENERAL
A. Fans shall be capable of accommodating static pressure variations of plus or minus 10

percent.
B. Base performance on sea level conditions.
C. Statically and dynamically balance fans to eliminate vibration or noise transmission to

occupied areas.
D. Fans for outdoor installation shall be weather protected and provided with anticorrosion
paint.

E. Fans used for kitchen exhaust shall be inline bifurcated type complete with grease trap
and drain connection. Motor and / or drive shall be outside of the air stream. Fan shall
be rated for higher temperature as appropriate
F. Static - pressures given in the equipment Schedules are only for guidance. The
Contractor should submit static pressure calculations for all fans for approval before
ordering the equipment’s. The Contractor should give the required fan and motor hp.
Without additional cost. The contractor may propose lower motor hp as per the
calculations and as approved.
G. Contractor shall select fans for low noise application and shall provide all necessary
measures such as provision of sound attenuators, Acoustic enclosures, acoustic lining
to limit sound to acceptable noise levels as indicated in Section 23 0100 & Acoustic
report. Contractor shall submit noise calculations for the selected fan and
attenuators/and or acoustic enclosures for the approval prior to ordering the equipment.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Do not operate fans for any purpose until ductwork is clean, filters are in place, bearings
lubricated, and fan has been test run under observation.
B. Install fans with vibration isolation mountings as specified in section 23 0548.
C. Install flexible connections specified in Section 23 3343 between fan inlet and discharge
ductwork. Ensure metal bands of connectors are parallel with minimum on inch (25mm)
flex between ductwork and fan while running. Flexible connections shall not be used for
fans used for smoke exhaust applications.
D. Provide fixed sheaves required for final air balance.
E. Provide safety screen where inlet or outlet is exposed.
F. Pipe scroll drains to nearest floor drain.
G. Provide back draft dampers on discharge of exhaust fans and as indicated.
H. For all fans (normal/smoke vent fans) provide fan starter switch in the space served by
the fan and location of starter switch to be as indicated on shop drawing or as approved.
Make necessary interconnections with light switch
I. Install centrifugal fans level and plumb.
J. Support floor-mounting units using restrained spring isolators having a static deflection
of 1 inch (25 mm). Vibration- and seismic-control devices are specified in Division 23
Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment."
1. Secure vibration and seismic controls to concrete bases using anchor bolts cast
in concrete base.
K. Install floor-mounting units on concrete bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork

requirements are specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
L. Install floor-mounting units on concrete bases designed to withstand, without damage to
equipment, the seismic force required by authorities having jurisdiction. Concrete,
reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-
Place Concrete."
M. Support suspended units from structure using threaded steel rods and spring hangers
spring hangers with vertical-limit stops having a static deflection of 1 inch (25 mm).
Vibration-control devices are specified in Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic
Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment."
N. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.
O. Label fans according to requirements specified in Division 23 Section "Identification for

HVAC Piping and Equipment."
3.02 CONNECTIONS
A. Duct installation and connection requirements are specified in other Division 23

final duct connections with flexible connectors. Flexible connectors are specified in
Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories."
B. Install ducts adjacent to fans to allow service and maintenance.
C. Install line-sized piping from scroll drain connection, with trap with seal equal to 1.5
times specified static pressure, to nearest floor drain.
D. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for

Electrical Systems."
E. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power

Conductors and Cables."
connections to ducts and electrical components are complete. Verify that proper
thermal-overload protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnect
switches.
3. Verify that cleaning and adjusting are complete.
fan wheel free rotation and smooth bearing operation. Reconnect fan drive
system, align and adjust belts, and install belt guards.
5. Adjust belt tension.
6. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.
7. Verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts.
connected ductwork systems are in fully open position.

9. Refer to Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for
testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures.
10. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
B. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls
and equipment.
3.04 SPARE PARTS
A. Spare Parts as recommended by the manufacturer.
B. Tools and spare parts supplied under this clause shall be provided in original packing,
clearly labelled and referenced
C. Spare Parts furnished under this clause shall not be used during the maintenance
period without the written permission of the owner (Contractor shall procure spare parts,
tools etc., fulfill his obligations to operate and maintain the system in the contract period)
3.05 ADJUSTING
B. Adjust belt tension.
C. Lubricate bearings.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 23 3713
DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS AND GRILLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Section Includes: Supply and installation of air outlets and inlets Ceiling and wall-
mounted diffusers, registers, and grilles.
1. Section 23 3113: Metal Duct
2. Section 23 3300: Air Duct Accessories
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each product indicated, include the following:

1. Data Sheet: Indicate materials of construction, finish, and mounting details; and
performance data including throw and drop, static-pressure drop, and noise
ratings.
2. Data sheet for each type of outlet and inlet, and accessory furnished; indicating
construction, finish, and mounting details.
3. Performance data for each type of outlet and inlet furnished, including aspiration
ability, temperature and velocity traverses, throw and drop, static pressure drop
and noise criteria ratings at the required cfm. Indicate selections on data. NC
level for all selected air devices to be per the acoustical consultant report.
B. Samples: Submit samples of each type of finish required.
A. Grilles, diffusers, registers, louvers etc. shall be constructed from extruded aluminum,
unless mentioned otherwise elsewhere.
B. Grilles, diffusers, registers, etc. are to be furnished with a factory finish to a color
specified by the interior designer.
C. Decorative grille for the fresh air makeup shall be coordinated and approved by interior
designer.
D. Regulatory Requirements
1. ADC Test Code: Test and rate air outlets and inlets in certified laboratory under
the requirements of Air Diffusion Council (ADC) Equipment Test Code 1062
“Certification, Rating and Test Manual”.
KEO/21-7387-0004 23 3713 / 1 Diffusers, Registers And Grilles

2. ANSI / NFPA Standards: Install air outlets and inlets in accordance with National
Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Standard 90A “Installation of Air Conditioning
and Ventilating Systems”.
1.04 PRODUCTS DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver outlets wrapped in factory-fabricated fiberboard type containers. Identify on

outside of container type of outlet or inlet and location to be installed. Avoid crushing or
bending and prevent dirt and debris from entering and settling in devices.
B. Store outlets and inlets in original cartons and protect from weather and construction
work traffic. Where possible, store indoors; when necessary to store outdoors, store
above grade and enclose with waterproof wrapping.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS

Vendors List (AVL).
2.02 CEILING AIR DIFFUSERS
A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer’s standard ceiling air

diffusers where shown; of size, shape, capacity and type indicated with internal damper;
constructed of materials and components as indicated and as required for complete
installation.
B. Performance: Provide ceiling air diffusers that have, as minimum, temperature and
velocity traverses, throw and drop, static pressure drop and noise criteria ratings for
each size device as listed in manufacturer’s current data.
C. Ceiling Compatibility: Provide diffusers with border styles that are compatible with
adjacent ceiling systems and that are specifically manufactured to fit into ceiling module
with accurate fit and adequate support.
D. Types: Provide ceiling diffusers of type, capacity and with accessories as listed on
diffuser schedule.
E. Finish: To be manufacturers standard factory applied matt, baked on enamel in colours

to be selected by Engineer’s Representative to match architectural finishes.
2.03 LINEAR DIFFUSERS
A. Provide linear diffusers with internal damper vanes, adjustable from face of diffuser
without removing or disturbing installation. These variable vanes shall provide 180
degree discharge pattern, left, right or vertical adjustable in each slot.

B. Connect diffuser frame to acoustically lined plenum. Connect plenum to supply duct or
supply branch takeoff with flexible duct. Provide damper at takeoff from supply branch
duct.
C. Where continuous strips are required, provide strip diffusers with blank off covers for
dummy diffusers.
D. Where linear diffusers are used for return air, the appearance from the room shall be
identical to supply diffusers.
E. Provide similar finish as described above for ceiling air diffusers.
2.04 REGISTERS, GRILLES AND PERFORATED FLOOR PANELS
A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer’s standard products

where shown; of size, shape, capacity and type indicated; constructed of materials and
components as indicated, and as required for complete installation.
B. Performance: Provide products that have, as minimum, temperature and velocity

traverses, throw and drop, static pressure drop and noise criteria ratings for each size
device as listed in manufacturer’s current data.
C. Wall/Floor Compatibility: Provide registers and grilles with border styles that are
compatible with adjacent wall/ floor systems, and that are specifically manufactured to fit
into wall/floor construction with accurate fit and adequate support.
D. Types: Provide registers, grilles and perforated floor panels of type, capacity, and with
accessories as listed on register and grille schedule or as shown on drawings.
E. Provide all supply grilles and registers with adjustable front and rear bars with front bars
parallel to the short dimension and rear bars parallel to the long dimension. Provide
registers with an opposed blade damper behind the bars, to be key operated from the
register face.
F. Provide all return grilles or registers with fixed face bars set at a 45-degree angle and
parallel to the long dimension. Provide registers with a key operated opposed blade
damper operable from the register face.
G. Provide perforated floor tiles specially designed for computer centre floor system.
Provide volume damper operated from the face of floor tile. Limit discharge velocity to
300 FPM.
H. Provide finish as described for ceiling air diffusers.
2.05 CEILING/SIDEWALL/SILL LINEAR REGISTERS/GRILLES
A. Continues 1/8-inch face bars with 1/2 (half) inch centers and 0 or 15 deg. core deflection
to satisfy needed throw.
B. Registered/Grilles complete with accessories shall be of aluminium construction.

Material, finish and colour to be approved by the Engineer.

C. Provide frame with face screw mounting holes or with steel snap-in friction springs as
required per application. Frames shall be provided also with gasket to prevent air
leakage. Heavy duty mounting frame shall be provided for floor / sill application.
D. Provide Registers/Grilles with galvanised steel sheet plenum as required, internally lined
with ½ inch thick acoustic insulation. Circular spigots are provided and fitted with
volume control dampers.
2.06 CEILING/SIDEWALL LINEAR SLOT DIFFUSERS
A. Continues ¾ inch width slot/s with adjustable control vanes and volume control
dampers. It shall be fully adjustable from the face of the diffuser, to any horizontal,
vertical or any intermediate setting of air flow pattern to satisfy needed throw.
B. Linear slot diffusers complete with accessories shall be of extruded aluminium

construction with lengths and numbers of slots as shown on the drawings. Finish and
colour to be approved by the Engineer.
C. Provide concealed mounting brackets fit in a hemmed duct collar or frame to positively
hold the diffuser in ceiling or sidewall installations.
D. Provide diffusers with galvanized steel sheet plenum as required, internally lined with 1
(one) inch thick acoustic insulation. Circular spigots are provided and fitted with volume
control dampers.
2.07 FLOW BAR DIFFUSERS: (LINEAR AND MODULAR SLOT DIFFUSERS)
A. Provide all materials and equipment required for a complete installation of all linear and
modular slot air distribution systems as shown on the mechanical drawings. The
systems shall be complete in every respect and shall include all required
appurtenances. Mechanical contractor shall furnish and install all plenums, hoods,
blank-offs and associated sheet metal components including all duct connections
thereto.
B. Provide all continuous linear slot and modular slot diffusers as shown on the drawings.
The slot diffusers shall integrate into the ceiling system. Where curved linear slot
diffusers are indicated, they shall be stretched formed to the exact radii required. Rolled
or segmented linear slot diffusers will not be accepted.
C. The linear slot diffusers shall have a single slot unless shown otherwise and shall be
capable of being used for supply air, return air, exhaust air or any combination.
D. The linear slot diffusers shall be capable of supporting the ceiling system. Linear
diffusers supported by screws in the flanges or from air plenums are unacceptable. For
lay-in ceiling, provide hanger wire support clips that are integral with the linear slot
diffusers allowing the linear slot diffusers to be supported from the building structure with
ceiling wire. For hard ceilings, provide clips that are integral with the linear slot diffusers
allowing the diffusers to be secured directly to the ceiling framing without the
requirement for hanger supports. Provide spline clips to secure joints and ceiling tees to
the diffusers.

E. Provide ends and corners as required. Ends shall be butt type, field installed, or mitered
picture frame type factory installed, as indicated herein or shown on the drawings.
Corners shall be mitered one-piece unit.
F. Pattern controllers shall be one-piece extruded aluminum, 24 inches long maximum,

positioned between spring loaded spacers. Pattern controllers shall allow the airstream
to be directed flat against the ceiling in either direction or downward as well as allowing
throw reduction every two feet along the entire length of the linear slot diffusers. The
airstream shall be maintained at the ceiling plane and shall not dump when volume is
reduced. Only extruded aluminum pattern controllers are acceptable. Where shown or
noted pattern controllers shall be designed to allow the airstream to be jetted into the
occupied space and be adjustable to vector the airstream as required.
G. Material shall be minimum wall thickness 0.062 inches extruded aluminum. Spring steel
retainers shall be used under the spacers to hold the slot diffusers assembly tightly
together and allow the slot diffusers to be disassembled easily for field trimming.
Materials other than extruded aluminum and spring steel will not be accepted.
H. Flanges exposed to view shall be painted factory standard white. All other surfaces shall
be painted flat black. Provide paint samples if requested.
I. All slot diffusers shall be manufactured by the same manufacturer of the plenums and
hoods. No exceptions shall be allowed. Plenum lengths and entry collar sizes shall be
as indicated on the plan schedules.
J. Plenums shall be minimum 24-gauge galvanized steel and lined inside with black matte
fiberglass insulation. Hoods shall be 51 percent free area and constructed of 24-gauge
perforated sheet metal painted flat black.
K. Where shown on the drawings or otherwise indicated, provide a friction type volume
damper located in the entry collar of the supply air plenum, accessible through the slot
diffuser.
L. Air test and balance of linear and modular slot diffusers systems shall be by this section
and be in accordance with the testing and balancing portion section of the
specifications. Position all Flow Bar pattern controllers in their normal operation
positions and perform all air testing and balancing of all slot diffuser systems in full
accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
M. All slot diffusers shall be performance tested with air plenums as a composite assembly
in full accordance with ASHRAE, and/or ARI standards. If requested, the contractor shall
provide for a visit by the mechanical consulting engineer to the product testing
laboratory to verify performance data and testing procedures. All cost associated thereto
shall be provided at the expense of the contractor.
N. Diffusers shall be selected to achieve a throw to room length ratio which meets the
requirements of the ASHRAE Fundamentals Handbook, latest edition, at both
maximum design flow rate, and for VAV systems, at the minimum flow rate expected
during partial occupancy. Diffusers shall be selected to achieve a minimum of 70
percent ADPI over the range of expected loads in the space. The diffusers’ reported
performance shall be based on tests conducted in accordance with ASHRAE Standard
70–2006. ADPI performance on at least one-unit size of the selected diffuser shall have

been tested in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 113–1990, to validate conformance
and applicability to the ASHRAE table.
2.08 DISC VALVES FOR SUPPLY AND EXTRACT AIR
A. Circular disc valves, suitable for supply and extract air, comprising valve ring with
peripheral seal, central disc with threaded spindle and locknut and installation sub frame
with volume flow rate adjustment by rotating the central disc.
B. Face sections sheet steel with electrostatic powder coating, galvanised steel threaded
spindle and lock nut, installation sub frame galvanised sheet steel.
2.09 JET NOZZLES
A. Jet nozzles suitable for long throw distances with optimum acoustic properties,
preferably used for heating and cooling in critical areas. The adjustment facility –
manual allows variation in discharge angle to compensate for changing temperature
differences, adjustment angular range 30° upwards to 30° downwards. The manually
adjustable version can also be rotated through 360°.
B. The fixed jet nozzle consists of an aerodynamically shaped discharge nozzle deep-
drawn in one piece, with fixing holes. Adjustable construction consists of a discharge
nozzle with spherical outlet mounted in housing, a mounting flange and in a circular duct
rear connection spigot for direct connection to a circular duct. Also available with rear-
mounted duct connecting element with peripheral flange and optional spigot or saddle
connection with flange for fixing to the side of rectangular or circular ducts; the rear
contour of the saddle connection is profiled to the duct diameter.
C. The discharge nozzle and face cover ring are in aluminium, the mounting for the eyeball
is with two plastic rings, the connection element and saddle connection are in
galvanised sheet steel.
D. The surface shall be pre-treated, and powder coated in white (RAL 9010) or another
RAL color to suit the architectural finishes (the spigots remain galvanised finish)
2.010 CEILING SWIRL DIFFUSER
A. Swirl diffusers with square or circular face with swirling horizontal discharge of supply air
with high induction, consisting of a pressed front face with radially angled fixed air guide
blades.
B. Optionally with fixed top entry plenum or top entry plenum with internal sub frame, or
circular side entry plenum box with circular spigot and additional options of lip seal or
volume control damper.
C. To measure reference pressure, the spigot can be fitted with sheathed cable adjusted
volume control damper and measuring nipple.
D. Plenum boxes complete with holes in top flange or fitted brackets for mounting. The
diffuser face can be fixed or removed by means of a centre fix screw.

E. Diffuser face and discharge nozzle ring consist of extruded aluminium sections, natural
anodized finish RAL 910 or another RAL color and types to suit the architectural
finishes.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Provide all grilles, registers or diffusers which are suitable for installation in the ceiling,
wall or floor finishes. Provide all required accessories to facilitate installation.
B. Provide all air distribution devices from one manufacturer unless otherwise noted.
3.02 INSPECTION
A. Examine areas and conditions under which outlets and inlets are to be installed. Do not
proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install outlets and inlets in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions
and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products serve
intended functions.
B. Provide an internally lined supply air plenum for all linear grilles, bar grilles and slot
diffusers. The lining shall be 1-inch thick minimum.
C. Coordinate with other work, including ductwork and duct accessories, as necessary to
interface installation of outlets and inlets with other work.
D. Locate ceiling air diffusers, registers, and grilles, as indicated on general construction
“Reflected Ceiling Plans”. Unless otherwise indicated, locate units in center of
acoustical ceiling modules.
E. Install perforated floor panels after full coordination with computer equipment contractor
and as approved by the Engineer’s Representative.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 23 6200
PACKAGED COMPRESSOR AND CONDENSER UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes air- and water-cooled condensing units.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each condensing unit, include rated capacities, operating
characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories. Include equipment dimensions,
weights and structural loads, required clearances, method of field assembly,
components, and location and size of each field connection.
B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer.

2. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and
attachments to structure and to supported equipment.
C. Coordination Drawings: Plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown
and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved:
1. Structural members to which condensing units will be attached.
2. Liquid and vapor pipe sizes.
3. Refrigerant specialties.
4. Piping including connections, oil traps, and double risers.
5. Evaporators.
D. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that condensing

units, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 23
Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment." Include the
following:
1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual
test of assembled components or on calculation.
a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without
separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic
forces specified."
b. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without
forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic
event."
KEO/21-7387-0004 23 6200 / 1 Packaged Compressor and Condenser Units

2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and
locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is
based and their installation requirements.
E. Field quality-control test reports.
F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For condensing units to include in emergency,

G. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.
A. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of

condensing units and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 01
Section "Product Requirements."
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in

C. Fabricate and label refrigeration system according to ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for
Mechanical Refrigeration."
1. Units shall be designed to operate with HCFC-free refrigerants.
D. ASME Compliance: Fabricate and label water-cooled condensing units to comply with
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1.
1.04 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases.
Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.
B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These
items are specified in Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories."
C. Coordinate location of piping and electrical rough-ins.
A. Provide all spare parts for 2-year operation as per the recommendation from the
supplier
1.06 SPECIAL WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair

or replace components of condensing units that fail in materials or workmanship within
specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Compressor failure.
b. Condenser coil leak.
2. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS

Vendors List (AVL).
2.02 CONDENSING UNITS, AIR COOLED, 1 TO 5 TONS (3.5 TO 17.6 kW)
A. Description: Factory assembled and tested, consisting of compressor, condenser coil,

fan, motors, refrigerant reservoir, and operating controls.
B. Compressor: Scroll, hermetically sealed, with rubber vibration isolators.

1. Motor: Single speed, and includes thermal- and current-sensitive overload
devices, start capacitor, relay, and contactor.
2. Two-Speed Compressor: Include manual-reset, high-pressure switch and
automatic-reset, low-pressure switch.
3. Accumulator: Suction tube.
4. Refrigerant Charge: R-407C or R-410A .
C. Condenser Coil: Seamless copper-tube, aluminum-fin coil; circuited for integral liquid
subcooler, with removable drain pan and brass service valves with service ports.
D. Condenser Fan: Direct-drive, aluminum propeller fan; with permanently lubricated,

totally enclosed fan motor with thermal-overload protection and ball bearings.
E. Accessories:
1. Coastal Filter: Mesh screen to protect condenser coil from salt damage.
2. Crankcase heater.
3. Cycle Protector: Automatic-reset timer to prevent rapid compressor cycling.
4. Electronic programmable thermostat or Low-voltage thermostat and subbase to
control condensing unit and evaporator fan.
5. Evaporator Freeze Thermostat: Temperature-actuated switch that stops unit
when evaporator reaches freezing temperature.
6. Filter-dryer.
7. High-Pressure Switch: Automatic-reset switch cycles compressor off on high
refrigerant pressure.
8. Liquid-line solenoid.
9. Low-Pressure Switch: Automatic-reset switch cycles compressor off on low
refrigerant pressure.
10. PE mounting base to provide a permanent foundation.
11. Precharged and insulated suction and liquid tubing.
12. Sound Hood: Wraps around sound attenuation cover for compressor.
13. Thermostatic expansion valve.
14. Time-Delay Relay: Continues operation of evaporator fan after compressor
shuts off.

F. Unit Casing: Galvanized steel, finished with baked enamel; with removable panels for
access to controls, weep holes for water drainage, and mounting holes in base. Mount
service valves, fittings, and gage ports on exterior of casing.
2.03 CONDENSING UNITS, AIR COOLED, 6 TO 120 TONS (21 TO 422 kW)
A. Description: Factory assembled and tested, air cooled; consisting of casing,

compressors, condenser coils, condenser fans and motors, and unit controls.
B. Compressor: Hermetic or semihermetic compressor designed for service with

crankcase sight glass, crankcase heater, and backseating service access valves on
suction and discharge ports.
1. Capacity Control: Cylinder unloading and Hot-gas bypass.
2. Refrigerant Charge: R-407C, R-410A or HFC-134a.
C. Condenser Coil: Seamless copper-tube, aluminum-fin coil, including subcooling circuit

and backseating liquid-line service access valve. Factory pressure test coils, then
dehydrate by drawing a vacuum and fill with a holding charge of nitrogen or refrigerant.
D. Condenser Fans: Propeller-type vertical discharge; either directly or belt driven.

Include the following:
1. Permanently lubricated ball-bearing motors.
2. Separate motor for each fan.
3. Dynamically and statically balanced fan assemblies.
E. Operating and safety controls include the following:

1. Manual-reset, high-pressure cutout switches.
2. Automatic-reset, low-pressure cutout switches.
3. Low oil pressure cutout switch.
4. Compressor-winding thermostat cutout switch.
5. Three-leg, compressor-overload protection.
6. Control transformer.
7. Magnetic contactors for compressor and condenser fan motors.
8. Timer to prevent excessive compressor cycling.
F. Accessories:
1. Electronic programmable thermostat or Low-voltage thermostat and subbase to
control condensing unit and evaporator fan.
2. Gage Panel: Package with refrigerant circuit suction and discharge gages.
3. Hot-gas bypass kit.
4. Part-winding-start timing relay, circuit breakers, and contactors.
G. Unit Casings: Designed for outdoor installation with weather protection for components
and controls and with removable panels for required access to compressors, controls,
condenser fans, motors, and drives. Additional features include the following:
1. Steel, galvanized or zinc coated, for exposed casing surfaces; treated and
finished with manufacturer's standard paint coating.
2. Perimeter base rail with forklift slots and lifting holes to facilitate rigging.
3. Gasketed control panel door.
4. Nonfused disconnect switch, factory mounted and wired, for single external
electrical power connection.
5. Condenser coil hail guard and grille to protect coil from physical damage.

2.04 CONDENSING UNITS, WATER COOLED
A. Description: Factory assembled and tested, water cooled; consisting of compressors,

water-cooled condensers, bases, and unit controls.
B. Compressor: Hermetic or serviceable hermetic type; with oil pump, operating oil charge,
and suction and discharge shutoff valves. Factory mounted on base using spring
isolators. Include the following:
1. Thermally protected compressor motor.
2. Crankcase heater.
3. Capacity control using cylinder unloading, suction pressure controlled and
discharge pressure operated, designed for unloaded start.
4. Refrigerant Charge: R-407C, R-410A or HFC-134a.
C. Condenser: Single-pass, tube-in-tube coaxial type; with seamless, integral-finned,

copper tube and steel outer shell with water-regulating valve.
D. Condenser: Multipass, shell-and-tube type; with replaceable, seamless, integral-finned

copper tubes; positive-liquid subcooling circuit; pressure relief device; liquid-level test
cock; purge connection; liquid-line shutoff valve; and angle valve for connection of
water-regulating valve.
1. Unit Construction: ASME stamped for refrigerant-side working pressure of 385
psig (2650 kPa) and water-side working pressure of 250 psig (1720 kPa).
E. Accessories include the following:

1. Discharge-line muffler.
2. Gage panel containing gages for suction, discharge, and oil pressure.
3. Electric solenoid cylinder unloaders.
4. Pump-down relay package.
5. Crankcase cover plates with equalizer connections.
F. Controls: Factory-mounted and -wired panel with the following:

1. Timer to prevent short cycling.
2. High- and low-refrigerant-pressure safety controls.
3. Power- and control-circuit terminal blocks.
4. Compressor motor starter.
5. Control-circuit on-off switch.
6. Control-circuit fuse.
2.05 MOTORS
A. General requirements for motors are specified in Division 23 Section "Common Motor
1. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven
load will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.
2. Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Electrical devices and connections
are specified in Division 26 Sections.
A. Verification of Performance: Rate condensing units according to ARI 210/240 and

ARI 340/360.
1. Coefficient of Performance: Equal to or greater than prescribed by
ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, "Energy Efficient Design of New Buildings except Low-
Rise Residential Buildings."
2. Energy-Efficiency Ratio: Equal to or greater than prescribed by
ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, "Energy Efficient Design of New Buildings except Low-
Rise Residential Buildings."
B. Test and inspect shell and tube condensers according to ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1.
C. Testing Requirements: Factory test sound-power-level ratings according to ARI 270.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of
condensing units.
B. Examine roughing-in for refrigerant piping systems to verify actual locations of piping
connections before equipment installation.
C. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where condensing units will be
installed.
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install units level and plumb, firmly anchored in locations indicated; maintain
manufacturer's recommended clearances.
B. Install condensing units on concrete base. Concrete base is specified in Division 23

Section "Common Work Results for HVAC," and concrete materials and installation
requirements are specified in Division 03.
C. Concrete Bases:
1. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete slab. Unless otherwise
indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch (450-mm) centers around full perimeter of
the base.
2. For equipment supported on structural slab, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts
that extend through concrete base and anchor into structural concrete floor.
3. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates,
diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
4. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported
equipment.
5. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions.
D. Install roof-mounting units on equipment supports specified in Division 07.

E. Vibration Isolation: Mount condensing units on rubber pads with a minimum deflection
of 1/4 inch (6.35 mm). Vibration isolation devices and installation requirements are
specified in Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and
Equipment."
F. Vibration Isolation: Mount condensing units on restrained spring isolators with a

minimum deflection of. Vibration isolation devices and installation requirements are
specified in Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and
Equipment."
G. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances for service and maintenance.
H. Loose Components: Install electrical components, devices, and accessories that are
not factory mounted.
3.03 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings

indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance.
C. Connect precharged refrigerant tubing to unit's quick-connect fittings. Install tubing so it

does not interfere with access to unit. Install furnished accessories.
D. Connect refrigerant piping to air-cooled condensing units; maintain required access to

unit. Install furnished field-mounted accessories. Refrigerant piping and specialties are
specified in Division 23 Section "Refrigerant Piping."
E. Connect refrigerant and condenser-water piping to water-cooled condensing units.

Maintain clear tube removal space. Refrigerant piping and specialties are specified in
Division 23 Section "Refrigerant Piping" and condenser-water piping and specialties are
specified in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping" and Division 23 Section
"Hydronic Piping".
F. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for

G. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power

1. Perform electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection.
2. Leak Test: After installation, charge systems with refrigerant and oil and test for
leaks. Repair leaks replace lost refrigerant and oil, and retest until no leaks exist.
3. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to
confirm proper operation, product capability, and compliance with requirements.
4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning
controls and equipment.
5. Verify proper airflow over coils.

B. Verify that vibration isolation and flexible connections properly dampen vibration
transmission to structure.
C. Remove and replace malfunctioning condensing units and retest as specified above.
3.05 STARTUP SERVICE
A. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written

instructions and perform the following:
1. Inspect for physical damage to unit casing.
2. Verify that access doors move freely and are weathertight.
3. Clean units and inspect for construction debris.
4. Verify that all bolts and screws are tight.
5. Adjust vibration isolation and flexible connections.
6. Verify that controls are connected and operational.
B. Lubricate bearings on fans.
C. Verify that fan wheel is rotating in the correct direction and is not vibrating or binding.
D. Adjust fan belts to proper alignment and tension.
E. Start unit according to manufacturer's written instructions and complete manufacturer's

startup checklist.
F. Measure and record airflow over coils.
G. Verify proper operation of condenser capacity control device.
H. Verify that vibration isolation and flexible connections properly dampen vibration
transmission to structure.
I. After startup and performance test, lubricate bearings and adjust belt tension.
3.06 DEMONSTRATION

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain condensing units. Refer to Division 01
Section "Demonstration and Training."
END OF SECTION

SECTION 23 7313
INDOOR AND OUTDOOR AIR HANDLING UNITS / ENERGY RECOVERY

VENTILATORS (ERV)
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. This Section includes, air-handling units / energy recovery ventilators (ERV) with coils
for indoor and outdoor installations.
B. Thermal Wheel Energy Recovery
C. Heat Pipes for enhanced dehumidification
D. Related Sections include the following:

1. Section 230548 – Vibration & Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping & Equipment.
2. Section 238216-Air Coils
1.02 REFERENCES
A. AMCA 99 - Standards Handbook.
B. AMCA 210 - Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating Purposes.
C. AMCA 300 - Test Code for sound Rating Air Moving Devices.
D. AMCA 301 - Method of Publishing Sound Ratings for Air Moving Devices.
E. AMCA 500 - Test Methods for Louver, Dampers, and Shutters.
F. ANSI/AFBMA 9 - Load ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings.
G. ANSI/AFBMA 11- Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings.
H. ANSI/UL 900 - Test Performance of Air Filter Units.
I. AHRI 410 - Forced Circulation Air-Cooling and Air-Heating Coils.
J. AHRI 430 - Standard for Central-Station Air-Handling Units.
K. AHRI 435 - Standard for Application for Central-Station Air-handling Units.
L. NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems.
M. EN 1886 - Ventilation for Buildings – Air Handling Units – Mechanical Performance.
KEO/21-7387-0004 23 7313 / 1 Indoor and Outdoor Air Handling Units/Energy

Reem Hills Development Recovery Ventilator(ERV)
N. EN 13053 - Ventilation for Buildings – Air Handling Units – Rating and Performance for
Units, Components and Sections.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of indoor air-handling unit / energy recovery ventilator
indicated. Include the following:
1. Certified fan-performance curves with system operating conditions indicated.
2. Certified fan-sound power ratings.
3. Certified coil-performance ratings with system operating conditions indicated.
4. Motor ratings, electrical characteristics, and motor and fan accessories.
5. Material gages and finishes.
6. Filters with performance characteristics.
B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer.

2. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and
C. Coordination Drawings: Submit with Shop Drawings. Show mechanical-room layout

and relationships between components and adjacent structural and mechanical
elements. Show support locations, type of support, and weight on each support.
Indicate and certify field measurements.
D. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that indoor air-

handling units / energy recovery ventilators, accessories, and components will withstand
seismic forces defined in Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC
Piping and Equipment." Include the following:
forces specified."
event."
E. Field Quality-Control Test Reports: From manufacturer.
F. Static pressures given in the Energy Recovery Ventilator (ERV) Schedules are only for
guidance. The Contractor shall calculate the external and internal static pressures for all
ERV’s and shall obtain Engineer's approval before ordering the equipment’s. The
Contractor should provide the required fan and motor h.p. without additional cost

A. Source Limitations: Obtain indoor air-handling units / energy recovery ventilator (ERV)
through one source from a single manufacturer.
B. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of

indoor air-handling units / energy recovery ventilator and are based on the specific
system indicated. Refer to Division 01 Section "Product Requirements."
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in

D. NFPA Compliance: Indoor air-handling units / Energy Recovery Ventilator and

components shall be designed, fabricated, and installed in compliance with NFPA 90A,
"Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems."
E. Certification: Indoor air-handling units / Energy Recovery Ventilator and their

components shall be factory tested according to Eurovent or AHRI 430, "Central-Station
Air-Handling Units," and shall be listed and labeled by AHRI.
F. Eurovent Certifications for the complete range of AHU’s/ERV’s: Units should be certified
and labelled with Eurovent Certification. AHUs/ERV’s must be manufactured at locations
mentioned on the Eurovent certificate. Semi knocked down or completely knocked down
AHUs/ERV’s for assembly at site are not acceptable. Local assembly hub shall be
acceptable if it is Eurovent certified.One unit to be run tested as per FAT & Visual
inspection of all AHUs/ERV’s prior to shipment.
G. AHRI Certification/Eurovent: In the case of AHRI certified AHUs/ERV’s, the Coils shall
be AHRI certified according to the applicable portions of AHRI 410, and shall be listed
and bear the label of the Air-Conditioning Heating and Refrigeration Institute (AHRI).
H. Provide motors required as part of air-handling units that are listed and labelled by CE
and comply with applicable standards in accordance with IEC.
I. Condensation: Provide cold bridge free construction with Thermal break profile to
protect the unit against condensation.
J. Factory shall be ISO 9001:2008, ISO 14001: OHSAS 18001: certified. All valid
certifications must be part of submittal
K. Minimum Energy Performance: Specific Fan Powers
Description Fan Type Specific Fan Power

(SFP) Maximum
Energy Recovery Ventilator Plug Fan (Supply) 1.5 W/L/S
(ERV)
Energy Recovery Ventilator Plug Fan (Exhaust) 1.0 W/L/S
(ERV)
L. Comply with NFPA 70.

1.05 COORDINATION
B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These
C. Coordinate size and location of structural-steel support members.
A. Requirements of Section 230100 and the General Conditions of Contract shall be

B. Tools and spare parts supplied under this clause shall be provided in original packing,
clearly labelled and referenced.
C. Spare Parts furnished under this clause shall not be used during the maintenance
period without the written permission of the owner (Contractor shall procure spare parts,
tools etc., fulfill his obligations to operate and maintain the system in the contract period)
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS

Vendors List (AVL).
2.02 MANUFACTURED UNITS-INDOOR AIR HANDLING UNITS / ENERGY RECOVERY

VENTILATOR (ERV)
A. Draw-through, indoor air-handling units / energy recovery ventilators shall be factory

assembled and consist of fans, motor and drive assembly, coils, dampers, plenums,
filters, condensate pans, mixing section, dampers, control devices, synthetic pre-filters
of MERV 8 efficiency, fine/final (bag) filters of MERV 13 efficiency, sand trap louvers (If
shown on the drawings), run around heat pipe, energy recovery wheel, and all required
accessories. Drain pan shall extend over the entire coil length & shall be of stainless-
steel construction for corrosive resistance and shall be insulated.
B. The Air handling supplier should supply the first line product, which should be AHRI /
Eurovent Certified. The AHRI / Eurovent certificate should show the product series,
AHU/ERV sizes, models range, Country of origin etc.
C. Factory dynamic fan balancing shall be conducted from 14Hz to 50Hz to identify and
eliminate critical speeds to ensure stable operation through the entire operating range of
the fan and drive assembly. Field fan balancing is not acceptable. Forward factory
balancing test report to Engineer upon request.

D. Provide factory grommets at all pipe and electrical conduits penetrations through
cabinets.
E. Furnish each unit with a durable, deep etched, .025” thick, factory installed aluminum
identification plate, permanently mounted with the following information:
1. Unit identification as indicated on Contract Drawings.
2. Serial Number.
3. Model Number.
4. Capacity (CFM) and static pressure.
5. Motor HP.
6. Unit power supply: Volts / PH / Amps.
7. Supply Fan Type.
8. Coil GPM and pressure drop.
9. Sales Order #.
10. Date unit manufactured.
2.03 CABINET
A. Cabinet Construction and specifications

1. Air Handling Unit / Energy Recovery Ventilator shall be assembled on a heavy
galvanized steel channel base frame. The minimum acceptable height for the
base frame is 150 mm for indoor unit
2. AHUs/ERV’s shall be entirely of double skin construction with Aluminium
pentapost frame and galvanized steel construction for the outer and inner skins.
Self supported modular panels fixed to the baseframe and non-removable panels
supported from inside are not acceptable.
3. The unit panels skin thickness should be not less than 1.0 MM for outer and inner
skin. The panels should fabricated of galvanized steel sheet.
4. The outer panel skin should be made of galvanized steel thoroughly degreased
and then phosphatized before application of an average 60micron backed
electrostatic dry powder coating in RAL 7032 color scheme. The walls from
inside and out side should be completely smooth.
5. All panels should be removable from the casing with quick release fasteners.
Rubber surrounds shall be provided to each panel joint and door to ensure
absolute air tightness. The sealing strips should of cellular rubber with close
pores. The panel shall be mounted flush with the frame members to create a
smooth surface inside and out side.
6. Full size hinged access doors, cam-locks and sturdy handles should be provided
for access section, filters, electric heaters & fans etc.
7. Air handing unit Intake and discharge openings should be fitted with a flanged
duct connection frame.
8. Walk in units should have internal door handles and reinforced floors.
9. The Fan section, Bag filter section, should be supplied with double plastic glass
inspection window not less than 190 Dia. sealed with rubber from the inside and
outside panel skin
10. The casing shall be suitable for horizontal suspended configuration & mounted
on a channel base frame, ensuring that the unit is securely supported on its
base, and at the same time preventing any condensation forming under unit
base.
11. Material thickness and finishes. Casing material shall exceed 1000-hour, 5% salt
spray solution test at 95F (35C) and 95% relative humidity without any sign of red
rust when tested in accordance with ASTM B-117.
B. Cabinet Insulation
1. The framework should be clad with minimum 40-mm thick, double skinned panel
insulated with mineral wool / fiberglass / polyurethane insulation sandwiched
having a density of not less than 48 kg/m³. Coefficient of heat transfer for the
casing should not exceed 0.6 W/(m2K).
C. Certification
1. The casing should meet Eurovent EN1886 with the following mechanical
characteristics
Casing Strength D1
Casing Air Leakage Class at -400Pa L1
Casing Air Leakage Class at +700Pa L1
Thermal Transmittance Class T2
Thermal Bridging Factor TB2
Filter Bypass Class F9
2.04 PLUG FAN AND MOTOR
A. Plug fan shall be centrifugal plenum type.
B. Fans shall be equipped with airflow measurement by means of pressure difference

sensor for duty and standby configuration.
C. Direct drive single inlet centrifugal fans shall be backward curved high performance
centrifugal impellors with rotation diffuser, mounted on EC external rotor motor with
integrated control electronics.
D. Fan speed control shall be via AHU/ERV controller which shall be interfaced with the
BMS thru BACNET/IP Communication interface for remote monitoring and control.
E. Impellor shall be made of aluminum, with backward curved, continuously welded blades;
flow optimized inlet nozzle made of galvanized steel with pressure tap.
F. Motorized impellor balanced in two planes (static and dynamic) as per DIN ISO 1940 to
G 6.3 balance quality.
G. EC external rotor motor with Efficiency class IE4, magnets without use of rare earths,
maintenance free ball bearings with long term lubrication, theoretical nominal service life
of atleast 40,000 operating hours, soft start, integrated current limitation, wide input
voltage range 1-phase 230V, 60Hz or 3-phase 400V, 60Hz fan suitable for use with all
standard power supply systems with no effect on air performance.
H. Integrated electronics, low noise commutation logic; 100% speed control; PID
controllers; motors with power ratings of 750W shall be provided with an
RS485/MODBUS RTU interface.
I. Terminal box shall be made of aluminum with readily accessible connection area with
spring terminals, environment resistant cable glands or with brought out variable
connection cables (K3G250-AT39 and K3G280-AT04 only.)

J. Fan shall comply with the relevant EMC regulations and requirements with regard to
circuit feedback; documentation and marking conform to the applicable EU directives.
K. Performance data, air performance measurements on inlet side chamber test rig shall
be in accordance with ISO 5801 and DIN 24163, noise measurements in low reflection
acoustic test chamber as per DIN EN ISO 3745.
L. Integrated protective devises:

1. Alarm relay, with floating contacts (250V AC/2 A cos φ = 1).
2. Locked rotor protection.
3. Phase failure protection.
4. Motor soft start.
5. Mains undervoltage detection.
6. Excess temperature protection for electronics and motor.
7. Short circuit protection.
M. Fans shall have a sharply rising pressure characteristic extending through the operating
range and continuing to rise beyond the peak efficiency to ensure quiet and stable
operation. Fans shall have non overloading design with self-limiting horsepower
characteristics and shall reach a peak in the normal selection area.
N. Factory Run Test for one AHU/ERV: All fans prior to shipment shall be completely
assembled and test run as a unit at the specified operating speed or maximum RPM
allowed for the particular construction type.
O. Blank off panels: Each multiple fan section to be provided with one fan blank off panel to
enable manual isolation of fan for servicing.
P. The following fan options shall be made available for multiple fans:
1. Piezometer Ring: Airflow station shall be factory installed in each fan inlet.
Tubing shall be manifolded so that the measurement is representative of all fans
in the array. The device shall have a measurement accuracy of ±5%.
2. Backdraft damper: Backdraft damper shall be provided for automatic isolation of
individual fans for duty and standby configuration.
Q. Shafts: Solid hot rolled steel, ground and polished, with key-way, and protectively
coated with lubricating oil. Critical speed minimum 20% greater than maximum ACMA
class speed.
R. Fans should capable of accommodating static pressure and airflow variation of minimum
plus or minus 10 percent. Do not increase the speed by more than 20 percent from
specified criteria.
S. Rated Bearing Life: L-50 of 200,000 hours.
T. Control panel shall be supplied by same AHU/ERV supplier with in-built isolator.
2.05 REFRIGERANT COILS
A. Performance Ratings: Tested and rated according to AHRI 410 and ASHRAE 33.
B. Minimum Working-Pressure Rating: 300 psig (2070 kPa).

C. Source Quality Control: Factory tested to 450 psig (3105 kPa).
D. Tubes: ASTM B 743 copper, minimum 0.049 inch (1.245 mm) thick.
E. Fins: Copper, minimum 0.010 inch (0.254 mm) thick.
F. Suction and Distributor Piping: ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B) copper tube
with brazed joints.
G. Frames: Galvanized-steel channel frame, minimum 0.0625 inch (1.6 mm) thick for
flanged mounting.
H. Frames: ASTM A 666, Type 316 stainless steel, minimum 0.0625 inch (1.6 mm) thick
for flanged mounting.
I. Capacities and Characteristics: (See equipment schedule on plan)
2.06 FILTERS
A. Refer to Air Filter section with the following superseding specifications:

1. The filters should be tested and classified based on ASHRAE standard 52 or
equivalent Eurovent standard.
2. The filters should be sealed against the filter frame using a cam lock against a
permanently elastic gasket to a standard compatible with the filter efficiency.
3. Filter material shall be flame-retardant, incombustible, and non-odorous and offer
no sustenance to vermin.
4. Filters UL Listed. Preliminary filter shall be made from synthetics media, in flat
form or pleated form, shall be with galvanized steel frames, cleanable and
washable. Soft bag filters is up to 500 mm depth synthetics bag media and
supported with galvanized steel frames. Built from strong, robust materials they
display excellent abrasional resistance and perform well up to 100% relative
humidity and in high airflow and heavy dust loading conditions
5. The filters should be sealed against the filter frame using a cam lock against a
permanently elastic gasket to a standard compatible with the filter efficiency.
6. Pressure drop tapping shall be integrated into the frame to allow a manometer or
other pressure measuring apparatus to be fitted.
7. The filters cells should be withdrawal on the inspection side. The filter track shall
be made of stainless steel and with Hand-actuated off-center locking mechanism.
The Filter frame thickness shall be able to stand the weight for the filters.
8. Filters with performance characteristics. Computer selection sheet must indicate
clean, design (semi dirty) and final recommended pressure drop from filter
supplier
2.07 FILTER GAUGE
A. 50mm diameter, diaphragm actuated dial in metal case.
B. Vent valves.
C. Black figures on white background.
D. 2% of full scale accuracy.

E. Range: 0 to 750Pa.
F. Accessories: Static pressure tips with integral compression fittings, 6m, plastic tubing
and 2 or 3-way vent valves.
2.08 OUTDOOR AIR HANDLING UNITS / ENERGY RECOVERY VENTILATORS
A. All specifications in this section for indoor units should be applicable for outdoor version
in addition to the following:
1. The outdoor Air Handling Units / Energy Recovery Ventilator should be
specifically designed for outdoor installation. Indoor air handlers weatherized for
outdoor use not accepted
2. The outdoor units outer joint of the unit should be sealed with permanently
flexible sealing compound.
3. A full-size sloping roof with drip nose for the outdoor units, which is both longer
and wider than the unit and painted in optional color.
4. All outdoor units shall be constructed and delivered on a base fabricated frame
from heavy duty structure galvanized steel channel painted in optional color. The
minimum acceptable height for the base frame is 150 mm.
5. For outdoor extract units the discharge should be fitted with an exhaust hood with
bird screen and the casing drainage shall be provided in the discharge sections.
6. The intake dampers should have contra-rotating stainless-steel profile blades
and fitted internally in a separate section. Also, for the Mixing Box the dampers
should fitted internally.
7. Provide special PVC / epoxy coating for the outer skin.
8. Fresh air inlet shall be through weather proof louver. Case stainless steel drain
pan shall be provided in the intake section.
2.09 THERMAL WHEEL ENERGY RECOVERY
A. Material: Hygroscopic type rotor heat exchanger designed for the transfer of both
sensible and latent heat. Bearings should be permanently lubricated roller type.
B. Other components of the Energy Recovery Units shall be similar to AHU/ERV.
C. Thermal efficiency: The thermal wheels efficiency shall be at not less than 75%.
Measured at the recovery side.
D. Modular unit matching with air handling unit / Energy Recovery Ventilator modules in all
respects comprising, but not limited to the following to reclaim coolness / heat from the
exhaust air and transfer to the outside air intake:
1. Wheel filled with a matrix of Aluminium foil.
a. Speed controlled drive unit.
b. High performance seal provides tightness around the wheel surround and
between the air inlet and air outlet.
c. The desiccant should be water molecule selective and non-migratory.
d. The desiccant should be molecular sieve 3 Angstrom, so as to keep the
cross contamination to absolute minimum and also ensure the exclusion
of contaminants from the air streams, while transferring the water vapour
molecules.

e. The thermal wheel is equipped with a purge section to enable continuous
wheel cleaning.
E. Casing shall be constructed of 20-gauge steel sheet; treated against corrosion as

appropriate.
1. Drive and controller:
a. Electric motor shall be supplied with suitable electrical power supply
complete with internal thermal overload protection and wired to unit
junction box.
b. Controls shall include starter with overload trip for the drive unit, linked to
start / stop with the air handling unit/energy recovery ventilator fan;
appropriately integrated with that of the air handling unit/energy recovery
ventilator, wired for single electrical power intake.
F. Wheel matrix should be only from pure aluminum foil to allow for quick and efficient
uptake of thermal energy, sufficient mass for optimum heat transfer, maximum sensible
heat recovery during low rotational speed of 20 to 25 rpm.
G. The Desiccant for Enthalpy wheel should be water molecule selective and non-
migratory. The Desiccant should be molecular sieve 3Å, so as to keep the cross
contamination to absolute minimum and also ensure the exclusion of contaminants from
the air streams, while transferring the water vapor molecule. The desiccant should be of
sufficient mass, and should be coated with non-masking porous binder adhesive on the
aluminum substrate (matrix) so as to allow quick and easy uptake and release of water
vapor. The weight of desiccant coating and the mass of aluminum foil shall be in a ratio
so as to ensure equal recovery of both sensible and latent heat over the operating
range.
H. The Rotor/Wheel matrix shall have Equal sensible and latent recovery in the range of 60
to 80%.
I. The Rotor shall be made of alternate flat and corrugated aluminum foil of uniform width.
The Rotor honeycomb matrix foil should be so wound and adhered as to make a
structurally very strong and rigid media un-affected by temperature and humidity
changes.
J. Subject to wheel size, sectioned wheel with pie segments, capable of being assembled
at site can be acceptable as an option.
K. The surface of the wheel/rotor should be highly polished to ensure that the vertical run
out does not exceed ± 1mm for every 1 meter diameter , ensuring negligible leakage.
L. The number of wraps (of alternative corrugated and flat foil ) of the rotor over the radii
shall be very consistent so as to ensure uniform air flow and performance over the entire
face in the air stream. Flute height and pitch will be consistent to a very tight tolerance to
ensure uniform pressure drop and uniform airflow across the rotor face.
M. The rotor shall be non clogging aluminum media, having a multitude of narrow aluminum
channels, thus ensuring a laminar flow and will allow particles up to 800 microns to pass
through it.
N. The rotor should rotate at a speed lower than 20 to 25 rpm, ensuring long life of belts
and reduce wear and tear of seals.

O. The media shall be cleanable with compressed air, or low pressure steam or light
detergent, without degrading the latent recovery.
P. The recovery wheel cassette/casing shall be manufactured from tubular construction to

provide a self supporting rigid structure, complete with access panels, purge sector,
rotor, bearings, seals, drive mechanism complete with belts. The cassette/ casing shall
be finished weather proof painting.
Q. The rotor shall have a field adjustable purge mechanism to provide definite separation of
air flow minimizing the carryover of bacteria, dust and other pollutants, from the exhaust
air to supply air. With proper adjustments the cross contamination shall be limited to less
than 0.04% of the exhaust air concentration.
R. The face and radial seals shall be 4 pass non contact labyrinth seals for effective
sealing and also for minimum wear and tear.
S. The rotor shall be made from epoxy coated sheet aluminum.
2.010 Thermal wheels sensible and enthalpy shall be supplied with electronic speed control
center ( If shown on the schedules). The electronic speed control center shall be fully
integrated to BAS ( building automation system)
2.011 HEAT PIPES FOR ENHANCED DEHUMIDIFICATION
A. General
1. Heat pipes shall be included within the AHU/ERV and wrapped around the main
cooling coil. The wrap-around heat pipes precool the fresh/return air allowing
more of the cooling coil surface to be utilized for the removal of moisture. The
dehumidified air is then passively reheated by the heat pipe to the supply
condition. The incorporation of the heat pipe allows for a reduction in the size of
chiller and cooling coil as well as replacing the conventional methods of reheat
and their associated system components.
2. Heat pipes for enhanced dehumidification will comprise a precool fin block
upstream of the main cooling coil linked to a reheat fin block downstream of the
cooling coil by means of ‘wrap-around’ pipes. The heat pipes will be delivered to
the AHU/ERV manufacturer fully charged and sealed, for inclusion in the air
treatment section of the AHU/ERV.
B. Fins
The external fins shall be of aluminium with a minimum thickness of 0.15mm. Fins shall
be of the continuous plate type to maximize the external surface area rather the
individually finned tube pattern. The fins shall be of the louvered type to optimize the
airside heat transfer and spaced at such a distance as required by the conditions
specified.
C. Tubes
Tubes shall be of refrigeration standard seamless copper C106 for heat exchanger use.
Tube diameter shall be 12mm with a grooved inner surface to enhance the internal
surface area and prevent pooling of liquid. The minimum root thickness of the tube shall
be 0.35mm. The number of rows of tubes shall be selected to suit the application.
Multiple row heat pipes shall have tubes in a staggered, equilateral pattern to optimize
the airside heat transfer.
D. Casing
Casings shall be from galvanized sheet steel with a minimum thickness of 1.6mm. The
casing shall incorporate tube plates and top and bottom plates around both the precool
and reheat heat pipe blocks. Cover boxes shall be provided around the wrap-around
pipes both to protect the exposed pipes and to rigidly join the two sections. Extra sheet
metal shall be provided to ensure rigidity during manufacture and transport.
E. Working Fluid
1. The working fluid shall be refrigerant type classified as ASHRAE safety group A1.
The refrigerant shall be R134a. The heat pipe circuits shall be factory charged
and hermetically sealed with the calculated weight of refrigerant.
2. If working fluid is water, the heat pipe circuit shall be factory charged with the
calculated weight of water and hermitically sealed. Individual heat pipe shall be
manufactured in such a way as to ensure that all non-condensable gases are
removed from the tubes.
F. Circuitry
1. Heat pipes shall be formed from an array of complete loops such that the working
fluid flows around the loop in only one direction i.e. liquid and vapour flow in the
same direction to ensure that returning liquid is not entrained by the vapour.
2. There shall be a multitude of loops in the height of the heat pipe and each loop
shall be individually charged. Heat pipes with header assemblies containing a
single circuit are not suitable as a single leak will render the entire heat pipe
inoperative.
3. When multiple row heat pipes are used the rows shall be connected together in a
counter flow orientation to optimize the performance of the heat pipe. Rows shall
not be manifolded together.
4. Heat pipe loops shall be arranged to slope down to the precool side to allow
gravity assisted liquid return to maximize the internal heat transfer.
G. Performance
Heat pipes shall be designed to comply with the specified conditions when subject to the
air volumes given in the specification. Heat pipe performance shall be independently
type tested and certified in line with the requirements of British Standards BS 5141 pt1 /
European Standards EN 305 & 306 / American Standards AHRI 410 / AHRI 1060 for
testing and rating of heat exchangers. All software used to predict the performance of
heat pipes shall be based upon the results of these independent tests
2.012 SOUND POWER LEVEL
A. Air handling unit/Energy Recovery Ventilator sound power data shall be submitted for
review. Sound data shall be given at the supply connections and return connections.
B. Calculations shall be provided for the investigation of the requirements for Sound
Attenuators.
C. Minimum sound attenuation for the casing should be
Octave band, mid frequency, Hz
125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 HZ

15 23 29 31 28 31 33 dB (A)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 SELECTION
A. The size of units shall be selected to fit into the space available.
3.02 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
B. Examine roughing-in of hydronic, Refrigeration piping, and condensate drainage piping

systems and electrical services to verify actual locations of connections before
installation.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and in conformance with AHRI

435 or equivalent Eurovent standard
B. Concrete Bases: Install floor mounting units on 4-inch- (100-mm-) high concrete bases.
See Division 23 Section "Common Work Results for HVAC" for concrete base materials
and fabrication requirements.
C. Install indoor air-handling units / energy recovery ventilator with the vibration control
devices as specified in Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC
Piping and Equipment."
D. For suspended type units provide vibration isolating hangers
E. Arrange installation of units to provide access space around indoor air-handling units /
energy recovery ventilator for service and maintenance.
F. Air leaks detectable by sound or touch are to be corrected.
G. Air handling units / Energy Recovery Ventilators are to be properly supported to prevent
flexing, bending or distorting base rails.
H. All coils are to be cleaned prior to substantial completion if units are used during
construction.
I. Clean all air handling units / Energy Recovery Ventilators and return to original
manufacturer's condition prior to substantial completion. Vacuum clean all debris from
inside air handling equipment.
J. Install piping to unit with full size 6 inch long dirt leg with 1/2" valve at bottom for
cleaning.

K. Provide for positive gravity drainage of coil condensate. Pipe full size of unit connection.
L. Adjust fan drives as required to obtain scheduled capacities as directed by the Test and
Balance Firm to include sheave and belt replacement.
M. Align belts to eliminate wear and vibration of belts.
N. Verify correct drainage of condensate from condensate pan.
O. Verify correct rotation of fan and wiring of motor.
P. Lubricate all greaseable ball bearings with manufacturer’s suggested lubricant.
Q. Replace filters as required if units are used during construction
3.04 CONNECTIONS

B. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance.
C. Chilled-Water Piping: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 23 Section

"Hydronic Piping." Connect to supply and return coil tappings with shutoff or balancing
valve and union or flange at each connection.
D. Provide condensate drain pipe from the unit.
E. Refrigerant Piping: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 23 Section

"Refrigerant Piping." Connect to supply and return coil tappings with shutoff valve and
union or flange at each connection.
F. Duct installation and connection requirements are specified in other Division 23

final duct connections with flexible connections.
G. Electrical: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 26 Sections for power

wiring, switches, and motor controls. For field installed electrical items and wiring,
ensure compliance with manufacturer's wiring and details drawings.
H. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for

I. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published

torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those
specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to

inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including piping and
electrical connections. Report results in writing.

1. Leak Test: After installation, fill water and steam coils with water and test coils
and connections for leaks. Remove malfunctioning coils, replace with new units,
and retest.
2. Charge refrigerant coils with refrigerant and test for leaks. Remove
malfunctioning coils, replace with new units, and retest.
3. Fan Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to
confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. Remove malfunctioning units,
replace with new units, and retest.
4. Automatic Roll Filter Operational Test: Operate filters to demonstrate
compliance with requirements. Test for leakage of unfiltered air while system is
operating. Correct malfunctioning units, then retest to demonstrate compliance.
Remove and replace units that cannot be corrected with new units, and retest.
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.
B. Final Checks before Startup: Perform the following, as minimum:

connections to piping, ducts, and electrical systems are complete. Verify that
proper thermal-overload protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnect
switches.
3. Perform cleaning and adjusting specified in this Section.
free fan wheel rotation and smooth bearing operations. Reconnect fan drive
system, align belts, and install belt guards.
5. Lubricate bearings, pulleys, belts, and other moving parts with factory-
recommended lubricants.
6. Set zone dampers to fully open position for each zone.
7. Set face-and-bypass dampers to full face flow.
8. Set outside- and return-air mixing dampers to minimum outside-air setting.
9. Comb coil fins for parallel orientation.
10. Install clean filters.
connected duct systems are in fully open position.
C. Starting procedures for indoor air-handling units / Energy Recovery ventilator include the
following:
1. Energize motor; verify proper operation of motor, drive system, and fan wheel.
Adjust fan to indicated rpm. Replace fan and motor pulleys as required to
achieve design conditions].
2. Measure and record motor electrical values for voltage and amperage.
3. Manually operate dampers from fully closed to fully open position and record fan
performance.
D. Refer to Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for indoor air-
handling system / Energy Recovery Ventilator testing, adjusting, and balancing.

3.07 ADJUSTING
3.08 CLEANING
A. Clean indoor air-handling units / Energy Recovery Ventilator internally, on completion of

installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions. Clean fan interiors to
remove foreign material and construction dirt and dust. Vacuum clean fan wheels,
cabinets, and coils entering air face.
B. After completing system installation and testing, adjusting, and balancing indoor air-
handling / Energy Recovery ventilator and air-distribution systems, clean filter housings
and install new filters.
3.09 DEMONSTRATION

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain indoor air-handling units / Energy Recovery
Ventilator. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training."
END OF SECTION

SECTION 23 8126
SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes split-system air-conditioning units consisting of separate

evaporator-fan and compressor-condenser components. Units are designed for
exposed or concealed mounting and may be connected to ducts.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, furnished specialties, and accessories for
each type of product indicated. Include performance data in terms of capacities,
outlet velocities, static pressures, sound power characteristics, motor requirements,
and electrical characteristics.
B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes.
E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For split-system air-conditioning units to include

in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
F. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.
A. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of

split-system units and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to
Division 01 Section "Product Requirements."

National or International Electric Code, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
C. Energy-Efficiency Ratio: Equal to or greater than prescribed by ASHRAE 90.1,

"Energy Efficient Design of New Buildings except Low-Rise Residential Buildings.”
D. Coefficient of Performance: Equal to or greater than prescribed by ASHRAE 90.1,

"Energy Efficient Design of New Buildings except Low-Rise Residential Buildings.”
KEO/21-7387-0004 23 8126 / 1 Split-System Air-Conditioners

Coefficient of Performance shall be equal to or greater than 3.8 in accordance with
ESTIDAMA requirements.
E. The equipment manufacturer shall be fully certified and registered to comply with the
Abu Dhabi Local authority having jurisdiction, local Green Building Code, ESMA and
QCC.
F. Units shall be designed to operate with HCFC-free refrigerants.
G. The system will be produced in an ISO 9001 and ISO 14001 facility, which are
standards set by the International Standard Organization (ISO). The system shall be
factory tested for safety and function.
H. The units shall be tested by a reputed Third Part as per ISO 5151.
I. Units shall be capable of operating up to 52°C outdoor ambient without failure.
J. The outdoor unit will be factory charged with R-32 or R-410 refrigerant.
K. A holding charge of dry nitrogen shall be provided in the evaporator.
1.04 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases for units. Cast anchor-bolt inserts
into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork are specified in Division 03
Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
B. Coordinate size, location, and connection details with roof curbs, equipment
supports, and roof penetrations specified in Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories."
1.05 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to

repair or replace components of split-system air-conditioning units that fail in
materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Refer to section 23 9010 – warranty and spare parts list.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS

Vendors List (AVL).
2.02 DX SPLIT SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. The variable capacity, heat pump air conditioning system shall be an Inverter Driven
series split system. The system shall consist of a ceiling concealed and ducted

evaporator model or wall mounted cabinet (exposed) evaporator model exclusively
matched to outdoor direct expansion (DX), air-cooled, variable speed, inverter driven
compressor using R-32 or R410 refrigerant. The unit shall be provided with a wall
mounted thermostat.
B. Evaporator / Condenser shall be factory assembled including coil, fan motor(s) and
controls in casing.
C. The outdoor unit is a horizontal or vertical discharge, variable speed, fan unit. The
system shall have a self-diagnostic function, 3-minute time delay mechanism and
have a factory pre-charge of R-32 or R410 adequate for the installation requirement.
The system shall have automatic restart capability after a power failure has occurred
and a low voltage cut-off feature to prevent stalling during power supply issues.
2.03 CONCEALED EVAPORATOR FAN COMPONENTS INDOOR UNIT
A. General: The indoor unit shall be factory assembled including coil, fan motor(s) and
pre-wired with all necessary electronic and refrigerant controls. Both liquid and suc-
tion lines must be individually insulated between the outdoor and indoor units.
B. Unit Cabinet:
1. Galvanized steel, 1mm thick with flanged edges, removable panels for servic-
ing and insulation on back of panel.
a. Insulation: Faced, glass fiber duct liner.
b. Drain Pans: Galvanized steel, with connection for drain and insulated.
C. Fan:
1. The evaporator fan shall be centrifugal forward-curved, double width wheel of
galvanized steel.
2. The evaporator fan shall be an assembly consisting of a direct-driven fan
connected to a motor.
3. The fan shall be statically and dynamically balanced and operate on a motor
with permanent lubricated bearings.
4. Fan driving components are mounted on rubber pad isolators to reduce noise
and vibration.
D. Fan Motors:
1. Motors are Brushless DC electric motors (ECM).
2. Provides a range of different RPM to cater for different static pressure
requirements in the field. Default static pressure can be modified to suit
installation requirements/ductwork lengths.
3. Internal Overcurrent protection provided with the motors.
E. Filter:
1. The return air filter provided will be mildew proof, removable and washable
antimicrobial filter.
F. Evaporator Coil:
1. Manufactured with seamless copper internally grooved tubes (IGT).
2. Aluminum fins are mechanically bonded with copper tubes.
3. Coils are tested at 580 PSIG N2 pressure for air-tight & helium leak testing.
4. Aluminum is treated with anti-corrosive coating & hydrophilic coating.

5. A condensate pan shall be provided under the entire length of cooling coil with
positive drainage construction. It has a 32mm OD male drain connection.
G. Electrical:
1. The outdoor unit shall be powered with 208-230 volts, 1 phase, and 50 hertz
power. The indoor unit shall receive 208-230 volt, 1 phase, 50 hertz power
from the outdoor unit.
2. The allowable voltage range shall be 160 volts to 265 volts.
3. Built in voltage stabilizer must be provided.
2.04 WALL-MOUNTING, EVAPORATOR-FAN COMPONENTS INDOOR UNIT
H. General: The indoor unit shall be factory assembled and pre-wired with all necessary
electronic and refrigerant controls. Both liquid and suction lines must be individually
insulated between the outdoor and indoor units.
I. Unit Cabinet:
1. The indoor unit shall have a white finish.
2. The drain and refrigerant piping shall be accessible from six (6) positions for
flexible installation (right side, right back, and right bottom; and left side, left
back, and left bottom.
3. The cabinet shall be supplied with a mounting plate to be installed onto a wall
for securely mounting the cabinet.
J. Fan:
1. The evaporator fan shall be an assembly consisting of a direct-driven fan by a
single motor.
2. The fan shall be statically and dynamically balanced and operate on a motor
with permanent lubricated bearings.
3. An auto-swing louver for adjustable air flow (both vertically and horizontally) is
standard via the wireless remote control furnished with each system.
4. The indoor fan shall offer a choice of five speeds, plus quiet and auto settings.
K. Filter:
1. The return air filter provided will be mildew proof, removable and washable
antimicrobial filter.
L. Coil:
1. The evaporator coil shall be a nonferrous, aluminum fin on copper tube heat
exchanger.
2. All tube joints shall be brazed with silver alloy or phoscopper.
3. All coils will be factory pressure tested.
4. A condensate pan shall be provided under the coil with a drain connection.
M. Electrical:
1. The outdoor unit shall be powered with 208-230 volts, 1 phase, and 50 hertz
power. The indoor unit shall receive 208-230 volt, 1 phase, 50 hertz power
from the outdoor unit.
2. The allowable voltage range shall be 160 volts to 265 volts.
3. Built in voltage stabilizer must be provided.
N. Control:

1. The unit shall have a backlit, wireless remote infra-red controller
capable to operate the system. It shall have Cooling Operation,
Heating Operation, Automatic Operation, Dry Operation and Fan Only
Operation.
2. The controller shall consist of an On/Off Power switch, Mode Selector,

Outdoor Quiet Operation (for outdoor unit), Fan Setting, Swing Louver,
On/Off Timer Setting, Temperature Adjustment, °C or °F Temperature
Display.
a. On/Off switch powers the system on or off.

b. Mode selector shall operate the system in auto, cool, heat, fan
or dry operation
c. Outdoor quiet operation shall lower the sound level of the
outdoor unit by slowing the inverter driven fan speed.
d. Fan setting shall provide five fan speeds, plus quiet and auto
settings.
e. Swing louver shall adjust the airflow (horizontal and vertical)
blades.
f. On/Off timer is used for automatically switching the unit on or
off.
g. Temperature adjustment allows for the increase or decrease of
the desired temperature.
3. The remote control shall perform Fault Diagnostic functions which may
be system related, indoor unit or outdoor unit related depending on the
fault code.
4. The indoor unit microprocessor has the capability to receive and

process commands via return air temperature and indoor coil
temperature sensors enabled by commands from the remote control.
O. Sound:
5. Indoor unit sound levels shall not exceed:
Indoor Cooling Ca-

Cooling Mode Sound
pacity Level (H/M/L/SL)
dB(A)
12 MBH 45 / 42 / 40 / 38
18 MBH 47 / 45 / 40 / 38
24 MBH 47 / 45 / 40 / 38
Note: values are measured approximately 3ft (0.9m) away.
2.05 AIR COOLED, COMPRESSOR-CONDENSER COMPONENTS
A. General: The outdoor unit shall be specifically matched to the corresponding

indoor unit size. The outdoor unit shall be complete factory assembled coils,
fan motor(s) and controls in casing and pre-wired with all necessary electronic
and refrigerant controls.

B. Casing: Unit casing is 0.8mm thick Zinc coated alloy steel with polyester resin
paint and it is passed factory salt spray test. Mounting base made of zinc alloy
steel with acrylic/polyester coating against corrosion.
C. Fan:
1. The fan shall be a direct drive, propeller type fan.
2. Fans are statically & dynamically balanced for quiet operation.
3. A fan guard is provided on the outdoor unit to prevent contact with fan
operation.
D. Fan Motor:
1. Motors are Brushless DC electric motors (ECM), to cater for high con-
denser airflow requirement during high outdoor ambient operations
conditions and low airflow requirement during part load & low outdoor
ambient operations to optimize energy efficiency.
2. Motor shall be protected with Class E insulation.
E. Condenser Coil:
1. Condenser coils are manufactured with seamless copper internally
grooved tubes (IGT).
2. Aluminum fins are mechanically bonded with copper tubes.
3. Coils are tested at 580 PSIG N2 for air-tight & helium leak testing.
4. The fins are to be covered with an anti-corrosion hydrophilic blue fin
film.
F. Compressor:
1. Compressor shall be high efficiency type and hermetically sealed.
2. The compressor shall be inverter-driven compressor controlled by in-
verter for variable speed.
3. Accumulator is an integral part to save compressor from occasional
liquid flood back.
4. The compressor shall have an internal thermal overload protection.
5. Sound jackets shall be provided to reduce compressor noise.
6. The outdoor unit can operate with a maximum vertical height difference
of 15 m and overall maximum length of 30 m without any oil traps or
additional components.
7. The compressor shall be mounted on rubber anti vibration isolators.
G. Additional Accumulator:
1. Additional accumulator is provided to save the compressor from liquid
flood back & to enhance compressor’s life.
H. Electrical:
1. The electrical power requirement is 400 volt, 3-phase, and 50 Hz pow-
er.
2. The outdoor shall be controlled by a microprocessor located in the out-
door and indoor units via commands from the Thermostat.
3. Dedicated EEV’s shall be provided for capacity control during part load
of the indoor unit.
2.06 SAFETY FEATURES
A. Current Control: If overall current of system reaches limit value, then this
protection will try to keep the system safer by reducing compressor speed.

B. High Pressure Control: If pressure is above 4 Mpa, then the high-pressure
switch will be activated & shutdown the system. Related malfunction code
will appear on thermostat controller display.
C. Low Pressure Control: If pressure is below 0.15 Mpa, system will get
stopped and related malfunction code will appear on remote display.
D. Anti-freeze protection: To avoid ice formation on Indoor side during low

ambient operation, anti-freeze sensor is provided.
E. Motor overcurrent protection: For the safe operation & better life of motor,
overcurrent protection is given.
F. Compressor overcurrent and overload: To safeguard the compressor dur-

ing abnormal situation, overcurrent & overload relay (temperature base) is
given.
G. Refrigerant shortage detection: In case of refrigerant shortage, a malfunc-

tion code will appear on remote display.
2.07 ACCESSORIES
A. Thermostat: Low voltage with subbase to control compressor and evapora-

tor fan. All units shall have a wall mounted electronic control wired thermo-
stat with features such as an on-off switch, temperature setting, in-built
sensors and indication pilot lamps.
B. Automatic-reset timer to prevent rapid cycling of compressor.
C. Refrigerant Line Kits: Soft-annealed copper suction and liquid lines factory
cleaned, dried, pressurized, and sealed; factory-insulated suction line with
flared fittings at both ends.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install units level and plumb.
B. Install evaporator-fan components using manufacturer's standard mounting devices

securely fastened to building structure.
C. Install ground-mounting, compressor-condenser components on 4-inch- (100-mm-)

thick, reinforced concrete base; 4 inches (100 mm) larger on each side than unit.
Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork are specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-
in-Place Concrete." Coordinate anchor installation with concrete base.
D. Install ground-mounting, compressor-condenser components on polyethylene

mounting base.

E. Install roof-mounting compressor-condenser components on equipment supports
specified in Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories." Anchor units to supports with
removable, cadmium-plated fasteners.
F. Install compressor-condenser components on restrained, spring isolators with a

minimum static deflection of 1 inch (25 mm). Refer to Division 23 Section
"Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment."
G. Install and connect pre-charged refrigerant tubing to component's quick-connect

fittings. Install tubing to allow access to unit.
3.02 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections.

Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Install piping adjacent to unit to allow service and maintenance.
C. Duct Connections: Duct installation requirements are specified in Division 23

Section "Metal Ducts." Drawings indicate the general arrangement of ducts.
Connect supply and return ducts to split-system air-conditioning units with flexible
duct connectors. Flexible duct connectors are specified in Division 23 Section "Air
Duct Accessories."
D. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for

E. Electrical Connections: Comply with requirements in Division 26 Sections for

power wiring, switches, and motor controls.
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative

to inspect, test, and adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation,
including connections, and to assist in field testing. Report results in writing.
B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks
and retest until no leaks exist.
2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to
confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation.
C. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.

1. Complete installation and startup check according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
3.05 DEMONSTRATION

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain units. Refer to Division 01 Section
"Demonstration and Training."
END OF SECTION

SECTION 23 8216
AIR COILS
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. This Section includes the following types of air coils that are not an integral part of air-
handling units:
1. Refrigerant.
2. Electric.
1.02 RELATED SECTION
A. Division 23 Sections for air coils that are integral to air-handling units.
B. Section 23 2113 - Hydronic Piping
C. Section 23 0523 - General Duty Valves For HVAC Piping
1.03 REFERENCES
A. ARI 410- Forced-Circulation Air-Cooling and Air-Heating Coils
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material
descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each air
coil. Include rated capacity and pressure drop for each air coil.
B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring.
C. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which coil location
and ceiling-mounted access panels are shown and coordinated with each other.
E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air coils to include in operation and maintenance
manuals.
KEO/21-7387-0004 23 8216 / 1 Air Coils

B. Coils shall be the product of manufacturer regularly engaged in production of coils who
issues complete catalog data on such products
A. Requirements of the General Conditions of Contract / Section 23 0100 shall be referred

to and complied with as appropriate without prejudice to requirements stated herein.
no. / location.
1. 1 set of contactors, automatic / manual reset thermostats for each coil.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS

Vendors List (AVL).
2.02 GENERAL
A. Provide extended surface type coils with tubes of copper and fins of aluminum.
B. Space fins 12 per inch maximum and minimum tube Ida. 5/8”. Helical fins may be
crimped. The whole fin shall be without any holes for easy cleaning
C. Flux shall be with high content silver.
D. Fin collar shall cover entire tube, so there is no air contact with tube.
E. Tubes shall be placed in staggered configuration for better heat transfer.
F. Bends in tubes shall be smooth without wrinkles to reduce erosion and pressure drop.
G. Performance rating shall be established at a maximum coil face air velocity of 2.54 mps
(500 fpm) or as per manufacturer standards.
H. Drip / drain pan shall be of sturdy construction and with inherit protection against
corrosion.
I. Protect coils so fins are not damaged. Replace loose and damaged fins. Comb out bent
fins.
2.03 REFRIGERANT COILS
KEO/21-7387-0004 23 8216 / 2 Air Coils

A. Performance Ratings: Tested and rated according to ARI 410 and ASHRAE 33.
B. Minimum Working-Pressure Rating: 300 psig (2070 kPa).
C. Source Quality Control: Factory tested to 450 psig (3105 kPa).
D. Tubes: ASTM B 743 copper, minimum 0.049 inch (1.245 mm) thick.
E. Fins: Copper, minimum 0.010 inch (0.254 mm) thick.
F. Suction and Distributor Piping: ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B) copper tube
with brazed joints.
G. Frames: Galvanized-steel channel frame, minimum 0.0625 inch (1.6 mm) thick for
flanged mounting.
H. Frames: ASTM A 666, Type 316 stainless steel, minimum 0.0625 inch (1.6 mm) thick
for flanged mounting.
I. Capacities and Characteristics: (See equipment schedule on plan)
2.04 ELECTRIC COILS
A. Flanged / slip-on assembly fabricated from sheet steel with welded joints and finished
with heat resistant paint; with integral control panel.
B. Heating element shall be made of nickel / chromium (80 / 20 % respectively) wire

embedded in magnesium oxide and sheathed in stainless steel finned tubes. Fins shall
be of the same material as that of the tube. Watt density shall not exceed 33.1 Kw/ft2 for
stainless steel.
C. End points of the U-shaped element shall be insulated with ceramic bushes and
terminated with threaded gland nuts and bushes, suitable for assembly on to element
plates.
D. Controller, installed within a weatherproof steel enclosure attached to the heating

element assembly and mounted on the unit, shall have the following, as appropriate.
Controller shall be wired for single electrical power intake. All internal wiring shall be
done with heat resistant cables.
E. Control Panel: Unit mounted with disconnecting means and overcurrent protection.
Include the following:
1. Mains isolator (4 pole, fully enclosed type) interlocked with door.
2. Power transformer for control power supply (as appropriate).
3. Contactor (DOL) with overload trip and ‘ON’ indicator, for each stage as
appropriate.
4. Primary thermal cut-out (disk type), with automatic reset.
5. Secondary thermal cut-out with manual reset.
6. Set of terminals / relays with volt free contacts for start / stop from the
temperature control system.
7. Air flow switch interlocked with contactor.
KEO/21-7387-0004 23 8216 / 3 Air Coils

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine ducts, plenums, and casings to receive air coils for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting coil performance.
B. Examine roughing-in for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections
before coil installation.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install coils level and plumb.
B. Install coils in metal ducts and casings constructed according to SMACNA's "HVAC
Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible."
C. Install stainless-steel drain pan under each cooling coil.
D. Construct drain pans according to ASHRAE 62.
E. Construct drain pans to extend beyond coil length and width and to connect to
condensate trap and drainage
F. Extend drain pan upstream and downstream from coil face.
G. Extend drain pan under coil headers and exposed supply piping.
H. Install moisture eliminators for cooling coils. Extend drain pan under moisture
eliminator.
I. Straighten bent fins on air coils.
J. Clean coils using materials and methods recommended in writing by manufacturers, and
clean inside of casings and enclosures to remove dust and debris.
K. Support coil sections on steel channel or double angle frames and secure to casings.
Arrange supports for cooling coils to avoid piercing or short circuiting drip pans. Bolt
casings to other section, or unit casings. Provide airtight seal between coil and unit
cabinets.
L. Make connections to coils, including valves, air vents, unions, and connections from drip
pans, as indicated on the drawings.
M. Locate water supply at bottom of supply header and return water connection at top to
provide self-venting and reverse return arrangement. Provide float operated automatic
air vents at high points complete with stop valve. Ensure water coils are drainable and
make drain connection at low points.
KEO/21-7387-0004 23 8216 / 4 Air Coils

N. Protect coils so fins and flanges are not damaged. Replace loose and damaged fins.
Comb out bent fins
3.03 CONNECTIONS

B. Install piping adjacent to coils to allow service and maintenance.
C. Connect water piping with unions and shutoff valves to allow coils to be disconnected
without draining piping. Control valves are specified in Division 23 Section
"Instrumentation and Control for HVAC," and other piping specialties are specified in
Division 23 Section "Hydronic Piping."
D. Connect refrigerant piping according to Division 23 Section "Refrigerant Piping."
E. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for

F. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power

1. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, operate electric
coils to confirm proper unit operation.
END OF SECTION
KEO/21-7387-0004 23 8216 / 5 Air Coils

SECTION 23 9000
APPROVED VENDOR LIST- HVAC
1.01 GENERAL

provided shall be from the manufacturer listed mentioned in this section.
B. The list of vendors mentioned in this section is indicative and the Contract
Documents shall be construed as a Vendor Neutral set of requirements. The
Contractor may propose other vendors provided that strict compliance with
Drawings, Specifications and broader Contract Documents is guaranteed by the
Contractor and validated by the Engineer.
Division 23 HVAC SYSTEM

SPEC. NO TITLE MANUFACTURER COUNTRY
23 0100 HVAC System- NOT APPLICABLE
General Description
23 0500 Common Work 1- MECHANICAL SLEEVE USA
Results for HVAC SEALS
Modular Sealing Element
- Advance Products &
Systems, Inc.
- Calpico, Inc.
- Metraflex Co.
- Pipeline Seal and
Insulator, Inc.
- Or Equal Approval
23 0513 Common Motor NOT APPLICABLE

Requirements for
HVAC Equipment
KEO/21-7387-0004 23 9000 / 1 Approved Vendor List (AVL)-HVAC

SPEC. NO TITLE MANUFACTURER COUNTRY
23 0529 Hangers and ITT Grinnel Corporation USA
Supports for HVAC Elcen Metal Products Co. USA
Piping and Weicco India
Equipment Diamond Walraven UAE/India
23 0548 Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment
23 0548 General Vibration and Weicco India
Seismic Controls Kinetics USA
Mason USA
Vibro USA / UAE
Diamond Walraven UAE/India
23 0548 Restrained Vibration Weicco India
Isolation Roof-Curb Mason Industries Inc. USA
Rails Kinetics USA
Metraflex USA
23 0548 Vibration Isolation Weicco India
Controls (Ductwork & Mason Industries USA
Pipework) Kinetics USA
Diamond Walraven UAE/India
23 0553 Identification for Focal Displays Ltd. UK
HVAC Piping and W.H. Brady and Co. USA
Equipment Seton Name Plate Co., USA
Empire Leve Mfg. Corp., USA
MSI UAE/ Qatar
23 0593 Testing, Adjusting I-TAB Qatar
and Balancing for Al Shwayer Saudi Arabia
HVAC CML UAE
Prime Technologies WLL Qatar
23 0700 HVAC Insulation
23 0700 General Insulation- SEKISUI/THERMOBREAK Australia
Ductwork and Piping Kimmco Kuwait / Qatar
Ovens Corning USA
Kingspan Corp Italy/ UK
Knauf UAE
Armacell with vapor Barrier USA/KSA
PROFLEX Indonesia
23 0800 Commissioning of NOT APPLICABLE
HVAC
23 2300 Refrigerant Piping Danfoss Electronics Inc. USA

Easton Corporation: USA
Industrial Control Div.
Emerson Electric Company: USA
Alco Controls Div.
Henry-Valve Company USA
Parker-Hannifin Corp: USA
Refrigeration and Air
Conditioning Div.
Sporlan Valve Company USA
23 3113 Metal Ducts
23 3113 Ductwork/Duct liner Nippon Steel Japan
Kawasaki Japan
Sumitomo Japan
NKK Japan
23 3113 Fire Rated Ductwork SAFE4 Fire Rated Qatar
Ductwork - Uncoated Fire
Rated Duct System
FLAMESHIELD, Fire Rated UK, Qatar/UAE
Ductwork - Uncoated Fire
Rated Duct System
Caswell Fire safe Qatar/UAE
NAFFCO UAE
23 3300 Air Duct Accessories
ALDES MIDDLE EAST UAE
Beta UAE
Ruskin Mfg. Co. USA
Safid. UAE
Trox. UK
Fire and Smoke ALDES MIDDLE EAST UAE
Dampers
Ruskin Mfg. Co. USA
Safid. UAE
Trox. UK
Turning Vanes Anemostat Products Div., USA
Dynamics Corp. of America.
Barber-Colman Co. USA
Tuttle & Bailey, Div. of USA

Interpace Corp.
Duct Access Doors AEROVAC UAE
Ruskin Mfg. Co. USA
Trox. UK
Or Equal Approval
23 3300 Flexible Ducts & Duct Safid UAE
Connectors, Duct Flowtech UAE
Flanges, etc. Dasco Kuwait
Aeroduct UAE
Ruskin MFG. Co. USA
23 3300 Insulation Adhesives Kingspan Italy / UK
and Sealants Foster Products USA
Corporation,
Bostik (Idenden) UK / Europe
CRAYCOAT UAE
23 3300 Duct Tape Flinkote Insulation USA
FEVICOL Adhesives India
ASPEN UAE
DuctLine UAE
Fosters USA
23 3300 Sound Attenuators Safid Saudi Arabia
(Ductwork) and ALDES MIDDLE EAST UAE
Acoustic Louver Flowtech UAE
Trox UK
Beta UAE

23 3413 Axial HVAC Fans S&P Spain
Greenheck USA
FlaktWoods England
Penn USA
Systemair Germany
Vent-Axia UK
23 3416 Centrifugal HVAC S&P Spain
Fans Greenheck USA
FlaktWoods England
Penn USA
Systemair Germany
Vent-Axia UK
23 3713 Diffusers, Registers, Titus USA
and Grilles, Louvers ALDES MIDDLE EAST UAE
(FZE)
Dasco Kuwait
Price USA
Safid KSA
Trox UK
23 4100 Particulate Air American Air Filter USA
Filtration JAF Malaysia
FARR USA
Camfil Sweden
Purafil USA
EMW Germany
23 6200 Packaged TRANE USA
Compressor and CARRIER USA
Condenser Units JOHNSON CONTROLS USA
LG KOREA
Daikin Japan
23 7313 INDOOR AND Daikin Japan
OUTDOOR AIR LG KOREA
HANDLING UNIT / JOHNSON CONTROLS USA
ENERGY RECOVERY SPC UK
VENTILATOR
23 8126 Split-System Air- LG KOREA
Conditioners Daikin Japan
Toshiba Japan
Mitsubishi Japan
23 8216 Air Coils Golden Bamboo Electronics USA
Co., Ltd.
Uchida Electronics Co., Ltd. USA
Lennox USA

SECTION 23 9010
WARRANTY AND SPARE PARTS LIST – HVAC
A. Subject to compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the warranty
and spare parts shall include but not limited to list below.
SPEC NO TITLE WARRANTY EXTRA MATERIAL
DIVISION 23 HVAC
- Warranty period is from taking over certificate to client; parts, labour, travel time expenses
are included.
- Bidder is to provide a schedule of spares as part of the submission and include delivery to
site.
- Routine maintenance visits as recommended by manufacturer during the course of the
defect notification period until performance certificate.
- Basic and advance training courses for FM staff are required.
- For items not mentioned in this warranty list, shall be covered under manufacturer
standard warranty.
23 0500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR Standard Manufacturers’ All spare parts
HVAC warranties (Minimum 12 required during the
months by contractor) warranty period
23 0513 COMMON MOTOR Standard Manufacturers’ All spare parts

REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC warranties (Minimum 12 required during the
EQUIPMENT months by contractor) warranty period
23 0548 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC Standard Manufacturers’ All spare parts

CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING warranties (Minimum 12 required during the
AND EQUIPMENT months by contractor) warranty period
23 0553 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC 5 YEARS All spare parts

PIPING AND EQUIPMENT required during the
warranty period
23 0593 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND Standard Manufacturers’ All spare parts

BALANCING FOR HVAC warranties (Minimum 12 required during the
including Seasonal test.
23 0700 HVAC INSULATION Standard Manufacturers’ All spare parts
warranties (Minimum 12 required during the
23 0800 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC Standard Manufacturers’ All spare parts

warranties (Minimum 12 required during the
including Seasonal test.
KEO/21-7387-0004 23 9010 / 1 Warranty and Spare Parts List - HVAC

23 2300 REFRIGERANT PIPING 5 Years All spare parts
required during the
warranty period
23 3113 METAL DUCTS 1 Year All spare parts

required during the
warranty period
23 3300 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 1 Year 1.All spare parts

required during the
warranty period.
23 3413 AXIAL HVAC FANS 3 YEARS 1.All spare parts

required during the
warranty period.
23 3416 CENTRIFUGAL HVAC FANS 3 YEARS 1.All spare parts

required during the
warranty period.
23 3713 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS 1 Year All spare parts

(DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS AND required during the
GRILLS) warranty period
23 6200 PACKAGED COMPRESSOR AND 1 Year All spare parts

CONDENSER UNITS required during the
COMPRESSOR 5 YEARS warranty period
23 7313 INDOOR AND OUTDOOR AIR 1 Year All spare parts

HANDLING UNITS / ENERGY required during the
RECOVERY VENTILATORS warranty period

23 8126 SPLIT SYSTEMS AIR 1 Year All spare parts
CONDITIONERS required during the
COMPRESSOR 5 YEARS warranty period
23 8216 AIR COILS 1 Year All spare parts

required during the
warranty period
END OF SECTION

SECTION 26 0500
COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. The contractor shall complete, commission and hand over the works in accordance with
the design intent expressed in contract documents. In general, the project comprises of
the following works. General elements of scope of work include:
1. Provision of all labour, equipment and materials required to complete the works
according to the Design Intent. Provision means supply, installation, test,
commission and put to operation.
2. Additional hardware, incidentals and any other work necessary for completion of
the works and safe, correct operation of each system, whether such item or work
is detailed in the specifications and or on the drawings or not.
3. Verification of existing conditions on site prior to tendering. Arranging with and
paying the ADDC and the Telecom service provider authorities to re-route their
services should such services exist on site.
4. Temporary power supplies for construction purposes for the duration of the
works.
5. Arranging for and coordination of installation of new permanent supplies from
ADDC, including submission of necessary documents and securing all approvals
having relevance.
6. Arranging for and carrying out necessary approvals with the Telecom. Service
Provider for the telephone system.
7. Arranging for and carrying out necessary approvals with the Abu Dhabi Civil
Defense for the fire alarm system and emergency lighting system.
8. Preparation of shop / construction / installation drawings for approval.
9. Builder's work, ducts, inserts and sleeves required for the works
10. On-site coordination with all other services and trades, liaison with members of
the professional team, attendance on meetings as required.
11. Testing, commissioning and certification that the work has been completed and
inspected in accordance with the requirements of the relevant Regulations.
12. “As Built” drawings, “Operation and Maintenance Manuals” and other project-
specific record documents.
13. Training of the Employer’s staff in the operation of the systems installed.
14. Defects Liability: refer to contract conditions specified elsewhere.
15. Maintenance during the Defect Liability Period: refer to contract conditions
specified elsewhere.
16. Spare parts: refer to contract conditions specified elsewhere.
B. Electrical System
KEO/21-7387-0004 26 0500 / 1 Common Requirements For Electrical Installations

1. Containment system (spaces, wire ways, cable ducts, ladders, trays, conduits
etc.) for Electrical system.
2. Electrical installations including LV (400 Volts) distribution system, cabling and
equipment, switchgear, switchboards, distribution boards, motor control centers,
earthing system etc.
a. Provision of final sub-circuits and electrical services such as power and
lighting.
b. Small power, general power outlets and equipment outlets.
c. Provision of internal, external, Exit lighting.
3. Electrical services for other trades. Power and relevant controls for air
conditioning, ventilation, plumbing and auxiliary equipment as kitchen equipment,
electric water heaters, etc. Motors, starters, controls and the like, electrically
operated doors, interlocks between electric doors and the fire alarm system
where required. Dampers and other devices operated by signals from fire alarm
system. (The supply and final connections of mechanical equipment is specified
in Divisions 21, 22, 23 and 25).
4. Earthing and Lightning Protection.
5. Lighting and Lighting Controls. Control system for internal and external lighting.
6. Power will be provided to each retail space and will be terminated in the isolator
inside the retail space.
C. Communications, Electronic Safety and Security, and Integrated Automation.

1. Containment system (spaces, wire ways, cable ducts, ladders, trays, conduits
etc.) for Communications, Electronic Safety and Security, and Integrated
Automation systems.
2. Fire Detection and Alarm
3. Telecommunications infrastructure &IT
4. Smart Home system
5. All systems: The Contractor shall finalize the design (to account for
manufacturer-specific products) based on KEO Specifications and Tender
Drawings, for approval of the KEO design engineer responsible for this project.
Work on site or procurement may not start without this approval. The final design
shall conform to the design intent described in all Tender Documents.
6. The contractor to appoint a system coordinator/integrator (amongst all the ELV
suppliers/installers) to converge all IT and ELV systems on to one IP/LAN
network
D. Exact location of all equipment and components to be approved on site by the Engineer.
E. Contractor shall include the cost of the credits required as per the Estidama PBRS
credits. The requirement of commissioning as per Estidama shall also be included in the
scope of the work. Please refer the sustainability/Estidama specification for details.
1.02 GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF THE ELECTRICAL SYSTEM.
A. The electrical system comprises the following subsystems

1. Electrical power distribution
2. Small power installations
3. Lightning protection and earthing.
4. Internal and external lighting.
5. Lighting control systems.

6. Utility metering systems.
B. Earthing system will be provided for 0.4kV system and Telecommunication system.
Lightning protection system will cover the entire project. Transient voltage surge
suppressors will be provided.
C. Electricity metering system shall be provided as per ADDC specification.
D. Lighting Systems
1. Normal Power Lighting. The normal power lighting system shall provide lighting
throughout the building when it is in the normal operation mode.
2. Lighting in all common areas, carpark, façade, landscape and feature lights will
be controlled as indicated in the drawings.
3. Electricity metering system shall be provided as per ADDC/ADWEA specification.
The electricity and water meter shall be installed by contractor in accordance with
ADDC regulations.
1.03 GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF COMMUNICATIONS, ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND

SECURITY AND INTEGRATED AUTOMATION.
A. Fire Detection and Alarm

1. Fire Detection and Alarm panels shall be an intelligent addressable system.
B. Telecommunications infrastructure
1. The infrastructure shall be provided within the building according to the function
of the building to provide telecom services, all as per the local Service provider
guidelines.
2. Structured Cabling System (SCS) will be used within the building.
C. Telecom & IT
1. Townhouses are served directly from Local telecom service provider network.
1.04 DESIGN CONDITIONS
A. Electrical Supply
1. ADDC compliant power supplies - 3 phase, 4 wire, 400 V, 50 Hertz of adequate
capacity and having the following tolerances:
a. Voltage +10% and -6%
b. Frequency +/- 0.1 %
c. Neutral solidly earthed at transformer location
B. Climatic Condition
1. The climate in Abu Dhabi in the summer months is hot and humid and a humidity
of 100% at 30ºC has been recorded.
2. Violent sand and dust storms of several hours duration occur and even on
comparatively still days, fine dust is carried in suspension in the atmosphere.
3. All apparatus and equipment shall, therefore be so designed and constructed
that they operate satisfactorily and without any deleterious effect for prolonged
and continuous periods in the conditions stated above and at the following
ambient temperature conditions:
a. Maximum sun radiation temperature in summer - 84 ºC

b. Maximum ambient temperature in summer - 52 ºC
c. Average max. ambient temperature in summer - 45 ºC
d. Minimum ambient temperature in winter - 0 ºC
e. The altitude of Abu Dhabi may be taken as sea level.
4. The temperature quoted above make no allowance for heat generated from
equipment itself or from any other equipment in the vicinity.
5. The capacity and ratings of all electrical equipment and materials given are,
unless otherwise indicated, for Abu Dhabi climatic conditions. Provide the basis
of the derating factors applied in each case.
6. Where specific sizes are indicated e.g. cable sizes, due allowances have been
made in the design for the climatic conditions of Abu Dhabi and derating has
been applied.
7. Where no ratings or sizes are indicated for components and other accessories,
supply equipment, which will give trouble free service in the ambient conditions,
stated above.
C. Regulation, Codes and Standards

1. Design, manufacturing, erection and testing of all system equipment shall
conform to the following:
a. ADDC - General Specifications for Electrical Installations
b. The Electricity Wiring Regulations including amendments. issued by: the
Regulations and Supervision Bureau for the water, Wastewater and
Electricity sector in the Emirate of Abu Dhabi. Abu Dhabi Electricity Wiring
Regulations, Third Edition, March 2014.
c. BS7671: 2008 Requirements for Electrical Installations by the Institute of
Electrical Engineers, 17th edition and its Amendments (IEE Wiring
Regulations)
d. BS EN 61439 or IEC 439 - Electrical Switchboards
e. Recommendations of other relevant British and European Standard
Specifications, the International Electro-technical Commission (IEC),
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL).
f. Lighting related recommendations and standards of EN12464, IESNA and
CIBSE.
g. ANSI / EIA / TIA Telecommunications Standards, Etisalat/DU regulations
for telephone installations.
h. International Organization for Standards (ISO) Certification.
i. Etisalat/Du Design guidelines for Telecommunication system.
j. Lighting related recommendations and standards of Emergency lighting in
accordance with NFPA 101 section 7.8
k. BS62305-:2011: Protection Against Lightning
l. Requirements of Abu Dhabi Civil Defense.
m. NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm Code, 2013Edition
n. NFPA 101 Life Safety Code 2015 Edition
o. UAE Fire & Life Safety Code of Practice 2017
p. DMA Lighting Specification
q. Civil Aviation Regulations
r. ESTIDAMA Pearl Building Rating System
2. All materials and equipment shall be the best of their respective kind. The
Contractor shall ensure that each proposed category of equipment or material
shall be from approved manufacturers who would assume single-source
responsibility of the product.

1.05 DELEGATED DESIGN RESPONSIBILITY
A. Notwithstanding the drawings and other information provided to the contractor, the
contractor shall be fully responsible for the final design, detailing of the works described
herein, including (without limitation) the comprehensive engineering analysis by a
qualified professional engineer, and shall provide a complete, and secure installation,
which shall meet the specified performance and design requirements indicated and
which shall be fit for their intended purpose. The contractor indemnifies the Employer
and Design Consultant from all claims, costs and expenses arising from any loss or
damage in connection with any error in or failure of the contractor’s designed portion of
the Works.
1. Fire alarm and voice evacuation system
2. Security systems
3. Lighting control system
4. Lightning Protection System and Risk Assessment.
5. Information Communication & Technology (ICT) Systems.
6. Energy Metering and Monitoring System.
B. Prequalification of Manufacturers & Suppliers of the specialist systems and their

products:
1. The proposed manufacturer(s) must hold a quality system certificate such as
ISO, Key Mark or equivalent, for his manufacturing assembly process and quality
control.
2. The equipment should have at least 10 years of life expectancy.
3. All the main equipment should be from a manufacturer with appropriate
standards compliance and certification from the country of origin.
4. The supplier of the equipment must be an approved agent or representative of
the manufacturer in the country.
5. The supplier should be an approved agent for all the installed equipment.
6. The supplier should be an established company of at least five years.
7. The supplier must be able to fully support any warrantees associated with the
equipment and the complete installation undertaken by them.
8. The supplier must be capable of providing and supporting any maintenance
activities associated with the equipment by trained personnel.
9. The supplier must carry a stock of critical parts in the event of breakdown and
must be able to supply consumables under any planned maintenance schedules
within a maximum agreed time.
10. The supplier must be able to provide training to any nominated third party
operators using the equipment.
A. Selection and Erection of Equipment.

1. The contractor shall have available to their personnel the standards, codes, rules
and regulations referred to by name in the Specifications bearing in mind that the
final responsibility for the correct selection and erection of equipment rests with
the contractor.
2. Conformity of equipment and material with the relevant standards may be
attested by:
a. an official conformity mark granted by the standards organization
concerned, or

b. a certificate of conformity issued by an internationally recognized
laboratory, or
c. a declaration of conformity from the manufacturer.
3. External influences:
a. Electrical installations should be selected, erected, located and /or further
protected mechanically against damage from external influences based
on IEC-364, IEE Wiring Regulations and applicable local standards, such
as ingress of water, humidity, dust, rust, heat, fire, atmospheric corrosion,
wind, solar radiation, vibration and mechanical stress.
b. Minimum degree of protection provided by an enclosure (IP code) shall be
as follows, unless otherwise indicated more stringently elsewhere in the
Documents:
c. IP65 for wet area and all pump rooms.
d. IP65 for outdoor installations.
e. Hazardous areas (where applicable) include the Chemical & chlorination
locations in the Facility.
B. Single-Source Responsibility:
1. Ensure that each category of selected material or equipment shall be of a
particular range of one manufacturer who would take full responsibility of the
product.
C. Certificate of Origin:
1. Provide certificate of origin along with the packing list on delivery of material and
equipment.
1.07 CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATION AND QUALITY OF STAFF/PERSONNEL
A. Electrical contractor executing this work shall be to the classifications required by ADDC
and shall carry a valid license. Electrical Contractor shall have minimum 10 years
experience in the installation of similar size and complexity systems.
B. The electrical services installation shall be carried out in a professional manner by

experienced and qualified personnel.
C. Prior to the commencement of work, the Contractor shall notify of his intended site
staffing levels.
D. Contractor shall appoint minimum three Graduate Electrical Engineers for the site work,
(at least one of them with a certified Engineer license form ADDC) with minimum 15
years experience in similar installations.
E. The name, qualifications and experience of the nominated engineers shall be submitted
to the Engineer for approval within 15 days of the receipt of the order to commence the
works.
F. An Electrical Foreman of 15 years experience in similar projects should be full time

available on site for direct follow up and implementation of the electrical works.
G. Qualified and Experienced Electricians shall be available on site to carry out the works
in accordance with the Project program. Cable jointers and terminators engaged on site
shall be certified by ADDC.

1.08 SUBMITTALS:
A. Preparation of Shop Drawings:

1. Tender drawings indicate general layout of the requirements of respective
electrical systems included. Co-ordinate with the drawings of all other trades
(Architectural, Structural, Mechanical, HVAC etc.) and investigate prevailing site
situation prior to commencement of work, taking into consideration the following:
a. The indication and/or description of any item on the drawings or in the
specification, unless otherwise specifically stated, imply an instruction to
supply and fix such items.
b. Notes on drawings referring to individual items of work take precedence
over the Specification.
c. Drawings show the general run of cables, raceways, etc. and the
approximate location of equipment and utilities; symbols and schematic
diagrams are of no dimensional significance.
2. Obtain dimensions not shown on, or which cannot be determined from Drawings.
Do not scale drawings to obtain locations.
3. Notify of conflicting requirements. Where departures from the drawings are
deemed necessary, details of such departure and reasons thereupon shall be
submitted for approval.
4. No such departure shall be made without prior written approval.
5. Prepare shop drawings showing all installation details including but not in a way
of limitation, electric service entrance ducts and manholes, exact location of
electrical equipment and outlets (power, light, communication and signal) cable
runs, trenches, electrical equipment mounting details Switch Boards, MCCs,
DBs, Control Panels, Variable Frequency Drives, Generators, Lights, cables and
cable trays, earthing, etc.) all in accordance with the relevant national and
international standards, regulations and codes and to the recommendations of
the manufacturer.
6. Prepare schedule of points of distribution boards. Extent of information and
circuit details required shall be to the satisfaction of the Engineer and to
Engineer’s satisfaction.
7. Ensure that all builders work details for various electrical equipment, which are
needed early in the construction program, are well established in the early stages
of construction. This includes, but not in a way of limitations, ADDC electric
service ducts and manholes, substation civil details make direct contact with the
ADDC and obtain their approval, generators and auxiliary services layout,
switchgears, cable routes, telephone entrance ducts and telephone exchange,
data communication equipment and others as indicated in the specifications and
drawings.
8. The contractor shall accept full functional responsibility and compliance of all
electrical, communications and fire systems to the regulations, specifications and
standards stipulated in this specification. In cases of conflict between
requirements of local authorities and specified International Standards, the
former shall have Precedence, unless otherwise specified more stringent. The
contractor should bring in due course to the attention of the Engineer any
conflicts.
B. Progress Drawings
1. The contractor shall provide one full set of shop drawings and keep it at the job
throughout the construction period for purpose of recording any changes whether
additions, deletions or relocation resulting thereof from any co-ordination VO’s,
RFI’s and/or site instructions. This set of drawings will be the basis upon which
the contractor will prepare the As-built Drawings.
C. As-built Drawings
1. Upon completion of each facility under this contract, the contractor shall prepare
and furnish as-built drawings. The as-built drawings shall be a record of the
construction as installed and completed by the contractor. They shall include all
the information shown on the contract set of drawings and all other related
drawings, modifications, or changes from those drawings, however minor, which
were incorporated in the work, including all additional work not appearing on the
contract drawings, and all changes that are made after any final inspection of the
contract work. In the event the contractor performed additional work, which
changes the as-built conditions of the facility after submission of the final as-built
drawings, the contractor shall furnish revised and/or additional drawings and
drawing files as required to support final as-built condition.
2. The contractor shall certify and label all systems at the completion of the
installation project, and after any modifications are made to an existing system.
All labeling shall be plastic or metal tags that will withstand fading and/or
corrosion. Labels shall be white, ¾” high by length suitable to have address
printed with ½” black lettering. All labels shall be mechanically fastened to
surface adjacent to device with stainless steel screws or pop rivets. Glue or
plastic strip labels neither shall be used nor will it be accepted.
1.10 WARNING SIGNS, NOTICES AND LABEL
A. Provide warning signs, as well as prohibitions mandatory and safety signs for giving
safety information in accordance with BS 5378 Part 1: 1980and identify materials and
equipment and circuits so marked for easy recognition in a durable and lasting manner
as required by the BS7671: 2008 Requirements for Electrical Installations.
B. The Contractor shall certify and label all systems at the completion of the installation
project. All labeling shall be plastic or metal tags that will withstand fading and/or
corrosion. Labels shall be white, suitable to be printed with black lettering. All labels
shall be mechanically fastened to surface adjacent to device with stainless steel screws
or pop rivets. Glue or plastic strip labels neither shall be used nor will be accepted.
1.11 TESTING
A. General
1. The manufacturers’ technical representative shall supervise testing and
commissioning of equipment and services of a specialized nature. A visual
inspection of the installation should be made to ensure all equipment and
materials comply with the relevant standards and regulations. A checklist for
initial inspection should include those items indicated in the BS7671:2008
Requirements for Electrical Installations.
2. During erection and/or completion, the electrical installation shall be tested
before it is connected to the power supply. Sequence of test and testing
methods shall be as stipulated in the BS 7671.
3. Testing and commissioning of Electrical Systems and equipment’s shall be done
as per applicable code and standards

a. MDB/SMDB/MCC- IEC 439-1
1.12 SPARE PARTS
A. Refer to section 26 5910 - Warranty and Extra Material List.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Refer to individual specification sections for detailed requirements.
B. Prior to placing order for any equipment or material, the contractor shall submit
comprehensive documentation comprising working drawings, catalogues and
descriptive literature of components, maintenance manuals, samples etc. for review and
acceptance.
C. Review and acceptance of the Engineer’s Representative does not relieve the
Contractor from his contractual obligations for deviations from the requirements of the
Contract Documents.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS
A. General: Sequence, co-ordinate, and integrate the various elements of electrical

systems, materials, and equipment. Comply with the following requirements:
1. Co-ordinate electrical systems, equipment, and materials installation with other
building components. Proposed location of all equipment cable routes, fittings,
ducts, outlets etc. shown on the drawings is only indicative. Exact location shall
be determined at site during construction.
2. Verify all dimensions by field measurements.
3. Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in other building components during
progress of construction, to allow for electrical installations.
4. Co-ordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be set
in poured-in-place concrete and other structural components, as they are
constructed.
5. Sequence, co-ordinate, and integrate installations of electrical materials and
equipment for efficient flow of the Work. Give particular attention to large
equipment requiring positioning prior to closing the building.
6. Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install systems,
materials, and equipment to provide the maximum headroom possible.
7. Co-ordinate connection of electrical systems with exterior underground and
overhead utilities and services. Comply with requirements of ADDC regulations.
Provide required sleeves for ADDC – 22KV cables. Provide earthing for
transformers to ADDC requirements. The contractor shall include in his price for
such works.

8. Install systems, materials, and equipment to conform with approved submittal
data, including co-ordination drawings, to greatest extent possible. Conform to
arrangements indicated by the Contract Documents, recognizing that portions of
the Work are shown only in diagrammatic form. Where co-ordination
requirements conflict with individual system requirements, refer conflict to
Engineer.
9. Install systems, materials, and equipment level and plumb, parallel and
perpendicular to other building systems and components, where installed
exposed in finished spaces.
10. Install electrical equipment to facilitate servicing, maintenance, and repair or
replacement of equipment components. As much as practical, connect
equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum of interference with other
installations.
11. Install systems, materials, and equipment giving right-of-way priority to systems
required to be installed at a specified slope.
3.02 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS
A. Electrical penetrations occur when raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, or busways
penetrate concrete slabs, concrete or masonry walls, or fire-rated floor and wall
assemblies.
B. Concrete Slabs and Walls: Install sleeves for penetrations unless core-drilled holes or
formed openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of slabs and walls.
C. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.
D. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall
assemblies unless openings compatible with fire stop system used are fabricated during
construction of floor or wall.
E. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls.
F. Extend sleeves installed in floors 50 mm above finished floor level.
G. Size pipe sleeves to provide 6.4-mm annular clear space between sleeve and raceway
or cable, unless indicated otherwise.
H. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry
1. Promptly pack grout solidly between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool
exposed surfaces smooth; protect grout while curing.
I. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between
sleeve and raceway or cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location
of joint. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants".
J. Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions,

ceilings, and floors at raceway and cable penetrations. Install sleeves and seal raceway
and cable penetration sleeves with fire stop materials. Comply with requirements in
Section 7 "Penetration Fire stopping."

K. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways and cables with
flexible boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.
L. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using steel pipe sleeves

and watertight mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 25-mm annular
clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing watertight mechanical sleeve seals.
M. Underground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Install cast-iron pipe sleeves. Size sleeves to

allow for 25-mm annular clear space between raceway or cable and sleeve for installing
watertight mechanical sleeve seals.
3.03 WATER TIGHT SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION
A. Install to seal exterior wall penetrations.
B. Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway
or cable material and size. Position raceway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemble
mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between raceway or cable and
sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand
and make watertight seal.
3.04 FIRESTOPPING
A. Apply fire stopping to penetrations of fire-related floor and wall assemblies for electrical
installations to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly. Fire stopping materials
and installation requirements are specified in Division 07 Section “Penetration Fire
stopping.
3.05 MAINTENANCE
A. Maintenance Service
1. Furnish complete service and maintenance of the complete electrical system and
components during the construction contract and warranty & maintenance
period. Minimum of 12 months taking over certificate to the client and as
specified in the Warranty and Extra Material List section 26 5910.
2. Contractor shall as precautionary and preventive measures list all anticipated
defects and notify the owner. This shall include the cleaning, adjusting and
maintaining of all equipment.
3. In case of failure of any of the systems included, the contractor shall rectify and
do necessary work. He shall show deep diligence to any defect within 24 hours.
4. The contractor shall rectify all faults observed and repair or replace parts that
served their expected service life. He shall use parts produced by the
manufacturer of the original equipment.
5. The contractor shall maintain in Abu Dhabi an adequate stock of replacement
parts for emergency purpose, and shall have qualified personnel available for the
maintenance work without loss of time.
6. The maintenance work shall not be assigned or transferred to any subcontractor
without the written approval of the Owner.
7. Train and provide periodical instruction to the Owner’s operating/ maintenance
staff according to an approved logical program.

8. Contractor shall be required to attend to any emergency call during the
maintenance period, within 24 hours of such call or as specified elsewhere in the
contract documents.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 26 0519
LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
PART 1 - GENERAL

1. Building wires and cables rated 1000 V and less.
2. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 1000 V and less.
3. Cable Glands, Cable Sealing Compounds and Cable Markers
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings and Product Data:

1. Submit full technical details including cable sizing calculations and catalogue
2. Including information of each type of cable or wire proposed approval before
ordering
3. Submit copy of test certificates from the manufacturer or an independent testing
authority confirming that cables comply with the Specifications
4. Submit certificate of origin of cables.
5. Submit exact route of the cable runs and relevant items in the shop drawings,
including fixing details and termination details.
A. Validate suitability of the size of cables selected to be used for the selected electric
energy-operating equipment. Refer to the technical tables of the cables available from
the approved manufacturer, with due consideration to the following parameters:
1. Type of cable and wire
2. Ambient conditions
3. Method of installation
4. The disposition of each cable relative to other cables
5. Fault power level
6. Protective device ratings
B. Voltage drop at the final point of utilization shall not exceed as in local power supply
authorities regulation and measured from the main electric service of the installations.
C. Voltage drop and current ratings shall be calculated according to local power supply
Authorities Regulations or BS 7671 and IEE regulation, whichever is more stringent.
KEO/21-7387-0004 26 0519 / 1 Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors And Cables

D. All cables and wires shall be suitable for installation and continuous service in the
ambient conditions described in Division 26, “Common Work Results for Electrical”, and
shall be manufactured to ISO 9000 or equivalent.
E. Cable routes and equipment power ratings indicated on the Project Drawings are for
guidance for tendering purposes. The Contractor shall determine exact cable lengths
from site measurements and calculate cable size from the power ratings of the actual
equipment being proposed. The Contractor shall be responsible for any increase in
costs or design work associated with proposed equipment, which has different electrical
characteristics than the equipment on which the design was based.
F. Cables selected shall be from manufacturers whose product has been in satisfactory
use in similar services and environments. Substantiate with certification.
G. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Acceptable to authorities having

jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
1.04 COORDINATION
A. Set sleeves in cast-in-place concrete, masonry walls, and other structural components
as they are constructed.
1.05 RELATED STANDARDS
A. ADDC Standard Technical Specification for Electric Works – Cable & Accessories.
B. Cables and wires shall comply with the following standards as appropriate:
1. BS 1442 Galvanized mild steel wire for armouring cables
2. BS 2484 Straight concrete clay ware covers
3. BS 2897 Aluminum strip armour for cables
4. BS 3506 Unplasticised PVC pipe for industrial purposes
5. BS 4066 (IEC 332) Tests on electric cables under fire conditions
6. BS 4660 Unplasticised polyvinyl chloride (UPVC) pipes and plastic
fittings of nominal sizes 100 and 150 for below ground level.
7. BS 5308 Instrumentation cables.
8. BS 5467 (IEC 502) Cables with thermosetting Insulation for electricity supply for
voltages of up to and including 600/1000 V.
9. BS 6004 (IEC 227) PVC insulated cables (non-armoured) for electrical power
10. BS 6007 Rubber insulated cables for electric power and lighting
11. BS 6207 (IEC 245) Mineral insulated cables.
12. BS 6234 Polythene insulation and sheath for cables.
13. BS 6346 PVC insulated cables for electrical supply.
14. BS 6360 (IEC 228) Copper conductors for cables.
15. BS 6500 (IEC 227) Insulated flexible cords.
16. BS 6746 PVC Insulation and sheath of electric cables
17. BS 6746C Colour chart for insulation and sheath of electric cables
18. BS 6899 Rubber insulation and sheath of electric cables
19. BS 7671 Requirements for electrical installations
20. ISO 9000 Quality management and assurance standards.
21. BS EN 29453 Soft solder alloys-chemical composition and forms

22. BS 6724 Electric cables. Thermosetting insulated, armoured cables
for voltages of 600/1000 V and 1900/3300 V, having low
emission of smoke and corrosive gases when affected by
fire
23. BS 7211 Electric cables. Thermosetting insulated, non-armoured
cables for voltages up to and including 450/750 V, for
electric power, lighting and internal wiring, and having low
emission of smoke and corrosive gases when affected by
fire
C. Cable terminations shall comply with the following specifications:

1. BS 1858 Bitumen based compounds for electrical purposes
2. BS 4579 Performance of mechanical and compression Joints in
electric cable and wire connectors
3. BS 6121 Mechanical cable glands for elastomer and plastic Insulated
cables
4. BS 6910 Cold pour resin compound and heat shrink cable joints in
the voltage range up to 1000 V AC and 1500 V DC
1.06 WARRANTY AND SERVICES

B All components and their installations shall be free from defects. Any defective
material or workmanship and any resulting damage to work of other trades shall be
replaced or repaired as directed during the Warranty Period at the contactors
expense. Comply with General Conditions, agreeing to repair or replace any
components that have failed within the warranty period.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS

provided shall be from the manufacturer listed in the Approved Vendors List (AVL).
2.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS FOR ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A. The Contractor shall be aware of the need to supply and install all wire and cables for
this Contract, which are most suitable for the special environmental conditions prevailing
in country.
B. All conductors shall have good fatigue resistance and not be subject to breaks due to
nicks or cuts when terminating.
2.03 CABLES
A. Unless otherwise specified, cables and wires of the following specified voltage ratings
shall be used as indicated.
1. 600/1000 V rated cables: Main and sub-main distribution panels, motor control
centres, circuits serving process equipment
2. 450/750 V rated cables: Final sub-circuit supplies for lighting, socket outlets, etc.
3. 300/500 V rated cables: Instrumentation
4. 250 V rated cables: Extra low voltage wiring, communication circuits where the
maximum voltage is 50 V.
B. General:
1. Conductors shall be high conductivity copper, to BS EN 60228 unless otherwise
indicated.
2. Copper conductors shall be stranded Class 2 for sections 2.5mm2 and over.
3. Signal control cables shall have solid conductors.
4. Flexible cords shall have fine stranded Class 5 conductors.
5. Conductor’s sizes shall be metric. Conductors with cross sectional areas smaller
than those specified will not be accepted.
6. The current carrying capacity of conductors has been determined in accordance
with the specified regulations, the specified type of insulation and the expected
conditions of installation. No change will be accepted in the specified type of
insulation, unless warranted by special conditions and approved by the Engineer.
7. Insulation for each conductor shall be colour coded or otherwise identified as
required by the regulations. Colour coding shall be maintained throughout the
installation.
8. All wiring from the light fittings to light points shall be by heat resistant cable.
9. All wiring from hard wired equipment from spur outlets including FCUs and
kitchen equipment shall be wired with heat resistant cable.
10. Cables selected shall be from manufacturers whose product has been in
satisfactory use in similar services and environments. Substantiate with
certification.
11. Sub-main cables shall be XLPE/SWA/PVC type whilst final circuits shall
generally be PVC sheathed single core cables in trunking and conduits.
12. All cables that are required for life safety systems shall be fire proof. Fire rating
shall be 2 hours at 750 degree C or local Civil Defence requirements, whichever
is the most onerous.
13. Fire rated cables shall be used for all equipment related to life safety including
but not limited to the following.
a. Fire detection and alarm systems, as applicable
14. XLPE/SWA/PVC cables shall be used for underground applications.
15. All electrical cables should be FM global group 1, UL 910 plenum rated or flame
spread which doesn’t exceed 1.5 m when tested in accordance with NFPA 262.
C. XLPE Insulated LSF Sheathed (XLPE/LSF) Cable:

1. To BS 5467, 600/1000V rated, or to BS 6004, 300/500 V rated
2. Flat twin and three core cable shall be to BS 6004 and incorporate an earth
conductor placed between the red and black cores for two core cable and
between the yellow and blue cores for three core cable
3. Conductor: annealed high conductivity copper, stranded, shaped and laid in an
approved manner
4. LSF for sheath and insulation: to BS 7211.
D. Single core PVC Insulated Wires:

1. To BS 6004, 450/750 V rated, with high conductivity copper conductors and PVC
compound insulation. Colour coding shall be in accordance with table 51 A of BS
7671
2. Wires shall be continuous from outlet to outlet and no splice shall be made
except within outlet and junction boxes. A separate neutral wire shall be provided
for each circuit. Wires shall be left sufficiently long enough (minimum 150 mm) to
permit making final connections.
E. Mineral Insulated Cable:

1. To BS 6207: Part 1, 600/1000 V rated
2. Cable shall be comprised of a pressure packed magnesium oxide insulation
contained within a continuous soft ductile copper sheath and copper conductors
embedded in the dielectric in standard formation
3. Cable termination kit shall be comprised of conductor insulation of neoprene
sleeving retained by cone shaped beads beneath a fibre sealing disc. Each
conductor shall be identified with regard to phase etc, by means of sleeving
placed over the neoprene insulation
4. Cable seals shall be comprised of screw-in-pot type seals, with brass ring glands
designed to accommodate the pot seal.
F. Heat Resistant and High Temperature cable:

1. To BS 6500, and BS 6004 300/500 V rated, designated EPR (ethylene
polypropylene rubber) insulated HOFR sheathed, 85 °C or EPR insulated OFR
sheathed, 60 °C. Conductor(s) shall be flexible class 5 tinned copper to BS 6360.
Insulation shall be type GP.1 to BS 6899. Outer sheath shall be HOFR (heat, oil,
fume resistant) or OFR (oil and fume resistant) sheath type RS3 to BS 6899 and
flame retardant to BS 4066 Part 1, temperature rating 60 ° or 85 °C
2. High temperature cable shall be to BS 6500 or BS 6007, designated 300/500 V
grade silicone insulated glass braided, 180 °C. Conductors shall be flexible class
5 tinned copper to BS 6360. Insulation shall be silicone rubber type EI 2 to BS
6899. Outer sheath shall be treated glass fibre braid, temperature rating 180 °C.
3. Heat resistant PVC flexible cables suitable for 105 deg C shall be third pary
approved.
G. Flexible Cable:
1. To BS 6007, and BS 6500, rated in accordance with manufacturer’s tables.
Flexible cables subject to excessive heat shall be insulated.
H. 600/1000V rated XLPE Insulated Cable:

1. To BS 6724, 600/1000V rated, designated XLPE/SWA/LSF for armoured
multicore cable.
2. Conductors: plain annealed copper to BS EN 60228
3. Cable shall be comprised of plain copper, stranded circular conductors insulated
with an adequate thickness of extruded cross linked polyethylene (XLPE)
4. Conductors shall be laid up together and warmed circular with suitable performed
fillers and warnings, bound with tape and covered with an extruded LSF sheath.
5. Armoured multicore cable shall have steel wire armouring and extruded sheath of
black LSF.
6. Armoured single core cable shall have aluminium wire armouring and extruded
sheath of LSF.
7. Outer sheath of single core cables shall be as per 6724.

8. Cable shall be terminated with compression glands as specified below, giving
adequate mechanical support by locking on the armour and ensuring high earth
continuity.
I. Fire Resistant Cable – General

1. Power supply cables feeding power to equipment such as lifts and other lift
safety equipment shall be fire rated cables.
2. Fire resistant cables shall be used for all equipment related to life safety including
but not limited to the following:
a. Emergency lighting circuits (Central Battery System).
b. Elevators.
c. Fire Pump
d. Fire Alarm Control Panel.
e. Complete Fire Alarm Cabling.
f. Voice evacuation system
J. Fire Resistant Cables: (Single core up to 25mm²)

1. Shall be LSOH rated for 450/750V to BS7846.
2. The cable shall meet categories CWZ of BS6387 and shall pass the test
requirements of IEC331. The cable shall comply with BS EN 50268-2 on smoke
emissions and has acid gas emissions <0.5% when tested to BS6425-1.
3. Cable shall be flame retardant to IEC 60332-1-2 and reduced flame propagation
to IEC 60332-3-24 category C.
4. The cables shall have the approvals of British Approvals Service for Cables
(BASEC) approved to BS7629 and Loss Prevention Certification Board (LPCB)
approved to BS6387, category CWZ and BS7629.
5. Shall have annealed copper conductors complying BS EN 60228
6. Cable shall be suitable for wiring in conduit or in trunking. All cables shall be
installed in accordance with the appropriate regulations, including IEE or any
other national legislation.
7. Shall be suitable for continuous operation at temperatures up to 90ºC.
K. Fire Resistant Cables (Multi-Core Up to 400mm²)

1. Fire resistant cable shall maintain circuit integrity during a fire.
2. Shall be available in multi-core designs from 1.0mm2 to 400mm2 in 2, 3, and 4
Core. Shall be Fire resistant to IEC331 and comply with BS6387 categories
CWZ. Shall be approved by Loss Prevention Certification to BS 6387, categories
CWZ.
3. Shall be suitable for use to satisfy the requirements of the BS 9999 for the
operation of equipment in the event of fire. Shall be a low smoke zero halogen
(LSOH®) cable, which produces very low quantities of smoke, and virtually no
acidic gas, satisfying BS7846.
4. Armored cable that is highly resistant to third party damage. Easy handling and
installation so similar in design to familiar armored cable, no special installation
skills are required. Shall be rated for 600/1000V and shall be surge resistant.
5. The cable shall meet the requirements of IEC331 and BS6387 categories CWZ.
When the complete cable is tested in accordance with BS7846. It shall meet the
minimum light transmittance requirements as stated in BS6724 or BS EN 50268-
2. When tested in accordance with BS EN 50267-1, all non-metallic components
shall give a level of HCI not greater than 0.5%.
6. Shall meet the approval of British Approval Service for Cables (BASEC)
approved to BS7846.
7. LPCB approved to BS6387, categories CWZ for cables up to 20 mm overall
diameter.
8. Additional tests passed and witnessed by recognized third parties e.g.Lloyd’s
Register.
9. Shall be plain copper stranded circular conductor complying with BS EN 60228.
10. Insulation – Mica/Glass Fire Resistant tape covered by an extruded cross-linked
insulation complying with BS7655 type GP8 or type GP6, operating temperature
90ºC.
11. Cores identified as follows:
a. Core black, red
b. Core red, yellow, blue
c. Core red, yellow, blue, black
12. Cores are laid up with fillers and binder tape as appropriate.
13. Bedding – Extruded layer of LSOH® bedding compound.
14. Armour – Single layer of galvanized steel wires.
15. Outer Sheath – extruded LSOH® sheath complying with BS7655 type LTS 1.
16. All cables shall be installed in accordance with the appropriate regulations
including IEE Wiring Regulations or any other national regulations.
L. Cable Glands
1. Cable glands shall be used for terminating cables to switch gear, switch boards,
motor control centres, motors and other equipment
2. They shall be brass compression glands and comply with the relevant part of BS
6121, except for MICC cables, which shall comply with BS 6207 Part 2.
3. Glands for armoured or screened cables shall have suitable clamps
4. External compression glands shall have close fitting PVC shrouds
5. earthing for armouring and metallic sheaths: suitable brass or copper clamps,
and copper strip conductor in accordance with local power authority
requirements, and not less than 2.5 sq. mm
M. Cable Sealing Compounds

1. Shall: be tropical grade to BS 1858 or BS 6910 and approved by
2. Cable manufacturer, of an oil-resisting compound where the difference in level
between cable ends exceeds 6 m.
N. Cleats: shall be approved claw type cast aluminium, gunmetal, plastic or brass of
approved type, two bolts fixing for cables greater than 50 mm diameter.
O. Cable Markers:
1. Shall be precast concrete, minimum size 300 x 300 mm x 100 mm deep
2. The markers shall be engraved “HV CABLE”, “ELECTRIC CABLE”, “ELV
CABLE”, “EARTH PIT” or “CABLE JOINT”, as applicable cable marker
construction details and engravings shall be as per local power authority
regulations.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Installing cables:

1. Pull cable into position by hand, where possible using an adequate number of
operative roller guides suitably positioned along cable length
2. Obtain approval of pulling cables by winch or similar appliance
3. When pulling by winch or the like, fit a suitable tension gauge into the haulage
line between winch and cable. Pulling tension shall not exceed the limit
recommended by the cable manufacturer
4. Do not allow cable to twist or rotate about its longitudinal axis
5. Lay 3 phase groups of single core cables in trefoil formation. If this is not
possible, obtain instructions.
6. Install cables to allow any one cable to be subsequently removed without
disturbing the remainder
7. Underground cable horizontal separation shall be a minimum of 150 mm
8. Damaged cables shall be removed, unless agrees to a repair.
B. Bending Radius: as large as possible and cable shall not to bend to a radius less than
that specified in the relevant British Standard, local power authority regulations or
manufacturer’s recommendation, whichever is largest.
C. Underground Cables in PVC-u Ducts:

1. Cables shall be installed in ducts where there is hard standing or vehicular
passage. Ducts where there is vehicular passage shall be concrete encased
2. Cable duct size shall be as specified in the Drawings, to BS 3506 Class B or BS
4660
3. Run cables at least 300 mm clear of other services, whether the latter run parallel
or transversely to cable trench. Use pulling compound, or lubricant to avoid
excessive stress on the cable, if required
4. Ducts shall not be filled with cables to more than 60 % of their capacity
5. Nylon draw cords shall always be left in empty ducts
6. Ducts shall be suitably sealed with polyurethane foam or proprietary cable
sealing arrangements as applicable.
7. Empty ducts shall be plugged with removable plugs
8. Ducts shall have a minimum diameter of 200 mm.
D. Direct Buried Cables:

1. LV and HV cables shall be laid at depths not less than 700 mm and 1000 mm,
respectively, measured from the final finished ground level after all earthworks
have been completed
2. A 100 mm layer of dune sand shall be provided on the bottom of the cable trench
for the cables to lie on. The cables shall be covered by a further 100 mm layer of
sand before the trench is backfilled
3. Cables shall be protected by precast concrete tiles, as specified in clause 6.2.3.7
above, laid above the top layer of sand
4. PVC warning tape shall be provided above the cables or concrete tiles, after
partial backfilling and approximately 300 mm below finished ground level. All
backfilling shall be with dune sand free from stones on other hard particles
5. Concrete cable markers shall be provided at:
a. Every 20 m for straight runs
b. Road crossings
c. Joints
d. Deviations
e. Entries to buildings
f. Entries to draw pits
6. Inspect the cable installation at each of the different stages above.
E. Cables above Ground:

1. Protection shall be provided where mechanical damage is possible
2. Unarmored cables shall be protected by conduit, ducting or trunking
3. Cables shall be protected from direct sunlight
4. Cable spacing and layouts shall be as table 4A of BS 7671
a. Cables shall be run at least 150 mm from other services.
F. Underground Cables in trenches

1. In areas of hard standing cables may also be installed in concrete or brick cable
trenches with removable covers, like Plant Rooms and Main Electrical Rooms.
2. Cables may be laid in a single layer on the trench floor, otherwise they shall be
supported on the sides of the trench on cable tray by cleats or ladders
3. Cable spacing and layouts in the trenches shall be as table 4A of BS 7671
G. Cable Supports:
1. Cables shall be supported in accordance with the methods described in table 4A
of BS 7671. Other methods shall be approved
2. Cables shall be supported at regular intervals and at spacing a maximum of 400
mm for cleats for horizontal runs and 550 mm for vertical runs
3. Vertical cable runs exceeding 100 m shall incorporate tension releasing sections
steel cable supports shall be provided at 300 mm intervals
4. MICC Cables:
a. Run on surface of walls ceilings. Where embedded, run in a PVC trough
or conduit
b. Run cables in square symmetrical lines. Where single core cables are run
in groups, bend the sheaths at maximum 50 mm centers
c. Fix surface run cables with saddles at maximum 300 mm centers.
H. Heat Resistant Cables:

1. In areas where a constant ambient temperature exceeding 55ºC will occur, run
all final sub-circuits and distribution circuits in heat resistant cable
2. Make conversion from PVC cable to heat resistant cable with a fixed block
3. Connector housed and fixed into a conduit box or equal, except where the
conversion of cable types emanate from a switch, ceiling rose or similar fixed
connector accessory.
I. Flexible Cables:
1. Flexible cable shall be kept to a minimum and concealed if possible
2. Mechanical retainment shall not depend on electrical connections.
J. Sealing Cables:
1. Seal both ends of cables immediately after tests
2. Seal MICC cables immediately after cutting to prevent hygroscopic action by the
dielectric. All cables shall give an infinity test when tested on a 1000 volt Megger
immediately, and 48 hours after sealing
3. Seal aluminum sheathed cables with a metal cap plumbed to the sheath
4. Seal plastic sheathed cables with a plastic cap embracing the wires and outer
sheath
5. Mark cable ends in accordance with the relevant BS.

3.02 CABLE TRAYS
A. Generally:
1. Install cables on trays in a single layer, unless otherwise specified
2. Use purpose made straps or saddles to maintain cables in a neat regular
disposition
3. Secure cables with load bearing cleats securely fixed to the tray, where trays do
not directly support the cables
4. Space cleats, saddles and straps at maximum centres shall be as recommended
by cable manufacturers.
3.03 FIRESTOPPING
A. Apply fire stopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to
restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly according to Division 07 Section
"Penetration Fire stopping."
END OF SECTION

SECTION 26 0526
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. This Section to include methods and materials for grounding systems and equipment
and accessories work in accordance with the Project Documentation.
1. Earth Continuity Conductors
2. Main Earth Loops
3. Rod Electrodes
4. Earth Pit Covers
1.02 SUBMITTALS
B. Other Informational Submittals: Plans showing dimensioned as-built locations of

grounding features including the following:
1. Earth continuity conductors
2. Main Earth Loops
3. Rod Electrodes
4. Earth Inspection Pits
5. Grounding Bus bars
6. Grounding arrangements and connections
7. Grounding for sensitive electronic equipment
C. Field quality-control test reports.
A. Comply with the requirements of the local Electrical Power Authority.
B. Comply with BS 7671 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.
C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and

capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of the
International Electrical Testing Association or is nationally recognized testing laboratory
(NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities
KEO/21-7387-0004 26 0526 / 1 Grounding And Bonding For Electrical Systems

A. Applicable standards referred to in this Section:
1. BS 7430 Code of Practice for earthing.
2. Local Authorities Regulations, The Electricity Wiring Regulations (RSB)
3. BS 7671 Requirements for Electrical Installations IEE wiring regulations.
4. BSEN 62305-1-4:2011 Code of Practice for protection of structures against
lightning.
5. BS 7375 Practice for distribution of electricity on construction and Building Sites.
B. All components and their installations shall be free from defects. Any defective material
or workmanship and any resulting damage to work of other trades shall be replaced or
repaired as directed during the Warranty Period at the contactors expense. Comply with
General Conditions, agreeing to repair or replace any components that have failed
within the warranty period.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS

provided shall be from the manufacturer listed in the section 26 9000 - Approved
Manufacturer vendor List - Electrical.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. General
1. Products used in the earthing system shall be copper or an approved copper
alloy, unless otherwise specified, and specifically manufactured for the purpose.
B. Earth Continuity Conductors

1. Sizes shall be as specified by local power-supply authorities, unless otherwise
indicated, but in no case shall size be less than half that of the associated phase
conductors.
2. Insulation shall be of the same material as insulation in associated sub-circuits.
C. Main Earth Loops

1. 25 x 3mm tinned copper tape or bare copper wire, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Rod Electrodes
1. Shall be the earth rod electrode type, unless impracticable to drive deep into the
particular soil.
2. Earth rod electrodes: Minimum 19 mm diameter (16 mm for communication
earth) steel core copper jacketed type, comprising a high strength steel alloy core
with a molten welded copper covering.
3. Earth rod electrode length shall be as per local Electrical Power Authority
regulations, in 1.2m sections coupled by strong bronze couplers.

E. Earth Connectors
1. For connection of rod electrodes: bolted type.
F. Earthing Bus Bars for Electrical System

1. Shall comprise a bolted copper link fixed on porcelain insulators and complete
with studs, nuts and washers to take the earth tape and a bolted lug adequately
sized for the final connection of the earth electrode.
G. Grounding Bus Bars for Telecommunication System

1. Grounding bus bars for telecommunication system shall be made of 6 mm thick
electro-tin plated and provided with insulators.
H. Bolts, Washers and Nuts in Bolted Connections

1. High copper alloy or silicone bronze. Ferrous hardware is not acceptable.
I. Earth Inspection Pit Cover

1. Shall be of medium duty cast iron cover.
2. Shall have a recessed lifting hook.
3. Shall have a brass plate, engraved "Electrical Earth Below".
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Circuit Wiring
1. Shall have a green/yellow coloured insulated earth continuity cable connecting
the earth bus or earth terminal in switchboards, switchgears, motor control
centres and panel boards to the motor, equipment, outlet and other device by
earthing lugs. All hand rails and other metal works within 2 m of a potentially live
metal surface shall be earthed.
B. Main Earth Loops

1. Fix in mechanical equipment rooms and other areas indicated on the drawings, in
convenient locations, allowing two return paths to earth.
2. Fix copper tape to structure with copper or brass saddles and/or screws. Make
tees and straight joints by riveting and seating, welding or brazing.
3. Make copper tape joints by exothermic-weld process particularly at the exposed
and wet locations.
4. Make branch connections between main loop and major equipment, such as
switchboards, large motors and motor control boards, with copper tape of same
size as main loop tape.
5. Make other branch connections to equipment with copper conductors of size not
less than half that of the relative phase conductor.
6. For buried connections use exothermic weld.
C. Removable Earth Links

1. Fix in every main earth lead to enable the electrode system to be disconnected
for testing.
2. Install in an accessible position, above ground as close as possible to the earth
electrode.

D. Exposed Earth Cables
1. Install and locate to provide maximum mechanical protection, utilizing ceiling
corners, suspended ceiling and webs of beams as much as possible.
E. Bolted Connections
1. Multiple bolt type.
2. Where bare copper has bolted in connections contact surfaces shall be silver
electroplated.
F. Brazed Connections
1. Where earthing terminal connections are to be brazed to equipment, thoroughly
clean metal prior to brazing and repaint impaired surfaces to prevent corrosion.
G. Connections Between Dissimilar Metals

1. Protect by painting with a moisture resistant bituminous paint or compound, or
2. Protect by wrapping with protective tape to exclude moisture.
H. Equipment Earthing
1. Connect all non-current carrying metallic parts of the electrical/mechanical
installation to the earthing system.
2. Non-current carrying metallic parts of the electrical installation include:
a. Metal conduit cable armor (steel and aluminum) raceways, outlet boxes,
cabinets, and the like.
b. Exposed metal parts of apparatus.
c. Enclosures, doors, grilles, barriers and the like protecting or shielding
electrical equipment from direct access.
3. Series earthing of one piece of equipment to another is not acceptable. Each
item shall be individually connected the earthing system.
I. Switchgears, Motor Control Centres Earthing

1. Connect the special earthing lug or bus bars inside the cabinet to the main earth
copper tape.
2. Connect all parts of the switchboards, switchgears and motor control centres
other than "live" parts, to the earth bar in the board in an approved manner.
J. Fire Fighting Equipment Earthing

1. Earth on a separate ring system.
K. Motors Earthing
1. Connect the motor terminal box to the relative earth loop. The terminal must be
mechanically connected to the frame or, where this is not feasible
2. Extend the earthing conductor through an insulated bushed opening in the
connection box and connect to the frame.
L. Distribution Boards Earthing

1. Connect an earthing conductor from the main distribution earth bus bar to an
earth connector welded to the cabinet and earthing bushings on the incoming
and outgoing feeder conduits.
M. Cable Armour Earthing

1. Connect steel and aluminum armour to the earthing system.
N. Cable Tray/Cable Trunking

1. Connect each piece of cable trays/cable trunking and accessories to the earthing
system with couplings and copper links.
2. Comply with the manufacturer’s recommendations, Local Regulations and the BS
7671.
O. Earth Rod Electrodes

1. Extensible rods of the same diameter shall be installed in holes drilled into the
ground. If ground conditions permit, rods may be driven into the ground either
manually or mechanically. The earth electrode shall be installed at such a depth
that it penetrates the summer water table by a minimum of 2 meters.
2. Bolt earth connectors to the top of the rods, in sufficient number to make
connection with all incoming cables.
P. Earth Inspection Pit

1. Construct a small concrete pit, complete with removable heavy gauge cast iron
cover with recessed lifting hook, at the head of the earth rod, to protect the rod
and allow access to connections for testing.
3.02 TESTING
A. Testing earthing systems shall be done by the earth megger test.
B. The resistance of any point in the earth continuity system to the main earth electrode
shall not exceed 1 ohm, unless as approved otherwise by local Electrical Power
Authority.
C. Install additional earth electrodes if these figures are not met.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 26 0529
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems.
2. Construction requirements for concrete bases.
A. Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of

supported systems and its contents.
B. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of

supported equipment and connected systems and components.
C. Rated Strength: Adequate in tension, shear, and pullout force to resist maximum loads
calculated or imposed for this project, with a minimum structural safety factor of five
times the applied force.
1.03 SUBMITTALS

1. Steel slotted support systems.
2. Nonmetallic slotted support systems.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the
following:
1. Trapeze hangers. Include Product Data for components.
2. Steel slotted channel systems. Include Product Data for components.
3. Nonmetallic slotted channel systems. Include Product Data for components.
C. Welding certificates.
A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural

Welding Code - Steel."
KEO/21-7387-0004 26 0529 / 1 Hangers And Supports For Electrical Systems

1.05 COORDINATION
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS

2.02 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS
A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components

for field assembly.
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the work include,
but are not limited to.
B. Nonmetallic Slotted Support Systems: Structural-grade, factory-formed, glass-fiber-

resin channels and angles with 14-mm diameter holes.
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,
but are not limited to, the following:
2. Fittings and Accessories: Products of channel and angle manufacturer and
designed for use with those items.
3. Fitting and Accessory Materials: Same as channels and angles, except metal
items may be stainless steel.
4. Rated Strength: Selected to suit applicable load criteria.
C. Raceway and Cable Supports: As recommended by manufacturer.
D. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel hangers, clamps, and associated fittings,
designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.
E. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of

threaded body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non-armored electrical
conductors or cables in riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of
conductor gripping pieces as required to suit individual conductors or cables supported.
Body shall be malleable iron.
F. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel
plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.
G. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items
or their supports to building surfaces include the following:
1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened Portland
cement concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities
appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.
2. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel, for use in
hardened Portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities
appropriate for supported loads and building materials in which used.
3. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units similar to
MSS Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58.
4. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable
for attached structural element.
5. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with
ASTM A 325.
6. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type.
7. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.
H. All support systems for life safety rated cabling shall be sized in accordance with NFPA
70 & 101.
2.03 FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES
A. Description: Welded or bolted, structural-steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit

dimensions of supported equipment.
B. Materials: Comply with requirements in Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for

steel shapes and plates.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Where specific fasteners are not specified or indicated for securing items to in-place
construction, provide appropriate type, size, and number of fasteners for a secure, rigid
installation.
B. Install anchoring devices and other fasteners in accordance with manufacturer’s printed
instructions.
C. Make attachments to structural steel wherever possible.
3.02 APPLICATION

A. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space
supports shall be as required by the BS 7671 –Requirements for Electrical Installations
or as stated in NFPA.
B. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted
or other support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in
future without exceeding specified design load limits.
C. Spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used
for 38-mm and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems
above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports.
3.03 SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so

strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading
limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of
supported components plus 90 kg.
B. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor

and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the
following methods unless otherwise indicated by code:
1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts.
2. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts.
3. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion
anchor fasteners on solid masonry units.
4. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners.
5. To Steel: Welded threaded studs complying with AWS D1.1/D1.1M, with lock
washers and nuts or Beam clamps (MSS Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27) complying
with MSS SP-69 or Spring-tension clamps].
6. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws.
7. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount
cabinets, panel boards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction
boxes, transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to
substrate.
C. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid
reinforcing bars.
3.04 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS
A. Comply with installation requirements in Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for

site-fabricated metal supports.
B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and
elevation to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment.
C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
3.05 PAINTING

A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas
immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop
painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.
B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply
galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 26 0533
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. This Section to include the supply, installation and commissioning of all conduit works in
accordance with the Project Documentation.
1. Rigid PVC conduit and fittings
2. Rigid Steel conduit and fittings
3. Flexible Steel conduit and fittings
4. Hinged cover enclosures and cabinets
5. Cable Trunking
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Samples: Cut-away samples of all sizes of conduits, conduit boxes and fittings of each
type fixed to a board and submitted.
B. Product Data: When submitting samples submit manufacturer’s details, catalogues and
copies of test certificates confirming that offered types comply with the Specification.
C. Shop Drawings: Submit drawings of proposed conduit layouts and obtain approval
before commencing work.
D. Comply with ISO 9002 (BS 5750: Part 2).
E. Shop Drawings: For the following raceway components. Include plans, elevations,
sections, details, and attachments to other work:
1. Custom enclosures and cabinets.
2. For handholes and boxes for underground writing, including the following:
a. Duct entry provisions, including locations and duct sizes.
b. Frame and cover design.
c. Grounding details.
d. Dimensioned locations of cable racks inserts, and pulling-in and lifting
irons.
e. Joint details.
F. Coordination Drawings: Conduit routing plans, drawn to scale, on which the following
items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the
items involves:
1. Structural members in the paths of conduit groups with common supports.
2. HVAC and plumbing items and architectural features in the paths of conduit
groups with common supports.
KEO/21-7387-0004 26 0533 / 1 Raceway And Boxes For Electrical Systems
G. Qualification Data: For professional engineer and testing agency.
H. Source quality-control test reports.
B. Conform to the related latest BS for metallic and non-metallic conduits and accessories
stipulated in this Section.
C. Coordinate layout and installation of raceway and boxes with other construction
elements to ensure adequate headroom, working clearance, and access.
A. All electrical installations shall be carried out in accordance with the best International
Standards and Codes of Practice specifically with the current issue of IEE Regulations
(BS 7671) and the requirements of the local electrical power supply authority.
B. Wherever reference is made to a British Standard (BS), a British Standard Institution

recognized equivalent European Standard would also comply. Each type of equipment/
material selected shall comply with either the BS or the European Standard.
C. Listed below are the standards and codes referred to in this section.
1. BS 31 Steel conduit and fittings for electrical wiring.
2. BS 731 Flexible steel conduits and adapters for the protection of
electric cable.
3. BS 2782 Methods of testing plastics.
4. BS 4568 Specification for steel conduit and fittings with metric
threads of ISO form for electrical installations. Steel conduit,
bends and couplers.
5. BS 4607/ IEC 61386Non-metallic conduits and fittings for electrical installations
rigid PVC conduits and conduit fittings.
6. BS EN 50086 Specification for conduit systems for electrical installations.
7. BS EN 60423 Conduits for electrical purposes. Outside diameters of
conduits for electrical installations and threads for conduits
and fittings
8. BS EN 50085-1:2005 Cable Trunking
9. BS EN 10327:2004 Continuously Hot-Dip Strip and Sheet of low carbon steels
for cold forming

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS

2.02 GENERAL
A. Light and power circuits, fire alarm, telephone, signal and other low current system
wiring shall be drawn in conduits unless otherwise indicated
B. Conduit system shall generally be concealed and installed as indicated, unless

otherwise indicated. Minimum conduit size shall be 20mm diameter.
C. Light and power circuits, fire alarm wiring, telephone wiring, signal wiring and low
current system wiring shall each be run in separate conduit and wire way.
D. Cable insulated for two different categories of circuit shall be segregated.
E. Irrespective of service, conduit and fitting used shall be:

1. Where embedded: heavy gauge rigid PVC complying to BS 4607.
2. Where surface mounted, exposed: galvanized rigid steel conduit (GRS) as per
BS 4568
3. Where installed above false ceilings and in voids: GRS
4. Where installed in flame proof and hazardous areas: GRS
5. From terminal box to machine/ device: flexible steel conduit as per BS 731.
6. Liquid tight flexible steel in wet/ damp areas.
2.03 RIGID PVC CONDUIT AND FITTINGS
A. Standards:
1. Conduit and fittings shall comply with BS 4607: Part 1 & 2 and CEE Publication
26. In addition, conduit and fittings shall comply with this specification where
requirements are more stringent.
B. Physical Properties:
1. Conduit and fittings shall be:
a. Resistant to high temperatures
b. Non-hygroscopic
c. Self-extinguishing
d. Of adequate insulation resistance and electric strength
e. Inert to all liquid normally discharged from residential, commercial and
industrial premises

f. Suitable for installation, storage and transportation at temperatures
normally below -5°C. or above 85°C. and at these temperatures shall not:
1) Soften or suffer any structural degradation
2) Show signs of cracking, or deform so that cables cannot be easily
drawn in or are likely to be damaged when drawing in, when bent,
compressed or exposed to extreme temperature
g. Of adequate mechanical strength and thermal stability
h. Suitably and indelibly marked and identified. Markings shall include
nominal size and be easily legible
i. Smooth inside and outside and free from burrs and sharp edges. Surfaces
and corners over which cables may be drawn shall be smooth and well
rounded.
2. Sizes of Conduit:
a. Minimum 20 mm, internal diameter unless otherwise indicated
b. Where size is not indicated: select in accordance with the regulations and
as proper to the number and size of conductors.
Conduit Minimum Wall

Dimension Thickness Heavy
Gauge - mm
20mm 1.8
25mm 1.9
38mm 2.5
50mm 2.8
3. Fittings:
a. Conduit entries shall be designed to ensure a watertight joint.
4. Expansion fittings:
a. Provide fittings that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.06
mm per meter of length of straight run per degree of temperature change.
b. Provide expansion fittings for each of the following locations and provide
type and quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature changes listed
below:
1) Outdoor locations not exposed to direct sunlight: 70°C, 5°C
temperature change.
2) Outdoor locations exposed to direct sunlight: 86°C, 5°C
temperature change.
3) Indoor spaces: 70°C, 5°C temperature change.
5. PVC Conduit Boxes:
a. PVC Conduit Boxes can be used through PVC Conduit raceway system
and shall comply with BS 4607
b. metallic conduit boxes as specified elsewhere in this section can be used
alternatively if required for PVC conduit raceway system
c. all boxes shall be provided with tapped brass inserts for fixing the screws
d. all boxes for switches, sockets, outlets, etc., shall be rigid PVC or metallic
type and their dimensions shall be suitable for fixing the switches, sockets
and other accessories.
2.04 RIGID STEEL CONDUIT AND FITTINGS
A. Rigid Steel Conduit

1. All metallic conduits shall comply with BS 4568 Part 1 & 2 and of Class 4 rigid
steel screwed type having an interior and exterior zinc coating of uniform quality
and appearance throughout all surfaces
2. Conduits shall not be less than 20 mm diameter size, and shall be complete with
all necessary threaded fittings, couplings and connecting devices having
galvanized equivalent finish
Conduit Minimum Wall

Dimension Thickness Heavy
Gauge - mm
20mm 2.7
25mm 3.2
38mm 3.5
50mm 3.7
3. Conduits and fittings shall be manufactured specially for electric wiring purposes.
When manufactured by a continuous weld process, weld heads both inside and
outside the tube shall be completely removed prior to galvanizing
4. All conduits and fittings shall be free from rust or other defects on delivery to the
site and shall be properly stored in covered racking so that it is protected from
mechanical damage and damage by weather and water whilst stored on the site
5. All conduits shall be coupled to boxes and trunking wires using brass male
bushes. All such bushes shall be hexagon headed, heavy duty long threaded
type
6. All conduit expansion couplings used shall be fabricated from material equal or
equivalent to that of the conduit with which the coupling is to be used, having
factory installed packing ring and pressure ring to prevent entrance of moisture.
All coupling shall be equipped with earthing ring or earthing conductor
7. All conduit runs shall be fixed using spacer bar pattern saddles giving not less
than 3 mm clearance between the conduit and the surface to which it is fixed.
Saddles shall have finish to match the conduit and saddle clips shall be secured
to the bar by means of brass screws.
B. Metallic Conduit Boxes:

1. Metallic conduit boxes shall be used throughout metallic conduit raceway
systems, and shall comply with, or be of demonstrated equivalent quality and
performance to BS 4568 requirements. All boxes and covers shall be galvanized,
zinc plated or rust-proof finish equivalent to conduit finish
2. Circular and/or rectangular boxes shall be used for pull boxes and terminating
boxes, according to size and number of conduits connected to box. Boxes shall
be either malleable iron or heavy duty steel construction with welded joints and
tapped holes to receive metal threaded cover retaining screws. Self tapping
screws will not be permitted
3. All boxes, other than those to which a fitting or accessory is to be directly
mounted shall be fitted with covers screwed to the box by brass screws.
Malleable iron covers shall be used with malleable iron boxes and heavy gauge
steel covers shall be used with sheet steel boxes
4. All cover and accessory fixing provisions shall be so positioned that the fixing
screws lie completely clear of cable entering the box. All fixing screws shall be of
brass

5. All boxes installed in exterior locations, plant rooms, ducts, etc., shall be fitted
with approved type gaskets to provide a waterproof seal between box and cover
or other items fitted to the box
6. All boxes provided as junction boxes where cable joints are specified or
permitted, shall be provided with fixed terminal blocks. Such boxes shall be of
suitable size to contain the terminal block and sufficient cable to allow neat
connections to be made. The terminal blocks shall be fixed to the box by brass
screws and shall comprise brass conductor connectors, with brass clamping
screws enclosed in porcelain or other heat resisting insulation material which will
not distort or otherwise have its properties damaged by temperatures below the
highest temperature at which the insulation of any cable connected to it is
destroyed.
2.05 FLEXIBLE CONDUIT AND CONNECTIONS
A. Flexible Conduit:
1. To BS 731, Part 1, watertight, PVC sheathed, spiraled metal type. The conduit
shall be terminated at boxes and equipment by means of approved compression
glands
2. To be of the unpacked type for normal atmospheric conditions and non-asbestos
packaged for damp situations. Adapters shall be of the solid type
3. Flexible conduit shall be used for the final connection of rigid conduit to the
terminal boxes of machines fitted with a means of drive adjustment and/or where
vibrations is likely to occur.
4. Length of flexible conduit for recessed and semi-recessed light fixtures shall be
maximum 1.5 meters.
B. Flexible Connections:
1. Where connections to electrical machines are to be by multicore glands, the final
termination shall be by ring type universal glands and locknuts, and adequate
slack cable in the form of a loop or spiral being left to allow for the movement of
motors necessitated by belt re-tensioning, vibration, etc.
2.06 HINGED COVER ENCLOSURES AND CABINETS
A. Design
1. Surface-mounted or free-standing type, fabricated from zinc coated or galvanized
sheet steel minimum 1.5mm thick, Paint finish as approved for distribution
boards.
2. Fixed cover and padlocked hinged door; operable without obstruction.
3. Protected IP-31 for internal and IP-65 for outdoor use.
2.07 CABLE TRUNKING
A. Steel Trunking and Accessories: Factory made BS 4678: Part 1, from minimum 16 SWG
sheet steel to BS EN 10327: 2004, with 15 microns zinc coating.
B. Trunking Covers: Manufacture to fit firmly on the body. Design of covers and fixings
shall prevent wires entangling on them. Covers shall be attached and removed from
trunking with simple tools.

C. Accessories (Bends, Tees, Flanged Connectors etc.): Factory made by the trunking
manufacture.
D. Multi-compartment Trunking: Provide 16 SWG galvanized steel segregation barriers

without sharp edges.
E. Provide separation barrier between low voltage and line voltage cable compartment.
F. Cable Retaining Clips: Galvanized spring ‘W’ wire type.
G. Cable Support Fixings: Projecting pin type with heat shrunk sleeve.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Sets and Bends:

1. Conduits up to 32 mm diameter; form on site with an approved bending machine
using proper formers, guides, springs, etc., taking care not to deform conduit.
2. Conduits over 32 mm diameter: use coupling fittings.
3.02 INSTALLATION OF CONDUIT
A. General
1. Run conduit in square, symmetrical lines, parallel to or at right angles to walls
and in accordance with the accepted practice
2. Conduit system shall be mechanically continuous and watertight after installation.
All conduit system shall be arranged wherever possible to be self draining
3. Conduit runs between draw-in positions shall conform to local Regulations
regarding number of bends and extent of straight run
4. Conduit fill shall generally be less than 45%.
5. Keep conduits at least 100 mm from pipes and other non-electrical services
6. Where conduit runs are to be concealed in the structure or are to pass through
floor slabs, the Contractor shall be responsible for marking the accurate positions
of all chases and holes on site. The Contractor shall arrange the conduit routing
to make maximum use of any preformed conduit holes and slots provided in
structural beams. Conduit installation on shear walls shall be kept to a minimum.
All routings necessary on shear walls shall be agreed with the Engineer’s
Representative before work is put in hand
7. Install conduits so as not to interfere with ceiling inserts, lights or ventilation
outlets.
8. Earth continuity of steel conduits shall be mechanically & electrically continuous
throughout.
9. Provide pull wire in all empty conduits.
B. Runs in Reinforced Concrete:

1. Obtain approval for placing PVC conduits before pouring concrete
2. Run conduits in concrete slabs parallel to main reinforcing steel
3. Additional openings in finished slabs, where approved, shall be made by drilling,
not by breaking

4. Conduit boxes shall not be nailed to shuttering boards.
C. Horizontal or Cross Runs:

1. To be avoided in partitions and side walls.
D. Surface Mounted Conduit (including conduit installed above false ceiling):

1. Fix with distance spacing saddles to allow conduits to be taken directly into
accessories without bends or sets.
E. Concealed Conduit:
1. Fix securely to prevent movement before casting of concrete and screeds,
application of plaster and the like
2. Spacing of clips shall be not greater than as follows:
Conduit size Spacing

a. Up to 25 mm 600 mm
b. 32-38 mm 900 mm
c. 50 mm 1000 mm
3. Supports for exposed conduit shall be fixed at each side of bends.
F. Expansion Fittings:
1. Fix in conduit wherever it crosses as expansion joint in the structure to which it is
fixed.
G. Terminations:
1. Make with a flanged coupling, lead washer and hexagonal male brass bush,
where conduit runs terminate in cable trunking, distribution boards or any sheet
metal structure.
H. Conduit Boxes:
1. Fix at all outlet points.
3.03 INSTALLATION OF FLEXIBLE CONDUIT
A. All conduits must be secured to outlet boxes, junction boxes or cabinets by placing
locknuts on outside of box and locknuts and bushings on the inside of box.
B. Conduits connecting recessed fixtures and their adjacent junction boxes must be flexible
metallic conduit 20 mm minimum size and shall be of sufficient length to permit dropping
of the fixture below the ceiling and to gain access to the junction box.
C. Conduit to motors shall be terminated in the conduit fittings on the motors, the final
connection being made with liquid tight flexible conduit and suitable liquid tight
connectors.
D. A green insulated 4 mm2 (minimum) tinned copper earth connection shall be made
between the solid conduit or cable sheath and the equipment, the copper cable being
run inside the flexible conduit. Couplings fitted to removable covers or non-metallic
equipment etc. shall be bonded to the earthing terminal of the equipment etc. Where
changes to flexible conduits occur, a watertight outlet box with threaded entries shall be
inserted and the earth connection made to an internal terminal. The cover screws shall
not be used for earthing connections.

3.04 INSTALLATION OF ENCLOSURES AND CABINETS
A. Anchor enclosures and cabinets securely to wall and structural supports at each corner.
3.05 INSTALLATION OF CABLE TRUNKING
A. Install trunking with lid on top or side.
B. Support trunking at 1.0m intervals with trapeze type hangers or wall brackets.
C. Retain cables in trunking with cable retaining clips.
D. Support cables in vertical runs with pin-type supports at maximum 15m centers.
E. On vertical runs exceeding 6m support cable with projecting pin-type supports with heat
shrunk sleeve fixed to trunking body by welding or pop riveting.
F. Make connections to accessories with pop riveted or welded joints. Radius or gusset
bends and tees.
G. Provide tinplated copper link at joints and terminations.
H. Fire-stop cable trunking at floor slabs and at fire walls by packing inside the trunking
with mineral wool.
I. Provide galvanized draw wire in every trunking conduit which is left for wires and cables.
Not less than 300mm slack shall be left at each end of the draw wire.
3.06 FIRESTOPPING
A. Install conduits sealing where they enter or leave hazardous locations. Provide fire
stopping at fire compartment areas. Locate fittings at suitable, approved, accessible
locations and fill them with approved sealing compound.
B. Fire stopping materials and installation requirements are specified in Division 07 Section
“Fire stopping.”
3.07 CLEANING
A. The conduit outlets when installed and before wiring shall be temporarily closed by
means of well-fitting wooden plugs, and immediately before cables are drawn in,
conduits systems shall be thoroughly swabbed out until they are dry and clean.
B. Upon completion of installation of system, including outlet fittings & devices, inspect
exposed finish, remove burrs, dirt & construction debris and repair damages finish
including chips, scratches & abrasions.
3.08 PROTECTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to Site Engineer
to ensure that coating, finishes & cabinets are without damage or deterioration at
substantial completion.
B. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc rich paint recommended by

manufacturer.
C. Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touch up coatings per
manufacturer’s recommendations.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 26 0536
CABLE TRAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. This Section to include the supply, installation and commissioning of Cable trays,
Ladder racks, Wire basket cable Trays and accessories work in accordance with the
Project Documentation.
1. Cable trays and accessories
2. Ladder racks and accessories
3. Cable Basket Tray.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include data indicating dimensions and finishes for each type of cable
tray/ ladder racks indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: For each type of cable tray/ ladder racks.

1. Show fabrication and installation details of cable tray/ ladder racks, including
plans, elevations, and sections of components and attachments to other
construction elements. Designate components and accessories, including
clamps, brackets, hanger rods, splice-plate connectors, expansion-joint
assemblies, straight lengths, and fittings.
C. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans and sections, drawn to scale. Include scaled cable
tray/ ladder racks layout and relationships between components and adjacent structural,
electrical, and mechanical elements. Show the following:
1. Vertical and horizontal offsets and transitions.
2. Clearances for access above and to side of cable trays/ ladder racks.
3. Vertical elevation of cable trays/ ladder racks above the floor or bottom of ceiling
structure.
D. Field quality-control reports.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain cable tray components through one source from a single
manufacturer.
KEO/21-7387-0004 26 0536 / 1 Cable Trays For Electrical Systems

C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Select a firm experienced in manufacturing cable trays/
ladder racks, which has a record of successful in-service performance.
D. Comply with ISO 9002 (BS 5750: Part 2).

1. BS EN ISO 1461:1999 Hot dip galvanized coatings on fabricated iron and
steel articles.
2. BS 1449-1.1:1991 Steel plate, sheet and strip. Carbon and carbon-
manganese plate, sheet and strip. General
specification
3. BS EN 61537:2007 Cable management. Cable tray systems and cable
ladder systems
4. BS EN 10025-2:2004 Hot rolled products of structural steels. Technical
delivery conditions for non-alloy structural steels
A. Store indoors to prevent water or other foreign materials from staining or adhering to
cable tray/ ladder racks. Unpack and dry wet materials before storage.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS

2.02 GENERAL
A. The cable tray system shall be of one manufacturer and shall include factory-made
trays, tray fittings, connectors and necessary accessories and supports to form a
complete cable support system.
B. The cable tray system shall include the following factory-made tray elements:

1. Straight cable trays and ladder racks
2. Fittings as horizontal and vertical bends of various angles, crosses, tees, wyes,
reducers, vertical riser elements
3. Connectors
4. All necessary fixing accessories.
C. Manufacturer’s standard accessories shall be used and site fabrication shall not be
permitted.
D. Horizontal run of cables laid on cable tray and exposed to direct sunlight shall be
provided with covering at higher level to allow for ventilation. Cable tray shall be raised
15 cm from finished floor level.
E. Determine the sizes of the cable trays based on the number and size of cables laid on
the cable trays plus 20% space for future growth. Cables laid on cable trays shall be
spaced twice their overall diameter (consider the largest cable as reference). In case of
discrepancy with the contract documents this clause shall prevail, unless approved.
F. Design calculations to validate suitability of selected trays to support permissible cables

loads (weight) over a continuous span in accordance with the recommendations of the
manufacturer. Submit manufacturers loading graphs.
2.03 MATERIALS AND FINISHES
A. Cable Trays:
1. The cable tray material shall be hot rolled steel sheet to
EN 10025-2:2004. The whole of the tray work, trays, fittings, and supports shall be
of mild steel hot dipped galvanized after manufacture to
BS EN ISO 1461:1999. The thickness of the protective sheath on any element
shall not be less than 55 microns.
2. Tray shall be of heavy duty formed from heavy gauge steel plates. The material
for the cable tray shall be electro galvanized steel to EN10152.
3. Insert elements, bolts, screws, pins, etc., shall be mild steel cadmium plated.
4. Tray work shall have oval perforations.
5. All trays (straight and fittings) shall be welded construction and be a heavy duty
returned flanged, perforated type, unless specified otherwise. The minimum
thickness of heavy duty returned flanged cable trays shall be 1.5mm for trays up
to 300mm wide and 2.0mm for trays up to 600mm wide.
6. Tray components shall be accurately rolled or formed to close tolerances and all
edges rounded. Flanges shall have full round smooth edges.
7. For all trays, flanges shall be a minimum of 50 mm deep, unless otherwise
specified.
8. Cable tray width and radius of curved sections shall be selected to suit the
number of cables as shown on drawings and to the approval of the Engineer.
9. Cable trays and accessories installed in hazardous and extremely corrosive
environments shall be heavy duty GRP or 316 S31 grade stainless steel.
2.04 CABLE TRAY ACCESSORIES
A. Fittings: Tees, crosses, risers, elbows, and other fittings as indicated, of same materials
and finishes as cable tray.
B. Covers: Same materials and finishes as cable tray.
C. Barrier Strips: Same materials and finishes as cable tray.
D. Cable tray supports and connectors, including bonding jumpers, as recommended by

cable tray manufacturer.
E. Cable tray mounted externally on roofs and exposed area shall be provided with heavy
duty sunshields made of electro galvanized steel. The sunshields shall be arranged to
allow adequate ventilation of the cables on the tray. All equipment and accessories shall
be manufactured to withstand ambient temperature of 50 degree C.
2.05 LADDER RACK
A. Ladder rack shall be supplied and installed in the locations indicated on the drawings.
B. The cable ladder system shall be based on two longitudinal outward facing side
members with returned edge flanges to improve safety during handling, installation and
cable pulling activities. The longitudinal side members shall form the main structural
elements of the cable ladder system and shall be longitudinally ribbed for enhanced
stiffness and rigidity.
C. The profile of the side members shall remain constant for the straight cable ladder and
the cable ladder fittings.
D. The longitudinal side members shall have a height of 125mm and a flange width of
25mm.
E. The longitudinal side member shall have a wall thickness of 2.0mm.
F. The two longitudinal side members shall be connected by individual transverse

members (rungs) which shall be welded at low level to the inside face of the side
members.
G. The transverse members shall be evenly spaced at 300mm centers along the length of
the straight cable ladder.
H. The transverse members shall have a wall thickness of 1.5mm.
I. Cable trays shall be chamfered at all changes of direction to prevent cable damage both
during and after installation.
J. Racks, unless otherwise stated, shall be of heavy duty.
K. The couplers shall be profiled to match the profile of the cable ladder. The couplers shall
be secured using M10 square-shouldered bolts with rounded heads. The bolts shall be
secured with M10 hex nuts and M10 shake-proof washers as standard. The couplers
shall have a slot pattern which prevents slip between adjacent straight ladder lengths
and between cable ladder fittings. The couplers shall have a slot pattern which allows
for easy connection to cut lengths of straight cable ladder without the need for onsite
drilling.
L. Cable Basket Tray

1. Cable baskets shall be constructed from 5 mm steel wires. The spacing between
longitudinal wires shall be 50 mm and between transverse wires 100mm. The
steel wires shall be welded at all joints. Transverse wires shall be “T” welded to
top edge longitudinal wires in such a way to minimize fraying of the cables when
being laid.
2. It shall be Electro -zinc galvanized and corrosion resistant.
3. It shall be minimum 50mm high, width as shown on the drawing. Wire basket
shall be used for telecommunications cabling except for the GSM and main
service provider cabling.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 CABLE TRAY/ LADDER RACK INSTALLATION
A. Install as a complete system, including all necessary fasteners, hold-down clips, splice-
plate support systems, barrier strips, hinged horizontal and vertical splice plates,
elbows, reducers, tees, and crosses.
B. Remove burrs and sharp edges from cable trays/ ladder rack.
C. Fasten cable tray/ ladder rack supports to building structure
D. Labelling should be supplied to cable trays at every change in tray direction and
intervals of no more than 10m. Labelling should also be supplied to sub-main cabling
detailing both the source of supply and final termination.
E. Make connections to equipment with flanged fittings fastened to cable tray/ ladder rack
and to equipment. Support cable tray/ ladder rack independent of fittings. Do not carry
weight of cable tray/ ladder rack on equipment enclosure.
F. Install expansion connectors where cable tray/ ladder rack crosses building expansion
joint. Space connectors and set gaps according to applicable standard.
G. Make changes in direction and elevation using standard fittings.
H. Make cable tray/ ladder rack connections using standard fittings.
I. Seal penetrations through fire and smoke barriers according to Division 07 Section "Fire
stopping."
J. Sleeves for Future Cables [where required]: Install capped sleeves for future cables
through firestop-sealed cable tray/ ladder rack penetrations of fire and smoke barriers.
K. Workspace: Install cable trays/ ladder rack with enough space to permit access for
installing cables.
L. After installation of cable trays/ ladder rack is completed, install warning signs in visible
locations on or near cable trays/ ladder racks.
3.02 CABLE INSTALLATION

A. Install cables only when cable tray/ ladder rack installation has been completed and
inspected.
B. Fasten cables on horizontal runs with cable clamps or cable ties. Tighten clamps only
enough to secure the cable, without indenting the cable jacket.
C. Metal cable ties shall be installed on all vertical inverted trays and ladders.
D. On vertical runs, fasten cables to tray every 450 mm. Install intermediate supports
when cable weight exceeds the load-carrying capacity of the tray/ rungs.
E. Install covers after installation of cable is completed.
3.03 EARTHING
A. Cable trays/ ladder rack and accessories shall be electrically and mechanically
continuous throughout their length.
B. All cable trays/ ladder rack shall be bonded by flexible earth copper links in order to
provide bonding to the earth for all the metallic cable tray ladder installation.
A. After installing cable trays/ ladder racks and after electrical circuitry has been energized,
survey for compliance with requirements. Perform the following field quality-control
survey:
1. Visually inspect cable insulation for damage. Correct sharp corners,
protuberances in cable tray/ ladder rack, vibration, and thermal expansion and
contraction conditions, which may cause or have caused damage.
2. Verify that there is no intrusion of such items as pipe, hangers, or other
equipment that could damage cables.
3. Remove deposits of dust, industrial process materials, trash of any description,
and any blockage of tray/ ladder rack ventilation.
4. Visually inspect each cable tray/ ladder rack joint and each ground connection for
mechanical continuity. Check bolted connections between sections for corrosion.
Clean and retorque in suspect areas.
5. Check for missing or damaged bolts, bolt heads, or nuts. When found, replace
with specified hardware.
6. Perform visual and mechanical checks for adequacy of cable tray/ ladder rack
earthing; verify that all takeoff raceways are bonded to cable tray/ ladder rack.
B. Report results in writing.
3.05 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed cable trays.

1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by cable
tray/ ladder rack manufacturer.
2. Install temporary protection for cables in open trays/ ladder racks to protect
exposed cables from falling objects or debris during construction. Temporary

protection for cables and cable tray/ ladder rack can be constructed of wood or
metal materials until the risk of damage is over.
3.06 FIRESTOPPING
A. Install sealing fittings wherever cable trays/ ladder racks enter or leave hazardous
locations. Provide fire stopping at fire compartment areas. Locate fittings at suitable,
approved, accessible locations and fill them with approved sealing compound.
B. Fire stopping materials and installation requirements are specified in Division 07 Section
"Fire stopping."
END OF SECTION

SECTION 26 0553
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1. Identification for raceway.
2. Identification for conductors and communication and control cable.
3. Underground-line warning tape.
4. Warning labels and signs.
5. Instruction signs.
6. Equipment identification labels.
7. Miscellaneous identification products.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated.
B. Identification Schedule: An index of nomenclature of electrical equipment and system

components used in identification signs and labels.
C. Samples: For each type of label and sign to illustrate size, colors, lettering style,
mounting provisions, and graphic features of identification products.
A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of electrical identification

products of types required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar
service for not less than 3 years.
B. Installers Qualifications: Firm with at least 3 years of installation experience with projects
utilizing electrical identification work similar to that required for this project.
C. Comply with the requirements of the local Authorities
D. IEC Compliance: Comply with IEC 113 and 117 as applicable to electrical equipment
identification.
1.04 COORDINATION
KEO/21-7387-0004 26 0553 / 1 Identification For Electrical Systems

A. Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with
requirements in the Contract Documents, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's wiring
diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual, and with those required by
codes, standards. Use consistent designations throughout Project.
B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of

surfaces where devices are to be applied.
C. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors.
D. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS

2.02 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS
A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's standard products of

categories and types required for each application. Where more than single type is
specified for an application, selections are Installer’s option, but provide single selection
for each application.
B. Color-Coded Conduit Markers: Provide manufacturer's standard pre-printed, flexible or

semi-rigid, permanent, plastic-sheet conduit markers, and extending 360 degrees
around conduits; designed for attachment to conduit by adhesive, adhesive lap joint of
marker, matching adhesive plastic tape at each end of marker, or pretension snap-on.
Except as otherwise indicated, provide lettering which indicates type of cable, cross
section and cable number. Strip shall be approximately 20 mm wide and approximately
0.5 mm thick with perforated letters approximately 8 mm.
1. Colors: Unless otherwise indicated or required by governing regulations, provide
the following:
a. 240/415 Volt Power - Green.
b. Telecommunications - Yellow.
c. Fire Alarm System - Orange.
d. Emergency System - Red.
e. Security System - Brown.
C. Baked Enamel Danger Signs: Provide manufacturer's standard "DANGER" signs of

baked enamel finish on 20-gage steel; of standard red, black and white graphics; with
recognized standard explanation wording, e.g., HIGH VOLTAGE, KEEP AWAY,
BURIED CABLE in Arabic and English.
D. Engraved Plastic-Laminate Sins: Provide engraving stock melamine plastic laminate, 64

mm x 19 mm engraved with engraver's standard letter style of sizes and wording
indicated, black face and white core plies (letter color) except as otherwise indicated,

punched for mechanical fastening except where adhesive mounting is necessary
because of substrate.
1. Fasteners: Self-tapping stainless steel screws, except contact type permanent
adhesive where screws cannot or should not penetrate substrate.
2.03 LETTERING AND GRAPHICS
A. General: Coordinate names, abbreviations and other designations used in electrical

identification work, with corresponding designations shown, specified or scheduled.
Provide numbers, lettering and wording as indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as
recommended by manufacturer or as required for proper identification and
operation/maintenance of electrical systems and equipment. All identification shall be
indicated in Arabic and English.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION
A. General Installation Requirements:

1. Install electrical identification products as indicated, in accordance with
manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements of NEC and IEC.
2. Coordination: Where identification is to be applied to surfaces which require
finish, install identification after completion of painting.
3. Regulations: Comply with governing regulations and requests of governing
authorities for identification of electrical work.
B. Conduit Identification: Where electrical conduit is exposed in spaces with exposed

mechanical piping which is identified by color-coded method, apply color-coded
identification on electrical conduit in manner similar to piping identification. Unless
otherwise indicated, use white as coded color for conduit.
C. Cable/Conductor Identification: Apply cable/conductor identification, including voltage,

phase and feeder number, on each cable/conductor in each box/ enclosure/ cabinet
where wires of more than one circuit or communication/signal system are present,
except where another form of identification (such as color-coded conductors) is
provided. Match identification with marking system used in distribution boards, shop
drawings, contract documents, and similar previously established identification for
project's electrical work.
D. Operational Identification and Warnings: Wherever reasonably required to ensure safe

and efficient operation and maintenance of electrical systems, and electrically
connected mechanical systems and general systems and equipment, including
prevention of misuse of electrical facilities by unauthorized personnel, install self-
adhesive plastic signs or similar equivalent identification, instruction or warnings on
switches, outlets and other controls, devices and covers of electrical enclosures. Where
detailed instructions or explanations are needed, provide plasticized tags with clearly
written messages adequate for intended purposes.
E. Danger Signs: In addition to the installation of danger signs required by governing

regulations and authorities, install appropriate danger signs at locations indicated and at

locations subsequently identified by Installer of electrical work as constituting similar
dangers for persons in or about project.
1. High Voltage: Install danger signs wherever it is possible, under any
circumstances, for persons to come into contact with electrical power of voltages
higher than 240 volts.
2. Critical Switches Controls: Install danger signs on switches and similar controls,
regardless of whether concealed or locked up, where untimely or inadvertent
operation (by anyone) could result in significant danger to persons, or damage to
or loss of property.
F. Equipment/System Identification: Install engraved plastic-laminate sign on each major

unit of electrical equipment in building; including central or master unit of each electrical
system including communication/ control/ signal systems, unless unit is specified with its
own self-explanatory identification or signal system. Except as otherwise indicated,
provide single line of text, white lettering in black field. Provide text matching
terminology and numbering of the contract documents and shop drawings. Provide
signs for each unit of the following categories of electrical work:
1. Panelboards, electrical cabinets, and enclosures.
2. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items.
3. Electrical switchgear and switchboards.
4. Emergency system boxes and enclosures.
5. Motor-control centers.
6. Disconnect switches.
7. Enclosed circuit breakers.
8. Motor starters.
9. Push-button stations.
10. Power transfer equipment.
11. Contactors.
12. Remote-controlled switches, dimmer modules, and control devices.
13. Battery inverter units.
14. Battery racks.
15. Voice and data cable terminal equipment.
16. Intercommunication and call system master and staff stations.
17. Television/audio components, racks, and controls.
18. Fire-alarm control panel and annunciators.
19. Security and intrusion-detection control stations, control panels, terminal
cabinets, and racks.
20. Monitoring and control equipment.
21. Terminals, racks, and patch panels for voice and data communication and for
signal and control functions.
22. Cable Trays.
G. Install signs at locations indicated or, where not otherwise indicated, a location for best
convenience of viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of
equipment. Secure to substrate with fasteners, except use adhesive where fasteners
should not or cannot penetrate substrate.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 26 0800
COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. This section forms part of every section of Division 25 for integrated automation
Systems, Division 26 for Electrical, Division 27 for Communication, Division 28 for
Electronic Safety system.
B. Conform to General Requirements for Electrical Services.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. This section shall be read in conjunction with all sections of electrical specifications as
applicable.
1.03 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Prior to acceptance, inspect, operate and test all electrical equipment, materials and
components, whether such tests are detailed in this specification or not. Tests will be
witnessed by THE CONSULTANT/EMPLOYER, to ensure that the operation of the
systems and components satisfies the requirements of the Contract Documents.
B. Include any specific testing required by the Authorities, or any other body having
jurisdiction over the installation, and as directed by THE CONSULTANT/EMPLOYER.
C. Provide all tools, equipment, labour and materials required to perform the electrical
testing. Provide three copies of the test reports to THE CONSULTANT/EMPLOYER.
D. THE CONSULTANT/EMPLOYER reserves the right to witness factory testing of all

equipment. Coordinate with the equipment manufacturers and notify the
CONSULTANT/EMPLOYER 21 days before any factory testing, to confirm the presence
of the CONSULTANT/EMPLOYER. The Contractor shall include within this tender
travelling and accommodation costs for 2No Engineers, plus the Employer and the
Employer’s Agent for the duration of the tests.
E. Report any deficiencies in test results immediately to the CONSULTANT/EMPLOYER.
F. Test in accordance with the applicable standards issued by the governing organizations
(e.g. IEC, UL, NFPA, IEE), and with the recommendations of the manufacturers.
KEO/21-7387-0004 26 0800 / 1 Commissioning Of Electrical Systems

G. Include the cost of all testing in the bid price, whether performed in the field or at the
factory. Inform the manufacturers of the factory and site testing requirements.
H. The Contractor shall provide such assistance, labour, materials, electricity, fuel, stores,
apparatus and instruments as may be requisite and as reasonably deemed necessary to
carry out such tests efficiently.
I. All instruments used for the tests shall have a current calibration certificate available for
inspection at works.
J. If the Contractor fails to demonstrate the performance of the equipment offered, he will
be requested to carry out further tests until the Employer's Agent is fully satisfied that
the equipment offered meets the requirements of the specification at no extra cost to
this contract.
K. Make test records in a neat and legible manner, fully identifying the equipment or
system being tested, type of test equipment, calculation, and expiry date for the same,
the test results and the date of the test. Submit 3 copies to the
CONSULTANT/EMPLOYER at the end of each test.
L. Do not energize distribution or control equipment until the test results have been
reviewed, passed and approved by the CONSULTANT/EMPLOYER.
M. Ensure that phasing and phase rotation is the same throughout the system. Ensure that
all devices are wired for the same polarity.
N. Test all electrical systems and installation in accordance to the related standards and in
accordance to the equipment manufacturers testing procedure.
O. Carryout all tests in accordance to an approved procedure by the CONSULTANT and all
necessary data and results which may be requested by the CONSULTANT.
P. The testing and commissioning for electrical system shall cover the following as a
minimum:
1. Off-Site Tests
2. Tests carried out on items of equipment at manufacturer's works or elsewhere to
ensure compliance with the requirements of specifications and/or relevant British
Standards and Codes of Practice.
3. Pre-commissioning Site Tests
4. Tests on equipment and systems to ensure correct and safe installation and
operation in accordance with the applicable standards.
5. Commissioning
6. The process of energizing equipment and systems and setting them to full
working order and verifying the performance to specified requirements under no-
load conditions.
7. Performance Testing
8. The measuring and recording of the performance of the commissioned
installation under load conditions.
9. All the electrical systems, whether mentioned in this section or not, shall be
subject to testing and commissioning.
Q. Method Statements

1. The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with full and detailed method
statements for the pre commissioning, setting to work, commissioning, testing
and handover procedures to be applied to the whole of the works.
2. Where specialists are required to undertake the works, the Contractor shall
obtain similar documents from them and incorporate them into the Works Method
Statement.
3. Include within the method statement, the following:-
a. Logic diagram of the process flow
b. Outline program, detailed program(s) to be added as the document
develops
c. Copies of all check lists, record sheets, etc. proposed for use. Ensure all
are clearly specific to the project and complete with design information
and schematic drawings
d. Permit to work systems and documentation
e. Details of works by others on which the Contractor depends on being
complete and at what time to maintain program progress
f. Proposed off site testing
g. Proposed completion of work in zones
h. Proposals for quality control of the work prior to offering to the Employer’s
Agent.
i. Handover, demonstration and training
j. Relevant activity attendees
4. The Contractor shall submit the method statement for testing, commissioning and
handover within one month of the contract award and shall regularly update
thereafter to incorporate the Engineers comments and/or ongoing developments.
5. The Engineer reserves the right to request additional method statements from
the Contractor for any other aspect of the works, at his discretion at no additional
cost.
R. Submittals
1. Required Submissions:
a. Submittals relating to this section shall reference this specification section
number on the submittal transmittal.
b. All documents to be submitted shall comply with the requirements of
Specification.
c. The required submittals specified herein shall be grouped in the following
categories:
1) Programs and Schedules
2) Execution Method Statement
3) Shop/Coordination Drawings
4) Design Data and Calculations
5) Product Lists
6) Samples and Mock-ups
7) Test/Inspection reports & Certificates
8) Catalogues/Manufacturer’s Instructions
9) Project Record Documents
10) Operations and Maintenance Manuals
11) Guaranty and Warranty Certificates
12) Other as necessary – none
PART 2 - TESTING AND COMMISSIONING

2.01 GENERAL
A. Contractor to comply with the Estidama Requirements for the commissioning process
planning, execution and documentation with accordance to the Estidama IDP: R3 –
Basic Commissioning and IDP 5: Re-commissioning and as detailed in the Estidama
Design Commissioning Plan Developed by the Project Independent Commissioning
Authority”
B. The testing and commissioning shall be carried out in accordance with contract
requirements, by a firm specializing in this work, under no circumstances shall the
Contractor be allowed to use his own staff or affiliated companies for the Capital plant
such as switchboards, power factor correction equipment, fire alarm system, lighting
control and dimming system, central emergency lighting system, lifts, and specialized
ELV systems including CCTV and security systems etc.
C. The contractor shall submit to the CONSULTANT/EMPLOYER for approval his schedule
of program for the works; the program shall address the following:
1. Planned date of commencement of testing and commissioning.
2. Expected date of completion of testing and commissioning.
3. Power ON date.
4. Fire alarm ON date.
5. Telephone/Data system ‘ON’ date.
6. Actual testing and commissioning date and duration for each system.
D. The contractor shall submit for approval, a detailed method statement for each testing
and commissioning activity as described in section 1.3 above.
E. The contractor shall maintain written records of all tests.
F. Successful test records shall be counter signed by the CONSULTANT / MAIN

CONTRACTOR AND SUBCONTRACTOR and bound into the Operation and
Maintenance Manual. Upon completion of the testing and commissioning the Contractor
shall demonstrate to the CONSULTANT/EMPLOYER the following:
G. The original test sheets approved by all parties shall be submitted along with the O&M
Manuals.
1. Voltage within correct tolerances in accordance with the contract documents.
2. Power factor and harmonics in accordance with the Contract Documents.
3. Earthing in accordance with the contract Documents.
4. Illumination levels in accordance with the Contract Documents.
5. Correct control of all plant.
6. Structured cabling of telephone and data communication system
7. Fire alarm system.
8. Correct functioning of the following specialist systems and their integration:
a. Lighting Control system
b. IT system
c. Fire Alarm and voice evacuation system
H. An audit inspection at factory before dispatch and at site after receipt of the switchgear
for any manufacturing / transit defects.
I. The contractor shall co-ordinate with ESTIDAMA consultant to achieve ESTIDAMA

Pearl Building Rating System requirements for the project.
2.02 PRECOMMISSIONING AND COMMISSIONING CHECKS
A. Pre-commissioning/Commissioning check sheets for the following shall be submitted for

the CONSULTANT review:
1. SMDBs
2. DB / Final Light & Power Points
3. Specified Lighting Controls
4. Power and Control Cables
5. Grounding and Bonding
6. Lightning Protection System
7. Fire Alarm System
8. Emergency Lighting System
9. Programmable lighting control system
B. Once the procedures are agreed up on, the Inspection and testing reports for the above
systems shall be submitted for CONSULTANT/EMPLOYER review/approval.
C. The following inspections have to be carried out for any manufacturing defects/ transit
damages and inform the supplier immediately if found any defects
D. Manufacturing Defects:
1. Inspect the doors of cubicles for proper opening/closing including door
inter locks.
2. Ensure the bus bar supports and insulation is free from cracks and damages.
3. Ensure that the correct rating of the components such as fuses, contactors and
over load relays are as per the approved drawings.
4. Ensure that the physical condition of all meters, protection relays are good and
ranges are as per approved layouts.
5. Ensure all components are properly installed including CTs.
6. Ensure the overall dimension and colour of the cubicle is as per approved layout.
E. Transit Damages
1. Inspect the external surface of the cubicle for any transit damages and paint
scratches.
2. Inspect that batteries and chargers are not damaged during transit.
3. The following pre-requisites have to be ensured before pre-commissioning /
commissioning of the respective panels:
a. Colour coding / ferruling
b. Tightening all bus bar joints with torque wrench
c. Tightening of all connections
d. Termination of cables on the panels
e. Interlocks as per approved drawings
f. Inter panel wiring between various cubicles
g. Operation of space heaters
h. Control & power diagram of respective switchgear is readily available on
the panel board for reference
i. No loose tools left inside the panel
j. Availability of first aid / firefighting equipment
2.03 SMDB

A. Testing and commissioning shall be in accordance with specification section 26 2300
and including the following:
B. The contractor shall arrange for the witnessing of the following tests on the fully
equipped switchboard including primary bus bars and connections at the factory, in
accordance with IEC 439-1:
1. High voltage power frequency tests on main and auxiliary circuits
2. Dielectric/insulation resistance tests
3. Ground fault tests
4. Electrical operation of circuit breakers control circuits at the appropriate voltage
limits
5. Mechanical operations tests and tests to certify correct functioning of interlocks.
6. Primary injection tests
7. Secondary injection tests
8. Millivolt drop tests
9. Any other tests required by the CONSULTANT/EMPLOYER
C. The following tests shall be carried out after the equipment has been completely erected
and connected up on site:
1. Power frequency voltage tests on the completed switchgear
2. Insulation resistance tests on all main and secondary circuits
3. Secondary injection tests
4. Calibration checks on ammeters, voltmeters and any other instruments
5. Testing at normal voltage to prove that closing and tripping from local and remote
control points, tripping from relays and protective gear, interlocks, alarm and
indications, etc. are satisfactory.
6. Any other test required to prove compliance with the specification
7. At the end of tests, the protective relays and breaker tripping times shall be set in
accordance with the CONSULTANT/EMPLOYER approved discrimination
coordination.
D. Detailed Check List

1. Effectiveness of mechanical actuating elements
2. Door interlocks
3. Interconnection conductor sizes, laying and clamping/screwing
4. Visual inspection of degree of protection, creepage and clearance distances
5. Labels for feeders and circuit indications
6. Supply of operational instructions, wiring diagrams, technical data of equipment
used
7. Inspection and operational testing of the factory built assembly
8. Electrical controls and sequence of operation
9. Physical verification of drawings, including front and internal layouts
10. Single line diagrams & Control schemes
11. Check for cracks on components and housings
12. Correctness of sizes and terminations. Torque tables shall be followed.
Bolt size Tightening torque Tightening Force
Nm kN
M6 8 3
M8 20 6
M10 40 13
M12 70 22
M14 110 26

M16 170 35
13. Cable entry/tray provisions, top and bottom
14. Ventilation, anti-condensation heaters, and fans
15. Sealing/pad locking for meter cabinet
16. Phase barriers for incoming and outgoing breakers
17. Size of bus bars - neutral/earth
18. Gland plates
19. Colour codes for cables
20. Ferrules, labels etc.
21. Termination of ECCs with copper lugs
22. Wiring connections of CT meter - load side of incomer
23. Mounting height of Meter, max 2M min 0.8M
E. Dielectric tests (excluding components, lamps etc.)

1. All control fuses and electronic components shall be isolated
2. Test voltage of 2.5kV for 1 minute shall be applied between
3. Phase to phase
4. Phase to neutral
5. Phase to earth
6. Neutral to earth
F. Protective measures check/Electrical continuity of protective circuits

1. Capacity and continuity between:
a. All metal parts and main earth bar
b. Door and main earth bar
c. Continuity test according to control circuit diagram
d. Checking of indicator lamps (with transformers), voltmeter etc.
e. Outgoing circuits check with hand lamp
G. Physical Check
1. Check general arrangements of the components, internal wiring and complete
cleanliness.
2. Check the panel against approved shop drawing to ensure that right components
(ACB, MCCB) of correct ratings are installed.
3. Check the tray riser, cable drops cable overlapping and dressing of cable to
MDB.
4. Check all the bolts / nuts and bus bar connection to ensure that all are in good
and tight condition.
5. Check earth bonding of components and other related connection.
6. Check all meters and selector switches to ensure the correct selection & rating.
7. Check the phase barriers are properly fixed for separation of circuits.
8. Check all cables and panels are properly labeled and identified.
H. Insulation Resistance Check

1. Check and measure insulation resistance between phases, neutral and earth
with 1000 volts DC megger (the values to be verified with the permissible limits).
2. Check the terminal insulation, cable gland termination and shrouding.
I. Functional Test (Panel to be temporarily energized)

1. Check the control circuit of each system for its correct operation.
2. Switch ON and OFF of all MCCBs, contactors, relays to verify for the desired
operation.

3. Check draw out mechanism of main incomer ACB.
4. Check operation of the indication lamps & meters to ensure proper functioning.
5. Check functions of motor operated ACB/MCCBs
6. Check for any abnormal rise in temperature on bus bars. jumper cables,
terminals and various devices by using an infrared scanner.
J. Earth Leakage Test

1. Check earth leakage circuit breakers by means of RCCB tester, selecting 50%
100%, 150% of the rated sensitivity currents and the respective trip time to be
recorded.
2. Check the rating of core balance CTS and EL relays for earth leakage protection.
3. Tabulate the readings taken.
K. Earth Fault Loop Impedance Test

1. Measure the earth loop impedance across phase and protective conductor with
earth loop impedance tester.
2. Tabulate the reading taken and check with permissible values.
L. Polarity Test
1. Check the polarity of incomer supply by polarity tester before energising panels.
2. Check all fuses/circuit breakers and single pole control devices are connected to
phase conductors only.
M. Overall Performance Test - Check and ensure the satisfactory operation of the boards at
full load.
1. Any other tests as requested by the CONSULTANT/EMPLOYER.
N. THD Analysis , Thermal Imaging

1. THD Analysis, Thermal imaging should be carried out on the Electrical network
following energization at full load condition as per applicable standards.
2.04 FINAL DB LIGHT & POWER POINTS
A. Physical Check
1. Check the electrical components such as conduits, wires, trunking, light fixtures,
socket outlets are connected to the final circuit of the distribution board.
2. Check the installation of distribution boards and internal wiring.
3. Check the identification and labelling of each final circuits.
4. Check that all metallic components are earthed/bonded.
5. Check the terminal insulation, cable gland termination and shrouding.
B. Polarity Check
1. Check the polarity of power / light points to ensure the light switches (single pole)
are installed in the line conductor.
2. Check for screw type lamp holders. the outer or screwed conductor is connected
to the neutral conductor.
C. Continuity Check
1. Check the continuity of the protective conductor from the farthest point to main
earth terminal of the DB for each final circuit by means of a DC ohm meter
verifies the values are within permissible limit).

2. Check the continuity between the open ends of each of the three rings of circuit
(i.e. phase, neutral and earth) for all ring final circuits conductors with a multi
meter and the value to be within the permissible limit.
D. Insulation Resistance Test - Check and measure the insulation resistance between
phase, neutral and earth through a 500 Volts, Megger.
1. RCB and Polarity Test
a. Switch on and off all ELCB and MCB and contactor relay to verify for the
desired operation.
b. Check earth leakage circuit breakers by means of ELCB tester.
c. Check the circuit performance by switching on the MCB in the DB.
d. Check the light and power points by operating all the switches connected
in the circuits.
e. Check all the sockets outlets of ring/radial circuits with 3 pin socket tester
(13A)/test lamp.
f. Tabulate the readings taken.
E. Earth Fault Loop Impedance Test

1. Measure the earth loop impedance across phase and protective conductor with
earth loop impedance tester.
2. Tabulate the readings taken and compare with permissible values.
2.05 LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM

1. Physical Check
a. Check the breakers are properly grouped to the appropriate contactors for
on/off control.
b. Check the system cables are properly terminated to the corresponding
lighting group.
c. Check the identification and labeling of different lighting groups are
provided.
d. Check the operation of override switch.
2. Function Test
a. Check the system time channel settings required for night reduction.
b. Monitor the system operation during time channel set time period.
c. Controls of automatic lighting systems shall comply with ADIEC-505.2.4
functional testing.
2.06 LV POWER AND CONTROL CABLES
A. Physical Check
1. Check the cable installation and ensure the following:
a. Proper laying and dressing cable cleating /tying cable.
b. Tray supports are adequate.
c. Cable identification and labeling.
d. Glanding and gland earthing termination is correct.
e. No physical damage.
B. Insulation Resistance Test

1. Conduct insulation resistance test as per cables manufacturer recommendations,
and test requirements.
2. Measure insulation resistance between cores of all LV cable with a 500 V
Megger and tabulate readings, the readings to be verified with permissible limits
(min. 10 Mega ohms)
3. Measure insulation resistance between cores and ECC and earth terminal with a
500 V Megger and tabulate readings. the readings to be verified with permissible
limit.
C. Phase Rotation Test- Phase rotation at all points should be same other wise rectify.
D. Performance Test (to be energized temporarily)

1. Switch on all isolators and run all equipment, for 2 hours and verify complete
performance.
2. Check for any unusual temperature rise in cables, terminals and switches and
protective devices.
2.07 GROUNDING AND BONDING

1. Physical Check
a. Check all the earth electrodes in earth pits for proper installation and
connection.
b. Check all the protective conductors from the earth electrodes to the
MDB’s and DB’s for proper installation and connection.
2. Earth Electrode Resistance
a. Remove the protective conductor connection from the electrode.
b. Measure earth electrode resistance by using an earth megger.
c. Repeat the above for all pits and tabulate readings.
3. Continuity Test
a. Check proper earth bonding by checking continuity of protective
conductor by a D.C. ohm meter.
4. The above to be checked for all protective conductors to various equipment.
5. Check the continuity resistance between the main earth terminal of the MDB/DB
and the farthest equipment by a DC ohm meter.
2.08 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM

part 3.2 and including the following:
1. Physical Check
a. Check the proper jointing of copper tapes with accessories and earth
electrodes.
b. Clean and tighten all joints.
B. Earth Electrode Resistance

1. Remove the lightning system continuity conductor connection from the earth
electrodes.
2. Measure the earth electrode resistance by using an earth megger.
3. Repeat the above for all pits and tabulate readings.
C. Continuity Test
1. Check proper connection by checking continuity between lightning protection
conductor at the selected farthest points and the earth electrode by using a DC
ohm-meter.
2. Check continuity resistance between the lightning protection conductor and the
metallic frame works bonded with the lightning protection system by using DC
ohm-meter.
3. Repeat the above for entire network and record the readings.
2.09 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
A. Engage a factory trained and authorized service representative to inspect field-

assembled components and connections and to supervise installation, pre-testing,
testing, and adjustment of the system. Report results in writing.
B. After installation, perform complete pre-testing and determine the compliance of the
system with requirements of the Drawings and Specification. Correct deficiencies
observed in pre-testing. Replace malfunctioning or damaged items with new ones, and
retest until satisfactory performance and conditions are achieved. Prepare forms for
systematic recording of acceptance test results.
C. After pre-testing is complete, provide a letter certifying the installation is complete and
fully operable, including the names and titles of witnesses to preliminary tests.
D. Provide a minimum of 10 days' notice in writing when the system is ready for final
acceptance testing.
E. Testing and commissioning shall be in accordance with specification section 28 3100

1. Visual Checks
a. Check installation of fire alarm system cables for proper laying,
termination, clipping, labeling, identification.
b. Check cable connection to the F.A.C.P. battery, repeater panel.
2. Insulation Resistance Test
a. Check insulation resistance between cores with a 500 V megger.
b. Tabulate readings.
3. Functional Checks
a. Fire Alarm:
1) Put the system into operation as per manufacturer’s
recommendation.
2) Simulate fire conditions by generating smoke/heat to activate the
detectors.
3) Check display of detector number check operation of LED on the
detector
4) Short Circuit and Earth fault testing shall be done following the
system energization
5) System Performance testing shall be carried out for 24 hours
standby followed by 30 minutes alarm condition at full load.
b. Check display on network.
c. Check the printer operation.
d. Fault Alarm:

1) Simulate fault situations like power failure, battery on, open circuit.
2) Check visual display in the panel.
4. Interlock Check
a. Simulate fire conditions in each zone.
b. Check that the FAHU/AHU in that zone cuts out.
c. Check the operation of fire roller shutters pressurization fans, lifts, VA
system and extract fans.
5. Monitoring Features
a. Activate the sprinklers/fire hose reel
b. Check panel monitoring facility for fire pumps/sprinkler pump/zone control
valves.
6. Other Checks
a. Test Both Primary and Secondary Power: Verify by test that the
secondary power system is capable of operating the system for the period
and in the manner specified.
b. Sound Levels: Measure and submit audible sound levels. Verify that 15
decibels (dB) above ambient noise levels or 5 dB above the maximum
sound level that occurs at the location for 60 seconds or more, but not
greater than 120 dB, are achieved.
c. Tag all equipment, stations, and other components at which tests have
been satisfactorily completed.
d. Contractor shall be responsible to replace and make operational all
damaged equipment/accessories, if any, which are part of existing, while
connecting to existing system.
7. Demonstration and Training
a. Engage a factory-authorized and trained service representative to train
the Employer's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for
operating, adjusting, troubleshooting, and servicing system.
b. Provide a minimum of eight hours' training in operation and maintenance.
c. Demonstrate full functionality of the system as specified to the acceptance
of the Engineer, Employer, and Authorities having jurisdiction.
2.10 EMERGENCY LIGHTING SYSTEM
A. Visual Checks
1. Check the cable entries with regards to their tightness.
2. Check the general arrangements of components and wiring.
3. Rating and details of components.
4. Labels and identifications.
5. Earthing of components and related connections.
6. Check the polarity.
B. Insulation Resistance Test

1. Disconnect and bridge the mains connecting lead.
2. Disconnect and bridge the cable to the emergency lights.
3. Carry out insulation measurement to PE.
4. Remove the bridges after the insulation resistance measurement.
5. Reconnect the mains connecting lead and cable the emergency lights.
C. Other Tests

1. Measure light intensities at night to confirm specific illumination performance as
indicated. Use calibrated photometers.
2. Check intensity and uniformity of illumination.
3. Check excessively noisy ballasts.
4. Emergency lighting system performance testing shall be carried out for 3 hours at
the rated load capacity (i.e. Battery autonomy and luminance test)
5. Current measurement for emergency lighting circuits shall be recorded as part of
performance test.
6. Interrupt electrical supply to demonstrate proper operation. Verify normal transfer
to battery source and retransfer to normal.
7. Malfunctioning Fixtures and Components: Replace or repair, then retest. Repeat
procedure until units operate properly.
8. Corrosive Fixtures: Replace during warranty period or effect liability period
whichever is later.
2.11 LIGHTING
A. Verify the correct lamps, position, ballast and operation of all fixtures.
B. With all lighting in operation, measure the average illuminance on the floor/working
plane by establishing the maximum and minimum levels in the following locations:
C. Exits, public corridors, corridors leading to exits, electrical equipment rooms, elevator
machine rooms and hoistway pits, offices, storage rooms, service rooms, garages,
washrooms and stairways.
D. Every place of assembly rooms and areas as directed by the CONSULTANT/

EMPLOYER.
E. With only the emergency lighting in operation, measure the average illumination at exits,
public corridors, floor areas where the public may congregate and other rooms and
areas as directed by the CONSULTANT/EMPLOYER.
F. Take readings at night, with no outside light contribution.
G. Current measurement for normal lighting circuits shall be recorded as part of

performance test.
H. Take readings with a cosine corrected portable digital illuminance meter, or with a video
camcorder with suitable software for illuminance measurements. Measuring
instruments shall be tested, calibrated and certified accurate to within 2%.
I. Submit technical, testing and calibration data as well as certification on the photometer.
J. All readings results should match the required illuminance levels as specified in relevant
sections.
K. Plot lighting results on a set of reproducible plans for review by THE CONSULTANT/
EMPLOYER and submission to the authorities.
2.12 TESTING OF ELECTRICAL POWER INSTALLATION

A. Earth continuity tests on conduit and trunking shall be checked and confirmed prior to
commencing wiring.
B. Tests should be carried out in accordance with Part 7 of BS 7671 together with
Guidance Notes, number 3 as issued by the IEE, and should also include the following:-
1. Conductive parts - test conductive parts simultaneously accessible with exposed
conductive parts of extraneous conductive paths.
2. Generally conductive paths are not extraneous conductive paths if separate from
earth by an impedance of greater than 50M ohms. Confirm conductive paths are
bonded to equipotential zone earth bar by an impedance not exceeding 0.1
ohms.
3. Prospective short circuit current (PSSC) - To determine suitability of terminal and
intermediate equipment the values of PSSC should be measured (unless these
can be verified by alternative means).
4. Pressure tests (see below)
5. Full load test (1 hour duration)
C. During the full load test voltage and current readings at the final sub-circuit, sub-main
and main intake positions shall be taken. This test shall be carried out at the completion
of works and again (at the discretion of the MEP Consultant) at the end of defects
period.
D. In the event of any test failing to comply, that test and those proceeding (the results
which may have been influenced by the fault) shall be repeated after rectification of the
report.
E. The Contractor shall include for the supply all test instruments and labour required to
complete the testing and commissioning works. Tests shall only be carried out by
competent persons.
F. The MEP Consultant shall be given at least seven working days notice in writing of the
time when it is proposed to carry out any test to enable him to be present during the
test(s) if required.
G. Serial numbers of all test instruments shall be logged and noted on results sheets. All
instruments shall have a current calibration certificate.
H. Duplicate typewritten copies of the completed test reports shall be forwarded to the MEP
Consultant within seven days of the date when the tests are carried out.
I. The test certificate shall clearly state the following:-

1. Serial number of test instrument use with copies of valid current calibration
certificates
2. Apparatus or Section under test
3. Makers name, if any, or equipment installed
4. Nature, duration and conditions of test
5. Results of test
6. Any particulars required to comply with IEE Regulations etc, together with
particulars requested elsewhere in the specification
7. Name of personnel involved in test
8. Date of test
F. No test shall be valid until the test certificates are provided.

2.13 STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEM

parts 3.4 and including the following:
1. Visual inspection to ensure the items as indicated below:
a. Horizontal and backbone cabling are installed in accordance with the
applicable codes and standards.
b. Labelling and identification are in accordance with ANSI/TIA/EIA-606
c. Earthing and bonding are provided as per related codes/standards and to
local authority requirement.
d. Connecting hardware and all other cabling system components are
installed by proper cable preparation, termination practices, orientation,
proper cable management, and mounting that are in full compliance with
manufacturer’s guide lines to avoid signal impairment.
e. Circuit protectors are provided for all cabling which enter or exit the
building in comply with applicable codes and standards.
f. Enough clearance and separation from electrical cabling and equipment
in accordance with applicable codes/standards and manufacturer’s
recommendations are provided to avoid electromagnetic
interference(EMI)
g. The maximum cable pulling tension and minimum bending radius not
exceeds manufacturer’s specification and applicable codes/standards.
h. The amount of untwisting in a pair for UTP copper cable as a result of
termination to connecting hardware is less than 13mm or as per
manufacturer’s guidelines.
i. Cables of different transmission performance categories are terminated in
different termination fields.
j. No more than two pieces of connecting hardware in a cross connect.
k. All fiber cables are connected straight with no transpositions of fiber pairs
or cores/strands.
l. Section length in compliance with the maximum length requirement.
m. The number of bends in the installation is the minimal.
n. Visual inspection for any damages in cables.
2.14 TESTING OF UTP COPPER CABLES
A. All transmission testing shall be performed with an approved UTP field tester which shall
be factory calibrated by the field test equipment manufacturer. Calibration certificate
shall be submitted for CONSULTANT/EMPLOYER approval.
B. All UTP test cords, adapters, etc to be used for testing shall be supplied and verified by
the test equipment manufacturer to meet or exceed the requirements of TSB-67 and
qualified to test CAT 6 cabling system.
C. Following shall be included in the testing:

1. Horizontal Basic Link Model
2. Backbone Basic Link Model
3. Horizontal Channel Test Model
4. Backbone Channel Test Model

D. Following transmission parameters shall be tested for the installed structured cabling
system using the filed tester:
1. WIRE MAP
2. LENGTH (physical vs. electrical, and length requirements)
3. INSERTION Loss.
4. Near-end crosstalkNEXT Loss ( pair to pair)
5. Power sum near-end crosstalk (PSNEXT) loss.
6. FEXT
7. Equal-level far-end crosstalk ELFEXT ( pair to pair)
8. Power sum equal-level far-end crosstalk (PSELFEXT)
9. ATTENUATION to cross talk ratio
10. RETURN LOSS
11. PROPAGATION DELAY
12. DELAY SKEW
13. DC LOOP RESISTANCE
14. IMPEDANCE
15. INSERTION AND RETURN LOSS
E. All ‘PASS’ test result shall be down loaded into the database software that has been
provided by the field test equipment manufacturer.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 26 0923
LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
1. Time switches.
2. Photoelectric switches.
3. Standalone daylight-harvesting switching and dimming controls.
4. Indoor occupancy and vacancy sensors.
5. Digital timer light switches.
6. Lighting contactors.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 26 2726 "Wiring Devices" for wall-box dimmers, non-networkable wall-
switch occupancy sensors, and manual light switches.
1.02 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Show installation details for the following:
a. Occupancy sensors.
b. Vacancy sensors.
2. Interconnection diagrams showing field-installed wiring.
3. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.
1.03 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plan(s) and elevations, drawn to scale, on

which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from
installers of the items involved:
1. Suspended ceiling components.
2. Structural members to which equipment will be attached.
3. Items penetrating finished ceiling, including the following:
a. Luminaires.
b. Air outlets and inlets.
c. Speakers.
d. Sprinklers.
e. Access panels.
f. Control modules.
KEO/21-7387-0004 26 0923 / 1 Lighting Control Devices
B. Field quality-control reports.
C. Sample Warranty: For manufacturer's warranties.
1.04 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type of lighting control device to include in
operation and maintenance manuals.
B. Software and Firmware Operational Documentation:

1. Software operating and upgrade manuals.
2. Program Software Backup: On USB media. Provide names, versions, and
website addresses for locations of installed software.
3. Device address list.
4. Printout of software application and graphic screens.
1.05 WARRANTY
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS

2.02 TIME SWITCHES
A. Manufacturers: Refer to Vendor List for list of approved manufacturer.
B. Electromechanical-Dial Time Switches:

1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and
marked for intended location and application.
2. Contact Configuration: DPST.
3. Contact Rating: 30-A inductive or resistive, 240-V ac.
4. Circuitry: Allows connection of a photoelectric relay as a substitute for the on-off
function of a program.
5. Astronomic time dial.
6. Eight-Day Program: Uniquely programmable for each weekday and holidays.
7. Skip-a-day mode.

8. Wound-spring reserve carryover mechanism to keep time during power failures,
minimum of 16 hours.
2.03 OUTDOOR PHOTOELECTRIC SWITCHES
B. Description: Solid state, with DPST dry contacts rated for 1800 VA inductive, to operate
connected relay, contactor coils, or microprocessor input and compatible with ballasts
and LED lamps.
2. Light-Level Monitoring Range: 1.5 to 10 fc (16.14 to 108 lux), with an adjustment
for turn-on and turn-off levels within that range and a directional lens in front of
the photocell to prevent fixed light sources from causing turn-off.
3. Time Delay: Fifteen-second minimum, to prevent false operation.
4. Surge Protection: Metal-oxide varistor.
5. Mounting: Twist lock complies with base-and-stem mounting or stem-and-swivel
mounting accessories as required to direct sensor to the north sky exposure.
6. Failure Mode: Luminaire stays ON.
2.04 INDOOR OCCUPANCY SENSORS
B. General Requirements for Sensors:

1. Ceiling-mounted, solid-state indoor occupancy sensors.
2. Passive infrared.
3. Integrated power pack.
4. Hardwired connection to switch.
6. Operation:
a. Occupancy Sensor: Unless otherwise indicated, turn lights on when
coverage area is occupied, and turn them off when unoccupied; with a
time delay for turning lights off, adjustable over a minimum range of 1 to
15 minutes.
7. Sensor Output: Contacts rated to operate the connected relay,
8. Coordinate "Power" and "Power Pack" paragraphs with sensor type.
9. Power: Line voltage.
10. Power Pack: Dry contacts rated for 20-A ballast or LED load at 230 V ac,
11. Mounting:
a. Sensor: Suitable for mounting in any position on a standard outlet box.
b. Relay: Externally mounted through a 1/2-inch (13-mm) knockout in a
standard electrical enclosure.
c. Time-Delay and Sensitivity Adjustments: Recessed and concealed behind
hinged door.
12. Indicator: Digital display, to show when motion is detected during testing and
normal operation of sensor.
13. Bypass Switch: Override the "on" function in case of sensor failure.

14. Automatic Light-Level Sensor: Adjustable from 2 to 200 fc (21.5 to 2152 lux); turn
lights off when selected lighting level is present.
C. PIR Type: Ceiling mounted; detect occupants in coverage area by their heat and
movement.
1. Detector Sensitivity: Detect occurrences of 6-inch- (150-mm-) minimum
movement of any portion of a human body that presents a target of not less than
36 sq. in. (232 sq. cm).
2. Detection Coverage (Room, Ceiling Mounted): Detect occupancy anywhere in a
circular area of 1000 sq. ft. (93 sq. m) when mounted on a 96-inch- (2440-mm-)
high ceiling.
3. Detection Coverage (Corridor, Ceiling Mounted): Detect occupancy within 90 feet
(27.4 m) when mounted on a 10-foot- (3-m-) high ceiling.
D. Ultrasonic Type: Ceiling mounted; detect occupants in coverage area through pattern
changes of reflected ultrasonic energy.
1. Detector Sensitivity: Detect a person of average size and weight moving not less
than 12 inches (305 mm) in either a horizontal or a vertical manner at an
approximate speed of 12 inches/s (305 mm/s).
2. Detection Coverage (Small Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular
area of 600 sq. ft. (56 sq. m) when mounted on a 96-inch- (2440-mm-) high
ceiling.
3. Detection Coverage (Standard Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a
circular area of 1000 sq. ft. (93 sq. m) when mounted on a 96-inch- (2440-mm-)
high ceiling.
4. Detection Coverage (Large Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular
area of 2000 sq. ft. (186 sq. m) when mounted on a 96-inch- (2440-mm-) high
ceiling.
5. Detection Coverage (Corridor): Detect occupancy anywhere within 90 feet
(27.4 m) when mounted on a 10-foot- (3-m-) high ceiling in a corridor not wider
than 14 feet (4.3 m).
2.05 LIGHTING CONTACTORS
B. Description: Electrically operated and mechanically held, combination-type lighting

contactors with fusible switch.
1. Current Rating for Switching: Listing or rating consistent with type of load served,
including tungsten filament, inductive, and high-inrush ballast (ballast with 15
percent or less THD of normal load current).
2. Fault Current Withstand Rating: Equal to or exceeding the available fault current
at the point of installation.
3. Provide with control and pilot devices as indicated on Drawings and scheduled,
4. Retain "Interface with DDC System for HVAC" Paragraph below for interface with
the DDC system for HVAC. Coordinate with Section 23 0923 "Direct Digital
Control (DDC) System for HVAC."
2.06 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Power Wiring to Supply Side of Remote-Control Power Sources: Not smaller than
No. 1.5mm. Comply with requirements in Section 26 0519 "Low-Voltage Electrical
Power Conductors and Cables."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine lighting control devices before installation. Reject lighting control devices that
are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.
B. Examine walls and ceilings for suitable conditions where lighting control devices will be
installed.
3.02 SENSOR INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of ceiling-mounted devices with other construction

that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC
equipment, smoke detectors, fire-suppression systems, and partition assemblies.
B. Install and aim sensors in locations to achieve not less than 90-percent coverage of
areas indicated. Do not exceed coverage limits specified in manufacturer's written
instructions.
3.03 CONTACTOR INSTALLATION
A. Mount electrically held lighting contactors with elastomeric isolator pads to eliminate
structure-borne vibration unless contactors are installed in an enclosure with factory-
installed vibration isolators.
3.04 WIRING INSTALLATION
A. Wiring Method: Comply with Section 26 0519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors
and Cables." Minimum conduit size is 1/2 inch (13 mm).
B. Wiring within Enclosures: Separate power-limited and nonpower-limited conductors

according to conductor manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Size conductors according to lighting control device manufacturer's written instructions

D. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Make connections only on numbered terminal strips in
junction, pull, and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures.
3.05 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify components and power and control wiring according to Section 26 0553
"Identification for Electrical Systems."
1. Identify controlled circuits in lighting contactors.
2. Identify circuits or luminaires controlled by photoelectric and occupancy sensors
at each sensor.
B. Label time switches and contactors with a unique designation.
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test

and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including
connections.
B. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized
service representative:
1. Operational Test: After installing time switches and sensors, and after electrical
circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper unit operation.
C. Lighting control devices will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and
inspections.
D. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.07 ADJUSTING
A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months from date of Substantial

Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting lighting control devices to suit actual
occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal
occupancy hours for this purpose.
1. For occupancy and motion sensors, verify operation at outer limits of detector
range. Set time delay to suit Owner's operations.
B. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain lighting control devices.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 26 2300
LOW VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 REFERENCE
A. This section forms part of every section of Division 14 for Conveying Systems, Division
26 for Electrical, Division 28 for Electronic Safety and Security.
B. Conform to General Requirements for Electrical Services.
1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Supply and installation of sub main distribution boards (SMDB), final distribution boards
(FDB) or (DB), motor starters panel (CP) and related accessories.
B. This specification section covers the design and fabrication of low voltage switch gear
including all items of equipment and materials necessary to complete the assembly and
the information, documents and data required to be supplied by the supplier.
C. Any separate panels shall be as detailed hereafter. Separate panels shall comply with
the requirements of this specification section.
A. Design, manufacture, testing and method of installation of all assemblies and the
associated equipment furnished under requirements of these specifications shall
conform to latest publications or standard rules of the following codes and standards to
the extent specified herein. When an edition date is not indicated for a Code or
Standard the latest edition enforced at the time of proposal submitted shall apply.
B. Product selection for restricted space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for the
equipment, including clearance between the equipment and adjacent surfaces and
items. Switchboards having equal performance characteristics and complying with
indicated maximum dimensions may be considered.
C. All panel boards shall be manufactured only by manufacturer having BSEN ISO 9001
Certificates.
D. The local panel manufacturer shall be an authorized agent of the principal switchboard
manufacturer. A stamped certificate from the principal manufacturer shall be submitted
along with the submittals confirming that all the equipment used in the panel boards by
the local manufacturer is type tested and supplied by the principal and the assembly of
KEO/21-7387-0004 26 2300 / 1 Low Voltage Distribution Equipment

the panel boards will be in accordance with the fully type tested panels which were
certified by the independent testing laboratory.
1.04 CODES & STANDARDS
The assemblies and the associated equipment shall confirm to the requirements of the
latest edition of the following standards and codes where applicable:
A. IEC 61439-1 Low-voltage switchboard and controlgear assemblies – Part 1: General

rules.
B. IEC 61439-2 Low-voltage switchboard and controlgear assemblies – Part 2: Power

switchboard and controlgear assemblies
C. IEC61641 Enclosed low voltage switchboard and control gear assemblies Guide for
testing under conditions of arcing due to internal fault
D. IEC60044-1 Current transformers
E. IEC60186 Voltage transformers
F. IEC60529 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures
G. IEC60947-2 Low voltage switchboard & control gear – part 2 Circuit breakers
H. IEC60947-3 Switches, disconnectors, switch-disconnectors and fuse-combination units.
I. IEC60068 Environmental testing
J. IEC61140 Protection against electric shock – Common aspects for installation and
equipment – Basic safety publication
K. IEC60 947-4-1 Contactors and motor starters
L. IEC 60947-1:2000 LV switchboard & control gear-General Rules.
M. IEC 337-2: Control devices.
N. IEC 51 Indicating measuring instruments.
O. BS 88 Cartridge fuses.
P. BS 142 Electrical protective relays.
Q. BS 159 Busbar & connections.
R. BS 37 Electricity meters-General
S. Applicable local laws and regulations:
T. Abu Dhabi Distribution Company (ADDC) latest revision/amendment of the Electricity

Wiring Regulation issued by RSB

U. The Contractor shall also submit test certificates such as ASTA or as issued by any
other independent testing authority confirming the declared short circuit ratings of Switch
Boards and circuit breakers.
V. The low-voltage electrical switchboard must be a fully factory Type Tested Assembly
(TTA), as per the local authority’s mandatory requirement and compliant with IEC
61439-1 and 2.
W. Prior to placing order of the equipment, ensure that the physical dimensions of the
equipment do not infringe the working space required by the applicable standards.
X. Single-Source Responsibility: Ensure that each category of selected material or

equipment shall be of a particular range of one manufacturer who would take full
responsibility of the product.
Y. The switchboard manufacturer must have a previous record of satisfactory service for at
least (10) years.
Z. All main switchboards and motor control centres manufactured by overseas

manufacturer shall be submitted for testing by an internationally approved laboratory
testing agency and test certificates issued accordingly shall be submitted prior to
delivery to shipment. Locally manufactured switchboards and control centres shall be
tested at the manufacturer’s testing laboratory witnessed. The tests shall be done in
accordance with IEC 439 and shall include:
1. Mechanical test,
2. Voltage test,
3. Short circuit test,
4. Primary injection test for all circuit breakers and meters
5. Secondary test for all protective relays
6. Millivolt droptest
7. Insulation test
8. Function test
AA. All test certificates shall be forwarded for the same.
BB. The contractor is responsible for complying with all codes, which apply to the
equipment. Any special certification requirements or inspection by other authorities
arising from the above shall be arranged by the contractor and the costs for the same
included in this quotation.
CC. The equipment to be provided by vendor must be in complete compliance with this
specification and reference codes. Exceptions or deviations if any, shall be listed
separately, with the quotation for THE CONSULTANT's approval. Any exception, which
is not listed, shall not be considered.
1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS:
A. Verify dimensions by field measurements.
B. Determine suitable path for moving switchboard into place considering project
conditions.

C. Verify clearance requirements. Locate switchboard to meet installation tolerances.
D. Revise locations and elevations from those indicated as required to suit project
conditions.
A. Deliver in sections or lengths that can be moved past obstructions in delivery path.
B. Store indoors in clean dry space with uniform temperature to prevent condensation.
Protect from exposure to dirt, fumes, water, corrosive substances, and physical
damage.
C. If stored in areas subjected to weather, cover switchboards to provide protection from

weather, dirt, corrosive substances, and physical damage. Remove loose packing and
flammable materials from inside switchboards; install temporary cooling to prevent
condensation.
1.07 SUBMITTALS
A. Manufacturers Technical Data

1. During the time of the contract and before Date of Taking Over Certificate of the
electrical installation, submit to CONSULTANT three (3) copies of descriptive
literature, technical data, maintenance recommendations (from the equipment
manufacturer), catalogues etc.
B. Test Reports
1. Provide test reports prepared in accordance with ADDC requirements and to the
CONSULTANT approval. Provide other tests reports as necessary to establish
the adequacy, quality, safety, completed status, and suitable operation of each
system.
2. The test reports to include the following:
a. Test procedures used.
b. Test results that comply with requirements.
c. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results
that comply with requirements.
C. Installation Instructions
1. Submit the complete manufacturers installation instructions of all the products
used.
D. Calculations
1. Forward the following calculations and data:
a. Calculations and charts proving that discrimination in the breaker
characteristics is achieved.
b. Detailed short circuit level calculation to select the short circuit rating of
the various switchboards.
c. Bus bar sizing calculation for each switchboard.
d. Calculation for temperature rise inside switchboards
E. Shop drawings

1. The contractor shall furnish the following drawings and documents along this
submittal for approval:
a. Fully dimensional drawing showing outline of the switchboards
arrangement and position of important external features. These drawings
shall show masses, crane lift necessary for un-tanking and size of lifting
lugs or eyes.
b. Power single line diagrams showing all auxiliary devices.
c. Original catalogues for various proposed components.
d. Drawings of nameplate and all termination arrangements.
e. Drawing giving typical mechanical and electrical details of the voltage
control apparatus.
f. Details of cable terminations and fittings.
g. Foundation plan, including foundation loading.
h. Schematic and connection diagrams covering all equipment pertaining to
the switch board.
i. Type and special test certificates as applicable
j. Approved test certificate / test report
k. Schedule of Accessories and Fittings
l. Technical Manual giving installation, operation and maintenance
instructions
m. Schedule of recommended spare parts.
A. Refer to Section 26 5910 – Warranty and Extra Material List
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS

2.02 DISTRIBUTION BOARDS
A. Description
1. The specification hereunder shall be applied to all panel boards referenced on
the drawings/load schedules as DB, EDB or UDB. The distribution board shall be
flush / surface mounted and shall be provided with standard extension box to
allow cable glanding if required.
2. Distribution boards shall be split busbar type, and shall have isolator as main
incomer and RCD type earth leakage protection device shall be provided for

each section, with a sensitivity of 10, 30 or 100 mA, as indicated on the approved
load schedules. Final Distribution board shall have different levels of earth
leakage protection as recommended by ADDC regulations.
3. Outgoing breakers shall be either MCB or RCBO as indicated on the approved
load schedule.
4. As a standard item, all MCB boards shall be provided with permanent circuit
identification charts to the approval of the CONSULTANT.
5. MCBs shall comply with IEC – 898 and RCBOs shall comply with BSEN 61009.
ELCBs shall comply with BSEN 61008.
6. DBs inside electrical rooms shall be surface mounted type fixed onto a U channel
support, and shall be flush mounted elsewhere (LABs, workshops, etc.
7. Short circuit calculation shall be submitted for Consultant approval.
8. All DBs shall meet ADDC requirement.
B. Enclosures
1. The MCB Distribution Boards shall be surface/flush mounted type. The
enclosures within Electrical rooms must be surface mounting type. Powder
coated rustproof sheet steel units, complete with circuit breakers providing
thermal overload and magnetic short-circuit and earth fault protection as shown
on the drawings. The enclosure protection shall be IP 31, while the complete
assembly shall comply with IEC – 439-1.
2. Enclosures outside electrical room shall have key-lock opening.
C. Busbar
1. The MCBs shall be mounted on either 3 phase or single phase or split busbars
as appropriate. All spaces which are not provided with breakers shall be covered
with blank plates.
2. A final sub-circuit neutral assembly and an earthing bar assembly shall be
available to facilitate the connection of neutral conductors and protective
conductors respectively.
3. To be of appropriate current carrying capacity at least equal to the rating of the
main incoming MCCB isolator.
4. To be of copper.
D. Miniature Circuit Breakers

1. Miniature circuit breakers, and earth leakage circuit breaker and shall be
provided as indicated on the load schedules.
2. The short circuit rating for the MCBs shall be 17KA, 0.25 Sec for DB’s.
3. All circuit breakers shall be factory calibrated to ambient temperature of 50 deg.
C.
4. MCB shall comply with IEC 947-2 or IEC 60898 and shall be symmetrical rail
mounted type available in one, two, three or four poles version.
5. They shall be trip free type with quick make and quick break mechanism.
6. The rated ultimate breaking capacity (Icu) of the MCB's shall be at least equal to
the prospective fault level at the point of the distribution system where they are
installed.
7. The minimum rated ultimate breaking capacity (Icu) of the MCB shall be 17kA if
not indicated on the drawings.
8. It shall be possible to reverse feed the MCB without reduction in performance.
9. Trip ratings as indicated on the schedules of points.
10. The MCB shall have thermal overload trip to accept 5% overload and to trip at
30% of rated current as per IEC 947-2.

11. The instantaneous magnetic trip shall operate at 5 to 10 times the rated current
for 1P, 2P, 3P or 4P breakers, unless otherwise indicated on the drawings.
12. It shall be possible to replace 3 single-phase units with one 3-phase unit.
13. The breakers shall be of DIN type.
14. Evidence of the ultimate breaking capacity (Icu) shall be produced by test
certificates from one of the internationally recognised High Voltage Laboratories
(ASTA, CESI, ESEF/ASEFA, KEMA, or PEHLA).
15. The operating mechanism shall be mechanically trip free from the operating
handle so as to prevent the contacts from being held closed against short circuit
and overload conditions. It shall be "automatic resetting type".
16. The operating handle shall be of the toggle type with possibility of padlocking
facility and rotary handle.
17. Each pole shall be provided with bi-metallic thermal element for overload
protection and magnetic element for short circuit protection.
18. Current discriminations tables shall be provided for each rating of the breaker.
19. The terminals shall be of the tunnel type (IP-20) in order to minimize the risk of
direct contact.
20. It shall be possible to fit at the site auxiliaries like shunt trip coil, under voltage
release, ON-OFF switch, alarm switch or residual current device 30 or 300 mA
with remote tripping possibility.
21. Distribution will be provided with 10% of spare protective Device or blank
positions.
2.03 DISCONNECT SWITCH
A. Disconnect switches (isolators) shall be manufactured to IEC and British standards.
B. Disconnect switches shall be heavy duty (AC23) with operating handle interlocked with
the switch cover, in general purpose rust proof aluminum enclosure and to IP44 finished
in gray stove finish.
C. Switches shall be quick make, quick break action. Provision shall be made for
padlocking in either the “On” or “Off” position.
D. Switch blades shall be fully visible when in the “Off” position.
E. Operating handles shall be interlocked to prevent doors from being opened when switch
is closed. Provision shall be made to defeat this interlock with a screwdriver.
F. Fuse clips shall be designed for HRC BS 88/IEC 269 fuses without adapters and shall
reject standard code fuses.
G. Switches mounted outside, in damp or dusty locations and unconditioned areas shall be
supplied in weather resistant enclosures IP 65 made of aluminium with double wall
construction.
H. The enclosures shall be provided with ON and OFF indication lights with test facility.
I. Sample and catalogues with installation details shall be submitted for approval by THE
CONSULTANT prior to ordering.

J. Provide a disconnect switch ahead of all motors, starters and electrical equipment
where shown on the drawings and where required to meet Code regulations and
jurisdictional authorities, whether the equipment is supplied or installed under the
Electrical Division or any other division.
K. All disconnect switches shall be provided with tag to THE CONSULTANT approval to
indicate equipment connected to the switch. The feeding circuit reference and the
related distribution board number.
L. All disconnect switches feeding life safety equipment such as emergency lighting, fire
alarm, fire pump, jockey pump, smoke control fans, etc. shall be fire rated.
2.04 MOTOR STARTERS
A. Description
1. Starters shall be manufactured and type tested in accordance with IEC 947-4
and IEC 947-4-1
2. All motors shall be provided with heavy duty contactor type motor fuseless
starters selected for coordination type 2 in accordance with IEC 947-4 generally
complying with the following and protected through circuit breaker.
a. 3KW direct on line starting
b. 3KW to 25KW Star Delta starting
c. 25KW and above reduced voltage electronic soft starters.
3. Each starter panel (CPs) shall be provided with a main incoming MCCB capable
of carrying the full load current. Each starter shall comprise as a minimum:
a. On load triple pole MCCB with two normally open and one normally
closed auxiliary switches. The MCCB to be mechanically interlocked with
the starter component door and capable of breaking the motor starting
current and of making onto a fault at the motor terminals.
b. Provision to be made for padlocking the MCCB in the 'OFF' position.
c. Three pole contactors to be fitted with three normally open and three
normally closed auxiliary contacts. All the auxiliary contacts to be wired
down to the starter terminal block.
d. One triple pole thermal over current relay incorporating over current,
phase sequence and single phase protection with adjustable trip settings.
e. External mechanical hand reset to be provided.
f. One control circuit MCB or fuse and one copper link.
g. Each starter shall be fitted with one set of local start/stop push buttons
and a local/remote/auto selector switch or hand/off/auto switch as
required. Each starter control wiring terminal block shall include control
terminals for connection of remote push buttons, auto circuits and local
and remote emergency stop push buttons.
h. Where more than one motor with a duty/standby or duty/backup functions
used, the starter control wiring shall be arranged to automatically change
duty upon the fault tripping of the selected motor. A duty/standby or
sequence selector switch shall be provided.
i. Each starter shall be fitted with twin led indication lamps indicating:
1) Motor running (green)
2) Motor stopped (red)
3) Overload tripped (amber)

j. Each starter shall be fitted with an ammeter and selector switch for motors
3 KW and above.
k. Each starter to be equipped with labels in English and Arabic giving drive
designation, plant number and control operation.
l. Each starter control wiring shall include control terminal and control relays
as necessary to achieve any interlocking specified elsewhere or to
achieve any control or monitoring through the BAS where specified.
m. Adjustable time delay devices for Star Delta Starters.
n. Earth leakage relays as required by ADDC
o. Starter units for manual operation shall have push buttons for starting and
stopping, together with auxiliary contacts for remote indicator lights where
specified. Starter units arranged for automatic operation shall have
hand/off/auto controls and remote push buttons.
p. All Star Delta starter shall be provided with mechanical and electrical
interlocks for star delta contactor assembled to prevent short circuiting.
B. Enclosure
1. Panels shall be constructed of a minimum 1.6mm thick electro galvanized steel
coated with high solid enamel polyester electrostatic spray and oven baked and
protected to IP 54.
2. Front access shall be arranged for all panels with hinged lift off doors. Dust and
damp proof gasket around the edge and fitted with lockable cam type chromium
plated handle mechanically interlocked with the starting MCCB.
3. The enclosures for the motor starters are divided into two types as follows:
a. Single starter panel.
b. Motor control centre.
4. Single starter panel
a. This specification shall be applied for starter panels used for starting a
single equipment with a maximum of two motors.
b. All equipment shall be mounted on sheet steel mounting plate with screws
into tapped holes and all live parts shall be shrouded to a minimum IP54.
c. The minimum short circuit rating for the different components shall be
35kA. However, the contractor shall forward a short circuit calculation and
upgrade the same if found necessary.
5. Compensated Equipment
6. Any motorized valve or damper controlled via a compensated system, shall be
arranged such that a manual selector switch is provided to override compensated
selection and enable manual opening/closing or on/off control, as appropriate.
Any compensator unit mounted within the control cabinet shall remain in the
manufacturer's purpose made enclosure and be installed strictly in accordance
with the manufacturer's recommendations.
7. The panels shall contain devices for automatic restart of units after power failure
where required.
2.10 MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS (MCCB)
A. Moulded case circuit breakers shall conform to the latest editions of BSEN60947-2.
B. The MCCB's shall have a minimum service short circuit capacity similar to the panel
board where the same is installed.

C. MCCB's shall be of the heavy duty quick make quick break type. Each breaker shall
have adjustable type thermal over current and magnetic release and also an
instantaneous magnetic trip.
D. Three pole breakers shall have a common trip with a single operating handle and
designed so that any overload in one pole automatically causes all poles to open.
Breakers shall be trip free and each shall have a trip indication independent of ON or
OFF positions.
E. The MCCB's at the MDB’s shall be provided with the necessary number of change over
auxiliary switch and with signaling unit which shall be connected to the BAS system in
order to provide information on the breakers conditions and alarms where required.
F. Wherever shown on the drawings or required by ADDC, MCCBs shall be provided with
earth leakage alarm relay or earth leakage relay of fixed/adjustable sensitivity.
G. MCCB from 100 To 630 A

1. The moulded-case circuit breakers shall comply with IEC 947-1 and 947-2
standards. They shall be of category A with a rated service breaking capacity
(Ics) equal to the ultimate breaking capacity (Icu) - on all the operational voltage
range for the ratings up to 630 A.
2. The moulded-case circuit breakers shall be designed for both vertical and
horizontal mounting, without any adverse effect on electrical performance. It shall
be possible to supply power either from the upstream or downstream side.
3. The moulded-case circuit breakers shall provide class II insulation (according to
IEC 664 standard) between the front and internal power circuits.
H. Construction
1. For maximum safety, the power contacts shall be insulated in an enclosure made
of a thermosetting material from other functions such as the operating
mechanism, the case, the trip unit and auxiliaries.
2. The operating mechanism of the moulded-case circuit breakers shall be of the
quick make, quick-break type with fault tripping over ridding manual operation. All
poles shall operate simultaneously for circuit breaker opening, closing and
tripping.
3. The moulded-case circuit breakers shall be front operated by a toggle or handle
that clearly indicates the three positions: ON, OFF and TRIPPED.
4. The moulded-case circuit breakers shall be equipped with a "push to trip" button
in front to test operation and the opening of the poles.
5. Where required, motor operated mechanism, shunt trip, under voltage release,
auxiliary switches up to four change over contacts and a tripped signal contact
shall be provided. Each of these units shall incorporate a pre-wired terminal strip,
which is accessible from the front of the breaker without removing the cover.
I. Current Limiting
1. The moulded case circuit breakers shall be capable of greatly limiting currents.
For short circuits, the maximum thermal stress it shall be limited to
2. 106 A2 s for ratings up to 250A.
3. 5 x 106 A2 s for ratings between 400A and 630A.
4. Amps and S : Seconds
5. These characteristics will allow high cascading performance with moulded-case
or miniature circuit-breakers.

J. Auxiliaries and Accessories
1. The addition of motor mechanism or a rotory handle shall in no way affect circuit
breaker characteristics:
2. Only three stable tripping mechanism positions (ON, OFF and TRIPPED) shall
be possible with the motor mechanism.
3. Suitability for isolation shall be provided by positive contact indication (ON and
OFF) in front of the motor mechanism module.
4. The moulded case circuit breakers shall be designed to enable safe on-site
installation of auxiliaries such as voltage releases (shunt and under voltage
releases) and indication switches.
5. The addition of a motor mechanism, module or a rotory handle, etc., shall not
mask or block devise setting.
6. It shall be possible to equip the moulded case circuit breakers with devices
indicating faults without tripping the circuit breaker.
7. Indication lights ON/OFF/Fault with lamp test facility.
8. 2 NO and 2 NC spare contacts.
K. Protection Function General Recommendations

1. Moulded case circuit breakers with ratings up to 250A shall be equipped with
inter changeable Thermal-magnetic trip units.
2. Moulded case circuit breakers with ratings over 250A shall be equipped with
electronic trip units. The trip units shall not augment overall circuit breaker
volume.
3. Electronic trip units shall comply with appendix F of IEC 947-2 standard
(measurement of RMS current values, electromagnetic compatibility, etc.,)
4. Electronic and thermal-magnetic trip units shall be adjustable and it shall be
possible to fit lead seals to prevent unauthorized access to the settings.
5. Protection settings shall apply to all circuit breaker poles.
2.11 MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
A. MCBs shall comply with BSEN 60898
B. MCBs shall be 35mm symmetrical rail mounted type and available in one, two, three or
four poles version.
C. MCBs can be reverse fed without reduction in performance.
D. Minimum short circuit rating of the breakers shall be 17KA.
E. Construction
1. The operating mechanism shall be mechanically trip free from the operating
handle so as to prevent the contacts from being held closed against short circuit
conditions. It shall be of the "automatic resetting type".
2. The individual operating mechanism of each pole of a multi-pole MCB shall be
directly linked within the MCB casing and not by the operating handles.
3. The operating handle shall be of the toggle type.
4. Each pole shall be provided with bi-metallic thermal element for overload
protection and magnetic element for short circuit protection.
5. Terminals shall be of the tunnel type (IP20) in order to minimize the risk of direct
contact.

2.12 METERING
A. Meters (indicating instruments) shall be provided as shown in the schematic diagram.
B. All meters shall be moving iron type, minimum of 72 sq. mm square shape and 90 deg.
scale.
C. All meters (indicating instruments) shall be of class 1.5.
D. Instruments shall temperature compensated to operate between -25 deg. C and + 55

deg. C and shall be tropical version.
E. All meters shall comply with IEC 51.
F. Kilowatt-hour meters (kWH meters) shall be provided as per the requirements of the
local Electrical Power Authority. They shall be dust and vermin proof and shall be of
robust construction so that they will keep their accuracy over many years of service
under the local climatic conditions.
G. The counters shall be of the cyclometer type with six digits to give direct reading of
power consumptions, the lowest figure being units and not tenths of units. Pointer type
counters are not acceptable. The calibrating adjustment should be operated by
screwdriver only.
H. kWH Meters should have not less than 5-mm diameter terminal holes and shall be
operated through three suitably rated current transformers and the counter of the meter
should be calibrated to read the primary KWH.
I. All kWH meters shall be handed over to the Power Supply Authorities for calibration
prior to final installation and connection.
J. All kWH meters shall be equipped with a pulse output (equivalent to the metered
energy), to provide an energy consumption scheme at a remote control and monitoring
system.
K. All kWH sub-meters shall be provided with data logging capability and be connected to
the Building Management system so that the information on the building’s energy
consumption can be monitored, recorded and analysed.
L. The energy metering monitoring system shall be able to provide hourly, daily, weekly,
monthly and annual energy consumption for each end use.
M. The energy metering monitoring system shall be able to compare consumption to

previous days, weeks, months and years for trend analysis.
N. The energy metering monitoring system shall be able to determine ‘out-of-range’ values
and alert building operators to any unusually high consumption.
O. The energy metering monitoring system shall be able to record peak energy
consumption for each end use.
P. The information monitored, recorded and analysed via the energy metering monitoring
system shall be displayed at the screens located at main entrances. The contractor shall

provide appropriate software for the interface between the energy metering monitoring
system and the various display screens.
2.13 CURRENT TRANSFORMERS
A. Current transformers shall comply with IEC 185.
B. The conditional ratings of current transformers shall correspond with the switchboard
rating and shall be such as to maintain the overall metering accuracy as is necessary to
operate relays within the tolerances specified by the manufacturer.
C. Current transformers secondary ratings shall be:

1. for protection 1A
2. for metering 5A
D. Current transformers shall have the following accuracy as a minimum, for protection
Class 5P
E. (Except for REF Protection which will have PS class CT) for indication Class 1 for
metering Class 1
F. The manufacturer shall ensure that the current transformers are such that the relays will
operate correctly when set at any point within their ranges.
G. Current transformers secondary wiring shall be earthed on one side through a

removable link. Where current transformers are connected in star, the star point shall be
earthed through a removable link.
H. Shorting links shall be provided for each current transformer.
I. Current transformers shall be cast resin insulated.
2.14 VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
A. Voltage transformers shall comply with IEC 186.
B. Voltage transformers shall be suitable in rating and accuracy for their functions, loads
and duties.
C. As a minimum they shall have following accuracy,
D. Protection applications Class 5P
E. Indication and metering applications Class 1
F. The primary and secondary circuits of the voltage transformers shall be protected by
fuses and the secondary winding shall be earthed at one point through a removable link.
G. Voltage transformers shall be cast resin insulated.
H. The manufacturer shall provide MCBs with auxiliary contacts or alternatively 4-pole
MCBs on the secondary side of the voltage transformers.

2.15 CONTACTORS
A. All contactors shall comply with IEC 947-1, IEC 947-4.
B. Duty category for lighting contactors shall be AC1 and for inductive load shall be AC3.
C. Contactors shall be protected against direct finger contact, mechanical life shall be 15 to
20 million operating cycles shall be suitable for 1200 operating cycles per hour.
D. The contactors shall be of 3 pole construction capable of handling high rush currents
and suitable for operating up to 55 deg. C ambient temperature without any derating.
E. Coils shall operate between 85% to 100% of the nominal voltage.
2.16 EARTH LEAKAGE CIRCUIT BREAKERS (ELCBS)
A. Current operated earth leakage circuit breakers shall be in accordance with BSEN
61008 providing the functions of isolation, switching and earth leakage protection of
electrical circuits.
B. The ELCB's shall have a residual current operated electro mechanical release.
C. The ELCB's shall incorporate a filtering device to eliminate unwanted tripping due
transient voltage.
D. A test push button is to prove operation.
E. A trip free mechanism is required to ensure that the unit can not be held closed against
an earth fault.
F. The tripping device is connected directly to the secondary of the current balance
transformer.
G. No amplifiers or rectifiers are to be used.
H. The breaker shall be double pole when used for single phase and 4 poles when used for
three phase circuit protection.
I. The ELCB's shall have 30mA or 100mA sensitivity as indicated in the drawings.
2.17 TIME SWITCH CONTROL
A. Each time switch shall be of the quartz movement type with minimum 24 hour battery
reserve or operated by a 230 volt synchronous motor and of the type incorporating
separate motor supply and control switch terminals and be with a minimum of a 24 hour
self winding clockwork spring reserve.
B. Unless more sophisticated operation is specified elsewhere, then each time clock shall
be capable of two 'on' and two 'off' operations every twenty-four hour period. Also, any
control time switch incorporated within the panel, shall be complete with an associated
bypass selection facility to manually override 'on/off'.

2.18 OVERLOAD RELAYS
A. These are to be used in conjunction with motor starters to provide protection against
overloads, phase sequence, phase failure (single phasing) and under voltage
conditions.
B. The relays shall be selected such that the full load current of the equipment protected
falls at the centre of the relays adjustment range.
C. Thermal overload relays shall be used for motors ratings, up to and including 11kW,
giving protection against:
1. Over-current unbalance
2. Single phase
3. Earth fault
D. For motors rated above 11KW, multi functional relays shall be used. Multi functional
relays include protection, metering, control, monitoring and annunciating functions. It is
envisaged that the following functions are available.
1. Overload
2. Over-current
3. Single phase
4. Earth fault
5. Under voltage
6. Over voltage
7. Plus digital indication of:
8. Relay settings % of FLC that the motor is taking
9. Continuous monitoring of thermal capacity of motor
10. Thermal capacity used during start of motor
11. If tripped, how much time before restart to take place
12. Stall or short circuit trip
13. Earth fault trip
14. Starting
E. All motor overload relays shall include a manual resetting facility.
2.19 CONTROL RELAYS
A. Shall be of the encapsulated plug-in type and incorporate visual indication that the
operating coil is energized.
B. Bases for relays shall be mounted horizontally, to ensure relay is vertical above the
base when the control cabinet is in its intended location, with screw type terminals,
suitable for receipt of spade type crimped/soldered lugs.
C. Adjustable timer delay relays used for the star delta starter shall ensure precise
reproducibility of the timing function. The relay shall have a linear setting scale over a
350 deg. rotation by means of knurled knob with timing guide marks. The relay shall be
equipped with two electrically separated time delayed contact one normally open and
one normally close.
2.20 INDICATION LAMP

A. These are generally used to indicate main's presence, run, trip, fault and to give fault
alarm or indicate any other function.
B. Indicator lamps shall be of the low voltage 24 volt transformer with twin LED lamp type
and accord with the signaling colours laid down in BS. 4099. Minimum lens diameter
shall be 12.5mm and all lenses on a panel shall be of a matching size and appearance
and removable from the front for lamp replacement.
C. Terminations shall be screw grip to receive spade typing crimpled/soldered lugs.
2.21 SELECTOR SWITCH
A. They shall be of the complete rotary cam type rated to suit item controlled and fitted with
pointer type switching knob. Terminations shall be screw grip to receive spade type
crimped/soldered lugs.
B. Hand off auto selection switch shall have three positions with centre position off and
shall be key operated wherever necessary.
C. Selector switch when used along with the voltmeter it shall have 8 positions, i.e phase to
phase, 3 phase and 2 off position.
2.22 ACCESSORIES
A. Furnish the following accessories,
B. Set of extension rails, if required
C. Hoisting device for removing breakers
D. Set of test plugs
E. Levering out device, if required
F. Manual maintenance closing lever, for electrically operated breakers
G. Set of special tools and hardware
2.23 PUSH BUTTON
A. All the push buttons shall be made of non-hygroscopic material, non-swelling and fitted
to avoid any possibility of sticking. Unless otherwise specified, they shall be of
momentary type. All push buttons shall be 22mm dia, and have minimum IP54 ingress
protection rating.
B. The contacts of all push buttons shall be rated at 250V 5A.
2.24 ANTI-CONDENSATION HEATERS

A. Anti-condensation heaters shall be fitted in each cubicle together with an ON/OFF
isolating switch and adjustable thermostat operating range from 25~350C, and suitable
for electrical operation at 230 volts A.C. 50 Hz single phase. The heater shall have of
sufficient capacity to maintain the switchboard internal temperature at 350C.
B. As a general rule, the heaters shall be placed at the bottom of the cubicle.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Comply with the applicable installation requirements of the BS 7671:2008 –

Requirements for Electrical Installations.
B. Conform to the requirements of the local power supply authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Install Low voltage panel as indicated in accordance with equipment manufacturer's

written instructions and with recognized industry practices to ensure that the equipment
fulfils requirements. Provide earthing connections for the switchboards as indicated on
the drawings. Tighten connections to assure permanent and effective grounding.
D. Prior to energization of the switchboards, check with megger tester to ensure

requirements of IEE Wiring Regulations are fulfilled.
E. Frame and mount printed, basic operating instructions for switchboards, including
control and key interlocking sequences, and emergency procedures, fabricate frame of
finished wood or metal and cover instructions with clear acrylic plastic. Mount on the
front of the switchboards.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. After installation and leveling, render the entire switchboard rodent proof by any means
of steel plates,
B. Provide full length rubber mat in front of switchboard
C. Installation of switchboard shall be fully in accordance with THE CONSULTANT

requirements.
1. Switchboard and distribution boards shall be surface mounted/free standing type
and shall be mounted on the building structure by means of suitable mild steel
straps or angle iron frames. Where distribution boards or switchboard are
required to be directly attached to brickwork etc., the fixing shall be by means of
grouted in bolts, or bolts of the expansion type.
2. Any live metal in the distribution board shall be screened with insulation material,
so that circuit breakers can be replaced without any danger to the operator.
D. The circuit breakers shall be situated to allow wiring to be carried out with sufficient
slack to enable them to be removed for inspection without disconnecting any circuit
wiring.

E. All main, sub main and final distribution boards shall have a spare capacity and shall
also be provided with enough spare breaker as shown on the drawings.
F. All panel board and distribution boards shall consist of adequately rated circuit breakers.
Circuit breakers shall be temperature compensated at the manufacturer's works to give
the design current rating at 50 deg. C. Non-compensated breakers will not be approved
and a formal certificate will be required from the manufacturer confirming that the
breakers have b0een suitably temperature compensated.
1. The contractor shall supply and install all panel board with the related voltmeters,
ammeters and energy meters of a type that meets with ADDC approval.
2. Where single core cables enter or leave any item of metal clad switchboard,
distribution gear, etc., the cable cores shall all pass through the same aperture in
the enclosure or case of the unit concerned, to avoid the setting up of eddy
currents. Where separate holes are provided by the manufacturer for the cables,
the holes shall either be cut out to form a continuous slot, or alternatively the
holes shall all be joined together with saw cuts through the solid metal separating
the holes. In all cases end plates shall be of non-ferrous metal.
3. A special termination arrangement shall be provided to CONSULTANT and
ADDC approval at the sub main and main panel boards wherever the cable size
exceeds the breaker terminal capacity.
3.03 TESTS AT WORK
A. Routine tests to standards shall be carried out. Evidence that type test have been
carried out provided they are relatively to the configuration of the equipment offered,
may be acceptable to THE CONSULTANT and shall be made available.
B. A full visual check and electrical functional test shall be carried out on all apparatus and
every circuit. All wiring shall be inspected. It shall be verified that the FBA is fully in
accord with the requisition. Circuit breakers shall be closed and tripped at their rated
minimum and maximum trip and close supply voltage. Primary and secondary injection
tests shall be done on protection relays and CT circuits and indicating and metering
instruments. All labels shall be checked.
C. The test procedure shall be as follows:

1. Visual inspection to verify degree of protection creepage and clearance
distances.
2. All conductors and cables are checked for proper routing and all devices for
proper mounting.
3. Check effectiveness of all mechanical devices, e.g. handles, locks, interlocks,
operating devices, etc.
4. Check panel conformity to drawing and CONSULTANT requirements.
5. Megger test all main circuit through to final terminals. Insulation resistance shall
exceed 10 meghoms. Record all measurements.
6. Flash test all main circuit at 2.5 KV for one minute. Record leakage current.
7. Repeat megger test to verify insulation resistance has not been affected by the
dielectric test.
8. Continuity tests of each circuit.
9. Function test of all circuit breakers switches, contacts, etc. and every circuit to
verify correct operation.

10. Primary and secondary injection tests of all relays, CT’s and indicating and
metering instruments.
D. Prior to energizing the switchboards, perform the following checks on site:

1. Operate the equipment through all design functions, including remote operation,
actuation of alarm and indicating devices, mechanical and electrical tripping and
closing and operation of the protective devices.
2. Insulation resistance measurements on the buses, phase to phase and phase to
ground, with all breakers in the fully connected position and contacts open.
3. Control circuit insulation resistance to ground.
4. Inspect all relays and protective devices, and verify settings in accordance with
the manufacturer’s instructions or the information in the Coordination study.
5. Inspect current transformers and relays for correct polarity of connections and
the installation of jumpers on unused current transformer circuits.
6. Simulate the operations and check the logic of interlocks.
7. Manually close and trip each breaker checking and adjusting the main contact
alignment and wiring action in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
8. Check the phasing on each side tie breaker, before closing.
9. Test protective relay operation for incomer air circuit breakers.
E. Routine Tests
1. Following routine tests are to be carried out by the switchboard assembler,
2. Inspection of assembly including inspection of wiring and electrical operation
3. Dielectric test:
4. Checking of protective measures and of the electrical continuity of the protective
circuits.
5. Verification of insulation resistance.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 26 2726
WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. This section shall include all labour, materials, equipment, appliances and accessories
necessary for the complete performance of all switches, socket outlets etc. In
accordance with the Specifications and Drawings.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
B. Shop Drawings: List of legends and description of materials and process used for
premarking wall plates.
C. Samples: One for each type of device and wall plate specified, in each color specified.
E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For wiring devices to include in all manufacturers'
packing label warnings and instruction manuals that include labeling conditions.
A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate through
one source from a single manufacturer. Insofar as they are available, obtain all wiring
devices and associated wall plates from a single manufacturer and one source.

1. BS 88 HRC Fuses
2. BS 546 Specification Two pole and earthing-pin plugs,
socket outlets and socket-outlet adapters
3. BS 800 Specification for radio interference limits and
measurements for household appliances, portable
tools and other electrical equipment causing similar
types of interference
4. BS 1363 13A Plugs, Switched and Un-Switched Socket
Outlets and connection units
KEO/21-7387-0004 26 2726 / 1 Wiring Devices

5. BS EN 60669 Part 1 Switches for household and similar electrical
appliances
6. BS 3676 Part 1 Switches for household and similar fixed
electrical installations
7. BS 4177 Cooker Control Units rated 30 Amp. and 45 Amp.
250 volt single phase supply
8. BS 4343 Industrial Plugs, Socket Outlets and Couplers
9. BS 4662 Boxes for enclosure of electrical Accessories
10. BS 5419 Fuse Switches and Switch Fuses
11. BS 5733 General requirements for electrical accessories
B. All components and their installations shall be free from defects. Any defective
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS

2.02 GENERAL
A. All individual items of materials shall be of the same make throughout the Project unless
specifically approved by the Engineer.
B. Wiring Accessories Finishes

1. All wiring accessories face plates finishes shall be as follows and shall be
coordinated with the interior designer/architect prior to delivering the products to
the site:
Location Finishes
Villa – FOH areas As per ID requirements
Villa – BOH areas White poly-carbonate
Car Park and IP rated
Exposed area
Plant Room White poly-carbonate

2.03 OUTLET BOXES
A. Outlet Boxes:
1. Galvanized one piece pressed steel, sizes and designs shall suit devices to be
fitted and shall be complete with adjustable lugs and earth terminals
2. Outlet boxes mounted externally or in damp locations shall be totally sealed to
ensure water tightness.
3. In all hazardous areas specified and/or shown on drawings: explosion proof.
2.04 SWITCHES
A. Lighting Switches
1. To BS EN 60669 - 1
2. To be rated as stated in BS7671 and ADDC regulations
3. Recessed with concealed conduit, surface pattern elsewhere
4. Quick make and break type
5. Single pole, double pole, one way, two way or intermediate as indicated
6. Surface mounted switches to be metallic
7. Flush mounted switches to be of the grid fixing type with finish.
8. All plastic switches shall be manufactured from white Urea plastic material having
properties which include anti tracking and non-flame propagation.
9. All switches shall comply with BS EN 60669-1. The switch construction should
have a clearance between the contacts in the open position not less than 3mm
as per BS60364 – 4.
10. All switches shall have large terminals to accept 2 x 2.5 mm2 conductors. All
terminals should have insulated bell mouth terminal guides for each of
termination. All switches should have slim rear projection and be suited for
mounting in 16mm/25mm/35mm deep boxes.
B. Waterproof Switches:
1. To be watertight IP 56 or as indicated in the Project Documentation
2. To be made of poly-carbonate for indoor application in damp and wet areas.
C. Switch Plates
1. Where two or more switches are grouped together and connected to the same
phase, multi-gang devices and common plates shall be used.
D. Double Pole Switches:

1. Shall comply to EN 60669-1 (BS)-2000
2. Unit shall be suitable for installation in boxes to BS4662 having a minimum depth
of 35mm.
3. Unit shall be rated for 20 AX.
4. Unit shall be fitted with an earth terminal
5. The double pole switches shall be with neon indication lamps and shall be rated
20, 30 or 45 Amps. as indicated on the drawings
6. The face plate shall be marked ‘WATER HEATER’, ‘WATER COOLER’ etc. as
required.
E. Push switches for lighting contactor control:

1. Push to make momentary contact switch
2. Suitable for inductive load

3. Surface mounted type shall be either poly-carbonate, metallic, protected to IP 56
or as indicated in the Project Documentation
4. Where two or more switches occur in one position they shall be contained in one
case and each shall be appropriately labelled to indicate its function
2.05 SOCKET OUTLETS
A. General purpose Socket Outlets:

1. All 13A socket and switch socket outlets shall comply with BS1363 Pt2.
2. The 13A switch socket shall contain 3 rectangular pin (2P+E) outlets. The front
shall be shuttered to operate only on insertion of all 3 pins. The switch socket
shall have neon built into the rocker providing illumination at a viewing angle of
180 degree.
3. The socket outlets shall have double pole switching. Wherever specified, switch
socket outlets shall incorporate dual earthing to meet the requirements of section
607 of BS 7671, IEE wiring regulations.
4. The 13 Amps Duplex Socket Outlet Shall contain 2 sets of 3 rectangular pin
(2P+E) within built neon.
5. The 15A Socket Outlet shall have3 round pin (2 P+E) shuttered with combined
switch rated 15 amps at 240 volts.
B. Weather proof Sockets:

1. The contractor shall supply and install IP56 weatherproof switches and socket
outlets wherever specified on the drawings for outdoor installation.
2. Switches shall conform to BS 3676 Pt 1 and tested for ingress protection in
accordance to BS EN 60529.
3. Socket outlets shall conform to BS 1363 Pt 2 and tested for ingress protection in
accordance to BS EN 60529. The sockets shall retain their IP56 rating even with
the plug inserted in the outlet. 13A Sockets: to have, 3 rectangular pins; 5A and
15A Sockets: to have 3-round pins all within the same assembly.
4. Plugs for 5 Amps and 13 Amps sockets: fused type with single pole cartridge
fuse link of same rating as plug.
5. Plugs for 15A sockets: unfused.
6. All IP56 accessories shall be surface mount type complete with boxes with metric
entries. All IP56 wiring accessories shall be made from polycarbonate materials
with high impact withstand capabilities.
C. Shuttered Sockets:
1. The Shutters shall effectively screen & isolate the line & neutral socket outlets to
exclude dust & interference & shall only be operable when the interlocked earth
pin in the associated plug top has been inserted.
2.06 SHAVER SOCKET OUTLETS
A. All shaver outlet units shall comply with BS 3535: Part 11990 & IEC 61558-2-5:1998.
B. Shaver units shall be flush pattern. The face plate shall be engraved with “Shaver Only'”
and be suitable for installation in bathrooms, incorporating a double wound isolating
transformer to provide an earth free supply.

C. Units shall incorporate primary winding circuit protection in the form of a self-resetting
thermal overload device.
D. Units shall incorporate Dual voltage output 240-115V, 20VA on either outlet, No Load
Voltage >275V.
E. Automatic Primary supply switches on while insertion of a shaver plug & switches off
automatically on removal.
F. Safety interlocked shutters to prevent insertion of two plugs simultaneously
G. In-built automatic self-resetting by a solid state overload device
H. Pin-operated micro-switch energizes double wound isolating transformer
I. Integral over current device to protect transformer
J. Unite shall incorporate two pin shuttered outlet configuration and have terminals to
accept 2.5mm2 conductors.
K. The cover plate of the shaver socket shall be inscribed SHAVERS ONLY with the
addition of a pictogram symbol.
L. Unit Flush mounting boxes in 47mm deep BS 4662 2 gang metal box, rustproof by
galvanizing of equal finish and complete with a brass earthing stud secured to the back
of the box.
2.07 COOKER CONTROL UNITS
A. Cooker control units shall incorporate a 45 Amp. double pole switch and 13A, 3 pin
switched socket outlet and neon indicator lights for both cooker and socket
B. The cooker control unit shall be flush mounted. A selector switch will be used to select
between cooker and combi oven.
C. The unit shall be installed adjacent to the cooling appliance (not directly behind or
above).
2.08 FUSED CONNECTION UNITS
A. 230 V fused connection units shall be switched, shall comply with BS 5733 and shall be
fitted with a fuse complying with BS 1362 with a rating as specified.
B. All fused connection unit shall be fitted with a neon indicator.
C. Live contacts shall not be exposed under normal operating conditions when replacing a
fuse.
D. 230V fuse connection units in plat areas, workshops etc. shall be surface mounted
metalclad and shall comply with BS 1363.

E. The type of fused connection unit, particularly relating to the flex outlet, shall be
authorized by the Engineer prior to the ordering of accessories.
2.10 JUNCTION, PULL AND TERMINAL BOXES
A. The Junction Box shall be completed with a terminal block suitable for connecting up to
10 mm2 copper conductor (phase, neutral and earth) and an all insulated moulded white
cover plate with removal covers.
B. The cover plate shall be raised for connecting outgoing cable.
2.11 TIMER
A. Timers shall be electronic type, unless specified otherwise in the Project

Documentation.
B. Timers shall be suitable for operation from supply voltage of 230V, 1-phase, 50Hz
system.
C. Timer output contacts shall be suitable for both a.c. and d.c. control circuits. The
contacts shall be suitable for duty of AC-2 or DC-3 utilisation category. The rating of
output contacts shall be co-ordinated with the application requirements.
D. Timers shall be provided with 2 independent timing scales with sets of change-over
output contacts:
1. 10 200 seconds
2. 0.10 20 seconds
E. ON/OFF indicator shall be provided to monitor the circuit status.
F. Timers shall be either:

1. delay on energisation or
2. delay on de-energisation type, as per the application requirements
G. Upon supply of rated voltage to the input terminals, the timer shall start, the output relay
remains in rest position. After the set time, the output relay pulls in. The relay resets
after the input supply has been cut-off.
H. Timers shall be suitable for minimum 10 million operations.
I. The timer shall require a pozi-drive screw driver for changing of the settings.
J. Degree of protection shall be minimum IP 20.
2.12 PHOTO CELL CONTROL
A. Operation of the contactors for switching on the external lights as indicated in the
distribution board schedule shall be by means of photo electric cell.
B. Photo-electric control switch or cell shall operate from a supply voltage of 240V, 50Hz
and turn ON shall occur at 40 lux and turn OFF at 80 lux.

C. It shall operate with in - 5 C to +80 C temperature range.
D. Photo - electric switches or cell shall be weatherproof complying with BS 5490, IP 54.
2.13 PASSIVE INFRARED SENSORS
A. Furnish and install where indicated a passive infrared occupancy sensor.
B. Sensor shall be equipped with a separate adjustment for delayed time off.
C. Sensor shall be designed for mounting onto the ceiling
D. Sensor shall be suitable for operation with 240V, 50Hz, AC supply.
E. Viewing angle shall be 360
F. Contact rating shall be suitable lighting circuit loads.
2.14 ISOLATORS AND SWITCH FUSES
A. Isolators and switch fuses, where mounted individually shall be of sheet steel
construction with doors and front operated handles. They shall be of the quick make,
quick break type with removable shields over the fixed contacts, door interlocks and
'ON/OFF' indicators.
B. Isolators and switch fuses shall be single or triple pole with neutral, of ratings as
indicated on the Drawings and provided with earth terminals. They shall be in
accordance with IEC 408. The switch fuses shall be suitable for H.R.C. type fuses of
Class QI to BS 88.
C. The isolators and switch fuses installed in public places shall have aesthetically pleasing
appearance.
D. Isolators and switch fuses installed outside the building shall of IP 54 construction.
2.15 MOUNTING HEIGHTS
A. The mounting heights of wiring accessories shall be as stipulated in the local power
authority Regulations, or as otherwise as indicated on the drawings or approved by the
Engineer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION OF OUTLET BOXES
A. Location of Boxes:
1. Determine exact location of boxes on site and obtain the Engineer’s approval
before commencing installation

2. Make allowance for overhead pipes, ducts, variations in arrangement, thickness
of finish, window trim, panelling and other construction when locating boxes.
3. Outlet boxes in all food preparation areas shall be recessed such that all wiring
devices shall be mounted flush with walls.
B. Fixing:
1. Fix outlet boxes securely
2. Fix exposed outlet boxes to permanent inserts or lead anchors with machine
screws.
C. Mounting Heights:
1. Mount boxes as indicated or as approved by the Engineer
2. Where mounting height is not shown or specified, obtain instructions
3. Boxes for similar equipment: mount at uniform heights within same or similar
areas.
3.02 INSTALLATION OF SWITCHES
A. Lighting Switches:
1. Locate at the strike side of the door, approximately 150 mm from the edge of
door frame
2. Plates shall be installed with all four edges in continuous contact with finished
wall
3. Plates shall be installed with an alignment tolerance of 1.5 mm
4. All switch assembly louvered plates shall have their earthing terminal connected
to the earth terminal attached to the switch box by an insulated 2.5 mm2
protective conductor.
B. All sockets, switches, disconnect switches, fused switches, etc. located in food
preparation areas shall be mounted flush to wall.
3.03 INSTALLATION OF JUNCTION, PULL AND TERMINAL BOXES
A. Generally:
1. Fix junction, pull and terminal boxes where indicated and where required to
facilities pulling of wires and cables and connection of future appliances
2. Locate boxes as inconspicuously as possible, but accessible after work is
completed.
B. Pull Boxes:
1. Fix at maximum 10m spacing and to limit the number of bends in conduit to not
more than two 90° bends.
3.04 TESTING
A. Test all switches, socket outlets etc. for correct polarity and continuity of conductors in
the presence of and to the entire satisfaction of the Engineer.
B. Carry out live phase to earth loop impedance tests at all switches and socket outlets
with an approved earth loop impedance tester to the entire satisfaction of the Engineer.

Ensure that all device plates have satisfactory earth continuity to the protective
conductor system.
C. Test all socket outlets for instantaneous tripping of associated distribution board current
operated earth leakage circuit breaker using testing equipment, approved by the
Engineer.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 26 2816
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. This Section includes the following individually mounted, enclosed switches and circuit
breakers:
1. Molded-case circuit breakers.
2. Molded-case switches.
3. Enclosures.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS OF SPECIFICATION
A. Section 26 0500 - Common Requirements for Electrical Installations
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and
component indicated. Include dimensioned elevations, sections, weights, and
manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics,
ratings, and finishes.
1. Enclosure types and details for types other than IP55.
2. Current and voltage ratings.
3. Short-circuit current rating.
4. UL listing for series rating of installed devices.
5. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent
protective devices and auxiliary components.
6. Include time-current coordination curves (average melt) for each type and rating
of overcurrent protective device; include selectable ranges for each type of
overcurrent protective device.
B. Shop Drawings: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers. Include plans, elevations,
sections, details, and attachments to other work.
C. Wiring Diagram for power, signal, and control wiring.
D. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that enclosed

switches and circuit breakers, accessories, and components will withstand seismic
forces defined in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical
Systems" Include the following:
1. Basis of Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual
KEO/21-7387-0004 26 2816 / 1 Enclosed Switches And Circuit Breakers

forces specified."
event."
E. Qualification Data: For testing agency.
F. Field quality-control test reports including the following:

1. Test procedures used.
2. Test results that comply with requirements.
3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that
comply with requirements.
G. Manufacturer's field service report.
H. Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers to include
in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in
Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:
1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting enclosed switches
and circuit breakers.
2. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of circuit breaker.
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and

capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of the
International Electrical Testing Association or is a recognized testing laboratory (RTL) as
defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the International
Electrical Testing Association or the National Institute for Certification in
Engineering Technologies to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3.
B. Comply with BS/ IEC Regulations.
C. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for
enclosed switches and circuit breakers, including clearances between enclosures, and
adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.
1.05 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of switches, circuit breakers, and components with
other construction, including conduit, piping, equipment, and adjacent surfaces.

Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access
doors and panels.
1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A. Refer to section “Environmental Conditions” in Division 26 0500 - Common

Requirements for Electrical Installations
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS

2.02 MOLDED-CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS AND SWITCHES
A. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker: Comply with applicable BS, with interrupting capacity to
meet available fault currents.
B. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level

overloads and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable
magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.
C. Adjustable Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front-

mounted, field-adjustable trip setting.
D. Electronic Trip-Unit Circuit Breakers: RMS sensing; field-replaceable rating plug; with
the following field-adjustable settings:
1. Instantaneous trip.
2. Long- and short-time pickup levels.
3. Long- and short-time time adjustments.
4. Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I2t response.
E. Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller.

F. Integrally Fused Circuit Breakers: Thermal-magnetic trip element with integral limiter-
style fuse listed for use with circuit breaker and trip activation on fuse opening or on
opening of fuse compartment door.
G. Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker Features and Accessories:

1. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles.
2. Lugs: Mechanical style with compression lug kits suitable for number, size, trip
ratings, and conductor material.
3. Communication Capability: Circuit-breaker-mounted communication module with
functions and features compatible with power monitoring and control system
specified in Division 26 Section "Electrical Power Monitoring and Control.”
4. 240-V trip coil energized from separate circuit, set to trip at 75 percent of rated
voltage.
5. Undervoltage Trip: Set to operate at 35 to 75 percent of rated voltage with field-
adjustable 0.1- to 0.6-second time delay.
6. Auxiliary Switch: Two SPDT switches with "a" and "b" contacts; "a" contacts
mimic circuit-breaker contacts, "b" contacts operate in reverse of circuit-breaker
contacts.
7. Key Interlock Kit: Externally mounted to prohibit circuit-breaker operation; key
shall be removable only when circuit breaker is in off position.
8. Zone-Selective Interlocking: Integral with electronic trip unit; for interlocking
ground-fault protection function.
H. Molded-Case Switches: Molded-case circuit breaker with fixed, high-set instantaneous

trip only, and short-circuit withstand rating equal to equivalent breaker frame size
interrupting rating.
Features and Accessories:
1. Standard frame sizes and number of poles.
2. Lugs: Compression type, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor
material.
3. Earth-Fault Protection: Comply with BS / IEC standards; remote-mounted and
powered type with mechanical ground-fault indicator; relay with adjustable pickup
and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, internal memory, and shunt trip
unit; and three-phase, zero-sequence current transformer/sensor.
4. Shunt Trip: Trip coil energized from separate circuit, with coil-clearing contact.
5. Under-voltage Trip: Set to operate at 35 to 75 percent of rated voltage without
intentional time delay.
6. Auxiliary Contacts: Two SPDT switches with "a" and "b" contacts; "a" contacts
mimic switch contacts, "b" contacts operate in reverse of switch contacts.
7. Alarm Switch: One NO contact that operates only when switch has tripped.
8. Key Interlock Kit: Externally mounted to prohibit switch operation; key shall be
removable only when switch is in off position.
9. Electrical Operator: Provide remote control for on, off, and reset operations.
10. Accessory Control Power Voltage: self-powered 240-V ac. Provide fully protected
control transformer. .
I. Molded-Case Switch Accessories:

1. Lugs: Mechanical style with compression lug kits suitable for number, size, trip
ratings, and material of conductors.

2. Shunt Trip: 240-V trip coil energized from separate circuit, set to trip at 75
percent of rated voltage. Provide "dummy" trip unit where required for proper
operation.
3. Under voltage Trip: Set to operate at 35 to 75 percent of rated voltage with field-
adjustable 0.1- to 0.6-second time delay. Provide "dummy" trip unit where
required for proper operation.
4. Auxiliary Switch: Two SPDT switches with "a" and "b" contacts; "a" contacts
mimic circuit-breaker contacts, "b" contacts operate in reverse of circuit-breaker
contacts.
5. Key Interlock Kit: Externally mounted to prohibit operation; key shall be
removable only when switch is in off position.
2.03 ENCLOSURES
A. Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers: IP 55 indoors or IP 67 outdoors to comply with

environmental conditions at installed location.
1. Indoor, Dry and Clean Locations: IP 55.
2. Outdoor Locations: IP 67
3. Kitchen or Wash-Down Areas: IP 67 stainless steel.
4. Other Wet or Damp, Indoor Locations: IP 67
5. Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive Liquids:
IP 67.
6. Hazardous Areas: As indicated in Drawings
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed switches and circuit breakers for
compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 CONCRETE BASES
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Verify structural requirements with
structural engineer.
B. Concrete base is specified in Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical
Systems," and concrete materials and installation requirements are specified in
Division 03.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with applicable portions of BS for installation of enclosed switches and circuit
breakers.
B. Mount individual wall-mounting switches and circuit breakers with tops at uniform height,
unless otherwise indicated. Anchor floor-mounting switches to concrete base.
C. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Division 26 Section
"Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."
D. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets
and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.
3.04 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide

warning signs as specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."
B. Enclosure Nameplates: Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated-plastic

nameplate as specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

inspect, test, and adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation,
including connections, and to assist in field testing. Report results in writing
B. Prepare for acceptance testing as follows:

1. 1. Inspect mechanical and electrical connections.
2. Verify switch and relay type and labeling verification.
3. Verify rating of installed fuses.
4. Inspect proper installation of type, size, quantity, and arrangement of mounting or
anchorage devices complying with manufacturer's certification.
C. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform the
following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
D. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1. Test mounting and anchorage devices according to requirements in Division 26
Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."
2. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection as per BS /
IEC standards. Certify compliance with test parameters.
3. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate
compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.
4. Infrared Scanning:
a. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than
60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each
enclosed switch and circuit breaker. Open or remove doors or panels so
connections are accessible to portable scanner.
b. Follow-Up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared
scan of each unit 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.
c. Instruments, Equipment and Reports:
1) Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature
or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide
calibration record for device.
2) Prepare a certified report that identifies enclosed switches and
circuit breakers included and describes scanning results. Include

notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and
observations after remedial action.
3.06 TRAINING
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train the Employer’s maintenance

personnel as specified below:
1. Train the Employer's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules
related to startup and shutdown, troubleshooting, servicing, and preventive
maintenance. Training period shall be minimum 3 days and longer if required to
get the employer’s maintenance team familiar with the products operation and
maintenance.
2. Obtain employers staff signatures for attendance and submit as a record that the
training has been completed and to the satisfaction of the employer.
3. Distribute copies of the operation and maintenance manuals during the training
and go thru the content in details. Please note the copies distributed during the
training are not the official copies to submitted for close out purposes.
4. Schedule training with the Employer, through Engineer, with at least 14 days'
advance notice.
3.07 TESTING, COMMISSIONING & HANDOVER
A. The complete installation shall be tested and commissioned by the supplier and the
contractor. The contractor shall be responsible to demonstrate the operation of the
system to the satisfaction of the Client's personnel. The contractor shall submit the
testing and commissioning reports for the Engineers review outlining all deficiencies and
course of action. The contractor shall ensure all deficiencies outlined are rectified,
retested, and certified.
3.08 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. The Contractor shall prepare fully detailed Operation and Maintenance Manuals for the
system and submit to the Engineer for his approval.
3.09 ADJUSTING
A. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges.
3.10 CLEANING
A. On completion of installation, vacuum dirt and debris from interiors; do not use
compressed air to assist in cleaning.
B. Inspect exposed surfaces and repair damaged finishes.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 26 2913
ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. This Section includes ac, enclosed controllers rated 600 V and less, of the following
types:
1. Direct online (DOL) starters
2. Star-delta starters
3. Soft starters
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS OF SPECIFICATION
A. Division 26 Section 26 0500 - Common Requirements for Electrical Installations
B. Division 26 Section "Electrical Power Monitoring and Control" for interfacing

communication and metering requirements.
C. Division 26 Section "Variable-Frequency Motor Controllers" for general-purpose, ac,

adjustable-frequency, pulse-width-modulated controllers for use on constant torque
loads in ranges up to 200 hp.
D. Division 26 Section "Transient-Voltage Suppression for Low-Voltage Electrical Power

Circuits" for low-voltage power, control, and communication surge suppressors.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed controller. Include dimensions and
manufacturer's technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics,
ratings, and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: For each enclosed controller.

1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details, including required
clearances and service space around equipment. Show tabulations of installed
devices, equipment features, and ratings. Include the following:
a. Each installed unit's type and details.
b. Nameplate legends.
c. Short-circuit current rating of integrated unit.
d. Listed and labelled for series rating of overcurrent protective devices in
combination controllers.
e. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual
overcurrent protective devices in combination controllers.
KEO/21-7387-0004 26 2913 / 1 Enclosed Controllers
C. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans, drawn to scale, showing dimensioned layout,

required working clearances, and required area above and around enclosed controllers
where pipe and ducts are prohibited. Show enclosed controller layout and relationships
between electrical components and adjacent structural and mechanical elements. Show
support locations, type of support, and weight on each support. Indicate field
measurements.
D. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that enclosed

controllers, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in
Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems" Include the
following:
forces specified."
event."
E. Qualification Data: For manufacturer and testing agency.
F. Field quality-control test reports.
G. Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed controllers to include in emergency,

operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01
Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:
1. Routine maintenance requirements for enclosed controllers and all installed
components.
2. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent
protective devices.
H. Load-Current and Overload-Relay Heater List: Compile after motors have been
installed and arrange to demonstrate that selection of heaters suits actual motor
nameplate full-load currents.
I. Load-Current and List of Settings of Adjustable Overload Relays: Compile after motors
have been installed and arrange to demonstrate that dip switch settings for motor
running overload protection suit actual motor to be protected.

A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer. Maintain, within 100 miles (160
km) of Project site, a service center capable of providing training, parts, and emergency
maintenance and repairs.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain enclosed controllers of a single type through one source
from a single manufacturer.
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in BS

Standards, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked
for intended use.
D. Comply with BS and IEE Regulations.
E. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for
enclosed controllers, minimum clearances between enclosed controllers, and for
adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions and
clearances.
A. Store enclosed controllers indoors in clean, dry space with uniform temperature to
prevent condensation. Protect enclosed controllers from exposure to dirt, fumes, water,
corrosive substances, and physical damage.
B. If stored in areas subject to weather, cover enclosed controllers to protect them from
weather, dirt, dust, corrosive substances, and physical damage. Remove loose packing
and flammable materials from inside controllers; install electric heating of sufficient
wattage to prevent condensation.
1.06 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of enclosed controllers with other construction

including conduit, piping, equipment, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required
workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.
Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03
Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
C. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These
D. Coordinate features of enclosed controllers and accessory devices with pilot devices
and control circuits to which they connect.
E. Coordinate features, accessories, and functions of each enclosed controller with ratings
and characteristics of supply circuit, motor, required control sequence, and duty cycle of
motor and load.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS

2.02 MOTOR STARTERS
A. All Motor starters shall comply with BS EN 60947-4. The components of the starter shall
be type tested and ASTA certified to achieve Type 2 co-ordination in accordance with
IEC 947.
B. The Manufacturer shall supply certified test results to confirm that the starter has been
tested to substantiate designs according to applicable standards. The tests shall verify
not only the performance of the unit and integrated assembly, but also the suitability of
the enclosure venting, rigidity and bus bracing. In addition, the unit shall be factory
tested in accordance with applicable standards.
C. The Manufacturer shall be prepared to show proper evidence of having tested for noise
immunity on both input and output power connections
D. Motor starters shall comply with the requirements of the local power supply authorities
E. Motor starters shall be rated to carry the full load current of its rated duty at its most
severe load conditions. All starters shall be capable of at least 20 starts per hour at
100% full load torque.
F. Motor starters shall be housed in a separate enclosure and each starter enclosure shall
contain the following components, or as otherwise indicated on the Project Drawings or
Project Documentation.
1. 1 No. triple pole MCCB or fuse switch, as indicated on the Project Drawings,
externally operated and interlocked with the enclosure door. There shall be
provision for padlocking in the OFF position.

2. 1 No. motor protection relay.
3. 1 No. set of auxiliary relays and timers required to provide the necessary
indication and control sequence. Timers shall be totally enclosed dust proof.
4. 1 No. set of main motor terminals and auxiliary terminals for remote controls
and indications.
5. 1 No. set of terminals for remote lock-off and emergency stop push buttons.
6. 1 No. control circuit transformer, where applicable.
7. 1 No. anti-condensation heater, if specified.
8. 1 No. Thermistor relays where applicable.
9. Shall contain a totally enclosed dust proof timer.
G. The following equipment shall be mounted on the door of the starter enclosure, or as
otherwise indicated in the Drawings.
1. 1 No. ammeter with selector switch and current transformer fitted with
suppressed scale to read motor running and starting current with red pointer to
indicate full load current for each motor rated 25HP and above.
2. 2 No. pilot lamps to indicate “SUPPLY ON” (Green) and “MOTOR RUNNING”
(Red).
3. 1 No. pilot lamp to indicate “MOTOR FAILED” (Amber).
4. 1 No Pilot lamps (a separate lamp for each motor fault conditions).
5. 1 No. “Hand/OFF/AUTO” Selector switch
6. 1 set “Start/Stop” push button
7. 1 No. externally operated overload reset push button
8. 1 Lamp test push button
2.03 DIRECT ONLINE (DOL) STARTERS
A. DOL starters shall consist of a TP/SP contactor for switching direct on line in
accordance with BS EN 60947-4-1 and fitted with auxiliary contacts.
B. Contactors shall be selected for category AC-3 duty.
2.04 STAR-DELTA STARTERS
A. Star-delta starters shall be provided with contactors as for DOL starters, arranged in
such a manner to ensure the star contactor opens before the delta contactor closes.
B. The period of running in star and the transition time shall be controlled by adjustable
solid state type timers.
C. For closed transition type star-delta starters, further requirements shall be wire wound
porcelain core resistor banks of sufficient thermal rating to allow three (3) consecutive
starts of 30 seconds starting period followed by a 15 minutes rest and another 30
seconds starting period. Resistance value shall be chosen to give high starting current
with low transient current. A thermal cut out shall be provided for transient resistor
banks. Starter enclosure incorporating resistor banks shall be well ventilated with
vermin proof and dust ventilation louvers.
2.05 SOFT STARTERS

A. Solid-state, reduced voltage motor starters shall be closed transition, shunt duty type
with isolation contactor and bypass contactor. When the motor reach full speed, the
bypass contactor by-passes the SCR power section. The solid-state power section shall
consist of six silicon controlled rectifiers (two per phase connected back-to-back, in
reverse parallel configuration) to provide a soft start. The starters shall conform to the
latest IEC Standards.
B. The starters shall use the current limit method of starting with the current adjustable
between 150 percent and 425 percent of full load current of the motor. At turn-on, the
control ramps up to the current limit in approximately 1 second and maintains that
current until the motor comes up to full speed. If a problem exists and the motor fails to
reach rated speed within a predetermined period of time, the control will shut down. The
starter shall provide a smooth, step less acceleration and deceleration of the load from
start to full speed and from full speed to stop. The starter shall be equipped with metal
oxide varistor type surge suppressers across the SCR to protect against voltage
transients and resistor/capacitor scrubber networks to protect against false firing of the
SCR. Each SCR heat sink shall have a temperature sensor that shall shut the starter
down in the event of an over temperature condition. When a starter failure occurs, the
actual problem shall be indicated by an LED on the control panel front.
C. There shall be an overcurrent protective device, which shall provide over current
protection and main disconnect function for the control unit. The position of the
operating handle shall indicate “ON” or “OFF” position of the protective device and
include provision for padlocking in the “OFF” position. This protective device shall be
equipped with a shunt trip and shall trip when there is a SCR or plant power failure.
Motor space heaters shall be energized when the motor is not running.
D. The reduced voltage starters shall be equipped with micro-processor controlled motor
protection relays to control, monitor and protect the motors. The relay shall monitor
three phase current and voltage and make trip and alarm decisions based on pre-
programmed motor current and voltage conditions. Control functions shall include start
detection, starter transition, incomplete sequence and number of starts per hour. The
relay shall monitor and display load current of each phase, percent of full load current of
each phase and running time. The relay shall protect the motor against time
overcurrent, instantaneous overcurrent, under load, phase unbalance, earth fault, phase
loss and phase reversal.
2.06 ENCLOSURES
A. Description: Flush- or surface-mounting cabinets as indicated, unless otherwise

indicated to comply with environmental conditions at installed location.
1. Outdoor Locations: IP 65.
2. Kitchen Areas: IP54, stainless steel.
3. Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: IP54.
2.07 ACCESSORIES
A. Devices shall be factory installed in controller enclosure, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Push-Button Stations, Pilot Lights, and Selector Switches: heavy-duty type.

C. Stop and Lockout Push-Button Station: Momentary-break, push-button station with a
factory-applied hasp arranged so padlock can be used to lock push button in depressed
position with control circuit open.
D. Control Relays: Auxiliary and adjustable time-delay relays.
E. Elapsed Time Meters: Heavy duty with digital readout in hours.
F. Meters: Panel type, 64-mm minimum size with 90- or 120-degree scale and plus or
minus 2 percent accuracy. Where indicated, provide transfer device with an off position.
Meters shall indicate the following:
1. Ammeter: Output current, with current sensors rated to suit application.
2. Voltmeter: Output voltage.
3. Frequency Meter: Output frequency.
G. Multifunction Digital-Metering Monitor: Listed and labeled by acceptable to authorities

having jurisdiction, microprocessor-based unit suitable for three- or four-wire systems
and with the following features:
1. Inputs from sensors or 5-A current-transformer secondary, and potential
terminals rated to 600 V.
2. Switch-selectable digital display of the following:
a. Phase Currents, Each Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent.
b. Phase-to-Phase Voltages, Three Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent.
c. Phase-to-Neutral Voltages, Three Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent.
d. Three-Phase Real Power: Plus or minus 2 percent.
e. Three-Phase Reactive Power: Plus or minus 2 percent.
f. Power Factor: Plus or minus 2 percent.
g. Frequency: Plus or minus 0.5 percent.
h. Integrated Demand with Demand Interval Selectable from 5 to 60
Minutes: Plus or minus 2 percent.
i. Accumulated energy, in megawatt hours (joules), plus or minus 2 percent;
stored values unaffected by power outages for up to 72 hours.
3. Mounting: Display and control unit flush or semi flush mounted in instrument
compartment door.
H. Phase-Failure and under voltage relays: Solid-state sensing circuit with isolated output
contacts for hard-wired connection. Provide adjustable under voltage setting.
I. Current-Sensing, Phase-Failure Relays for Bypass Controllers: Solid-state sensing

circuit with isolated output contacts for hard-wired connection; arranged to operate on
phase failure, phase reversal, current unbalance of from 30 to 40 percent, or loss of
supply voltage; with adjustable response delay.
2.08 FACTORY FINISHES
A. Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested

enclosed controllers before shipping.
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and surfaces to receive enclosed controllers for compliance with
requirements, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance.
1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
3.02 APPLICATIONS
A. Select features of each enclosed controller to coordinate with ratings and characteristics
of supply circuit and motor; required control sequence; duty cycle of motor, controller,
and load; and configuration of pilot device and control circuit affecting controller
functions.
B. Select horsepower rating of controllers to suit motor controlled.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. For control equipment at walls, bolt units to wall or mount on lightweight structural-steel
channels bolted to wall. For controllers not at walls, provide freestanding racks
complying with Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."
B. Install freestanding equipment on concrete bases.
C. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Division 26 Section

"Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."
D. Enclosed Controller Fuses: Install fuses in each fusible switch. Comply with
requirements in Division 26 Section "Fuses."
3.04 CONCRETE BASES
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Verify structural requirements with
structural engineer.
B. Concrete base is specified in Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical
Systems," and concrete materials and installation requirements are specified in
Division 03.
3.05 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify enclosed controller, components, and control wiring according to Division 26

Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."
3.06 CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATION
A. Install wiring between enclosed controllers according to Division 26 Section "Low-

Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

B. Bundle, train, and support wiring in enclosures.
C. Connect hand-off-automatic switch and other automatic-control devices where

applicable.
1. Connect selector switches to bypass only manual- and automatic-control devices
that have no safety functions when switch is in hand position.
2. Connect selector switches with enclosed controller circuit in both hand and
automatic positions for safety-type control devices such as low- and high-
pressure cutouts, high-temperature cutouts, and motor overload protectors.
3.07 CONNECTIONS
A. Conduit installation requirements are specified in other Division 26 Sections. Drawings

indicate general arrangement of conduit, fittings, and specialties.
B. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for

A. Prepare for acceptance tests as follows:

1. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed controller element, bus, component,
connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.
2. Test continuity of each circuit.
B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to

perform the following:
1. Inspect controllers, wiring, components, connections, and equipment installation.
Test and adjust controllers, components, and equipment.
2. Assist in field testing of equipment including pretesting and adjusting of solid-
state controllers.
3. Report results in writing.
C. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection, except
optional tests, Motor Control - Motor Starters. Certify compliance with test
parameters.
2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate
compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.
3.09 ADJUSTING
A. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges.
3.10 TRAINING


maintenance. Training period shall be minimum 3 days and longer if required to
get the employer’s maintenance team familiar with the products operation and
maintenance.
advance notice.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 26 4113
LIGHTNING PROTECTION FOR STRUCTURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. This Section includes the lightning protection installation shall consist of air termination
network, down conductors, earthing and bonding to prevent side flashing.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For air terminals and mounting accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: Detail lightning protection system, including air-terminal locations,

conductor routing and connections, and bonding and grounding provisions. Include
indications for use of raceway, data on how concealment requirements will be met, and
calculations required by BSEN 62305 for bonding of grounded and isolated metal
bodies.
C. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience.
D. Field inspection reports indicating compliance with specified requirements.
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage Specialist Lightning Protection Installer with a minimum

of 10 years experience in handling projects of comparable size, shall provide a lightning
protection system completely in accordance with all codes and standards referred in this
section.
1.04 REFERENCE
A. BSEN 62305 (Part 1 to 4): 2011: British Standards for Lightning Protection
B. BS EN 50164-1: 2008: Lightning Protection Components (LPC) Part 1: Requirements

for connection components.
C. BS EN 50164-2: 2008: Lightning Protection Components (LPC) Part 2: Requirements

for conductors and earth electrodes.
1.05 COORDINATION
KEO/21-7387-0004 26 4113 / 1 Lightning Protection For Structures
A. Coordinate installation of lightning protection with installation of other building systems
and components, including electrical wiring, supporting structures and building
materials, metal bodies requiring bonding to lightning protection components, and
building finishes.
B. Coordinate installation of air terminals attached to roof systems with roofing

manufacturer and Installer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
2.02 LIGHTNING PROTECTION
A. The Specialist Lightning Protection Installer shall submit the Risk Evaluation and the
achieved Lightning Protection Level (LPL) calculation based on BS EN 62305 – Part 2.
In the absence of such an evaluation employment of LPL - I will be deemed mandatory.
The Specialist Lightning Protection Installer shall then submit the shop drawings based
on the achieved LPL and shall employ the air termination network consisting of mesh of
either 5m x 5m or less, in co-ordination with rolling sphere (size as per the protection
level). All the service entries to the structure i.e. power line, telecom line, gas line, water
line etc. shall be protected by installing current surge protectors (either 25KA or
18.75KA or 12.5 KA rating), depending on the Lightning Protection Level (LPL) to be
used to bring down the risk (R) below the tolerable risk level ( RT ).
B. The Specialist Lightning Protection Installer shall use 25x3 mm bare copper tape of
99.99% purity (complying with BS EN 13601), (or PVC coated as the case may require,
complying with the same) to form the air-termination mesh on the uppermost part of the
structure (typically the roof) and ring conductor around the structure (the spacing
between the ring conductors shall depend on the size of the rolling sphere) to prevent
from side flashes.
C. Air termination network should be extended and it’s determined by using rolling sphere
method.

D. This method involves rolling an imaginary sphere of 20m or 30m or 45m or 60m radius
(depending on the Lightning Protection Level to be used) over structure to require
protection.
E. Typically, if LPL I is employed, then the first horizontal conductor shall be at 20m level
(from ground). From 20m to 120m, horizontal conductors shall be installed at every 20
meters or every 5 floors. From 120m up to 400 meters, horizontal conductors/strike
pads shall be installed at every 10 meters or every 3 floors, from 400 meters and above,
the horizontal conductors / strike pads shall be installed at every 5 meters or every floor.
However, if the structure is more than 120m in height then the top 20% of the building
height is protected using ring conductors / strike pads every floor and then follow the
above rule.
F. Based on the above the Specialist Lightning Protection Installer shall use 25x3mm
copper tape as ring conductor and this tape should be bonded to all down conductors
around the periphery and a branch conductor to be taken horizontally and all these
down conductors to be bonded to the aluminum cladding wall using bi-metallic clamps.
G. Any roof (e.g. staircase) on top of the main roof shall have air termination network and it
shall be connected to lower roof network.
H. All the fixing clips for the copper tape shall be metallic (complying with Class ‘H’ of the
electrical testing based on BSEN 50164) and shall be fixed at an interval of 500mm
(1000 mm fixing distance for fixing conductors on vertical surface up to 20m from the
ground level and on the horizontal surface i.e. roof).
I. The down conductors shall be placed around the periphery of the building. A minimum
of two re-enforcing bars shall be used as down conductors in each column. The
minimum overlap dimension to connect two re-bars shall be at least 20 times the
diameter of the re-bar. If it not practical to arc-weld two re-bars then suitable clamps
should be used at a distance of each 10cm till the above dimension is achieved. Re-
enforcement bars in the designated columns should be used as down conductors, with a
suitable junction box to be recessed at approx. 500mm above the ground for the test
link.
J. The electrical continuity of the reinforcing bars shall be determined by electrical testing
between the uppermost part and the ground level. The overall electrical resistance
should not be greater than 0.2  , measured using test equipment suitable for this
purpose. If this value is not achieved, or it is not practical to conduct such testing, the
reinforcing bar shall not be used as a natural down conductor.
K. The composite glass panel shall be bonded to all the down conductors at the various
slab levels as per the rolling sphere spacing by using bi-metallic clamps complying to
BSEN 50164.
L. The earthing shall be done as per local authorities requirements. A minimum of 2400
mm solid copper electrode shall be provided with each down conductor separately.
However, the Specialist Lightning Protection Installer shall submit the calculation for
deciding the number of earth rods in each earth pit. Wherever the soil resistivity is low
(typically below <20  m), the Specialist Lightning Protection Installer must use either
solid copper rods or stainless steel rods to ensure the longitivity of the earth termination
network.

M. The complete Lightning Protection System measured at any point, should not exceed 10
ohms. With the test clamp disconnected, the resistance of each individual earth should
be no more than ten times the number of down conductors in the complete system.
N. The LV and the IT earth should in no case exceed 1 ohm.
O. The terminated head of each electrode shall be located in a light weight inspection pit. If
clear earth is not available, then the Specialist Lightning Protection Installer has to install
the earth pit inside the building using double flange earth electrode seals.
P. The double flange earth seals should be designed for use in concrete slabs of nominal
thickness from 300mm to 5000mm thick, the seal will withstand water pressure up to 80
psi equal to a 55 meter head of water. The earth seal flange shall be free from dust /
debris, grease/paint before pouring of the concrete. A specialist installer should be
employed to do the installation or shall be done under the supervision of the
manufacturer or the manufacturer’s authorized representative.
Q. Specialist Lightning Protection Installer also has to ensure, based on BSEN 62305 – IV,
that suitable co-ordinated over-voltage surge protection devices with an extra low let –
through voltage are used for protecting any terminal devices i.e. DBs feeding critical
services or even the local critical electrical gadget.
R. All metallic parts protruding outside the extended air termination network (e.g. balcony
hand rails etc) shall be connected to the air termination using suitable clamps (material
complying to BSEN 50164) at every floor wherever the horizontal conductor is applied.
The equipment on the roof (i.e. Chiller units etc.) shall be protected using vertical air
terminals of suitable height so that it provides the zone of protection. This air terminal
shall be installed at a suitable separation distance so that the partial lightning current
doesn’t flow through the equipment. The cable from the equipment shall be protected
using an over – voltage protector. The equipment shall not be bonded to the air
termination network. Specialist Lightning Protection Installer shall give the calculation of
the suitable separation distance.
S. The Specialist Lightning Protection Installer shall install suitable surge protectors at local
power distribution boards feeding vulnerable equipment, in order to protect these
against transients generated downstream of the protectors in 1, above. (These
transients may be the result of inductive coupling or electrical switching.)
T. Protectors shall be tested in accordance with the requirements of:

1. BS EN 62305:2011 – Electrical & Electronics Systems Protection within
structures (Part 4),
2. BS 2914:1972 ‘Specification for surge diverters for alternating current power
circuits’,
3. IEEE C62.41-2008 ‘Recommended practice on surge voltages in low voltage AC
power circuits’.
U. Protectors for a given Location Category shall be rated for a High Exposure Level (as
defined by BS EN 62305 - 4), unless contrary information is available.
V. The protector must not interfere with or restrict the system’s normal operation. It should
not:
1. corrupt the normal mains power supply
2. break or shutdown the power supply during operation
3. have an excessive earth leakage current.
W. The protector shall be rated for a peak discharge current of no less than 10kA (8/20:s
waveform) between any two conductors (phase to neutral, phase to earth and neutral to
earth).
X. The protector shall limit the transient voltage to below equipment susceptibility levels.
Unless otherwise stated, the peak transient let-through voltage shall not exceed 600
volts, for protectors with a nominal working voltage of 230 or 240 volts, when tested in
accordance with BS EN 62305 Part - 4 (6kV 1.2/50 µs open circuit voltage, 3kA 8/20µs
short circuit current).
Y. This peak transient let-through voltage shall not be exceeded for all combinations of
conductors:
1. phase to neutral
2. phase to earth
3. neutral to earth.
Z. Mains protectors (installed in shunt/parallel) should have continuous indication of its

protection status and the presence of power.
Status indication should clearly show per phase:
1. full protection present
2. reduced protection - replacement required
3. no protection - failure of protector.
AA. Remove indication of status (including loss of phase/supply) should also be possible via
a volt free contact.
BB. The status indication should warn of protection failure between all combinations of
conductors, including neutral to earth. (Otherwise a potentially dangerous short circuit
between neutral and earth could go undetected for some time.) This should include
early warning of excessive neutral to earth voltages.
CC. The protector shall be supplied with detailed installation instructions. The installer must
comply with the installation practice detailed by the protector manufacturer.
DD. The Specialist Lightning Protection Installer shall also install transient overvoltage
protectors on all data communication/signal/telephone lines in order to protect
equipment connected to the line, against transient overvoltage. (Where data lines link
equipment in separate buildings, transient overvoltage protectors should be installed at
both ends of the line in order to protect both pieces of equipment.)
EE. Protectors shall be tested in accordance with the requirements of:

1. BS EN 62305:2011 – Electrical & Electronics Systems Protection within
structures (Part 4),
2. CCITT IX K17 ‘Tests on power fed repeaters using solid-state devices in order to
check the arrangements for protection from external interference’.
FF. Protectors shall be rated for Location Category - High Exposure Level (as defined by BS
EN 62305 – 4: 2011), unless contrary information dictates a lower Exposure Level.
GG. The protector must not impair the system’s normal operation. It should not suppress the
system’s normal signal voltage

1. restrict the system’s bandwidth or signal frequency
2. introduce excessive in-line resistance
3. cause signal reflections or impedance mismatches (high frequency systems
only).
HH. The protector will have a low transient let-through voltage for tests conducted in
accordance with BS en 62305 -4: 2011 (5kV 10/700µs test).
II. This let-through performance will be provided for all combinations of conductors:
1. signal line to signal line
2. signal line to screen/earth.
JJ. The protector shall be rated for a peak discharge current of 10kA.
KK. The protector shall be supplied with detailed installation instructions. The installer must
comply with the installation practice detailed by the protector manufacturer.
LL. The protector manufacturer should allow for the facility to mount and earth large
numbers of protectors through an accessory combined mounting and earthing kit.
2.03 MATERIALS
A. Materials shall comply in weight, size and composition with the requirements of BS EN
50164.
B. All surge protection devices to be used shall be from the same manufacturer who
supplies the structural lightning protection.
C. Surge protectors shall be manufactured for the specific type and voltage of the electrical
service and shall provide clamping for both normal (L-N) and common (L-N-G) mode
protection.
2.04 EQUIPOTENTIAL BONDING
A. Lightning Protection Installer shall ensure proper co-ordination between the Structural,
Civil, Electrical and the Cladding contractor
B. All installation details shall be agreed with the Engineer prior to commencement of work.
The Specialist Lightning Protection Installer shall obtain an inspection certificate from
the manufacturer or its authorized representative towards the satisfactory installation of
the system and that proper material in accordance to the above standard has been
used.
C. Equipotential Bonding is the electrical interconnection of all the appropriate metallic

installation / parts, such that in the event of the lightning current flowing, no metallic part
is at a different voltage potential with respect to another. The metallic parts have to be
essentially at the same potential so that the risk of sparking or flash over is nullified. This
electrical interconnection shall be achieved by using specific bonding solid copper bar of
at least 50mm x 6mm cross section area. Bonding shall also incorporate the use of
surge protection devices where direct connection to the bonding bar is not suitable or

practical. The SPDs must be installed in such a way that they are readily accessible and
visible for inspection purposes.
D. For structures taller than 30 meters, the specialist lightning Protection installer shall
install the equipotential bonding at either the basement or the ground level and then
every 20 meters floor thereafter. Wherever protection of internal systems against over-
voltages caused by lightning discharge requires SPDs, these shall conform to BSEN
62305 – Part 4.
E. The gas, water and other metallic systems shall all be bonded directly to the equi-
potential bar located inside but close to the outer wall near the ground floor or basement
level. The power cable shall be bonded to the equi-potential bonding bar via a suitable
SPD. The screen of the antenna cable or any shielded power supply shall also be
bonded to the equipotential bar.
F. Service entry SPDs are for metallic electrical services only - gas and water do not fall
under this category. Metallic gas and water need to be directly bonded. The service
entry data and telecom lines can handle 2.5kA (10µs/350 µs) per line, so the specialist
lightning protection installer shall provide suitable SPDs in accordance to the above
specification as per the BSEN 62305 – Part 4
G. Since the service entrance SPDs are designed to protect against dangerous sparking
only as per BS EN 62305-3. The specialist lightning protection installer shall need to fit
additional protection at the sub-distribution and near equipment to protect electronic
equipment to BS EN 62305-4. Both types of SPD are a required in accordance with this
BS EN standard if the risk assessment demands this.
H. The bonding bar shall be located close to the main distribution board and shall be
connected to earth termination network at ≤ 1 ohm, with a very short length conductor
not exceeding 10 meters in length.
I. Please refer to the details for further clarification.
J. All the bonding bars at different levels shall be connected to each other, which in-turn is
earthed at 1 ohm.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install lightning protection components and systems according to BS EN 62305.
B. Install conductors with direct paths from air terminals to ground connections. Avoid
sharp bends and narrow loops.
C. Conceal the following conductors:
D. System conductors.
E. Down conductors.
F. Interior conductors.
G. Conductors within normal view from exterior locations at grade within 60 m of building.
H. Notify Architect at least 48 hours in advance of inspection before concealing lightning

protection components.
I. Cable Connections: Use approved exothermic-welded connections for all conductor

splices and connections between conductors and other components, except those
above single-ply membrane roofing.
3.02 TESTING
A. On completion of the installation or of any modification to it, the following isolated and
combined measurement and / or checks has to be made and the results recorded in a
lightning protection system logbook.
B. The resistance to earth of each local earth electrode and in addition the resistance to
earth of the complete earth termination system.
C. Each local earth electrode has been measured in isolation and the test point between
the down conductor and the earth electrode in the disconnected position (isolated
measurement)
D. A further measurement has to be taken with the test point in the connected position
(combined measurement)
E. The results of visual check of all conductors, bonds and joints and their measured
electrical continuity.
F. If the resistance to earth of a lightning protection system exceeds 10 ohms, the value
must be reduced. Necessary remedial action needs to be taken to reduce the value
below or equal to 10 ohms.
G. The shop drawings must be approved by the manufacturer or the manufacturer’s

authorized representative, which has to be used for installation afterwards to ensure
total adherence to the standards and requirements. Also the manufacturer or the
manufacturer-authorized representative will have to survey and certify the installation to
ensure the standards.
H. The manufacturer or the manufacturer’s authorized representative will certify the bill of
materials, provided by the Specialist Lightning Protection Installer for the project.
I. The Specialist Lightning Protection Installer must submit the Test Certificates of the
materials used as per BSEN 50164, which should be attested in original by the
manufacturer or the manufacturer’s authorized representative.
3.03 RECORDS
A. The person has to keep on site or the following records, responsible for the upkeep of
the installation:
1. Approved shop drawings, showing the nature, dimensions, materials and position
of all component parts of the lightning protection system.

2. The nature of the soil and any special earthing arrangements.
3. The type and position of the earth electrodes, including reference electrodes.
4. The test conditions and the result obtained.
5. Any alteration, additions or repairs to the system.
6. The name of the person responsible for the installation upkeep.
7. A label should be attached at the origin of the electrical installation, worded as
follows
8. “This structure is provided with a lightning protection system in accordance with
BSEN 62305 and BSEN 50164 and the bonding to the services and the main
equi-potential bonding should be maintained accordingly”
3.04 MAINTENANCE
A. The periodic inspections and tests recommended will show what maintenance, if any is
needed. Tests have to be repeated at fixed intervals, as mentioned in the BSEN 62305
– Part III.
B. Particular attention should be given to the following:

1. Evidence of corrosion or conditions likely to lead to corrosion
2. Alterations and additions to the structure which may affect the lightning protection
system (e.g. erection of radio and television aerials, installation of crane tracks,
glass / window cleaning system etc.)
END OF SECTION

SECTION 26 5100
INTERIOR LIGHTING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1. Interior lighting fixtures, lamps, and ballasts.
2. Lighting fixture supports.

1. Division 26 Section "Lighting Control System" for manual or programmable
control systems with low-voltage control wiring or data communication circuits.
2. Division 26 Section "Wiring Devices"
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of lighting fixture, arranged in order of fixture designation.
Include data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following:
1. Physical description of lighting fixture including dimensions.
2. Emergency lighting units including battery and charger.
3. Ballast.
4. Energy-efficiency data.
5. Life, output, and energy-efficiency data for lamps.
6. Photometric data, in IESNA or lumdat format, based on laboratory tests of each
lighting fixture type, outfitted with lamps, ballasts, and accessories identical to
those indicated for the lighting fixture as applied in this Project.
a. For indicated fixtures, photometric data shall be certified by a qualified
independent testing agency. Photometric data for remaining fixtures shall
be certified by the manufacturer.
B. Shop Drawings: Show details of nonstandard or custom lighting fixtures. Indicate

dimensions, weights, methods of field assembly, components, features, and
accessories.
1. Wiring Diagrams: Power and control wiring.
C. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plan(s) and other details, drawn to scale, on
which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input
from installers of the items involved:
1. Lighting fixtures.
2. Suspended ceiling components.
3. Structural members to which suspension systems for lighting fixtures will be
attached.
KEO/21-7387-0004 26 5100 / 1 Interior Lighting

4. Other items in finished ceiling including the following:
a. Air outlets and inlets.
b. Speakers.
c. Sprinklers.
d. Smoke and fire detectors.
e. Occupancy sensors.
f. Access panels.
5. Perimeter moldings.
D. Samples for Verification: Interior lighting fixtures designated for sample submission in
Interior Lighting Fixture Schedule. Each sample shall include the following:
1. Lamps: Specified units installed.
2. Accessories: Cords and plugs.
E. Product Certificates: For each type of ballast for bi-level and dimmer-controlled fixtures,
signed by product manufacturer.
F. Field quality-control test reports.
G. Operation and Maintenance Data: For lighting equipment and fixtures to include in
emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

1. BS 800 Limits and methods of measurement of radio
interference characteristics of household electrical
appliances, portable tools and similar electrical
apparatus
2. BS 4533 Luminaires
3. BS 5225 Photometric data for luminaires
4. BS EN 60238 Edison screw lamp holders
5. BS EN 60529 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures
6. BS EN 60947-1 General rules for low voltage switch gear and control
gear
B. Comply with Civil Defence requirements for the supply and installation of the
emergency and exit lights.
1.04 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of lighting fixtures and suspension system with other
construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including HVAC
equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.
1.05 WARRANTY and SERVICES
A. Warranty: Manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace components of

luminaires that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

B. Refer to section 26 5910 - Warranty and Extra Material List.
1.06 COMMISSIONING
Authority”
A. Seismic Performance: Luminaires shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions

determined according to ASCE 7.
B. Seismic Performance: Luminaires and lamps shall be labeled vibration and shock
resistant.
C. The term "withstand" means "the luminaire will remain in place without separation of any
parts when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the luminaire will be fully
operational during and after the seismic event."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. In Luminaires Schedule and Lighting Cut sheets where titles below are column or row
headings that introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection:
but are not limited to, manufacturers specified.
2. Refer to the Luminaire schedule for the specified light fittings.
2.02 LAMPS
A. General:
1. Lamps shall be furnished and installed in all luminaires covered under the
Contract
2. Lamps used for temporary lighting services shall not be utilized in the final use in
fixture units
3. Lamps for permanent installation shall not be placed in the fixtures until so
directed, and this shall be accomplished directly before the building areas are
ready for occupancy by the Employer
4. Lumen output of lamps shall be in accordance with BS EN 5225
5. Generally, high output, low consumption, tri-phosphorus lamps shall be used,
2.03 LUMINAIRES

A. All types of lighting fittings shall be as described on the Drawings and the luminaire’s
schedule- Light Fittings. Luminaires shall be manufactured to BS 4533 with an
appropriate IP classification to BS EN 60529.
B. All lamps/drivers shall be of modular type which could be replaced in the future.
C. All lighting fittings shall be supplied complete with appropriate control gear where
necessary, lamps, mounting and fixing accessories etc. whether explicitly mentioned in
the description of each light fitting or not. All the fittings shall have the same
appearance, material, technical details and approximate dimensions.
D. Luminaires shall be connected to the main circuit wiring with heat resistant flexible
cables of a minimum conductor size of 1.5 mm2 insulated with silicon rubber.
E. Break joint rings shall be used in conjunction with batten holders, ceiling roses or back
plates mounted onto a flush installation.
F. Standard suspended luminaires shall have two suspension or fixing points.
G. All lamp-holders for flexible pendants shall be of the all insulated skirted pattern with
code grips and for batten or wall mounting shall be of similar pattern. All lamp holders
shall be of the bayonet cap pattern.
H. The point box suspensions and other parts of the lighting fittings shall be provided to be
erected at festival time to suit the building programme for decoration as per the
requirements of the Project Documentation.
I. The glassware diffusers, shades and lamps shall not be fitted until all building work is
complete.
J. All fittings shall be easy to clean inside and outside, when mounted.
K. Diffusers on luminaires shall be poly-carbonate unless otherwise specified in the Project

Documentation.
2.04 TERMINATION/EARTHING
A. Fused terminal blocks shall be fitted and be of sufficient capacity for the wiring involved.
Each terminal shall be capable of accommodating two 2.5 mm2 conductors.
B. Connector strip terminals shall have a current rating not less than the rating of the circuit
protective device and shall be encapsulated in self-extinguishing grade polyethylene.
C. Where connector strips are provided in boxes behind heat producing appliances,
porcelain connectors shall be used where temperatures in excess of 70 °C are likely.
D. Conductors shall be clamped between metal surfaces such that no screws make direct
contact with the conductor. The metal used in construction of the connector shall be at
least 85 °C copper alloy such that good conductivity and electrolytic compatibility are
maintained at all times.
E. All light fittings shall be provided with earthing terminal which shall be connected to the
earth continuity lead of the final sub-circuit.
F. The earthing of all pendant or semi-pendant fittings shall be by a separate core in the
connecting flex or cable securely bonding the earth terminal on the fitting to the glanded
joint of interconnecting cables. In no case shall pendant chains or conduit support tubes
be used as a means of earthing.
2.05 CEILING SYSTEM
A. In false ceilings, luminaires whether surface or recessed mounted shall not be

supported by the false ceiling construction. Separate independent supporting systems
shall be provided for each luminaire, comprising drop rods, chains or similar.
B. Luminaires installed in false ceilings shall be connected to the lighting circuit using
mechanically coupled plug-in ceiling roses.
C. Luminaires shall be positioned to provide ease of access for maintenance, cleaning etc.,
while not impairing the distribution of light.
D. The Contractor shall ensure that the luminaire manufacturer has the correct details of
the ceiling system, including suspension, tiles, etc. He shall ensure that the luminaires
are supplied with the correct trim, suspension system and are fully compatible with the
ceiling system.
2.06 LUMINAIRE SUPPORT
A. Comply with requirements in Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for
channel and angle iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports.
B. Single-Stem Hangers: 1/2-inch (13-mm) steel tubing with swivel ball fittings and ceiling
canopy. Finish same as luminaire.
C. Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641 M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc-coated steel,
D. Rod Hangers: 3/16-inch (5-mm) minimum diameter, cadmium-plated, threaded steel

rod.
E. Hook Hangers: Integrated assembly matched to luminaire, line voltage, and equipment
with threaded attachment, cord, and locking-type plug.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Lighting fixtures: Set level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls. Install lamps in
each fixture.
B. Suspended Lighting Fixture Support:

1. Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 1200 mm, brace to limit swinging.
2. Stem-Mounted, Single-Unit Fixtures: Suspend with twin-stem hangers.
3. Continuous Rows: Use tubing or stem for wiring at one point and tubing or rod
for suspension for each unit length of fixture chassis, including one at each end.

C. Adjust aimable lighting fixtures to provide required light intensities.
D. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power

3.02 LIGHTING INSTALLATION
A. Terminations:
1. General light fittings mounted direct to conduit outlet boxes shall have the circuit
wiring run direct to the fittings terminal position. Flexible conduit pigtail shall be
provided for all fixtures to J-boxes
2. Terminations for recessed, or semi-recessed pattern fittings fitted in false
ceilings, shall have the circuit-wiring terminal above the ceiling in a ceiling rose.
Outlets shall be mounted adjacent to the fitting connected by silicone cable of
minimum 1.5mm2, BS 6500 compliant.
B. Installation of Lamps
1. Generally, install new lamps in all luminaires at substantial completion of work.
C. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

1. See Section 01 4000 "Quality Requirements" for retesting and reinspecting
requirements and Section 01 7300 "Execution" for requirements for correcting
the Work.
2. Perform the following tests and inspections:
3. Coordinate "Operational Test" Subparagraph below with requirements in Section
26 0923 "Lighting Control Devices."
4. Operational Test: After installing luminaires, switches, and accessories, and after
electrical circuitry has been energized, test units to confirm proper operation.
5. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper
operation. Verify transfer from normal power to battery power and retransfer to
normal.
6. Luminaire will be considered defective if it does not pass operation tests and
inspections.
7. Prepare test and inspection reports.
D. ADJUSTING
1. Verify with Owner that adjusting service is required for Project.
2. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of
Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting the direction of
aim of luminaires to suit occupied conditions. Make up to two visits to Project
during other-than-normal hours for this purpose. Some of this work may be
required during hours of darkness.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 26 5600
EXTERIOR LIGHTING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1. Exterior luminaires with lamps and ballasts.
2. Luminaire-mounted photoelectric relays.
3. Poles and accessories.

1. Division 26 Section "Interior Lighting" for exterior luminaires normally mounted on
exterior surfaces of buildings.
2. Division 26 Section "Lighting Control System" for manual or programmable
control systems with low-voltage control wiring or data communication circuits.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each luminaire, pole, and support component, arranged in order of
lighting unit designation. Include data on features, accessories, finishes, and the
following:
1. Physical description of luminaire, including materials, dimensions, effective
projected area, and verification of indicated parameters.
2. Details of attaching luminaires and accessories.
3. Details of installation and construction.
4. Luminaire materials.
5. Photometric data based on laboratory tests of each luminaire type, complete with
indicated lamps, ballasts, and accessories.
a. For indicated luminaires, photometric data shall be certified by a qualified
independent testing agency. Photometric data for remaining luminaires
shall be certified by manufacturer.
6. Photoelectric relays.
7. Ballasts, including energy-efficiency data.
8. Lamps, including life, output, and energy-efficiency data.
9. Materials, dimensions, and finishes of poles.
10. Means of attaching luminaires to supports, and indication that attachment is
suitable for components involved.
11. Anchor bolts for poles.
12. Manufactured pole foundations.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Anchor-bolt templates keyed to specific poles and certified by manufacturer.
KEO/21-7387-0004 26 5600 / 1 Exterior Lighting

2. Design calculations, certified by a qualified professional engineer, indicating
strength of screw foundations and soil conditions on which they are based.
3. Wiring Diagrams: Power and control wiring.
C. Samples for Verification: For products designated for sample submission in Exterior
Lighting Device Schedule. Each sample shall include lamps and ballasts.
E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For luminaires and poles to include in emergency,
A. Retain factory-applied pole wrappings on metal poles until right before pole installation.
For poles with nonmetallic finishes, handle with web fabric straps.
1.04 WARRANTY and SERVICES
A. Warranty: Manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace components of

luminaires that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
B. Refer to section 26 5910 - Warranty and Extra Material List.
1.05 COMMISSIONING
Authority”
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. In Luminaires Schedule and Lighting Cut sheets where titles below are column or row
headings that introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection:
but are not limited to, manufacturers specified.
2. Refer to the Luminaire schedule for the specified light fittings.
2.02 LUMINAIRES
A. Supply and install complete in place including but not limited to, control gears, lamps,
supports, concrete pads, earth electrodes, cables and all other necessary items for the

proper operation and safe functioning of the lighting system. Colour of the luminaire
shall be to the approval of the Architect. Lamps/ drivers shall be of modular type.
B. The light fixtures shall be as indicated on the lighting schedule.
2.03 LAMPS
A. General:
1. Lamps shall be furnished and installed in all luminaires covered under the
Contract
2. Lamps used for temporary lighting services shall not be utilized in the final use in
fixture units
3. Lamps for permanent installation shall not be placed in the fixtures until so
directed, and this shall be accomplished directly before the building areas are
ready for occupancy by the Employer
4. Lumen output of lamps shall be in accordance with BS EN 5225
5. Generally, high output, low consumption, tri-phosphorus lamps shall be used,
2.04 LIGHTING CONTROL
A. Outdoor Lighting (landscape Lights)

1. Refer Division 26 Section “Lighting Control System”
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 LUMINAIRE INSTALLATION
A. Install lamps in each luminaire.
B. Fasten luminaire to indicated structural supports.
C. Adjust luminaires that require field adjustment or aiming.
3.02 BOLLARD LUMINAIRE INSTALLATION
A. Align units for optimum directional alignment of light distribution.
B. Install on concrete base with top 100 mm above finished grade or surface at bollard
location. Cast conduit into base, and shape base to match shape of bollard base.
Finish by troweling and rubbing smooth. Concrete materials, installation, and finishing
are specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
3.03 CORROSION PREVENTION
A. Aluminum: Do not use in contact with earth or concrete. When in direct contact with a
dissimilar metal, protect aluminum by insulating fittings or treatment.

B. Steel Conduits: Comply with Division 26 Section "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical
Systems." In concrete foundations, wrap conduit with 0.254-mm thick, pipe-wrapping
plastic tape applied with a 50 percent overlap.
3.04 GROUNDING
A. Ground metal poles and support structures according to Division 26 Section "Grounding
and Bonding for Electrical Systems."
1. Install grounding electrode for each pole, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Install grounding conductor pigtail in the base for connecting luminaire to
grounding system.
B. Ground nonmetallic poles and support structures according to Division 26 Section

"Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."
1. Install grounding electrode for each pole.
2. Install grounding conductor and conductor protector.
3. Ground metallic components of pole accessories and foundations.
A. Inspect each installed fixture for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components.
B. Illumination Observations: Verify normal operation of lighting units after installing

luminaires and energizing circuits with normal power source.
1. Verify operation of photoelectric controls.
C. Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating

and interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to
demonstrate compliance with standards.
3.06 DEMONSTRATION

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain luminaire lowering devices. Refer to
Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training."
END OF SECTION

SECTION 26 5910
WARRANTY AND EXTRA MATERIAL LIST – ELEC
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Complete maintenance as per manufacturer recommendations on Electrical products.
B. Subject to compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the warranty
and spare parts shall include but not limited to the list below:
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
- Warranty period is from taking over certificate to the client; parts, labour, travel
time expenses included are included.
- Bidder is to provide a schedule of spares as part of the submission and include
delivery to site.
- Routine maintenance visits as recommended by the Manufacturer
recommendation during the defect notification period.
standard warranty.
-
2 years or
LOW VOLTAGE
Standard
ELECTRICAL POWER All spare parts required during
26 0519 Manufacturers’
CONDUCTORS AND warranty period as per
warranties
CABLES manufacturer recommendation
whichever is
greater
2 years or
GROUNDING AND Standard
All spare parts required during
26 0526 BONDING FOR Manufacturers’
warranty period as per
ELECTRICAL warranties
manufacturer recommendation
SYSTEMS whichever is
greater
2 years or
HANGERS AND Standard
26 0529 SUPPORTS FOR Manufacturers’
greater
KEO/21-7387-0004 26 5910/ 1 Warranty And Extra Material List - Elec

2 years or
RACEWAY AND Standard
26 0533 BOXES FOR Manufacturers’
greater
2 years or
Standard
CABLE TRAYS FOR All spare parts required during
ELECTRICAL warranty period as per
warranties
SYSTEMS manufacturer recommendation
whichever is
greater
2 years or
Standard
IDENTIFICATION FOR All spare parts required during
ELECTRICAL warranty period as per
warranties
SYSTEMS manufacturer recommendation
whichever is
greater
2 years or
Standard All spare parts required during
LIGHTING CONTROL Manufacturers’
26 0923 warranty period as per
DEVICES warranties manufacturer recommendation
whichever is
greater
1. Spare moulded case and

minature circuit breakers of all
different frame sizes, not less than
2 nos. circuit breakers of each size.
2 years or
Standard 2. One (1) spare of each type of
LOW VOLTAGE
Manufacturers’ lamps.
26 2300 DISTRIBUTION
warranties
EQUIPMENT
whichever is 3. Two (2) spares of residual
greater current devices (RCDs). minimum 2
no’s of each different capacity and
frame size.
4. Control terminal block minimum
10 nos. each type and size

1. Plug fuses – provide one percent

(1%) of the number of each size and
type of fuses installed, but in any
case, not less than 6 nos. fuses of
each size.
2. Wall switches – provide 0.5% of
2 years or the number of each size and type of
Standard wall switch installed. Minimum 2
Manufacturers’ no’s of each type and size.
26 2726 WIRING DEVICES
warranties 3. Socket outlets – provide 0.25% of
whichever is the number of each size and type
greater installed. Minimum 2 no’s of each
type and size.
4. Lamps – provide one percent
(1%) lamps of each size and type
for indicating panels and pilot lights
installed for different systems (Not
for the bulbs in the rooms).
2 years or
Standard 1. Potential transformer fuses: 2 of
Manufacturers’ each type installed.
warranties 2. Control-power fuses: 2 of each
whichever is type installed.
greater 3. Fuses and fusible devices for
ENCLOSED SWITCHES fused circuit breakers: 2 of each
26 2816 AND CIRCUIT type installed.
BREAKERS 4. Fuses for fusible switches: 2 of
each type installed.
5. Fuses for fused power circuit
devices: 2 of each type installed.
6. Spare indicating lights: 2 of each
type installed.
2 years or One percent (1%) of each type and
LIGHTNING Standard size. Minimum 2 no’s of each type
26 4113 PROTECTION FOR Manufacturers’ and size.
STRUCTURES warranties
whichever
2 years oris One percent (1%) of each type and
ENCLOSED greater
Standard size. Minimum 2 no’s of each type
CONTROLLERS and size.
warranties
whichever
2 years oris
greater
Standard Two (2) units of each type of lamp
26 5100 INTERIOR LIGHTING Manufacturers’ and/or luminaire installed.
warranties
whichever
2 years oris
26 5600 greater
Standard Two (2) units of each type of lamp
EXTERIOR LIGHTING Manufacturers’ and/or luminaire installed.
warranties
whichever is
greater
END OF SECTION

SECTION 26 9000
APPROVED MANUFACTURER/VENDOR LIST - ELECTRICAL
1.01 GENERAL
A Subject to compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, products to

be provided shall be from the manufacturer listed mentioned in this section.
SPEC NO TITLE MANUFACTURER COUNTRY
DIVISION 26 ELECTRICAL
26 0519 Low-Voltage DUCAB UAE
Electrical Power BAHRA Cables KSA
Cables and NUHAS CABLES Oman
Conductors JEDDAH CABLES KSA
ELSEWEDY CABLES Egypt
BAHRA CABLES KSA
OMAN CABLES Oman
26 0526 Grounding and A.J FURSE & CO. UK

Bonding A.N WALLIS & CO UK
ERICO USA
FM SUDAFIX UK
KINGSMILL UK
GERSAN Turkey
26 0529 Hangers and DECODUCT UAE
Supports CLIPSAL Australia
COMAT UAE
LANRIC Malaysia
WIREMOLD UK
BARTON UK
POWER SOLUTION UAE
INDUSTRIES
TRANS-DELTA LLC UAE
INTERNATIONALS
TEKOM PUK Turkey
INSUSTRIES
MUNGO Switzerland
FISCHER Germany
26 0533 Raceway and Boxes DECODUCT UAE
CLIPSAL Australia
COMAT UAE
LANRIC Malaysia
PANDUIT USA
SMARTR Singapore
Galvanized rigid BURN TUBES UK
steel conduits & MARUCHI Japan
accessories INSTEEL (REXWAY) Malaysia
CMS Malaysia
LANRIC Malaysia
KEO/21-7387-0004 26 9000 / 1 Approved Manufacturer Vendor List - Electrical

SMARTR Singapore
PVC conduits & DECODUCT UAE
accessories EGA KSA
KG PLASTIC Qatar
ELECTRO CONCEPT UAE
COMAT UAE
AL ADASANI Kuwait
Surface raceways for WIREMOLD UK
Electrical Systems BARTON UK
POWER SOLUTION UAE
INDUSTRIES
TRANS-DELTALLC UAE
INTERNATIONALS
TEKOM PUK Turkey
INSUSTRIES
LANRIC Malaysia
PANDUIT USA
26 0536 Cable Trays WIREMOLD UK
CABLOFIL UK
GERSAN Turkey
EAE Turkey
POWER SOLUTION UAE
INDUSTRIES LLC
TRANS-DELTA UAE
INTERNATIONALS
TEKOM PUK Turkey
INDUSTRIES
EMI UAE
LANRIC Malaysia
PANDUIT USA
26 0553 Identification for 3M USA
Electrical Systems LABEL SOURCE UK
26 0923 Lighting Control ABB Germany/ Europe
Devices SCHNEIDER France
LUTRON USA
SIEMENS Germany
26 2300 Low Voltage ABB Germany, Europe
Distribution SIEMENS Germany
boards,etc SCHNEIDER France
GENERAL ELECTRIC USA
DORMAN SMITH UK
LSIS South Korea
26 2726 Wiring Devices MK UK
LEGRAND France
ABB Europe
SCHNEIDER France
VIMAR Italy
LEVITON Europe
CLIPSAL Australia
26 2816 Enclosed Switches ABB Germany/ Europe
and Circuit Breakers SIEMENS Germany
SCHNEIDER France
LSIS South Korea

EATON Europe/USA
26 2913 Enclosed Controllers ABB Germany/ Europe
SIEMENS Germany
SCHNEIDER France
LSIS South Korea
EATON Europe/USA
26 4113 Lightning Protection A.J FURSE & CO. UK
for Structures A.N WALLIS & CO UK
ERICO USA
FM SUDAFIX UK
KINGSMILL UK

SECTION 27 1116
COMMUNICATIONS RACKS, FRAMES, AND ENCLOSURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1. 19-inch equipment cabinets.
2. Power strips.
3. Grounding.
4. Labeling.
1. Section 26 0526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems"
2. Section 26 0529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems"
3. Section 26 0533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems"
4. Section 26 0536 "Cable Trays for Electrical Systems".
5. Section 27 1323 “Communications Optical Fiber Backbone Cabling”
6. Section 27 1513 "Communications Copper Horizontal Cabling"
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. Basket Cable Tray: A fabricated structure consisting of wire mesh bottom and side rails.
B. BICSI: Building Industry Consulting Service International.
C. LAN: Local area network.
D. RCDD: Registered communications distribution designer.
E. Service Provider: provider of external communications pathways
F. TGB: Telecommunications grounding bus bar.
G. TMGB: Telecommunications main grounding bus bar.

1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual
components and profiles, and finishes for equipment racks and cabinets.
2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics,
certifications, standards compliance, and furnished specialties and accessories.
KEO/21-7387-0004 27 1116 / 1 Communications Racks, Frames, And Enclosures

B. Shop Drawings: For communications racks, frames, and enclosures. Include plans,
elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required
clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each
field connection.
2. Equipment Racks and Cabinets: Include workspace requirements and access for
cable connections.
3. Grounding: Indicate location of TGB and its mounting detail showing standoff
insulators and wall-mounting brackets.
A. Qualification Data: For qualified layout technician, installation supervisor, and field
inspector.
B. Seismic Qualification Data: Certificates, from manufacturer.

locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. Base certification on
the maximum number of components capable of being mounted in each rack
type. Identify components on which certification is based.
A. Installer Qualifications: Cabling Installer must have personnel certified by BICSI on

staff.
1. Layout Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings shall be under the direct
supervision of RCDD.
2. Installation Supervision: Installation shall be under the direct supervision of
Registered Technician, who shall be present at all times when Work of this
Section is performed at Project site.
3. Field Inspector: Currently registered by BICSI as RCDD to perform the on-site
inspection.
B. Testing Agency Qualifications:

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by BICSI as an RCDD to
supervise on-site testing.
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install cables and connecting materials

until wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and temporary HVAC system is operating
and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels
during the remainder of the construction period.

A. Refer to section “Climatic Condition” in Division 26 0500 - Common Requirements for
Electrical Installations.
1.08 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of communications equipment with Owner's

telecommunications and ONU equipment and service suppliers. Coordinate service
entrance arrangement with local service provider.
1. Meet jointly with telecommunications and ONU equipment suppliers, local
exchange carrier representatives, and Owner to exchange information and agree
on details of equipment arrangements and installation interfaces.
2. Record agreements reached in meetings and distribute them to other
participants.
3. Adjust arrangements and locations of distribution frames, cross-connects, and
patch panels in equipment rooms to accommodate and optimize arrangement
and space requirements of telecom and ONU equipment.
4. Adjust arrangements and locations of equipment with distribution frames, cross-
connects, and patch panels of cabling systems of other communications,
electronic safety and security, and related systems that share space in the
equipment room.
B. Coordinate location of power raceways and receptacles with locations of

communications equipment requiring electrical power to operate.
1.09 DELEGATED DESIGN RESPONSIBILITY:
A. Notwithstanding the drawings and other information provided to the Contractor, the
Contractor shall be fully responsible for the design, detailing of the works described
which shall be fit for their intended purpose. The Contractor indemnifies the Employer
and Design Consultant from any and all claims, costs and expenses arising from any
loss or damage in connection with any error in or failure of the Contractor’s designed
portion of the Works.
A. Refer to section 27 5910 – Warranty and Extra Material List
PART 2 - A. PRODUCTS


provided shall be from the manufacturer listed in the Section 27 9000 - Approved
Vendors List (AVL).
2.02 All installation shall be as per UTT Guideline & Service Provider Guidelines
2.03 19-INCH EQUIPMENT CABINETS
A. Description: Manufacturer-assembled four-post frame enclosed by side and top panels

and front and rear doors, designed for mounting telecommunications equipment. Width
is compatible with EIA/ECIA 310-E, 19-inch (482.6-mm) equipment mounting with an
opening of 17.72 inches (450 mm) between rails.
B. General Cabinet Requirements:

1. Modular units designed for telecommunications terminal support and coordinated
with dimensions of units to be supported.
2. Material: Steel.
3. Finish: Manufacturer's standard, baked-polyester powder coat.
4. Color: Light grey.
C. Cable Management:
1. Metal, with integral wire retaining fingers.
2. Baked-polyester powder coat finish.
3. Vertical cable management panels shall have front and rear channels, with
covers.
4. Provide horizontal crossover cable manager at top of each relay rack, with a
minimum height of two rack units each.
2.04 POWER STRIPS
A. Power Strips: Comply with UL 1363.

2. Rack mounting.
3. 10 x 16-A, 230-V ac, receptacles.
4. LED indicator lights for power and protection status.
5. LED indicator lights for reverse polarity and open outlet ground.
6. Circuit Breaker and Thermal Fusing: When protection is lost, circuit opens and
cannot be reset.
7. Rocker-type on-off switch, illuminated when in on position.
8. Peak Single-Impulse Surge Current Rating: 13 kA per phase.
9. Protection modes shall be line to neutral, line to ground, and neutral to ground.
2.05 OPTICAL NETWORK UNIT (ONU)
A. ONU shall be provided as per UTT Guideline & Service Provider Guidelines

2.06 GROUNDING
A. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical
Systems." for grounding conductors and connectors.
B. Telecommunications Main Bus Bar:

1. Connectors: Mechanical type, cast silicon bronze, solderless compression or
exothermic-type wire terminals, and long-barrel, two-bolt connection to ground
bus bar.
2. Ground Bus Bar: Copper, minimum 6 mm thick by 100 mm wide with 7.14-mm
holes spaced 28 mm apart.
3. Stand-Off Insulators: Comply with UL 891 for use in switchboards, 600 V. Lexan
or PVC, impulse tested at 5000 V.
C. Comply with TIA-607-B.
2.07 LABELING
A. Comply with ANSI/TIA-606-B for a system of labeling materials, including label stocks,
laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 ENTRANCE FACILITIES
A. Contact telecommunications service provider and arrange for installation of demarcation

point, protected entrance terminals, and a housing when so directed by service provider.
B. Install buried pathways complying with recommendations in ANSI/TIA-569-D, "Entrance

Facilities" Article.
C. Install buried entrance pathway complying with Division 26 Section "Raceway and
Boxes for Electrical Systems."
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with BICSI TDMM for layout and installation of communications equipment
rooms.
B. Bundle, lace, and train conductors and cables to terminal points without exceeding
manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. Install lacing bars and distribution spools.
3.03 FIRESTOPPING
A. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."Comply with

ANSI/TIA-569-D, Annex A, "Firestopping."
B. Comply with BICSI TDMM, "Firestopping Systems" Article.

3.04 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify system components, wiring, and cabling complying with ANSI/TIA-606-B.

Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems.
Comply with requirements in Division 09 Section "Interior Painting" for painting
backboards. For fire-resistant plywood, do not paint over manufacturer's label.
B. Labels shall be preprinted or computer-printed type.
3.05 TRAINING

personnel.
B. Train the Employer's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules related to

troubleshooting, servicing, and preventive maintenance. Training period shall be
minimum 3 days and longer if required to get the employer’s maintenance team familiar
with the products operation and maintenance.
C. Obtain employers staff signatures for attendance and submit as a record that the
D. Distribute copies of the operation and maintenance manuals during the training and go
thru the content in details. Please note the copies distributed during the training are not
the official copies to submitted for close out purposes.
E. Schedule training with the Employer, through Engineer, with at least 14 days' advance
notice.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 27 1513
COMMUNICATIONS COPPER HORIZONTAL CABLING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1. Category 6a twisted pair cable.
2. Twisted pair cable hardware, including plugs and jacks.
3. Cabling identification products.
4. Grounding provisions for twisted pair cable.
5. Source quality control requirements for twisted pair cable.
1. Section 26 0533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems"
2. Section 27 1116 “Communications Racks, Frames, and Enclosures”
3. Section 27 1323 “Communications Optical Fiber Backbone Cabling”
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. Basket Cable Tray: A fabricated structure consisting of wire mesh bottom and side rails.
B. BICSI: Building Industry Consulting Service International.
C. Consolidation Point: A location for interconnection between horizontal cables extending

from building pathways and horizontal cables extending into furniture pathways.
D. Cross-Connect: A facility enabling the termination of cable elements and their

interconnection or cross-connection.
E. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.
F. IDC: Insulation displacement connector.
G. LAN: Local area network.
H. MUTOA: Multiuser telecommunications outlet assembly, a grouping in one location of

several telecommunications outlet/connectors.
I. Outlet/Connectors: A connecting device in the work area on which horizontal cable or

outlet cable terminates.
J. RCDD: Registered Communications Distribution Designer.
KEO/21-7387-0004 27 1513 / 1 Communications Copper Horizontal Cabling

K. UTP, U/UTP: Unshielded twisted pair.
L. F/UTP: Foiled/Unshielded twisted pair.
M. U/FTP: Unshielded/Foiled twisted pair.
N. F/FTP: Foiled/Foiled twisted pair.
O. S/FTP: Screened/Foiled twisted pair.
P. SF/UTP: Screened Foiled/Unshielded twisted pair.
1.03 COPPER HORIZONTAL CABLING DESCRIPTION
A. Horizontal cable cabling system shall provide interconnections between Floor Distributor
and the equipment outlet, in the telecommunications cabling system structure. Cabling
system consists of horizontal cables, intermediate and main cross-connects, mechanical
terminations, and patch cords or jumpers used for horizontal-to-horizontal cross-
connection.
1. Horizontal cabling shall contain no more than one transition point or consolidation
point between the horizontal cross-connect and the telecommunications
equipment outlet.
2. Bridged taps and splices shall not be installed in the horizontal cabling.
B. The maximum allowable horizontal cable length is 90 m. This maximum allowable length
does not include an allowance for the length of 4.9 m to the workstation equipment or in
the horizontal cross-connect.
B. Shop Drawings: Reviewed and stamped by RCDD

1. System Labeling Schedules: Electronic copy of labeling schedules, in software
and format selected by Owner.
2. Cabling administration drawings and printouts.
3. Wiring diagrams and installation details of telecommunications equipment, to
show location and layout of telecommunications equipment, including the
following:
a. Telecommunications rooms plans and elevations.
b. Telecommunications pathways.
c. Telecommunications system access points.
d. Telecommunications grounding system.
e. Telecommunications conductor drop locations.
f. Typical telecommunications details.
g. Mechanical, electrical, and plumbing systems.
4. Cross-connects and patch panels. Detail mounting assemblies, and show
elevations and physical relationship between the installed components.
5. Cable tray layout, showing cable tray route to scale, with relationship between
the tray and adjacent structural, electrical, and mechanical elements. Include the
following:

a. Vertical and horizontal offsets and transitions.
b. Clearances for access above and to side of cable trays.
c. Vertical elevation of cable trays above the floor or bottom of ceiling
structure.
d. Load calculations to show dead and live loads as not exceeding
manufacturer's rating for tray and its support elements.
C. Twisted pair cable testing plan.
D. Samples: For telecommunications jacks, jack assemblies and plugs, in specified finish,
one for each size and outlet configuration and faceplates for color selection and
evaluation of technical features.
A. Qualification Data: For RCDD, Source quality-control reports.
B. Product Certificates: For each type of product.
C. Source quality-control reports.
D. Field quality-control reports.
A. Maintenance Data: For splices and connectors to include in maintenance manuals.
B. Software and Firmware Operational Documentation:

1. Software operating and upgrade manuals.
2. Program Software Backup: On magnetic media or compact disk, complete with
data files.
3. Device address list.
4. Printout of software application and graphic screens.
A. Installer Qualifications: Cabling Installer must have personnel certified by BICSI on

staff.
1. Layout Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings and Cabling Administration
Drawings, Cabling Administration Drawings, and field testing program
development by an RCDD.
2. Installation Supervision: Installation shall be under the direct supervision of
Registered Technician, who shall be present at all times when Work of this
Section is performed at Project site.
3. Testing Supervisor: Currently certified by BICSI as an RCDD to supervise on-
site testing.
B. Testing Agency Qualifications:

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by BICSI as an RCDD to
supervise on-site testing.

A. Test cables upon receipt at Project site.

1. Test each pair of UTP cable for open and short circuits.
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install cables and connecting materials

until wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and temporary HVAC system is operating
and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels
during the remainder of the construction period.
A. Refer to section “Climatic Condition” in Division 26 0500 - Common Requirements for

Electrical Installations.
1.11 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of telecommunications pathways and cabling with

telecommunications and LAN equipment and service suppliers.
B. Coordinate telecommunications outlet/connector locations with location of power

receptacles at each work area.
C. Coordinate location of power raceways and receptacles with locations of

communications equipment requiring electrical power to operate.
D. Coordinate racks locations with other systems equipment that might be sharing the
same room in order to insure efficient use of the shared space.
A. Refer to section 27 5910 – Warranty and Extra Material List

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

Vendors List (AVL).
A. General Performance: Horizontal cabling system shall comply with transmission

standards in TIA-568-C.1, when tested according to test procedures of this standard.
B. Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces: Comply with TIA-569-D.
C. Grounding: Comply with TIA-607-B.
2.03 PATHWAYS
A. General Requirements: Comply with ANSI/TIA-569-D. Grounding and bonding shall

comply with ANSI/TIA-607-B.
B. Cable Support: For support of Category 6A cabling, designed to prevent degradation of

cable performance and pinch points that could damage cable.
1. Support brackets with cable tie slots for fastening cable ties to brackets.
2. Lacing bars, spools, J-hooks, and D-rings.
3. Straps and other devices.
C. Cable Trays:
1. Basket Cable Trays: 50 mm deep. Wire mesh spacing shall not exceed 50 by 100
mm.
D. Conduit and Boxes: Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Raceway and
Boxes for Electrical Systems. Flexible metal conduit shall not be used.
1. Outlet boxes shall be no smaller than 50 mm wide, 75 mm high, and 64 mm deep.
2. Use metric units.
2.04 CATEGORY 6A TWISTED PAIR CABLE
A. Description: 100-ohm, 4-pair twisted-pair cable.

1. Comply with ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 for performance specifications.
2. Comply with ANSI/TIA-568-C.1 for recognized cabling.
B. Horizontal cabling

1. Horizontal cabling shall be a IEC 332-1 compliant, 100 ohm, 1.0mm2, 4-Pair,
Foil-Unshielded Twisted Pair (F/UTP), of a LSZH construction, compliant with
ANSI/TIA/EIA 568-B.2 for Category 6A performance, with swept frequency
testing to at least 500 MHz. Cable characteristics shall be as follows:
2. Conductor resistance at 20o C (max): 150 ohms/km.
3. Dielectric strength at 50 Hz (min.): 1kV D.C./1min.
4. Insulation resistance (min.): 5000 M.ohms.km.
5. Characteristics Impedance (Zc): 100 ohms (± 5%).
6. Have a construction comprised of 4-pairs of 1.0mm2 solid bare copper
conductors utilizing a centre isolation member to maintain pair geometry for
optimal NEXT performance
7. Have a foil tape surrounding the cable pairs.
8. Plenum rated
9. All copper components used in the horizontal system will be of the same
manufacturer, and will all be third party TESTED & VERIFIED to Cat 6A
components, permanent link & channel, complying to ANSI / TIA / EIA, ISO / IEC
& CENELEC EN standards.
10. Each cable box/reel shall be individually tested by the manufacturer and be
delivered with manufacturer’s test results affixed.
11. The outermost jacket shall be indelibly printed by the manufacturer listing the
name of the manufacturer, UL rating, and incremental footage markings.
12. Cable sheath shall be Low Smoke Zero Halogen jacket, meeting IEC 60332-1
(flame retardant), IEC 60754-2, IEC 601034 fire resistance standards and low
smoke emission compliance EN 50267-2-1.
2.05 TWISTED PAIR CABLE HARDWARE
A. Description: Hardware designed to connect, splice, and terminate twisted pair copper
communications cable.
B. General Requirements for Twisted Pair Cable Hardware:

1. Comply with the performance requirements of Category 6a.
2. Comply with TIA-568-C.2, IDC type, with modules designed for punch-down caps
or tools.
3. Cables shall be terminated with connecting hardware of same category or higher.
C. Source Limitations: Obtain twisted pair cable hardware from same manufacturer as
twisted pair cable, from single source.
D. Connecting Blocks:
1. 110-style IDC for Category 6a.
2. Provide blocks for the number of cables terminated on the block, plus 25 percent
spare, integral with connector bodies, including plugs and jacks where indicated.
3. Number of Terminals per Field: One for each conductor in assigned cables.
E. Patch Panel: Modular panels housing numbered jack units with IDC-type connectors at
each jack location for permanent termination of pair groups of installed cables.
1. Features:
a. Universal T568A and T568B wiring labels.
b. Labeling areas adjacent to conductors.
c. Replaceable connectors.

d. 24 or 48 ports.
2. Construction: 16-gauge steel and mountable on 483 mm equipment racks.
3. Number of Jacks per Field: One for each four-pair [cable indicated] [conductor
group of indicated cables, plus spares and blank positions adequate to suit
specified expansion criteria].
F. Patch Cords: Factory-made, four-pair cables in 900 mm or 1200-mm lengths; terminated

with eight-position modular plug at each end.
1. Patch cords shall have bend-relief-compliant boots. Patch cords shall have latch
guards to protect against snagging.
2. Patch cords shall be the same or higher category than connecting hardware.
3. Patch cords shall have color-coded boots for circuit identification.
G. Plugs and Plug Assemblies:

1. Male; eight position; color-coded modular telecommunications connector
designed for termination of a single four-pair, 100-ohm, unshielded or shielded
twisted pair cable.
2. Standard: Comply with TIA-568-C.2.
H. Jacks and Jack Assemblies:

1. Female; eight position; modular; fixed telecommunications connector designed
for termination of a single four-pair, 100-ohm, unshielded or shielded twisted pair
cable.
2. Designed to snap-in to a patch panel or faceplate.
3. Standard: Comply with TIA-568-C.2.
I. Faceplates and Jacks:

1. Flush mount jacks for voice and data shall be an eight-pin, eight conductor
(8P8C) modular, with an insulation displacement connector on the rear. They
shall provide color-coding for the T568B wiring schedule.
2. UTP Jacks shall meet or exceed ANSI/TIA/EIA Category 6a component
compliance through the frequency range of 1 to 250MHz with usable bandwidth
to 500MHz
3. Be backwards compatible to allow lower performing categories of cables or
connecting hardware and support industry standards for T568A or T568B wiring
options.
4. Be backwards compatible to allow lower performing categories of cables or
connecting hardware to operate to their full capacity.
5. Faceplates shall be a single or double gang as identified on drawings, Jacks
shall be of the same manufacturer.
6. Customize face plate material and color as per ID schedules. Each faceplate
shall have integral labeling and identification capability.
J. Legend:
1. Machine printed, in the field, using adhesive-tape label.
2. Snap-in, clear-label covers and machine-printed paper inserts.
2.06 CABLE BUNDLING MATERIALS
A. Provide hook and loop tape, 13mm Wide and of a length equal to 130% of the
circumference of the cable bundle.

B. Cable ties shall be of durable construction, UPVC a minimum of 6mm wide, and of a
length equal to 130% of the circumference of the cable bundle. Cable ties are to be
provided as per the recommendations of the cabling manufacturer.
C. When used in areas considered environmental air space, all bundling materials shall be
appropriately listed.
D. Cable bundles shall not to be over tightened such that deformation occurs to the original
geometry of the cables. Such practice will be rejected and damaged cables shall be
replaced at the Contractor’s cost.
2.07 TROUGHS, TROUGH COVERS & DISTRIBUTION RINGS
A. Troughs shall be integral to all wall mounted connecting/termination blocks and

connected to the base of all vertical distribution fields.
B. Distribution Rings shall be integral to all wall mounted connecting/termination blocks and
shall be of the same type and manufacture of the terminal blocks.
C. Rings shall be constructed of a non-metallic, high-strength, fire-resistant extruded

material.
D. Trough Covers shall be provided for covering the patch cord field.
2.08 GROUNDING
A. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Earthing and Bonding for Electrical
Systems." for grounding conductors and connectors.
B. Comply with ANSI/TIA-607-B.
A. Factory test cables on reels according to TIA-568-C.1.
B. Factory test twisted pair cables according to TIA-568-C.2.
C. Cable will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
D. Prepare test and inspection reports.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 WIRING METHODS
A. Wiring Method: Install cables in raceways and cable trays except within consoles,
cabinets, desks, and counters. Conceal raceway and cables except in unfinished
spaces.
1. Install plenum cable in environmental air spaces, including plenum ceilings.

2. Comply with requirements for raceways and boxes specified in Division 26
Section "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems."
B. Wiring Method: Conceal conductors and cables in accessible ceilings, walls, and floors
where possible.
C. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train cables to terminal points with no
excess and without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. Provide and
use lacing bars and distribution spools.
3.02 INSTALLATION OF PATHWAYS
A. Comply with requirements for demarcation point, pathways, cabinets, and racks
specified in Division 27 Section " Communications Racks, Frames, and Enclosures."
Drawings indicate general arrangement of pathways and fittings.
B. Comply with ANSI/TIA-569-D for pull-box sizing and length of conduit and number of
bends between pull points.
C. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical
Systems" for installation of conduits and wireways.
D. Install manufactured conduit sweeps and long-radius elbows whenever possible.
E. Pathway Installation in Communications Equipment Rooms:

1. Position conduit ends adjacent to a corner on backboard where a single piece of
plywood is installed, or in the corner of room where multiple sheets of plywood
are installed around perimeter walls of room.
2. Install cable trays to route cables if conduits cannot be located in these positions.
3. Secure conduits to backboard when entering room from overhead or as per
project conditions.
4. Extend conduits 76 mm as minimum above finished floor.
5. Install metal conduits with grounding bushings and connect with grounding
conductor to grounding system.
3.03 INSTALLATION OF CABLES
A. General Requirements for Cabling:

1. Comply with ANSI/TIA-568-C.1.
2. Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 6, "Cable Termination Practices."
3. Terminate conductors; no cable shall contain unterminated elements. Make
terminations only at indicated outlets, terminals, cross-connects, and patch
panels.
4. Cables may not be spliced. Secure and support cables at intervals not
exceeding 760 mm and not more than 150 mm from cabinets, boxes, fittings,
outlets, racks, frames, and terminals.
5. Install lacing bars to restrain cables, to prevent straining connections, and to
prevent bending cables to smaller radii than minimums recommended by
manufacturer.
6. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points without exceeding
manufacturer's limitations on bending radii, but not less than radii specified in

BICSI ITSIM, "Cabling Termination Practices" Chapter. Install lacing bars and
distribution spools.
7. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not splice
cable between termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard cable if
damaged during installation and replace it with new cable.
8. Cold-Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature before dereeling.
Heat lamps shall not be used for heating.
9. In the communications equipment room, install a 3-m long service loop on each
end of cable.
10. Pulling Cable: Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 4, "Pulling Cable." Monitor cable
pull tensions.
B. Copper Cable Installation:

1. Comply with ANSI/TIA-568-C.2.
2. Do not untwist copper cables more than 12 mm from the point of termination to
maintain cable geometry.
C. Open-Cable Installation:
1. Install cabling with horizontal and vertical cable guides in telecommunications
spaces with terminating hardware and interconnection equipment.
2. Suspend copper cable not in a wireway or pathway a minimum of 200 mm above
ceilings by cable supports not more than 1500 mm apart.
3. Cable shall not be run through structural members or in contact with pipes, ducts,
or other potentially damaging items.
D. Installation of Cable Routed Exposed under Raised Floors:

1. Install plenum or equivalent rated cable only.
2. Install cabling after the flooring system has been installed in raised floor areas.
3. Coil cable 1800 mm long not less than 300 mm in diameter below each feed point.
E. Group connecting hardware for cables into separate logical fields.
F. Separation from EMI Sources:

1. Comply with BICSI TDMM and ANSI/TIA-569-D for separating unshielded copper
voice and data communication cable from potential EMI sources, including
electrical power lines and equipment.
2. Separation between open communications cables or cables in nonmetallic
raceways and unshielded power conductors and electrical equipment shall be as
follows:
a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 127 mm.
b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 300
mm.
c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 610 mm.
3. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and
unshielded power lines or electrical equipment shall be as follows:
a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 64 mm.
b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 150 mm.
4. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and
power lines and electrical equipment located in grounded metallic conduits or
enclosures shall be as follows:
a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: No requirement.

b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 76 mm.
5. Separation between Communications Cables and Electrical Motors and
Transformers, 5 kVA or HP and Larger: A minimum of 1200 mm.
6. Separation between Communications Cables and Fluorescent Fixtures: A
minimum of 127 mm.
3.04 FIRESTOPPING
A. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."
B. Comply with ANSI/TIA-569-D, Annex A, "Firestopping."
C. Comply with BICSI TDMM, "Firestopping Systems" Article.
D. Comply with local authorities / Civil Defense Department guidelines.
3.05 GROUNDING
A. Install grounding according to BICSI TDMM, "Grounding, Bonding, and Electrical

Protection" Chapter.
B. Comply with ANSI-TIA-607-B.
C. Locate grounding bus bar to minimize the length of bonding conductors. Fasten to wall
allowing at least 50-mm clearance behind the grounding bus bar. Connect grounding
bus bar with a minimum 25mm2 grounding electrode conductor from grounding bus bar
to suitable electrical building ground.
D. Bond metallic equipment to the grounding bus bar, using not smaller than 16mm2
equipment grounding conductor.
3.06 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify system components, wiring, and cabling complying with ANSI/TIA-606-B.

Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section
"Identification for Electrical Systems."
1. Administration Class: Needs to be defined.
2. Color-code cross-connect fields. Apply colors to voice and data service
backboards, connections, covers, and labels.
B. Using cable management system software specified in Part 2, develop Cabling

Administration Drawings for system identification, testing, and management. Use
unique, alphanumeric designation for each cable and label cable, jacks, connectors, and
terminals to which it connects with same designation. At completion, cable and asset
management software shall reflect as-built conditions.
C. Comply with requirements in Division 09 Section "Interior Painting" for painting

backboards. For fire-resistant plywood, do not paint over manufacturer's label.

D. Paint and label colors for equipment identification shall comply with ANSI/TIA-606-B for
Class 2 level of administration, including optional identification requirements of this
standard.
E. Cable Schedule: Post in prominent location in each equipment room and wiring closet.
List incoming and outgoing cables and their designations, origins, and destinations.
Protect with rigid frame and clear plastic cover. Furnish an electronic copy of final
comprehensive schedules for Project.
F. Cabling Administration Drawings: Show building floor plans with cabling administration-
point labeling. Identify labeling convention and show labels for telecommunications
closets, backbone pathways and cables, entrance pathways and cables, terminal
hardware and positions, horizontal cables, work areas and workstation terminal
positions, grounding buses and pathways, and equipment grounding conductors.
G. Cable and Wire Identification:

1. Label each cable within 100 mm of each termination and tap, where it is
accessible in a cabinet or junction or outlet box, and elsewhere as indicated.
2. Each wire connected to building-mounted devices is not required to be numbered
at device if color of wire is consistent with associated wire connected and
numbered within panel or cabinet.
3. Exposed Cables and Cables in Cable Trays and Wire Troughs: Label each cable
at intervals not exceeding 4.5 m.
4. Label each terminal strip and screw terminal in each cabinet, rack, or panel.
a. Individually number wiring conductors connected to terminal strips, and
identify each cable or wiring group being extended from a panel or cabinet
to a building-mounted device with name and number of particular device
as shown.
b. Label each unit and field within distribution racks and frames.
5. Identification within Connector Fields in Equipment Rooms and Wiring Closets:
Label each connector and each discrete unit of cable-terminating and connecting
hardware. Where similar jacks and plugs are used for both voice and data
communication cabling, use a different color for jacks and plugs of each service.
6. Uniquely identify and label work area cables extending from the MUTOA to the
work area. These cables may not exceed the length stated on the MUTOA label.
H. Labels shall be preprinted or computer-printed type with printing area and font color that
contrasts with cable jacket color but still complies with requirements in ANSI/TIA-606-B.
1. Cables use flexible vinyl or polyester that flex as cables are bent.
A. Perform tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service

representative.
B. Tests and Inspections:

1. Visually inspect jacket materials for NRTL certification markings. Inspect cabling
terminations in communications equipment rooms for compliance with color-
coding for pin assignments, and inspect cabling connections for compliance with
TIA-568-C.1.

2. Visually inspect cable placement, cable termination, grounding and bonding,
equipment and patch cords, and labeling of all components.
3. Test twisted pair cabling for DC loop resistance, shorts, opens, intermittent faults,
and polarity between conductors. Test operation of shorting bars in connection
blocks. Test cables after termination but not cross-connection.
a. Test instruments shall meet or exceed applicable requirements in TIA-
568-C.2. Perform tests with a tester that complies with performance
requirements in "Test Instruments (Normative)" Annex, complying with
measurement accuracy specified in "Measurement Accuracy
(Informative)" Annex. Use only test cords and adapters that are qualified
by test equipment manufacturer for channel or link test configuration.
C. Data for each measurement shall be documented. Data for submittals shall be printed in
a summary report that is formatted similarly to Table 10.1 in BICSI's
"Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual," or shall be transferred from the
instrument to the computer, saved as text files, printed, and submitted.
D. Remove and replace cabling where test results indicate that they do not comply with
specified requirements.
E. End-to-end cabling will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
F. Prepare test and inspection reports.
A. The complete installation shall be tested and commissioned by a certified third party
independent of the supplier and the contractor. The contractor shall be responsible to
demonstrate the operation of the system to the satisfaction of the Client's personnel.
The third Party testing agency shall submit the testing and commissioning reports for the
Engineers review outlining all deficiencies and course of action. The contractor shall
ensure all deficiencies outlined are rectified, retested, and certified by the third party
testing agency.
3.09 TRAINING

personnel.
B. Train the Employer's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules related to

startup and shutdown, troubleshooting, servicing, and preventive maintenance. Training
period shall be minimum 3 days and longer if required to get the employer’s
maintenance team familiar with the products operation and maintenance.
C. Obtain employers staff signatures for attendance and submit as a record that the
D. Distribute copies of the operation and maintenance manuals during the training and go
thru the content in details. Please note the copies distributed during the training are not
the official copies to submitted for close out purposes.

E. Schedule training with the Employer, through Engineer, with at least 14 days' advance
notice.
F. Train Owner's maintenance personnel in cable-plant management operations, including

changing signal pathways for different workstations, rerouting signals in failed cables,
and keeping records of cabling assignments and revisions when extending wiring to
establish new workstation outlets. Include training in cabling administration software.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 27 5100
HOME AUTOMATION SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. The following specification details the minimum standards for performance of

components, material and operation of HOME AUTOMATION system proposed for
this project.
B. The systems in the project include

1. Lighting & Dimming Control System
2. Shade/blind control system
3. HVAC controls
4. Key Pads & Touch screen controls
The systems used must, adhere to industry standards, ensure modular and cost-
effective growth, and permit addition of application capacities and processing power
as needed.
C. The contractor shall supply and install the HOME AUTOMATION system suitable to
project requirement as indicated in the specification as well as in drawings.
D. The manufacture shall have local support available through distributor/ system
integrators and local office presence in the country to support their supplier in the local
market.
E. It shall be the contractor’s responsibility to ensure that the equipment installed meets
the specification requirements. Equipment not meeting this performance specification
will not be accepted.
F. All materials, equipment and systems must be state-of-the-art, latest releases and
versions and be generally available in the marketplace. Experimental or prototype
equipment or systems will not be accepted. At the time of system commissioning and
acceptance, all system software must be the latest software release for the software.
This should be demonstrated by way of letter from supplier or manufacturer stating the
current software revision.
G. All user controls of the systems and interfaces, such touch screens, remote controls,
displays, must be intuitive and simple, and require minimal instruction and training.
H. The Contractor is responsible for the supply, installation, integration, commissioning

and warranty of the systems and is fully responsible for any incompatibilities,
replacements, modifications necessary for the systems to meet the technical,
functional and performance specification
KEO/21-7387-0004 27 5100 / 1 Home Automation System

1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. The system shall comprise of a series of source controllers (which may include dimmer
packs, ballast controllers, switch packs, DMX control input and output devices,
blind/curtain controllers and any other applicable units) and user interfaces (which may
include, push button switch plates, Touch screens, time-clocks, , infrared transmitter
and receiver devices, interface units and any other applicable units). The system shall
operate using the international lighting control protocol in communication with
hardware and shall be supplied, tested and commissioned by the system supplier or
his appointed partner.
B. The system shall be centrally programmed by using advanced graphical software

operated through Windows. The system shall incorporate virtual wiring software,
programmed to control all wiring activities, switching patterns and the like.
C. The system shall comprise of a series of source controllers and user interfaces which
shall be connected together on a bus, to form a single networked system. Devices on
the bus shall be connected in a bus topology / daisy chain fashion. The system shall
operate on a ‘broadcast’ messaging basis whereby a command will be broadcast onto
the network, listened to by all of the devices on the network, but only acted upon by
those with the relevant and area and channel address. There shall be no central
memory or processing devices on which the network is entirely dependent. Systems
deploying centralised processors shall not be acceptable.
D. Each component on a network shall have its own non-volatile memory device storing
a record of that device’s address and functionality within the network. Systems
employing battery-backed memory shall not be acceptable. In the event of power
failure each memory device shall hold its memory for a period of at least 10 years.
Devices within each product storing the firmware shall be of a re-programmable
“FLASH” type, thus avoiding the need to replace chipsets for firmware upgrades.
E. The cabling shall be as per manufacturer recommendation.
F. The baud rate shall not be less than 50k.
G. The system shall have a facility to upgrade all software automatically on any point of
time.
H. System shall be capable of increasing the number of control functions in the future by
25 percent of current capacity; to include equipment ratings, housing capacities, spare
relays, terminals, number of conductors in control cables, and control software. The
network design and components shall be flexible to allow expansion or reduction in
size at design or post installation with no loss of system capability and no replacement
of network devices due to size or capacity.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Prior to the submission of shop drawings, submit to the Engineer full
details, specifications, installation instructions etc. For each item or component part of
the system proposed for use, but in all cases no such item or component part shall be
ordered, delivered or installed without the prior written approval of the Engineer to the
Contractor’s shop drawings incorporating the said items/components. Any material or

components which are not approved but installed shall be removed and replaced at
the Contractor’s expense.
B. Sample: Submit to the Engineer samples of each type of product which are going to
be used in the project for review.
C. Shop Drawings: All design layouts provided as part of this tender are for the purpose
of general guidance only. The Contractor is required to submit full design drawings,
shop drawings complete with calculations and catalogues for Engineer’s approval.
A. Manufacturers Qualifications: System shall be supplied by an approved specialist

manufacturer having at least ten (10) years’ experience in designing and
manufacturing similar system specified herein.
B. Installer Qualification: The system shall be executed by an approved specialist

subcontractor approved by the manufacturer and having at least ten (10) years’
experience in the installation, commissioning and maintenance of the system
specified.
C. Quality of Materials: It is not the intention of this specification to provide all details of
design and fabrication. The Contractor shall ensure that the equipment has been
designed and fabricated to good and prevailing commercial practice in accordance
with applicable engineering codes and standards.
D. The equipment shall comply with all relevant proposed and current National, European
and international safety and technical standards for Electrical and Electronic dimming
systems. These will include strict compliance with Electro Magnetic Conduction
(EMC) standards EN50 081-1 and EN50 082-1, Low voltage standard EN60 950 and
RFI Suppression standard EN50 014.
E. All system components shall bear the CE mark to indicate compliance with the above.
1.05 AS BUILT DRAWINGS
A. Submit as specified under provisions of related Section.
B. Submit as-built drawings based on approved shop drawings. List of components and
component data sheets/catalogues.
1.06 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this

Section with minimum seven years documented experience.
B. Local Agent: The local agent should have in stock all necessary parts supported with
skillful staff for necessary maintenance.

A. Deliver individually wrapped for protection and mounted on shipping skids.
B. Inspect for damage
C. Store in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy
canvas or heavy plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris and
traffic.
D. Handle in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions. Lift only with lugs
provided for the purpose.
A. Warranty Period: 2 years or manufacturer’s warranty period (whichever is greater)

from date of Substantial Completion. The date of substantial completion shall be the
date when all components have been certified by the Consultant and accepted by the
Owner to be complete in accordance with the definition of substantial completion
B. All components and their installations shall be free from defects. Any defective
C. The Contractor shall secure warranties from all equipment suppliers and provide the
Owner with copies of each as part of the “Project Manuals”. Each warranty shall state
that all work performed will be free from defects in materials and workmanship. The
warranty shall state that any defects in workmanship and/or materials appearing in the
work or operation of system or components of system will be corrected without any
additional cost to the Employer.
A. Furnish extra materials as per manufacturer recommendation and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
B. Spare Parts shall be for 2 years of normal operational service.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

be provided shall be from the manufacturer listed in the Section 27 9000 - Approved
Vendors List (AVL).
2.02 HOME AUTOMATION CONTROLS:
A. General:
1. The home automation system and components shall be as per latest UTT
guidelines.
2. All home automation control components shall be compatible with other
elements of light fixtures, ballasts, transformers, and lighting controls.
3. All components and equipment shall be from the reputed specified
manufacturers only.
4. The Programmable Home Automation System shall be designed & developed
in accordance with the European Installation Bus technology (KNX open
protocol system) and shall conform to all the following standards for the building
Automation purpose.
a. ISO/IEC as the International Standard ISO/IEC 14543-3 in 2006.
b. CENELEC as the European Standard EN 50090 in 2003.
c. CEN as EN 13321-1 and EN1332-2 (KNXnet/IP) in 2006.
d. SAC as the Chinese Standard GB/T 20965 in 2007.
e. ANSI/ASHRAE as the US Standard ANSI/ASHRAE 135 in 2005.
5. A two-wire bus cable shall link all sensors and actuators (on/off controllers,
shutter control , Fan coil control , dimming controllers, etc.) to each other. The
bus cable shall be a twisted pair, screened & shielded with solid conductors and
shall be capable of handling information exchange and supplying power to the
bus devices. Separate power supply to any of the sensors and actuators shall
not be acceptable. The bus cable shall be laid in the building in the form of a
linear, star or tree structure similar to the power mains. Systems requiring fixed
wiring configurations shall not be acceptable. All the sensors & actuator devices
shall be coupled to the bus via easy to install 2-wire bus connectors capable of
accepting upto 4 bus connections. Systems requiring crimping, lugging or RJ45
bus connections using CAT 5 UTP or Cat 6 cable shall not be acceptable.
6. The system shall be completely de-centralized and programmable. The
programming shall be implemented via a PC or notebook computer located
anywhere in the system and having access level passwords. Programming via
local system switches or with no password security shall not be acceptable.
Any device in the system shall be accessed for programming from the PC
location without having to manipulate the device locally.
7. The system shall work based on distributed intelligent concept. Systems which
are based on the master slave concept with polling shall not be accepted. All

the communication in the Bus shall be event driven, In case if there are no
events the bus shall be completely free.
8. Each device in the system shall be addressable via a software programmable
physical address. Any device in the system shall communicate with any other
device via software programmable group addresses (telegrams). Each
individual device will respond to only those group addresses for which they are
programmed to do so. There shall be an EEPROM storing the physical
address, group addresses & other software parameters for every device, thus
making it intelligent. No centralized processors or centralized memory storage
devices shall be permitted.
9. It shall be possible to program any of the devices on-line at the working site
without affecting any of the system devices or the system operation as well as
off-line prior to dispatch of the material to site.
10. All the system shall be programmed from manufacturer independent
programming software. The system which needs specific software and requires
manufacturer trainings for commissioning shall not be accepted.
11. The entire system shall consist of bus lines each consisting of numerous KNX
devices. The power supply shall be provided to powerinimum 64 devices per
line. The number of devices shall be connected as per the capacity of the power
supply connected in the network. Two consecutive lines shall be connected to
each other via line couplers that act as network filters and provide
communication between devices in different lines. In the event of failure of a
device in one line, only the control functions controlled by that device shall be
affected and all other devices shall continue to operate as normal.
12. The system shall be completely open, able to integrate with different application
modules developed by more than 200 manufacturers in the field level itself.
The interoprability shall not only restricted to lighing, but also can be extended
to several other functions such as blind control, HVAC control, Energy
management and Visulisation, making it completely end to end hardware as
well as software interoprable system.
13. The system at the same time shall be completely secure with the encryption
keys in the IP layer. The communication shall pass through IP Bridges with
defined security encryption keys. on successful handing over, the security keys
shall be provided to the client.
14. The power supply module feeding power to the network shall consist of a built
in back-up power to compensate short voltage interruptions of upto 200 ms.
This back-up power shall enable the system to put all actuators in a fail-safe
position (either on or off or as it is) in the event of power failure.
15. Each of the devices shall have a built-in push button along with a LED. The
LED shall lit in the event the push button is pressed and if there is power to the
device, thus depicting that the device is communicating in the system.
16. All devices in the system should conform to CE standards and should be
manufactured in accordance with the EMC guidelines and the low voltage
guidelines.
17. System shall have the capability to be interfaced with the Modbus or by BACnet
open protocol. The BACnet Interface module shall be from the same
manufacturer which shall be compatible with IP network.
18. The Multi-protocol module is capable of bridging various protocols such as
BACnet, Modbus, IP with KNX system and shall be able to support web-based
application to support smart phones and tablets to view / control the KNX
devices in the network. The module shall be from same manufacturer. Third
party manufacturers are not acceptable.

19. The multi-protocol module shall be capable of monitoring and controlling the
circuits and shall have built-in web browser. The complete visualization
program shall reside in the controller and shall be accessible from any device
connected to the network with proper authentication.
20. The Home automation system shall be modular concept able to do dimming of
various loads such as 0-10V , DALI , Phase dimming, DMX .. with the help of
modular dimmers.
21. The wall mounted button plate shall support 2-Button, 4-Button and with LED
indicator, which is used to indicate the operation status of each gang. The wall
mounted button plate shall can be controlled remotely via infrared hand held
remote control units.
22. The Home automation system visualization shall be accessible through and
device supporting web browser such as PC, Laptop, Mobile phones etc . the
system shall be able to access through Application suitable for Android and iOS
and connected to cloud without the need to purchase any license .
2.03 HOME AUTOMATION CONCEPT
A. All the Home automation modules such as Relay module, dimmer modules, HVAC
Modules , switches and other controlling elements shall be addressable and
programmable.
B. Output devices for the project (for total number required for the project refer DB
schedule of points / Home automation schematic) shall control manually via the central
capacitive touch technology Display / Timer controller located in the main areas, the
touch screen size should be minimum 7” so that the lettering and buttons will be on
legible size. The Display & control device shall be a flush mounted device or surface
mounted according to project requirement. All timer functions shall be controlled from
this touch screen from the control places and also subject to engineer’s approval. The
touch screen shall also be able to connect directly via IP network. The system shall
have ability to connect with IP cameras to monitor the building IP cameras.
C. It shall also be possible to override each of these control modules manually from the
Home Automation Panel located in the electrical room.
D. These control modules will be located in home automation Panel located (HAP) next
to the distribution boards in the electrical room on each of the floors or according to
project requirement.
E. There shall be multi channel dimmer modules (For number of channels required / DCP
refer DB schedule of points / Home Automation schematic) located in the Dimmer
control panels (DCP) on various floors to control the dimming of different types of light
fittings as shown in layouts and DB schedule of points in that relevant room.
F. In addition to the local dimming, the dimming system shall be interfaced with the A/V
system via the KNX interface module to control the volume and source selection, in
the future .
G. The system shall have also provision to integrate with Modbus RTU devices in the field
level which can be used for integration with Modbus slaves such as energy meters.
The Energy meters shall be provided in each distribution board to identify the energy
consumption.

H. The HOME AUTOMATION system should operate at the extra low voltage of 24Vdc,
9.6kbit/s transmission. The bus cable is laid as a line, star or tree structure in the
building.
I. The programming of the system is carried out with the Engineering Tools Software
(ETS) parameterization software via an RS232 or USB interface. They can be used in
any location within the bus system. A programming of the KNX devices by the Ethernet
shall also be possible via IP gateway.
J. The system shall have the capability to have a diagnostic functions, the devices
existence in the network shall be continuously monitored and in case of any of the
selected device , specially the output units in the network fails it shall be reported to
the central location mentioning the details of the device.
2.04 AREA CONTROL CONCEPT
The Home Automation system shall be programmed in such a way that unnecessary
usage of power is minimized without losing comfort and safety to the client. Home
Automation requirement is as follows.
A. All the areas including common and private areas, the lighting, Blinds and Fan coil
units shall be controlled through Home automation system.
B. Bedrooms, dressing areas and the living rooms the lighting shall be dimmable, the wall
plate shall support multiple scene setting to accommodate various scenes.
C. Touch screens shall be provided in main entrance to control the room functions, the
device shall have the ability to interface with CCTV System as well as the AV Systems
. The system shall be able to connect to the cloud to monitor and control all these
functions within the premise as well as outside the building.
D. The system shall provide various interfacing option which includes ModBus RTU,
Modbus IP , BACnet/IP , KNX-TP, KNX -IP , RS232,DALI, DMX to interface any
requirement arises during the installation phase. The system shall be interfaced to the
fire alarm and intrusion detection monitoring systems with necessary modules
2.05 Network Gateway/Floor Controller
A. The gateway shall divide the system into discrete entities, optimizing the data-flow
between the head-end PC and the Lighting Control Modules, sensors, switches and
the system spine.
B. Network bridges shall be used strategic locations as necessary to establish a trunk

and spur topology for efficient data transport. The bridge node shall contain an internal
task engine that will allow the interface to perform conditional and sequential logic.
Systems that rely on an external logic processor or centralized logic processor shall
not be acceptable.
C. All home automation control components shall be compatible with other elements of
light fixtures, ballasts, transformers, and lighting controls.
D. Factory installed solid state dimmers and control panels.

E. All components and equipment shall be from the reputed specified manufacturers only.
2.06 Network Gateway/Floor Controller
A. The gateway shall divide the system into discrete entities, optimizing the data-flow
between the head-end PC and the Lighting Control Modules, sensors, switches and
the system spine.
B. Network bridges shall be used strategic locations as necessary to establish a trunk

and spur topology for efficient data transport. The bridge node shall contain an internal
task engine that will allow the interface to perform conditional and sequential logic.
Systems that rely on an external logic processor or centralized logic processor shall
not be acceptable.
2.07 Lighting Control On/Off Control Module
A. The circuit switching module shall provide individual addressable control of connected
lighting circuits. Modules shall be located within electrical risers and provide individual
addressable control of multiple 16A lighting outputs each of which is conduited to a
number of luminaries.
B. The switching module shall be DIN rail mounted consisting of eight individually
programmable integral relays.
C. The module shall be equipped with 16A mechanically-latched relays which, in the
event of failure, remain in their last state and may be manually operated on and off
from the module.
D. Each channel should features manual override switch with visual indication of status.
E. A built in propagation delay reduces current surge when all channels are switched
simultaneously allowing progressive controlled switching of multiple loads.
F. The control modules shall be capable of being programmed with different applications
to suit site requirements. The application for which a relay has been programmed shall
apply irrespective of the signal from which it is controlled.
G. Each of the relays shall be capable of being programmed with its own ‘On’ and ‘Off’
delays which will be applicable irrespective of the signal from which the relays are
being controlled.
H. Standalone addressable DALI controller shall be used to switch and dim 64 short
addresses and 16 group addresses if fully addressable DALI systems are required.
2.08 SWITCHING MODULES (Switch Blind)
A. The Switch Actuator module shall control 8 independent loads with a capability toad
expansion module to increase the load to either 16 or 24 circuits, equipped with a
voltage free, magnetically latched relay per channel or equivalent solid-state electronic
relay according to the project requirement. The load rating shall be of 16A AC1as per
IEC60947-4-1 and each relay operation shall be indicated with a visual LED display.

The Actuator shall be equipped with an electronic bypass buttons in front of the main
module. Local ON/OFF toggle knob shall allow individual channels to be manually
overridden by simply powering it with KNX power supply. The individual relays shall
be DIN TH35 rail mounted within the HAP enclosure according to EN60715
B. The switch actuator shall also be configured to control the lighting loads as well as the
blind actuators by the software configuration, there shall not be a separate module for
the blind control if it is required in the project.
C. The actuator shall be equipped with high inrush current rated relays in order to
accommodate the the inrush current an peak repetitive current of the LED loads. The
inrush current rating shall be minimum as follows. Relays which has less current
capacity than the mentioned are not accepted.
i. 800 A/200 μs,
ii. 165 A/20 ms
D. The mechanical life time of the relays shall be higher, and the life time shall be defined
for the each type of load connect the individual relay channels. The relay shall have
minimum switching cycle as follows.
iii. Output life endurance:
1. Mechanical: >1x 106
2. 16A AC1 operation: >6x 103
E. With the 16 A switch actuator shall have the capability Incandescent lamps: AC 230
V, max. 2300W, Halogen lamps: AC 230 V, max. 2300W, Capacitive load: AC 230 V,
10 AX, max. 140 µF Motor load AC 230 V, max. 1000 W, LED load: AC 230 V, max.
200 W. The module load shall be tested in accordance with the IEC60669-2-5
standard.
F. In the event of power failure or bus wiring failure or control module failure, each of the
relays shall attain a pre-programmed fail-safe position (‘Switch On’, ‘Switch Off’ or
‘Remain As it is’).
G. When connecting with the lighting load the control modules shall be capable of been
programmed with different applications to suit site requirements for e.g. staircase
lighting function which switches ‘Off’ the relays after a preprogrammed time from the
time it has switched ‘On’. The application for which a relay has been programmed shall
apply irrespective of the signal from which it is controlled.
H. Each of the relays shall be capable of being programmed with its own ‘On’ and ‘Off’
delays that shall be applicable irrespective of the signal from which the relays are
controlled.
I. Each of the control module shall have its own individual address and shall be capable
of being programmed from the central PC for the purpose of changing parameters
without the need to access the module locally.
J. Each main module shall have the KNX connections which shall be connected with
screwless termination, the KNX terminals shall be fully covered and with a closing lid.

while removing the connector a special vertical pull out mechanism shall be an integral
part of the module in order to avoid the high pressure damage to the KNX terminals
K. The main and expansion module shall relate to a screwless terminations which can be
easy to push in or pull out, making it very easy to connect and disconnect the main
and the expansion module.
L. Each module shall be equipped with additional visual LED indicators, which includes
the run/error, Manual override LEDs in the main module and Run, Error,
Communication, Manual override LEDs in the expansion modules.
M. The switch actuator shall withstand extreme temperature operating environment,

which will be suited for the areas even without forced ventilation system. The operating
temperature shall be minimum -5 °C ... +55 °C with a humidity tolerance up to 93%,
no condensation
N. The device shall meet highest level of fire and thermal protection standards, the device
shall comply to the glow wire testing standards according to IEC60695-2-1
O. The device shall be tested in accordance with the following testing standards, the
supplier has to submit the test certificate as a part of the submittal.
1) DIN EN 60669-1 (VDE 0632 Teil 1):2009-10; EN 60669-1:1999 + A1:2002 +
A2:2008
2) DIN EN 60669-2-1 (VDE 0632-2-1):2010-03; EN 60669-2-1:2004 + A1:2009
3) DIN EN 60669-2-1/A12 (VDE 0632-2-1/A12) 2010-09; EN 60669-2-
1:2004/A12:2010
4) DIN EN 60669-2-5 (VDE 0632-2-5):2017-05; EN 60669-2-5:2016
5) DIN EN 50428 (VDE 0632-400):2010-02; EN 50428:2005 + A1:2007 + A2:2009
6) IEC 60669-1:1998
7) IEC 60669-1:1998/AMD1:1999
8) IEC 60669-1:1998/AMD2:2006
9) IEC 60669-2-1:2002
10) IEC 60669-2-1:2002/AMD1:2008
11) IEC 60669-2-1:2002/AMD2:2015
12) IEC 60669-2-5:2013
2.09 DIMMERS Module
A. The Dimming Actuator module shall control 2 independent light loads with a capability
to add dimming expansion module to increase the number of controlled dimming
channels to 4 or 6.

B. The Dimming Actuator module shall control 2 independent light loads with a capability
to add switch/blind expansion modules to increase the number by 8/4 or 16/8
switch/blind channels.
C. The dimming actuator itself or in combination with different expansion modules shall
be configured by the software configuration
D. The device shall be based on the integrated modular concept , The installation shall
be on the basis of the dimming or switch blind modules and act as in integrated
controller with a single device address , in case of maintenance or module swapping ,
it shall be possible to do it in modular basis without the need to replace the complete
integrated device . Systems which uses a single integrated controller without modular
approach are not accepted.
E. The maximum load rating of dimmer shall be 2x 350W/VA for incandescent and high
voltage halogen lamps, electronic and wounded transformers, 2x 200W or maximum
1.3A for 230V LED lamps operating in RC mode (trailing edge control) and 2x 60W for
230V LED lamps operating in RL mode (leading edge control) with derating for
operating temperature above 35°C.
F. Each dimming channel shall provide good immunity to steering signal.
G. The dimmer module shall support predefined dimming curves for the incandescent ,
Halogen , LED lamps and also able to customise the LED dimming curve based the
Luminaire characteristics. The installer shall be able to see the dimming curve through
a visual graph.
H. The device shall support wide range of LED Luminaires with flicker free and shall
provide good dimming performance with most common LED lamps.
I. The device shall be able to accept power from different power lines for each channels
and able to dim the loads . Devices which work based on a single phase only are not
accepted.
J. The individual devices shall be DIN TH35 rail mounted within the HAP enclosure
according to EN60715.
K. In the event of power failure or bus wiring failure or control module failure, each of the
relays shall attain a pre-programmed fail-safe position (‘Switch On at selectable
brightness’, ‘Switch Off’ or ‘Remain As it is’).
L. Each of the control module shall have its own individual address and shall be capable
of being programmed from the central PC for the purpose of changing parameters
without the need to access the module locally.
M. Each main module shall have the KNX connections which shall be connected with
screwless termination, the KNX terminals shall be fully covered and with a closing lid.
While removing the connector a special vertical pull-out mechanism shall be an
integral part of the module in order to avoid the high-pressure damage to the KNX
terminals.
N. The main and expansion module shall be connected with a screwless terminations
which can be easy to push in or pull out, making it very easy to connect and disconnect
the main and the expansion module.
O. Each module shall be equipped with additional visual LED indicators, which includes
the run/error, Manual override LEDs in the main module and Run, Error,
Communication, Manual override LEDs in the expansion modules.
P. The dimming actuator shall withstand extreme temperature operating environment,

which will be suited for the areas even without forced ventilation system. The operating
temperature shall be minimum -5 °C ... +55 °C with a humidity tolerance up to 93%,
no condensation
Q. The device shall meet highest level of fire and thermal protection standards, the device
shall comply to the glow wire testing standards according to IEC60695-2-1
R. The device shall support the same dimming time usage for central functionality.
S. The device shall be tested in accordance with the following standards

o EN 50428 Switches and related accessories for use in home and
building electronic systems (HBES)
1) EN 50491-3 •IEC 63044-3 Electrical safety requirements
2) EN 50491-4-1 • IEC 63044-4-1 General functional safety
requirements
3) EN 50491-5-1 • IEC 63044-5-1 EMC requirements, conditions and
test set-up
4) EN 50491-5-2 • IEC 63044-5-2 EMC requirements for HBES/BACS
used in residential, commercial and light industry environment
5) EN 60669-2-5 • IEC 60669-2-5 Switches and related accessories for
use in home and building electronic systems (HBES)
6) EN 60947-4-1 • IEC 60947-4-1 Low-voltage switchgear and control
gear - Part 4-1:
7) EN 50581 RoHS Directive
2.010 KNX Line Coupler
A. The device shall be Din rail mounted as per the EN60715 and shall be able to support
KNX Secure.
B. The device shall able to do filtering of KNX telegrams as well as individual address
telegrams in order to maintain unnecessary telegrams passing over the network,
making effective utilisation of the communication bandwidth.
C. It shall be possible to program the device either from the main line as well as from the
subline and shall be also be capable to program just as a line repeater .
D. The device shall also have a possibility to route all the telegram for testing purpose by
pressing the push button built into it.
E. The device shall provide a Main-LED on the front to inform about the status of the Main
line like Bus voltage ok, Telegrams on line, communication error.

F. The device shall provide a Mode-LED to inform about the status of the device which
can be Normal, Program, Manual mode to pass all group address telegrams, Manual
mode to pass all individual address telegrams, Failure.
G. The device shall provide a Sub-LED on the front to inform about the status of the Sub-
line like Bus voltage ok, Telegrams on line, communication error.
H. The device width shall be 18mm.
I. The device shall comply to the following standards

a. 2014/30/EU EMC Directive
b. EN 50491-5-2 Electromagnetic compatibility requirements
c. EN 61000-6-1 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
d. EN 61000-6-3
e. EN 63044-3 Electrical safety requirements
f. 2011/65/EU
g. EN 63000 RoHS Directive
2.011 ENERGY MONITORING
A. The energy measurement unit shall be able to provide energy consumption, power,
and current and provide the results via the ModBus or KNX, the measured energy can
easily be available in touch screen or the tablets for the end customer to check.
B. It shall also provide the active energy consumption (max 1.5%) per channel and total
consumption with the accuracy of 10%. The device should have minimum of 3
channels and each channel should rate to measure 16A. or if the current requirement
exceeds the limit the necessary CT meters shall be used to od the integration from the
same supplier. The module should comply with TH35 DIN rain as per DIN EN 60715.
C. Operating voltage should be 230V 50/HZ +/- 10% , accuracy class of the unit shall
comply to IEC 61557-12. The size shall not exceed 4 modules ( 90HX72WX65D mm)
as it can be located in the DB/HAP according to the project requirement.
D. Based on the project requirement the energy monitoring shall be done per Distribution
board wise or by the MCB wise for better control and accuracy
2.012 POWERSUPPLY
A. The KNX powersupply shall be rated to power the KNX devices .
B. The device shall be with diagnostic LEDs for the easy maintenace and troubleshooting
. the devise shall be equipped with LEDs for Overvoltage , overload, run and reset
LED indication.
C. The device shall have additional 30VDC auxilary power output shared from the same
power source, to be able to power 30V additional power to SELV devices .

D. A normally closed contact shall be an integral part of the power supply which shall
provide a voltfree contact to monitor the healthy status of the power supply. This
contact shall be closed in normal operation and open in faulty operation of the devices
(overload, overvoltage, KNX voltage failure). It shall be able to connect a maximum of
two SpaceLogic KNX Power Supplies in parallel in one bus line without any seperation
distance or line repeaters.
E. The outputs shall have a common overload and short-circuit protection and an
opencircuit proof. The bus line is connected via a KNX connection terminal.
Powersupplies which does not have overvoltage and overload protections are not
accepted.
F. With the combination of RUN LED, Overload LED, Overvoltage LED and Reset-LED
it shall be possible to the under stand the normal operation, Soft Reset, permanent
reset, Overvoltage , Overload, short circuit, KNX voltage failed and internal error to
make the system maintence easy and effective.
G. The device shall comply to 89/336/EEC - electromagnetic compatibility and shall be

complient to EU ROHS .
H. The device shall be tested in accordance with the following testing standards and the
conformity needs to be submitted as a part of the submittal .
a. EN 50491-5-1:2010
b. EN 50491-5-2:2010
c. EN 62041:2010
d. EN 50491-3:2009
e. EN 61558-2-16:2009
f. EN 61558-2-16:2009/A1:2013
g. EN 50491-4-1:2012
h. EN 50581:2012
2.013 HVAC Control Unit
A. Fan Coil Unit Control

1. There shall be a dedicated HVAC Control Unit for FCU as shown in the layouts
for controlling fan coil unit with up to three fan stages, optionally also with 0-10
V fan control (ECM), as well as for the control of proportional 0-10 V valves.
2. The controller shall support 2-pipe and 4-pipe systems.
3. The controller can measure and control the room temperature itself or receives
the value from the room temperature unit and behaves like an actuator.
4. One contact for remote inputs like window contacts or temperature sensor or
for condensate monitoring (e.g.).
5. Auxiliary relay for electric heating or cooling (where applicable).
6. Manual operation on the controller (fan speeds, switching between heating and
cooling)
7. Adjustment of setpoint for cooling or heating.
8. With emergency program

9. With integrated bus coupler.
10. For installation on DIN rails TH35 according to EN 60715. The bus is connected
using a bus connecting terminal.
B. VRV Unit Control

1. It shall be possible to integrate commercial AC and VRV units via KNX. It is the
responsibility of the <solutions provider / AC vendor> to include any gateway if
required for such integration
2. If gateways are used it shall be KNX certified and configured by ETS standard
configuration tool.
3. All the required DPT objects to be compatible with KNX thermostats/Room
Temperature Control Unit.
4. The integration shall be smooth allowing the KNX thermostats/Room
Temperature Control Unit to control the AC unit by the own temperature sensor
of the thermostat/unit.
5. Simultaneous control of the AC unit by the IR remote controller and by Home
Automation System (KNX) shall be possible.
6. Total control and monitoring of the AC unit from Home Automation System
(KNX), including AC unit’s internal variables, running hours counter (for filter
maintenance control) and error indication shall be possible.
2.014 Door Interface Unit
A. There shall be a dedicated Door Interface Unit for Smart Doors and Bells as shown in
the layouts.
B. The smart lock GPIO should have an input to connect a push button to open the door.
C. The smart lock GPIO should have specific output to differentiate between ‘Entry’, ‘Exit’,
‘Door Status’
D. The door contact will monitor the door status and if the door stays open for a long time.
The system shall be able to send an alarm as well.
E. The smart lock GPIO should have an input and output to connect ‘DND’ and ‘MUR’
F. The smart lock GPIO should have an input and output to connect Bell.
2.015 HOME AUTOMATION PANELS (HAP’s & DCPs)
There shall be a dedicated HOME AUTOMATION Panel (HAP) / Dimmer Control

Panel (DCP) as shown in the layouts. It shall house the system devices and the related
control equipment depending on the no. of circuits being controlled. This is to ensure
the power wiring between the DB’s and the control modules inside these panels are
kept to a minimum. The HAP / DCP shall be surface mounted with metal enclosures
together with built-in DIN-rails for easy installation of the control equipment.

2.016 Third Party System Integration
A. The Home Automation system shall support industry standard open communication
protocols such as KNX, BACnet, Modbus.
B. The Home Automation system shall support integration with Smart Home applications
and appliances such as Google Home, Amazon Alexa, Somfy curtain motors, Revox
sound systems, Sonos sound systems, Philips Hue lighting solution.
C. The system shall be capable to integrate with BMS/Central Monitoring Systems if

required via BACnet/IP open communication protocol.
2.017 User Devices
A. TOUCH INTERFACE
1. The device shall be a touch screen mounted on a standard British back box
with direct KNX connection and controls up to 36 functions depending on the
design selected by screen. Functions like switching or dimming lights,
controlling blinds or activating scenes. It is a room temperature control unit
which supports different types of control.
2. The device shall include a proximity sensor to switch on the display if you
approach into approx. 20 cms. As soon as no further movement is detected
towards the device, it switches off after a programmed time.
3. The device shall change the visible screen to the next one by swapping with
the finger (up to 8). Each screen has the design and function/functions
programmed.
4. The device shall include a gesture sensor which reacts to the movement of
the hand in one programmed direction (Vertical or horizontal) and will
activate/deactivate the programmed action. Without touching the device.
5. The device shall allow the selection of a different design for each screen. It
can be selected Rotary Design, Vertical Design or Button Design for each
screen.
6. The Button Design shall allow the control of functions by touching icons and
changing the colour from white to grey and shall be able to customize each
function with advance parameters.
7. The device shall be able to program the pop up messages which will show on
the screen in case of the condition becomes active. The device shall have the
capability to show up to 5 different customizable messages.
8. The device shall have the capability to go to locking mode (30-90) second
which can be used for cleaning purpose without activating any action in the
bus.
9. It shall be possible to create and insert Logo and activate it as a screen saver.
10. The device shall also have the possibility to have a 4 Digit lock in case it is
used in the public areas and only the authorised person wants to unlock the
function.

11. The Device shall only be connected to a 2 core KNX cable. Both the power
and data shall pass through the KNX cable.
B. PUSH BUTTON INTERFACE

1. The device shall be able to program in two different modes, one is the
proximity mode and another is the push button mode.
2. In the Pushbutton mode the device provides easy configuration of 1 Gang, 2
Gang 3 gang and 4 gang functions with completely flat design in a single
reference.
3. In the proximity (touchless) mode the programmed function shall be triggered
by approaching to the devices around 5cm .
4. The labelling of the buttons is accomplished using backlit symbols which
display the room functions. There shall be pre-fabricated foils for changing the
individual symbols coming along with the packing. The user shall have
complete freedom to change the symbols depends on the site requirements.
5. The pushbuttons of the device shall be able to program various functions,
allowing to switch lighting on and off or dimming control the blinds, retrieve
stored scenes or sending values etc by using the express settings for the fast
commissioning.
6. The device shall also support extended functions where various actions based
on short press and long press, sends up to 2 different functions pro rocker,
sends a different value after the next press (up to 8), Edges, sliders shall be
supported .
7. Each of the Buttons shall have built-in Status indication LEDs which can be
programmed to represent the real status feedback of the actuator to which it is
controlling. The brightness of the display shall be able to set through the
programming. It shall also be possible to set either white or green back light
LEDs . It shall also possible to program the Status LEDs in Day or night mode
where the LED status can be kept to minimal levels
8. The proximity function shall also be used to wake the device from sleep mode
, where after a programmed time the switch will go the idle mode and brighten
up in case of any motion near to 5 cm of the vicinity.
9. The device shall allow the configuration with one or all icons in reduced
brightness to be visible in darkness working in night mode.
10. The push button shall get power directly from the KNX Bus with the 2 cores,
both the power and data for the device shall be from the same 2 core
screwless terminals., The communication speed shall be minimum 9.6Kbps.
11. The frontside of the push button shall be completely flat and it shall not show
any groves or the boundaries for the push buttons.
12. The push button can be activated to send cyclical telegrams which can help to
monitor the status of the device from the central location
13. With the built-in temperature sensor the Push Button Pro T shall able to
measure the space temperature, and send this information cyclically or by the
change. It shall be able to program the sending change from 0.1K to 2K . the
cyclical interval shall be programmable from 1 min to 60 mins
14. It shall be able to apply correction variables to compensate potential
influences on the measured value. The temperature value shall be selectable
as Celsius or Fahrenheit
C. IP TOUCH PANEL
1. The LCD screen shall be 7/10 inches in size (diagonal) and shall be
connected through IP to the sever, It shall be possible to connect upto 10
Touch panel to the Single server over IP.
2. The system can be interfaced with the Smartphones and tablet PCs with the
corresponding apps.
3. The system can be browsed and discovered the control functionality by
Standard computers (PC/Mac) with suitable browsers.
4. The Touch Panel shall provide a wall mounted, colour interface to the
automation system. The Touch Screen shall include a touch sensitive LCD
screen that can display pages of graphical items, such as buttons, sliders and
images. These graphical items shall be programmed to perform control and
monitoring related functions.
2.018 Ethernet Gateway
A. The Ethernet Gateway should provide a connection between the system network and
an Ethernet LAN. This allows allow the user to
a. Control and configure the system on a LAN network PC or via the
internet rather than by connecting directly into the network.
b. The Ethernet Gateway should also be the host of remote applications
including iOS (iPhone®/ iPod touch®/ iPad®) and a web server front end
where applications are downloaded separately. Coupling the gateway to
a WIFI network should enable secure scene control, visual feedback and
modification from handheld devices.
c. The Ethernet Gateway should also facilitate connection to the internet
which enables remote connection for controlling, programming &
obtaining diagnostics of the lighting control system.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. The system shall be supplied and commissioned by a specialist Home Automation

system manufacturer/supplier. Both system hardware and system software shall be
supplied and manufactured/written by a single company to ensure total compatibility
of operation.
B. The electrical contractor(s) shall purchase the Home Automation hardware and
software from the specialist system supplier and shall install the system hardware and
all cabling and bus wires as part of the electrical installation.

C. The system shall be supplied to site pre-configured such that the electrical contractor
can validate the power and bus wiring during installation, prior to making the system
available for commissioning by the controls supplier.
D. For pre-commissioning purposes, the system shall enable testing of all controls
connected to all modules on the network.
E. The contractor shall give a clear written instruction for the supplier to begin preparation
of system configuration files based on a given set of drawings. The final software
configuration shall be based on the electrical contractor's final as-built drawing of the
Home Automation System installation.
F. Install and program software with initial settings of adjustable values. Make backup
copies of software and user-supplied values. Provide current licenses for software.
A. Wiring Method:
1. Comply with requirements “Conductors and Cables."
2. Install cables for control and signal transmission conductors, complying the
documents and as per manufacturer recommendation.
B. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points.
Separate power-limited and non-power-limited conductors according to conductor
manufacturer’s written instructions.
C. Size conductors according to control device manufacturer's written instructions unless

D. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Make connections only on numbered terminal strips
in junction, pull, and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures.
E. Install dimmer cabinets for each zone.
3.03 IDENTIFICATION
A. Comply with requirements in "Identification for Electrical Systems" for identifying

components and power and control wiring.
B. Label each dimmer module with a unique designation.
C. Label each scene control button with approved scene description.

inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations,
including connections. Report results in writing.
B. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service
representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment
installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.

1. Continuity tests of circuits.
2. Operational Test: Set and operate controls to demonstrate their functions and
capabilities in a methodical sequence that cues and reproduces actual
operating functions.
3. Include testing of control equipment under conditions that simulate actual
operational conditions. Record control settings, operations, cues, and
functional observations.
D. Remove and replace malfunctioning control components and retest as specified

above.
E. Test Labelling: After satisfactory completion of tests and inspections, apply a label to
tested components indicating test results, date, and responsible agency and
representative.
F. Reports: Written reports of tests and observations. Record defective materials and
workmanship and unsatisfactory test results. Record repairs and adjustments.
3.05 TRAINING
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train the Employer’s

maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain controls and software training
for PC-based control systems.as specified below:
maintenance. Training period shall be minimum 3 days and longer if required
to get the employer’s maintenance team familiar with the products operation
and maintenance.
2. Obtain employers staff signatures for attendance and submit as a record that
the training has been completed and to the satisfaction of the employer.
advance notice.
A. The Home Automation system supplier shall be engaged by the contractor to set-up
and commission the system, and to carry out training of the Client’s personnel.
B. The complete installation shall be tested and commissioned by the supplier and the
testing and commissioning reports for the Engineers review outlining all deficiencies
and course of action. The contractor shall ensure all deficiencies outlined are rectified,
3.07 MAINTENANCE
A. Maintenance Period: 3 years from date of Substantial Completion of the project.
B. The contractor during that period shall provide labor and parts warranty on the
installed system. During that period, the contractor shall be responsible for the regular
inspection and maintenance as recommended by the manufacturer.
A. The Contractor shall prepare fully detailed Operation and Maintenance Manuals for
the system and submit to the Engineer for his approval.
3.09 SYSTEM STARTUP AND COMMISSIONING
A. Each point in the system shall be tested for both hardware and software functionality.
In addition, each circuit under the control of the LCS will be tested against the
appropriate sequence of operation specified herein. Successful completion of the
system test shall constitute the beginning of the warranty period. A written report will
be submitted to the owner indicating that the installed system functions in accordance
with the plans and specifications.
B. The LCS contractor shall commission and set in operating condition all major
equipment and systems, such as HAP Panel Operation and the Motion sensor
functionality in the presence of the consultant and if applicable with the client
representative.
C. Startup Testing shall be performed for each HAP Panel along with the termination
checklist, which shall be initialed by the technician and dated upon test was completion
along with any recorded data such as voltages, termination faults and any deviations
from the submitted installation plan shall also be recorded.
D. Required elements of the startup testing include:

1. Measurement of voltage sources, Input and output
2. Verification of proper LCS Module power wiring.
3. Verification of devices in comparison to the submittals.
4. Verification of labeling on components and wiring.
5. Verification of connection integrity and quality (loose strands and tight
connections).
6. Verification of bus topology, IP Connections for the router and termination
devices.
7. Each Actuator input and output terminations as per the submittals and
sequence of control.
8. KNX Bus termination of the field devices such as Push buttons and the touch
screen
9. The KNX bus voltage at the end of the line segments
10. Device LED operation for the programming purpose

E. A performance verification test shall also be completed for the operator interaction with
the system for the following.
1. Graphics navigation.
2. Trend data collection and presentation for the selected objects.
3. Alarm handling, acknowledgement.
4. Time schedule editing.
5. Manual control.
6. Report viewing.
5.2 WARRANTY AND MAINTENANCE

A. All components, system software, and parts furnished and installed by the LCS
contractor shall be guaranteed against defects in materials and workmanship for 1
year of substantial completion. Labor to repair, or replace these components shall be
furnished by the LCS contractor at no charge during normal working hours during the
warranty period. Materials furnished but not installed by the LCS contractor shall be
covered to the extent of the product only. Installation labor shall be the responsibility
of the trade contractor performing the installation. The Contractor shall respond to the
owner's request for warranty service within 24/48 standard working hours.
5.3 TRAINING AND HANDING OVER

A. The home automation Contractor shall provide both on-site and classroom training to
the Owner’s representative and maintenance personnel per the following description:
B. On-site training shall consist of a minimum of (5) hours of hands-on instruction geared
at the operation and maintenance of the systems. The curriculum shall include
1. System Overview
2. System Software and Operation
3. System access
4. Software features overview
5. Scheduling
6. Sequence of operation
7. As Built Schematic
Upon completion of the training the LCS contractor must handover all the programming
documentation and the Backup file to the Client /Service representative for the future
maintenance or upgrade of the system.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 27 5123
INTERCOM ENTRY SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
1.02 SUMMARY
A. The Specialist Security Integrator shall design, supply, install and commission an
audio/video intercom system as described in this Specification.
B. Section Includes
1. This section details the technical requirement for Intercom Entry system.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Where required, terms are defined herein.

1. PoE – Power over Ethernet
2. VOX - Voice Operated Exchange
1.04 INTERCOM ENTRY SYSTEMS
A. External Audio Video intercom units shall be flush mounted weatherproof, vandal proof
and designed to give a clear audible tone. .
B. The Slave intercom unit shall be desk mounted with a handset for communication and
shall be provided with push buttons to release the electrical lock on the doors, to allow
entry.
C. Audio Video handsets shall be designed to communicate with other Slave stations.
D. The Electrical Services Installer shall provide a complete system of system wiring
containment comprising metal trunking and conduit for the door entry systems. The
wiring, cable trays, equipment etc shall be installed and earthed in accordance with BS
7671. All circuits shall be segregated as required by BS 7671. Outlet boxes for wall
mounted system equipment shall be standard recessed one-gang boxes.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:

1. Preparation instructions and recommendations.
2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
3. Installation methods.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit the following:
KEO/21-7387-0004 27 5123 / 1 Intercom Entry System

1. Wiring Diagrams: Indicate wiring for each item of equipment and interconnections
between items of equipment.
2. Include manufacturer's names, model numbers, ratings, power requirements,
equipment layout, device arrangement, complete wiring point-to-point diagrams,
and conduit layouts.
C. Installation and Operation Manuals:

1. Submit manufacturer's installation and operation manual, including operation
instructions and component wiring diagrams.
2. Provide detailed information required for Owner to properly operate equipment.
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: ISO 9001:2015 certified company.
B. Installer Qualifications: Factory trained and experienced with system installations of

scope and size required for the Project.
A. All reference to standards, regulations and requirements of statutory bodies shall mean
the latest published editions at the time of contact.
B. Applicable standards referred to in this Section not limited to:

1. ANSI/TIA-568-C.2: Balanced Twisted-Pair Telecommunication Cabling and
Components Standard, 2009
2. ANSI/TIA-569-D: Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications
Pathways and Spaces, 2015
3. International Organization for Standards (ISO) 9001 - Quality Management
Systems - Requirements.
A. Delivery: Deliver materials to site in manufacturer's original, unopened containers and

packaging, with labels clearly identifying product name and manufacturer.
B. Storage: Store materials in clean, dry area indoors in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
C. Handling: Protect materials during handling and installation to prevent damage.
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install equipment frames and cable trays
until spaces are enclosed and weather tight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry,
and work above ceilings is complete.

A. Refer to section “Environmental Conditions” in Division 27 0500 - Common work results
for communications.
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are
packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing
contents.
B. Spare Parts list shall be provided as per the manufacturer’s recommendation.
C. Spare parts shall be delivered to the Owner’s central storage facility within the Site limit.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

Vendors List (AVL) – Communications.
2.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Audio Video Intercom system should have 2 major components
1) Master Intercom Panel with camera
2) Slave Intercom Handset with display screen
B. Master Intercom Panel
1) Intercom Panel shall be installed as indicated in the layout drawings.
2) There shall be an LED indication to show the status of the call/communication.
3) There should be an integrated card reader to verify and allow the authorized
entries.

C. Slave Intercom Handset:
1) Intercom handset shall be installed as indicated in the drawings
D. There shall be a button available on the intercom handset by which the call receiver
should be able to release/open the entry for the caller
2.03 System description
A. The Specialist / integrator shall design, supply, install and commission an audio /video
entry phone system linking between the main entrance doors and intercom units as
shown in layout drawings.
B. A color digital video entry system shall provide audio and visual communication.
C. Entry panel shall provide a camera and control keypad and display. In addition, LED
lights for ‘Door Open’ and ‘Speak Now’ indication will be provided at both heights to
assist both aurally and visually impaired users.
D. The entry panels shall be flush fitting vandal resistant with a brushed stainless steel
front plate or similar and shall include integral proximity readers linked to the access
control system.
E. The internal intercom units shall be equipped with a flush wall mounted video
monitor/handset with 3.5” visible LCD TFT colour screen. Adjustable Contrast and
brightness controls shall be easily accessible by the user. The monitor/handset must
also feature a privacy control with LED,user adjustable ring tone volume and additional
‘door open’ LED indicator. A tilt screen will be allowed to facilitate lower level mounting
for wheelchair users.
F. LED lights for ‘Door Open’ and ‘Speak Now’ indication to be provided.
G. Each panel shall have the capability to call up to 200 monitors/receivers and be fitted as
standard with two CCD colour cameras with adjustable angle of view at both high and
low levels, complete with fixed focal length lens and automatic electronic shutter. The
cameras shall provide an integral lighting facility to assist image definition under low
light level conditions.
H. The entry panel shall be flush fitting, vandal resistant with a brushed stainless steel front
plate.
I. The door entry system video cameras shall be interfaced with the CCTV system such
that any images from the door entry system can be captured and stored on the CCTV
system storage and displayed on the video monitors.
J. The digital panels shall also be equipped with a Dewhurst style keypad for vandal
resistance with both standard numeric on the buttons. An easy to read, programmable
backlit LCD display showing operations mode and digits entered will also be
incorporated.
K. External intercom units shall be flush mounted weatherproof, vandal proof and designed
to give a clear audible tone. The units shall have a push button to call the reception

desk, this shall be interlinked to the CCTV surveillance where provided to give
immediate viewing of the callers location.
L. The internal intercom units shall be provided with a push buttons to release the electrical
lock on the doors, to allow entry. The Specialist Supplier shall include for the electric
locks and local break glass for emergency escape.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas to receive Intercom Entry System.
B. Notify Architect of conditions that would adversely affect installation or subsequent use.
C. Do not begin installation until unacceptable conditions are corrected.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Verify the following compliance before starting installation.
B. The unit turns inoperative during power failure.

1. Keep the intercom wires at least 30 cm away from strong electrical wiring (AC
100-240 V) including, in particular, wiring for inverter electrical appliances. Noise
and malfunction could result.
2. If a strong light shines on the main unit screen, the picture may turn white or only
silhouettes will be visible.
3. Other manufacturer's devices (such as sensor, detectors, door releases) used
with this system, comply with the manufacturer's installation requirements.
4. The LCD panel is manufactured with very high precision techniques, inevitably
will have a very small portion of its picture elements always lit or not lit at all. This
is not considered a unit malfunction. Please be aware of this in advance.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install Intercom Entry System in accordance with manufacturer's instructions at

locations indicated on the Drawings.
B. Mount equipment plumb, level, square, and secure.
3.04 SET-UP AND ADJUSTING
A. Adjust Intercom Entry System for proper operation in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
3.05 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
A. Demonstration:
1. Demonstrate that Intercom Entry System functions properly.
2. Perform demonstration at final system inspection by qualified representative of
manufacturer.
B. Instruction and Training:

1. Provide instruction and training of Owner's personnel as required for operation of
Intercom Entry System.
2. Provide hands-on demonstration of operation of system components and
complete system, including user-level program changes and functions.
3. Provide instruction and training by qualified representative of manufacturer.
3.06 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed Intercom Entry System from damage during construction.
3.07 TRAINING

related to troubleshooting, servicing, and preventive maintenance.
advance notice.
3.08 MAINTENANCE
A. Maintenance Period: As per the Contract Documents.
B. The contractor during that period shall provide labor and parts warranty on the installed
system. During that period, the contractor shall be responsible for the regular inspection
and maintenance as recommended by the manufacturer.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 27 5910
WARRANTY AND EXTRA MATERIAL LIST – COMMUNICATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Complete maintenance as per manufacturer recommendations on Div 27 products.
DIVISION 27
delivery to site.
standard warranty.
-
10 years or
Standard
COMMUNICATIONS All spare parts required during
Manufacturers’
27 1116 RACKS, FRAMES, AND warranty period as per manufacturer
warranties
ENCLOSURES recommendation
whichever is
greater
10 years or
Standard
COMMUNICATIONS All spare parts required during
Manufacturers’
27 1513 COPPER HORIZONTAL warranty period as per manufacturer
warranties
CABLING recommendation
whichever is
greater
2 years or
Communications Standard
Manufacturers’
27 1116 Racks, Frames, and warranty period as per manufacturer
warranties
Enclosures recommendation
whichever is
greater
KEO/21-7387-0004 27 5910 / 1 Warranty And Extra Material List

2 years or
Communications Standard
Manufacturers’
27 1513 Copper Horizontal warranty period as per manufacturer
warranties
Cabling recommendation
whichever is
greater
2 years or
Standard
Home Automation Manufacturers’
27 5100 warranty period as per manufacturer
System warranties
recommendation
whichever is
greater
2 years or
Standard
Manufacturers’
27 5123 Intercom Entry System warranty period as per manufacturer
warranties
recommendation
whichever is
greater
END OF SECTION
KEO/21-7387-0004 27 5910 / 2 Warranty And Extra Material List

SECTION 27 9000
APPROVED MANUFACTURER/VENDOR LIST - COMMUNICATIONS
1.01 GENERAL

DIVISION 27 COMMUNICATIONS
SECTION TITLE MANUFACTURER COUNTRY
27 1116 Communications COMMESCOPE USA
Racks, Frames, EXCEL UK
and Enclosures NETWORKING
DATWYLER CABLES GERMANY
BRAND-REX UK
PANDUIT USA
A&T USA
LEGRAND/ USA
ORTRONICS
HUBBELL USA
R&M SWITZERLAND
SIEMON USA
BELDEN/ CDT USA
27 1513 Communications COMMESCOPE USA
Copper Horizontal EXCEL UK
Cabling NETWORKING
DATWYLER CABLES GERMANY
BRAND-REX UK
PANDUIT USA
A&T USA
LEGRAND/ USA
ORTRONICS
HUBBELL USA
R&M SWITZERLAND
SIEMON USA
BELDEN/ CDT USA
27 5100 Home Automation SCHNEIDER
System ABB
LEVITON
LUTRON
CRESTON
27 5123 Intercom Entry AIPHONE JAPAN
System COMELIT ITALY
FERMAX SPAIN
BPT UK
KEO/21-7387-0004 27 9000 / 1 Approved Manufacturer Vendor List Communications

SECTION 28 2300
SECURITY VIDEO SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM (CCTV)
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Section includes a full HD IP video camera a sixteen-channel network video recorder

with a built-in PoE switch.
B. Product - A 2 MP IP video camera, with multi-streaming H.265, H.264 and MJPEG

capability in a IP66/IK10 rated bullet type body with integral IR illuminator.
C. Product - A sixteen channel network video recorder which is ONVIF compliant, with
support for H.265, H.264, and MJPEG compression and recording bandwidth of 128
Mbps.
D. Related Requirements
1. 27 1513 - Communications Copper Horizontal Cabling
2. 28 5910 - Warranty and Extra Material List
1.02 REFERENCES
A. Abbreviations
1. Abbreviations
2. AGC - Automatic Gain Control
3. ARP - Address Resolution Protocol
4. AWB - Automatic White Balance
5. BLC - Back light compression
6. CBR - Constant Bit Rate
7. CVBS - Color, Video, Blanking, Sync
8. DHCP - Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
9. DNR - Digital Noise Reduction
10. DNS - Domain Name Server
11. DDNS - Dynamic Domain Name Server
12. DSCP - Differentiated Services Code Point
13. fps - frames per second
14. FTP - File Transfer Protocol
15. GOV - Group of Video
16. GUI - Graphical User Interface
17. HD - High Definition
18. HTTP - Hypertext Transfer Protocol
19. ICMP - Internet Control Message Protocol
20. IGMP - Internet Group Management Protocol
21. IP - Internet Protocol
22. JPEG - Joint Photographic Experts Group
KEO/21-7387-0004 28 2300 / 1 Security Video Surveillance System (CCTV
23. MJPEG - Motion JPEG
24. MP - Megapixel
25. MPEG - Moving Pictures Experts Group
26. NAS - Network Attached Storage
27. NTP - Network Time Protocol
28. PIM-SM - Protocol Independent Multicast-Sparse Mode
29. PoE - Power over Ethernet
30. PPPoE - Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet
31. RTP - Real-Time Transport Protocol
32. RTCP - Real-Time Control Protocol
33. RTSP - Real-Time Streaming Protocol
34. SDK - Software Development Kit
35. SMTP - Simple Mail Transfer Protocol
36. SNMP - Simple Network Management Protocol
37. SSL - Secure Sockets Layer
38. TCP - Transmission Control Protocol
39. UDP - User Datagram Protocol
40. UPnP - Universal Plug and Play
41. VBR - Variable Bit Rate
42. VMS - Video Management System
43. WDR - Wide Dynamic Range
44. LDC - Lens Distortion Correction
B. Reference Standards
1. Network - IEEE
a. 802.3 Ethernet Standards
b. 802.1x Port-based Network Access Control
2. Video
a. ISO / IEC 14496-10, MPEG-4 Part 10 ( ITU H.264)
b. ISO / IEC 10918 - JPEG
c. ONVIF - Profiles S G and T
3. Emissions
a. FCC-47 CFR Part 15 Subpart B Class B
b. CE EN 55022:2010
4. Immunity - CE
a. EN 50130-4:2011
b. EN 61000-3-3:2014
c. EN 61000-4-2:2009
d. EN 61000-4-3:2006+A2:2010
e. EN 61000-4-4:2012
f. EN 61000-4-5:2014
g. EN 61000-4-6:2009
5. Safety
a. UL listed
b. CE EN 50581:2012 (hazardous substances)
6. Ingress Protection and Vandal Resistance
a. ANSI / IEC60529 - Degrees of Protection Provided by Enclosures - IP66
b. IEC EN 62262 - Degrees of protection provided by enclosures for
electrical equipment against external mechanical impacts - IK10
c. IEC 60068-2-75

C. Definitions
1. GOV (Group of Video object planes) - A set of video frames for H.264 and H.265
compression, indicating a collection of frames from the initial I-Frame (key frame)
to the next I-Frame. GOV consists of 2 kinds of frames: I-Frame and P-Frame.
2. Dynamic GOV - Dynamic assignment of GOV length based on the complexity of
the scene to efficiently manage bitrate of the video stream and reduce the
storage required.
3. Multi-exposure wide dynamic range - Operation which automatically adjusts
shutter speed to provide a wide range between dark and light areas visible at the
same time, preventing backlighting issues. Long exposure is used for bright
areas and a short exposure is used in dark areas.
4. DORI (Detect, Observe, Recognize, Identify) - A standard system (EN-62676-4)
for defining the ability of a camera to distinguish persons or objects within a
covered area.
a. Detect: 25PPM / 8PPF
b. Observe: 63PPM / 19PPF
c. Recognize: 125PPM / 38PPF
d. Identify: 250PPM / 76PPF
5. JBOD - a collection of hard disks that have not been configured to act as a
redundant array of independent disks (RAID) array.
6. Dynamic fps - Dynamic assignment of frames per second based on the
complexity of the scene to efficiently manage bitrate of the video stream and
reduce the storage required.
7. ARB (Auto Recovery Backup) - Automatic backup mechanism that enables
cameras to store videos on to SD card during failures and stream it to the
storage device after recovery.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data
1. Manufacturer's printed or electronic data sheets
2. Manufacturer's installation and operation manuals
3. Warranty documentation
1.04 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer shall have a minimum of five years' experience in producing IP video

equipment.
B. Installers shall be trained and authorized by the Manufacturer to install, integrate, test,
and commission the system.
A. Deliver the products in the manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged container

with identification labels intact.
B. Store the products in a temperature environment specified in 2.04/2.07 Detailed

Specification, protected from mechanical and environmental conditions as designated
by the manufacturer.

1.06 WARRANTY, LICENSING AND SUPPORT
A. Manufacturer shall provide a limited 3 year warranty for the product to be free of
defects in material and workmanship.
B. Manufacturer shall provide embedded camera video analytics free of license charges.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS

be provided shall be from the manufacturer listed in the section 28 9000 - Approved
Manufacturer vendor List
2.02 GENERAL DESCRIPTION - NETWORK VIDEO RECORDER (“NVR”)
A. The sixteen channel Network Video Recorder (“NVR”) shall record video and audio
from up to sixteen network video cameras to a hard disk and enable playback of video
and audio.
B. The manufacturer shall be responsible for rigorous testing of NVR’s reliability. The
manufacturer shall provide a list of compatible hard disks that have been tested to
guarantee reliable recording. The list shall be available in the manufacturer’s home
page.
C. The NVR shall provide auto recovery backup (ARB) to transfer video that is recorded
on network camera’s SD cards during failures to the hard disk drive. The NVR shall
allow users to set transfer speed or bandwidth dedicated for ARB in three levels; low,
middle, high. If the bit-rate of video to be transferred exceeds the set bandwidth, then
the NVR shall transfer video in the order of channel number until all transfer is finished
or the video becomes more than 24 hours old based on NVR’s current time. The NVR
with ARB shall be able to handle the following failures.
1. Network disconnection between cameras and NVR
2. Unexpected shutdown of NVR
D. The sixteen channel NVR shall receive text data from external devices and overlay it
on live as well as recorded video. It shall also provide search for text data and list all
video with previews that is relevant to the search queries. The text shall include but
not limited to the following.
1. Text from PoS devices, namely the texts printed on the receipt of transactions
2. Text from automatic number plate recognition software
3. Text from automated teller machines (ATM)
E. The NVR shall provide a remote monitoring environment for video and audio over the
network using a remote computer. The remote monitoring software shall allow users
to receive live streams, search for recoded videos, and configure devices.
F. P2P Service: The NVR shall provide easy configuration of mobile viewer. The mobile
viewer shall be freely available and connection shall be established by simply
scanning QR code from a mobile device.

G. The NVR shall have the following further general properties:
1. Camera search and discovery: The NVR shall have the capability to search the
network for connected compatible cameras.
a. If sixteen or fewer cameras are searched or discovered, each camera will
be automatically registered and current camera information (fps, days of
recording) will be displayed.
b. If more than sixteen cameras are searched or discovered, the NVR shall
provide the ability to selectively register up to sixteen cameras.
2. The NVR shall support Dynamic GOV, a smart codec used by IP cameras. The
smart codec shall produce visually equal video quality while reducing storage
required.
3. The NVR shall support dual monitor out from 2 HDMI ports. The NVR shall
provide clone monitor.
4. Recording and playback functions:
a. Support recording from CIF up to 8 MP per channel
b. 128 Mbps network camera recording throughput
c. Simultaneous playback capability up to sixteen video channels in local
and sixteen video channels in network
d. H.265, H.264, and MJPEG compression support
e. View status of connected storage hardware
f. Set recording schedules
g. Set up triggered recording based on:
1) sensor (input) detection
2) camera event (sensor, motion detection, video analytics, defocus)
3) video loss detection
h. Available recording settings by channel for standard and event-based
recording types:
1) compression type
2) resolution
3) images per second
4) quality
5) data transfer limit
6) pre-event and post-event record duration
7) I-frame and full frame recording
i. Available actions upon reaching full HDD storage capacity (with automatic
notifications to users):
1) stop recording
2) overwrite
j. Search recorded data by time, event, text, ARB events, or smart search.
Smart search shall include search options for:
1) Virtual line (in/out/both)
2) Enter/exit
5. Storage
a. 10TB HDDs in JBOD configuration.
b. USB connection for memory/storage device for video clip backup and
settings export
6. Live view:
a. Live, remote monitoring using Windows Network Viewer or Manufacturer
supplied viewer
b. Configure and exercise functions for connected PTZ cameras, including
functionality with compatible USB joystick
c. Capture and save snapshot images

d. Record current video in BU, EXE format from GUI mode and AVI format
from Webviewer
7. Remote access:
a. Multicast or unicast
1) Simultaneous unicast access by up to 10 users
2) Simultaneous multicast access by up to 20 users
b. Mobile device:
1) Supported platforms: Android, IOS
2) Supported remote users:
c. Live unicast: 10
d. Live multicast: 20
e. Playback: 3
f. Dynamic DNS (DDNS) support
8. VGA and High Definition (HDMI) local monitor outputs for live viewing, playback,
& backup functions
9. ONVIF Profile S compliance
10. Alarm connections: 4 inputs; 2 outputs
2.03 NVR SOFTWARE
A. The NVR shall have a built in server which provides access for authorized users to
live view of connected cameras, NVR recording and playback functions, and NVR
configuration settings.
B. The NVR software shall provide a monitoring screen which displays live camera video
and simultaneously provides same-screen access to the following functions:
1. Screen mode, allowing set up and display of live video channels in various
layouts or sequence configurations.
2. Hallway view mode for hallway view cameras.
3. Status displays:
a. camera live status
1) model
2) connection status
3) IP address
4) compression
5) resolution
6) frame rate
7) quality
b. camera record status
1) bit rate
a) record bit rate
b) input bit rate
c) bit rate limits
2) configured video profile
3) input/record frames per second
4. Start/stop recording
5. Search recorded video
6. Play recorded video
7. Freeze live video
8. Audio on, off, and mute
9. Event monitoring
10. Digital zoom
11. Camera PTZ controls
12. Manual recording
13. Image (snapshot) capture
C. The NVR software shall provide setup screens which provide access to the following
configuration settings and functions:
1. System
a. date and time
b. user passwords and permissions
c. system information
d. software upgrade
e. system logs
f. event logs
g. backup logs
2. Cameras
a. image preview of video
b. profile information
c. compression information
d. protocol information
e. model information
f. IP address
g. connection status
h. total amount of data received by channel
i. auto or manual search and register
j. select and setup ONVIF protocol operation
k. add, delete, and edit camera profile
l. adjust settings:
1) camera name
2) resolution
3) frame rate
4) quality
5) bit rate
6) brightness
7) backlight
8) exposure
9) day/night
10) defog
11) focus
12) mirror and flip
13) motion detection
m. apply settings to groups of cameras
n. live streaming settings
3. Recording
a. setup recording schedule by day and time per channel
b. record settings per channel
1) all frames, key frames, or no record
2) data limit per channel
3) pre and post event recording times
4) include audio
c. set recording profile per channel:
1) compression
2) resolution
3) frame rate
4) quality
d. HDD full capacity options – stop, overwrite
e. Event configuration
1) sensor operation
2) Camera events, including motion detection and video analytics
3) video loss detection
4) alarm output parameters
4. Storage media and devices
a. display working status, including current rate of recording, recording loss
rate, and cumulative losses
b. storage use and capacity information
c. HDD temperature information
d. HDD alarm notifications
5. Monitor
a. HDMI video output
1) HDMI1: 3840x2160(30Hz), HDMI2: 1920x1080(60Hz)
b. configure display parameters
6. Text device
a. channel allocation
b. encoding type and delimiting characters
c. network port
d. event configuration
1) keyword entry
2) dollar value trigger
7. Network
a. address settings per physical port
b. bandwidth limits
c. software ports and protocol
d. multicast parameters
e. DDNS
f. UPnP
g. security:
1) IP filtering
2) SSL encryption and certificates
3) 802.1x parameters
h. NTP server
i. SMTP e-mail settings
j. SNMP settings
k. live stream selection
l. DHCP server settings
8. Notifications
a. event types
b. intervals
c. recipients
D. The NVR software shall provide Search and Playback functions as follows:
1. Search by:
a. time
b. event
c. text
d. backup device
2. Playback
a. play forward and reverse at normal or accelerated speeds, frame by
frame, and next record
b. go to first and go to last functions
c. color-coded timeline with play head scrub bar
d. set audio on or off
e. initiate backup
E. The NVR shall have a built in web server which supports browser-based configuration
from a PC.
1. Acceptable browsers: Internet Explorer, Google Chrome and Apple Safari
2. The web viewer shall provide a monitoring screen which displays video from
registered cameras and simultaneously provides same-screen access to the
following functions:
a. display layout configuration
b. additional display functions as available with direct connection to the NVR
server
3. The web viewer shall provide the same functionality as available when directly
connecting to the NVR server with respect to the following:
a. system settings
b. backup and restoration of configuration settings to a file
c. camera configuration settings and functions
d. recording
e. storage media and devices
f. monitor
g. text device
h. network
i. events and notifications
j. search and playback
4. Minimum client requirements
a. Acceptable Operating Systems: Windows XP, Vista, 7, 8, 10, Mac OS X
(10.9, 10.10, 10.11)
b. Acceptable browsers: Microsoft Internet Explorer, Microsoft Edge, Google
Chrome, Apple Safari
2.04 DETAILED SPECIFICATIONS - NVR
A. Video
1. Compression: H.265, H.264, MJPEG
B. Recording
1. Channel capability: 16
2. Recording bandwidth: Up to 32 Mbps
3. Resolution range: CIF up to 8 MP
C. Events and Response Actions

1. Triggers:
a. alarm (NO or NC contact) input
b. video loss
c. event defined by camera
d. VA event
2. Response Actions:
a. record
b. e-mail
c. activate PTZ preset
d. alarm (NO or NC contact) output
e. beep output
f. monitor out
D. Playback
1. Number of simultaneous channels
a. Local : 16
b. Network : 8
2. Bandwidth: 32 Mbps
E. Storage
1. Internal
a. Number of HDD’s 2
b. Capacity per HDD: Max. 10 TB/1ea
2. External
a. Acceptable types:
1) USB HDD/Flash drive for backup of video clips, firmware update,
settings backup/restore, log export
F. Network
1. Connectivity: PoE RJ-45 16EA (LAN, 10/100), RJ-45 1ea (LAN/WAN
1Gbps)
2. Protocols supported:
a. Transmission Control Protocol (TCP), Internet Protocol (IP) v4 and v6,
User Datagram Protocol (UDP)
b. Configuration: Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP)
c. Web services: Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP), Secure HTTP
(HTTPS)
d. Network services: Address Resolution Protocol (ARP), Domain Name
System (DNS), Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP), Network Time
Protocol (NTP), Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP v1/2c/3 –
MIB-2), Universal Plug and Play (UPnP)
e. Media: Real-Time Transport Protocol (RTP), Real-Time Control Protocol,
Real-Time Streaming Protocol (RTSP)
f. Multicast: Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP)
g. Notifications: Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP)
h. Remote Access: Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet (PPPoE)
3. DDNS – The NVR shall support DDNS services offered by the Manufacturer and
other publicly available service offerings.
4. Security features:
a. user password protection with group restrictions
b. IP address filtering - list of allowed or blocked IP addresses
c. HTTPS(SSL) login authentication
d. User access log
e. 802.1x authentication
f. Restriction of all network access/web viewer access
5. Discovery - Manufacturer shall offer a discovery program to identify all devices of
his manufacture on the network, as well as ONVIF Profile S conformant devices.
6. Transmission Bandwidth: 128Mbps
G. Alarm/sensor interface:
1. Input (4)
2. Output (2)
H. Audio
1. Channel capability: 16 channels
2. Compression: AAC (16/48KHz), G.711, G.726
I. Electrical
1. Input Power 100-240 V AC ± 10%
2. PoE budget 130 W maximum
3. Power Consumption: 200 W maximum (2 HDD, PoE On)
J. Mechanical And Environmental

1. Dimensions (W x H x D): 370.0 mm x 50.7 mm x 320 mm (14.6 in. x 2.0 in. x
12.6 in.)
2. Weight 2.87Kg (6.33 lb.) (without HDD)
3. Temperature:
a. Operating 0° C to 40° C (32° F to 104° F)
4. Humidity: 20 - 85%, non-condensing
2.05 GENERAL DESCRIPTION - CAMERA
A. Video Compression and Transmission – The camera shall have the following
properties relating to the video signals it produces.
1. H.265, H.264 and MJPEG compression, each derived from a dedicated encoder
and capable of being streamed independently and simultaneously
a. H.265 and H.264 – frame rates to 30 fps
b. MJPEG – frame rates to 15 fps
2. The camera shall be able to configure up to 10 independent video stream profiles
with differing encoding, quality, frame rate, resolution, and bit rate settings.
3. Resolution selections
a. 1920 x 1080, 1280 x 960, 1280 x 720, 800 x 600,800 x 448, 720 x 576,
720 x 480, 640 x 480, 640 x 360
4. Simultaneous unicast access by up to 6 users
5. Multicast or unicast capable
6. Dynamic DNS (DDNS) support.
7. Dynamic GOV to efficiently manage bitrate of the video stream.
B. Camera – The camera device shall have the following physical and performance
properties:
1. Dustproof, waterproof, and IP66 rated.
2. IK10 rated for protection against impacts.
3. True day/night operation with removable IR cut filter
C. Low light level operation to 0.03 lux (color) and 0 lux (black and white)
1. 2D and 3D digital noise reduction
2. Integral IR illumination, providing effective visibility of 30m at 0 Lux when
activated in Black & White mode.
3. 6 privacy masking regions utilizing a 4 point polygon
D. Intelligence and Analytics – The camera shall have a suite of integral intelligent
operations and analytic functions to include:

1. Motion detection with four definable detection areas, minimum / maximum object
size definition and a learning algorithm that ignores false alarms such as trees
and waves on water.
2. Detection of logical events of specified conditions from the camera’s video input
a. camera tamper (scene change)
b. defocus detection
c. motion detection with metadata
E. Interoperability – The camera shall be ONVIF Profile S G and T compliant.
F. The camera shall possess the following further characteristics:

1. Built-in web server, accessed via standard browsers including Internet Explorer,
Firefox, Chrome & Safari
2. Micro SD/SDHC/SDXC memory card and NAS recording options, with
configurable pre-alarm and post-alarm recording intervals
3. Uni-directional audio
4. Alarms and notifications
a. alarm notification triggers:
1) motion detection
2) tampering detection
3) SD card error
4) NAS error
5) alarm input
6) defocus detection
b. available notification means upon trigger:
1) file upload via FTP and e-mail
2) notification via e-mail
3) record to local storage (SD card)
4) external output
5. Pixel Counter available in the plug-in viewer.
6. POE capable
2.06 CAMERA SOFTWARE
A. The camera shall have a built-in web server which supports browser-based
configuration using Internet Explorer, Google Chrome, Mozilla Firefox, and Apple
Safari, for which web viewer plug-ins are available, from a PC or Mac.
B. The web viewer shall provide a monitoring screen which displays live camera video
and simultaneously provides same-screen access to the following functions:
1. Live view window size
2. Resolution setting
3. Image (snapshot) capture
4. Manual recording to SD or NAS
5. Audio/microphone control
6. Access Playback and Setup menus
C. The web viewer shall provide a playback screen which provides access to the
following functions:
1. Search date and time range
2. Search event type
3. Play an event video
4. Set resolution
5. Play audio if present
6. Generate a backup copy of saved video data
D. The web viewer shall provide a setup screen which provides access to the following
configuration settings and functions in the camera:
1. Digital video profile to include compression type, maximum or target bit rate,
frame rate, multicast parameters, crop encoding area
2. User profile to include password, access level, authentication
3. Date and time
4. Network settings and IP version
a. DDNS
b. SSL, including certificate management
c. 802.1x authentication
d. Quality of Service settings
e. SNMP to include version selection and settings
f. Auto configuration
5. Video setup to include flip and mirror mode, hallway view mode, video type,
privacy zone
6. Audio setup to include source, audio codec type, gain, and bit rate
7. Camera settings to include image preset, sensor frame capture, dynamic range,
white balance, back light, exposure, day/night operation, on-screen display, IR
illumination, sharpness, contrast, color level, lens distortion correction.
8. Event detection setup to include notification parameters, recording rules, time
schedule, tamper protection, motion detection, event triggers
9. System function to include reboot, upgrade, check system and event logs,
application (SDK) management
10. View profile information
E. Minimum client requirements

1. Acceptable Operating Systems: Windows 7 / 8.1 / 10, MAC OS X 10.9~10.11
2. Acceptable browsers: Microsoft Internet Explorer and Edge, Mozilla Firefox,
Google Chrome, Apple Safari
2.07 DETAILED SPECIFICATIONS - CAMERA
A. Video
1. Imager
a. Sensor: 1/2.8" 2 MP CMOS
1) pixels per sensor: 1920 (H) x 1080(V) total; 1920 (H) x 1080 (V)
effective
2) scanning : progressive
b. Minimum illumination
1) Color mode: 0.03Lux (F1.6,1/30sec)
2) Black & white mode: 0Lux (IR LED on)
c. The following features with control settings shall be available:
1) Camera Title Off / On (Displayed up to 20 characters per
line)
a) W/W: English / Numeric / Special characters
b) China: English / Numeric / Special / Chinese
characters

c) Common: Multi-line (Max. 5), Color
(Grey/Green/Red/Blue/Black/White),
Transparency, Auto scale by resolution
2) Day/night setting: True Day & Night
3) Backlight compensation (BLC): Off / BLC / WDR
4) WDR 120dB
5) Digital Noise Reduction (DNR): Off / On (Samsung Super Noise
Reduction)
6) Motion Detection Off / On (4ea polygonal zones)
7) Privacy Masking Off / On (6ea rectangular zones)
8) Gain Control Off / Low / Middle / High
9) White Balance ATW / AWC / Manual / Indoor /
Outdoor
10) LDC Off / On (5 levels with min / max)
11) Electronic shutter speed:
a) settings: min, max, anti-flicker
12) Image flip: Off / On
13) Image mirror: Off / On
14) Hallway view: Off / On
15) Alarm I/O Input 1 / Output 1
16) Alarm Triggers Defocus detection, Directional
detection, Motion detection,
Enter/Exit, Tampering, Virtual
line, Network disconnect,
Alarm input
17) Alarm Events File upload via FTP and e-mail,
Notification via e-mail,
SD/SDHC/SDXC or NAS
recording at event triggers,
Alarm output
18) Pixel Counter Available in the plug-in viewer.
19) Lens: 3.2 ~ 10 mm (3.1x) motorized
V/F
20) Max. Aperture Ratio F1.6(Wide)~F2.9(Tele)
21) Angle of view: H: 109.0° ~ 33.2° / V: 57.4° ~
18.7 / D: 132.0~ 38.0°
22) Focus Control Simple focus
23) Lens Type DC auto iris
24) Mount Type Board Type
25) DORI Distance
a) Detect 27.4m-128.8m(89.86ft –
422.61ft)
b) Observe 11.0m-51.5m(35.95ft –
169.04ft)
c) Recognize 5.5m-25.8m(17.97ft – 84.52ft)
d) Identify 2.7m-12.9m(8.99ft – 42.26ft)
2. IR Viewable Length: 30 m (98.43ft)
3. Video Streams
a. The camera shall be able to produce 10 video profiles, each of which may
have the following properties:
1) Encoding type:
a) H.265
b) H.264
c) MJPEG
2) Resolution:1920 x 1080, 1280 x 960, 1280 x 720, 800 x 600, 800 x
448, 720 x 576, 720 x 480, 640 x 480, 640 x 360
3) Maximum frame rate:
a) H.265 and H.264: 30 fps at all resolutions
b) MJPEG: 15 fps at all resolutions
4) Smart Codec Dynamic GOV
5) Bit rate control method:
a) H.265 and H.264
- target bitrate level control
- constant bit rate (CBR) or variable bit rate (VBR)
b) MJPEG
- quality level control
- variable bit rate (VBR)
4. Number of multi-streaming profiles: 3 maximum
5. Simultaneous users (total): 6 maximum (unicast)
6. Storage and Recording
a. The camera shall have onboard SD card storage.
1) Card type: Micro SD/SDHC/SDXC
2) Capacity:Up to 128 GB per card
3) Image content on the card shall have the ability to be downloaded to
a selected destination.
b. NAS
7. Interoperability - Video streams shall be capable of supporting ONVIF protocol,
profiles S G and T.
8. Single Images - The camera shall support jpg file image screenshot and export.
B. Network
1. Connectivity: 10/100 Base-T Ethernet via RJ-45 connector
2. Protocols supported:
a. Transmission Control Protocol (TCP), Internet Protocol (IP) v4 and v6, User
Datagram Protocol (UDP)
b. Configuration: Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP)
c. Web services: Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP), Secure HTTP (HTTPS)
d. Network services: Address Resolution Protocol (ARP), Bonjour, Domain
Name System (DNS), Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP), Network
Time Protocol (NTP), Protocol Independent Multicast-Sparse Mode (PIM-
SM), Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP v1/2c/3 – MIB-2),
Universal Plug and Play (UPnP)
e. Media: Real-Time Transport Protocol (RTP), Real-Time Control Protocol,
Real-Time Streaming Protocol (RTSP)
f. Multicast: Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP)
g. Notifications: File Transfer Protocol (FTP), Simple Mail Transfer Protocol
(SMTP)
h. Remote Access: Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet) (PPPoE)
3. DDNS – The camera shall support DDNS services offered by the Manufacturer
and other publicly available service offerings.
4. Quality of Service (QoS) – Layer 3 DSCP
5. Security features:
a. user password protection
b. IP address filtering - list of allowed or blocked IP addresses
c. HTTPS(SSL) login authentication
d. HTTPS(SSL) secured communications
e. Digest login authentication
f. User access log
g. 802.1x authentication
6. Discovery - Manufacturer shall offer a discovery program to identify all devices of
his manufacture on the network.
C. Audio
1. Direction: uni-directional
2. I/O built-in mic, Line-in
3. Compression:
a. G.711 u-law/G.726 selectable
1) G.726 (ADPCM) 8KHz, G.711 8KHz
2) G.726: 16Kbps, 24Kbps, 32Kbps, 40Kbps
D. Electrical
1. Power
a. Input Voltage / Current PoE (IEEE802.3af, Class3), 12V DC
b. Power Consumption: <7.4 W (PoE), <6.5 W (12V DC)
E. Mechanical And Environmental

1. Material:
a. Housing: Aluminum
2. Dimensions (W x H): 70.0 x 246.0 mm (2.76 x 9.69 in.) without
sunshield
3. Weight 730g (1.691 lb.)
4. Temperature:
a. Operating: -30° C to 55° C (-22° F to 131° F)
b. Storage: -30° C to 60° C (-22° F to 140° F)
5. Humidity: 0 - 90%, non-condensing
6. Environmental Rating:
a. Ingress Protection IP66
b. Mechanical (Vandal) Protection IK10
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLERS
A. Contractor personnel shall comply with all applicable state and local licensing
requirements.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. The network design and configuration shall be verified for compatibility and
performance with the camera(s).
B. Network configuration shall be tested and qualified by the Contractor prior to camera
installation.
C. All firmware found in products shall be the latest and most up-to-date provided by the
manufacturer, or of a version as specified by the provider of the Video Management
Application (VMA) or Network Video Recorder (NVR).

D. All equipment requiring users to log on using a password shall be configured with
user/site-specific password/passwords. No system/product default passwords shall be
allowed.
E. All equipment shall be tested and configured in accordance with instructions provided
by the manufacturer prior to installation
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. The Contractor shall carefully follow instructions in documentation provided by the

manufacturer to insure all steps have been taken to provide a reliable, easy-to-
operate system.
B. All equipment shall be tested and configured in accordance with instructions provided
by the manufacturer prior to installation.
C. Before permanent installation of the system, the Contractor shall test the system in
conditions simulating the final installed environment.
3.04 STORAGE
A. The hardware shall be stored in an environment where temperature and humidity are
in the range specified by the Manufacturer.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 28 3100
FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. This Section includes the requirements for the installation, programming and
configuration of a complete addressable intelligent network-based fire detection and
alarm systems. The system shall include but is not limited to: fire alarm control panel(s),
automatic and manually activated voice evacuation alarm subsystem, firefighter
telephone communications, automatic and manually activated alarm initiating and
notification devices and appliances, remote annunciator, conduit, wire and accessories
required to furnish a complete and operational life safety system. All conduit, wiring and
accessories required to provide power to, and interconnect, devices supplied through
other divisions, including: electric and magnetic door holders, suppression system flow
switches, suppression system supervisory switches, elevator status and control panel
and damper related to smoke control. Equipment and labor not specifically referred to
herein or on the plans, but which are required to meet the functional intent, shall be
provided without additional cost to the Owner. Refer to the tender drawings for the
specific details.

1. Division 14 – Section “Electric Traction Elevators”
2. Division 26 – Section “Lighting Control System”
3. Division 26 – Section “Central Battery based Emergency Lighting Systems”
4. Division 28 – Section “Security and Access Control System”
1.02 CODES AND STANDARDS
A. All work, materials, and equipment shall comply with the rules and regulations of all
codes and ordinances of the local, state, and federal authorities having jurisdiction.
Such codes, when more restrictive, shall take precedence over these plans and
specifications. The specifications and standards listed below form part of this
specification. The system shall fully comply with the latest issue of these standards, if
applicable.:
1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
a. NFPA72—National Fire Alarm Code
b. NFPA101—Life Safety Code
c. NFPA13—Sprinkler Systems
d. UAE Fire and Life Safety Code of Practice
KEO/21-7387-0004 28 3100 / 1 Fire Detection And Alarm System

A. Comply with NFPA 72
B. Fire alarm signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices:
1. Manual stations.
2. Heat detectors.
3. Smoke detectors.
4. Automatic sprinkler system water flow.
5. Fire extinguishing system operation.
6. Fire standpipe system.
C. Fire alarm signal shall initiate the following actions:

1. Alarm notification appliances shall operate continuously.
2. Identify alarm at the FACP and remote annunciators (repeaters).
3. De-energize electromagnetic door holders.
4. Transmit an alarm signal to the remote alarm receiving station.
5. Unlock electric door locks in designated egress paths.
6. Release fire and smoke doors held open by magnetic door holders.
7. Activate voice/alarm communication system.
8. Switch heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning equipment controls to fire alarm
mode.
9. Close smoke dampers in air ducts of system serving zone where alarm was
initiated.
10. Record events in the system memory.
11. Record events by the system printer.
D. Supervisory signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices or actions:
1. Operation of a fire-protection system valve tamper.
E. System trouble signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices or
actions:
1. Open circuits, shorts and grounds of wiring for initiating device, signaling line,
and notification-appliance circuits.
2. Opening, tampering, or removal of alarm-initiating and supervisory signal-
initiating devices.
3. Loss of primary power at the FACP.
4. Ground or a single break in FACP internal circuits.
5. Abnormal ac voltage at the FACP.
6. A break in standby battery circuitry.
7. Failure of battery charging.
8. Abnormal position of any switch at the FACP or annunciator (repeater).
9. Fire-pump power failure, including a dead-phase or phase-reversal condition.
10. Low-air-pressure switch operation on a dry-pipe or preaction sprinkler system.
F. System Trouble and Supervisory Signal Actions: Ring trouble bell and annunciate at the
FACP and remote annunciator (repeater). Record the event on system printer.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Shop Drawings shall be prepared by persons with the following qualifications:
a. Trained and certified by manufacturer in fire alarm system design.
2. System Operation Description: Detailed description for this Project, including
method of operation and supervision of each type of circuit and sequence of
operations for manually and automatically initiated system inputs and outputs.
Manufacturer's standard descriptions for generic systems are not acceptable.
3. Device Address List: Coordinate with final system programming.
4. System riser diagram with device addresses, conduit sizes, and cable and wire
types and sizes.
5. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. Include diagrams for
equipment and for system with all terminals and interconnections identified.
Show wiring color code.
6. Batteries: Size calculations.
7. Duct Smoke Detectors: Performance parameters and installation details for each
detector, verifying that each detector is listed for the complete range of air
velocity, temperature, and humidity possible when air-handling system is
operating.
8. Floor Plans: Indicate final outlet locations showing address of each addressable
device. Show size and route of cable and conduits.
C. Qualification Data: For Installer.
E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire alarm system to include in emergency,
operation, and maintenance manuals. Comply with NFPA 72, Appendix A,
recommendations for Owner's manual. Include abbreviated operating instructions for
mounting at the FACP.
F. Submittals to Authorities Having Jurisdiction: In addition to distribution requirements for

submittals specified in Division 01 Section "Submittals," make during the period of
construction an identical submittal to authorities having jurisdiction. To facilitate review,
include copies of annotated Contract Drawings as needed to depict component
locations. Resubmit if required to make clarifications or revisions to obtain approval.
On receipt of comments from authorities having jurisdiction, submit them to Architect for
review.
Upon completion of construction work make a submittal of the final as-built drawings to
the Authorities Having Jurisdiction for their approval for purposes of their inspection
and testing of the fire alarm system installations.
G. Documentation:
1. Record of Completion Documents: Submit the "Permanent Records" according
to NFPA 72
a. Electronic media may be provided to the Architect, and concerned local fire
authority.
A. Installer Qualifications: Personnel shall be trained and certified by manufacturer for

installation of units required for this Project.

NFPA 70, Article 100 to the Architect, and acceptable to authorities of the local fire
Authority.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.02 MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, provide

products by one of the manufactures specified in the manufacture/vendor list.
2.03 FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL (FACP)
A. General Description:
1. Modular, power-limited design with electronic modules, UL 864 listed and/or
EN/BS compliant.
2. Addressable initiation devices that communicate device identity and status.
3. Smoke sensors shall additionally communicate sensitivity setting and allow for
adjustment of sensitivity at the FACP.
4. Temperature sensors shall additionally test for and communicate the sensitivity
range of the device.
5. Addressable control circuits for operation of mechanical equipment.
B. Alphanumeric Display and System Controls: Arranged for interface between human
operator at the FACP and addressable system components including annunciation and
supervision. Display alarm, supervisory, and component status messages and the
programming and control menu.
1. Annunciator and Display: Liquid-crystal type, three lines of 80 characters,
minimum.
2. Keypad: Arranged to permit entry and execution of programming, display, and
control commands and to indicate control commands to be entered into the
system for control of smoke-detector sensitivity and other parameters.
C. Circuits:
1. Signaling Line Circuits: NFPA 72, Class A.
2. Actuation of alarm notification appliances, emergency voice communications,
annunciation, smoke control, elevator recall, and actuation of suppression
systems shall occur within 20 seconds after the activation of an initiating device.

3. Electrical monitoring for the integrity of wiring external to the FACP for
mechanical equipment shutdown and magnetic door-holding circuits is not
required, provided a break in the circuit will cause doors to close and mechanical
equipment to shut down.
D. Smoke-Alarm Verification:
1. Initiate audible and visible indication of an "alarm verification" signal at the FACP.
2. Activate a listed and approved "alarm verification" sequence at the FACP and the
detector.
3. Record events by the system printer.
4. Sound general alarm if the alarm is verified.
5. Cancel FACP indication and system reset if the alarm is not verified.
E. Elevator Controls: Water-flow alarm connected to sprinkler in an elevator shaft and

elevator machine room shuts down elevators associated with the location without time
delay.
1. A field-mounted relay actuated by the fire detector or the FACP closes the shunt
trip circuit and operates building notification appliances and annunciator
(repeater).
F. Power Supply for Supervision Equipment: Supply for audible and visual equipment for
supervision of the ac power shall be from a dedicated dc power supply, and power for
the dc component shall be from the ac supply.
G. Alarm Silencing, Trouble, and Supervisory Alarm Reset: Manual reset at the FACP and
remote annunciators, after initiating devices are restored to normal.
1. Silencing-switch operation halts alarm operation of notification appliances and
activates an "alarm silence" light. Display of identity of the alarm zone or device
is retained.
2. Subsequent alarm signals from other devices or zones reactivate notification
appliances until silencing switch is operated again.
3. When alarm-initiating devices return to normal and system reset switch is
operated, notification appliances operate again until alarm silence switch is reset.
H. Walk Test: A test mode to allow one person to test alarm and supervisory features of
initiating devices. Enabling of this mode shall require the entry of a password. The
FACP and annunciators shall display a test indication while the test is underway. If
testing ceases while in walk-test mode, after a preset delay, the system shall
automatically return to normal.
I. Remote Smoke-Detector Sensitivity Adjustment: Controls shall select specific

addressable smoke detectors for adjustment, display their current status and sensitivity
settings, and control of changes in those settings. Allow controls to be used to program
repetitive, time-scheduled, and automated changes in sensitivity of specific detector
groups. Record sensitivity adjustments and sensitivity-adjustment schedule changes in
system memory, and make a print-out of the final adjusted values on the system printer.
J. Transmission to Remote Alarm Receiving Station: Automatically transmit alarm, trouble,

and supervisory signals to a remote alarm station through a digital alarm communicator
transmitter and telephone lines.

K. Service Modem: Ports shall be RS-232 for system printer and for connection to a dial-in
terminal unit.
1. The dial-in port shall allow remote access to the FACP for programming changes
and system diagnostic routines. Access by a remote terminal shall be by
encrypted password algorithm.
L. Printout of Events: On receipt of signal, print alarm, supervisory, and trouble events.
Identify zone, device, and function. Include type of signal (alarm, supervisory, or
trouble), and date and time of occurrence. Differentiate alarm signals from all other
printed indications. Also print system reset event, including the same information for
device, location, date, and time. Commands initiate the printing of a list of existing
alarm, supervisory, and trouble conditions in the system and a historical log of events.
M. Primary Power: 24-V dc obtained from 230-V ac service and a power-supply module.
Initiating devices, notification appliances, signaling lines, trouble signal and supervisory
signal shall be powered by the 24-V dc source.
1. The alarm current draw of the entire fire alarm system shall not exceed 80
percent of the power-supply module rating.
2. Power supply shall have a dedicated fused safety switch for this connection at
the service entrance equipment. Paint the switch box red and identify it with
"FIRE ALARM SYSTEM POWER."
N. Secondary Power: 24-V dc supply system with batteries and automatic battery charger
and an automatic transfer switch.
1. The battery shall have sufficient capacity to power the fire alarm system for not
less than twenty-four hours plus 5 minutes (15 minutes for Audio Systems) of
alarm upon a normal AC power failure.
2. The batteries are to be completely maintenance free. No liquids are required.
Fluid level checks for refilling, spills, and leakage shall not be required.
3. The system shall provide a means of monitoring the battery voltages from the
front panel display for the local batteries.
4. Battery and Charger Capacity: Comply with NFPA 72.
O. Instructions: Computer printout or typewritten instruction card mounted behind a plastic

or glass cover in a stainless-steel or aluminum frame. Include interpretation and
describe appropriate response for displays and signals. Briefly describe the functional
operation of the system under normal, alarm, and trouble conditions.
P. Emergency Voice Evacuation Command Module (refer to the riser diagram for details)
1. The voice control shall be Digital. Digital Voice Command (DVC) controller shall
be a part of the Fire Alarm network. It shall
a. Each DVC shall support 32 minutes of Audio messages in simple WAV
format. The system shall have the capability to arrange the various audio
clips in required order to obtain different set of messages.
b. The Audio System shall support 8 simultaneous messages and 5
channels of Fireman’s telephone conversations. The DVC shall allow for 2
low level audio inputs such as Back ground music.
c. Each DVC shall support 32 Digital Audio Amplifiers (DAA) and the
communication shall be minimum 3.1 MHzs.
d. Each DAA shall support 4 Speaker circuits in Class B and two Speaker
circuits in Class A. It shall also provide for a telephone circuit.

e. Each DAA must have 2 minutes of local Audio to be used in case of
network failure.
Q. Fire Fighters Telephone Voice Control Module (refer to the riser diagram for details)
1. Voice control module (telephone) shall provide four fully supervised Class B
(NFPA Style Y) or Class A (NFPA Style Z) telephone circuits. Expansion circuit
board shall allow eight circuits per module.
2. System shall allow a minimum of seven (7) telephones connected simultaneously
to the telephone bus at a given time.
3. If a short-circuit trouble occurs on one of the telephone circuits, that circuit will
not activate on manual command.
4. Telephone circuits shall have a visual indication by zone that a call-in is taking
place and have a unique call-in tone.
2.04 MANUAL FIRE ALARM STATIONS
A. Manual fire alarm stations shall be non-code, non-break glass type, equipped with key
lock so that they may be tested without operating the handle.
B. Stations must be designed such that after an actual activation, they cannot be restored
to normal except by key reset.
C. An operated station shall automatically condition itself so as to be visually detected, as

operated, at a minimum distance of 100 feet (30.5 m) front or side.
D. Manual stations shall be constructed of high impact Lexan, with operating instructions
provided on the cover. The word FIRE shall appear on the manual station in letters one
half inch (12.7 mm) in size or larger.
2.05 SYSTEM SMOKE DETECTORS
A. General Description:
1. UL 268 listed, operating at 24-V dc, nominal.
2. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal,
alarm, or trouble) to the FACP.
3. Multipurpose type, containing the following:
a. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status
(normal, alarm, or trouble) to the FACP.
b. Piezoelectric sounder rated at 88 dBA at 3 m according to UL 464.
c. Heat sensor, combination rate-of-rise and fixed temperature.
4. Plug-in Arrangement: Detector and associated electronic components shall be
mounted in a plug-in module that connects to a fixed base. Provide terminals in
the fixed base for connection of building wiring.
5. Self-Restoring: Detectors do not require resetting or readjustment after actuation
to restore them to normal operation.
6. Integral Visual-Indicating Light: LED type. Indicating detector has operated and
power-on status.
7. Remote Control: Unless otherwise indicated, detectors shall be analog-
addressable type, individually monitored at the FACP for calibration, sensitivity,
and alarm condition, and individually adjustable for sensitivity from the FACP.

a. Rate-of-rise temperature characteristic shall be selectable at the FACP for
8 or 11 deg C per minute.
b. Fixed-temperature sensing shall be independent of rate-of-rise sensing
and shall be settable at the FACP to operate at 57 or 68 deg C.
c. Provide multiple levels of detection sensitivity for each sensor.
B. Photoelectric Smoke Detectors:

1. Sensor: LED or infrared light source with matching silicon-cell receiver.
2. Detector Sensitivity: Between 0.008 and 0.011 percent/mm smoke obscuration.
C. Duct Smoke Detectors:

1. Photoelectric Smoke Detectors:
a. Sensor: LED or infrared light source with matching silicon-cell receiver.
b. Detector Sensitivity: Between 0.008 and 0.011 percent/mm smoke
obscuration.
2. Operating at 24-V dc, nominal.
4. Plug-in Arrangement: Detector and associated electronic components shall be
mounted in a plug-in module that connects to a fixed base. The fixed base shall
be designed for mounting directly to the air duct. Provide terminals in the fixed
base for connection to building wiring.
5. Self-Restoring: Detectors shall not require resetting or readjustment after
actuation to restore them to normal operation.
6. Integral Visual-Indicating Light: LED type. Indicating detector has operated and
power-on status. Provide remote status and alarm indicator and test station
where indicated.
7. Remote Control: Unless otherwise indicated, detectors shall be analog-
addressable type, individually monitored at the FACP for calibration, sensitivity,
and alarm condition, and individually adjustable for sensitivity from the FACP.
8. Each sensor shall have multiple levels of detection sensitivity.
9. Sampling Tubes: Design and dimensions as recommended by manufacturer for
the specific duct size, air velocity, and installation conditions where applied.
10. Relay Fan Shutdown: Rated to interrupt fan motor-control circuit.
D. Intelligent Multi Criteria Self-Acclimating Detector

1. Intelligent multi criteria Acclimate detector shall be an addressable device that is
designed to monitor a minimum of photoelectric and thermal technologies in a
single sensing device. Design shall include the ability to adapt by utilizing a built-
in microprocessor to determine its environment and choose the appropriate
sensing settings. Detector design shall permit a sensitivity window, no less than 1
to 4% per foot obscuration.
2. Microprocessor design shall be capable of selecting the appropriate sensitivity
levels based on the environment type it is in and then have the ability to
automatically change the setting as the environment changes (as walls are
moved or as the occupancy changes).
3. Intelligent multi criteria detection device shall include the ability to combine the
signal of the thermal sensor with the signal of the photoelectric signal in an effort
to react quickly in the event of a fire situation. It shall also include the inherent
ability to distinguish between a fire condition and a false alarm condition by
examining the characteristics of the thermal and smoke sensing chambers and
comparing them to a database of actual fire and deceptive phenomena.
2.06 HEAT DETECTORS
A. General: UL 521 listed.
B. Heat Detector, Combination Type: Actuated by either a fixed temperature of 57 deg C

or rate-of-rise of temperature that exceeds 8 deg C per minute, unless otherwise
indicated.
1. Mounting: Plug-in base, interchangeable with smoke-detector bases.
C. Heat Detector, Fixed-Temperature Type: Actuated by temperature that exceeds a fixed

temperature of 88 deg C.
1. Mounting: Plug-in base, interchangeable with smoke-detector bases.
3. or trouble) to the FACP.
2.07 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES
A. Description: Equipped for mounting as indicated and with screw terminals for system
connections.
1. Combination Devices: Factory-integrated audible and visible devices in a single-
mounting assembly.
B. Bells: Electric-vibrating, 24-V dc, under-dome type; with provision for housing the
operating mechanism behind the bell. Bells shall produce a sound-pressure level of 94
dBA, measured 3 m from the bell. 254-mm size, unless otherwise indicated. Bells are
weatherproof where indicated.
C. Horns: Electric-vibrating-polarized type, 24-V dc; with provision for housing the
operating mechanism behind a grille. Horns shall produce a sound-pressure level of 90
dBA, measured 3 m from the horn.
D. Visible Alarm Devices: Xenon strobe lights listed under UL 1971, with clear or nominal
white polycarbonate lens mounted on an aluminum faceplate. The word "FIRE" is
engraved in minimum 25-mm high letters on the lens.
1. Rated Light Output: 110candela.
2. Strobe Leads: Factory connected to screw terminals
E. Emergency Voice Evacuation Loudspeakers

1. Loudspeakers shall be provided where indicated on the drawings.
2. All loudspeakers shall be high quality units.
3. Ceiling loudspeakers shall be fitted with a metal baffle plate and grille for flush
mounting in a suspended ceiling. Fixings shall be concealed.
4. Ceiling loudspeakers shall be fitted with rear fire domes of steel or a material of
equivalent fire protection performance.
5. Wall-mounted loudspeakers shall be provided within steel (or a material of
equivalent fire protection) cabinets. Fixings shall be concealed.
6. Horn loudspeakers shall be provided with rugged brackets which shall permit a
minimum of +10, -45 (vertical) and ±45 (horizontal) site adjustment of horn
orientation.
2.08 SPRINKLER SYSTEM REMOTE INDICATORS
A. Remote status and alarm indicator and test stations, with LED indicating lights. Light is
connected to flash when the associated device is in an alarm or trouble mode. Lamp is
flush mounted in a single-gang wall plate. A red, laminated, phenolic-resin identification
plate at the indicating light identifies, in engraved white letters, device initiating the
signal and room where the smoke detector or valve is located. For water-flow switches,
the identification plate also designates protected spaces downstream from the water-
flow switch.
2.09 ADDRESSABLE INTERFACE DEVICE
A. Description: Microelectronic monitor module listed for use in providing a system

address for listed alarm-initiating devices for wired applications with normally open
contacts.
B. Integral Relay: Capable of providing a direct signal to the elevator controller to initiate
elevator recall for designated level and to a circuit-breaker shunt trip for power
shutdown.
2.10 SYSTEM PRINTER
A. Listed and labeled as an integral part of the fire alarm system.
2.11 WIRE AND CABLE
A. Wire and cable for fire alarm systems shall be UL listed and labeled as complying with
NFPA 70, Article 760.
B. Signaling Line Circuits: Twisted, shielded pair, size as recommended by system

manufacturer but not less than No. 1.5mm.
1. Circuit Integrity Cable: Twisted shielded pair, NFPA 70 Article 760,
Classification CI, for power-limited fire alarm signal service. UL listed as
Type FPL, plenum rated and complying with requirements in UL 1424 and in
UL 2196 for a 2-hour rating.
C. Non-Power-Limited Circuits: Solid-copper conductors with 600-V rated, 75 deg C, color-

coded insulation.
1. Low-Voltage Circuits: No. 1.5mm minimum.
2. Line-Voltage Circuits: No. 2.5mm, minimum.
3. Multi conductor Armored Cable: NFPA 70 Type MC, copper conductors,
TFN/THHN conductor insulation, copper drain wire, copper armor with outer
jacket with red identifier stripe, UL listed for fire alarm and cable tray installation,
plenum rated, and complying with requirements in UL 2196 for a 2-hour rating.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION.

A. Installer and fire alarm products shall be on the approved list of the Abu Dhabi Civil
Defence.
B. Smoke or Heat Detector Spacing:

1. Smooth ceiling spacing shall not exceed 9 m
2. Spacing of heat detectors for irregular areas, for irregular ceiling construction,
and for high ceiling areas, shall be determined based on guidelines and
recommendations in NFPA 72.
C. HVAC: Locate detectors not closer than one meter from air-supply diffuser or return-air
opening.
D. Heat Detectors in Elevator Shafts: Coordinate temperature rating and location with
sprinkler rating and location.
E. Single-Station Smoke Detectors: Where more than one smoke alarm is installed within
a dwelling or suite, they shall be connected so that the operation of any smoke alarm
causes the alarm in all smoke alarms to sound.
F. Remote Status and Alarm Indicators: Install near each smoke detector and each
sprinkler water-flow switch and valve-tamper switch that is not readily visible from
normal viewing position.
G. Audible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install not less than 150 mm below the ceiling. Install
bells and horns on flush-mounted back boxes with the device-operating mechanism
concealed behind a grille.
H. Device Location-Indicating Lights: Locate in public space near the device they monitor.
I. FACP: Surface mount with tops of cabinets not more than 1800 mm above the finished
floor.
J. Annunciator (Repeater): Install with top of panel not more than 1800 mm above the
finished floor
A. Wiring Method: Install wiring in metal raceway according to Division 26 Section

"Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems."
1. Fire alarm circuits and equipment control wiring associated with the fire alarm
system shall be installed in a dedicated raceway system. This system shall not
be used for any other wire or cable.
B. Wiring Method:
1. Cables and raceways used for fire alarm circuits, and equipment control wiring
associated with the fire alarm system, may not contain any other wire or cable.
2. Fire-Rated Cables: Use of 2-hour fire-rated fire alarm cables, NFPA 70 Types MI
and CI, is not permitted.
3. Signaling Line Circuits: Power-limited fire alarm cables shall not be installed in
the same cable or raceway as signaling line circuits unless separated properly as
recommended by the manufacturer.

C. Wiring within Enclosures: Separate power-limited and non-power-limited conductors as
recommended by manufacturer. Install conductors parallel with or at right angles to
sides and back of the enclosure. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points
with no excess. Connect conductors that are terminated, spliced, or interrupted in any
enclosure associated with the fire alarm system to terminal blocks. Mark each terminal
according to the system's wiring diagrams. Make all connections with approved crimp-
on terminal spade lugs, pressure-type terminal blocks, or plug connectors.
D. Cable Taps: Use numbered terminal strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes, cabinets,
or equipment enclosures where circuit connections are made.
E. Color-Coding: Color-code fire alarm conductors differently from the normal building
power wiring. Use one color-code for alarm circuit wiring and a different color-code for
supervisory circuits. Color-code audible alarm-indicating circuits differently from alarm-
initiating circuits. Use different colors for visible alarm-indicating devices. Paint fire
alarm system junction boxes and covers red.
F. Risers: Install at least two vertical cable risers to serve the fire alarm system. Separate
risers in close proximity to each other with a minimum 1-hour-rated wall, so the loss of
one riser does not prevent the receipt or transmission of signals from other floors or
zones.
G. Wiring to Remote Alarm Transmitting Device: 25-mm conduit between the FACP and
the transmitter. Install number of conductors and electrical supervision for connecting
wiring as needed to suit monitoring function.
3.03 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals according to Division 26

Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."
B. Install instructions frame in a location visible from the FACP.
C. Paint power-supply disconnect switch red and label "FIRE ALARM."
3.04 GROUNDING
A. Ground the FACP and associated circuits; comply with IEEE 1100. Install a ground wire
from main service ground to the FACP.

inspect, test, and adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation,
including connections, and to assist in field testing. Report results in writing.
B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1. Before requesting final approval of the installation, submit a written statement
using the form for Record of Completion shown in NFPA 72.

2. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection listed in
NFPA 72. Certify compliance with test parameters. All tests shall be conducted
under the direct supervision of a licensed technician.
3. Visual Inspection: Conduct a visual inspection before any testing. Use as-built
drawings and system documentation for the inspection. Identify improperly
located, damaged, or nonfunctional equipment, and correct before beginning
tests.
4. Testing: Follow procedure and record results complying with requirements in
NFPA 72.
a. Detectors that are outside their marked sensitivity range shall be
replaced.
5. Test and Inspection Records: Prepare according to NFPA 72, including
demonstration of sequences of operation by using the matrix-style form in
Appendix A in NFPA 70.
3.06 ADJUSTING
A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial

Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied
conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project outside normal occupancy hours for this
purpose.
B. Follow-Up Tests and Inspections: After date of Substantial Completion, test the fire
alarm system complying with testing and visual inspection requirements in NFPA 72.
Perform tests and inspections listed for three monthly, and one quarterly, periods.
C. Semiannual Test and Inspection: Six months after date of Substantial Completion, test
the fire alarm system complying with the testing and visual inspection requirements in
NFPA 72. Perform tests and inspections listed for monthly, quarterly, and semiannual
periods. Use forms developed for initial tests and inspections.
D. Annual Test and Inspection: One year after date of Substantial Completion, test the fire
alarm system complying with the testing and visual inspection requirements in NFPA 72.
Perform tests and inspections listed for monthly, quarterly, semiannual, and annual
periods. Use forms developed for initial tests and inspections.
3.07 DEMONSTRATION

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain the fire alarm system, appliances, and
devices. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training."
END OF SECTION

SECTION 28 5910
WARRANTY AND EXTRA MATERIAL LIST – SECURITY
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Complete maintenance as per manufacturer recommendations on Div 28 products.
DIVISION 28
delivery to site.
standard warranty.
-
2 years or
Standard
FIRE DETECTION AND Manufacturers’
28 3100 warranty period as per manufacturer
ALARM SYSTEM warranties
recommendation
whichever is
greater
END OF SECTION
KEO/21-7387-0004 28 5910 / 1 Warranty & Extra Material List - Security

SECTION 28 9000
APPROVED MANUFACTURER/VENDOR LIST
1.01 GENERAL

DIVISION 28 ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

28 3100 Fire Detection and EDWARDS USA
Alarm Systems HONEYWELL USA
SIMPLEX (TYCO) USA
SIEMENS USA/ Europe
NOTIFIER USA
BOSCH Germany
SHIELD Greece/UK
ATEIS Germany
KEO/21-7387-0004 28 9000/ 1 Approved Manufacturer Vendor List

SECTION 31 1000
SITE CLEARING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and

Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Protecting existing vegetation to remain.

2. Clearing and grubbing.
3. Removal of trees, shrubs, plants.
4. Removal of paving, kerbs, services, concrete, fence.
5. Removal of underground tanks, abundant services and structural concrete
elements.
6. Disconnecting, capping or sealing, and removing site utilities abandoning site
utilities in place as instructed and approved by the Engineer.
7. Provide all labour, material, plant, equipment and appliances and perform all
necessary operations to execute the work of the section.
1. Section 312000 "Earth Moving".
1.3 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to local Municipality codes for all applicable environmental requirements,

disposal of debris, burning debris on site, use of herbicides, etc.
B. Burning of debris is not permitted on site unless specifically approved by the

Engineer.
C. Coordinate Clearing Work with utility companies.
1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. Subsoil: Soil beneath the level of subgrade; soil beneath the topsoil layers of a
naturally occurring soil profile, typified by less than 1 percent organic matter and
few soil organisms.
B. Surface Soil: Soil that is present at the top layer of the existing soil profile. In
undisturbed areas, surface soil is typically called "topsoil," but in disturbed areas
such as urban environments, the surface soil can be subsoil.
KEO/21-7387-0004 31 1000/ 1 Site Clearing
C. Topsoil: Top layer of the soil profile consisting of existing native surface topsoil or
existing in-place surface soil; the zone where plant roots grow.
D. Plant-Protection Zone: Area surrounding individual trees, groups of trees, shrubs,

or other vegetation to be protected during construction and indicated on Drawings.
E. Vegetation: Trees, shrubs, groundcovers, grass, and other plants.
1.5 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site one (1) week prior
to commencement of the work review the material selections, installation
procedures and co-ordination of the work with other trades. The meeting shall be
attended by the Contractor, Engineer and any other Contractor or trade requiring
co-ordination with this work.
1.6 MATERIAL OWNERSHIP
A. Except for materials indicated to be stockpiled or otherwise remain Employer's

property, cleared materials shall become Contractor's property and shall be
removed from Project site.
A. Existing Conditions: Documentation of existing trees and plantings, adjoining

construction, and site improvements that establishes preconstruction conditions
that might be misconstrued as damage caused by site clearing.
1. Use sufficiently detailed photographs or video recordings.

2. Include plans and notations to indicate specific wounds and damage
conditions of each tree or other plant designated to remain.
B. Topsoil stripping and stockpiling program.
C. Rock stockpiling program.
D. Record Drawings: Identifying and accurately showing locations of capped utilities

and other subsurface structural, electrical, and mechanical conditions.
A. Topsoil Stripping and Stockpiling Program: Prepare a written program to

systematically demonstrate the ability of personnel to properly follow procedures
and handle materials and equipment during the Work. Include dimensioned
diagrams for placement and protection of stockpiles.
B. Rock Stockpiling Program: Prepare a written program to systematically

demonstrate the ability of personnel to properly follow procedures and handle
materials and equipment during the Work. Include dimensioned diagrams for
placement and protection of stockpiles.

1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other
adjacent occupied or used facilities during site-clearing operations.
1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used

facilities without permission from Employer and authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed trafficways if required by
Employer or authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Improvements on Adjoining Property: Authority for performing site clearing

indicated on property adjoining Employer's property will be obtained by Employer
before award of Contract.
1. Do not proceed with work on adjoining property until directed by Engineer.
C. Salvageable Improvements: Carefully remove items indicated to be salvaged and

store on Employer's premises where indicated.
D. Do not commence site clearing operations until temporary erosion- and

sedimentation-control measures are in place.
E. Soil Stripping, Handling, and Stockpiling: Perform only when the soil is dry or
slightly moist.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
(NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Protect and maintain benchmarks and survey control points from disturbance
during construction.
B. Verify that trees, shrubs, and other vegetation to remain or to be relocated have
been flagged and that protection zones have been identified.
C. Protect existing site improvements to remain from damage during construction.
1. Restore damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to

Employer.
3.2 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL
A. Provide temporary erosion- and sedimentation-control measures to prevent soil

erosion and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent
properties and walkways, according to erosion- and sedimentation-control
Drawings and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Verify that flows of water redirected from construction areas or generated by
construction activity do not enter or cross protection zones.
C. Inspect, maintain, and repair erosion- and sedimentation-control measures during

construction until permanent vegetation has been established.
D. Remove erosion and sedimentation controls, and restore and stabilize areas
disturbed during removal.
3.3 TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION
A. Protect trees and plants remaining on-site according to Engineer instructions.
3.4 EXISTING UTILITIES (IF ANY)
A. Remove trees and shrubs not designated to remain. Remove stumps, main root
system, surface rock, etc.
B. Clear undergrowth and dead wood, without disturbing top soil.
C. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before proceeding with site
clearing.
D. Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap utilities indicated to be removed or

abandoned in place.
E. Locate, identify, and disconnect utilities indicated to be abandoned in place.
3.5 CLEARING AND GRUBBING
A. Remove obstructions, trees, shrubs, and other vegetation to permit installation of

new construction.
B. Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with satisfactory soil
material unless further excavation or earthwork is indicated.
1. Place fill material in horizontal layers not exceeding a loose depth of 200 mm,
and compact each layer to a density equal to adjacent original ground.
3.6 TOPSOIL STRIPPING
A. Remove sod and grass before stripping topsoil.
B. Strip topsoil to depth of 200 mm in a manner to prevent intermingling with

underlying subsoil or other waste materials.
1. Remove subsoil and nonsoil materials from topsoil, including clay lumps,
gravel, and other objects larger than 50 mm in diameter; trash, debris, weeds,
roots, and other waste materials.

C. Stockpile topsoil away from edge of excavations without intermixing with subsoil or
other materials. Grade and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to
prevent windblown dust and erosion by water.
1. Limit height of topsoil stockpiles to 1800 mm.

2. Do not stockpile topsoil within protection zones.
3. Dispose of surplus topsoil. Surplus topsoil is that which exceeds quantity
indicated to be stockpiled or reused.
4. Stockpile surplus topsoil to allow for respreading deeper topsoil.
3.7 SITE IMPROVEMENTS
A. Remove existing above- and below-grade improvements as indicated and

necessary to facilitate new construction.
B. Remove slabs, paving, curbs, gutters, and aggregate base as indicated.
3.8 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS
A. Remove surplus soil material, unsuitable topsoil, obstructions, demolished

materials, and waste materials including trash and debris, and legally dispose of
them off Employer's property.
B. Burning tree, shrub, and other vegetation waste is permitted according to burning
requirements and permitting of authorities having jurisdiction. Control such burning
to produce the least smoke or air pollutants and minimum annoyance to
surrounding properties. Burning of other waste and debris is prohibited.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 31 2000
EARTH MOVING
PART 1 - GENERAL

Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Excavating and filling for rough grading the Site.

2. Excavating and backfilling for buildings and structures.
3. Excavating and backfilling trenches for utilities and pits for buried utility
structures.
4. Excavating for foundations, sumps, drain runs of all types of material to
elevations and limits indicated, including removal of any existing foundations,
abandoned utilities and other sub-surface structures.
5. Removal of all loose and unsuitable soil as defined by the Engineer below
foundation level, and backfilling of such over-excavation if encountered with
lean mix concrete or compacted granular structural fill as approved by the
Engineer.
6. Excavating well hole to accommodate elevator-cylinder assembly.
7. The Excavation for the last 50cms shall be done manually by the Contractor
for concrete works.
1. Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for granular course if placed over

vapor retarder and beneath the slab-on-grade.
2. Section 311000 "Site Clearing" for site stripping, grubbing, stripping and
stockpiling topsoil, and removal of above- and below-grade improvements and
utilities.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Backfill: Soil material or controlled low-strength material used to fill an excavation.
1. Initial Backfill: Backfill placed beside and over pipe in a trench, including
haunches to support sides of pipe.
2. Final Backfill: Backfill placed over initial backfill to fill a trench.
B. Base Course: Aggregate layer placed between the subbase course and hot-mix
asphalt paving.
KEO/21-7387-0004 31 2000/ 1 Earth Moving

C. Bedding Course: Aggregate layer placed over the excavated subgrade in a trench
before laying pipe.
D. Borrow Soil: Satisfactory soil imported from off-site for use as fill or backfill.
E. Drainage Course: Aggregate layer supporting the slab-on-grade that also

minimizes upward capillary flow of pore water.
F. Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations and to

lines and dimensions indicated.
G. Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades.
H. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs,

mechanical and electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features
constructed above or below the ground surface.
I. Subbase Course: Aggregate layer placed between the subgrade and base course
for hot-mix asphalt pavement, or aggregate layer placed between the subgrade and
a cement concrete pavement or a cement concrete or hot-mix asphalt walk.
J. Subgrade: Uppermost surface of an excavation or the top surface of a fill or backfill

immediately below subbase, drainage fill, drainage course, or topsoil materials.
K. Utilities: On-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables as well as

underground services within buildings.
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct pre-excavation conference at Project site one

(1) week prior to commencement of the work to review the material selections,
installation procedures and co-ordination of the work with other trades. The meeting
shall be attended by the Contractor, Engineer and any other Contractor or trade
requiring co-ordination with this work.
1. Review methods and procedures related to earthmoving, including, but not

limited to, the following:
a. Personnel and equipment needed to make progress and avoid delays.

b. Coordination of Work with utility locator service.
c. Coordination of Work and equipment movement with the locations of
tree- and plant-protection zones.
d. Extent of trenching by hand or with air spade.
e. Field quality control.
A. Product Data: For each type of the following manufactured products required:
1. Geotextiles.
2. Warning tapes.
B. Samples for Verification: For the following products, in sizes indicated below:
KEO/21-7387-0004 31 2000/ 2 Earth Moving

1. Geotextile: 300 by 300 mm.
2. Warning Tape: 300 mm long; of each color.
A. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.
B. Material Test Reports: For each soil material proposed for fill and backfill as
follows:
1. Classification according to ASTM D 2487.
C. Pre-excavation Photographs or Videotape: Show existing conditions of adjoining

construction and site improvements, including finish surfaces that might be
misconstrued as damage caused by earth-moving operations. Submit before earth
moving begins.
D. Proposed Environmental-Protection Dust-Control Measures: Submit statement or

drawing that indicated the measures proposed for use, proposed locations, and
proposed time frame for their operation. Identify options if proposed measures are
later determined to be inadequate.
E. Technical Data: Submit for Engineer’s review.
1. Submit prior to starting work, description of methods sequence of excavating

and the type of equipment proposed.
2. Catalogues of heavy equipment proposed for excavation and earth removal.
3. Workshop drawings including plan of complete site showing area and extent
of excavation and capping of any exisiting underground utilities to remain.
1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Work shall comply with all rules, regulations, laws and ordinances of all authorities
B. Obtain all necessary permits. Obtain written permission from adjoining property
employers if proposed systems of tie-back anchors will project beyond the vertical
projection of the contract limit lines. Submit such permissions with shop drawings.
C. Comply with EPA regulations wherever applicable.
A. Blasting is permitted only after obtaining the written permission from authorities
having jurisdiction and Engineer complying with requirements stipulated.
B. Geotechnical Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 329

and ASTM D 3740 for testing indicated.
KEO/21-7387-0004 31 2000/ 3 Earth Moving

A. Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other
adjacent occupied or used facilities during earth-moving operations.

facilities without permission from Employer and authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required
by Employer or authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Do not commence earth-moving operations until temporary site fencing and

erosion- and sedimentation-control measures specified in Section 311000 "Site
Clearing" are in place.
C. The following practices are prohibited within protection zones:
1. Storage of construction materials, debris, or excavated material.

2. Parking vehicles or equipment.
3. Foot traffic.
4. Erection of sheds or structures.
5. Impoundment of water.
6. Excavation or other digging unless otherwise indicated.
7. Attachment of signs to or wrapping materials around trees or plants unless
D. Do not direct vehicle or equipment exhaust towards protection zones.
E. Prohibit heat sources, flames, ignition sources, and smoking within or near
protection zones.
F. Demolish and completely remove existing underground utilities. Coordinate with

utility companies to shut off services if lines are to remain active and require
capping or re-routing.
G. Nature of Excavation:
1. Include for excavating in any type of ground encountered.

2. Include for breaking up rock materials, materials so firmly cemented as to
possess the characteristics of rock, concrete or masonry structures, or any
other hard or compacted materials encountered in excavations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GEOTEXTILES
A. Separation Geotextile: Woven geotextile fabric, manufactured for separation

applications, made from polyolefins or polyesters; with elongation less than 50
percent; complying with AASHTO M 288 and the following, measured per test
methods referenced:
1. Apparent Opening Size: 0.250-mm sieve, maximum; ASTM D 4751.

2. Permittivity: 0.02 per second, minimum; ASTM D 4491.
3. UV Stability: 50 percent after 500 hours' exposure; ASTM D 4355.
KEO/21-7387-0004 31 2000/ 4 Earth Moving
2.2 FILL MATERIALS
A. The following and define requirements for ‘non-harmful’ fill materials suitable for
compaction to the limits specified. The Contractor may propose the use of other
materials, including if appropriate material excavated in the work, provided that they
satisfy the defined requirements related to inclusions and compaction.
B. In General,
1. Group Symbol Group Name
(SW, SW-SM) Well graded sand with silt;

(GW, GW-GM) Well-graded gravel with silt
(GP-GM) Poorly graded gravel with silt
(GM) Silty gravel
(SM) Silty sand
(SC) Clayey sand
C. Suitable ordinary fill to make up levels where required: This fill shall be
uncontaminated Ordinary/General fill with properties as noted below:
Sl. Soil Properties Minimum Re- Test Method

No. quirements
1. Soil Classification Soil Group A-2-4 AASHTO M 145 /
or Soil Group ASTM D 2487
GW, GP, SW,
SM, SC
2. Dry Density (Min.) ≥ 1.90 AASHTO T 191 /
gm/cu.cm) ASTM D 1556
3. Liquid Limit (Max. %) ≤ 25 AASHTO T 89 /
ASTM D 4318
4. Plasticity Index (Max. ≤6 AASHTO T 90 /
%) ASTM D 4318
5. Soaked CBR value at ≥ 15 AASHTO T 193 /
95% modified Proctor ASTM D 1883
test (T 180) (Min. %)
6. A maximum swell ≤1 AASHTO T 193
(CBR) at 95% modified
Proctor test (T 180)
(%)
D. Structural fill where required.
Structural fill shall meet the following criteria: In no case the structural fill material
shall contain expansive clays, vegetable or other organic material, rubbish,
previous construction elements and large rocks (Boulders and Cobbles).
S.No Soil Property Minimum Require- Test Standard

KEO/21-7387-0004 31 2000/ 5 Earth Moving
. ment
1 Classification SW, SW-SM, GW, ASTM D 2487
GW-GM, GP-GM,
SM, SC
A-1-a, A-1-b, A-2-4 AASHTO M
145
2 Maximum Grain 50 mm ASTM D 422
Size
3 Fines ( Passing # 10-15% ASTM D 422
200 Sieve)
4 Maximum Dry Den- ≥ 1.950 Mg/m3 ASTM D 1557
sity
5 Liquid Limit ≤ 25 ASTM D 4318
6 Plasticity Index ≤6 ASTM D 4318
7 Soaked CBR value ≥ 20 AASHTO T193
at 95% modified / ASTM D 1883
proctor test (T180)
(min%)
E. Drainage Fill
1. Drainage fill shall be fine aggregate, clean, well graded, free-draining sand,
complying with ASTM C 33.
2. Drainage fill material shall be placed under utility trenches, behind retaining
walls, for a thickness of 60 cm below Agricultural soil at all landscaped &
planted areas and where called for in the specifications or Drawings.
F. Sand and Aggregate Fill
1. Aggregate: Shall comply with requirements ASTM C 33/C 33M, and/or BS EN

12620 + A1 and as specified in section 033000 “Cast In-Place Concrete”.
2. Sand: Shall comply with requirements as specified in section 033000 “Cast In-
Place Concrete”.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Warning Tape: Where indicated and complying with the Authority having jurisdiction
provide warning tape as below:
1. Acid- and alkali-resistant, polyethylene film warning tape manufactured for

marking and identifying underground utilities, 150 mm wide and 0.1 mm thick,
continuously inscribed with a description of the utility; colored as approved
and comply with the Authority having in jurisdiction.
KEO/21-7387-0004 31 2000/ 6 Earth Moving

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Identify and verify that required lines, levels, contours, and datum locations for the
work are as indicated.
B. Examine site and all work prepared by others including condition of adjoining
property and sites and report to the Engineer in writing any conditions detrimental
to the proper and timely completion of the work of this Section. Locate, identify and
protect all utilities found within or in proximity of the site.
C. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage
caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards
created by earth-moving operations.
D. Protect and maintain erosion and sedimentation controls during earth-moving

operations.
E. Protect subgrades and foundation soils from freezing temperatures and frost.
Remove temporary protection before placing subsequent materials.
F. Make provision for all temporary work, scaffolding, staging, timbering, strutting and
other works as may be necessary and required for the proper, safe and efficient
performance and construction of the works intended and all works incidental
thereto in an expeditious manner to the complete satisfaction of the Engineer. Be
responsible for any damage done to roads, mains, cables, including safety to
persons and property, by the execution of the work.
G. The cost of furnishing, placing and removing the temporary works shall be included
in the Tender for the work.
H. Examine related work and surfaces before starting the work of this Section. Report
to the Engineer, in writing, conditions, which will prevent the proper provision of this
work. Beginning the work of this Section without reporting unsuitable conditions to
the Engineer shall constitute acceptance of conditions by the Contractor. Any
required removal, repair, or replacement of the work caused by unsuitable
conditions should be done at no additional cost to the Employer.
I. Be acquainted with all site conditions. The contractor is to be held responsible for
determining the location of all installed utilities lines within the site boundaries.
Should utilities not shown on Drawings be found during excavation, promptly notify
the Engineer for instruction as to further action. Failure to do so will result in liability
for any and all damage thereto arising from operations subsequent to discovery of
such utilities not shown on Drawings.
3.2 APPROVAL OF METHODS BEFORE COMMENCEMENT OF EARTHWORKS
A. Earthworks shall not commence until the Contractor has provided the Engineer with
a method statement and obtained his approval to, the methods of excavation, the
means of support to sides of excavation, the safety and support of neighbouring
private and public property, the system of dewatering, the demolition of existing
KEO/21-7387-0004 31 2000/ 7 Earth Moving

surface and underground structures and obstacles (if any), moving of any existing
services, pipes, culverts and the like on the side or affecting the works
3.3 DEWATERING
A. Prevent surface water and ground water from entering excavations, from ponding
on prepared subgrades, and from flooding Project site and surrounding area.
B. Protect subgrades from softening, undermining, washout, and damage by rain or

water accumulation.
1. Reroute surface water runoff away from excavated areas. Do not allow water
to accumulate in excavations. Do not use excavated trenches as temporary
drainage ditches.
3.4 EXCAVATION, GENERAL
A. Excavation: Excavate to subgrade elevations regardless of the character of surface

and subsurface conditions encountered. Unclassified excavated materials may
include rock, soil materials, and obstructions. No changes in the Contract Sum or
the Contract Time will be authorized for rock excavation or removal of obstructions.
3.5 EXCAVATION
A. Underpin any existing adjacent structures which may be damaged by excavating

work.
B. Excavate subsoil to accommodate building foundations, and other permanent sub-

base structures.
C. Excavation should include for temporary construction operations to facilitate ground

support or any shoring measures.
D. Compact disturbed load bearing soil in direct contact with foundations to original
bearing capacity; perform compaction in accordance with Contract requirements.
The bearing capacity should be the minimum as determined by the Engineer.
E. Rocks or boulders encountered in the excavation shall be removed within required

excavation limits and to such additional depth and extent as directed and
authorized by the Engineer. The method of removal of such material shall be to the
approval of the Engineer.
F. The use of explosives for breaking-out rock and hard structures is strictly prohibited
for all works.
G. Grade top perimeter of excavating to prevent surface water from draining into
excavation.
H. Hand trim excavation. Remove loose matter.
I. The location of temporary Spoil Heaps for all debris and excavated material are to
be submitted for the approval of the Engineer.
KEO/21-7387-0004 31 2000/ 8 Earth Moving

J. Remove from the site all debris and other excavated material not suitable for fill.
Transport and dispose at the Municipality approved locations and to the approval of
the Engineer
K. Notify the Engineer of unexpected subsurface conditions and discontinue affected

Work in the area until notified to resume work.
L. Correct areas over-excavated in accordance with specified requirements.
M. Removal of excavated material from site and its replacement as directed by the
Engineer shall be at the Contractor's own expense.
N. When excavation has reached the required subgrade elevation, notify the Engineer
who will make an inspection of the subgrade strata to review the strength and
bearing capacity of the soils.
O. If disturbed and otherwise unsuitable bearing materials are encountered at the

required subgrade elevations, carry excavations deeper and replace the excavated
material with lean concrete or compacted structural granular fill as directed by the
Engineer.
P. Dewatering shall be performed as required. If water has been allowed to

accumulate or stand in excavations, such water shall be removed and the softened
or disturbed soil removed to firm bearing. Excavation and backfilling with lean
concrete fill or compacted structural granular fill to replace disturbed or softened
soil shall be conducted at no additional cost to the Contract.
Q. As soon as a section of the required excavation for foundation has been approved
by the Engineer, a working mat (plain cement concrete) of approved type thickness
and limits shall be placed over the soil bearing surface on the same work day. If
excavation has begun for foundation which may not be protected by a working mat
prior to the end of that work day, the excavation bottom shall remain at least
300mm above the design bottom of foundation bearing level until just before the
working mat is placed.
R. Trench Excavation(as applicable): Trenches for piping and utilities shall be not less
than 400mm nor more than 600mm wider than the outside diameter of the pipe to
be laid therein. Bottoms of trenches shall be accurately graded with bell holes
scooped out to provide uniform bearing and support of pipe and utilities on
undisturbed soil throughout its entire length, except where other means of
supporting pipe are indicated. Rock materials shall be excavated to 150mm below
pipe invert and bed backfilled with drainage fill, well tamped in place.
3.6 SUBGRADE INSPECTION
A. Notify Engineer when excavations have reached required subgrade.
B. If Engineer determines that unsatisfactory soil is present, continue excavation and

replace with compacted backfill or fill material as directed.
C. Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain,

accumulated water, or construction activities, as directed by Engineer, without
additional compensation.
KEO/21-7387-0004 31 2000/ 9 Earth Moving

3.7 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS
A. Stockpile borrow soil materials and excavated satisfactory soil materials without
intermixing. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to
prevent windblown dust.
1. Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within
drip line of remaining trees.
3.8 BACKFILL
A. Backfill areas to contours and levels.
B. Systematically backfill to allow maximum time for natural settlement. Do not backfill
over porous, wet or spongy subgrade surfaces.
C. Place geotextile fabric to underside of hard core or as directed by the Engineer.
D. For Backfilling to makeup level, excavated soil may be used if it is free of

contamination and is well graded and granular with less than 20% fines as noted in
this Section. However, if the material on site is not suitable or is not sufficiently
available on site, suitable material may be brought to site from outside with the
approval of the Engineer.
E. Structural fill as noted in this Section to be spread and leveled in layers not
exceeding 150 mm. Thoroughly compact each layer with a vibratory roller, vibrating
plate compactor, vibro hammer, power rammer or other suitable means, to the
Engineer satisfaction.
F. Concrete fill: For excavations performed below the elevations shown or specified
without the Engineer prior approval shall at the Engineer discretion and without any
additional cost, be backfilled with concrete of approved strength, unless instructed
otherwise by the Engineer.
G. Employ a placement method that does not disturb or damage other work.
H. Compact each layer of fill with suitable equipment to achieve the following
percentages of maximum dry density at optimum moisture content ±2% when
tested in accordance with ASTM D1557:
1. Location % Max Density
Under Isolated and Continuous Foundation 95

Under Paved Areas and Kerbs 95
Under Slabs on Grade 95
General Grading 90
2. Do not compact soil when the moisture content varies more than 2% from the
optimum moisture content. Maintain moisture content by wetting or drying
manipulation. Suspend compacting operations when satisfactory results
cannot be obtained because of rain or other unsatisfactory conditions.
3. In lieu of drying by manipulation, hydrated lime, monohydrated lime or similar

beneficial ingredients may be used to reduce the moisture content, reduce the
KEO/21-7387-0004 31 2000/ 10 Earth Moving
plasticity index or improve workability. Apply such ingredients in a manner and
quantity as recommended by the manufacturer or as required by the Soil
Testing Laboratory and approved by the Engineer.
I. Do not backfill against unsupported shoring.
J. Make gradual grade changes. Blend slope into level areas.
K. Remove surplus backfill materials from site.
L. Leave fill material stockpile areas free of excess fill materials.
M. Submit details of plant, maximum depth of each compacted layer, minimum number
of passes per layer in advance of starting work for the approval of the Engineer.
N. Surfaces to receive sheet overlays or concrete are to have sufficient sand, fine
gravel or other approved fine material applied to fill interstices and provide a closed
smooth surface.
3.9 PROTECTION
A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and
erosion. Keep free of trash and debris.
B. Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially

completed surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction
due to subsequent construction operations or weather conditions.
1. Scarify or remove and replace soil material to depth as directed by Engineer;

reshape and recompact.
C. Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished
surfacing, backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing.
1. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match

adjacent work, and eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent
possible.
D. Top Surface of General Backfilling ±25 mm from required elevations.
A. Unless otherwise instructed by the Engineer, remove surplus satisfactory soil and
waste materials, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose
of them off Employer's property.
A. The Engineer will instruct the Contractor to perform compaction tests to indicate
that the work meets the specified requirements and is fit for its purpose. Such
testing shall be at no additional cost to the Contract.
KEO/21-7387-0004 31 2000/ 11 Earth Moving

3.12 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
A. Do not allow construction traffic on compacted fill.
B. Protect basement excavation with geotextile fabric as required.
C. Reshape and re-compact any fill damaged by other activities.
END OF SECTION
KEO/21-7387-0004 31 2000/ 12 Earth Moving

SECTION 31 2319
DEWATERING
PART 1 - GENERAL

Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes construction dewatering.
B. The design, provision, installation, maintenance, operation for the required

durations and subsequent removal of systems for:
C. Reducing the hydrostatic pressure and lowering the water table within and around
the main and, the other excavations, the holding tanks and pits, at formation levels
such that:
1. There shall be no water seepage through the sides of the excavations into
same.
2. The water table within the excavations shall be maintained at the levels below
in this specification.
3. Any dewatering required within and around the main excavation to lower the
water table below the required levels.
D. Related Requirements:

2. Section 315000 "Excavation Support and Protection".
A. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site one (1) week prior
to commencement of the work to review the material selections, installation
procedures and co-ordination of the work with other trades. The meeting shall be
attended by the Contractor, Engineer and any other Contractor or trade requiring
co-ordination with this work.
1. Verify availability of Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to

make progress and avoid delays.
2. Review condition of site to be dewatered including coordination with
temporary erosion-control measures and temporary controls and protections.
3. Review geotechnical report.
4. Review proposed excavations.
5. Review existing utilities and subsurface conditions.
6. Review observation and monitoring of dewatering system.
KEO/21-7387-0004 31 2319 / 1 Dewatering
B. Before installing the dewatering system, the contractor shall study the drawdown
effect of the water table on the surrounding structures, services and roads such that
it does not induce any detrimental effects on these structures, services and roads.
The contractor shall take all necessary measures and provisions such as recharge
wells, etc. as required to maintain the existing water table level as is underneath
the surrounding structures, services and roads. The contractor shall monitor closely
the surrounding structures/services/roads during the complete period of dewatering
and shall take note of any detrimental effects on them and shall take all snecessary
action to correct them as required and as necessary immediately. The Contractor
shall note that he will be fully responsible for all liabilities occurring on the
surrounding structures, services and roads as a result of his works.
A. Shop Drawings: For dewatering system, prepared by or under the supervision of a

qualified professional engineer.
1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details.

2. Show arrangement, locations, and details of wells and well points; locations of
risers, headers, filters, pumps, power units, and discharge lines; and means of
discharge, control of sediment, and disposal of water.
3. Include layouts of piezometers and flow-measuring devices for monitoring
performance of dewatering system.
4. Include written plan for dewatering operations including sequence of well and
well-point placement coordinated with excavation shoring and bracings and
control procedures to be adopted if dewatering problems arise.
5. Standby equipment, standby power supply. Note that standby provisions are
to be provided as required to ensure continuous uninterrupted operation of the
systems.
6. Measures to be taken to prevent damage due to settlement of buildings,
structures, paving, other constructions and services outside the excavation
but within the area affected by dewatering.
7. Calculations for the design of the dewatering system.
A. Qualification Data: For Installer, land surveyor and professional engineer.
C. Existing Conditions: Using photographs or video recordings, show existing

conditions of adjacent construction and site improvements that might be
misconstrued as damage caused by dewatering operations. Submit before Work
begins.
D. Record Drawings: Identify locations and depths of capped wells and well points and
other abandoned-in-place dewatering equipment.
E. Submit to the Construction Manager and Engineer 2 copies of any required permits
for disposal of water prior to installation.
KEO/21-7387-0004 31 2319 / 2 Dewatering

A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer that has specialized in design of

dewatering systems and dewatering work.
A. Project-Site Information: A geotechnical report has been prepared for this Project
and is available for information only. The opinions expressed in this report are
those of a geotechnical engineer and represent interpretations of subsoil
conditions, tests, and results of analyses conducted by a geotechnical engineer.
Owner is not responsible for interpretations or conclusions drawn from this data.
1. Make additional test borings and conduct other exploratory operations

necessary for dewatering according to the performance requirements.
2. The geotechnical report is referenced elsewhere in Project Manual.
B. Survey Work: Engage a qualified land surveyor or professional engineer to survey

adjacent existing buildings, structures, and site improvements; establish exact
elevations at fixed points to act as benchmarks. Clearly identify benchmarks and
record existing elevations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Dewatering Systems shall provide dry, stable conditions for subsequent operations
within the excavations.
B. Design shall ensure no critical amounts of soil, sand or silt are removed during the
execution of work and no damage occurs to adjacent buildings, structures,
services, other constructions or other work.
C. Dewatering Performance: Design, furnish, install, test, operate, monitor, and

maintain dewatering system of sufficient scope, size, and capacity to control
hydrostatic pressures and to lower, control, remove, and dispose of ground water
and permit excavation and construction to proceed on dry, stable subgrades.
1. Design dewatering system, including comprehensive engineering analysis by

a qualified professional engineer.
2. Continuously monitor and maintain dewatering operations to ensure erosion
control, stability of excavations and constructed slopes, prevention of flooding
in excavation, and prevention of damage to subgrades and permanent
structures.
3. Prevent surface water from entering excavations by grading, dikes, or other
means.
4. Accomplish dewatering without damaging existing buildings, structures, and
site improvements adjacent to excavation.
5. Remove dewatering system when no longer required for construction.
KEO/21-7387-0004 31 2319 / 3 Dewatering

D. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing Authorities Having Jurisdiction
notification regulations before beginning dewatering. Comply with water- and
debris-disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine the site, the surrounding vicinity, including structures, and the data on
subsurface conditions for determination of the procedures and equipment required
to perform the work of this section.
B. Examine the Works and advise the Engineer in writing of any conditions detrimental
to the execution of the work of this Section. The absence of any such notification
will be taken to constitute the Contractor’s acceptance of conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Complete submittals and obtain required approvals before commencing the works.
B. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage
created by dewatering operations.
1. Prevent surface water and subsurface or ground water from entering

excavations, from ponding on prepared subgrades, and from flooding site or
surrounding area.
2. Protect subgrades and foundation soils from softening and damage by rain or
water accumulation.
C. Install dewatering system to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets,

walks, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities.

facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.
Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required
by authorities having jurisdiction.
D. Provide temporary grading to facilitate dewatering and control of surface water.
E. Protect and maintain temporary erosion and sedimentation controls, which are
specified during dewatering operations.
F. Conduct survey and document conditions of buildings within area likely to be

affected by de-watering, prior to commencement of operations, and photograph
existing conditions, identifying irregularities.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install the dewatering systems in accordance with shop drawings and approved
method statement. Keep the Engineer advised of any changes made to
KEO/21-7387-0004 31 2319 / 4 Dewatering

accommodate field conditions and, on completion of the installation of the
dewatering system revise and resubmit as-built shop drawings, to reflect same.
B. Install dewatering system utilizing wells, well points, or similar methods complete
with pump equipment, standby power and pumps, filter material gradation, valves,
appurtenances, water disposal, and surface-water controls.
1. Space well points or wells at intervals required to provide sufficient

dewatering.
2. Use filters or other means to prevent pumping of fine sands or silts from the
subsurface.
C. Place dewatering system into operation to lower water to specified levels before
excavating below ground-water level.
D. Provide sumps, sedimentation tanks, and other flow-control devices as required by

E. Provide standby equipment on-site, installed and available for immediate operation,
to maintain dewatering on continuous basis if any part of system becomes
inadequate or fails.
3.4 OPERATION
A. Operate system continuously until drains, sewers, and structures have been
constructed and fill materials have been placed or until dewatering is no longer
required.
B. Operate the dewatering systems as necessary to lower the ground-water level in

excavations to provide stable, dry conditions for the substructure constructions.
Continue dewatering in any area and below any level until the weight of the
reinforced concrete constructions thereon adequately and safely, by a margin of at
least 50%, balances the hydrostatic pressure generated by the ground water at its
anticipated normal level. The Engineer will determine the timing of the termination
of operation for each part of the dewatering system. The temporary filling with sand
of pits etc., at the Contractor’s expense including subsequent sand removal and
cleaning, will be considered as a means of permitting earlier termination of
localized dewatering to low levels.
C. Prevent surface water and subsurface or groundwater from flowing into the
excavations or flooding the project site and surrounding area. Do not allow water to
accumulate in excavations.
D. During the final stages of excavation to lowest levels, and thereafter whilst
continuing dewatering the piezometric levels in the sub grade soils shall be
maintained at least 0.60 metres below the final excavation level to prevent soil
disturbance, the development of excessive unbalanced seepage gradients, and
potential loss of bearing support. Install devices to monitor groundwater levels
during this period to demonstrate compliance with these requirements.
E. Dispose of water removed by dewatering in a manner that avoids endangering

public health, property, and portions of work under construction or completed.
Dispose of water and sediment in a manner that avoids inconvenience to others. In
case the discharged ground water from pumping contains any presence of
KEO/21-7387-0004 31 2319 / 5 Dewatering
chemical and the percentage is more than the allowable set by Authorities Having
Jurisdiction, the water has to be treated before discharging to the outlet system.
The entire cost for treating the water and testing shall be borne by the contractor.
Dispose water in a manner to avoid inconvenience to others engaged in the site.
Provide sumps, sedimentation tanks, and other flow control devices as required by
governing authorities.
A. Observation Wells: Provide observation wells or piezometers, take measurements,

and maintain at least the minimum number indicated; additional observation wells
may be required by authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Observe and record daily elevation of ground water and piezometric water
levels in observation wells.
2. Repair or replace, within 24 hours, observation wells that become inactive,
damaged, or destroyed. In areas where observation wells are not functioning
properly, suspend construction activities until reliable observations can be
made. Add or remove water from observation-well risers to demonstrate that
observation wells are functioning properly.
3. Fill observation wells, remove piezometers, and fill holes when dewatering is
completed.
B. Survey-Work Benchmarks: Resurvey benchmarks regularly interval (time interval

as approved by the Engineer) during dewatering and maintain an accurate log of
surveyed elevations for comparison with original elevations. Promptly notify
Architect if changes in elevations occur or if cracks, sags, or other damage is
evident in adjacent construction.
C. Provide continual observation to ensure that subsurface soils are not being
removed by the dewatering operation.
D. Prepare reports of observations.
3.6 REMOVAL
A. Remove dewatering systems or parts thereof upon completion of operation as per

the instructions and approval of Engineer.
B. Remove dewatering system from Project site on completion of dewatering. Plug or

fill well holes with sand or cut off and cap wells a minimum of 900 mm below
overlying construction.
C. Clean and make good to the satisfaction of the Engineer any items disturbed by the
dewatering system installations, operation and removals.
3.7 PROTECTION
A. Protect and maintain dewatering system during dewatering operations.
B. Promptly repair damages to adjacent facilities caused by dewatering.
KEO/21-7387-0004 31 2319 / 6 Dewatering

END OF SECTION
KEO/21-7387-0004 31 2319 / 7 Dewatering

SECTION 31 2333
TRENCH EXCAVATION, PIPE INSTALLATION AND BACKFILL
PART 1 GENERAL

Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies trench excavation, pipe installation and backfilling

operations and includes, but is not limited to, the following:
1. General requirements
2. Submittals and samples
3. Quality Control
4. Granular pipe surround
5. Concrete pipe surround
6. Suitable backfill material
7. Geotextile fabric
8. Buried marking tape
9. Service protection ducts
10. Marker posts
11. Trial holes
12. Temporary fencing and flagging
13. Trench support and stability
14. Pipe installation
15. Backfilling
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete

B. Section 31 10 00 - Site Clearing
C. Section 31 20 00 - Earthmoving
D. Section 31 50 00 - Excavation Support and Protection
1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. The following definitions shall pertain to words or phrases as utilised in this

Section.
KEO/21-7387-0004 31 2333/ 1 Trench Excavation, Pipe Installation and Backfill

1. “Trench excavation” means excavation in all materials of whatever nature
encountered for trenches into which pipes, ducts or cables are to be laid,
or appurtenances constructed.
2. “Pipe” means pipe or pipes, bends, fittings, junctions and other specials
and fittings and includes joints, jointing parts and materials.
3. “Formation level” means the designated bottom of the excavation
4. “Pipe surround” shall mean that material which is directly below, around
and above the pipe.
5. “MDD” shall mean maximum dry density.
6. “OMC” shall mean optimum moisture content.
7. “Stanks” shall mean concrete barriers placed in granular pipe surround.
8. “Agglomerated particles” shall mean a number of individual particles
gathered into a ball or mass.
1.5 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. The Contractor shall comply with the following requirements, unless otherwise
approved by the Engineer.
1. No trees or shrubs shall be disturbed without the written consent of the

Engineer.
2. Blasting is not permitted.
3. Continuous temporary fencing suitable to protect the general public
(particularly children) shall be provided to enclose all trenches and
excavations located in or near urban areas.
4. The Contractor shall fully support the sides of all trench excavations,
unless the sides are stepped back at a safe and stable slope.
a. The Contractor shall furnish, before commencement of excavation

for any trench, drawings showing all details of the sheeting and
bracing he proposes to use, together with all relevant calculations
prepared by a qualified structural engineer.
b. Where the Contractor proposes to excavate with stepped side
slopes instead of providing sheeting, shoring, etc., the Contractor
shall furnish a stability report prepared by a competent soils
engineer, together with all relevant calculations, demonstrating the
sufficiency of his proposals.
c. No excavation work shall commence until the Engineer’s consent
has been obtained.
i Such consent shall in no way relieve the Contractor from
any of his contractual obligations and responsibilities.
5. Trial holes shall be carried out as necessary, to confirm existing soil
conditions and determine exact location of utilities or other obstructions
a. Excavations shall be carried out by hand where required or
instructed by the Engineer, to locate and avoid damage to utilities
encountered during the excavation work.
6. Line and level of trenches shall be as shown on the Drawings, unless
otherwise instructed by the Engineer.
a. Before commencing the trench excavations, the route of the
trench shall be pegged out accurately and the existing ground
level surveyed and recorded, as agreed with the Engineer.
i The method utilised to maintain line and level of pipelines
shall be subject to the Engineer’s approval.
b. If obstructions are encountered during excavation, the Engineer
will make necessary changes on the drawings and issue the
amended drawings to the Contractor.
i The Contractor shall not make any deviation from the
specified lines or levels, without the written approval of the
Engineer.
ii Unless instructed by the Engineer, any deviation proposed
in line and / or grade, along with any additional thrust
blocks, valves, air and vacuum assemblies, blow off
assemblies, extra pipe lengths, manholes or other
appurtenances which may be required, shall be at the cost
of the Contractor.
7. When the work is carried out adjacent to or across the line of existing
services, the Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining all services
and utilities.
a. The Contractor shall provide all necessary support or slings to

maintain existing services, unless otherwise agreed by the
Engineer.
b. If any utilities are disturbed or damaged, the Contractor shall
immediately notify the relevant authority.
c. The Contractor shall not undertake repairs without the
authorisation of the concerned authority.
d. All costs for such works shall be at the Contractor’s expense.
e. If repairs are carried out by the concerned utility authority, the
Contractor shall reimburse all costs related to such work.
8. All excavated materials shall be used in the backfill, unless the material is
found to be unsuitable.
a. All suitable excavated material not directly incorporated in the

work shall be stockpiled for re-use, in areas approved by the
Engineer.
b. Soil utilised for landscaping or agricultural purposes shall be
stockpiled separately
c. Unsuitable materials shall be removed and disposed of by the
Contractor, at his own expense.
d. Any temporary storage alongside the trench excavation shall be to
stable slopes and heights and deposited in a manner to avoid any
damage and to cause as little inconvenience as possible.

e. The screening of excavated trench material will not be permitted
on site, without the written approval of the Engineer.
9. A minimum clear carriage way width shall be maintained for vehicular
traffic as agreed with Engineer.
10. Bottom of the trenches shall be properly trimmed off and compacted to
provide a firm and uniform bearing at formation level.
a. If loose or unsuitable soil is encountered at formation level, such

material shall be removed as directed by the Engineer and
replaced with the designated pipe surround material.
11. Only approved granular pipe surround or approved concrete pipe
surround may be utilized as bedding and haunching for the pipe.
a. Pipes shall be placed in granular surround, unless otherwise

noted.
12. Trench excavation shall not be permitted until the pipes and fittings to be
laid in the trench are available on Site. The length of excavation in
advance of pipe laying may be limited by the Engineer.
13. The minimum trench width for single line pipes shall be as indicated on
the drawings, unless otherwise instructed by the Engineer.
a. Minimum spacing between two or more pipes in the same trench

(laid in parallel with similar invert level) shall be 500mm.
b. Minimum trench width for conduits and cables shall be made in
accordance with the requirements of the relevant utility authority.
14. If the Engineer considers that the Contractor is not complying with the
foregoing requirements, the Engineer may not permit further trench
excavation until he is satisfied with the pipe laying, pipe testing and
backfilling of the excavations.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Approval
1. The Contractor shall submit sufficient information to the Engineer, prior to

purchase, according to Division 1 – General Requirements, in order to
verify compliance with the specifications. Such information shall include
at least the following:
a. Manufacturers name.
b. Suppliers name.
c. Product name (if applicable)
d. Product description
e. Manufacturers technical data
f. Storage instructions
g. Application instructions

h. Suppliers name (borrow materials)
i. Borrow pit location
j. Material name (if applicable)
k. Borrow material description
l. MDD and OMC
m. Liquid and Plastic Limits
n. Sieve analysis
o. Percentage of water soluble salts
p. Test results as requested by the Engineer.
B. Samples
1. Samples shall be supplied in sufficient quantities for at least the following

products, or as requested by the Engineer.
a. Granular pipe surround

b. Borrow pit material (if required)
c. Excavated material (if requested)
d. Geotextile
e. Buried marking tape
f. Marker post
g. Pipe wrap
h. Filler board
i. Temporary fencing
j. Continuous flagging
2. Sampling of soils shall be conducted under the Engineer’s supervision.
C. Method Statement
1. The Contractor shall provide method statements meeting the

requirements of Division 1 – General Requirements, for at least the
following activities or as requested by the Engineer.
a. Temporary Fencing (as required)

b. General Trench Excavation
c. Pipe Installation
d. Placement of pipe surround
e. Placement of backfill and compaction.
f. Trench excavation and reinstatement in roads.
D. Shop Drawings
1. The Contractor shall submit excavation drawings according to Division 1

– General Requirements for at least the following items.
a. Excavation drawings showing temporary fencing and typical
trench cross sections showing stepped or sloped sides.
b. Shop drawings for any sheet piling, bracing or shoring.
E. Special Reports
1. Stability investigations and report for stepped or sloped excavations by a

qualified geotechnical Engineer.
2. Design calculation for any bracing, shoring or sheet piling required for
excavations, by a qualified Engineer.
1.7 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Prior to dispatch from the factory, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer, in
sufficient time to allow the Engineer or his representatives to inspect and test
products, if so desired.
1. All notifications shall be made by written “Inspection Requests” in

accordance with Division 1 – General Requirements.
a. An advance copy may be faxed to the Engineers office, but the
original must arrive before the scheduled day of inspection.
2. Minimum notification times shall be as follows:
a. 24 hours on site.
b. 72 hours for other areas within UAE.
c. 2 weeks outside of UAE
B. “Inspection Requests” shall be submitted to the Engineer during the on site

installation work prior to proceeding with at least the following activities.
Minimum notification time shall be 24 hours.
1. Start of excavation in new area.

2. Casting of blinding concrete or placement of bedding.
3. Placing of pipe surround or casting of concrete surround.
C. Testing Laboratory
1. Testing of all materials shall be carried out by a suitably equipped site

laboratory or in an independent laboratory as described in Division 1 –
General Requirements.
2. During the course of the work, tests shall be carried out under the
supervision of the Engineer, to:
a. Identify fill materials, and determine suitability.

b. Determine compaction characteristics of fill materials.
c. Determine moisture content, and field density.
d. The allowable soil bearing load shall be verified by dynamic cone
penetration tests, or as directed by the Engineer.

e. Determine compaction fraction and grading for granular pipe
surround.
f. Concrete tests as specified in Section 03 30 00.
3. The Contractor shall maintain a daily log of all tests carried out for the
Engineer’s review.
D. Test Methods
1. Compaction tests to establish maximum dry density for all soils shall be
determined by BS 1377: Part 4: Method 3.5/3.6.
2. In situ density of compacted soils shall be determined by BS 1377: Part 9
Method 2.1 or 2.2 (as appropriate).
3. Cone penetration test (TRL Method or BS 1377).
4. Compaction fraction for granular surround shall as determined below:
E. Determination of Compaction Fraction
1. General
a. A representative sample of pipe surround material (at least 25kg)
shall be obtained, under the Engineer’s supervision.
2. Apparatus Required
a. An open ended rigid cylinder 250mm3mm long and
150mm6mm internal diameter.
b. Metal rammer with striking face of 40mm dia. 0.5mm and
weighing 1000gm to 1100gm
c. Straight edge
d. Rule
e. Balance (minimum 12kg capacity)
3. Test Method
a. Obtain a representative sample more than sufficient to fill the
cylinder (about 12kg).
i The moisture content of the sample shall not differ
significantly from that of the main body of material at the
time of its use in the trench.
b. Hold the cylinder firmly down on a flat surface to prevent
movement and gently pour the sample into it, from a height of
approximately 50mm above the top of the cylinder, loosely and
without tamping.
c. Strike off the top surface level with the top of the cylinder and
remove all surplus spilled material.
d. Lift the cylinder up clear of its contents and place on a clean area.
e. Quarter the material and place one quarter of the material back
into the cylinder and tamp vigorously until no further compaction
can be obtained.
f. Repeat with the second quarter, tamping as before and so on for
the third and fourth quarter, tamping the final surface as level as
possible.
g. Measure down from the top of the cylinder to the surface of the
compacted material.
i Record the value to the nearest 1mm.
h. Divide the measured distance by the height of the cylinder
(measured to the nearest 1mm).
i. Report the value as the compaction fraction to the nearest 0.01.
F. Testing
1. Contractor shall adjust his operations so as to permit time to make tests

and shall excavate and fill such holes as may be required for sampling
and testing.
2. A subsequent layer cannot be placed until the density of the preceding
layer has been tested and approved.
3. At least one field density test shall be conducted in each layer, for every
100 linear metres of pipe trench backfilled, unless otherwise agreed by
the Engineer.
4. At least one field density test shall be conducted for each layer, adjacent
to each structure, unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer.
5. At least one compaction test shall be conducted for every 30 field density
tests conducted, or as directed by the Engineer due to changes in the
soil.
6. Testing frequency for pipe surround material shall be as directed by the
Engineer.
1.8 MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS - DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Delivery, storage and handling shall be according to the manufacturer’s

recommendations, together with the following provisions:
1. Transportation, handling and storage shall at all times be performed in a

manner to avoid product damage.
2. Only nylon slings shall be allowed for lifting products. Steel chains,
clamps or cables shall not be allowed for lifting purposes, unless
a. Steel chains or cables may be allowed for securing products

during transport or storage, provided protective padding or timber
blocking is utilised.
3. Do not store products directly on ground, unless approved by the

Engineer.
a. Ensure suitable timber blocking is utilised to provide sufficient

support.
4. Where product manufacturer recommends storage under controlled
temperatures, the Contractor must provide an enclosed, insulated, cool
store maintained at the proper temperature (recommended by the
manufacturer) 24 hours a day.
5. If stored outside, cover products to prevent UV degradation, as

recommended by the manufacturer.
6. The Contractor shall visually inspect all products upon delivery and report
any damage to the Engineer.
a. Any products damaged during delivery, storage or installation

shall be marked by the Contractor and set aside.
b. Proposals for repair of any damaged products shall be submitted
in writing to the Engineer for approval.
c. No repairs to damaged products shall be attempted without the
Engineer’s approval.
d. Any damaged products deemed unsuitable for repair by the
Engineer shall be removed from site and replaced at the
Contractors expense.
B. Soils shall be stockpiled as follows:
1. At least 2.0m away from edge of trench.
2. Granular pipe surround shall be stockpiled in sufficient quantities and in a

manner to avoid segregation and contamination.
1.9 SITE INVESTIGATION
A. See Appendix I issued along with this Package.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPE BEDDING, HAUNCHING AND SURROUND MATERIAL
A. Granular material shall be free draining, hard, clean, chemically stable,

crushed aggregate free of agglomerated particles, meeting the following
requirements, unless approved otherwise by the Engineer.
1. 10mm nominal size for pipes 800mm diameter and less.

a. Maximum particle size: 16mm
b. Maximum percentage passing 5mm sieve: 10%
2. 20mm nominal size for pipes over 800mm diameter
a. Maximum particle size: 28mm

b. Maximum percentage passing 10mm sieve: 5%
3. Minimum compaction shall be 90%.
B. Granular pipe surround for flexible pipes shall be Class I A in accordance with
ASTM D2321.
C. Selected sandy soil shall be clean native sand free of rocks, vegetation,
foreign materials and large agglomerated pieces of sand.
D. Natural soil bedding shall be clean excavated material free of rocks and
foreign materials.
E. Concrete pipe surround shall be Grade C20 complying with Section 03 30 00.
2.2 BACKFILL MATERIAL
A. Suitable material placed above the pipe surround for general trench backfill
(not within paved roadways or paved parking areas) shall conform to the
following requirements, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
1. Maximum particle size: Comply with Section 31 20 00

2. Liquid Limit: 25 Maximum
3. Plasticity Index: 6 Maximum
B. If the excavated material is deemed to be unsuitable or insufficient, for
general backfilling, borrow material (non-load bearing) conforming to Section
31 20 00 shall be utilised.
C. Backfill material below roadways or parking areas shall be approved sub-base

or road base material as specified in Section 31 20 00.
2.3 GEOTEXTILE
A. Geotextiles for granular pipe surround shall comply with the requirements of
Table 1 below, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
B. The fabric shall be non-woven consisting of long chain synthetic polymeric

filaments or yarns formed into a stable network, such that the filaments or
yarns retain their relative position to each other when subjected to the
proposed use within the limits of physical characteristics required, as specified
herein.
C. The geotextile shall be inert to commonly encountered chemicals in the soil

and water and shall contain an ultra violet light inhibitor.
D. The Contractor shall provide to the Engineer a certificate stating the name of
manufacturer, product name, style number, chemical composition of filaments
or yarns and other pertinent information to describe fully the geotextile.
E. Geotextile shall be subject to sampling and testing, to verify conformance with

the specification.

1. The frequency of the testing shall be as directed by the Engineer.
2. All samples shall be collected and tested in the presence of the
Engineer in a laboratory approved by the Engineer.
F. Each lot of geotextile delivered to the site shall contain a certificate that the
material is in accordance with manufactures certification.
G. Each geotextile roll shall be wrapped with a material that will protect the
geotextile from damage due to shipment, water, sunlight and contaminants.
1. The wrapping shall be maintained during shipment and storage.

H. Geotextiles shall be transported and stored in accordance with the
manufacturers recommendations.
TABLE 1
Geotextiles for Granular Pipe surround
Criteria Standard Limits Units
Tensile strength (strip EN ISO 10319 or Min 6 KN/m
test) ASTM D5035
Puncture resistance EN ISO 12236 Min 1000 N
Pore size EN ISO 12956 Max 120 Microns
Water permeability EN ISO 60500-4 50 to 125 litres/m²/Se
10cm water column c
Weight EN 965 Min 130 G/m²
2.4 MARKING TAPE (BURIED)
A. Polyethylene plastic tape with metallic trace wire or metallic strip for electronic
detection meeting the following criteria:
1. Colour: Yellow or as directed by the Engineer

2. Nominal width: 150mm
3. Nominal thickness: 100 microns
4. Minimum longitudinal tensile strength: 100kg/sq.cm
5. Minimum longitudinal elongation (at break): 300%
6. “Sewage”, “Stormwater” or “Treated Effluent”, as appropriate, in
permanent black lettering (30mm height) and 2.0 meter spacing to be
imprinted on the tape in Arabic and English.
2.5 SERVICE PROTECTION DUCTS
A. Protection ducts shall be unplasticised polyvinyl chloride (uPVC) pipe,

minimum 150mm diameter.
1. All pipes and fittings shall be new and unused.

2. Pipe shall be free from visible cracks, holes, foreign materials, blisters,
deleterious materials, wrinkles and dents.
3. Plastic pipe shall be delivered to the site in unbroken bundles or rolls,
packaged in such a manner as to provide adequate protection to pipe
and pipe ends, either threaded or plain, from damage or exposure to
sunlight.
4. All plastic pipe fittings to be installed shall be moulded fittings,
manufactured from the same material as the pipe, and shall be push fit
type with neoprene rubber gasket.
5. No site made bends will be permitted.
2.6 FILLER BOARD
A. Filler board utilised to form discontinuities in concrete pipe surround shall be

one of the following:
1. Bituminous fibre board

2. Styrofoam.
B. A transverse expansion/movement joint shall be provided at each pipe joint of
compressible expansion joint filler, shaped exactly to the shape of the pipe
and the full extent of the concrete. Unless detailed otherwise on the drawings,
the thickness of this expansion/movement joint shall be a minimum of 25mm
except in the case of full concrete surrounds, where the minimum thickness
shall be as follows:
1. Pipes up to 300mm nominal diameter - 25mm

2. Pipes 301 – 600mm nominal diameter - 50mm
3. Pipes 601 – 1200mm nominal diameter - 75mm
4. Pipes greater than 1200 mm nominal diameter - 100 mm or as
otherwise specified.
C. For spigot and socket type pipes, the expansion joint in the concrete shall be
aligned with the face of the socket. For flexible detachable sleeve type joints,
the expansion joint filler material shall be positioned on one side of the
coupling as shown on the drawings, but the filler and concrete bed or
surround shall only be placed after the application of the specified corrosion
prevention system has been applied to the pipe ends and joint. No steel
reinforcement shall pass through the concrete expansion joint.
2.7 PIPELINE MARKER POSTS
A. Pipeline Marker Posts shall be fabricated from aluminium alloy components

and shall conform to the following requirements.
1. Size and length shall be as shown on drawings.

2. Tubing shall be BS 573 AND BS EN 755 Grade 6063 Alloy.
3. All cast parts shall be Aluminium Alloy to BS EN 1706 Grade LM-6.
4. Minimum wall thickness for tubing shall be 5mm.
5. A welded bar shall be provided for casting into concrete foundation.
6. All welding shall be Tungsten Inert Gas (TIG).
7. Entire assembly shall be chemically treated and polyester power
coated (120 mic. nominal thickness) and hot cured.
a. Colour shall be as directed by the Engineer.

8. Pipe line diameter (mm) shall be labelled in English and Arabic along
with the following appropriate service designation:
9. Sewage pumping main.
10. Lettering shall be made from “High-Intensity” reflective sheeting.
a. Minimum height of lettering: 70mm
b. Colour shall be white.
2.8 PIPE WRAP
A. Pipe wrap placed around pipe joints or around pipes at stanks shall be
suitable self-adhesive waterproof membrane or other self–adhesive tape as
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 TRIAL HOLES
A. Trial holes shall be excavated well ahead of the trench excavation operation
to depths sufficient to determine the soil conditions, and confirm the locations
of underground utilities or other obstructions.
1. The Contractor shall arrange for the refilling and reinstatement of trial
holes to be carried out immediately after the required information is
obtained.
2. Reinstatement of trial holes shall be approved by the Engineer.
3. Excavation and reinstatement of trial holes shall be carried out at the
Contractor’s cost.
3.2 CONTROL OF WATER
A. All activities shall be carried out in dry conditions.
3.3 TEMPORARY FENCING AND FLAGGING
A. Continuous temporary fencing suitable to protect the general public

(particularly children) shall be provided to enclose all trenches and
excavations in or near urban areas.
1. Temporary fencing shall be provided at no extra cost to the Client.
2. Temporary fencing shall not be removed without the Engineer's

permission, which will not be given until the trench excavation has
been completely refilled.
B. Continuous flagging or barricades shall be provided along both sides of

trenches in rural or undeveloped areas, to protect vehicular traffic.
1. Continuous trench spoil at least 1.0m high may be accepted in lieu of

flagging with the Engineer’s approval.
C. The Contractor shall also provide for the safety of animals which may gain
entry to the construction area and shall ensure that all open excavations,
access routes and steep or loose slopes arising from the Contractor's
operations are adequately fenced and protected.
3.4 TRENCH SUPPORT AND STABILITY
A. The Contractor shall fully support the sides of all trench excavations, unless
the sides are stepped back at a safe and stable slope.
1. Support shall include the use of steel sheet piles or other suitable
sheeting and shoring to prevent any fall or run from any portion of the
ground outside the excavation into the trench and to prevent settlement
or damage to structures or utilities adjacent to the excavation.
2. The supporting installation shall be designed to permit gradual

withdrawal in successive lifts corresponding to the placements of each
pipe support layer during the placement of the pipe surround.
a. Supports shall not be removed without the permission of the

Engineer.
b. Removal shall be conducted in such a manner as to minimise
the danger of collapse.
c. All voids formed behind the supports shall be carefully filled and
compacted.
d. Every precaution shall be taken by the Contractor to prevent
slips and falls of earth and other materials in excavations.
3. Contractor shall be deemed to have made his own allowance for:
a. Shoring up the sides of trenches

b. Any extra excavation necessary to provide space for such
support and for any other working space.
4. If in the opinion of the Engineer, the support provided by the Contractor
is not satisfactory, the Contractor shall provide trench support as
directed by the Engineer.
a. The absence of the Engineer’s direction or action by the

Contractor in accordance with the direction of the Engineer shall
not relieve the Contractor of his obligations under the Contract.
5. Underpinning, supports or other protection measures required for
buildings, structures and apparatus or adjoining excavations, shall be
provided by the Contractor as approved by the Engineer.
a. If directed by the Engineer, a method statement shall be

submitted by the Contractor for the Engineer’s approval.
6. If for any reason any portion of the trench excavation shall give way,
the Contractor shall, at his own expense, take all necessary remedial
measures, including the excavation and removal of all soil thereby
disturbed.
B. Where the Contractor elects (and is permitted by the Engineer) to execute

trench excavations with stepped sides instead of providing support as
aforesaid, the stepped sides shall only be excavated to stable slopes and
heights as recommended in the Contractors approved stability reports.
1. Maximum height of any step shall be 1.5m.
2. Maximum height to width ratio of any step shall be 1.0 to 1.0.
3.5 TRENCH FORMATION
A. When excavating to designated formation levels or to specified limits, the

Contractor shall not excavate the last 150mm until immediately before
commencing construction work, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
1. If, the Contractor excavates the last 150mm before he is ready or able
to commence the work, he may be required to remove and replace
additional material as directed by the Engineer.
a. Any such further excavation and replacement of additional
foundation material ordered by the Engineer shall be at the cost
of the Contractor.
B. Should the trench bottom, while acceptable to the Engineer at the time of his
inspection, subsequently become puddled, soft or loose due to exposure or
flooding during the progress of the works, the Contractor shall remove such
damaged softened or loosened material and replace it with approved material
as directed by the Engineer.
1. Any such further excavation and replacement of additional foundation

material ordered by the Engineer shall be at the cost of the Contractor.
C. Any stones or flints greater than 50mm in size shall be picked out of the
trench bottom. Any holes so formed shall be filled in with suitable material
and trimmed to the correct level.
D. All shattered and loose materials shall be removed from the bottom of the
trench excavations so that the pipe surround rests on a solid and clean
foundation.
E. The trench formation shall be compacted to a minimum of 95% MDD as

determined by BS 1377: Part 4: Method 3.5/3.6, unless otherwise approved
by the Engineer.
F. In-Situ density tests shall be carried out to BS 1377; Part 9: Method 2.1 or 2.2
as appropriate.
3.6 TRENCH WIDTHS FOR FLEXIBLE PIPES - ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Because flexible pipes rely in part on the surrounding soil to resist the
development of excessive deflections, it may be necessary, where trenches
pass through soft ground, to increase the trench width and replace the soft
native soil with imported material, or to introduce other measures to limit the
pipe deflection. All such measures shall be carried out as the work proceeds
and the Contractor shall be deemed to have included for the cost of all such
work in his Tender.
B. The Contractor shall carry out in situ measurements to establish the

deformation modulus of the native soil at the installation level of the pipe,
using a Static Cone Penetrometer in advance of the trench excavation.
Minimum trench widths shall be in accordance with the Typical Drawings
unless such penetrometer tests indicate a modulus of less than 9 kg/cm2 for
the native soil, then one of the following forms of construction shall be
employed, as agreed by the Engineer. The Contractor shall be deemed to
have included for the cost of all such work in his Tender.
1. Concrete haunching shall be provided between the pipe and the trench
walls.
2. Trench sheeting shall be left in place below a level of 300mm above
the top of the pipe.
3. Precast concrete (or other approved material) slabs, having a height of
500mm or one pipe diameter, whichever is greater, shall be placed
vertically in the granular bedding material at the sides of the pipe mid-
way between the sides of the pipe and of the trench.
4. As an alternative to any of the above measures where considerations
of available space, practicality and economics permit, the trench width
may be increased to at least the minimum value obtained from the
following table.
Trench Width Criteria for Flexible Pipes
Static Cone Penetrometer Minimum Trench Width

Modulus (kg/cm2)
Less than 9 2.5 x Pipe Diameter
Notes:
a. Where the static cone penetrometer test value is less than 3 kg/cm 2 a
construction method other than wide trench will normally be required.
3.7 EXCESS EXCAVATION
A. Care shall be taken to prevent excess excavation beyond designated levels or

limits.
1. Any excess excavation from the bottom or sides of the trench shall be
filled with the designated pipe surround material, unless otherwise

2. The Contractor shall utilise or remove from the Site all material
resulting from excess excavation.
3. Any additional cost due to over excavation shall be at the Contractor’s
expense.
3.8 SPECIAL BEDDING ARRANGEMENTS
A. Where soil is deemed to be unstable, special arrangements as mentioned

below, may be required by the Engineer.
1. Additional soils investigation and analysis

2. Replacement of unsuitable soil by granular fill or concrete.
3. Soil improvement methods
4. Reinforced Concrete slab foundation
5. Piled foundations.
B. No special arrangements shall be made without the Engineer’s approval.
3.9 TRENCHES OPENINGS
A. Trench excavation and backfill shall be carried out expeditiously.
1. Refilling and surface reinstatement of trench excavations shall be

commenced and completed as soon as reasonably practicable, after
the pipes have been laid and jointed.
2. Pipe laying shall follow closely upon the progress of trench excavation.
3. Contractor shall not permit unreasonably excessive lengths of trench

excavation to remain open while awaiting testing of the pipeline.
a. Trench excavation may not proceed more than 200m ahead of

the pipe laying operations, unless approved otherwise by the
Engineer.
B. The Contractor shall take precautions to prevent flotation of pipes in locations

where open trench excavations may become flooded. This may include the
partial refilling of the trench leaving pipe joints exposed for tests of the joints,
or any other methods approved by the Engineer.
1. If floatation has occurred, the Contractor shall remove and replace the
pipes after drying the trench, unless otherwise agreed with the
Engineer.
a. All additional work will be carried out at the Contractor’s cost.
C. If the Engineer considers that the Contractor is not complying with any of the
foregoing requirements, he may prohibit further trench excavation until he is
satisfied with the progress of laying and testing of pipes and refilling of trench
excavation.

3.10 PLACING PIPE SURROUND
A. Pipe bedding, haunching and surround shall be of the type shown in the
Typical Drawings for rigid pipe and flexible pipe, unless otherwise approved
by the Engineer.
B. Select Sandy Soil Pipe surround shall be placed as follows when required by
the Typical Drawings, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
1. Select Sandy Soil shall be placed in shallow lifts and compacted to

minimum 85 percent MDD.
2. Care shall be taken to prevent movement of the pipe when compacting

and surround shall be brought up on each side of the pipe equally.
C. Pipe shown to be bedded in Natural Soil in the Typical Drawings shall be set
in a minimum of 102mm thick bed of Natural Soil Bedding lightly compacted.
1. Bell holes shall be provided to ensure that the pipe barrel is properly
supported.
D. Granular Pipe Surround shall be placed as follows when required by the

Typical Drawings, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer:
1. Approved geotextile shall be placed completely around all granular

pipe surround.
a. The trench formation shall be smooth and free from debris.
b. The geotextile shall be placed loosely with no wrinkles or folds.
c. Void spaces shall not be left between the geotextile and ground
surface.
d. Successive sheets of geotextile shall be overlapped a minimum
of 300mm with the upstream sheet overlapping the downstream
sheet.
e. The geotextile shall be folded over the pipe surround material in
a manner to produce a minimum overlap of 500mm.
f. If the geotextile is damaged during installation or aggregate
placement, a geotextile patch shall be placed over the damaged
area extending a minimum distance of 300mm beyond the
damaged area.
g. Placement of bedding material shall proceed immediately
following the placement of geotextile.
2. Granular pipe surround shall be placed across the full width of the
excavated trench.
3. Soft spots at the bottom of the trench excavation shall be removed to a
depth of 300mm or to a solid ground whichever is less and the resulting
voids shall be backfilled with approved granular pipe surround.
4. The thickness of granular pipe surround shall be 200mm minimum,

below the pipe barrels.

5. Granular pipe surround material shall be compacted in layers not
exceeding 200mm with minimum one pass of plate vibrator or other
approved equivalent mechanical method.
a. Hand tamping shall only be permitted where insufficient space is

available to allow the use of mechanical equipment.
b. Granular pipe surround shall be brought up equally on both
sides of the pipe and carefully compacted in layers not
exceeding 200mm thickness.
c. Ensure pipe surround is in contact with the under side of the
pipe barrel.
d. The pipe surround material shall extend to at least 300mm
above the crown of pipe.
6. Particular care shall be given to avoid damage to pipe or geotextile.
7. Granular pipe surround shall be placed around the pipes immediately

after joining.
8. The placing and compaction of backfill material shall be carried out in

sequence with the removal of trench supports, unless the Contractor is
instructed by the Engineer to leave them in place.
E. Concrete Pipe Surround:
1. Where indicated on the Drawings, or ordered by the Engineer, pipe

shall be encased with Grade C20 concrete in accordance with the
details shown on the Drawings.
2. Concrete shall not be placed until the joints at each end of the pipe
have been completed.
a. All joints shall be wrapped with a suitable self-adhesive

membrane at least 300mm wide, to prevent grout entry into the
joint.
b. The pipes shall be initially supported above the trench bottom on
at least two purpose built pre-cast concrete saddles.
c. The blocks shall be laid accurately to line and level and covered
with 1.5mm thick waterproof sheeting beneath the pipe barrel or
two hard wood wedges of approved pattern.
3. Concrete surround shall be placed in a sufficient number of lifts to

prevent pipes from floating or moving.
a. The concrete shall first be placed on one side of the pipe in

order to be worked under the pipe along its full length to ensure
that no voids develop.
b. The concrete shall then be brought up equally on both sides of
the pipe until the required level is reached.
4. If the surround is cast in one operation, measures shall be taken to

secure the pipe from floating or moving. These measures must be
approved by the Engineer prior to the start of the operation.
5. The continuity of the concrete pipe surround shall be broken at each

joint, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
6. Discontinuities in concrete pipe surround shall be provided over their

full cross sectional area at each pipe joint with approved filler board.
a. The thickness of filler board shall be:
i 18mm for pipe diameter less than 450mm

ii 36mm for pipe diameters 450-1200mm
iii 50mm for pipe diameters greater than 1200mm
7. Cure concrete with polythene sheeting for at least 24 hours,

immediately after placement.
3.11 GENERAL TRENCH BACKFILLING
A. General trench backfill pertains to all areas outside paved roadways and
paved parking areas.
1. These areas include, but are not limited to, service corridors,
landscaped areas, undeveloped areas, non-asphalted roads, lanes,
alleys and all private lands.
2. Backfilling of trenches shall commence as soon as practicable after the

pipe line works have been completed, tested and approved by the
Engineer.
3. No fill material shall be placed and no compaction shall be permitted

adjacent to concrete structures, until 70% of the designated
compressive concrete strength has been reached.
B. Suitable material for general trench backfill shall comply with the requirements
found in Part 2 of this Specification.
C. Any soils utilised for landscaping shall be replaced in their original position
and condition.
D. Backfill material shall be compacted to at least 90% MDD, as determined by

BS 1377: Part 4; Method 3.5/3.6.
1. In-situ density test shall be carried out to BS 1377: Part 9; Method 2.2.
2. Maximum thickness of each loose lift shall be 250mm.
3. Moisture content shall be maintained within the range of ±3% of the

optimum.
E. Testing
1. See Clause for “Quality Control” in Part 1 of this Section.

F. Allowable Tolerances
1. Finished non-paved surfaces: + 25 mm from specified level, unless

otherwise approved by the Engineer.
3.12 PIPE INSTALLATION
A. General Requirements
1. Contractor shall supply all necessary tools for cutting, chamfering,

jointing, testing and for any other requirement for satisfactory
installation of the pipe.
2. The Contractor shall furnish all necessary equipment for properly
lowering and placing sections of the pipe in the trench, without
damage.
3. Just before laying, each length of pipe shall be cleaned and inspected
for defects, both inside and outside.
4. Any damaged pipes or fittings shall be marked and put aside for repair.
a. Proposals for any pipe repairs shall be presented for the
Engineer’s approval, prior to action being taken.
b. Any specified material required for the repair of pipe, sheathing,
lining or coating shall be obtained by the Contractor and shall be
used in accordance with the Manufacturer’s recommendations.
c. All sheathed pipes shall be checked for continuity of the applied
protection by a "Holiday" detection unit.
d. Discontinuities and pinholes indicated by the test shall be
properly repaired.
e. All damages shall be repaired before installation.
5. The Contractor shall remove from the Site any pipe or appurtenance,
which in the opinion of the Engineer is so damaged as to be unfit for
incorporation in the Works.
6. Replacement for damaged pipes or fittings shall be at the Contractor’s
expense.
7. Each pipe shall be carefully lowered on to its prepared bed by means
of appropriate slings and tackle.
8. A recess shall be left in the prepared bed to permit lifting slings to be
withdrawn.
9. If the prepared bed is damaged, the pipe shall be raised and the bed
restored before pipe laying is continued.
10. In no case shall pipes be jointed before being lowered into position.
11. No pipe shall be dragged or rolled into place for lowering into the
trench.
12. Pipes shall be laid so that each one is in contact with the bed
throughout the length of its barrel.
a. The bed shall be cut away and removed at each socket or

sleeve to give a clearance of 50mm.
b. After the joint has been made bedding material shall be carefully
placed and hand compacted beneath the joint barrel to close
any voids left.
13. Pipes shall be laid with identification marks uppermost.
a. Bedding material shall be prevented from entering the joints.
b. Pipe shall be jointed in accordance with the manufacturers
recommendations except as modified in this Section.
14. Each Section of pipe shall be fitted together correctly and shall be laid
true to line and grade in accordance with the bench marks established
by the Contractor.
a. The bench mark shall be approved by the Engineer.
15. Any pipe which is not in true alignment, both vertically and horizontally,
or shows any undue settlement after laying, shall be taken up and
relaid correctly by the Contractor at his own expense.
16. For granular pipe surround, all adjustments in line and grade shall be
made by scraping away or filling and tamping under the barrel of the
pipe; not by wedging or blocking.
17. Spigot and socket pipes shall normally be laid with the socket end
upgrade.
18. Sub-soil water shall be kept below the joint when jointing. Pipes shall
be laid in straight lines, both in the horizontal and vertical planes,
unless deflected joints are approved by the Engineer.
a. For pipe lines laid in trenches, the permissible tolerance shall be
as follows, unless otherwise shown on the drawing or approved
by the Engineer.
i Vertical deviation: 3mm
ii Horizontal deviation from the centreline at any point:
12mm.
19. Whenever work ceases on any pipeline, the unfinished end shall be
securely closed with a tight fitting plug or cover, unless otherwise
directed by the Engineer.
20. Excavator buckets shall not be used to push joints home.
21. Pipe sections shall be so laid and fitted together that the pipeline will
have a smooth and uniform interior.
22. Pipeline shall be clean and unobstructed at the time of its completion
and acceptance.
23. If any damage should occur to any pipes through failure of the
Contractor to comply with these conditions, the damage shall be made
good at the Contractor's expense.
24. All pipelines adjoining structures shall have a flexible joint, as detailed
on the drawings, adjacent to each structure.
25. For pipeline jointing systems incorporating flexible jointing rings a gap

shall be left between the ends of the pipe, unless otherwise agreed by
the Engineer.
B. Joints
1. Requirements of this clause shall be read in conjunction with the

particular requirements specified elsewhere for joints of particular
kinds.
2. Joints shall be made in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions

and as specified herein.
3. Before making any joints the Contractor shall ensure that the interior of
each pipe or fitting is clean and that it remains clean.
4. Immediately before starting a joint, the Contractor shall clean the end
of each pipe to be joined and shall otherwise specially prepare the
ends for jointing as may be necessary for the particular kind of joint.
5. The Contractor shall use only the proper jointing materials (gaskets,
lubricants, nuts, bolts, washers, etc.) as specified for pipe service and
exposure conditions, as obtained from the designated supplier.
6. All joints shall be accurately made and shall be capable of passing the
designated tests for individual joints and for the completed pipeline as
may be specified.
7. Graphite grease shall be applied to the threads of bolts before

mechanical or flanged joints are made.
8. After completing a joint, any damaged paint or coating shall be

restored, and any metal joint which is not already coated shall be
cleaned and painted with two coats of pure epoxy paint suitable for the
application and approved by the Engineer. Additional external
protection of joints, where ordered by the Engineer, shall be carried out
as specified herein, under External Protection of Joints.
9. Anchorage of Joints at Bends and Discontinuities
a. Anchorage lugs shall be provided for socket, spigot fittings and

socket clamps and tie rods used on all pipes under pressure.
b. Concrete thrust blocks may be used in lieu of the above where
socket and spigot pipe is used below ground subject to the
availability of adequate space and approval of the Engineer.
10. External Protection of Joints
a. Unless otherwise specified, all metallic mechanical joints,

flanged joints, ferrule and saddle straps, in buried applications,
shall be protected on site by the cold application of an approved
tape wrap.
b. The application of tape with accessories and outwraps shall be
strictly in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations
and at no additional cost to the Ministry.
C. Closures and Short Sections:
1. For the purpose of reducing the angular deflections at pipe joints, and
for closure sections, the Contractor may be permitted to install pipe
sections of less than standard length, with the Engineers approval.
2. Closing pieces and short sections of pipe shall be installed by the

Contractor as deemed necessary in the field, at no additional cost to
the Ministry.
3. Contractor shall be responsible for taking the measurements required,

to determine the lengths of cut portions of pipes for insertion as closing
lengths in pipelines.
4. Pipe and methods of jointing shall be such that the locations of fittings
and lengths of pipe can be adjusted in the field to suit field conditions
and variations in stationing.
5. No extra payment will be made for such adjustments, nor for any
welding, couplings, fittings, or special lengths required to meet this
requirement.
6. A reasonable tolerance in the location of lines, fittings, and

appurtenances will be permitted by the Engineer, to enable the
minimum use of special lengths.
7. Cutting of pipes for inserting specials, fittings or closure pieces shall be

carried out in a professional manner with an approved cutting machine
described below in order to leave a smooth end at right angles to the
axis of the pipe.
a. Cutting Ring for ND 100 to 150
b. Cutting Chain for ND 100 to 450
c. Disc cutter for all diameters if approved by the Engineer.
d. The cut ends of all pipes shall be properly chamfered.
e. Only workers experienced in handling and cutting uPVC and

HDPE pipes shall be employed by the Contractor on this work.
f. The Contractor shall take every precaution to ensure that both

the measurements and the cutting of pipes are to the accuracy
required.
8. Should any errors occur, the Contractor shall remedy the same, as the
Engineer directs, at his own expense.
D. Deflection at Curves
1. If approved by the Engineer, a change of direction in either the

horizontal or vertical planes may be made by deflecting straight pipes,
provided the amount of joint deflection does not exceed 75% of the
manufacturers recommended maximum value and subject to
satisfactory performance of the joints.
2. Where a change of direction cannot be made by deflection at the joints

of ordinary straight pipes, bends shall be used.
a. Locations of such bends and other specials are indicated on the

Drawings and their exact positions will be determined by the
Contractor and approved by the Engineer.
b. All pressure pipelines shall be secured at all changes in

direction by concrete anchor blocks and or by the provision of
restrained joints.
E. Cleanliness of Pipelines:
1. Pipeline and chambers shall at all times be kept free of all silt, mortar,
debris, trash and other obstructions.
2. When work is not in progress, the open ends of the pipeline shall be
securely plugged with an approved watertight plug or stopper firmly
fixed to resist unauthorised removal.
3. Claw type plugs or any type liable to damage the pipe will not be
approved.
4. All such stoppers, plugs or caps shall be provided with a vent

incorporating a valve for the purpose of testing whether the pipeline is
under pressure or vacuum and to enable pressures to be equalised,
prior to its removal.
5. The Contractor shall clear the inside of each fitting and pipe length
immediately prior to jointing.
a. Swab all fittings and pipe lengths to remove all dirt, sand or
other matter that may clog the line or contaminate the fluid to be
transported in the pipeline.
6. After jointing, the interior of the pipes shall be free from any dirt, stones
or other matter that may have entered them.
7. For this purpose, a rubber disc, brush or other suitable implement that
will not harm the internal lining of the pipe shall be pulled through the
pipe after jointing.
3.13 CLOSED CIRCUIT TELEVISION INSPECTION (CCTV)
A. The Contractor shall arrange to inspect by colour CCTV the pipeline, for pipe
integrity and deformation. The equipment used to undertake the inspections
shall have tilt and pan facilities with zoom and be compact and portable to
minimise disruption to vehicular traffic as much as possible.

B. The CCTV survey shall be undertaken to ensure:
1. That the pipeline is reasonably clean and that no debris exists in the
invert of the pipeline.
2. That no unacceptable deformations exist.
3. That all the lateral connections have been identified and their
chainages recorded.
4. That no joints are seriously misaligned.
C. The Engineer and Contractor shall jointly review the CCTV surveys.
D. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, significant debris remains in the pipeline
after cleaning, the Engineer shall direct the Contractor to carry out further
cleaning and another CCTV inspection.
E. If the CCTV inspection reveals pipe fabric failure, deformation or misaligned

joints greater than the defined limits then the Engineer will direct the
Contractor to undertake an excavation to repair the fault. The cost of
excavation and repair or replacement shall be at the Contractor's expense.
F. CCTV Inspection Equipment:
1. The CCTV inspection equipment shall include, but shall not be limited
to, the following units, all to the approval of the Engineer.
a. Colour TV Camera with tilt and pan facilities with zoom.

b. Camera light head assembly.
c. Camera Crawler Assembly (selfpropelled); Skid Assembly.
d. TV Cable Reel, -coaxial cable (with minimum of 100 m) with
cable drum assembly.
e. Power Winch.
f. CCTV Central Control Unit located in purpose built vehicle (van).
g. Colour TV Monitor.
h. VHS Video Cassette Recording System with Audio/Video
information system.
2. The camera shall be capable of taking clear and close pictures in any
direction i.e. 90 degrees to the left and 90 degrees to the right
(tota1180 degrees in horizontal axis) and also 360 degrees in the
circumference of the pipe without using an extra revolving mirror
attachment.
3. The camera shall continuously transmit distances in metres,

electronically matched to the movement of the camera, with a
maximum tolerance of +0.1%, to the control TV monitor and the
resultant video tapes.
4. The camera crawler assembly shall be adjustable for deployment in

pipelines of varying sizes from 150mm to 1800mm diameter. The
camera carriage shall be capable of elevation relative to pipe diameter.
5. Should the Contractor propose to use a self propelled camera, it shall

incorporate features to enable it to be winch drawn without affecting the
quality of the video recording in any way.
6. The Contractor shall submit typical video recordings of similar work

carried out by the proposed camera prior to any approval. Such
recordings, if acceptable, will be retained by the Engineer as the
Standard for appraisal of subsequent recordings.
7. The video tape recording system shall be provided to permanently

record, on video tapes of approved quality, any transmission from the
CCTV camera unit. In the central control unit the operator shall have
remote control facilities to drive the camera in forward and reverse, left
and right (for a self propelled camera), control the cable drum and
power winch.
8. The CCTV van shall have three compartments:
a. the driver's cabin

b. the operator's room which shall have sufficient space for three
personnel viewing the TV monitor screen at one time and
c. the TV camera equipment storage areas.
9. The CCTV van shall be equipped with factory installed air-conditioner

(both for cooling and heating) for the driver's cabin and the operator's
room. It shall also be equipped with a wireless communication system
between the operator inside the van and helpers outside the van.
G. CCTV Inspection Requirements:
1. The rate of travel of the camera shall be such as to enable all details to
be extracted from the video tape recording, but normally shall not
exceed 0.1m/s for pipelines below 200mm diameter, 0.15m/s for
pipelines between 200mm and 300mm diameter and 0.2m/s for
pipelines exceeding 300mm diameter.
2. The axis of the camera shall be set up to coincide with the centreline of
the pipe.
3. The picture transmitted by the CCTV camera shall be free from

interference and loss of vertical and horizontal hold. The picture shall
be in focus, properly illuminated, of good contrast and without
distortion.
4. If vision is obscured at any time by fouling of the lens or lighting

system, or if travel is impeded by obstructions, the camera shall be
withdrawn and the situation rectified.
5. Portions of video tape marred by interference, or unacceptable for

other reasons shall be erased and the relevant portion of pipeline shall
be re-surveyed and re-recorded. The Engineer will be the sole arbiter
as to the acceptability of any video recording.
6. The master video recording on Digital Video Disc (DVD) shall be

handed to the Engineer and shall become the property of the
Employer.
H. Programme or Inspection:
1. The programme for carrying out the CCTV Inspection and for handing
over the CCTV records shall be agreed with the Engineer.
I. Video Tape Recordings:
1. The Contractor shall record the whole of the inspection in a VHS video
tape format or any other latest format approved by the Engineer
conforming with the recording equipment manufacturer's specification.
The recording shall give a continuous display of data on the monitor
screen which shall include the following information:
a. automatic update of the camera's meterage

b. date: day, month and year format
c. direction of inspection -upstream/downstream
d. nominal diameter of pipeline
e. location reference
J. The video recording shall be stopped whenever the camera is stationary for
more than 5 seconds and shall have manual override capability.
K. Video recordings will be appraised by the Engineer against those retained as

the Standard relative to the camera approval and those failing to comply will
be rejected and the work re-executed at the Contractor's expense.
3.14 PIPE TESTING
A. Pipe testing shall be conducted as specified in Section 33 30 00 and Section

32 84 00.
B. Gravity line pipeline shall be tested between adjacent manholes.
3.15 STANKS
A. Stanks shall be placed in all granular pipe surround, unless otherwise

indicated on the drawings.
1. Stanks shall be provided at a maximum spacing of 50m, with at least

one stank between two adjacent manholes/structures.
2. Manholes, valve chambers and other similar structures shall be
considered as effective barriers.
3. Stanks shall be installed across the full cross-section of the granular
pipe surround and into the trench walls as shown on the drawings.
4. Stanks shall be constructed through the bedding at the ends of future
connection pipelines or to stub-pipes built out at manholes close to the
capped end to facilitate future dewatering and excavation operations.
5. Concrete Stanks shall be made of Grade C20 concrete and be at least
300mm “thick”, measured along the axis of the pipeline.
6. Plastic stanks shall be constructed from a layer of plastic sheeting,
minimum thickness 1mm, cut to fit around the pipe across the full width
of the trench and laid on the granular bedding or fill material at the
natural repose angle.
7. Plastic stanks shall be used in conjunction with thermoplastic pipes.
B. The cost of providing stanks shall be included in the Contractor's rates for
pipe laying.
3.16 REINSTATEMENT OF ROADWAY AND FOOTPATH SURFACES
A. All roadways and footpaths surfaces shall be restored to their original

condition by the Contractor.
B. Maintain temporary reinstatement for the duration of the Contract.
C. Make permanent repair only at the end of the project.
D. These reinstatements are deemed to be entirely covered by the Contractor's

rates for pipeline installation.
3.17 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES IN THE PIPELINE
A. Contractor shall carry out further excavation as may be necessary to

accommodate structures such as manholes and chambers.
1. Such excavation shall include disposal of surplus materials.
B. Any roadways and footpaths disturbed by excavation for appurtenances shall

be reinstated by the Contractor.
1. These reinstatements are deemed to be entirely covered by the

Contractor’s rate for the appurtenance.
3.18 BACKFILL ADJACENT TO STRUCTURES
A. Backfill around structures shall be conducted according to Section 31 20 00

unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
B. Backfill adjacent to structures shall be placed in a manner to avoid damage to

the structures, protective coatings or water proof membranes.
C. No backfill material shall be placed around structures until the exterior

protective coating or membrane has been inspected and approved by the
Engineer.
3.19 EXISTING SERVICES, FACILITIES AND STRUCTURES
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for ascertaining from his own inspection
of the Site and coordination with respective utility authorities and other public
bodies, the position of all mains, pipes and cables whether underground or
overhead, within or near the Site or existing structures.
B. Where trench excavation is carried out close to or across existing pipes,

cables or other services, the Contractor shall provide suitable temporary
supports or shoring, to the Engineer’s approval.
1. If for any reason, any portion or portions of the existing facilities or
structures give way, the Contractor shall carry out at his expense, all
necessary remedial work to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
C. Where specified on the Drawings or by the relevant Utility Authority, split
ducts shall be provided as specified herein.
D. Where, in the opinion of the Engineer, construction of the pipeline cannot
reasonably be carried out unless the pipe, cable or other service is
permanently severed, permanently diverted or permanently supported by
concrete, he shall instruct the Contractor to undertake such work.
E. The Contractor shall be reimbursed for all such work at the appropriate rates
in the Bills of Quantities. If no applicable rates exist, the Engineer shall
establish the amount to be paid to the Contractor.
F. Any relocation of existing services shall be done in accordance with the
requirements of the responsible authorities.
3.20 FENCES AND WALLS
A. Where trench excavation crosses barriers such as fences and walls, the
Contractor shall obtain written approval of the Engineer before breaching the
barrier.
B. The Contractor shall provide temporary fencing for any parts of such barriers
as have had to be removed.
C. After trench excavation has been reinstated, the Contractor shall carry out
such work as the Engineer may order, for permanent restoration of such
barriers.
3.21 CROSSING WATERCOURSES
A. Contractor shall be deemed to have allowed for all the additional measures
necessary for the proper construction of the pipeline where it crosses under or
over streams, culverts, pipes and other watercourses, including maintaining
the full flow of water.
3.22 BURIED MARKING TAPE
A. Buried marking tape shall be placed in the trenches above all pipes.
1. Depth shall be 0.50m below finished grade.
3.23 PIPELINE MARKER POSTS

A. Marker posts shall be placed over pumping or pressure mains at locations
indicated on the drawings.
B. All labelling and lettering shall be complete before installation.

C. Marker posts shall be set in concrete as shown on the drawings.
D. Extreme care shall be taken to avoid damage to reflective sheeting and/or
lettering.
E. Any posts with damaged sheeting or lettering shall be replaced at the
Contractor’s expense.
3.24 INSTALLATION OF SERVICE PROTECTION DUCTS
A. Protection ducts shall be supported on suitable non-corrosive spacers before
placing concrete encasement.
B. Diameter of the uPVC pipe shall be at least 150 mm, and must be approved
by the Engineer.
C. Where concrete work is required, it shall be in accordance with Section 03 30
00 - “Cast-In-Place Concrete”.
D. Concrete encasement shall be with Grade C30 concrete.
E. Minimum thickness shall be 150mm (all around); unless shown otherwise on
Standard Details Drawings.
3.25 DISPOSAL OF MATERIALS FROM EXCAVATIONS
A. Subject to any other specific requirements of the Contract, the Contractor
shall make his own arrangements for the temporary storage of any excavated
material which is required for use in refilling trench or structure excavations,
including any necessary double handling.
B. The height and slope of any temporary tips alongside the trench excavation
must be stabilised at all times.
C. Where the nature of the material permits, the contractor’s temporary storage
facilities shall allow for separate storage for various grade materials.
D. Any excavated material that is not required or is found to be unsuitable for re-
use, shall be removed from site and disposed of, in a legal manner, by the
Contractor.
3.26 CLEANUP
A. Upon completion of work, all rubbish, debris, fluids and excess or waste
material shall be removed from the Site.
B. All construction equipment and implements of service shall be removed and
the entire area involved shall be left in a neat, clean condition, acceptable to
the Engineer.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 31 3116
TERMITE CONTROL
PART 1 - GENERAL

Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Soil treatment below slabs on grade.

2. Exterior walls to structures including tanks, manholes and lifting stations for
subterranean insects
to commencement of the work.
1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual

components, and profiles for termite control products.
2. Submit procedure submittals indicating toxicants to be used, composition by
percentage, dilution schedule, intended application rate.
3. Include the Registered Label for termiticide products as per requirements of
Authorities Having Jurisdiction.
A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.
B. Product Certificates: For each type of termite control product.
C. Soil Treatment Application Report: After application of termiticide is completed,

submit report for Employer's records and include the following:
1. Date and time of application.

KEO/21-7387-0004 31 3116/ 1 Termite Control
2. Moisture content of soil before application.
3. Termiticide brand name and manufacturer.
4. Quantity of undiluted termiticide used.
5. Dilutions, methods, volumes used, and rates of application.
6. Areas of application.
7. Water source for application.
D. Sample Warranties: For special warranties.
A. Installer Qualifications: A specialist who is licensed according to regulations of

authorities having jurisdiction to apply termite control treatment and products in
jurisdiction where Project is located and who employs workers trained and
approved by manufacturer to install manufacturer's products and who is accredited
by manufacturer with minimum five (5) years documented experience.
B. Materials: Provide certification that toxicants are not in violation of the Authorities
having Jurisdiction.
C. Conform to applicable code for requirements for application, application licensing,

Authority to use toxicant chemicals in accordance with Authorities Having
Jurisdiction.
A. Soil Treatment:
1. Environmental Limitations: To ensure penetration, do not treat soil that is

water saturated or frozen. Do not treat soil while precipitation is occurring.
Comply with requirements of the Authorities Having Jurisdiction.
2. Related Work: Coordinate soil treatment application with excavating, filling,

grading, and concreting operations. Treat soil under footings, grade beams,
and ground-supported slabs before construction.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Provide ten year warranty for material and installation under provisions of contract
from the date of certified substantial completion.
B. Warranty: Cover against invasion or propagation of subterranean termites,

damage to building or building contents caused by termites; repairs to
building or building contents so caused.
C. Inspect work annually and report in writing to Employer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Source Limitations: Obtain termite control products from single source from single
manufacturer.
2.2 SOIL TREATMENT
A. Termiticide: Provide an registered termiticide complying with requirements of

Authorities Having Jurisdiction, in a soluble or emulsible, concentrated formulation
that dilutes with water or foaming agent and formulated to prevent termite
infestation. Use only soil treatment solutions that are not harmful to plants. Provide
quantity required for application at the label volume and rate for the maximum
termiticide concentration allowed for each specific use, according to the product’s
Registered label as per requirements of Authorities Having Jurisdiction.
1. Service Life of Treatment: Soil treatment termiticide that is effective for not
less than ten (10) years against infestation of subterranean termites.
2. Toxicant Chemical: Approved as per requirements of Authorities Having
Jurisdiction, synthetically colour dyed to permit visual identification of treated
soil.
3. Diluents: Recommended by toxicant manufacturer.
4. Mix toxicant to manufacturer’s instructions.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance
with requirements for moisture content of soil per termiticide label, interfaces with
earthwork, slab and foundation work, landscaping, utility installation, and other
conditions affecting performance of termite control.
B. Proceed with application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. General: Prepare work areas according to the requirements of authorities having

jurisdiction and according to manufacturer's written instructions before beginning
application and installation of termite control treatment(s). Remove extraneous
sources of wood cellulose and other edible materials, such as wood debris, tree
stumps and roots, stakes, formwork, and construction waste wood from soil within
and around foundations.
B. Soil Treatment Preparation: Remove foreign matter and impermeable soil materials
that could decrease treatment effectiveness on areas to be treated. Loosen, rake,
and level soil to be treated, except previously compacted areas under slabs and
footings. Termiticides may be applied before placing compacted fill under slabs if
recommended in writing by termiticide manufacturer.
1. Fit filling hose connected to water source at the site with a backflow preventer,
according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
3.3 APPLICATION, GENERAL
A. General: Comply with the most stringent requirements of Authorities Having

Jurisdiction and with manufacturer’s Registered Label for products as per
requirements of Authorities Having Jurisdiction.
3.4 APPLYING SOIL TREATMENT
A. Application: Mix soil treatment termiticide solution to a uniform consistency.

Distribute treatment uniformly. Apply treatment at the product's Registered Label as
per requirements of Authorities Having Jurisdiction volume and rate for maximum
specified concentration of termiticide to the following so that a continuous horizontal
and vertical termiticidal barrier or treated zone is established around and under
building construction.
1. Slabs-on-Grade and Basement Slabs: Underground-supported slab

construction, including footings, building slabs, and attached slabs as an
overall treatment. Treat soil materials before concrete footings and slabs are
placed.
2. Foundations: Soil adjacent to and along the entire inside perimeter of
foundation walls; along both sides of interior partition walls; around plumbing
pipes and electric conduit penetrating the slab; around interior column footers,
piers, and chimney bases; and along the entire outside perimeter, from grade
to bottom of footing.
3. Crawlspaces: Soil under and adjacent to foundations. Treat adjacent areas,
including around entrance platform, porches, and equipment bases. Apply
overall treatment only where attached concrete platform and porches are on
fill or ground.
4. Masonry: Treat voids.
5. Penetrations: At expansion joints, control joints, and areas where slabs and
below-grade walls will be penetrated.
B. Post warning signs in areas of application.
C. Reapply soil treatment solution to areas disturbed by subsequent excavation,

grading, landscaping, or other construction activities following application.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Avoid disturbance of treated soil after application. Keep off treated areas until
completely dry.
B. Protect termiticide solution dispersed in treated soils and fills from being diluted by
exposure to water spillage or weather until ground-supported slabs are installed.
Use waterproof barrier according to Authorities Having Jurisdiction Registered
Label instructions.

3.6 RETREATMENT
A. If inspection identifies the presence of termites, retreat soil and retest.
B. Use same toxicant as for the original treatment.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 31 5000
EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION
PART 1 - GENERAL

Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes temporary excavation support and protection systems.
1. Section 312000 "Earth Moving" for excavating and backfilling and for
controlling surface-water runoff and ponding.
to commencement of the work.
1. Review geotechnical report.

2. Review existing utilities and subsurface conditions.
3. Review coordination for interruption, shutoff, capping, and continuation of
utility services.
4. Review proposed excavations.
5. Review proposed equipment.
6. Review monitoring of excavation support and protection system.
7. Review coordination with waterproofing.
8. Review abandonment or removal of excavation support and protection
system.
1. Include construction details, material descriptions, performance properties,

and dimensions of individual components and profiles, and calculations for
excavation support and protection system.
B. Shop Drawings: For excavation support and protection system, prepared by or

under the supervision of a qualified professional engineer.
1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details.
KEO/21-7387-0004 31 5000/ 1 Excavation Support and Protection

2. Show arrangement, locations, and details of soldier piles, piling, lagging,
tiebacks, bracing, and other components of excavation support and protection
system according to engineering design.
3. Indicate type and location of waterproofing.
4. Include a written plan for excavation support and protection, including
sequence of construction of support and protection coordinated with progress
of excavation.
A. Qualification Data: For land surveyor and professional engineer.
B. Contractor Calculations: For excavation support and protection system. Include

analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible
for their preparation.
C. Existing Conditions: Using photographs or video recordings, show existing

conditions of adjacent construction and site improvements that might be
misconstrued as damage caused by inadequate performance of excavation support
and protection systems. Submit before Work begins.
D. Record Drawings: Identify locations and depths of capped utilities, abandoned-in-

place support and protection systems, and other subsurface structural, electrical, or
mechanical conditions.
A. Interruption of Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt any utility serving facilities occupied
by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only
after arranging to provide temporary utility according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify Architect and Construction Manager no fewer than two days in advance
of proposed interruption of utility.
2. Do not proceed with interruption of utility without Architect's, Construction
Manager's and Owner's written permission.
B. Project-Site Information: A geotechnical report has been prepared for this Project
and is available for information only. The opinions expressed in this report are
those of a geotechnical engineer and represent interpretations of subsoil
conditions, tests, and results of analyses conducted by a geotechnical engineer.
Owner is not responsible for interpretations or conclusions drawn from the data.
1. Make additional test borings and conduct other exploratory operations

necessary for excavation support and protection according to the performance
requirements.
2. The geotechnical report is referenced elsewhere in Project Manual.
C. Survey Work: Engage a qualified land surveyor or professional engineer to survey

adjacent existing buildings, structures, and site improvements; establish exact
elevations at fixed points to act as benchmarks. Clearly identify benchmarks and
record existing elevations.

A. Regulations: Comply with codes and ordinances of local governing authorities.
B. Engineering: Have work of this Section engineered by a fully qualified Registered

Engineer licensed to design and engineer geotechnical structures and excavation
support and protection system in UAE. This engineer may be required to
demonstrate proven experience with the design and engineering of this type of
work and shall submit professional qualifications to the Engineer for approval.
C. The Contractor must be familiar with below grade soil and water conditions in the
project area and have proven experience with the type of work specified in this
Section. The contractor’s site foreman must be familiar with below grade soil and
water conditions in the project area and must have proven experience for direction
to workers in the type of work specified in this Section.
D. Independent Testing Service: Employ an independent Testing company to provide

materials testing services during excavation support and protection system
installation. Payment for all testing included under this Section shall be by the
Contractor.
1.8 EXISTING UTILITIES (if any)
A. Protect and maintain existing active sewer, water, gas, electricity and other utility
services and structures outside the property line but within the working area.
B. Co-ordinate with all utilities authorities and pay all related fees for relocating the
required utilities, including all design and installations fees.
C. Notify municipal agencies and service utility companies and comply with
requirements of governing authorities and agencies for protection, relocation,
removal and discontinuance of services.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the design, monitor, and maintain excavation
support and protection system capable of supporting excavation sidewalls and of
resisting earth and hydrostatic pressures and superimposed and construction
loads.
1. Contractor Design: Design excavation support and protection system,

including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional
engineer.
2. Prevent surface water from entering excavations by grading, dikes, or other
means.
3. Install excavation support and protection systems without damaging existing
buildings, structures, and site improvements adjacent to excavation.
4. Continuously monitor vibrations, settlements, and movements to ensure
stability of excavations and constructed slopes and to ensure that damage to
permanent structures is prevented.
B. The Contractor's design shall take into account all soil pressures, hydrostatic
pressures, applicable traffic and construction equipment loads, stockpiles and any
other surcharge loads but not less than 20KN/m2.
1. The design of the system shall be capable of supporting excavation side walls
and of resisting earth and hydrostatic pressures and superimposed and
construction loads.
C. Ground Anchors
1. Design and execution of ground anchorages shall comply with BS 8081 and
BS EN 1537.
2. Anchors shall be stressed anchors in soil or rock.
3. Temporary and permanent (if any) anchors shall be designed in accordance
with BS 8081 and BS EN 1537.
4. The anchors shall be held in with wedges, or threaded bar with bearing plate
and bolt, no welding shall be allowed for this purpose.
5. Tension couplers shall be used for anchors longer than 12m. No welding of
anchor bars is permitted.
D. Ground Anchor – On-Site- Tests
1. On-Site Suitability Tests shall be carried out in accordance with BS 8081 and
BS EN 1537 on ground anchors constructed under identical conditions as the
working ground anchors shown on the shop drawings and loaded in the same
way to the same level. All ground anchors must be pre-stressed to 120% and
locked of at 75% of design force. Ground anchors used for On-Site Suitability
Tests may be used in the works as provided for in BS 8081, BS EN 1537 and
subject to the approval of the Engineer. Unless directed otherwise by the
Engineer the first three anchorages of each category (in terms of geometry,
ground type and load capacity) shall be tested to the satisfaction of the
Engineer. The results shall be deemed to be satisfactory provided that they
comply with the assessment criteria for On-Site Suitability tests given in BS
8081 and BS EN 1537 in terms of proof load-time data. Failure to comply with
the assessment criteria shall require the Contractor to revise his ground
anchor proposals and/or undertake further testing to the satisfaction of the
Engineer until satisfactory results can be achieved. On-Site Suitability Tests
for each category of ground anchor shall be completed to the satisfaction of
the Engineer before any working anchors in each category are installed.
2. The Contractor shall keep full records of all Proving and On-Site Suitability
Tests in accordance with this Specification. Copies of these records shall be
provided to the Engineer within 24 hours of completion of each test.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. General: Provide materials that are either new or in serviceable condition.
B. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, ASTM A 690/A 690M, or

ASTM A 992/A 992M.
C. Steel Sheet Piling: ASTM A 328/A 328M, ASTM A 572/A 572M, or

ASTM A 690/A 690M; with continuous interlocks.

1. Corners: Site-fabricated mechanical interlock or Roll-formed corner shape
with continuous interlock.
D. Wood Lagging: Lumber complying to ASTM D245, ASTM D5055, ASTM D5456;
Lumber, mixed hardwood, mixed hardwood, nominal rough thickness of size and
strength required for application.
E. Cast-in-Place Concrete: ACI 301, of compressive strength required for application.
F. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 420, deformed.
G. Tiebacks: Steel bars, ASTM A 722/A 722M. Sizes and capacities shall be
submitted by the Contractor for Engineer review and approval.
H. Tiebacks: Steel strand, ASTM A 416/A 416M. Sizes and capacities shall be
submitted by the Contractor for Engineer review and approval.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage
that could develop during excavation support and protection system operations.
1. Shore, support, and protect utilities encountered.
B. Install excavation support and protection systems to ensure minimum interference

with roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities.

facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.
Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required
by authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Locate excavation support and protection systems clear of permanent construction

so that construction and finishing of other work is not impeded.
3.2 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A. Install earthwork support systems in accordance with approved designs, details and
sequence. Notify the Engineer immediately should any deviations there from be
necessary and unavoidable.
B. Monitor the movements of the lateral support systems by carrying out regular tests
or inspections of specific reference points in the support systems. All such data
shall be collected, recorded and submitted to the Engineer for approval.
C. Take steps to control any unacceptable movement in the lateral support systems
immediately by providing supplemental bracing or other measures (working 24
hours per day if necessary) as required if any of the following occur:

1. Field measurements indicate that significant or sustained movements are
occurring to the lateral support systems.
2. Detrimental movements of adjacent structures, utilities and other facilities are
noted.
3.3 SOLDIER PILES AND LAGGING
A. Install steel soldier piles before starting excavation. Extend soldier piles below
excavation grade level to depths adequate to prevent lateral movement. Space
soldier piles at regular intervals not to exceed allowable flexural strength of wood
lagging. Accurately align exposed faces of flanges to vary not more than 50 mm
from a horizontal line and not more than 1:120 out of vertical alignment.
B. Install wood lagging within flanges of soldier piles as excavation proceeds. Trim
excavation as required to install lagging. Fill voids behind lagging with soil, and
compact.
C. Install wales horizontally at locations indicated on Drawings and secure to soldier

piles.
3.4 SHEET PILING (WHERE APPLICABLE)
A. Before starting excavation, install one-piece sheet piling lengths and tightly
interlock vertical edges to form a continuous barrier.
B. Accurately place the piling, using templates and guide frames unless otherwise
recommended in writing by the sheet piling manufacturer. Limit vertical offset of
adjacent sheet piling to 1500 mm. Accurately align exposed faces of sheet piling to
vary not more than 50 mm from a horizontal line and not more than 1:120 out of
vertical alignment.
C. Cut tops of sheet piling to uniform elevation at top of excavation.
3.5 TIEBACKS
A. Drill, install, grout, and tension tiebacks.
B. Test load-carrying capacity of each tieback and replace and retest deficient
tiebacks.
1. Have test loading observed by a qualified professional engineer responsible

for design of excavation support and protection system.
C. Maintain tiebacks in place until permanent construction is able to withstand lateral

earth and hydrostatic pressures.
3.6 BRACING
A. Bracing: Locate bracing to clear columns, floor framing construction, and other
permanent work. If necessary to move brace, install new bracing before removing
original brace.

1. Do not place bracing where it will be cast into or included in permanent
concrete work unless otherwise approved by Architect.
2. Install internal bracing if required to prevent spreading or distortion of braced
frames.
3. Maintain bracing until structural elements are supported by other bracing or
until permanent construction is able to withstand lateral earth and hydrostatic
pressures.
A. Survey-Work Benchmarks: Resurvey benchmarks regularly (typically weekly unless

otherwise as instructed by the Engineer) during installation of excavation support
and protection systems, excavation progress, and for as long as excavation
remains open. Maintain an accurate log of surveyed elevations and positions for
comparison with original elevations and positions. Promptly notify Architect if
changes in elevations or positions occur or if cracks, sags, or other damage is
evident in adjacent construction.
B. Promptly correct detected bulges, breakage, or other evidence of movement to

ensure that excavation support and protection system remains stable.
C. Promptly repair damages to adjacent facilities caused by installation or faulty

performance of excavation support and protection systems.
3.8 REMOVAL AND REPAIRS
A. Remove excavation support and protection systems when construction has

progressed sufficiently to support excavation and earth and hydrostatic pressures.
Remove in stages to avoid disturbing underlying soils and rock or damaging
structures, pavements, facilities, and utilities.
1. Remove excavation support and protection systems to a minimum depth of

1200 mm below overlying construction and abandon remainder.
2. Fill voids immediately with approved backfill compacted to density specified in
Section 312000 "Earth Moving."
3. Repair or replace, as approved by Architect, adjacent work damaged or
displaced by removing excavation support and protection systems.
B. Leave excavation support and protection systems permanently in place where

indicated on drawings or instructed by Engineer.
3.9 CLEANING
A. Clean and make good to the satisfaction of the Engineer any items disturbed by the
installations of the earthwork support systems and their subsequent removals.
END OF SECTION

APPENDIX A - LANDSCAPE
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
LANDSCAPE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
INDEX
DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
SECTION 07 9200 JOINT SEALANTS
DIVISION 31 - EARTH WORK
SECTION 31 2000 EARTHWORKS
DIVISION 32 - EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS
SECTION 32 1116.13 SUBBASE AND BASE COURSES

32 1400.13 UNIT PAVERS
32 1500 AGGREGATE SURFACING
32 9113 SOIL PREPARATION
32 9300 PLANTS
32 9400 PLANTING ACCESSORIES
32 9700 PLANTING MAINTENANCE
END OF INDEX
KEO/21-7387-0004 Index/1
SECTION 07 9200
JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Furnish all labor, materials, tools appliances and equipment and perform all
operations and services necessary for the complete installation of sealants for the
following applications
1. Exterior joint sealant in horizontal traffic surfaces.
a. Joints between different materials and curbs/upstands.
B. Related Section: Related work to be coordinated and used in conjunction with this
1. Section 033000 - "Cast-in-Place Concrete"
2. Section 321400 - "Unit Paving"
1.02 REFERENCES
A. All reference to standards, regulations and requirements of statutory bodies shall

mean the latest published editions at the time of contract. Product manufacture,
testing and installation shall comply with the following references unless otherwise
stated in the specification or otherwise approved.
1. ASTM C510 Standard Test Method for Staining and Color Change of
Single and Multi-component Joint Sealants.
2. ASTM C639 Standard Test Method for Rheological (Flow) Properties
of Elastomeric Sealants.
3. ASTM C661 Standard Test Method for Indentation Hardness of
Elastomeric Type Sealants by Means of a Durometer.
4. ASTM C679 Standard Test Method for Tack-Free Time of
Elastomeric Sealants.
5. ASTM C 719 Standard Test Method for Adhesion and Cohesion of
Elastomeric Joint Sealants under Cyclic Movement.
6. ASTM C 920 Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants.
7. ASTM C 1193 Standard Guide for use of Joint Sealants.
8. ASTM C 1299 Standard Guide for Use in Selection of Liquid-Applied
Sealants.
9. ASTM C 1248 Standard Test Method for Staining of Porous Substrate
by Joint Sealants.
10. ASTM C 1330 Standard Specification for Cylindrical Sealant Backing of
use with Cold Liquid Applied Sealants.
11. ASTM D 1056 Standard Specifications for Flexible Cellular Materials -
Sponge or Expanded Rubber.
12. SWRI Sealant, Waterproofing & Restoration Institute.
KEO/21-7387-0004 07 9200 / 1 Joint Sealants
A. Provide elastomeric joint sealants that establish and maintain watertight and airtight
continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates.
1.04 SUBMITTALS:
A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicted.
B. Samples: For each type and color of joint sealant required. Install joint sealants in
13 mm wide joints formed between two 300 mm long strips of actual material the
sealant to be with. To be inspected for staining, sagging and adhesion one week
and four weeks after the sample is submitted.
C. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of joint sealants certifying that

products furnished comply with requirements and are suitable for the use indicated.
D. SWRI Validation Certificate: For each elastomeric sealant specified to be validated

by SWRI's Sealant Validation Program.
E. Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From sealant manufacturer indicating the
following:
1. Materials forming joint substrates and joint sealant backings have been tested
for compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants.
2. Sealants will not stain Stone, or other substrates when tested in accordance
with ASTM C 1248, or other acceptable testing criteria.
3. Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and
substrate preparation needed for adhesion.
F. Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating sealants comply
with requirements, based on comprehensive testing of current product formulations.
G. Submit a detailed schedule of sealant usage for all locations. List each sealant
material, joint fillers, color and product data for each location of use (include joint
size), along with acceptable temperature, humidity and weather conditions at time of
application.
A. Submit documented proof that the material has a proven record of successful
performance for more than 10 years, confirmed by at least five local projects.
B. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer with 10 year’s experience and who

has specialized in installing joint sealants similar in material, design, and extent to
those indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in joint-sealant
installations with a record of successful in-service performance.
C. Manufacturer of sealants shall provide a qualified technical representative who will

visit the site for the purpose of advising the Installer of the proper procedures and
precautions in the application of the materials.
D. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a
single manufacturer.
E. Product Testing: Obtain test results for "Product Test Reports from a qualified
testing agency based on testing current sealant formulations within a 36-month
period preceding the commencement of the Work.
1. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified
according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated, as documented
according to ASTM E 548.
2. Test elastomeric joint sealants for compliance with requirements specified by
reference to ASTM C 920, and where applicable, to other standard test
methods.
3. Test other joint sealants for compliance with requirements indicated by
referencing standard specifications and test methods.
F. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Testing: Before installing elastomeric sealants, field

test their adhesion to Project joint substrates as follows:
1. The tests shall be done by an independent testing agency approved by the
Engineer.
2. Locate test joints as directed by Engineer.
3. Conduct field tests for each application indicated below:
a. Each type of elastomeric sealant and joint substrate indicated.
b. Each type of non-elastomeric sealant and joint substrate indicated.
4. Notify Engineer seven days in advance of dates and times when test joints
will be erected.
5. Arrange for tests to take place with joint-sealant manufacturer's technical
representative present.
a. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied
Sealant Joint Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193.
1) For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each
substrate separately; extend cut along one side, verifying
adhesion to opposite side. Repeat procedure for opposite side.
6. Report whether sealant in joint connected to pulled-out portion failed to
adhere to joint substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance
used to test each type of product and joint substrate. For sealants that fail
adhesively, retest until satisfactory adhesion is obtained.
7. Evaluation of Preconstruction Field Adhesion Test Results: Sealants not
evidencing adhesive failure from testing, in absence of other indications of
noncompliance with requirements, will be considered satisfactory. Do not use
sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing.
G. Mockups: Before installing joint sealants, apply elastomeric sealants, as follows, to

verify selections made under sample Submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects
and to set quality standards for materials and execution:
1. Locate mock-ups in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated,
as directed by the Engineer.
2. Build Mock-ups to the satisfaction of the Engineer. If the required standard is
not achieved, the Contractor shall replace (at the contractor’s cost) until the
required standard is achieved as judged by the Engineer
3. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.
4. Obtain written approval of mock-up from the Engineer before starting
fabrication.
5. Maintain mock-ups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a
standard for judging the completed Work.

6. Approved mockups in an undisturbed condition at the time of Substantial
Completion may become part of the completed Work if approved by the
engineer.
A. Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with

labels indicating manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration date,
pot life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials.
B. Store and handle materials in compliance with manufacturer’s written instructions to

prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures,
contaminants, or other causes.
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under

the following conditions:
1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits
permitted by joint sealant manufacturer.
2. When joint substrates are wet.
B. Joint-Width Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants where joint
widths are less than those allowed by joint sealant manufacturer for applications
indicated, or when anticipated frequency and extent of joint movement exceed
sealant manufacturers limitations.
C. Joint-Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants until

contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion are removed from joint substrates.
1.08 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Written warranty, signed by Contractor, Installer and

Manufacturer agreeing to repair or replace joint sealants that do not comply with
performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified
warranty period.
1. Defects shall include, but not be limited to, breakdown, decomposition, loss of
resiliency, cracking, staining adjacent surfaces, leaking, crumbling, sagging,
melting, shrinking, running, loss of bond with sides, deterioration from
sunlight, weather and oxidation, and permanent deformation under load.
2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 AVAILABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Products and manufacturers specified hereinafter are specified for the purposes of
establishing minimum quality standards and performance requirements. Products
which are equal to, or better than those specified, and which conform to the

Engineer’s design requirements and color selections, may be acceptable subject to
Engineer’s approval.
1. Mapei Construction Chemicals
Dubai, UAE
2. Dow Chemical Company
Dubai UAE.
3. GE Middle East
Dubai, UAE
4. Tremco Ltd (Middle East)
Dubai, UAE.
5. Sika Gulf
Dubai, UAE
6. Or approved equal.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are
compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and
application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field
experience.
B. Comply with ASTM C 1193 - Standard guide for use of Joint Sealants.
C. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: To match adjacent surfaces as determined by

Engineer, including “Custom Colors” without any extra cost.
2.03 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS
A. Elastomeric Sealant Standard: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements for
classifications, for type, grade, class, and uses.
1. M, G & A sealants that remain adhered to Portland cement mortar
(M), clear float glass (G), and clear-anodized aluminum (A).
2. O substrate materials other than M, G and A.
3. T joints in surfaces subject to pedestrian and vehicular traffic.
4. NT classifies sealants designed for non-traffic areas.
B. Additional Movement Capability: Where additional movement capability is specified

in the Elastomeric Joint-Sealant Schedule, provide products with the capability, when
tested for adhesion and cohesion under maximum cyclic movement per ASTM C719,
to withstand the specified percentage change in the joint width existing at the time of
installation and remain in compliance with other requirements of ASTM C 920 for
uses indicated.
C. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: When elastomeric sealants are specified to be

non-staining to porous substrates, provide products that have undergone testing
according to ASTM C 1248 and have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for
Project.
D. Exterior Vertical Wall movement joints:

1. Single component, low modulus elastic polyurethane sealant, capable of
25% movement in accordance with ISO 11600 Class F-25 LM
a. Basis-of-Design Product: Mapeflex PU S25 or approved equal
b. Colour from manufacturer’s standard colour range
E. Exterior horizontal Control Joints in paving for vehicular traffic:

1. Single component polyurethane elastomeric sealant, self-leveling, capable of
25% movement as measured in compliance with ISO 11600 Class F-25-LM.
a. Basis-of-Design Product: Mapeflex PU50 SL or approved equal.
b. Color: to match the surround
F. Exterior horizontal Control Joints in paving for pedestrian traffic, Control Joints in
stone paving and Joints between different paving materials and curbs/upstands;
Isolation and contraction joints in cast-in-place concrete grade slabs:
1. Single component, polyurethane elastomeric sealant capable of 25%
movement as measured in compliance with ISO 11600 Class F-25 LM.
a. Basis-of-Design Product: Mapeflex PU40 or approved equal.
b. Color: to match the surround
G. Exterior horizontal expansion joints in pedestrian traffic surfaces.

1. One component, rapid hardening, paintable thixotropic, polyurethane
elastomeric sealant, capable of 20% movement as measured in compliance
with ISO 11600 Class F20 HM.
a. Basis-of-Design Product: Mapeflex PU45 by Mapei or approved equal.
b. Colour from manufacturer’s standard colour range
2.04 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING
A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are
compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are
approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field
experience and laboratory testing.
B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, of size and density to control sealant
depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance. Provide
closed-cell backing rod diameter of which should be approximately 30% greater that
joint width thus allowing correct with/depth ratio to be maintained
C. Bond-Beaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by

sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint
filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in
sealant failure. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.
2.05 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Primer: Material recommended by joint sealant manufacturer where required for

adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction
joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests.
B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers

of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances
capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in
any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants with joint
substrates.

C. Masking Tape: Non-staining, non-absorbent material compatible with joint sealants
and surfaces adjacent to joints.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for
compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and
other conditions affecting joint-sealant performance.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint
sealants to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the
following requirements:
1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with
adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent,
protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and
compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease,
waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost.
a. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces like concrete and stone surfaces
by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a
combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate
capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove
loose particles remaining from above cleaning operations by
vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air.
2. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.
B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended in writing by joint sealant
manufacturer, based on preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior
experience. Apply primer to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written
instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or
migration onto adjoining surfaces.
C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with
adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such
contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape
immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.
3.03 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS
A. General: Comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for
products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.
B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 1193 for

use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions
indicated.

C. Install sealant backings of type indicated or required to support sealants during
application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of
installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement
capability.
1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings.
2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings.
3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant
application and replace them with dry materials.
D. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used
between sealants and back of joints.
E. Install sealants by proven techniques to comply with the following and at the same
time backings are installed:
1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.
2. Completely fill recesses provided for each joint configuration.
3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths
that allow optimum sealant movement capability.
F. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before

skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified below to
form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and
to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.
1. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint.
2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and
that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.
3. Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193, unless
4. Provide flush joint configuration, per Figure 8B in ASTM C 1193, where
indicated.
5. Provide recessed joint configuration, per Figure 8C in ASTM C 1193, of
recess depth and at locations indicated.
6. Use masking tape to protect adjacent surfaces of recessed tooled joints.
A. Inspect joints for complete fill, for absence of voids, for joint configuration and shall
be smooth and uniform. Any sealant found out of plumb or cracking or any work
otherwise defective shall be taken out and replaced to approval, at no additional cost
to the Project.
B. Waterproof Test: After curing exterior compounds, test joints for leaks by applying a
stream of water perpendicularly from a 20mm hose at normal city pressure. Test the
sealed joint system of not less than 5% of the construction components. Conduct
tests in the presence of the Engineer who will determine the actual percentage of
joints to be tested and the period of water flow exposure, based upon any evidence
of leakage. Repair leaks or other defects and retest as directed. Repair or replace
other works damaged by such leaks.
3.05 CLEANING

A. Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work
progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by
manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur.
3.06 PROTECTION
A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating
substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes
so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion.
If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove
damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired
areas are indistinguishable from the original work.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 31 2000
EARTHWORKS
PART 1 - GENERAL
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. The Contractor is
fully responsible for all permits according to the local regulations and shall bear all costs.
Where these specifications differ, or are not aligned with Standard ADM Specifications, ADM
Specifications will take precedent. This particular specification shall at all times be read in
conjunction with the Standard ADM Specifications, Contract documents and other documents
that constitute the entire contract.
A. Furnish all labour, materials, tools and equipment and perform all services and
operations necessary for earthwork including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Preparing subgrades for pavements.
2. Excavating and backfilling for landscape works.
B. The Contractor shall obtain all approvals, permits and pay all relevant fees (for 24hrs
day work schedule) associated with excavation and disposal of excavated materials.
C. Related Sections: Related work to be coordinated and used in conjunction with this
1. Section 32 1400.13 - Unit Pavers
2. Section 32 9300 - Plants
D. Excavation support and protection system:

1. Provide professional engineering services needed to assume engineering
responsibility, including preparation of Shop Drawings and a comprehensive
engineering analysis by a qualified registered engineer.
2. The excavation support and protection system shall be designed to allow for
the final excavation levels shown on the Drawings
3. Excavation support and protection system necessary to protect existing
buildings, streets, walkways, utilities, and other improvements and excavation
against loss of ground or caving embankments
4. Excavation support and protection system capable of supporting excavation
sidewalls and of resisting soil and hydrostatic pressure and superimposed and
construction loads
5. Inspection and maintenance of excavation support and protection system.
6. Removal of shoring and bracing, as required.
E. In the event asbestos is found during the earthworks operations, the Contractor shall
localise and isolate the areas; contact and coordinate with respective Government
agencies in order to ensure correct implementation of approved methods and
KEO/21-7387-0004 31 2000 / 1 Earthworks

procedures to be carried out by the Contractor in connection with the containment and
removal of asbestos materials.
1. The Contractor is to provide all safety measures to protect the public from
asbestos materials as required by respective authorities.
2. The Contractor is to follow and implement all procedures defined or required by
related environmental or public safety authorities. These precautions will be
taken at all times during the confinement and removal of asbestos materials.
3. The Contractor is to have present at the Worksite, a representative of the
related approval Authority.
4. If previously defined safety measures are found not to exist for asbestos
removal it will be the Contractor’s responsibility to establish procedures and
methodology to be implemented. The procedures and methodology shall be to
the approval of the Engineer
5. Containment and removal Work is to be performed under the constant direction
and supervision of preapproval personnel experienced with working with
asbestos materials.
6. The Contractor is to be responsible for processing and approval of any
documentation relating to procedures required by governmental or agencies
related to procedures for removal or containment of asbestos materials.
F. Work in other areas shall continue to mitigate any risk for delays.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. All reference to standards, regulations and requirements of statutory bodies shall

mean the latest published editions at the time of contract. Product manufacture, testing
and installation shall comply with the following references unless otherwise stated in
the specification or otherwise approved.
1. ASTM D 448: Classification for Sizes of Aggregate for Road and Bridge
Construction.
2. ASTM C 422: Particle Size Analysis of Soils.
3. ASTM D 698: Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics
of Soil Using Standard Effort 600 kN-m/m³.
4. ASTM D 1556: Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place
by the Sand-Cone Method.
5. ASTM D 1557: Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of
Soil Using Modified Effort 2,700 kN-m/m³.
6. ASTM D 2216: Laboratory Determination of Water (Moisture) Content of
Soil, Rock, and Soil Aggregate Mixtures.
7. ASTM D 2487: Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified
Soil Classification System)
8. ASTM D 2937: (R 1990) Density of Soil in Place by the drive-Cylinder
Method.
9. ASTM D 2940: Specification for Graded Aggregate Material for Bases or
Subbases for Highways or Airports
10. ASTM D 4253: Test Methods for Maximum Index Density of Soils Using a
Vibratory Table.
11. ASTM D 4318: Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils.
12. ASTM D 4754: Test Methods for Minimum Index Density of Soils and
Calculation of Relative Density.
KEO/21-7387-0004 31 2000 / 2 Earthworks

1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Excavation: Removal of material encountered to elevations and the reuse or disposal

of material removed.
B. Unauthorized excavation: Removing materials beyond indicated subgrade elevations

or dimensions without direction by the Engineer. Unauthorized excavation, as well as
remedial work directed by the Engineer, shall be at Contractor’s expense.
C. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs,

mechanical and electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features
constructed above or below the ground surface.
D. Subgrade: Surface or elevation remaining after completing excavation, or top surface

of a fill or backfill immediately below subbase, drainage fill, or topsoil materials.
E. Backfill: Soil materials used to fill an excavation.
F. Bedding Course: Layer placed over the excavated subgrade in a trench before laying
pipe.
G. Borrow: Soil material obtained off-site when sufficient approved soil material is not
available from excavations.
H. Unyielding Material: Unyielding material shall consist of rack and granular soils with
stones greater than 50 mm, in any dimension or as defined by the pipe manufacturer,
whichever is smaller.
I. Unstable Material: Unstable material shall consist of material too wet to properly work.
J. Drainage Course: Layer supporting slab-on-grade used to minimize capillary flow of

pore water.
K. Fill: Compacted structural fill to raise the grade to required level to receive foundation
and grade slab.
L. Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades.
M. Utilities include on-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as
underground services within buildings.
N. Formation: Formation shall mean the surface of the ground after completion of any
excavation or filling operation.
O. Topsoil: Topsoil shall mean soil which by its nutrient content is capable of supporting
the growth of vegetation.
P. Stones: Stones shall be round or angular, greater than .13 m in dimension, but smaller
than .5 m in dimension, and average in volume of .38 cu.m. Stone shall be indigenous
material saved from excavation and stockpiled during earthwork.
Q. Boulder: Boulders shall be of size bigger than stones, but able to be moved by a
loader equipped with a 2000 mm bucket. Boulders shall be indigenous material
removed from excavations and stockpiled during earthwork
KEO/21-7387-0004 31 2000 / 3 Earthworks

1.04 SUBMITTALS:
A. Construction Activity Pollution Prevention Plan to prevent pollution due to Soil Erosion,
Waterway Sedimentation and Airborne Dust Generation. A plan need to be drawn in
line with EPA Construction General Permit ,(Copy is available for inspection with the
Engineer ).The EPA’s Construction General Permit outlines requirements of NPDES (
National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System). The Affected Area need to be
graveled at perimeter and sloped inward. The entry of Vehicles need to be graveled
to prevent soil carry over.
B. Method Statement: Submit prior to starting work, description of methods sequence of

excavating, and the type of equipment proposed.
C. Technical Data:
1. Catalogues of heavy equipment used for excavation and earth removal.
D. Shop Drawings
1. Prepared by or under the supervision of a qualified professional engineer
2. Shop drawings including plan of complete site showing area and extent of
excavation and capping of any existing underground utilities to remain.
a. Shop drawings shall show profiles, formation levels, pits, transitions etc.
E. Shop Drawings
1. Prepared by or under the supervision of a qualified professional engineer
2. Shop drawings including plan of complete site showing area and extent of
excavation and capping of any existing underground utilities to remain.
a. Shop drawings shall show profiles, formation levels, pits, transitions etc.
3. Shop Drawings and Structural Calculations for excavation support system:
a. Shop drawings and structural calculations shall bear the official seal and
signature of the Contractor’s registered engineer described in this
Section of the Specifications.
b. Show engineering calculations, fabrication, installation, anchorage, tie-
backs if any, layout, member sizes, connection details, into rock
anchoring, types, grades and strengths of materials, standards for
compliance of materials, excavations, dewatering.
F. Samples: For the following:

1. 14-kg samples sealed in airtight containers, of each proposed soil material from
on-site or borrow sources.
2. Water for soil compaction (1.5 litres).
G. Erosion control plan.
H. Structural fill: A specialist design and build foundation contractor with extensive
experience (minimum 15 years) in the type of works required. The work shall be
engineered by a fully qualified registered geotechnical/foundation design engineer
with ten years minimum experience and licensed to design structural fill in the Country
where the project is being executed. This engineer may be required to demonstrate
proven experience with the design and engineering of this type of work and shall
submit professional qualifications to the Engineer for approval.
1. Delegated Design Responsibility: Notwithstanding the drawings and other
information provided, the specialist contractor shall be fully responsible for the
design, detailing of the works described herein, including (without limitation) the
KEO/21-7387-0004 31 2000 / 4 Earthworks

comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer,
which shall meet the specified performance and design requirements indicated
on drawings and Geotechnical Report and which shall be fit for their intended
purpose. The Contractor indemnifies the Employer and Design Consultant from
any and all claims, costs and expenses arising from any loss or damage in
connection with any error in or failure of the Contractor’s designed portion of
the Works.
2. The contractor is fully responsible to perform an independent soil investigation
report to confirm the soil conditions as indicated in Geotechnical Report are
correct and report any discrepancies to consultant for review prior to start of
any foundation works.
3. Method Statement: Before starting the work, the Contractor shall submit a
“Method Statement” and design describing in detail the procedures, materials
and testing regime to be followed. The method used should be well
established and the contractor should demonstrate that the method has been
used successfully on similar projects and soil conditions
a. Possible specialist methods:
1) Vibro compaction
2) Dynamic compaction
3) Vibro replacement
4) Densipact
4. Structural fill: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a
qualified testing agency:
a. Provide fill having the required design bearing pressure and settlement
limitations indicated on the drawings. Fill shall comply with the minimum
requirements described in this specification, together with any other
characteristics required for the specialist placement method proposed.
b. Refer to Geotechnical Report for the foundation and fill.
I. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test
results for compliance of the following with requirements indicated:
1. Classification according to ASTM D 2487 of each on-site and borrow soil
material proposed for fill and backfill.
2. Laboratory compaction curve according to ASTM D 698, ASTM D 1557 for
each on-site and borrow soil material proposed for fill and backfill.
3. Report of actual unconfined compressive strength and/or results of bearing
tests of each stratum testing.
4. Particle size analysis shall be in accordance with ASTM D422-63.
5. Sieve analysis shall be in accordance with ASTM C136 and ASTM D422 on
sieves conforming to ASTM E11.
6. Liquid Limit and Plasticity Index: One liquid limit and plasticity index shall be
performed for each sieve analysis. Liquid limit and plasticity index shall be in
accordance with ASTM D4318.
J. Pre-excavation Photographs or Videotape: Show existing conditions of adjoining

construction and site improvements, including finish surfaces, that might be
misconstrued as damage caused by earthwork operations. Submit before earthwork
begins.
K. Excavation Supervisor: Allow for employing full time on site, an experienced and
qualified excavation supervisor. Submit with the Tender, full resume details of the
Supervisor. No excavation shall start until the Engineer has approved the nominated
Supervisor.
KEO/21-7387-0004 31 2000 / 5 Earthworks
A. Executer Qualifications: Executer with minimum 10 years proven experience in similar

job and extend required for this Project.
B. Structural fill contractor’s qualification: Specialist contractor with extensive experience.

The method used should be well established and the contractor should demonstrate
that the method has been used successfully on similar projects and soil conditions.
C. Testing and Inspection: Testing and inspection shall be the responsibility of the
Contractor and shall be performed at no additional cost to the Employer.
1. Testing Facilities: Test shall be performed by an approved commercial testing
laboratory. No work requiring testing will be permitted until the facilities have
been inspected and approved by the Engineer.
2. Notice Period: Provide agreed notice to enable the Engineer to be present, if
so desired, at whatever inspections or tests are performed.
a. Notice Period: No Less Than
b. Inspection on Site 1 Day.
c. Tests performed on Site 1 Day.
d. Material inspections or tests to be witnessed offsite 5 Days.
3. Accept responsibility for providing, controlling, calibrating and maintaining
inspection, measuring and test equipment suitable to demonstrate that the
Works comply with the specified requirement. Make this or similar equipment
available to the engineer whenever required for examination of the Works.
D. Records of weather conditions:

1. Keep a daily record of the maximum, minimum and average outside
temperatures.
2. Humidity of wind.
A. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Employer or

others unless permitted in writing and then only after arranging to provide temporary
utility services according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.
2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without written permission.
3. Contact utility-locator service for area where Project is located before
excavating.
B. Demolish and completely remove from site existing underground utilities. Coordinate
with utility companies to shut off services if lines are active.
1. The location of known services shall be confirmed by trial pits prior to
excavation works.
2. Obtain the authorities’ existing services NOC to proceed with the earth works
and obtain all necessary information and drawings to identify the existing
services.
C. Acquaintance With Existing Conditions

1. Through study of all contract documents, study of geotechnical report,
previously prepared for this project, and by careful examination of the site,
become informed as to the nature and location of the work, the nature of
KEO/21-7387-0004 31 2000 / 6 Earthworks

subsurface soil conditions, the location of the groundwater table and
groundwater conditions, the character, quality and quantity of the materials to
be encountered in excavations, the character of equipment and facilities
needed preliminary to and during the prosecution of the work, the general and
local conditions, and all other matters which can in any way affect the work.
D. Subsurface Exploration Data

1. The data on indicated subsurface conditions are not intended as
representations or warranties of the accuracy or continuity between soil
borings. It is expressly understood that the Employer will not be responsible
for interpretations or conclusions drawn therefrom by the Contractor. The data
are made available for the convenience of the Contractor.
2. Additional test borings and other exploratory operations may be made to
ascertain site conditions at no cost to the Employer.
E. Nature of Excavation:
1. Include for excavating in any type of ground encountered.
2. Include for breaking up rock materials, materials so firmly cemented as to
possess the characteristics of rock, concrete or masonry structures, or any
other hard or compacted materials encountered in excavations, all at the
Contractor's cost.
F. Protection
1. Barricade open excavations made as part of earthwork operations and post
with warning lights. Operate warning lights as recommended by the Engineer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 SOIL MATERIALS
A. General: Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are
not available from excavations.
1. To be free from plastic fines and weakly cemented lumps of sand.
2. To be homogeneous and at the optimum moisture content for compaction
purposes when placed.
3. Sand layers which present liquefaction potential below structural filling must be
compacted so that they reach a minimum cone resistance of 5 MPa.
4. Any slopes required will be as shown on drawings.
5. Water: Water used for compacting fill shall be clean and free from oil, grease,
organic matter, suspended fine sediment and other deleterious substances.
B. Satisfactory Soil Materials: Fill, embankment, and subgrade within the building lines
of structures shall be those materials classified in ASTM D 2487 soil classification
groups as GW, GP, GM, SW, SP and SM; free of rock or gravel larger than 50 m in
any dimension, debris, waste, vegetation and other deleterious matter. In all other
areas, satisfactory soil materials shall comply with ASTM D 2487 soil classification
groups GW, GP, GM, SW, SP and SM and also shall include GC and SC. The soil
shall contain less than 30% of the fines passing the 75 micrometer sieve and not more
than 40% passing the 4.75 mm sieve. The plasticity index of the fines faction shall be
less than 12%.
KEO/21-7387-0004 31 2000 / 7 Earthworks

C. Unsatisfactory Soil Materials: ASTM D 2487 soil classification groups ML. MH, CL,
CH, OL, OH, and PT. Satisfactory subgrade soil which are rendered unsuitable by the
Contractor due to inadequate site and/or excavation drainage or due to negligence by
working (remolding) or compacting otherwise satisfactory in place subgrade soils
under adverse moisture conditions, as determined by the Geotechnical Engineer, and
shall be removed and replaced with satisfactory fill material or shall be worked or
altered until rendered suitable as determined by the Geotechnical Engineer at no
D. Backfill and Fill: Satisfactory soil materials.
E. Base Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel,

crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 95 percent
passing a 37.5-mm sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 (0.075-mm)
sieve.
F. Engineered Fill (Structural Fill): Materials for structural fill shall consist of granular,
well graded soils having a maximum particle size of 75 mm and contain less than 12%
by weight of material passing the 75 micrometer sieve. Where structural fill is used as
a sub base material for slabs on grade without lean mix blinding the surface shall be
blinded with sand or crushed fine material to form a smooth level surface with a
tolerance of ± 20 mm. The plasticity index of the fines fraction shall be less than 6%.
This material shall be defined as either soil classification GW or SW in accordance
with ASTM D2487, Method of Classification. Structural fill shall be imported from local
source and must have low sulfate and chloride concentration not exceeding 1200 mg/L
for sulfate and 500 mg/L for chloride.
G. Bedding Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel,

crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; except with 100 percent
passing a 25-mm sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 (0.075-mm)
sieve.
H. Drainage Course: Washed, narrowly graded mixture of crushed stone, or crushed or

uncrushed gravel; ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 57; with 100 percent
passing a 37.5-mm sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 8 (2.36-mm) sieve.
I. Cohesionless Soil Materials: Cohesionless soil materials include materials classified

in ASTM D2487 as GW, GP, SW and SP. Materials classified as GM and SM will be
identified as cohesionless only when the fines are nonplastic.
J. Cohesive Soil Materials: Cohesive soil materials include materials classified in ASTM
D2487 as GC, SC, ML, CL, MH and CH.
2.02 EQUIPMENT
A. General
1. The equipment utilized in carrying out earthwork and related work shall be in
good working conditions, and the Contractor shall maintain them in such
condition for the duration of the Contract.
2. The Contractor shall supply adequate equipment as deemed necessary for the
proper execution of the Work.
KEO/21-7387-0004 31 2000 / 8 Earthworks

3. The Engineer shall have any piece of equipment removal that is not in good
working order. Removal shall be at the cost of the Contractor.
KEO/21-7387-0004 31 2000 / 9 Earthworks

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine related work and surfaces before starting the work of this Section. Report
in writing, conditions, which will prevent the proper provision of this work. Beginning
the work of this Section without reporting unsuitable conditions shall constitute
acceptance of conditions by the Contractor. Any required removal, repair, or
replacement of the work caused by unsuitable conditions should be done at no
3.02 PREPARATION
created by earthwork operations.
B. Provide erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and

discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and
walkways.
C. Make provision for all temporary work, scaffolding, staging, timbering, strutting and
other works as may be necessary and required for the proper, safe and efficient
performance and construction of the works intended and all works incidental thereto
in an expeditious manner. Be responsible for any damage done to roads, mains,
cables, including safety to persons and property, by the execution of the work.
D. The cost of furnishing, placing and removing the temporary works shall be included in
the Tender for the work.
E. Examine related work and surfaces before starting the work of this Section. Report
in writing, conditions, which will prevent the proper provision of this work. Beginning
the work of this Section without reporting unsuitable conditions shall constitute
acceptance of conditions by the Contractor. Any required removal, repair, or
replacement of the work caused by unsuitable conditions should be done at no
F. Be acquainted with all site conditions. Should utilities not shown on Drawings be
found during excavation, promptly submit Contractor’s proposed action. Failure to do
so will result in liability for any and all damage thereto arising from operations
subsequent to discovery of such utilities not shown on Drawings.
3.03 DEWATERING
A. Prevent surface water and ground water from entering excavations, from ponding on
prepared subgrades, and from flooding Project site and surrounding area.
B. Protect subgrades from softening, undermining, washout, and damage by rain or water
accumulation.
KEO/21-7387-0004 31 2000 / 10 Earthworks

1. Reroute surface water runoff away from excavated areas. Do not allow water
to accumulate in excavations. Do not use excavated trenches as temporary
drainage ditches.
3.04 STRUCTURAL FILL
A. Structural fill to be compacted to achieve the required bearing pressure by one of the
following methods:
1. As per Sub-Clause 10.7.2, along with geosynthetics reinforced mat indicated
within Volume 4.1, Appendix A, Geotechnical Investigation Report.
2. Vibration by Dynamic Compaction.
3. By vibration and displacement of fill using Geopiers and Vibro Piers
3.05 EXCAVATION, GENERAL
A. Generally:
1. Excavate to the depths and profiles shown on the Drawings or as directed.
2. Allow sufficient working space where necessary for the erection of earthwork
support system.
3. Report any unexpected subsurface conditions and discontinue affected work in
area, until notified to resume work.
4. Any soft material, or non-compactable material found at the bottom of
excavated areas shall be removed and replaced with acceptable bedding
material, placed in lifts not exceeding 150mm and compacted as further
described.
B. Adjacent Excavations:
1. Where an excavation encroaches below a line drawn at an angle of 60° from
the horizontal from the nearest formation level of another higher excavation, the
lower excavation, all work within it, and backfilling thereto shall be completed
before the higher excavation is made.
C. Excavated Formations:
1. In made up ground excavate foundations down to a natural bearing formation
of undisturbed subsoil, unless otherwise instructed.
2. Obtain instructions if a natural bearing formation of undisturbed subsoil:
a. Is obtained at a lesser depth than that shown on the Soils Report.
b. Is not obtained at the depth shown on the Soils Report.
3. If, after inspection, formation becomes unsuitable for any reason, excavate
further and backfill with approved material all at the Contractor's expense.
D. Treatment of formations Generally:

1. Trim excavations to required profiles and levels.
2. Remove all loose material.
E. Removal and Relocation for Existing Services:

1. Take responsibility for the location of, the diverting where necessary and the
removal where required, of all existing services within the boundary of the site.
The necessary removal or diversion work shall be carried out in conjunction
with the relevant Authorities and, where required, by the Authorities
themselves.
KEO/21-7387-0004 31 2000 / 11 Earthworks

2. Take responsibility for the locating of all services within the Site and establish,
in conjunction with the Authorities concerned, the position of all service lines
and whether they are currently in use or not. Take full responsibility for any
damage either direct or consequential, which may occur due to any interruption
caused by his work in any supply or disposal service line within the site whether
the damage occurs within the site or outside the site. Indemnify the Employer
against any claims from any person whatsoever in respect of such damage.
3. Comply with all regulations of the relevant authorities relating to the removal or
diversion of existing utilities and give all notices, obtain all necessary permits
and pay all charges in connection therewith. The Contractor's Tender shall be
deemed to include for all such charges and further Payment for such items will
not be entertained.
4. Locate and take up all existing redundant electric cables, surface and foul
drainage lines, manholes, water supply lines and telephone cables and remove
from the site.
5. All redundant pipes, cables and the like from this work shall become the
property of the Contractor unless the relevant Authorities have statutory claim
on such items. The establishment of the ownership of all such redundant pipes
or cables and the like shall be the responsibility of the Contractor and no claims
for additional costs will be entertained by the Employer in respect of disputes
regarding the rightful ownership of such items.
6. Where required, divert all services still in use and provide all temporary works
necessary to maintain in full functional order all services not being taken out
and removed in the course of this Contract.
7. All diversions and temporary works required shall be in full accordance with the
regulations, requirements and specifications of the relevant Authority and shall
be carried out with the permission and approval of such Authorities.
3.06 EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION
that could develop during excavation support and protection system operations.
1. Shore, support and protect utilities encountered and designated to be retained
2. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks or other adjacent facilities without
permission from the authorities. Provide alternate routes around closed or
obstructed traffic ways if required.
B. Locate excavation support and protection systems clear of permanent construction so

that forming and finishing of concrete surfaces is not impeded.
C. Monitor excavation support and protection systems daily during excavation progress
and for as long as excavation remains open. Promptly correct bulges, breakage, or
other evidence of movement to ensure that excavation support and protection systems
remain stable.
D. Promptly repair damages to adjacent facilities caused by installing excavation support

and protection systems
3.07 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES
KEO/21-7387-0004 31 2000 / 12 Earthworks

A. Excavate to indicated elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus or minus
20 mm. Extend excavations a sufficient distance from structures for placing and
removing concrete formwork, for installing services and other construction, and for
inspections.
1. Excavations for Footings and Foundations: Do not disturb bottom of
excavation. Excavate by hand to final grade just before placing concrete
reinforcement. Trim bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid base
to receive other work.
2. Excavation for Underground Tanks, Basins, and Mechanical or Electrical Utility
Structures: Excavate to elevations and dimensions indicated within a tolerance
of plus or minus 25 mm. Do not disturb bottom of excavations intended for
bearing surface.
3.08 EXCAVATION FOR WALKS AND PAVEMENTS
A. Excavate surfaces under walks and pavements to indicated lines, cross sections,
elevations, and subgrades.
3.09 EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY TRENCHES
A. Excavate trenches to indicated gradients, lines, depths, and elevations.
B. The sides of trenches shall have a gradient adapted to the stability of the soil.
C. Excavate trenches to uniform widths to provide the following clearance on each side
of pipe or conduit. Excavate trench walls vertically from trench bottom to 300 mm
higher than top of pipe or conduit, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Clearance: 300 mm each side of pipe or conduit or as indicated.
D. Trench Bottoms: Excavate and shape trench bottoms to provide uniform bearing and
support of pipes and conduit. Shape subgrade to provide continuous support for bells,
joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits. Remove
projecting stones and sharp objects along trench subgrade.
1. For pipes and conduit less than 150 mm in nominal diameter and flat-bottomed,
multiple-duct conduit units, hand-excavate trench bottoms and support pipe and
conduit on an undisturbed subgrade.
2. For pipes and conduit 150 mm or larger in nominal diameter, shape bottom of
trench to support bottom 90 degrees of pipe circumference. Fill depressions
with tamped sand backfill.
3. Excavate trenches 150 mm deeper than elevation required in rock or other
unyielding bearing material to allow for bedding course.
E. All manholes and other structures shall be founded on undisturbed ground or

thoroughly compacted ground. Excavation shall be carried out to the grade necessary.
F. Hand excavation must be applied along the parts where existing cables, water, gas
and oil mains, sewers etc. cross the trench or in the main roads where traffic is likely
to be unreasonably disturbed by the use of machines. In other places hand or
machine excavation may be used. Excavation by machine must not normally be
executed deeper than 15cm above the bottom of the trench. Be held responsible for
making good all damage to road surfaces and private lands caused by the other use
of mechanical excavators.
KEO/21-7387-0004 31 2000 / 13 Earthworks
G. Excavate for utility connections by machine or micro-tunneling as required and
instructed by the local authorities.
H. If, due to negligence or error, any excavations are taken down to a level lower than is
shown on the Drawings, fill in the void so formed to the proper level with approved
material in layers not exceeding 15 cm thick which shall be thoroughly compacted by
tamping. The finished subgrade shall be prepared accurately by means of hand tools.
If concrete is necessary for this filling, then provide this at no additional cost.
I. Trench Excavation in poor soil and refilling to grade:

1. Examine for any evidence of weak ground material which may be found below
the indicated levels and report the same in writing before executing any
concrete structures, pipe laying or other work.
2. Where the bottom of the trench at subgrade is found to be unsuitable or to
include ashes, cinders, any type of refuse, vegetable or other organic material,
or large pieces or fragments of inorganic material which should be removed,
excavate and remove such unsuitable material to the width and depth required.
Before the pipe is laid or the concrete placed, the subgrade shall be made up
by backfilling with an approved material in layers not exceeding 15 cm thick.
The layers shall be thoroughly compacted by tamping as directed so as to
provide a uniform and continuous bearing and support of the structure and of
the pipe at every point between joint holes. The finished subgrade shall be
prepared accurately by means of hand tools.
3.10 BRACED AND SHEETED EXCAVATION
A. Open-cut excavation should be braced and sheeted adequate to the strength design
to protect persons, property, traffic on the work or to prevent caving and harmful
sinking. Be responsible for adequacy of any required sheeting and bracing. Be
responsible for any accidents to people, any damage done to roads, mains, cables,
pipes, sewers, etc. by the execution of the work. When close sheeting is required, it
shall be so driven as to prevent adjacent soil from entering the excavation either below
or through such sheeting. Sheeting and bracing shall be provided as a standard for
excavations 1.50m and above depth. Where sheeting and bracing are used, trench
widths shall be increased accordingly. The strength design of the system of supports
should be based on the principles of soil mechanics as they apply to the materials
encountered. Sheeting and bracing must always comply with approved safety
requirements.
B. The Engineer’s Representative reserves the right to order the sheeting to be driven to
the full depth of the excavation or to such additional depths as may be required for the
protection of the work.
C. Bracing must be removed when the backfilling has reached the respective levels of
such bracing. Sheeting must be removed after the backfilling has been completed or
has been brought up to such an elevation as to permit its safe removal.
3.11 APPROVAL OF SUBGRADE
A. Report when excavations have reached required subgrade.
KEO/21-7387-0004 31 2000 / 14 Earthworks

B. Proof roll subgrade with heavy pneumatic-tired equipment to identify soft pockets and
areas of excess yielding. Do not proof roll wet or saturated subgrades.
1. Completely proof-roll subgrade in one direction, repeating proof-rolling in
direction perpendicular to first direction.
C. Reconstruct subgrades damaged by rain, accumulated water, or construction

activities, as directed.
3.12 UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION
A. Where such excess excavation is carried out without approval, necessary extra
backfilling shall be at no expense to the Employer.
3.13 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS
A. Stockpile borrow soil materials and satisfactory excavated soil materials. Stockpile
soil materials without intermixing. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface
water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.
1. Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations.
3.14 BACKFILL
A. Place and compact backfill in excavations promptly, but not before completing the
following:
1. Construction below finish grade including, where applicable, dampproofing and
waterproofing.
2. Surveying locations of underground utilities for record documents.
3. Inspecting and testing underground utilities.
4. Removing concrete formwork.
5. Removing trash and debris.
6. Removing temporary shoring and bracing, and sheeting.
7. Installing permanent or temporary horizontal bracing on horizontally supported
walls.
B. Place backfill in layers not exceeding 200mm.
3.15 UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL
A. Place and compact bedding course on trench bottoms and where indicated. Shape
bedding course to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and
for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits.
B. Backfill trenches excavated under footings and within 450 mm of bottom of footings
with satisfactory soil compacted in layers not exceeding 200mm; fill with concrete to
elevation of bottom of footings.
C. The trench for pipes to a depth of 30cm above the top of the pipe shall be backfilled
by hand or by approved mechanical methods. Use special care in placing this portion
of the backfill so as to avoid injuring or moving the pipe. The backfill material shall be
placed in 15cm layers and compacted by tamping.
KEO/21-7387-0004 31 2000 / 15 Earthworks

D. Backfill under permanent pavement shall be placed in 15cm layers and compacted by
tamping. Power tampers of an effective approved type shall be used.
E. Coordinate backfilling with utilities testing.
F. Fill voids with approved backfill materials while shoring and bracing, and as sheeting
is removed.
G. Place and compact final backfill of satisfactory soil material to final subgrade elevation.
H. Install warning tape directly above utilities, 300 mm below finished grade, except 150
mm below subgrade under pavements and slabs or as directed.
3.16 SOIL FILL
A. Preparation: Remove vegetation, topsoil, debris, unsatisfactory soil materials,

obstructions, and deleterious materials from ground surface before placing fills.
B. Plow, scarify, bench, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal
so fill material will bond with existing material.
C. Place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations as follows:

1. Under grass and planted areas, use satisfactory soil material.
2. Under walks and pavements, use satisfactory soil material.
3. Under building slabs, use engineered fill.
4. Under footings and foundations, use engineered fill.
3.17 SOIL MOISTURE CONTROL
A. Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill layer before
compaction to within 2 percent of optimum moisture content.
1. Do not place backfill or fill material on surfaces that are muddy.
2. Remove and replace, or scarify and air-dry, otherwise satisfactory soil material
that exceeds optimum moisture content by 2 percent and is too wet to compact
to specified dry unit weight.
3.18 COMPACTION OF SOIL BACKFILLS AND FILLS
A. Place backfill and fill materials in layers not more than 200 mm in loose depth for
material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 100 mm in
loose depth for material compacted by hand-operated tampers.
B. Place backfill and fill materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations,
and uniformly along the full length of each structure.
C. Compact soil to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry unit weight
according to ASTM D 1557:
1. Under structures, building slabs, steps, and pavements, scarify and re-compact
top 300 mm of existing subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material at 95
percent.
KEO/21-7387-0004 31 2000 / 16 Earthworks

2. Under planting areas, scarify and recompact top 150 mm below subgrade and
compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 90percent.
3. For utility trenches, compact each layer of initial and final backfill soil material
at 90 percent.
3.19 GRADING
A. General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free from irregular surface
changes. Comply with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines,
and elevations indicated.
1. Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and new grades.
2. Cut out soft spots, fill low spots, and trim high spots to comply with required
surface tolerances.
B. Grading inside Building Lines: Finish subgrade to a tolerance of 13 mm when tested

with a 3-m straightedge.
C. Site Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent
ponding. Finish subgrades to required elevations within the following tolerances:
1. Planting areas or Unpaved Areas: Plus or minus 25 mm.
2. Pavements: Plus or minus 13 mm.
D. Grading inside Building Lines: Finish subgrade to a tolerance of 13 mm when tested

with a 3-m straightedge.
3.20 DRAINAGE COURSE
A. Place drainage course on subgrades free of mud.
B. Under slabs-on-grade, place drainage course on prepared subgrade and as follows:

1. Compact drainage course to required cross sections and thickness to not less
than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698.
2. When compacted thickness of drainage course is 150 mm or less, place
materials in a single layer.
3. When compacted thickness of drainage course exceeds 150 mm, place
materials in equal layers, with no layer more than 150 mm thick or less than 75
mm thick when compacted.
3.21 SUBBASE AND BASE COURSES
A. Place subbase and base course on subgrades free of mud.

1. On prepared subgrade, place subbase and base course under pavements and
walks as follows:
B. Install separation geotextile on prepared subgrade according to manufacturer's written

instructions, overlapping sides and ends.
C. Place base course material over subbase course under hot-mix asphalt pavement.
1. Shape subbase and base course to required crown elevations and cross-slope
grades.
2. Place subbase and base 150 m or less in compacted thickness in a single layer.
KEO/21-7387-0004 31 2000 / 17 Earthworks

3. Place subbase and base course that exceeds 150 mm in compacted thickness
in layers of equal thickness, with no compacted layer more than 150 mm thick
or less than 75 mm thick.
4. Compact subbase[and base course at optimum moisture content to required
grades, lines, cross sections, and thickness to not less than 95 percent of
maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 1557.
D. Pavement Shoulders: Place shoulders along edges of subbase and base course to
prevent lateral movement. Construct shoulders, at least 300 mm wide, of satisfactory
soil materials and compact simultaneously with each subbase and base layer to not
less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 1557.
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent geotechnical engineering testing

agency to perform field quality-control testing.
B. Proceed with subsequent earthwork only after test results for previously completed
work comply with requirements.
C. Testing of fill Materials:

1. Comply with ASTM D1556 and ASTM D1557 as applicable, for executing tests.
2. ASTM D 2937 shall be used only for soft, fine-grained, cohesive soils.
3. Sieve analyses shall be performed in accordance with ASTM C 117, C 127, C
128, C 136, and D 422; sieves shall conform to ASTM E 11; and liquid limit and
plasticity index determinations shall be performed in accordance with ASTM D
4318.
4. Carry out density tests on representative samples prior to placing.
5. Carry out gradation of materials prior to placing as the work proceeds.
6. Carry out site density tests of materials as the work proceeds and as follows:
a. Engineered fill (Structural fill):
5) One test for each 500 cu.m placed.
6) One test whenever there is a change of gradation or placement
conditions.
b. General fill:
7) One test for each 3000 cu.m placed.
8) One test whenever there is a change of gradation or placement
conditions.
9) Execute site density tests for compaction at a minimum depth of
100mm below compacted surface.
10) Execute a full compaction test or a one-point compaction test in
conjunction with each site density determination.
11) Execute a gradation test with each site density test and whenever
there is an apparent change in material being placed.
12) Execute the following site density tests and laboratory moisture
density tests to evaluate compaction achieved:
13) One test for every 200-400 cu.m of back-fill in trenches or
surrounding structures.
14) One test for every full shift of compaction operations on mass
earthwork.
KEO/21-7387-0004 31 2000 / 18 Earthworks

D. When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills have not achieved
degree of compaction specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace
soil to depth required; recompact and retest until specified compaction is obtained.
3.23 PROTECTION
A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic and erosion. Keep
free of trash and debris.
B. Repair and re-establish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially

completed surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction
due to subsequent construction operations or weather conditions.
1. Scarify or remove and replace soil material to depth as directed; reshape and
recompact.
C. Where settling occurs before Defects Liability Period elapses, remove finished
surfacing, backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing.
1. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match
adjacent work, and eliminate evidence of restoration to the greatest extent
possible.
A. Disposal: Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste material, including

unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of it off Employer’s property.
END OF SECTION
KEO/21-7387-0004 31 2000 / 19 Earthworks

SECTION 32 1116.13
SUBBASE AND BASE COURSES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL
A. All sub-base and base courses, whether aggregate, bitumen, or sand asphalt, shall be
furnished and installed as indicated on the Drawings and in accordance with the
requirements of the Section III, Sub-base and Base Courses, of the Municipality of Abu
Dhabi City (ADM) Standard Specification.
B. The sub-base and base course thicknesses are indicated on the drawings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Aggregate sub-base and base courses shall consist of natural and/or crushed, screened
fine and coarse aggregates blended to the specified gradation. The aggregates for sub-
base and base courses shall be blended in a central mixing plant, as specified in the
Standard Specifications. Alternatively, the desired gradation for the aggregate sub-base
and base courses may be achieved by processing through gradation screens at the
crusher or quarry.
B. Use and/or mixing of the site excavated materials or borrow materials with the supplied
aggregate materials for sub-base and base courses is not acceptable for the
construction of the aggregate sub-base or base course layers.
2.02 GRADATION TOLERANCE
A. The final gradation of aggregate sub-base and base courses delivered to site, as
proposed by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer shall be subject to the
following tolerances during construction:
1. Passing 25mm sieve and larger ± 6%
2. Passing sieves 4.75mm (No. 4) to 19mm (No. ¾”) ± 5%
3. Passing sieves 425μm (No. 40) to 2mm (No. 10) ± 4%
4. Passing 75μm (No. 200) ± 2%
2.03 RECYCLED CRUSHED AGGREGATE SUB-BASE
A. General
KEO/21-7387-0004 32 1116.13 / 1 Subbase and Base Courses

1. This Specification has been prepared to meet the requirements of the Order
issued by the Executive Council of the Emirate of Abu Dhabi, dated 26th July,
2010, under number BT9G25/2010 requiring the mandatory use (subject to
availability) of a minimum of 40% aggregate (by volume) of recycled construction
and demolition waste in roads projects, as well as any other infrastructure
projects throughout the Emirate of Abu Dhabi.
2. The works described below shall consist of furnishing and placing one (1) or
more layers of Recycled Crushed Aggregate (RCA), including additives if
required, on a prepared surface in accordance with the Specifications and in
conformity with the lines, grades, thicknesses and typical cross-sections shown
on the plans or established by the Engineer.
B. Materials
1. Materials shall conform to the requirements for the class of "Recycled Crushed
Aggregate Base Course" specified on the plans or directed by the Engineer. All
RCA sub-base material shall be free from dirt, organic matter, shale or other
deleterious matter and shall be of such quality that it will bind readily to form a
firm stable sub-base.
2. Components: Crushed concrete aggregates shall consist of clean, hard, durable,
angular fragments of rock, concrete and sand fragments of uniform quality
complying with the general requirements specified in Clause 2.2,
3. The use of crusher fines passing the 4.75 sieve which are not produced from
crushing concrete, shall be subject to approval in writing by the Superintendent to
the proposed source and nature of these materials and the proposed amounts to
be added.
4. Physical Requirements: All base course RCA shall conform to the physical
requirements described below, for each Class of Aggregate.
5. Foreign material in the fraction retained on the 4.75 sieve shall not exceed the
percentages by mass specified:
Foreign Material Type %

High density materials such as metal, 3
glass, brick, and asphalt
Low density materials such as plastic, 1
rubber, plaster, clay lumps and other friable
material
Wood and other vegetable or 0.2
decomposable matter
C. Grading Requirements
1. The material for "Granular RCA Sub-base" shall conform to the requirements
specified for the class of sub-base noted on the plans. The requirements for each
class of sub-base are as follows:
2. Class A Sub-base: Class A Sub-base shall consist of well-graded RCA with sand
and silt, conforming to the following requirements:
ASTM (D1241-00)
Sieve Percent Passing
50mm 100
9.5mm 30 - 65

4.75mm 25 – 55
2.00mm 15 - 40
0.425mm 8 - 20
0.075mm 2-8
Loss by Abrasion Test (AASHTO T 96) 40% maximum
Liquid Limit (AASHTO T89) 25 maximum
Plasticity Index (AASHTO T 90) 4 maximum
Sand Equivalent (AASHTO T 176) 25 minimum
CBR on remoulded sample (BS 1377 120% minimum
Test 16) after 4 days soaking
3. Class B Sub-base: Class B Sub-base shall consist of uniform mixtures of RCA
with sand, silt and clay, conforming to the following requirements:
ASTM (D1241-00)
Percent Passing
Sieve Size
50.0mm 100
25.0mm 75 - 95
9.5mm 40 - 75
4.75mm 30 - 65
2.00mm 20 - 45
0.425mm 15 - 30
0.075mm 5 - 15
The grading is based on aggregates of uniform specific gravity, and the

percent passing the various sieves are subject to correction by the Engineer
when aggregates of varying specific gravities are used.

Liquid Limit (AASHTO T 89) 25 maximum
4. Class C Sub-base: Class C Sub-base shall consist of well-graded sand-RCA

conforming to the following requirements:
ASTM (D1241-00)
Percent Passing
Sieve Size
25.0mm 100
9.5mm 50 - 85
4.75mm 35 - 65
2.00mm 25 - 50
0.425mm 15 - 30
0.075mm 5 - 15

Liquid Limit (AASHTO T 89) 25 maximum
D. Acceptance
1. When the stationary plant method is used, the aggregate will be accepted
immediately following mixing, based on periodic samples taken from the pug mill
output. When a road mix method is used, the aggregate will be accepted after
necessary blending and before laying, based on samples taken from the
combined windrow for each layer. Acceptance of the material by the Engineer
does not constitute acceptance of the sub-base, only that the material is
approved for use in the sub-base.
E. Equipment
1. Equipment shall be according to the type and number outlined in the Contractor's
detailed Programme of Work, as approved by the Engineer.
F. Construction Requirements
1. Groundwater Levels and Protection: The Contractor must establish the high
water table levels (HWT) along the length of the road, relative to the accepted
National benchmark (New Abu Dhabi Datum (NADD)). Should the base of the
proposed road be within 1 metre of the HWT, an impermeable barrier will be
required to be installed to prevent groundwater coming in contact with the RCA
sub-base.
2. Preparation of Subgrade: The Contractor shall, as part of the Work of sub-base,
prepare the sub grade. The formation of the subgrade will vary by either placing
the "Granular RCA Sub-base" on the roadway surface as previously constructed
or by excavating sufficient material from the roadway and placing the "Granular
RCA Sub-base" on the subgrade obtained thereby. In either case, the subgrade,
shall as hereinafter described, be brought to the lines, grades and typical section
shown on the plans for the bottom of the "Granular RCA Sub-base". All soft and
yielding material or other portions of the subgrade, which will not compact
readily, when rolled or tamped, shall be removed, and all loose rock or boulders
found in the excavation shall be removed or broken off to a depth of not less than
fifteen (15) centimetres below the surface of the subgrade. All holes or
depressions made by the removal of material, as described above, shall be filled
with approved material, and the whole subgrade brought to line and grade and
compacted to density designated on the plans or directed by the Engineer.
3. Spreading: Sub-base aggregates shall be spread on subgrade which has been
approved by the Engineer. Sub-base which has been placed on a subgrade not
approved by the Engineer shall be removed at the Contractor's expense.
4. Sub-base aggregate shall be spread on the approved subgrade in layers not
exceeding fifteen (15) centimetres in compacted depth. Spreading shall be done
by means of approved mechanical box spreaders, distributing the material to the
required width and loose thickness. Where the required sub-base thickness is
greater than fifteen (15) centimetres, the material shall be placed in layers of
equal thickness, in no case shall a layer be less than seven and one half (7.5)

centimetres thick. Under no circumstances shall Class A Sub-base be dumped in
a pile on the Subgrade.
5. The material shall be handled so as to avoid segregation. Segregated materials
shall be remixed until uniform. Suitable precautions shall be taken to prevent
rutting of the subgrade during the spreading of the sub-base materials. No
hauling or placement of material will be permitted when, in the judgment of the
Engineer, the weather or road conditions are such that the hauling operations will
cause cutting or rutting of the subgrade or cause contamination of the sub-base
material.
6. Compaction: The moisture content of the sub-base material shall be adjusted
prior to compaction, by watering with approved sprinkler trucks or by drying out,
as directed by the Engineer, to that required to obtain the specified density for
sub-base. Sub-base shall be compacted to an average value of 100% of the
M.D.D. as determined according to AASHTO T 180 Method D with no single
value below ninety eight (98%).
7. The sub-base aggregate shall be compacted by means of approved compaction
equipment progressing gradually from the outside towards the centre with each
succeeding pass uniformly over-lapping the previous pass. Rolling shall
continuous until the entire thickness of each layer is thoroughly and uniformly
compacted to the specified density. Rolling shall be accompanied by sufficient
blading in a manner approved by the Engineer, to insure a smooth surface free
from ruts or ridges and having the proper section and crown.
8. The surface of the material shall on completion of compaction be well closed,
free from movement under the compaction plant and free from compaction
planes, ridges, cracks, or loose materials.
9. Any area inaccessible to normal compaction equipment shall be compacted by
means of mechanical tampers until satisfactory compaction is obtained.
10. Each layer of sub-base course must be completely compacted and approved by
the Engineer, prior to the delivery of materials for a succeeding layer of sub-
base.
11. Compaction Trials: If directed by the Engineer, prior to the commencement of his
sub-base or aggregate base operations, the Contractor shall construct trial
lengths, not to exceed one (1) kilometre. The materials used in the trials shall be
those approved for use as sub-base or aggregate base, and the equipment used
shall be that according to the Contractor's approved detailed Programme of
Work.
12. The object of these trials is to determine the adequacy of the Contractor's
equipment, the loose depth measurements necessary to result in the specified
compacted layer depths, the field moisture content, and the relationship between
the number of compaction passes and the resulting density of the material.
13. Finishing: The Contractor shall programme his operations to avoid the drying out
of the sub-base during construction. If any layer of sub-base material, or part
thereof, is permitted to dry out after compaction, or does not conform to the
required density or finish, the Contractor, shall at his own expense, rework, water
or re-compact the material, as directed by the Engineer, to density specified,
before the next layer of sub-base or base course is superimposed thereon.
14. Immediately prior to the placing of the first layer on the sub-base, the final layer
of sub-base shall be at the specified density and to the required grade and
section. In order to maintain these requirements while placing the next course, it
may be necessary to water and reshape the surface of the sub-base, which Work
shall be at the Contractor's expense.

15. The surface of the finished sub-base will be tested with a three (3) metre straight-
edge by the Engineer at selected locations. The variation of the surface from the
testing edge of the straight-edge between any two (2) contacts with the surface
shall at no point exceed six (6) millimetres when measured in any direction. The
sub-base shall be compacted to the thickness and cross- section as shown on
the plans and shall not vary by more than six (6) millimetres from the required
elevation. All humps and depressions and thickness deficiencies exceeding the
specified tolerances shall be corrected by removing the defective Work or by
adding new material as directed by the Engineer.
G. Minimum Test Requirements

1. One sample every 1,000 Cu.m. shall be tested for Grading Plasticity Index, Sand
Equivalent Maximum Dry Density, C.B.R., Loss by Abrasion. One Situ Density
test every 300 sq.m. of Granular RCA Sub-base laid.
2.04 RECYCLED CRUSHED AGGREGATE BASE COURSE
A. General
1. This Specification has been prepared to meet the requirements of the Order
issued by the Executive Council of the Emirate of Abu Dhabi, dated 26th July,
2010, under number BT9G25/2010 requiring the mandatory use (subject to
availability) of a minimum of 40% aggregate (by volume) of recycled construction
and demolition waste in roads projects, as well as any other infrastructure
projects throughout the Emirate of Abu Dhabi.
2. The works described below shall consist of furnishing and placing one (1) or
more layers of recycled crushed aggregate (RCA), including additives if required,
on a prepared surface in accordance with the Specifications and in conformity
with the lines, grades, thicknesses and typical cross-sections shown on the plans
or established by the Engineer.
B. Materials
1. Materials shall conform to the requirements for the class of "Recycled Crushed
Aggregate Base Course" specified on the plans or directed by the Engineer. All
RCA for base course shall consist of crushed rock, crushed concrete stone
fragments including sand.
2. Components: Crushed concrete aggregates shall consist of clean, hard, durable,
angular fragments of rock, concrete and sand fragments of uniform quality
complying with the general requirements specified in Clause 2.2.
3. The use of crusher fines passing the 4.75 sieve which are not produced from
crushing concrete, shall be subject to approval in writing by the Superintendent to
the proposed source and nature of these materials and the proposed amounts to
be added.
4. Physical Requirements: All base course RCA shall conform to the physical
requirements described below, for each Class of Aggregate.
5. Foreign material in the fraction retained on the 4.75 sieve shall not exceed the
percentages by mass specified:
Foreign Material Type %
High density materials such as metal, 3
glass, brick, and asphalt
Low density materials such as plastic, 1
rubber, plaster, clay lumps and other friable
material
Wood and other vegetable or 0.2
decomposable matter
6. Grading Requirements: Coarse materials for Aggregate Base Course shall
conform to the following grading requirements:
ASTM (D2940)
Percent Passing
Sieve Size
50mm
100
37.5mm
95 - 100
19mm
70 – 92
9.5mm
50 – 70
4.75mm
35 – 55
0.60mm
12 – 25
0.075mm
0-8

Liquid Limit (AASHTO T89) 25 maximum
C. Acceptance
1. When the stationary plant method is used, the aggregate will be accepted
immediately following mixing, based on periodic samples taken from the pug mill
output. When a road mix method is used, the aggregate will be accepted after
necessary blending and before laying, based on samples taken from the
combined windrow for each layer. When the aggregate is a total aggregate, it
may be accepted at the crusher. Acceptance of the material by the Engineer
does not constitute acceptance of the base course, only that the material is
approved for use in the base course.
D. Equipment
1. Equipment shall be according to the type and number outlined in the Contractor's
detailed Programme of Work as approved by the Engineer.
E. Construction Requirements
1. Groundwater Levels and Protection: The Contractor must establish the high
water table levels (HWT) along the length of the road, relative to the accepted
National benchmark (New Abu Dhabi Datum (NADD)). Should the base of the

proposed road be within 1 metre of the HWT, an impermeable barrier will be
required to be installed to prevent groundwater coming in contact with the RCA.
2. Subgrade Preparation: The Contractor shall, as part of the Work and prior to the
delivery of materials for the base course, prepare the roadbed surface by
sprinkling blading, rolling and lightly scarifying where necessary, until the proper
crown is obtained. However, in the process of shaping the roadbed, the originally
compacting crust or top portion of the roadbed shall be disturbed as little as
possible. When completed and ready for base course construction the roadbed
shall be well compacted, smooth, hard and uniform, all irregularities having been
bladed out and rolled down.
F. Method of Construction
1. Handling of RCA: Handling of RCA, including the loading of trucks and
stockpiling, shall be effected in such a manner as to minimise segregation.
2. Combining Aggregates and Water: Aggregates for base course shall be
combined into a uniform mixture and water added only in a central mixing plant
before final placement of the material; Mixing and watering by windrows will not
be permitted. When binder is to be added, it shall be combined with the
aggregate base by thoroughly mixing binder and aggregate base in the central
mixing plant.
3. The moisture added to the aggregates shall be that required, as designated by
the Engineer, to obtain the specified density thereby preparing an aggregate
completely ready for compaction after spreading on the roadbed. In no case will
be wetting of aggregates in stockpiles or trucks be permitted.
4. Spreading and Combining Aggregates: Unless otherwise specified, aggregate for
base course shall be delivered to the roadbed as an uniform mixture and shall be
placed on the existing roadway, prepared sub-base or prepared subgrade, as the
case may be, in an uniform layer or layers not exceeding fifteen (15) centimetres
in compacted depth, including any binder that is to be blended on the road.
Spreading shall be done by means of approved self-propelled stone box
spreaders, distributing the material to the required width and loose thickness.
When the required base thickness is greater than fifteen (15) centimetres, the
materials shall be spread in layers of equal thickness.
5. The material shall be so handled, as to avoid segregation. If an aggregate
spreader causes segregation in the material, or leaves ridges or other
objectionable marks on the surface which cannot be eliminated easily or
prevented by adjustment of the spreader operation, the use of such spreader
shall be removed and replaced with well-graded material. No "skin" patching
shall be permitted.
6. No hauling or placement of material will be permitted when, in the judgment of
the Engineer, the weather or road conditions are such as hauling operations will
cause cutting or rutting of the road surface or cause contamination of the base
course material.
7. Compaction: If directed by the Engineer, prior to starting the aggregate base
operation, the Contractor shall construct trial lengths in accordance with
subparagraph 4.4 "Compaction Trials" in Section 3.2 "Granular Sub-base".
8. RCA shall be laid and compacted in a manner which will not result in segregation
of the material and at a moisture content which allows the compaction stated.
9. Immediately after placing, the base course material shall be compacted. The
material shall be compacted to an average density of 100% of M.D.D. as
determined according to AASHTO T 180 Method D with no single value below
ninety-eight (98%) percent. The Field determination of density shall be made in

accordance with AASHTO T 191. The percent of density shall be adjusted to
compensate for the weight and volume of aggregate larger than the aggregate
used in the compaction control test where applicable.
10. Rolling shall be continued until the entire thickness of each layer is thoroughly
and uniformly compacted to the density specified. The final rolling of the
compacted base course shall be done with a self-propelled roller. Rolling shall be
accompanied by sufficient blading in a manner approved by the Engineer, to
insure smooth surface, free from ruts or ridges and having the proper section and
crown. When additional water is required, it shall be added in the amount and
manner approved by the Engineer. Each layer of base course must be
completely compacted by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer, prior to
the delivery of the materials for a succeeding layer. The surface of the material
shall be free from movement on completion of the compaction.
11. The surface of the finished base course will be tested with a three (3) metre
straight-edge by the Engineer at selected locations. The variation of the surface
from the testing edge of the straight-edge between any two (2) contacts with the
surface shall at no point exceed six (6) millimetres when measured in any
direction. The base course shall be compacted to the thickness and cross-
section as shown on the plans and shall not vary by more than five (5)
millimetres from the required elevation. All humps and depressions and thickness
deficiencies exceeding the specified tolerances shall be corrected by removing
the defective work or by adding new material, as directed by the Engineer.
12. If the material for the base course is laid and compacted in more than one (1)
layer, the Contractor shall plan and coordinate the Work in such a manner that
the previously placed and compacted layers be allowed ample time for drying
and development of sufficient stability, before vehicles hauling materials for the
succeeding layers or other heavy equipment are permitted on the base. Prior to
placing the succeeding layers of material, the top of the underlayer shall be made
sufficiently moist to insure bond between the layers. The edges and edge slopes
of the base course shall be bladed or otherwise dressed to conform to the lines
and dimensions shown on the plans and present straight, neat and workmanlike
lines and slopes as free of loose material as practicable.
13. The Contractor shall also plan the Work and handle the various operations so
that the least amount of water will be lost by evaporation from uncompleted
surfaces. If the Contractor delays placing of succeeding layers of base course
material to the extent that additional water must be applied to prevent ravelling or
excessive dripping, the application of such water shall be at the Contractor's
expense not be considered as the basis for a claim for additional compensation.
Water shall be applied at such times and in such quantities as directed by the
Engineer, and the Engineer shall have full authority to require the suspension of
all other Works on the project to insure the proper maintenance of previously
compacted material. If after the base is compacted, any areas are above or
below proper grade and true elevations, such areas shall be loosened and after
having had additional materials added or excess material removed, as the case
may require, shall be reconstructed as described herein. If after the base is
compacted, any areas fail to meet the specified density and gradation
requirements, they shall be loosened or removed as directed by the Engineer
and reconstructed as described herein.
G. Maintenance of Base Course

1. Following the construction of the aggregate base, the compacted base course
shall be maintained by the Contractor at his expense. The Contractor shall blade,

broom and otherwise maintain the base, keeping it free from ravelling, and other
defects until such time as the bituminous prime or other surface is applied. Water
shall be applied at such time and in such quantities as directed by the Engineer.
2. The Engineer shall determine when the surface of the base course is in the
proper condition to permit the bituminous prime and/or surfacing to be applied. If
the Contractor chooses not to apply the bituminous prime and/or surfacing at the
time, he must continue to maintain the surface of the base course, including the
application of necessary water, at his expense until such time as the bituminous
prime and/or surfacing is applied. Any additional expense incurred by the
Contractor because of his failure to apply the bituminous prime and/or surfacing
when so permitted by the Engineer will not be considered as the basis for a claim
for additional compensation.
H. Minimum Test Requirements

1. The Contractor shall test the crushed concrete and any approved components at
a frequency which is sufficient to ensure that the material supplied under the
contract complies with the specified requirements. The frequency shall not be
less than that shown in the Table below, except that the Engineer may agree to a
lower frequency where the Contractor has implemented a system of statistical
process control and can demonstrate that such lower frequency is adequate to
assure the quality of the product.
Minimum Frequency of Testing:
Test Minimum Frequency of Testing
Grading On each day - one per 300 tonnes or part thereof
Foreign Material
On each day - one per 300 tonnes or part thereof
Content
On each day - 3 No.
Moisture Content
One per 200 tonnes or part thereof on each day
Plasticity Index In each month - one per 5,000 tonnes or part thereof
Prior to the commencement of work and when in the
California Bearing
opinion of the Engineer the nature of the material has
Ratio
changed significantly
Once per month or when in the opinion of the
Los Angeles Abrasion Engineer the nature of the material has changed
significantly
2.05 CONCRETE WORKS
A. The concrete work shall be furnished and constructed in accordance with the
requirements of Section V, Concrete Works, of the ADM Standard Specifications and as
specified herein.
B. The concrete work shall include all formwork for ornamentation, all inserts embedded in
the concrete, and all grout as indicated on the Drawings and as directed by the
Engineer.

C. All materials shall comply with all requirements of Section V of the ADM Standard
Specifications and as specified herein.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. The subgrade and/or aggregate base course for pedestrian and vehicular concrete
paving blocks shall be prepared as per the Standard specifications and contract
drawings, as applicable.
B. After preparation of the subgrade or aggregate base course for the concrete paving
blocks, as applicable, place 5 cm of bedding sand complying with either the
requirements of BS 7533:Part 3:1997, Category III or as per the grading limits specified
in the table below.
Percentage Passing each

Sieve Size
Sieve (%)
5 mm 70-100
2.36 mm 30-60
1.18 mm 10-40
600 µm 5-30
300 µm 0-20
150 µm 0-10
75 µm 0-3
C. The bedding sand shall be uniformly mixed over the compacted subgrade or aggregate
base course, as applicable for pedestrian or vehicular areas, and screeded uniformly to
grade approximately 10 to 15 mm higher than required. Place the concrete paving
blocks in the approved pattern as close together as possible such that the spaces of the
joints are between 3 mm and 5 mm. It is important that the spaces be consistent so that
the pattern will remain constant.
D. The joints in the paving blocks shall be filled with sand complying BS 7533: Part 3: 1997
by sweeping in the jointing sand. The grading limits for the jointing sand specified in BS
7533: Part 3 are indicated in the table below.

Sieve Size
Sieve (%)
2.36 mm 100
1.18 mm 95-100
600 µm 50-100
300 µm 15-60
150 µm 0-15
75 µm 0-3

E. As an alternative to the jointing sand requirements of BS 7522: Part 3 indicated above,
the following grading stipulated in the table below shall be accepted.

Sieve Size
Sieve (%)
2.36 mm 100
1.18 mm 95-100
600 µm 50-100
300 µm 45-95
150 µm 0-30
75 µm 0-3
F. The concrete paving blocks shall then be tamped down with a mechanical plate vibrator
until pavers are uniformly level, true to grade and free of any movement. The
mechanical plate vibrator shall be equipped with a rubber pad on the tamping face to
minimize damage to the finish surface and appearance of the paving blocks.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 32 1400.13
UNIT PAVING
PART 1 - GENERAL

Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
1. Precast concrete pavers
2. Porcelain Tiles
1. Section 07 9200 "Joint Sealants" for Joint sealants for expansion joints of
paving.
2. Section 31 2000 "Earthworks" for Granular base under unit pavers.
3. Section 03 3000 "Cast in Place Concrete" for concrete base under unit pavers
A. Product Data: For materials other than water and aggregates.
B. Product Data: For the following:

1. Pavers
2. Porcelain Tiles
3. Mortar and grout materials
C. Sieve Analyses: For aggregate setting-bed materials, according to ASTM C 136.
D. Samples for Initial Selection: For the following:

1. Each type of unit paver indicated.
2. Each type of porcelain tiles indicated.
3. Joint materials involving color selection.
E. Samples for Verification:

1. Full-size units of each type of unit paver indicated. Assemble no fewer than
five Samples of each type of unit on suitable backing and grout joints.
2. Joint materials.
A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of unit paver, joint material, and setting material
from single source with resources to provide materials and products of consistent
KEO/21-7387-0004 32 1400/ / 1 Unit Paving
quality in appearance and physical properties.
B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at
time of Substantial Completion.
C. Pre installation Conference: Conduct conference at Contractors site office.
A. Store pavers on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an
enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely
tied.
B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location.
Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp.
C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained,
and contamination avoided.
A. Cold-Weather Protection: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated

with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen subgrade or setting beds. Remove and replace
unit paver work damaged by frost or freezing.
B. Weather Limitations for Mortar and Grout:

1. Cold-Weather Requirements: Comply with cold-weather construction
requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
2. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction
requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. Provide artificial shade
and windbreaks and use cooled materials as required. Do not apply mortar to
substrates with temperatures of 38 deg C and higher.
3. When ambient temperature exceeds 38 deg C, or when wind velocity exceeds
13 km/h and ambient temperature exceeds 32 deg C, set pavers within 1 minute
of spreading setting-bed mortar.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
KEO/21-7387-0004 32 1400/ / 2 Unit Paving

2.01 CONCRETE PAVERS
A. PV-02 – Villa Car Parking Paving – Precast Concrete Pavers: Solid interlocking paving
units complying with ASTM C 936[ and resistant to freezing and thawing when tested
according to ASTM C 67, made from normal-weight aggregates.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
a. Consent LLC - UAE.
b. Transgulf LLC – UAE.
c. Or equal approved.
2. Thickness: 80mm
3. Face Size and Shape: 200x100mm rectangle.
4. Finish: Shot-blasted
5. Color: Beige
2.02 PORCELAIN TILES
A. PV-01 Stepping Pad Tiles - Porcelain Tiles

a. Lever Contracting LLC – UAE
b. House of Aesthetics– UAE.
2. Thickness: 20mm
3. Face Size and Shape: Size varies, refer to design layout
4. Finish: Brushed
5. Color: Light Beige
B. PV-03 - Pedestrian Path Paving - Porcelain Tiles

a. Lever Contracting LLC – UAE
b. House of Aesthetics– UAE.
2. Thickness: 20mm
3. Face Size and Shape: 300x300mm, square
4. Finish: Brushed
KEO/21-7387-0004 32 1400/ / 3 Unit Paving

C. PV-04 – Garden Terrace Paving - Porcelain Tiles
d. Lever Contracting LLC – UAE
e. House of Aesthetics– UAE.
f. Or equal approved.
2. Thickness: 20mm
3. Face Size and Shape: 600x600mm, square
4. Finish: Natural
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A. Provide stone sealers for concrete pavers within the development.

1. Type: Impregnator solvent-based sealer
a. Laticrete
b. Dupont
c. Or equal approved
B. Application life span: 5 years minimum.
C. Application: Apply to a clean dry, cured surface free from debris, dust, oil, grease
stains and the likes, in accordance to manufacturers direction. Apply repeat coats if
deemed necessary by the Architect. All surrounding materials and surfaces to be
properly protected from excess material.
D. Protect from traffic immediately after application until totally cured in accordance to
manufacturer's recommendations.
2.04 ACCESSORIES
A. The following fillers to be used as expansion joints between curbs at 10m intervals:
1. Compressible Foam Filler: Preformed strips complying with ASTM D 1056,
Grade 2A1.
2.05 AGGREGATE SETTING-BED MATERIALS
A. Sand for Leveling Course: Sound, sharp, washed, natural sand or crushed stone
complying with gradation requirements in ASTM C 33 for fine aggregate.
B. Sand for Joints: Fine, sharp, washed, natural sand or crushed stone with 100 percent
passing 1.18-mm sieve and no more than 10 percent passing 0.075-mm sieve.
1. Provide sand of color needed to produce required joint color.
C. Separation Geotextile: Woven geotextile fabric, manufactured for separation

applications; made from polyolefins or polyesters, with elongation less than 50
percent; complying with AASHTO M 288 and the following, measured per test methods
referenced:
KEO/21-7387-0004 32 1400/ / 4 Unit Paving

1. Survivability: Class 2, AASHTO M 288.
2. Apparent Opening Size: 0.250-mm sieve, maximum; ASTM D 4751.
4. UV Stability: 50 percent after 500 hours' exposure, ASTM D 4355.
D. Herbicide: Commercial chemical for weed control, registered with the EPA. Provide
in granular, liquid, or wettable powder form.
2.06 MORTAR SETTING-BED MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or Type II.
B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.
C. Sand: ASTM C 144.
2.07 GROUT MATERIALS
A. Standard Cement Grout: ANSI A118.6, sanded.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work
include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. MAPEI Corporation.
b. Laticrete International, Inc.
c. Bostik, Inc.
d. Or equal approved.
B. Grout Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
C. Water: Potable.
2.08 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES
A. General: Comply with referenced standards and with manufacturers' written

instructions for mix proportions, mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers,
mixing times, and other procedures needed to produce setting-bed and joint materials
of uniform quality and with optimum performance characteristics. Discard mortars and
grout if they have reached their initial set before being used.
B. Portland Cement-Lime Setting-Bed Mortar: Type M complying with ASTM C 270,

Proportion Specification.
C. Packaged Grout Mix: Proportion and mix grout ingredients according to grout
manufacturer's written instructions.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
KEO/21-7387-0004 32 1400/ / 5 Unit Paving

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas indicated to receive paving, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
B. Where pavers are to be installed over waterproofing, examine waterproofing

installation, with waterproofing Installer present, for protection from paving operations,
including areas where waterproofing system is turned up or flashed against vertical
surfaces.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Preparation: Ensure that all underground utility lines are located and will not interfere
with the proposed edging installation before beginning work. Locate border line of
edging with string or other means to assure border straightness and curves as
designed.
B. Remove substances from concrete substrates that could impair mortar bond, including
curing and sealing compounds, form oil, and laitance.
C. Sweep concrete substrates to remove dirt, dust, debris, and loose particles.
D. Proof-roll prepared subgrade according to requirements in Section 31 2000 "Earth

Moving" to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Proceed with unit paver
installation only after deficient subgrades have been corrected and are ready to
receive base course for unit pavers.
3.03 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Do not use unit pavers with chips, cracks, voids, discolorations, or other defects that
might be visible or cause staining in finished work.
B. Mix pavers from several pallets or cubes, as they are placed, to produce uniform blend
of colors and textures.
C. Cut unit pavers with Pavers shall be cut with a motor driven watercooled, cut-off wheel
masonry saw using a diamond blade to provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Cut
units to provide pattern indicated and to fit adjoining work neatly. Use full units without
cutting where possible. Hammer cutting is not acceptable.
1. For concrete pavers, a block splitter may be used.
D. Handle protective-coated brick pavers to prevent coated surfaces from contacting

backs or edges of other units. If, despite these precautions, coating does contact
bonding surfaces of brick, remove coating from bonding surfaces before setting brick.
E. Joint Pattern: Refer to Landscape Drawings for paving arrangements.
F. All paver to be set out using fixed string lines off a fixed perpendicular or aligned
surface.
G. Pavers over Waterproofing: Exercise care in placing pavers and setting materials over
KEO/21-7387-0004 32 1400/ / 6 Unit Paving
waterproofing so protection materials are not displaced and waterproofing is not
punctured or otherwise damaged. Carefully replace protection materials that become
displaced and arrange for repair of damaged waterproofing before covering with
paving.
1. Provide joint filler at waterproofing that is turned up on vertical surfaces unless
otherwise indicated; where unfilled joints are indicated, provide temporary filler
or protection until paver installation is complete.
H. Tolerances: Do not exceed 0.8-mm unit-to-unit offset from flush (lippage) nor 3 mm
in 3 m from level, or indicated slope, for finished surface of paving.
I. Expansion and Control Joints: Provide for sealant-filled joints at locations and of
widths indicated on structural engineers drawings. Provide compressible foam filler
as backing for sealant-filled joints unless otherwise indicated; where unfilled joints are
indicated, provide temporary filler until paver installation is complete]. Install joint filler
before setting pavers. Sealant materials and installation are specified in Section 07
9200 "Joint Sealants."
J. Expansion and Control Joints: Provide cork joint filler at locations and of widths
indicated. Install joint filler before setting pavers. Make top of joint filler flush with top
of pavers.
K. Provide edge restraints as indicated. Install edge restraints before placing unit pavers.
1. Where pavers set in mortar bed are indicated as edge restraints for pavers set
in aggregate setting bed, install pavers set in mortar and allow mortar to cure
before placing aggregate setting bed and remainder of pavers. Cut off mortar
bed at a steep angle so it will not interfere with aggregate setting bed.
2. Where pavers embedded in concrete are indicated as edge restraints for pavers
set in aggregate setting bed, install pavers embedded in concrete and allow
concrete to cure before placing aggregate setting bed and remainder of pavers.
Hold top of concrete below aggregate setting bed.
L. Provide steps made of pavers as indicated. Install paver steps before installing
adjacent pavers.
1. Where pavers set in mortar bed are indicated for steps constructed adjacent to
pavers set in aggregate setting bed, install steps and allow mortar to cure before
placing aggregate setting bed and remainder of pavers. Cut off mortar bed at
a steep angle so it will not interfere with aggregate setting bed.
M. Cutting: Cut unit pavers with motor-driven masonry saw equipment to provide clean,
sharp, unchipped edges. Cut units to provide pattern indicated and to fit adjoining work
neatly. Use full units without cutting where possible. Hammer cutting is not acceptable.
Where cut pieces turn out to be less than 7.6 cm in any dimension they shall be
replaced by 15.24 cm x 25.4 cm, cut to fit.
3.04 AGGREGATE SETTING-BED APPLICATIONS
A. Compact soil subgrade uniformly to at least 95 percent of ASTM D 698 / ASTM D

1557 laboratory density.
B. Proof-roll prepared subgrade to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding.
Excavate soft spots, unsatisfactory soils, and areas of excessive pumping or rutting,
KEO/21-7387-0004 32 1400/ / 7 Unit Paving

as determined by Architect, and replace with compacted backfill or fill as directed.
C. Place separation geotextile over prepared subgrade, overlapping ends and edges at
least 300 mm.
D. Place aggregate base, compact to 100 percent of ASTM D 1557 maximum laboratory
density, and screed to depth indicated.
E. Place leveling course and screed to a thickness of 25 to 38 mm, taking care that
moisture content remains constant and density is loose and uniform until pavers are
set and compacted.
F. Treat leveling course with herbicide to inhibit growth of grass and weeds.
G. Set pavers with a minimum joint width as indicated on Landscape Drawings, being
careful not to disturb leveling base. If pavers have spacer bars, place pavers hand
tight against spacer bars. Use string lines to keep straight lines. Fill gaps between
units that exceed 30mm with pieces cut to fit from full-size unit pavers.
1. When installation is performed with mechanical equipment, use only unit pavers
with spacer bars on sides of each unit.
H. Vibrate pavers into leveling course with a low-amplitude plate vibrator capable of a 16-
to 22-kN compaction force at 80 to 90 Hz. Use vibrator with neoprene mat on face of
plate or other means as needed to prevent cracking and chipping of pavers. Perform
at least three passes across paving with vibrator.
1. Compact pavers when there is sufficient surface to accommodate operation of
vibrator, leaving at least 900 mm of uncompacted pavers adjacent to temporary
edges.
2. Before ending each day's work, compact installed concrete pavers except for
900 mm width of uncompacted pavers adjacent to temporary edges (laying
faces).
3. As work progresses to perimeter of installation, compact installed pavers that
are adjacent to permanent edges unless they are within 90 mm of laying face.
4. Before ending each day's work and when rain interrupts work, cover pavers that
have not been compacted and cover leveling course on which pavers have not
been placed with non-staining plastic sheets to protect them from rain.
I. Spread dry sand and fill joints immediately after vibrating pavers into leveling course.
Vibrate pavers and add sand until joints are completely filled, then remove excess
sand. Leave a slight surplus of sand on the surface for joint filling.
J. Do not allow traffic on installed pavers until sand has been vibrated into joints.
K. Repeat joint-filling process 30 days later.
3.05 MORTAR SETTING-BED APPLICATIONS
A. Saturate concrete subbase with clean water several hours before placing setting bed.
Remove surface water about one hour before placing setting bed.
B. Apply mortar bed over bond coat; spread and screed mortar bed to uniform thickness
at subgrade elevations required for accurate setting of pavers to finished grades
indicated.
KEO/21-7387-0004 32 1400/ / 8 Unit Paving

C. Mix and place only that amount of mortar bed that can be covered with pavers before
initial set. Before placing pavers, cut back, bevel edge, and remove and discard
setting-bed material that has reached initial set.
D. Place pavers before initial set of cement occurs. Immediately before placing pavers
on mortar bed, apply uniform 1.5-mm- thick bond coat to mortar bed or to back of each
paver with a flat trowel.
E. Tamp or beat pavers with a wooden block or rubber mallet to obtain full contact with
setting bed and to bring finished surfaces within indicated tolerances. Set each paver
in a single operation before initial set of mortar; do not return to areas already set or
disturb pavers for purposes of realigning finished surfaces or adjusting joints.
F. Spaced Joint Widths: Provide nominal joint widths as indicated on landscape

Drawings with variations not exceeding plus or minus 1.5 mm.
G. Grouted Joints: Grout paver joints complying with ANSI A108.10.
H. Grout joints as soon as possible after initial set of setting bed.

1. Force grout into joints, taking care not to smear grout on adjoining surfaces.
2. Clean pavers as grouting progresses by dry brushing or rubbing with dry burlap
to remove smears before tooling joints.
3. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer
larger than joint thickness unless otherwise indicated.
4. If tooling squeezes grout from joints, remove excess grout and smears by dry
brushing or rubbing with dry burlap and tool joints again to produce a uniform
appearance.
I. Cure grout by maintaining in a damp condition for seven days unless otherwise
recommended by grout or liquid-latex manufacturer.
3.06 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING
A. Remove and replace unit pavers that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise
damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Provide new units to match adjoining
units and install in same manner as original units, with same joint treatment and with
no evidence of replacement.
B. Pointing: During tooling of joints, enlarge voids or holes and completely fill with grout.
Point joints at sealant joints to provide a neat, uniform appearance, properly prepared
for sealant application.
C. Cleaning: Remove excess grout from exposed paver surfaces; wash and scrub clean.
END OF SECTION
KEO/21-7387-0004 32 1400/ / 9 Unit Paving

SECTION 32 1500
AGGREGATE SURFACING
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. The works specified in this section cover all works necessary to prepare, construct and
finish the exterior hard landscape works of the development in coordination with soft
landscape, landscape lighting and other site works and contractors. Works include but
are not limited to the following as per drawings:
1. Washed river pebbles stones
2. Crushed stones
B. Related Sections: Related work to be coordinated and used in conjunction with this
specification includes:
1. Section 32 1116.13 - Subbase and Base Courses
2. Section 32 9300 - Plants
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. The following samples shall be supplied

1. Product data for the aggregate surfacing.
2. Samples for verification: Typical sample for type aggregate surfacing indicated;
3. Shop drawings including layout and interface with adjacent units.
1.03 COMPLIANCE
A. All works shall be carried out in accordance with the requirements of the relevant safety
codes and Local Authority requirements for this work.
1.04 SUITABLE FOR LOCAL CONDITIONS
A. The Contractor shall supply at time of tender certification of suitability of all materials
and installation techniques for use in the UAE including climatic conditions, expected
maintenance regimes etc.
1.05 UNSPECIFIED WORKS
A. Where materials used in this section have been specified elsewhere in this document,
the relevant clauses shall apply to this section. Materials and workmanship that have not
been individually specified shall be of international first class quality and the minimum
standard acceptance shall be the relevant British Standard where applicable.
KEO/21-7387-0004 32 1500 / 1 Aggregate Surfacing
A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of aggregate from a single source with resources
to provide materials and products of consistent quality in appearance and physical
properties.
B. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed aggregate

installations similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and
with a record of successful in-service performance.
C. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
Mockup samples to be 3m x 3m for each aggregate type including interfaces as required
by the Engineer.
1. Location of mockups to be agreed with Engineer.
2. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.
Obtain written approval of mockup from the Engineer before start of installation.
3. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a
standard for judging the completed Work.
1.07 WARRANTY
A. Submit a written warranty signed by Contractor agreeing to repair or replace Work under
this Section that fails in materials, workmanship, finish and color at no additional cost to
the Employer.
B. Warranty Period: 5 years (from date of Substantial Completion)
PART 2 - PRODUCT
2.01 AGGREGATE SURFACING TYPES
Code Description Color Location

AG-01 Crushed Stones White Beige Crushed stone infill for PV-01
AG-02 Crushed Gravel Grey Gravel mulch on planting area
2.02 CRUSHED STONES SURFACING
A. Types: 10 to 20 mm diameter crushed stones loosely laid over geotextile on compacted

earth.
1. Manufacturers: Contractor to submit material for approval.
2. Thickness: As indicated on the drawings.
3. Face Size and Shape: Refer to Material Schedule.
4. Finish: Natural
5. Color: Refer to Material Schedule.

2.03 GEOTEXTILE MEMBRANE
A. Filter fabric shall be laid under all aggregate surfaces to provide a free draining
separation layer between the associated subbase and aggregate surfacing lapped
300mm and secured at the joints.
B. Drainage Geotextile: Nonwoven needle-punched geotextile, manufactured for

subsurface drainage applications, made from polyolefins or polyesters; with elongation
greater than 50 percent; complying with AASHTO M 288 and the following, measured
per test methods referenced:
1. Survivability: Class 2; AASHTO M 288.
2. Apparent Opening Size: No. 40 (0.425-mm) sieve, maximum; ASTM D 4751.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine surfaces indicated to receive paving, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of
Work under this Section. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions
have been corrected.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Proof-roll prepared subgrade surface to check for unstable areas and areas requiring
additional compaction. Do not proceed with installation until deficient subgrades have
been corrected.
3.03 PEBBLES AND CRUSHED STONES SURFACING
A. General:
1. The Contractor shall make full allowance for the installation of pebbles and
crushed stones where and as described further in the drawings and documents.
B. Installation
1. Aggregate surfacing shall be laid over filter fabric layer. Where placed in areas
without planting, aggregate surfacing shall be installed over a compacted – 95%
subbase. The Contractor shall supply a sample area for approval by the
Engineer.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 32 9113
SOIL PREPARATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes planting soils and layered soil assemblies specified by composition of
the mixes.
1. Section 31 1000 "Site Clearing" for topsoil stripping and stockpiling.
2. Section 32 9300 "Plants" for placing planting soil for plantings.
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. AAPFCO: Association of American Plant Food Control Officials.
B. Backfill: The earth used to replace or the act of replacing earth in an excavation. This
can be amended or unamended soil as indicated.
C. CEC: Cation exchange capacity.
D. Compost: The product resulting from the controlled biological decomposition of organic
material that has been sanitized through the generation of heat and stabilized to the
point that it is beneficial to plant growth.
E. Imported Soil: Soil that is transported to Project site for use.
F. Layered Soil Assembly: A designed series of planting soils, layered on each other, that
together produce an environment for plant growth.
G. Manufactured Soil: Soil produced by blending soils, sand, stabilized organic soil
amendments, and other materials to produce planting soil.
H. NAPT: North American Proficiency Testing Program. An SSSA program to assist soil-,
plant- and water-testing laboratories through interlaboratory sample exchanges and
statistical evaluation of analytical data.
I. Organic Matter: The total of organic materials in soil exclusive of undecayed plant and
animal tissues, their partial decomposition products, and the soil biomass; also called
"humus" or "soil organic matter."
J. Planting Soil: Existing, on-site soil; imported soil; or manufactured soil that has been
modified as specified with soil amendments and perhaps fertilizers to produce a soil
mixture best for plant growth.
KEO/21-7387-0004 32 9113 / 1 Soil Preparation

K. RCRA Metals: Hazardous metals identified by the EPA under the Resource
Conservation and Recovery Act.
L. SSSA: Soil Science Society of America.
M. Subgrade: Surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after excavation is complete, or the

top surface of a fill or backfill before planting soil is placed.
N. Subsoil: Soil beneath the level of subgrade; soil beneath the topsoil layers of a naturally
occurring soil profile, typified by less than 1 percent organic matter and few soil
organisms.
O. Surface Soil: Soil that is present at the top layer of the existing soil profile. In
undisturbed areas, surface soil is typically called "topsoil"; but in disturbed areas such
as urban environments, the surface soil can be subsoil.
P. USCC: U.S. Composting Council.
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Contractors site offices.

1. Include recommendations for application and use.
2. Include test data substantiating that products comply with requirements.
3. Include sieve analyses for aggregate materials.
B. Samples: For each bulk-supplied material, 4Ltr volume of each in sealed containers
labeled with content, source, and date obtained. Each Sample shall be typical of the lot
of material to be furnished; provide an accurate representation of composition, color,
and texture.
A. Qualification Data: For each testing agency.
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent, state-operated, or university-operated

laboratory; experienced in soil science, soil testing, and plant nutrition; with the
experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated; and that specializes in types
of tests to be performed.
1. Laboratories: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide testing by one of
the following:
a. ACES
b. ACTS
c. QIL
d. Gulf Labs
e. Fugro
2. Multiple Laboratories: At Contractor's option, work may be divided among
qualified testing laboratories specializing in physical testing, chemical testing,
and fertility testing.
B. Field Inspections, the following Hold & Witness points apply to the project for the
preparation and installation of soils. No further works to be carried until the following has
been inspected and approved in writing by the Architect or approved representative:
1. Submission of works construction program.
2. Monthly progress reports.
3. Approval of all samples & materials.
4. Receipt of soil sampling for existing conditions and proposed planting sand /
sweet soil.
5. Excavated landscape areas.
6. Approval of final soil mix before leaving mixing staging area.
7. Excavated pits and percolation tests prior to planting.
1.07 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING
A. Preconstruction Soil Analyses:

1. For existing site soils, perform testing and furnish soil analysis with a written
report containing recommendations to remove / sterilize and or cap
contaminates by a qualified testing agency performing the testing according to
"Soil-Sampling Requirements" and "Testing Requirements" articles.
2. For each delivered load of sweet soil sand, perform testing and furnish soil
analysis with a written report containing soil-amendment and fertilizer
recommendations by a qualified testing agency performing the testing according
to "Soil-Sampling Requirements" and "Testing Requirements" articles.
a. Have testing agency identify and label samples and test reports according
to sample collection and labeling requirements.
1.08 SOIL-SAMPLING REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Extract soil samples according to requirements in this article.
B. Sample Collection and Labeling: Have samples taken and labeled by Contractor in
presence of Architect under the direction of the testing agency.
1. Number and Location of Samples:
a. Minimum of 1 per 5 HA representative soil samples from varied agreed
locations directed by Architect for existing soils.
b. Minimum of 1 sample per 1000m3 delivered load of sweet soil sand
delivered to site for mixing.
2. Procedures and Depth of Samples: According to USDA-NRCS's "Field Book for
Describing and Sampling Soils."
3. Division of Samples: Split each sample into two, equal parts. Send half to the
testing agency and half to Owner for its records.
4. Labeling: Label each sample with the date, location keyed to a site plan or other
location system, visible soil condition, and sampling depth.

1.09 TESTING REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Perform tests on soil samples according to requirements in this article.
B. Physical Testing:
1. Soil Texture: Soil-particle, size-distribution analysis by one of the following
methods according to SSSA's "Methods of Soil Analysis - Part 1-Physical and
Mineralogical Methods":
a. Sieving Method: Report sand-gradation percentages for very coarse,
coarse, medium, fine, and very fine sand; and fragment-gradation (gravel)
percentages for fine, medium, and coarse fragments; according to USDA
sand and fragment sizes.
b. Hydrometer Method: Report percentages of sand, silt, and clay.
2. Total Porosity: Calculate using particle density and bulk density according to
SSSA's "Methods of Soil Analysis - Part 1-Physical and Mineralogical Methods."
3. Water Retention: According to SSSA's "Methods of Soil Analysis - Part 1-
Physical and Mineralogical Methods."
4. Saturated Hydraulic Conductivity: According to SSSA's "Methods of Soil
Analysis - Part 1-Physical and Mineralogical Methods"; at 85% compaction
according to ASTM D 698 (Standard Proctor).
C. Chemical Testing:
1. CEC: Analysis by sodium saturation at pH 7 according to SSSA's "Methods of
Soil Analysis - Part 3- Chemical Methods."
2. Clay Mineralogy: Analysis and estimated percentage of expandable clay
minerals using CEC by ammonium saturation at pH 7 according to SSSA's
"Methods of Soil Analysis - Part 1- Physical and Mineralogical Methods."
3. Metals Hazardous to Human Health: Test for presence and quantities of RCRA
metals including aluminum, arsenic, barium, copper, cadmium, chromium, cobalt,
lead, lithium, and vanadium. If RCRA metals are present, include
recommendations for corrective action.
4. Phytotoxicity: Test for plant-available concentrations of phytotoxic minerals
including aluminum, arsenic, barium, cadmium, chlorides, chromium, cobalt,
copper, lead, lithium, mercury, nickel, selenium, silver, sodium, strontium, tin,
titanium, vanadium, and zinc.
D. Fertility Testing: Soil-fertility analysis according to standard laboratory protocol of SSSA

General Requirements including the following:
1. Percentage of organic matter.
2. CEC, calcium percent of CEC, and magnesium percent of CEC.
3. Soil reaction (acidity/alkalinity pH value).
4. Buffered acidity or alkalinity.
5. Nitrogen ppm.
6. Phosphorous ppm.
7. Potassium ppm.
8. Manganese ppm.
9. Manganese-availability ppm.
10. Zinc ppm.
11. Zinc availability ppm.
12. Copper ppm.
13. Sodium ppm[ and sodium absorption ratio].
14. Soluble-salts ppm.

15. Presence and quantities of problem materials including salts and metals cited in
the Standard protocol. If such problem materials are present, provide additional
recommendations for corrective action.
16. Other deleterious materials, including their characteristics and content of each.
E. Organic-Matter Content: Analysis using loss-by-ignition method according to SSSA's

"Methods of Soil Analysis - Part 3- Chemical Methods."
F. Recommendations for sweet sand soils: Based on the test results, state
recommendations for soil treatments and soil amendments to be incorporated to
produce satisfactory planting soil suitable for healthy, viable plants indicated. Include, at
a minimum, recommendations for nitrogen, phosphorous, and potassium fertilization,
and for micronutrients.
G. Recommendations for existing site soils: Based on the test results, state
recommendations for soil treatments to remove / sterilize and or cap contaminates.
A. Packaged Materials: Deliver packaged materials in original, unopened containers

showing weight, certified analysis, name and address of manufacturer, and compliance
with local laws if applicable.
B. Bulk Materials:
1. Do not dump or store bulk materials near structures, utilities, walkways and
pavements, or on existing turf areas or plants.
2. Provide erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of bulk
materials, discharge of soil-bearing water runoff, and airborne dust reaching
adjacent properties, water conveyance systems, or walkways.
3. Do not move or handle materials when they are wet.
4. Accompany each delivery of bulk fertilizers and soil amendments with
appropriate certificates.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 PLANTING SOILS SPECIFIED BY COMPOSITION
A. General: Soil amendments, fertilizers, and rates of application specified in this article
are guidelines that may need revision based on testing laboratory's recommendations
after preconstruction soil analyses are performed.
B. Planting-Soil Type: As per described mix in clause 3 below. Mix to be blended in a

setting down facility area agreed with the Architect with sand, stabilized organic soil
amendments, and other materials to produce viable planting soil. No soils to be mixed
in-situ, any soils mixed in situ will be rejected and be required to be removed from site
within 48hours at the contractors expense.
1. Additional Properties of Basic Soil before Amending: Sweet sand base to soil mix
to come from an approved Government / Municipality source. The contractor to
provide a certificate for each load arriving to the site soil mixing staging area.
Tests to be carried in accordance with clause 1.10 of this section prior to soil mix
being brought into planting areas.

2. Unacceptable Properties: Soil mixes shall not contain the following:
a. Unacceptable Materials: Concrete slurry, concrete layers or chunks,
cement, plaster, building debris, oils, gasoline, diesel fuel, paint thinner,
turpentine, tar, roofing compound, acid, and other extraneous materials
that are harmful to plant growth.
b. Unsuitable Materials: Stones, roots, plants, sod, clay lumps, and pockets
of coarse sand that exceed a combined maximum of 5 percent by dry
weight of the manufactured soil.
c. Large Materials: Stones, clods, roots, clay lumps, and pockets of coarse
sand exceeding 38mm in any dimension.
3. Blended basic soil mix to contain the following soil amendments and fertilizers in
the following quantities:
a. Ratio of Loose Compost to Soil: 20% by volume of which 5% volume is
loose shredded coconut.
b. Volume of Sand: 80% by volume.
c. Volume of Soil Amendment: 30kg per m3 of items a + b.
d. Amendment Weight of Agricultural Gypsum: 5kg per m3 of items a + b.
e. Weight of Superphosphate: 1kg per m3 of items a + b.
f. Weight of Commercial Fertilizer: 2kg per m3 of items a + b.
g. Weight of Slow-Release Fertilizer: 2kg per m3 of items a + b.
h. Weight of Organic Fertilizer: 1kg per m3 of items a + b.
2.02 INORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS
A. Lime: ASTM C 602, agricultural liming material containing a minimum of 80 percent

calcium carbonate equivalent. Use if recommended in soil testing report.
B. Sulfur: Granular, biodegradable, and containing a minimum of 90 percent elemental

sulfur, with a minimum of 99 percent passing through a 3.35-mm sieve and a maximum
of 10 percent passing through a 0.425-mm sieve. Use if recommended in soil testing
report
C. Agricultural Gypsum: Minimum 90 percent calcium sulfate, finely ground with 90

percent passing through a 0.30-mm sieve.
D. Sand: Clean, washed, natural or manufactured, free of toxic materials, and according to
ASTM C 33/C 33M. Sand shall be sweet sand or marine washed sand free of calcium
carbonate, subsoil, refuse, roots, noxious weeds, phytotoxic materials, rocks, sticks,
brush, litter, construction debris or any other deleterious materials. The soil shall be
approved by the Engineer before its use. It shall be free draining, non-toxic and capable
of sustaining healthy plant growth. It should have good water holding capacity and
minimal runoff or erosion characteristics.
1. The sand will have the following composition:
Element Value
pH value: not less than 6.5 or not more
than 8
Electrical conductivity: less than 2500 micromhos /cm
(2.5 dS / m) saturated extract at
25ºC
Free carbonates: less than 0.5% air dried
Chlorides: less than 200 ppm in saturated

extract
Sulphates: less than 200 ppm in saturated
extract
Exchangeable sodium: less than 15% in neutral
normal ammonium acetate
Boron: less than 1.5 ppm, hot water
soluble
Sodium less than 250 ppm
Magnesium less than 100 ppm
Nitrates less than 75 ppm
2. Grading of material:
Seive Size (mm) % Mass Passing

5.000 100
2.380 65 to 100
1.180 45 to 100
0.600 35 to 80
0.300 5 to 48
0.150 0 to 15
0.075 0 to 3
E. Soil Amendment: The soil additive shall be fully natural. No content of organic or
synthetic polymers, co-polymers or pozzolans shall be allowed and should conform to
the moisture retaining soil additive properties table.
1. The soil additive must not have any swelling properties.
2. The moisture retaining soil additive shall have a proven, successful history in the
GCC for at least 5 years.
3. At least 95 % of the additive should be inorganic (mineral),
4. Minimum 380 % WHC (Water Holding Capacity) is requested
5. The soil additive shall effectively reduce the consumption of irrigation water by
50% minimum for a period of at least 10years.
6. Minimum 30 Meq/100gr CEC (cationic exchange capacity) is requested in order
to increase the storage capacity of the soil for the important nutrition elements.
7. High content on nutrition elements (N,P,K,Ca,Mg) and optimal concentration on
micro and trace elements (Fe, Mn, Mo, B, Zn,Cu).
a. Moisture retaining soil additive indicative composition table:
Material Value
Rhyolitic tuff 80%
Natural phyllo silicates 18%
Natural cellulose compounds 2%
b. Moisture retaining soil additive indicative properties table:
Property Value
WHC (Water Holding Capacity) 380% minimum
CEC (Catonic Exchange Capacity) 30 Meq/100gr minimum
N 1580 mg/kg
P P 693 mg/kg
K 7200 mg/kg
Ca & Mg 160 meq/kg

micro and trace elements
Fe 1793 ppm
Mn 178 ppm
Mo 1 ppm
Zn 15 ppm
Cu 5 ppm
c. Application Rate in addition to overall soil mix:
Location Application
Palm Pits 30kg per pit
Tree Pits 20kg per pit
Large Shrub Pits 3kg per pit
2.03 ORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS
A. Compost: Well-composted, stable, and weed-free organic matter produced by

composting green waste, and bearing USCC's "Seal of Testing Assurance," and as
follows:
1. Green Waste: Sewage sludge and animal waste not permitted.
2. Reaction: pH of 7.0 - 8.5.
3. Soluble-Salt Concentration: Less than 4 dS/m.
4. Moisture Content: 35 to 55 percent by weight.
5. Organic-Matter Content: 50 to 60 percent of dry weight.
6. Particle Size: Minimum of 98 percent passing through a 25mm sieve.
B. Shredded Coconut Fiber: Coconut fiber shall be finely shredded coconut fibre pith free
from chemical additives, sterilents and shall have more than 98% organic matter.
1. Physical Characteristics:
Seive Size (mm) % Mass Passing

9.51 100
6.35 90 - 100
2.38 50 - 60
0.50 0 - 20
Bulk Density 300 - 400kg per M3
2. Chemical Characteristics:
Element Value
Organic matter >85%
PH 5.0 - 6.5
Salinity (ECe x 1000) 0.5 - 2.0
Total Nitrogen 0.7 - 2.0
Available Phosphorous 100 - 500 ppm
CEC (meq/100 gms) 80 - 120 ppm
Boron (by hot water extraction) <5 ppm
SAR less than 2.0 <2.0
C. Soil Inoculant - Myccoriza: For individual planting pits consiting of select edendo and
ectomycorrhizae fungi to promote the rapid development of root growth

1. Application: To be applied to each Palm, tree and shrub pit in accordance with
manufacturers recommendations.
2. Manufacture: Horticultural Alliance - www.Horticulturalalliance.com or approved
equal.
2.04 FERTILIZERS
A. Superphosphate: Commercial, phosphate mixture, soluble; a minimum of 20 percent

available phosphoric acid.
B. Commercial Fertilizer: Commercial-grade complete fertilizer of neutral character,

consisting of fast- and slow-release nitrogen, 50 percent derived from natural organic
sources of urea formaldehyde, phosphorous, and potassium in the following
composition:
1. Composition: 15 percent of actual nitrogen, 4 percent phosphorous, and 2
percent potassium, by weight.
C. Slow-Release Fertilizer: Granular or pelleted fertilizer consisting of 50 percent water-

insoluble nitrogen, phosphorus, and potassium in the following composition:
1. Composition for general application in soil mix: 20 percent nitrogen, 10 percent
phosphorous, and 10 percent potassium, by weight.
2. Composition for addition to palm pits: 8 percent nitrogen, 8 percent
phosphorous, and 16 percent potassium, by weight.
D. Organic Fertiliser: 100% Natural and heat treated. The content of Organic matter and
plant nutrient elements of this fertiliser should not be less than 50%. Primary and
secondary elements as percentages and trace elementsas ppm should be indicated on
the packing.
2.05 ANTI-DESICCANT
A. Emulsion form for spray application to provide a protective film over plant surface and
permeable enough to permit transpiration. Application should be made prior to
transportation of palm, tree and plant material to project site.
1. Product: To be delivered in containers of the manufacturer, mixed according to
the manufacturer's directions, and shall be one of the following:
a. Wilt-Pruf products, USA, www.wiltpruf.com
b. Plant Products, USA, www.plantprod.com
c. Or approved equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Place planting soil and fertilizers according to requirements in other Specification

Sections.
B. Verify that no foreign or deleterious material or liquid such as paint, paint washout,
concrete slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement, plaster, oils, gasoline, diesel fuel,

paint thinner, turpentine, tar, roofing compound, or acid has been deposited in planting
soil.
C. Proceed with placement only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 PLACING MANUFACTURED PLANTING SOIL OVER EXPOSED SUBGRADE
A. General: Apply manufactured soil on-site in its final, blended condition. Do not apply
materials or till if existing soil or subgrade is muddy or excessively wet.
B. Subgrade Preparation: Till subgrade to a minimum depth of 450 mm. Remove stones
larger than 75 mm in any dimension and sticks, roots, rubbish, and other extraneous
matter and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.
1. Apply approximately half the thickness of planting soil over prepared, loosened
subgrade. Mix thoroughly into top 50 mm of subgrade (unless soil testing for
existing site soil recommends for existing soils to be capped). Spread remainder
of planting soil.
C. Application: Spread planting soil to total depth as indicated on the planting detail
drawings, but not less than required to meet finish grades after natural settlement. Do
not spread if soil or subgrade is frozen, muddy, or excessively wet.
1. Lifts: Apply planting soil in lifts not exceeding 300 mm in loose depth for material
compacted by compaction equipment, and not more than 150 mm in loose depth
for material compacted by hand-operated tampers.
D. Compaction: Compact each lift of planting soil to 65 to 75 percent of maximum

Standard Proctor density according to ASTM D 698 (unless otherwise required by soils
report or for structural reasons).
E. Finish Grading: Bring soil to grades as indicated on drawings and to the final approval of
the Architect, using specificied soil mix.
1. Finish grading shall insure proper drainage of the site as determined by the
Architect.
2. Grade planting soil to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose, uniformly fine
texture. Roll and rake, remove ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish grades
3. All areas shall be graded so that the final grades will be 25mm below adjacent
paved areas, sidewalks, valve boxes, headers, tree well grates, planter rims,
clean-outs, drains, manholes, etc., or as indicated on plans for turf, and 40mm for
shrubs and groundcovers.
4. Surface drainage shall be away from all building foundations.
5. Eliminate all erosion scars prior to commencing maintenance period.
6. Compact all soil to final grades: Minimum 65%, maximum 75%.
3.03 APPLYING COMPOST TO SURFACE OF PLANTING SOIL
A. Finish Grading: Grade surface to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose, uniformly
fine texture. Roll and rake, remove ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish grades.
A. Soil will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

B. Prepare test and inspection reports at the discretion of the Landscape Architect.
C. Label each sample and test report with the date, location keyed to a site plan or other
location system, visible conditions when and where sample was taken, and sampling
depth.
3.05 PROTECTION
A. Protection Zone: Identify protection zones according to Section 01 5639 "Temporary

Tree and Plant Protection."
B. Protect areas of in-place soil from additional compaction, disturbance, and

contamination. Prohibit the following practices within these areas except as required to
perform planting operations:
1. Storage of construction materials, debris, or excavated material.
2. Parking vehicles or equipment.
3. Vehicle traffic.
4. Foot traffic.
5. Erection of sheds or structures.
6. Impoundment of water.
7. Excavation or other digging unless otherwise indicated.
C. If planting soil or subgrade is over compacted, disturbed, or contaminated by foreign or

deleterious materials or liquids, remove the planting soil and contamination; restore the
subgrade as directed by Architect and replace contaminated planting soil with new
planting soil.
3.06 CLEANING
A. Protect areas adjacent to planting-soil preparation and placement areas from

contamination. Keep adjacent paving and construction clean and work area in an
orderly condition.
B. Remove surplus soil and waste material including excess subsoil, unsuitable materials,
trash, and debris and legally dispose of them off Owner's property unless otherwise
indicated.
1. Dispose of excess subsoil and unsuitable materials on-site where directed by
Owner.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 32 9300
PLANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Furnish all labor, materials, plants, equipment and appliances and perform all necessary
operations to execute the work of this section.
B. The supply, transportation, planting and maintenance of plants as indicated on the

drawings including:
1. Plants.
2. Tree stabilization.
3. Mulches
C. Related Requirements:
1. Section 32 1123 - Aggregate Base Course
2. Section 32 9113 - Soil Preparation
3. Section 32 9400 - Planting Accessories
4. Section 32 9700 - Planting Maintenance
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. Backfill: The earth used to replace or the act of replacing earth in an excavation.
B. Balled and Burlapped Stock: Plants dug with firm, natural balls of earth in which they
were grown, with a ball size not less than diameter and depth recommended by ANSI
Z60.1 for type and size of plant required; wrapped with burlap, tied, rigidly supported,
and drum laced with twine with the root flare visible at the surface of the ball as
recommended by ANSI Z60.1.
C. Balled and Potted Stock: Plants dug with firm, natural balls of earth in which they are
grown and placed, unbroken, in a container. Ball size is not less than diameter and
depth recommended by ANSI Z60.1 for type and size of plant required.
D. Container-Grown Stock: Healthy, vigorous, well-rooted plants grown in a container, with

a well-established root system reaching sides of container and maintaining a firm ball
when removed from container. Container shall be rigid enough to hold ball shape and
protect root mass during shipping and be sized according to ANSI Z60.1 for type and
size of plant required.
E. Fabric Bag-Grown Stock: Healthy, vigorous, well-rooted plants established and grown
in-ground in a porous fabric bag with well-established root system reaching sides of
KEO/21-7387-0004 32 9300/ 1 Plants

fabric bag. Fabric bag size is not less than diameter, depth, and volume required by
ANSI Z60.1 for type and size of plant.
F. Finish Grade: Elevation of finished surface of planting soil.
G. Pesticide: A substance or mixture intended for preventing, destroying, repelling, or

mitigating a pest. Pesticides include insecticides, miticides, herbicides, fungicides,
rodenticides, and molluscicides. They also include substances or mixtures intended for
use as a plant regulator, defoliant, or desiccant. Some sources classify herbicides
separately from pesticides.
H. Pests: Living organisms that occur where they are not desired or that cause damage to
plants, animals, or people. Pests include insects, mites, grubs, mollusks (snails and
slugs), rodents, unwanted plants (weeds), fungi, bacteria, and viruses.
I. Planting Area: Areas to be planted.
J. Planting Soil: Existing, on-site soil; imported soil; or manufactured soil that has been
modified with soil amendments and perhaps fertilizers to produce a soil mixture best for
plant growth. See Section 32 9113 "Soil Preparation" for planting soils.
K. Plant; Plants; Plant Material: These terms refer to vegetation in general, including
palms, trees, shrubs, vines, ground covers, ornamental grasses, bulbs, corms, tubers,
or herbaceous vegetation.
L. Root Flare: Also called "trunk flare." The area at the base of the plant's stem or trunk
where the stem or trunk broadens to form roots; the area of transition between the root
system and the stem or trunk.
M. Stem Girdling Roots: Roots that encircle the stems (trunks) of trees below the soil
surface.
N. Subgrade: The surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after excavation is complete,

or the top surface of a fill or backfill before planting soil is placed.
1.03 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate final positions with all underground utility lines, chambers, openings,
structural footings and the like. All trees to be staked during installation of services to
ensure clashes are avoided.
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Contractors site office.

1. Plant Materials: Include quantities, sizes, quality, and sources for plant materials.
2. Plant Photographs: Include color photographs in digital 76- by 127-mm) print
place on A4 submittal sheet format for each required species and size of plant
KEO/21-7387-0004 32 9300/ 2 Plants

material as it will be furnished to Project. Take photographs from an angle
depicting true size and condition of the typical plant to be furnished. Include a
scale rod or other measuring device in each photograph. For species where
more than 20 number plants are required, include a minimum of three
photographs showing the average plant, the best quality plant, and the worst
quality plant to be furnished. Identify each photograph with the full scientific
name of the plant, plant size, and name of the growing nursery.
3. Submit documentation to the Engineer within 30 calendar days after date of
award of Contract to the General Contractor that all plant material is available.
The Contractor shall be responsible for all material listed on plant list. Any and all
substitutions due to availability issues shall be requested in writing prior to
confirmation of ordering. All materials shall be subject to observation by the
Engineer at any time after confirmation of ordering.
B. Shop Drawings: For each of the following:

1. Temporary nursery to support all of the plants brought onto site for the Phase of
the project. The nursery facility should be large enough to cover 50% of the
anticipated tree, shrub and groundcover stock for the phase to be kept under
shade. Contractor to provide all associated method statements for the
implementation of the nursery. The nursery must follow the following criteria:
a. Have a level floor covered with a minimum of 200g woven geotextile
b. Have overhead green shade cloth providing 50% shade
c. Be constructed of steel tube and clamp system
d. Incorporate overhead or ground situated automatic irrigation system.
C. Method Statement: For the following:

1. Mixing of soil in contractors compound or off site and delivery to site.
D. Samples for Verification: For each of the following

1. Trees and Shrubs: Tree Samples of each variety and size delivered to site for
review. Maintain approved Samples on-site as a standard for comparison. Plants
shall be subject to observation and preliminary acceptance by the Engineer at
place of growth or upon delivery for compliance with these specifications. Such
observation shall not impair the right of observation and rejection during progress
of the work. Tagging of plant material as may be conducted by the Engineer is for
design intent only and does not constitute the Engineer's approval of the plant
materials in regards to their health and vigor. The health and vigor of the plant
materials is the sole responsibility of the Contractor. Submit written request for
observation of plant material at place of growth to the Engineer. Written request
shall state the place of growth and quantity of plants to be observed. The
Engineer reserves the right to refuse observation at this time if, in his judgment,
photograph examples may suffice.
2. The Contractor shall submit color photographs of actual plant materials specified
on the drawings and being contract grown outside the UAE or at nurseries in
UAE other than the Contractor’s. This submittal shall occur monthly every 30
days prior to the proposed planting commencement date.
3. Mineral Mulch: 2(.5 kg) of each mineral mulch required, in sealed plastic bags
labeled with source of mulch. Sample shall be typical of the lot of material to be
delivered and installed on-site; provide an accurate indication of color, texture,
and makeup of the material.
4. Edging Materials and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard size, to verify color
selected.
KEO/21-7387-0004 32 9300/ 3 Plants

5. Tree Frames and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard size delivered to site for
review, to verify design and color selected.
6. Root Barrier: Width of panel by (300 mm).
A. Qualification Data: For landscape Installer. Include list of similar projects completed by
Installer demonstrating Installer's capabilities and experience. Include project names,
addresses, and year completed, and include names and addresses of contact persons.
B. Product Certificates: For each type of manufactured product, from manufacturer, and
complying with the following:
1. Manufacturer's certified analysis of standard products.
2. Analysis of other materials by a recognized laboratory made according to
methods established by the Association of Official Analytical Chemists, where
applicable.
C. Pesticides and Herbicides: Product label and manufacturer's application instructions

specific to Project.
D. Non packaged bulk materials delivered to site: Submit a certificate, of delivery slip with
each delivery of material in bulk. Certificates shall state source, quantity, or weight, type
and analysis and date of delivery along with an analysis completed by an approved
independent testing laboratory - if requested by the Engineer.
E. Plant Material: All Plant material to be delivered to site with a nursery growers
certificate.
A. Maintenance Data: Recommended procedures to be established by Employer for

maintenance of plants during a calendar year. Submit before expiration of required
maintenance periods.
A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified landscape installer whose work has resulted in

successful establishment of plants.
1. Experience: Five years' experience in landscape installation in addition to
requirements in Section 01 4000 "Quality Requirements."
2. Installer's Field Supervision: Require Installer to maintain an experienced full-
time supervisor on Project site when work is in progress.
3. Personnel Certifications: Installer's field supervisor shall have certification in one
of the following categories from the Professional Landcare Network:
a. Landscape Industry Certified Technician - Exterior.
b. Landscape Industry Certified Interior.
c. Landscape Industry Certified Horticultural Technician.
4. Pesticide Applicator: State licensed, commercial.
B. Provide quality, size, genus, species, and variety of plants indicated, complying with
applicable requirements in ANSI Z60.1.
KEO/21-7387-0004 32 9300/ 4 Plants
1. Specimen plant materials may be observed at source prior to delivery to site if
determined appropriate by Engineer.
2. Upon delivery of plant material to site:
a. All plant material shall be subject to observation and may be approved or
rejected the Engineer for quality, size and variety prior to installation.
Such approval shall not impair the right of observation and rejection
during the progress of work for size and condition of ball or root mass,
latent effects, diseases, pests or injuries.
b. If any defective or non-complying plants are found during observations,
they will be rejected.
c. All rejected plant material shall be removed from the site within a
minimum of 2 working days.
3. Workmanship: Observation of site at critical stages of work.

a. If applicable, observation of drainage material on-structure prior to
installation of soil separator if required.
b. If applicable observation of soil separator on-structure prior to installation
of soil.
c. Observation for approval of landscape finish grading and soil preparation
before
d. installation of plant material:
e. During this observation the Engineer may request that samples of the
planting soil be analyzed by an approved laboratory to assure its
compliance with these Specifications.
f. Notification of exception shall be for the Contractor to correct deficiencies
in the soil preparation to render it in compliance with these specifications.
Corrections shall be made prior to any planting, or, at the Engineer's
option, the installation of container sized plants may proceed if the
corrections can be made later without affecting the quality of the work.
The Contractor shall notify the Engineer in writing when the deficiencies
have been corrected.
g. Observation of planting installation.
h. Observation of tree staking/tree guying.
4. Material and Workmanship:

a. Observation by the Engineer will be made at substantial
completion/delivery of all materials, construction and installation work
required by the Contract prior to commencement of the plant
establishment period. The plant establishment period shall not commence
until all deficiencies found by this observation have been corrected and
written notice of start of commencement has been received from the
Engineer. All materials shall be installed prior to this observation with the
following exceptions:
1) Items waived by the Engineer for this observation for reasons of
substantiated unavailability, or in appropriate season or weather.
2) Items which do not affect the health or growth of the plantings.
b. Periodic observation shall be made of the work of the Contract during

plant establishment period wherein the approval of monthly progress
payments will be contingent upon approved monthly quality reports by the
Employer.
KEO/21-7387-0004 32 9300/ 5 Plants

C. Measurements: Measure according to ANSI Z60.1. Do not prune to obtain required
sizes.
1. Trees and Shrubs: Measure with branches and trunks or canes in their normal
position. Take height measurements from or near the top of the root flare for
field-grown stock and container-grown stock. Measure main body of tree or
shrub for height and spread; do not measure branches or roots tip to tip. Take
caliper measurements (150 mm) above the root flare for trees up to (100-mm)
caliper size, and (300 mm) above the root flare for larger sizes.
2. Other Plants: Measure with stems, petioles, and foliage in their normal position.
D. Plant Material Observation: The Engineer may observe plant material either at place of
growth or at site before planting for compliance with requirements for genus, species,
variety, cultivar, size, and quality. The Engineer may also observe trees and shrubs
further for size and condition of balls and root systems, pests, disease symptoms,
injuries, and latent defects and may reject unsatisfactory or defective material at any
time during progress of work. Remove rejected trees or shrubs immediately from
Project site.
1. Notify the Engineer of sources of planting materials seven days in advance of
delivery to site.
A. Packaged Materials: Deliver packaged materials in original, unopened containers

showing weight, certified analysis, name and address of manufacturer, and indication
of compliance with local laws if applicable. Contractor is responsible to comply with
required local importation regulations.
B. Pre-inspection by Engineer for palms and trees prior mobilizing to plant holding facility
needs to be executed during the plant procurement stage of the works. The selection
and inspection for pest free palm shall be as per local requirement. Contractor to
obtain permit to move date palm from different region.
C. Approved sample plants to be used in this contract shall be submitted for approval.
All imported plants shall be acclimatized for a minimum 12 weeks for both locally
sourced plants and imported plants before planting at the site
D. Bulk Materials:
1. Do not dump or store bulk materials near structures, utilities, walkways and
pavements, or on existing plants area.
2. Provide erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of bulk
materials; discharge of soil-bearing water runoff; and airborne dust reaching
adjacent properties, water conveyance systems, or walkways.
3. Accompany each delivery of bulk materials with appropriate certificates.
4. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer 7 calendar days in advance of delivery of
all plant materials and shall submit an itemized list of the plants in each delivery.
E. Deliver bare-root stock plants within 24 hours of digging. Immediately after digging up
bare-root stock, pack root system in wet straw, hay, or other suitable material to keep
root system moist until planting. Transport in covered, temperature-controlled vehicles,
and keep plants cool and protected from sun and wind at all times.
KEO/21-7387-0004 32 9300/ 6 Plants

F. Do not prune trees and shrubs before delivery. Protect bark, branches, and root
systems from sun scald, drying, wind burn, sweating, whipping, and other handling and
tying damage. Do not bend or bind-tie trees or shrubs in such a manner as to destroy
their natural shape. Provide protective covering of plants during shipping and delivery.
Do not drop plants during delivery and handling.
G. Handle planting stock by root ball.
H. Store bulbs, corms, and tubers in a dry place at 60 to 65 deg F (until planting.
I. Apply antidesiccant to trees and shrubs using power spray to provide an adequate film
over trunks (before wrapping), branches, stems, twigs, and foliage to protect during
digging, handling, and transportation.
1. If deciduous trees or shrubs are moved in full leaf, spray with antidesiccant at
nursery before moving and again two weeks after planting.
J. Wrap trees and shrubs with burlap fabric over trunks, branches, stems, twigs, and
foliage to protect from wind and other damage during digging, handling, and
transportation.
K. Deliver all plant blocks with legible identification labels, state correct plant name and
size indicated on plant list using durable waterproof labels with water-resistant ink which
will remain legible for at least 60 days.
L. All plants to be delivered to temporary shaded nursery for hardening off and storage
until planting zones are ready for implementation.
M. Move plants from temporary nursery to final planting area after preparations for planting
have been completed, and install immediately. If planting is delayed more than six
hours after moving, set plants and trees in their appropriate aspect (sun, filtered sun, or
shade), protect from weather and mechanical damage, and keep roots moist.
1. Set balled stock on ground and cover ball with soil, peat moss, sawdust, or other
acceptable material.
2. Do not remove container-grown stock from containers before time of planting.
3. Water root systems of plants stored on-site deeply and thoroughly with a fine-
mist spray. Water as often as necessary to maintain root systems in a moist, but
not overly wet condition.
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual grade elevations, service and utility locations,
irrigation system components, and dimensions of plantings and construction contiguous
with new plantings by field measurements before proceeding with planting work.
B. Planting Restrictions: Plant during one of the following periods. Coordinate planting
periods with maintenance periods to provide required maintenance from date of
Substantial Completion.
1. Planting Season: October - April
C. Weather Limitations: Proceed with planting only when existing and forecasted weather
conditions permit planting to be performed when beneficial and optimum results may be
KEO/21-7387-0004 32 9300/ 7 Plants

obtained. Apply products during favorable weather conditions according to
manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements.
1.011 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace plantings and accessories that
fail in materials, workmanship, or growth within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Death and unsatisfactory growth, except for defects resulting from abuse,
lack of adequate maintenance, or neglect by the Employer.
b. Structural failures including plantings falling or blowing over.
c. Faulty performance of tree stabilization and edgings.
d. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal
weathering.
2. Warranty Periods: From date of planting completion.

a. Trees, Shrubs, Vines, and Ornamental Grasses: 12 months.
b. Ground Covers, Biennials, Perennials, and Other Plants: 12months.
c. Annuals: Three months.
3. Include the following remedial actions as a minimum:

a. Immediately remove dead plants and replace unless required to plant in
the succeeding planting season.
b. Replace plants that are more than 25 percent dead or in an unhealthy
condition at end of warranty period.
c. A limit of one replacement of each plant is required except for losses or
replacements due to failure to comply with requirements.
d. Provide extended warranty for period equal to original warranty period, for
replaced plant material.
e. Remove and replace defected material within 15days.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 PLANT MATERIAL
A. General: Furnish nursery-grown plants true to genus, species, variety, cultivar, stem
form, shearing, and other features indicated in Plant List, Plant Schedule, or Plant
Legend indicated on Drawings and complying with ANSI Z60.1; and with healthy root
systems developed by transplanting or root pruning. Provide well-shaped, fully
branched, healthy, vigorous stock, densely foliated when in leaf and free of disease,
pests, eggs, larvae, and defects such as knots, sun scald, injuries, abrasions, and
disfigurement.
1. Trees with damaged, crooked, or multiple leaders; tight vertical branches where
bark is squeezed between two branches or between branch and trunk ("included
bark"); crossing trunks; cut-off limbs more than (20 mm) in diameter; or with stem
girdling roots are unacceptable.
2. Collected Stock: Do not use plants harvested from the wild, from native stands,
from an established landscape planting, or not grown in a nursery unless
KEO/21-7387-0004 32 9300/ 8 Plants

B. Provide plants of sizes, grades, and ball or container sizes complying with ANSI Z60.1
for types and form of plants required. Plants of a larger size may be used if acceptable
to the Engineer, with a proportionate increase in size of roots or balls. The size of the
plants shall correspond with that normally expected for species as specified on
drawings. The minimum acceptable size of all plants measured before pruning with the
branches in normal position, shall comply with the measurements, if any, specified on
the drawings in the list of plants to be furnished. Plants larger in size than specified may
be used with the approval of the Engineer, but the use of larger plants shall not change
the contract price.
C. All plants not in compliance with the requirements herein specified, will be considered
defective and such plants, whether in place or not, shall be marked as rejected and
immediately removed from the site of the work and replaced with new plants at the
Contractor's expense. The plants shall be of the species, variety, size, and conditions
specified herein or as shown on the drawings. Under no conditions shall there be any
substitutions of plants or sizes listed on the accompanying plans, except with the
express consent of the Engineer.
D. Labeling: Label at least one plant of each variety, size, and caliper with a securely
attached, waterproof tag bearing legible designation of common name and full scientific
name, including genus and species. Include nomenclature for hybrid, variety, or
cultivar, if applicable for the plant.
E. If formal arrangements or consecutive order of plants is indicated on Drawings, select

stock for uniform height and spread, and number the labels to assure symmetry in
planting.
2.02 FERTILIZERS
A. Planting Tablets: Tightly compressed chip-type, long-lasting, slow-release, commercial-

grade planting fertilizer in tablet form. Tablets shall break down with soil bacteria,
converting nutrients into a form that can be absorbed by plant roots for a minimum of 60
days.
1. Size: To Engineers’ approval.
2. Nutrient Composition: 5 percent nitrogen, 10 percent phosphorous, and 5
percent potassium, by weight plus micronutrients.
B. Mycorrhiza to roots of all shrubs, trees to manufacturers recommendations.
2.03 MULCH TYPES
Code Description Source Size Finish Location

AG-01 White Beige Gravel Locally 10-20mm Crushed Minimal Villas
(harvest stone) sourced
gravel
A. Mulch Color and Location: Planting area as indicated on the drawings.
B. Mineral Mulch: Hard, durable stone, washed free of loam, sand, clay, and other foreign
substances, of the following type, size range, and color in areas specifically indicated on
drawings:
KEO/21-7387-0004 32 9300/ 9 Plants

1. Type: Crushed stone or gravel Granite chips.
2. Size Range: As indicate
3. Color: Uniform color range as per material schedule for Engineers’ approval.
C. Mulch Installation: Laid loose over geotextile. Size and depths: As indicated.
D. Drainage Geotextile: Nonwoven needle-punched geotextile, manufactured for

subsurface drainage applications, made from polyolefins or polyesters; with elongation
greater than 50 percent; complying with AASHTO M 288 and the following, measured
per test methods referenced:
1. Survivability: Class 2; AASHTO M 288.
2. Apparent Opening Size: No. 40 (0.425-mm) sieve, maximum; ASTM D 4751.
2.04 PESTICIDES
A. General: Pesticide registered and approved by the EPA and UAE State, acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction, and of type recommended by manufacturer for each
specific problem and as required for Project conditions and application. Do not use
restricted pesticides unless authorized in writing by authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Pre-Emergent Herbicide (Selective and Nonselective): Effective for controlling the

germination or growth of weeds within planted areas at the soil level directly below the
mulch layer.
C. Post-Emergent Herbicide (Selective and Nonselective): Effective for controlling weed

growth that has already germinated.
2.05 PALM AND TREE-STABILIZATION MATERIALS
A. Unless otherwise specified on the plans, for palms or advanced trees, two tree stakes
shall be provided for all newly planted trees and shall be sawn or riven timber treated
with an approved preservative applied by the vacuum pressure impregnation method.
1. All stakes shall be 2m free of projections and pointed at one end. Stakes shall
be 50 x 50 mm (net section); the length below ground to be 0.8 metre minimum
and the length above to be 1.2m, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
Smaller stakes to 1.5m may be required for some plants as determined by the
Engineer.
2. Tree Ties: three (3 pieces of buckle ties (600mm long and 38mm wide shall be
looped around tree for the purpose of tying trees and shall allow appropriate
flexibility and adjustment as the tree grows.
3. The Contractor shall submit shop drawings detailing all anchoring, connections,
materials to use etc. and obtain approval from the Engineer prior to commencing
any planting work.
2.06 MISCELLANEOUS PRODUCTS
A. Wood Pressure-Preservative Treatment: AWPA U1, Use Category UC4a; acceptable to

authorities having jurisdiction, and containing no arsenic or chromium.
KEO/21-7387-0004 32 9300/ 10 Plants

B. Root Barrier: To be placed on hardscape side of trees within 1200mm of hardscape
edge. Black, molded, modular panels 600 mm) high (deep), 2.2 mm thick, and with
vertical root deflecting ribs protruding (19 mm) out from panel surface; manufactured
with minimum 50 percent recycled polyethylene plastic with UV inhibitors.
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, or
comparable product by one of the following:
a. DeepRoot Green Infrastructure, LLC
b. Or equivalent approved
C. Antidesiccant: Water-insoluble emulsion, permeable moisture retarder, film forming, for

trees and shrubs. Deliver in original, sealed, and fully labeled containers and mix
according to manufacturer's written instructions.
D. Burlap: Non-synthetic, biodegradable.
E. Planter Drainage Gravel: Washed, sound crushed stone or gravel complying with
ASTM D 448. to bottom of tree pits and planters to be 10mm to 20mm pea gravel and of
clean, hard, sound, durable, uniform in quality, and free of any detrimental quantity of
soft, friable, thin, elongated, or laminated pieces, disintegrated material, organic matter,
oil, alkali, or other deleterious substance.
F. Planter Filter Fabric: Nonwoven geotextile manufactured for separation applications

and made of polypropylene, polyolefin, or polyester fibers or combination of them.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, or comparable
product by one of the following:
1. Tencate - Mirafi, 160N - Properties:
Property/Test method Units Value
Mechanical Properties
Grab Tensille Strength ASTM D 4632
Strength @ Ultimate kN (lbs) 0.71 (160)
Elongation @ Ultimate % 50
Mullen Burst Strength kPa 2239
ASTM D 3786 (psi) (325)
Trapezoidal Tear Streng kN 0.27
th
ASTM D 4533 (lbs) (60)
Puncture Strength kN 0.42
ASTM D 4833 (lbs) (95)
UV Resistance after 500
hrs.
ASTM D 4355 5 strength 70
Hydraulic Properties
Apparent Opening Size US Sieve 70
(AOS) ADTM D 4751 mm 0.212
Permittivity
ASTM D 4491 soc 1.5
Flow Rate l/min/m' 4889
ASTM D 4491 (gal/min/ft') (120)
Packaging
Roll Width metres 4.6
Roll Length metres 4.6
KEO/21-7387-0004 32 9300/ 11 Plants

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas to receive plants, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements and conditions affecting installation and performance of the Work.
1. Verify that no foreign or deleterious material or liquid such as paint, paint
washout, concrete slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement, plaster, oils,
gasoline, diesel fuel, paint thinner, turpentine, tar, roofing compound, or acid has
been deposited in soil within a planting area.
2. Verify that plants and vehicles loaded with plants can travel to planting locations
with adequate overhead clearance.
3. The Contractor will obtain Engineer's Certification that final grades up to +/-30mm
have been established prior to commencing planting operations. Provide for
inclusion of all amendments, settling, etc. Contractor shall be responsible for
shaping all planting areas as indicated on plans or as directed by the Engineer.
4. Suspend planting operations during periods of excessive soil moisture until the
moisture content reaches acceptable levels to attain the required results.
5. Uniformly moisten excessively dry soil that is not workable or which is dusty.
B. If contamination by foreign or deleterious material or liquid is present in soil within a

planting area, remove the soil and contamination as directed by Engineer and replace
with new planting soil.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions, deficiencies have been
corrected or plants replaced.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities and existing plants
from damage caused by planting operations.
B. Install erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and

discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and
walkways.
C. Lay out individual tree and shrub locations and areas for multiple plantings. Stake
locations, outline areas, adjust locations when requested, and obtain Engineer's
acceptance of layout before excavating or planting. Make minor adjustments as
required.
D. Lay out plants at locations directed by Engineer. Stake locations of individual trees and
shrubs and outline areas for multiple plantings.
3.03 PLANTING AREA ESTABLISHMENT
A. General: Prepare planting area for soil placement and mix planting soil according to
Section 32 9113 "Soil Preparation".
KEO/21-7387-0004 32 9300/ 12 Plants

B. Placing Planting Soil: There shall be two stage of inspection by Engineer during placing
of sweet soil and during setting out of compost bag before mixing with the sweet soil.
Mixing of compost shall be insitu and witnessed by the Engineer.
C. Before planting, obtain Engineer's acceptance of finish grading; restore planting areas if
eroded or otherwise disturbed after finish grading.
3.04 EXCAVATION FOR PALMS, TREES AND SHRUBS
A. Planting Pits and Trenches: Excavate circular planting pits.

1. For Palm; excavate to a depth not less than 1m below finished grade and not
less than 2m diameter, break up bottom of pits to a depth not less than 100mm
without disturbing the free drain course sand layer.
2. Excavate planting pits with sides sloping inward at a 45-degree angle.
Excavations with vertical sides are unacceptable. Trim perimeter of bottom
leaving center area of bottom raised slightly to support root ball and assist in
drainage away from center. Do not further disturb base. Ensure that root ball will
sit on undisturbed base soil to prevent settling. Scarify sides of planting pit
smeared or smoothed during excavation.
3. Excavate approximately three times as wide as ball diameter for balled and
burlapped, balled and potted, container-grown, fabric bag-grown stock.
4. Excavate at least (300 mm) wider than root spread and deep enough to
accommodate vertical roots for bare-root stock.
5. Do not excavate deeper than depth of the root ball, measured from the root flare
to the bottom of the root ball.
6. If area under the plant was initially dug too deep, add soil to raise it to the correct
level and thoroughly tamp the added soil to prevent settling.
7. Maintain angles of repose of adjacent materials to ensure stability. Do not
excavate subgrades of adjacent paving, structures, hardscapes, or other new or
existing improvements.
8. Only as many plants as can be planted on that same day shall be distributed in a
planting area.
9. All plant pits and soil mix shall be watered 2 hours before planting and
immediately after planting.
10. Maintain supervision of excavations during working hours.
11. Keep excavations covered or otherwise protected when unattended by Installer's
personnel.
12. If drain tile is indicated on Drawings or required under planting areas, excavate to
top of porous backfill over tile.
B. Backfill Soil: Subsoil and topsoil removed from excavations may be used as backfill soil
C. Obstructions: Notify Engineer if unexpected rock or obstructions detrimental to trees or

shrubs are encountered in excavations.
1. Hardpan Layer: Drill (150-mm-) diameter holes, 600mm apart, into free-draining
strata or to a depth of (3 m), whichever is less, and backfill with free-draining
material.
D. Drainage: Notify Engineer if subsoil conditions evidence unexpected water seepage or

retention in tree or shrub planting pits.
KEO/21-7387-0004 32 9300/ 13 Plants

E. Fill excavations with water and allow to percolate away before positioning trees and
shrubs.
3.05 PALM, TREE, SHRUB, AND VINE PLANTING
A. Inspection: At time of planting, verify that root flare is visible at top of root ball according
to ANSI Z60.1. If root flare is not visible, remove soil in a level manner from the root ball
to where the top-most root emerges from the trunk. After soil removal to expose the
root flare, verify that root ball still meets size requirements.
B. Roots: Remove stem girdling roots and kinked roots. Remove injured roots by cutting
cleanly; do not break.
C. Balled and Burlapped Stock: Set each plant plumb and in center of planting pit or trench
with root flare (25mm) above adjacent finish grades.
1. Backfill: mix.Designated planting soil mix - Section 32 9113 "Soil Preparation"
2. After placing some backfill around root ball to stabilize plant, carefully cut and
remove burlap, rope, and wire baskets from tops of root balls and from sides, but
do not remove from under root balls. Remove pallets, if any, before setting. Do
not use planting stock if root ball is cracked or broken before or during planting
operation.
3. Backfill around root ball in layers, tamping to settle soil and eliminate voids and
air pockets. When planting pit is approximately one-half filled, water thoroughly
before placing remainder of backfill. Repeat watering until no more water is
absorbed.
4. Place planting tablets equally distributed around each planting pit when pit is
approximately one-half filled. Place tablets beside the root ball about (25mm)
from root tips; do not place tablets in bottom of the hole.
5. Continue backfilling process. Water again after placing and tamping final layer of
soil.
6. For palms shall be minimum 150-300mm circumference of stem measured 1m
above ground level and shall have a clear straight trunk of not less than 3.0m
from the root collar to the base of the leaf shaft. All plants are to be selected to
give a maximum height variation between plants of 300mm in stem height
between soil level and the base of the lowest leaf at the time of planting. The
heads of the palms shall be well balanced with at least 20 leaves and evidence of
one growing shoot all free from pest and disease attack. Rootball dimensions
1000mm diameter x 600mm deep minimum. No dead leaves are to be present,
and all leaves on the plants shall be free from yellowing, tears or splits, and cut
leaves will not be permitted. Any flowers, fruits and suckers shall be removed
before being brought to site, and cut cleanly from the base of their stems. Palm
shall be balled and burlapped unless container grown are available. Offshoots
will not be acceptable. They shall have a vigorous root system, crown of new
leaves, proper colour of leaves of an adult palm and sufficient hardiness. Prior to
transporting for transplanting, all suckers, flowering and fruiting parts and
approximately thirty percent of fronds shall be removed. The remaining fronds
shall be sprayed with an anti-desiccant during transplanting, lifted to enclose and
protect the growing tip, wrapped in Hessian and securely tied in position. The
roots shall be balled and the Hessian tied. The crown shall be protected at all
times and shall be burlapped for transport and until the palm is growing
successfully in its final location.
a. Quantity: As indicated on Drawings
KEO/21-7387-0004 32 9300/ 14 Plants
D. Balled and Potted and Container-Grown Stock: Set each plant plumb and in center of
planting pit or trench with root flare (25mm) above adjacent finish grades.
1. Backfill: Designated planting soil mix - Section 32 9113 "Soil Preparation"
2. Carefully remove root ball from container without damaging root ball or plant.
absorbed.
approximately one-half filled. Place tablets beside the root ball about (25 mm)
a. Quantity: As per manufacturers recommendations.
soil.
E. Fabric Bag-Grown Stock: Set each plant plumb and in center of planting pit or trench
with root flare (25mm) above adjacent finish grades.
1. Backfill: Designated planting soil mix - Section 32 9113 "Soil Preparation"
2. Carefully remove root ball from fabric bag without damaging root ball or plant. Do
not use planting stock if root ball is cracked or broken before or during planting
operation.
absorbed.
approximately one-half filled. Place tablets beside the root ball about (25mm)
a. Quantity: As per manufacturers recommendations.
soil.
F. Slopes: When planting on slopes, set the plant so the root flare on the uphill side is
flush with the surrounding soil on the slope; the edge of the root ball on the downhill side
will be above the surrounding soil. Apply enough soil to cover the downhill side of the
root ball.
3.06 PALM, TREE, SHRUB, AND VINE PRUNING
A. Remove only dead, dying, or broken branches. Do not prune for shape.
B. Prune, thin, and shape trees, shrubs, and vines as directed by Engineer.
C. No dead leaves are to be present, and all leaves on the plants shall be free from
yellowing, tears or splits, and cut leaves will not be permitted.
D. Do not apply pruning paint to wounds.
3.07 TRUNK STABILIZATION
KEO/21-7387-0004 32 9300/ 15 Plants

A. Trunk Stabilization by Upright Staking and Tying: Install trunk stabilization as follows
unless otherwise indicated:
1. Upright Staking and Tying: Stake trees of (50mm through 125mm) caliper.
Stake trees of less than (50mm) caliper only as required to prevent wind tip out.
Use a minimum of one stake of length required to penetrate at least (450mm)
below bottom of backfilled excavation and to extend to the dimension indicated
on Drawings above grade. Set vertical stakes and space to avoid penetrating
root balls or root masses.
2. Upright Staking and Tying: Stake trees with one stakes for trees up to (3.6 m)
high and (63mm) or less in caliper (Unless otherwise directed by Engineer); three
stakes for trees less than (4.2 m) high and up to (100 mm) in caliper. Space
stakes equally around trees.
3. Support trees with bands of flexible ties at contact points with tree trunk. Allow
enough slack to avoid rigid restraint of tree.
4. Support trees with two strands of tie wire, connected to the brass grommets of
tree-tie webbing at contact points with tree trunk. Allow enough slack to avoid
rigid restraint of tree.
B. Trunk Stabilization by Staking and Guying: Install trunk stabilization as follows unless
otherwise indicated on Drawings. Stake and guy trees more than (4.2 m) in height and
more than (75 mm) in caliper unless otherwise indicated.
1. Site-Fabricated, Staking-and-Guying Method: Install no fewer than three guys
spaced equally around tree.
a. Securely attach guys to stakes (760 mm) long, driven to grade. Adjust
spacing to avoid penetrating root balls or root masses. Provide
turnbuckle for each guy wire and tighten securely.
b. For trees more than (150 mm) in caliper, anchor guys to wood deadmen
buried at least (900 mm) below grade. Provide turnbuckles for each guy
wire and tighten securely.
c. Support trees with bands of flexible ties at contact points with tree trunk
and reaching to turnbuckles. Allow enough slack to avoid rigid restraint of
tree.
d. Support trees with guy cable, connected to the brass grommets of tree-tie
webbing at contact points with tree trunk and reaching to turnbuckle
compression spring. Allow enough slack to avoid rigid restraint of tree.
e. Attach flags to each guy wire, (760 mm) above finish grade.
f. Paint turnbuckles with luminescent white paint.
C. Palm dead man guying: Carry out in accordance with manufacturers details.
3.08 ROOT-BARRIER INSTALLATION
A. Install root barrier where trees are planted within 1200 mm of paving or other hardscape
elements, such as walls, curbs, and walkways, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.
B. Align root barrier vertically, and run it linearly along and adjacent to the paving or other
hardscape elements to be protected from invasive roots.
C. Install root barrier continuously for a distance of 2000 mm in each direction from the tree
trunk, for a total distance of (4000)mm per tree. If trees are spaced closer, use a single
continuous piece of root barrier.
1. Position top of root barrier according to manufacturer's written recommendations.
KEO/21-7387-0004 32 9300/ 16 Plants

2. Overlap root barrier a minimum of (300 mm) at joints.
3. Do not distort or bend root barrier during construction activities.
4. Do not install root barrier surrounding the root ball of tree.
3.09 GROUND COVER AND PLANT PLANTING
A. Set out and space ground cover and plants other than trees, shrubs, and vines in even
rows with triangular spacing.
B. Use planting soil for backfill as per Section 32 9113 "Soil Preparation"
C. Dig holes large enough to allow spreading of roots.
D. For rooted cutting plants supplied in flats, plant each in a manner that minimally disturbs
the root system but to a depth not less than two nodes.
E. Work soil around roots to eliminate air pockets and leave a slight saucer indentation
around plants to hold water.
F. Water thoroughly after planting, taking care not to cover plant crowns with wet soil.
G. Protect plants from hot sun and wind; remove protection if plants show evidence of
recovery from transplanting shock.
3.010 PLANTING AREA MULCHING
A. Mulch backfilled surfaces of planting areas and other areas indicated.

1. Mineral Mulch in Planting Areas: Apply thickness of mineral mulch as
shown on drawings, and finish 25mm below adjacent finish grades /
surfaces.
3.011 EDGING INSTALLATION
A. Aluminum Edging: Install aluminum edging where indicated according to manufacturer's

written instructions. Anchor with aluminum stakes spaced approximately (900 mm)
apart, driven below top elevation of edging.
B. Shovel-Cut Edging (where directed): Separate mulched areas from curbs, and paving
with a 45-degree, (100mm to 150mm) deep, shovel-cut edge.
3.012 PLANT MAINTENANCE
A. Maintain plantings by pruning, cultivating, watering, weeding, fertilizing, mulching,

restoring planting saucers, adjusting and repairing tree-stabilization devices, resetting to
proper grades or vertical position, and performing other operations as required to
establish healthy, viable plantings.
B. Leaf litter, twigs and grass cuttings shall be raked up from grass and paved areas on the
occasion of each mowing and collected separately for re-use/composting where
possible or removed from site.
KEO/21-7387-0004 32 9300/ 17 Plants

C. Fill in, as necessary, soil subsidence that may occur because of settling or other
processes. Replace mulch materials damaged or lost in areas of subsidence.
D. Apply treatments as required to keep plant materials, planted areas, and soils free of
pests and pathogens or disease. Use integrated pest management practices when
possible to minimize use of pesticides and reduce hazards. Treatments include physical
controls such as hosing off foliage, mechanical controls such as traps, and biological
control agents.
3.013 PESTICIDE APPLICATION
A. Apply pesticides and other chemical products and biological control agents according to
authorities having jurisdiction and manufacturer's written recommendations. Coordinate
applications with Employer's operations and others in proximity to the Work. Notify
Employer before each application is performed.
B. Pre-Emergent Herbicides (Selective and Nonselective): Apply to tree, shrub, and

ground-cover areas according to manufacturer's written recommendations. Do not
apply to seeded areas.
C. Post-Emergent Herbicides (Selective and Nonselective): Apply only as necessary to

treat already-germinated weeds and according to manufacturer's written
recommendations.
3.014 REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT
A. General: Repair or replace existing or new trees and other plants that are damaged by
construction operations, in a manner approved by Engineer.
1. Submit details of proposed pruning and repairs.
2. Perform repairs of damaged trunks, branches, and roots within 24 hours, if
approved.
3. Replace trees and other plants that cannot be repaired and restored to full-
growth status, as determined by Engineer.
B. Remove and replace trees that are more than 25 percent dead or in an unhealthy
condition or are damaged during construction operations that Engineer determines are
incapable of restoring to normal growth pattern within 15days of notification.
1. Provide new trees of same size as those being replaced with matching height,
spread and caliper.
2. Species of Replacement Trees: Same species being replaced.
3.015 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. During planting, keep adjacent paving and construction clean and work area in an
orderly condition. Clean wheels of vehicles before leaving site to avoid tracking soil
onto roads, walks, or other paved areas.
B. Remove surplus soil and waste material including excess subsoil, unsuitable soil, trash,
and debris and legally dispose of them off Employer's property.
KEO/21-7387-0004 32 9300/ 18 Plants

C. Protect plants from damage due to landscape operations and operations of other
contractors and trades. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods.
Treat, repair, or replace damaged plantings.
D. After installation and before Substantial Completion, remove nursery tags, nursery
stakes, tie tape, labels, wire, burlap, and other debris from plant material, planting areas,
and Project site.
3.016 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Maintenance Service for Trees and Shrubs: Provide maintenance by skilled employees
of landscape Installer. Maintain as required in "Plant Maintenance" Article. Begin
maintenance immediately after plants are installed and continue until plantings are
acceptably healthy and well established, but for not less than maintenance period
below:
1. Maintenance Period: 12 months from date of planting practical completion.
B. Maintenance Service for Ground Cover and Other Plants: Provide maintenance by
skilled employees of landscape Installer. Maintain as required in "Plant Maintenance"
Article. Begin maintenance immediately after plants are installed and continue until
plantings are acceptably healthy and well established, but for not less than maintenance
period below:
1. Maintenance Period: 12 months from date of planting practical completion.
END OF SECTION
KEO/21-7387-0004 32 9300/ 19 Plants

SECTION 32 9400
PLANTING ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
1. Planting Screens
2. Tree Stakes & Ties
3. Root Ball Fixing Systems
4. Training and Supports for Climbers
B. Related Section: Related work to be coordinated and used in conjunction with this
1. Section 05 5000 - Metal Fabrication
1.02 REFERENCES
A. All reference to standards, regulations and requirements of statutory bodies shall mean
the latest published editions at the time of contract. Product manufacture, testing and
installation shall comply with the following references unless otherwise stated in the
specification or otherwise approved, but not limited to:
1. ASTM A380 Standard Practice For Cleaning, Descaling, And
Passivation Of Stainless Steel Parts, Equipment, And
Systems
2. ASTM A492 Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Rope Wire
3. ASTM A554-21 Standard Specification for Welded Stainless Steel
Mechanical Tubing
4. ASTM A555 Standard Specification for General Requirements for
Stainless Steel Wire and Wire Rods
5. ASTM F1145-05 Standard Specification for Turnbuckles, Swaged, Welded,
Forged
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit listed submittals in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division 01
Submittal Procedures Section.
1. Product Data: Submit Manufacturer’s product data sheet for specified products.
2. Shop Drawings: Show layout, sizes, dimensions, details, and installation of railing
frame components. Include Details of rope attachment, tensioning methods,
hardware, and tensioning and mounting methodology.
3. Samples: Submit samples of rope and/or hardware, as required by specifier.
4. Quality Assurance/Control Submittals:
KEO/21-7387-0004 32 9400 / 1 Planting Accessories

a. Test reports: Submit any test report demonstrating compliance with
intended use and code requirements.
b. Certificates: Submit manufacturer’s certificate that product meets or
exceeds specified requirements
5. Closeout Submittals:
a. Warranty: Submit manufacturer’s standard warranty documents
b. Maintenance Data: Include manufacturer’s standard cleaning and
maintenance instructions to avoid detrimental actions to finishes and
performance.
A. Qualifications:
1. Installer Qualifications: Installer should be experienced in performing work of this
section and should have specialized in installation of work similar to that required
for this project.
B. MockUps:
1. Install at project site or appropriate location a job mockup using acceptable
products and manufacturer approved installation methods. Obtain Employer’s
and Engineer’s approval of product, application, and workmanship standards.
Comply with Division1 Quality Control Section.
2. Maintenance and Disposal: Maintain mockup during construction for
workmanship comparison.
A. General: Comply with Division 1 Product Requirements Sections Ordering: Comply with
manufacturer’s ordering instructions and lead time requirements to avoid construction
delays.
B. Delivery: Deliver in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged containers,

identification labels intact.
C. Storage and Protection: Store materials protected from exposure to harmful weather
conditions and at temperature and humidity conditions recommended by manufacturer.
Store cartons and panels in a secure location in a dry place at the project site.
1.06 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer’s Warranty: Submit, for Employer’s acceptance, manufacturer’s standard

warranty document executed by authorized company official.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 TEMPORARY PLANTING SCREENS
A. Whenever planting is in an exposed position, liable to strong wind conditions,

windbreaks shall be provided until such time as the planting is firmly established.

Screens shall be1750mm high plastic shelter net of 75% density supported on a timber
stake of adequate diameter so as not to disturb the growth of the plant.
B. Hessian bands shall be 75mm wide to lengths necessary for wrapping tree trunks and
main branches.
2.02 TREE STAKES
A. All stakes shall be double stakes of timber, straight, free of projections and pointed at
one end. The stakes shall be pressure impregnated with non-injurious wood
preservative to be applied at least two weeks before use.
B. Stakes shall be as indicated on drawings; the length below ground to be one metre
minimum and the length above to be 1.8m, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
2.03 TREE TIES
A. Tree ties shall be fabricated from UV resistant material, be fully adjustable to allow for
tree growth and shall be:
1. Rainbow Chainlock Range C219 – Chainlock No.4 (25.4 x 2.5mm) or approved
equivalent and shall be of consistent type throughout the site as shown on
drawing.
2.04 ROOT BALL FIXING
A. Provide Root Ball protection mesh, anchors, galvanized tension cable, ratchet
tensioners as indicated on drawings or as recommended by the manufacturer.
2.05 TRAINING AND SUPPORTS FOR CLIMBERS
A. Provide 5mm stainless steel braided support wires with stainless steel eye fixing the the
column or base of the wall as indicated on drawings or as recommended by the
manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS
A. Compliance: Comply with manufacturer’s product data, including product technical

bulletins, product catalogue installation instructions and product carton instructions for
installation.
3.02 EXAMINATION
A. Site Verification of Conditions: Verify mounting condition of previously installed surfaces

to ensure it is acceptable for product installation in accordance with manufacturer’s
instructions. Do not begin installation until backup surfaces are in satisfactory condition.

3.03 PREPARATION
A. Supply items required to be cast into concrete or embedded in masonry with setting
templates, to appropriate sections.
B. Take field measurements after permanent end terminations are in place and prior to
preparation of shop drawings and fabrication, to ensure fitting of work.
3.04 INSTALLATION
A. Install cable plant support system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and
the approved shop drawings.
B. Provide anchorage devices and fittings to secure to in-place construction; including

threaded fittings for concrete inserts, toggle bolts and through-bolts. Install all rope
assemblies plumb, level, square, and taut.
C. Anchor system to mounting surfaces as indicated on the drawings.
D. Separate dissimilar materials with bushings, grommets or washers to prevent electrolytic

corrosion.
E. Use manufacturer’s supplied mounting hardware.
F. Terminate and tension cable system in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
G. Ensure ropes are clean, and without kinks or sags.
H. After final adjustment provide tamper resistant lock tight materials on all fittings.
3.05 TRAINING AND SUPPORTS FOR CLIMBERS
A. Provide 5mm stainless steel braided support wires with stainless steel eye fixing the the
column or base of the wall .
B. Plant climber about 300-450mm from the column or base of the wall, so that it has room
for root development.
C. Remove all ties; with plants from nursery , use scissors to cut off plastic ties that hold
the climber to its bamboo cane supports.
D. Untwine the climber from any canes sufficiently to spread out the stems, but leave them
still attached to their cane supports. Select three bamboo canes to train the climber at
an angle up to the wire supports on the wall.
E. Slip the bamboo canes under the wires to hold them in place, adjusting the positioning
to create a fan shape. If the climber came twined around only one bamboo cane, then
untwine it completely and find another two canes to train the stems.
F. Tie the stems and canes to the wire supports. Snip off the excess twine with scissors.
G. After trained the main stems into a basic fan shape, use secateurs to prune off any
weak or twiggy growth that does not contribute to the main framework.
3.06 CLEANING
A. Remove temporary coverings and protection of adjacent work areas.
B. Clean installed products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions before

Employer's acceptance. Do not use chlorine-based or abrasive cleaners.
C. Remove from project site and legally dispose of construction debris associated with this
work.
3.07 PROTECTION
A. Protection: Protect installed product from damage during subsequent construction

activities.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 32 9700
PLANTING MAINTENANCE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 EXTENT OF WORKS
A. The works specified in this section cover all works necessary to maintain the exterior
soft landscape works of the development in coordination with hard landscape, irrigation,
landscape lighting and other site works and contractors. The works shall be carried out
at areas detailed on drawings.
B. Furnish and supply all materials, equipment and labour for maintenance of all
landscaped areas installed as part of this contract.
C. The work shall include, but not be limited to mowing, weed control, insect control,
disease control, pruning, replacement of sub-standard or dead plant material.
D. Perform all work in a manner to comply with the original installation specifications.
1.02 GENERAL
A. The Contractor is responsible for the on-going maintenance of the exterior planted
areas. The Contractor is responsible for all maintenance during the contract period.
B. Begin maintenance of plant materials immediately after planting and continue until
termination of warranty period.
C. This contract includes a 12 months maintenance period from the date of Taking Over
Certificate. The Contractor is responsible for ensuring the continued good health and
good growth of all plants throughout the maintenance period. It is anticipated that the
Contractor will visit the site at least weekly and more frequently when needed such as
during dry periods to monitor the irrigation system or hand watering as required to
ensure the continued good health and growth of all plants.
D. Maintenance shall include measures necessary to establish and maintain plants in a

vigorous and healthy growing condition. Include the following:
1. Cultivation and weeding plant beds and tree pits. When herbicides are used for
weed control, apply in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Remedy
damage resulting from use of herbicides.
2. Watering sufficient to saturate root system.
3. Pruning, including removal of dead or broken branches, and treatment of prune
wounds.
4. Disease and insect control.
KEO/21-7387-0004 32 9700 / 1 Planting Maintenance

E. The Contractor shall keep planted areas neat and tidy at all times. Remove any weeds
and rubbish. Remove any diseased or damaged plant or branch. Keep mulch in an
evenly graded condition and add extra mulch where necessary to maintain the standard
specified.
F. The Contractor shall include the cost of training personnel employed by the Employer
for the entire Maintenance period.
G. All chemicals, fertilizers, pesticides and herbicides shall be locked in specially designed
containers and maintained through the maintenance period to avoid spillage or
accidental inhalation. Pollution from spills or litter shall be removed from the
landscaping areas during normal maintenance.
H. Soil and Fertility: Use of fertilizers and soil additives are to be kept to an absolute
minimum. Soils are to have salinity levels and nutrient levels checked quarterly to inform
use of fertilizers.
1.03 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A. The Contractor shall compile a comprehensive Operations and Maintenance Manual

which will include the following:
1. Pesticide/fungicide/Herbicide applications - including safety application rates and
procedure, schedules of pesticides/fungicides/herbicides.
2. Landscape Maintenance - including fertiliser descriptions application rates and
programmes.
3. General Maintenance - including pruning, stakes and ties, berm work,
replacement and clean up.
4. Equipment Inventory, maintenance procedures and full manufacturer’s
maintenance manuals.
B. This manual shall be submitted for approval at least two weeks prior to Date of Taking
Over Certificate.
1.04 REPORTING
A. The reporting procedure is to be as follows;

1. Weekly monitoring of all landscape material with written diary notes by the
maintenance staff.
2. Monthly report in writing to the Project Manager (or nominated representative) to
state:
a. Activities for the month following and their dates and times.
b. Any damage to plant material, irrigation system or other associated
landscape works.
c. Any plant material or other associated landscape works damaged and
needing to be replaced due to vandalism.
d. Any plant material or other associated landscape works being replaced by
the Contractor at their expense.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 REPLACEMENT OF PLANTS
A. During the maintenance period the Contractor shall replace at the Contractor's expense
any dead or unhealthy plant material. This does not include the replacement of plants
removed or killed by vandalism by others. Any plants removed or killed by vandalism
shall be reported to the Engineer. The Engineer may instruct a variation for the
replacement of the plant material.
2.02 SOIL AND FERTILITY
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the supply, cartage and spreading of fertiliser.
B. A proprietary fertiliser suited to the species and approved by the Employer or nominated
representative shall be applied at 6 months, 12 months, 18 months, 24 months where
plants are showing signs of lack of fertility, or to ensure maximum health and vigour in
all grades of shrubbery as identified above.
2.03 WEEDS
A. The Contractor shall carry out detailed inspections of the planted areas at least
fortnightly and programme to control the weeds within twenty four (24) hours of the
inspection. Weeds shall be controlled manually unless approved otherwise by the
Employer or nominated representative. When hoeing/pulling care shall be taken to avoid
damage to plants and their roots. Where area is not mulched the top 20mm of soil is to
be cultivated to a fine tilth. The soil shall not be mixed with mulch when removing
weeds.
B. The required minimum standards is as follows:

1. At no time must any individual weed be larger than 50mm x 50mm x 30mm high.
Further at no time shall weeds that are 30mm x 30mm x 30mm in size exceed
more than ten (10) per square metre.
2. Weed control methods must meet the approval of the local authority weed
spraying conditions for type, notification and application technique. All methods
of weed control must be approved by the Contract Administrator.
2.04 MULCH
A. The Contractor will be responsible for the maintenance, top up, supply, cartage and
spreading of mulch to maintain a depth of 75mm at all times.
B. Mulching shall be carried out on an ongoing basis and at least 6 monthly to all garden
areas unless specifically excluded.
C. The process of installation of mulch includes levelling of soil surface to remove humps
and hollows, and removal of weeds and grass prior to mulching. The Contractor shall
be responsible for controlling regrowth of weeds.
D. Plants must not be damaged or buried during the mulching process.
E. Mulch shall be:

1. 20-75mm natural coloured, locally sourced mineral mulch. Sample to be supplied
to Engineer for approval.
2. Mulch must be clean, free of sawdust and dirt. A sample of mulch shall be
supplied for approval by the Employer or nominated representative prior to
application.
F. The Contractor shall ensure that other materials including soil are not mixed with the
mulch during the work.
G. Edges shall be checked and rebuilt or repaired as necessary prior to mulching. Where
necessary the soil level shall be reduced. Edges shall hold mulch without spillage. The
edges shall not be damaged when placing the mulch.
H. Note that some garden areas may be sloping, and that mulches will require additional
maintenance to keep the edges in specification. Where mulched gardens are on a
slope, the Contractor shall maintain the mulch at 75mm depth across the whole garden.
The contractor shall rake mulch uphill from lower portions regularly to maintain the
specified mulch depth. Spilt mulches shall be collected and spread over adjacent
gardens on each visit.
I. When mulch is applied all low branches and foliage shall be lifted and mulch worked
around the plants. No mulch shall be spilled over the edges of gardens onto surrounding
surfaces. The mulch shall be spread evenly to the correct depth.
J. Where it is known that mulch affects certain species the Employer or nominated
representative shall instruct the Contractor to use alternative mulches approved by the
Employer or nominated representative.
2.05 PRUNING
A. Pruning will be required on shrubs and trees throughout the year to maintain a high
standard of presentation, display and plant vigour. Paths, roads, all other accessways
and windows are to be kept clear of excess growth.
B. Pruning to be carried out as part of maintenance as set out below;

1. The Contractor shall carry out detailed inspections of the shrubbery’s at least
fortnightly and programme necessary pruning to be carried out within twenty four
(24) hours of the inspection. A minimum equivalent of 5% of the scheduled
shrubbery area shall be pruned each month. The Contractor shall provide a
specific list of all areas and/or species pruned in the reports.
2. All weak, dead, diseased and damaged growth is to be removed and the
Contractor shall carry out pruning to maintain the desired shape and size. Visible
dieback is not acceptable. Dead or irrecoverable plants are to be removed and
replaced at the Contractors expense.
3. Pruning is not to be carried out during leaf burst or leaf fall. Pruning will be
carried out after flowering unless otherwise directed by the Employer or
nominated representative.
4. All pruning shall be undertaken to recognised horticultural practices and for
individual species to promote the natural form and habit of the plant.
C. The following pruning techniques shall be employed where appropriate:

1. Tips to be pinched back or pruned as appropriate for species to give desired
shape and size.
2. Form pruning of young plants to ensure compact form and shape.
3. Undercutting of groundcovers at edges generally.
4. Plants are to be pruned so that they do not smother neighbouring shrubs.
5. Remove dead plant material (leaves, flower heads etc) after dieback in winter
and summer.
6. Clip plants after spring and autumn growth flush/flowering period.
7. Prune to favour long term species.
8. Prune in accordance with design intent/plans where provided.
D. Pruning for form, shape and size is to be carried out within two weeks of an instruction
from the Employer or nominated representative at the Contractor’s expense.
E. In addition, pruning to provide adequate sight visibility at intersections and driveways is

required. This is to ensure the safety of pedestrians and motorists. Pruning for sight
visibility is to be carried out within two weeks upon an instruction from the Employer or
nominated representative at the Contractor’s expense.
F. All prunings shall be removed to waste as they arise leaving the gardens and
surrounding surfaces area in a clean and tidy condition.
G. Spent flowerheads are to be removed including but not limited to the following species:
Agapanthus, arthropodium.
H. The Contractor shall carry out detailed inspections of the shrubbery’s monthly and plan
to remove dead and irrecoverable plants within three (3) days of the inspection. The
Contractor shall report the removal of dead and irrecoverable plants in their monthly
report.
2.06 PLANT SUPPORTS
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the supply, cartage and placement of supports.
B. Prior to installation, the Contractor shall supply a sample of supports for approval by the
Engineer and Employer or nominated representative. These shall be inconspicuous and
matched throughout the Contract area. Guys, ties and supports shall be added,
replaced and adjusted as necessary to allow for growth and prevent chaffing. Ties shall
be tightened as necessary to support the plant. The Contractor shall ensure that all
stakes are sound and are sufficiently inserted to prevent lateral movement. Broken
stakes shall be replaced within 24 hours of discovery by the Contractor or notification by
the Engineer.
C. Stakes shall be installed and maintained taut and be the same height throughout the
Contract area, or lesser approved area.
D. The Contractor shall carry out detailed inspections of stakes monthly and plan to make
repairs, remove redundant tapes, tags, ties and other encumbrances to the satisfaction
of the staking specifications within twenty four (24) hours of the inspection.
E. Plants must be supported in such a way as to protect the plant and stem from damage.

F. The Contractor shall inspect and make good all damaged and defective stakes. The
Contractor shall check stakes for looseness, breaks and decay and replace as
necessary. If any plant has grown sufficiently to be self-supporting the Contractor shall
remove the support, ties and fill any holes with soil, lightly compacted.
G. Where chaffing has occurred, the Contractor shall reposition tie(s), insert a spacer or
replace the support to prevent further chaffing.
2.07 PLANT HEALTH, PESTS AND DISEASES
A. The Contractor is responsible for the monitoring and control of plant health, pests and
diseases within the Contract area. To affect this, the Contractor shall make inspections
in conjunction with other inspections and activities and arrange for eradication or
treatment of the health problem within five (5) days of inspection. Any health problem
shall be reported to the Employer or nominated representative.
B. The Contractor shall be pro active in the reporting and treatment of anything affecting
the well being of the plants. In particular significant adverse conditions, dieback or
browning of leaves, branches, or any other signs.
C. Where soil borne fungal disease such as Phytophora become evident the Contractor
shall supply and apply “Trichopel” pellets or approved equivalent according to
manufacturer’s recommendation to affected areas and other areas likely to be affected.
D. Where damage from desiccation or wind damage starts to occur an anti-transpirant shall
be applied. The Contractor shall allow to supply and apply Anti-transpirants or other
suitable treatment to prevent further desiccation in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations.
E. The Contractor shall use pesticides in accordance with the Landscape Specification.
2.08 VEGETATION CONTROL – EDGES AND HARD SURFACES
A. Where reference is made to edges and/or hard surfaces elsewhere in this document,
this section shall apply.
B. Edges
1. Edges include but are not limited to; All grass and garden edges, kerbs, paths,
structures including seats, tables and furniture, signs, statues and sculpture,
water features and ponds, rubbish bins, rocks, buildings, retainers, fences, the
interface between grass and the trunks of trees and shrubs, around trees, mulch
edges, poles, posts, cesspits, drains, roadways, footpaths and car parks, drains
and the like.
2. Edges shall be maintained so that they hold any loose materials from
encroaching onto neighbouring surfaces. Where materials do escape onto
surrounding surfaces they are to be removed or reused as appropriate.
C. Hard Surfaces
1. Hard surfaces include, but are not limited to, all paths, car parks and paved
areas, wooden decking, boardwalks, bridges, stone and retaining walls, drain
grates within the scheduled areas. These surfaces are to be maintained free of

weeds, grass and moss or other vegetative material and all loose soil, mulch, or
other material.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 REQUIRED STANDARDS
A. The Contractor shall carry out detailed inspections and programme vegetation control
and maintenance to ensure compliance with the specification is met at all times.
B. Vegetation shall be controlled so it does not exceed the maximum height and maximum
spread. At least 99 percent of the total edge length shall be satisfactorily treated and the
overall appearance of the garden/reserve shall be satisfactory.
C. NOTE: There are many instances where only either maximum height or maximum
spread are applicable at any edge.
D. Maximum Height: The maximum height in millimetres (mm) above firm ground level that
vegetation shall be allowed to reach at the edge defined in table below.
E. Maximum Spread: The maximum distance in millimetres (mm) that vegetation shall be
allowed to reach from the edge defined in table below.
Maximum Height Maximum Spread
mm mm
At Garden At At Fence At Kerb & At Garden At Fence At Kerb &

Edges Tree Edges Footpath Edges Edges Footpath
and and Other and Other
Shrub Edges Edges
Trunks
50 50 50 35 50 50 50
F. Where manual methods of control are used the protruding vegetation shall be cut by use
of clippers or some other mechanical device that make a precise, even cut. A
proprietary edging machine shall be used against kerbs, concrete paths, mowing strips
etc.
G. Any spraying control methods shall use non-toxic materials approved by the Employer
or nominated representative in accordance with the Landscape Specification.
H. Where the edge is not defined the edge shall be controlled when the vegetation varies
more than the maximum spread defined in the Table over two (2) metres from a straight
line or natural curve.
I. All weeds shall be removed from within hard surfaces including but not limited to car
parks, walkways, paths etc. All moss shall be prevented from building up on paths such
that the path becomes slippery.
3.02 PERFORMANCE CRITERIA

A. The performance of the Contractor may be measured by the Employer or nominated
representative for future reference by the following criteria:
1. Plants are maintained for long term display and health.
2. Fertilizing is carried out in accordance with the softscape Specification and to
promote good health and continued plant survival.
3. Weeds are controlled within the specified number and size limits.
4. Mulch is applied and maintained in accordance with the softscape Specification.
5. Pruning is performed in accordance with the softscape Specification.
6. Plants are supported in accordance with the softscape Specification.
7. Plant health, pests and diseases are monitored, and controlled in accordance
with the softscape Specification.
8. All edges and hard surfaces are maintained in a neat and tidy manner and kept
within the allowable maximum height and spread parameters.
9. Other plants are not damaged during maintenance operations.
3.03 FINAL ACCEPTANCE
A. Prior to the completion of the maintenance period, a preliminary inspection shall be

undertaken by the Engineer. The time for this inspection shall be established in writing.
The quantity and types of plants installed and the acceptability of the plants shall be
determined. The warranty period will end with this inspection provided that the
Contractor has complied with the work required in this Section. The Contractor shall also
comply with the following requirements.
B. Dead, missing or defective plant material shall be replaced. Replaced plants will be of
the same size and species as originally specified.
C. Weed plant beds and saucers. Prior to inspection treat these areas with an application
of approved pre-emergent herbicide.
D. Remove stakes, guy wires and wrappings from plants as directed by the Engineer.
E. Complete remedial measures as directed by the Engineer.
F. Repair damage caused while making plant repairs.
G. A final inspection, if required, shall be undertaken by the Engineer to determine that the
deficiencies noted in the preliminary inspection have been corrected. The time for this
inspection shall be established in writing.
END OF SECTION

APPENDIX B – LUMINAIRE SCHEDULE
APPENDIX B – LUMINAIRE SCHEDULE
Luminaire Schedule
Project: REEM HILLS DEVELOPMENT TWIN VILLAS & TOWNHOUSES

Project No.: 21-7387-0004
Stage: TD
SL TYPE LUMINAIRE LAMP COLOUR

REV.
NO. NO. LOCATION DESCRIPTION MANUFACTURER KEY SPECIFICATION TEMP(K)
1 D10 Kitchen IP rated double downlight LED C4 LED C4 23 W 3000 K 0
2 D11 Bathroom IP rated ceiling recess downlight LED C4 LED 8.4 W 3000 K 0
3 D13 Common areas, walking closet Ceiling recess downlight Arkos LED 8.7 W 3000 K 0
4 D14 Maid room Ceiling recess downlight iinno light LED 23 W 3000 K 0
5 ML Toilets Wall mounted mirror light Astro LED 8.1 W 3000 K 0
6 WL10 Staircase Wall mounted up&down light Delta light LED 9 W 3000 K 0
7 WL11 Storage , Roof Wall mounted light Sylvania LED 14.5 W 3000 K 0
8 WL12 Boundry wall, façade Wall mounted light LEDS C4 LED 13 W 3000 K 0
Basic Light Point Provision with Pendant
9 LP Bedroom, living room LED 100 W (Provisional) 3000 K 0
Ceiling Rose
10 L61 Pump Room Surface mounted water proof LED ZUMTOBEL LED 34 W 4000 K 0
11 S10 Under car park canopy Ceiling mounted downlight Linealight LED 8 W LED 3000 K 0
Halide; TH = Tungsten Halogen;

LAMP H = Halogen; LV = Low Voltage Halogen; ; FL = Fluorescent; PL = Compact Fluorescent
KEY
KEO/21-7387-0004
REEM HILLS DEVELOPMENT TWIN VILLAS / TOWNHOUSES Lighting Cutsheets - Index
UAE 1 of 12 © KEO International Consultants. All Rights Reserved 2021
Date 15-Feb-2023
Luminaire Specification Sheet
Rev. 0
Project REEM HILLS DEVELOPMENT TWIN VILLAS & TOWNHOUSES Type

Project No. 21-7387-0004 Stage: TD No. D10
Description
IP rated double downlight
Location: Kitchen
Luminare information:
Manufacturer Multidir Evo small / AU13-
LED C4 Model
(Design based on) 11W9F10U14
Alternative
Protection Class IP54
Manufacturer
Controlgear
Colour White Remote
(Remote/Intergral)
Luminaire
Housing Aluminium Lumen Output 2282 lm
(Delivered Lumens)
Dimmed/Switched
Reflector Wide beam S
(D/S)
Diffuser Transparent Polycarbonate Dimming Type
Design
Mounting Ceiling recess 23W
Load (watts)
Power supply, all applicable installation
Accessories
accessories
Lamp information: Notes:
Specification 23 W
Lamp Key LED C4
Source Lumen Output 2700 lm
Life(@L70B20 Min) 50,000
Colour Temp 3000 K CRI 90
MacAdam Binning Step 2
KEO/21-7387-0004
REEM HILLS DEVELOPMENT TWIN VILLAS / TOWNHOUSES Lighting Cutsheets - D10 © KEO International Consultants
UAE 2 of 12 All Rights Reserved 2021
Date 15-Feb-2023
Rev. 0

Description
IP rated ceiling recess downlight
Location: Bathroom
Manufacturer
LED C4 Model lite / 90-A027-14-00
(Design based on)
Alternative
Manufacturer
Controlgear
Colour White Remote
(Remote/Intergral)
Luminaire
Housing Polycarbonate, Graphene Lumen Output 660 lm
(Delivered Lumens)
Dimmed/Switched
Reflector Medium beam 32 degree S
(D/S)
Diffuser Transparent Polycarbonate Dimming Type
Design
Mounting Ceiling recess 8.4 W
Load (watts)
Accessories
accessories
Specification 8.4 W
Lamp Key LED
Life(@L70B20 Min) 50,000
KEO/21-7387-0004
Date 15-Feb-2023
Rev. 0

Description
Ceiling recess downlight
Location: Common areas, walking closet
Manufacturer
Arkos Model Swap M
(Design based on)
Alternative
Manufacturer
Controlgear
Colour White Remote
(Remote/Intergral)
Luminaire
(Delivered Lumens)
Dimmed/Switched
(D/S)
Diffuser Dimming Type
Design
Mounting Ceiling recess 7W
Load (watts)
Accessories
accessories
Specification 8.7 W
Lamp Key LED
Life(@L70B20 Min) 50,000
KEO/21-7387-0004
Date 15-Feb-2023
Rev. 0

Description
Ceiling recess downlight
Location: Maid room
Manufacturer
iinno light Model IDL 15-B Slim Anti-dazzle
(Design based on)
Alternative
Manufacturer
Controlgear
Colour White Remote
(Remote/Intergral)
Luminaire
(Delivered Lumens)
Dimmed/Switched
Reflector Wide flood S
(D/S)
Diffuser Opal Dimming Type
Design
Mounting Ceiling recess 23 W
Load (watts)
Accessories
accessories
Specification 23 W
Lamp Key LED
Life(@L70B20 Min) 50,000
KEO/21-7387-0004
Date 15-Feb-2023
Rev. 0

Project No. 21-7387-0004 Stage: TD No. ML
Description
Wall mounted mirror light
Location: Toilets
Manufacturer
Astro Model PALERMO 600 LED
(Design based on)
Alternative
Manufacturer
Controlgear
Colour Polished Chrome Remote
(Remote/Intergral)
Luminaire
Housing Metal-Aluminium Lumen Output 364 lm
(Delivered Lumens)
Dimmed/Switched
Reflector S
(D/S)
Diffuser polycarbonate Dimming Type
Design
Mounting Wall mounted 8.1 W
Load (watts)
Accessories
accessories
Specification 8.1 W
Lamp Key LED
Life(@L70B20 Min) 50,000
MacAdam Binning
KEO/21-7387-0004
REEM HILLS DEVELOPMENT TWIN VILLAS / TOWNHOUSES Lighting Cutsheets - ML © KEO International Consultants
Date 15-Feb-2023
Rev. 0

Project No. 21-7387-0004 Stage: TD No. WL10
Description
Wall mounted up&down light
Location: Staircase
Manufacturer
Delta light Model GALAT 930/ 12220 9300
(Design based on)
Alternative
Manufacturer
Controlgear
Colour White Remote
(Remote/Intergral)
Luminaire
(Delivered Lumens)
Dimmed/Switched
Reflector Up/Down ward lighting distribution S
(D/S)
Diffuser Dimming Type
Design
Mounting Wall mounted 11 W
Load (watts)
Accessories
accessories
Specification 9 W
Lamp Key LED
Life(@L70B20 Min) 50,000
MacAdam Binning
KEO/21-7387-0004
REEM HILLS DEVELOPMENT TWIN VILLAS / TOWNHOUSES Lighting Cutsheets - WL10 © KEO International Consultants
Date 15-Feb-2023
Rev. 0

Description
Wall mounted light
Location: Storage , Roof
Manufacturer
Sylvania Model 49002
(Design based on)
Alternative
Manufacturer
Controlgear
Colour Black Remote
(Remote/Intergral)
Luminaire
Housing Polycarbonate Lumen Output 1450 lm
(Delivered Lumens)
Dimmed/Switched
Reflector Wide beam 120 degree S
(D/S)
Diffuser Opal Dimming Type
Design
Mounting Wall mounted 14.5 W
Load (watts)
Accessories
accessories
Specification 14.5 W
Lamp Key LED
Life(@L70B20 Min) 50,000
KEO/21-7387-0004
Date 15-Feb-2023
Rev. 0

Description
Wall mounted light
Location: Boundry wall, façade
Manufacturer AFRODITA Power Led/ 05-
LEDS C4 Model
(Design based on) E056-60-CL
Alternative
Manufacturer
Controlgear
Colour Black Remote
(Remote/Intergral)
Luminaire
(Delivered Lumens)
Dimmed/Switched
(D/S)
Diffuser Transparent Glass Dimming Type
Design
Mounting Wall mounted 13 W
Load (watts)
Accessories
accessories
Specification 13 W
Lamp Key LED
Life(@L70B20 Min) 50,000
KEO/21-7387-0004
Date 15-Feb-2023
Rev. 0

Project No. 21-7387-0004 Stage: TD No. LP
Description
Basic Light Point Provision with Pendant Ceiling Rose
Location: Bedroom, living room
Manufacturer
Model
(Design based on)
Alternative
Manufacturer
Controlgear
Colour
(Remote/Intergral)
Luminaire
Housing Lumen Output
(Delivered Lumens)
Dimmed/Switched
Reflector D
(D/S)
Diffuser Dimming Type 1-10V
Design
Mounting 100 W (Provisional)
Load (watts)
Accessories
accessories
Specification 100 W (Provisional) Basic Light point provision with pendent ceiling
Lamp Key LED rose and standard lamp holder. Decorative
Source Lumen Output fixture to be selected and installed by the
Life(@L70B20 Min) 50,000 occupant.
Colour Temp 3000 K CRI >85
KEO/21-7387-0004
REEM HILLS DEVELOPMENT TWIN VILLAS / TOWNHOUSES Lighting Cutsheets - LP © KEO International Consultants
Date 15-Feb-2023
Rev. 0

Project No. 21-7387-0004 Stage: TD No. L61
Description
Surface mounted water proof LED
Location: Pump Room
Manufacturer
ZUMTOBEL Model AMP S 4600-840 CH WB EVG
(Design based on)
Alternative
Manufacturer
Controlgear
Colour White NONE
(Remote/Intergral)
Luminaire
Housing Impact resistant Chemo Lumen Output 4430lm
(Delivered Lumens)
Dimmed/Switched
Reflector Switch
(D/S)
Diffuser Impact resistant Chemo Dimming Type None
Design
Mounting SURFACE 34W
Load (watts)
Accessories
accessories
Specification 34 W Length is 1100 mm
Lamp Key LED
Life(@L70B20 Min) 50.000h
Colour Temp 4000 K CRI >80
KEO/21-7387-0004
REEM HILLS DEVELOPMENT TWIN VILLAS / TOWNHOUSES Lighting Cutsheets - L61 © KEO International Consultants
Date 15-Feb-2023
Rev. 0

Project No. 21-7387-0004 Stage: TD No. S10
Description
Ceiling mounted downlight
Location: Under car park canopy
Manufacturer
Linealight Model Portik_R/ 81851W30
(Design based on)
Alternative
Manufacturer
Controlgear
Colour White Remote Electronic
(Remote/Intergral)
Luminaire
Housing Diecast Aluminium Lumen Output 650 lm
(Delivered Lumens)
Dimmed/Switched
Reflector Wide beam S
(D/S)
Diffuser Clear glass Dimming Type
Design
Mounting Ceiling surface mounted 8W
Load (watts)
Accessories
accessories
Specification 8 W LED
Lamp Key LED
Life(@L70B20 Min) 50,000 hrs
KEO/21-7387-0004
REEM HILLS DEVELOPMENT TWIN VILLAS / TOWNHOUSES Lighting Cutsheets - S10 © KEO International Consultants

Spec 2

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Spec 2

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Spec 2

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SECTION 23 0529

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

B. Related Sections include the following:

B. Terminology: As defined in MSS SP-90, "Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe Hangers

A. MSS-SP-69-Manufacturer’s Standardization Society Standard on Supports and

B. ASHRAE Handbook- HVAC Systems and Equipment

C. The ASHRAE Practical Guide to Seismic Restraint

D. SMACNA Seismic Restraint Manual

KEO/21-7387-0004 23 0529 / 1 Hangers and Supports for Piping and Equipment

A. DELEGATED DESIGN RESPONSIBILITY: Notwithstanding the drawings and other

C. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of

1.05 SEISMIC RESTRAINT REQUIREMENTS

A. Detailed clause-wise compliance statement.

E. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and operators.

KEO/21-7387-0004 23 0529 / 2 Hangers and Supports for Piping and Equipment

G. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Show

1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE

B. All manufactured hangers and supports shall be fully electrogalvanised post

E. Detailed seismic force calculations shall be provided to support the recommended

K. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural

L. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

KEO/21-7387-0004 23 0529 / 3 Hangers and Supports for Piping and Equipment

M. Except as otherwise indicated, provide factory-fabricated hangers and supports.

1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

B. Where axial pipe expansion or contraction is indicated on account of thermal changes

D. Hangers and supports shall be fully electrogalvanised post manufacture as standard,

I. Anchors shall be provided as required, in order to localize pipe expansion, resist

N. The selected manufacturer shall submit specific technical recommendations with

2.03 STEEL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components. Refer

B. Galvanized, Metallic Coatings: Pre-galvanized or hot dipped.

C. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner.

KEO/21-7387-0004 23 0529 / 5 Hangers and Supports for Piping and Equipment

F. Multiple hangers: Steel channels / angles, suspended or attached to framework. Pipe

2.04 HORIZONTAL HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

KEO/21-7387-0004 23 0529 / 6 Hangers and Supports for Piping and Equipment

2.05 FLOOR SUPPORTS

2.06 VERTICAL PIPING SUPPORTS

KEO/21-7387-0004 23 0529 / 7 Hangers and Supports for Piping and Equipment

F. They shall have a telescoping design incorporating a substantial fabric reinforced

2.07 RUBBER SUPPORT INSERTS (SHIELDS AND SADDLES)

B. Standard width of the inserts shall be as per the following schedule:

C. At locations where, insulated pipe is installed on rollers, provide insulation protection

2.08 SEISMIC BRACING

2.09 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Powder-Actuated Drive-Pin Fasteners: Powder-actuated-type, drive-pin attachments

B. Mechanical-Anchor Fasteners: Insert-type attachments with pull-out and shear

D. Grout: factory-mixed and -packaged, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry, hydraulic-

2.010 PIPE ANCHORS

KEO/21-7387-0004 23 0529 / 9 Hangers and Supports for Piping and Equipment

2.011 HANGERS ROD ATTACHMENTS

A. Turnbuckles: Provide for adjusting the heights, where required.

2.012 BUILDING ATTACHMENTS

2.013 HANGER RODS

A. Galvanized steel hanger rods: continuous threaded.

A. Metal flashing: 0.5-mm (26 gauge) thick galvanized steel.

KEO/21-7387-0004 23 0529 / 10 Hangers and Supports for Piping and Equipment

E. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: 0.0239-inch (0.6mm) minimum thickness; round tube closed

I. Under deck Clamp: Clamping ring with set screws.

K. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.